Model CH-C1

Machine Code:
D135/D136/D137/D138
Field Service Manual

23 May, 2014
Revision History
Version Revision Date Revision History

V1.00 2013.05.13 -

V2.00 2014.03.20 See page 1 "Revision History (V2.00)" .

V3.00 2014.05.23 See page 4 "Revision History (V3.00)" .

Revision History (V2.00)

Chapter Items

2. Installation Main machine (Pro)

Main machine (Office)

Finisher SR4090 (D703) /Booklet Finisher SR4100 (D704)

Finisher SR4110 (D707)

Punch Unit PU5000 (B831)

Copy Tray Type M2 (D744)

Decurl Unit DU5020 (D727)

Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020 (D751)

Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 (D615)

Cover Interposer Tray CI4010 (D711)

LCIT RT4030 (D710)

A3/11"x17" Tray Unit Type M2 (D749)

3. Preventive Maintenance PM Parts Settings

Toner Shield Glass Cleaning

4. Replacement and adjustment PCDU

BCU replacement procedure

NVRAM Replacement Procedure

1
 Chapter Items

5. Troubleshooting Adjustments Required for Improved Glossiness (Pro C5110S/

C5100S Only)

Adjustments Required for Improved Glossiness (MP C8002SP/MP

C6502SP)

Margin adjustment

Image Quality_Definitions of abnormal images

Color spots (189mm/40mm pitch)

White spots

White spots with toner cores

White, fish-shape stains

Vertical streaks caused by contact with the toner adhering to the

guide plate

Roller marks

Banding Caused by the PCDU (Pro C5110S/Pro C5100S)

Vertical band of halftone images

Uneven density in the area 85mm from the trailing edge

Density unevenness and dust when using AC transfer (Pro

C5110S/C5100S Only)

Uneven glossiness when feeding large size paper after small size
paper

Unevenness in indefinite shape on sides of paper

Random Pitch Banding Caused by Lubricant Falling from the Drum

Cleaning Unit

3mm-Pitch Banding on Paper with Paper Thickness 6 (Pro

C5110S/C5100S Only)

2
 Chapter Items

5. Troubleshooting Stains in the area 76mm from the trailing edge

Stains on the side edges of paper

Blocking on the Paper Output Tray

Streaks made by Paper Edges

Grainy image

Uneven image density on textured paper(Pro C5110S/C5100S

Only)

Small granular toner fixation (Pro C5110S/C5100S Only)

Too Much Weight/Abnormal Noise on Pulling Out/Pushing In the

Drawer Unit

Correspondence Table for Adjustment Settings for Operators and

SP Mode (Pro C5110S/C5100S Only)

SC516 after repeated J097

SC570-00 (Pro C5110S/C5100S Only)

SC515-01

SC515-02

Curls

Envelopes Are Wrinkled

Feed Direction Limitations Applied on Certain Types of Envelopes

Twining Jams in the Lower Part of the Fusing Unit Caused by

Insufficient Margins

Fan Noise is Large

3
 Chapter Items

5. Troubleshooting Proof tray detected to be full too soon

Envelopes are not fed

Toner rubbing off along the fold line

SR4090/SR4100: Corner stapling: stapling failure/stack failure/

large misalignment

SR4090/SR4100: 1st sheet of stapled stack misaligned

SR4090/SR4100: Paper jam caused by the shift tray

unexpectedly staying up or down

SR4090/SR4100: Problem with paper stacked on the shift tray

SR4100: How to improve center-folding accuracy

SR4090/SR4100: SP Settings list for adjusting Shift Tray Jogger

How to improve center-folding accuracy

Corner stapling: stapling failure/stack failure/large misalignment

SR4090/SR4100: 1st sheet of stapled stack misaligned

SP Settings for adjusting Shift Tray Jogger/Corner Stapling/

Booklet Stapling for SR4090/SR4100

Problem with paper stacked on the shift tray

Paper jam caused by the shift tray unexpectedly staying up or

down

Creases and Jam in stapler unit

Appendices Preventive Maintenance Tables

Revision History (V3.00)

Chapter Items

2. Installation Main Machine Installation

Cooling Fan Unit Type M2 (D770)

4
 Chapter Items

3. Preventive Maintenance PM Parts Settings

PM Counter Display: All PM Parts list: Main Menu

4. Replacement and adjustment Toner Supply Unit: Sub Hopper Unit replacement / adjustment
procedure

Scanner Unit: Important Notice for Scanner Heater Installation

PCDU: Important notice of the newly replaced drum

Image Transfer Belt Unit: Lubrication after replacement

ITB Cleaning Unit: Brush when applying the lubricant powder or

yellow toner

PCDU: Brush when applying the lubricant powder or yellow toner

Fusing Unit: Paper feed sensor

Tandem Tray: Left tandem tray / Right tandem tray

Paper feed unit for tray1

Duplex Unit: Roller HP sensor 2 / Sensor shift HP switch

Motors and Sensors: Drum motor (KCMY) / Drum encoder sensor

(KCMY)

5
 Chapter Items

5. Troubleshooting Self-Diagnostic Mode

Service Call 101-195: SC187 table

Jam Detection (Sensor locations)

Troubleshooting for 2~3mm pitch banding

Troubleshooting for White spots appear in Winter environment

Troubleshooting for scratch mark

Troubleshooting streaks caused by damaged fusing belt

Troubleshooting fuzzy line in originating in cyan drum

Troubleshooting “Shock-jitter” in B/W mode

Original size misdetection

Improper message when set the tandem tray

Skew in sub-scan direction

Service Call 202-286: SC202-286 tables

Service Call 300-398: SC381,382 tables

Service Call 400-498: SC460 table

Service Call 400-498: SC401 table

Service Call 501-595: SC540 table

Service Call 816-899: SC819 table

SR4090/SR4100: Staple misalignment troubleshooting

6
Important Safety Notices
Prevention of Physical Injury

1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals, make sure that the copier
power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the
main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components.
4. The copier drives some of its components when it completes the warm-up period. Be careful to
keep hands away from the mechanical and electrical components as the copier starts operation.
5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the copier is operating.
Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.

Health Safety Conditions

1. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it may
cause temporary eye discomfort. Immediately wash eyes with plenty of water. If unsuccessful, get
medical attention.
2. The copier, which use high voltage power source, can generate ozone gas. High ozone density is
harmful to human health. Therefore, the machine must be installed in a well-ventilated room.

Observance of Electrical Safety Standards

The copier and its peripherals must be serviced by a customer service representative who has completed
the training course on those models.

• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an explosion might
occur.

• The Controller board on this machine contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosion exists if a
battery of this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or an equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer. Discard batteries in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and local regulations.
• The optional fax and memory expansion units contain lithium batteries, which can explode if
replaced incorrectly. Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the

7
 manufacturer. Do not recharge or burn the batteries. Used batteries must be handled in
accordance with local regulations.

Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal

1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to an
open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, the maintenance unit which includes developer or the organic
photoconductor in accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than 100
batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to chemical
reactions and heat build-up.

Laser Safety

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical units
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and
laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.

• Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this
manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

• Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Optics Housing Unit
section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:

8
Warnings, Cautions, Notes

In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.

• A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning could result in
death or serious injury.

• A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution could result in
minor or moderate injury or damage to the machine or other property.

• Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals, loss of valuable
data and to prevent damage to the machine.

• This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.

9
 Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks
This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations
are as follows:

See or Refer to

Clip ring

Screw

Connector

Clamp

E-ring

SEF Short Edge Feed

LEF Long Edge Feed

[A] Short Edge Feed (SEF)

[B] Long Edge Feed (LEF)

Trademarks

Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

10
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.

11
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision History...................................................................................................................................................1
Revision History (V2.00)................................................................................................................................1
Revision History (V3.00)................................................................................................................................4
Important Safety Notices................................................................................................................................... 7
Prevention of Physical Injury.......................................................................................................................... 7
Health Safety Conditions............................................................................................................................... 7
Observance of Electrical Safety Standards................................................................................................. 7
Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal................................................................................................... 8
Laser Safety.....................................................................................................................................................8
Warnings, Cautions, Notes...........................................................................................................................9
Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks...................................................................................................... 10
Trademarks...................................................................................................................................................10
1. Product Information
Product Overview.............................................................................................................................................43
Component Layout.......................................................................................................................................43
Paper Path.................................................................................................................................................... 44
Drive Layout..................................................................................................................................................45
Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration............................................................................................48
Specifications....................................................................................................................................................54
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products..............................................................55
New features of D137/D138 and D135/D136....................................................................................55
Developed Image Quality..................................................................................................................55
Improvement of Banding Issues......................................................................................................... 55
Improvement of the Scratch Mark Issue............................................................................................ 56
Improvement of the Toner Dusting Issue............................................................................................56
Developed Printing Quality of Textured Paper................................................................................. 57
Developed User Appliance................................................................................................................57
Controller features...............................................................................................................................58
2. Installation
Installation Requirements................................................................................................................................. 59
Environment.................................................................................................................................................. 59
Minimum Space Requirements................................................................................................................... 60
Installation space.................................................................................................................................60

12
 Dimensions................................................................................................................................................... 61
D137/D138....................................................................................................................................... 61
D135/D136....................................................................................................................................... 62
Power Requirements.................................................................................................................................... 62
Input voltage level (D137/D138).................................................................................................... 62
Input voltage level (D135/D136).................................................................................................... 63
Main Machine Installation...............................................................................................................................64
Special Tools and Lubricants...................................................................................................................... 64
D137/D138....................................................................................................................................... 64
D135/D136....................................................................................................................................... 65
Installation Flow Chart.................................................................................................................................66
Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................67
D137/D138....................................................................................................................................... 67
D135/D136....................................................................................................................................... 69
Installation Procedure (D137/D138)....................................................................................................... 72
Removing the Retainers of the Charge Roller Units (C, M, K)......................................................... 74
Attaching the ITB Separation Lever....................................................................................................82
Operation Panel Attachment..............................................................................................................87
Operator Call Light Attachment......................................................................................................... 93
Attaching the Service Pocket.............................................................................................................. 94
Storing the Supply Port Caps for the Developer...............................................................................96
Storing the Factory SP Sheet.............................................................................................................. 97
Attaching the decals............................................................................................................................97
Machine Level Adjustment..................................................................................................................99
Installing the Securing Bracket to Prevent the Power Cord from Falling Off................................101
How to Set the Toner Cartridge.......................................................................................................102
Executing DEMS............................................................................................................................... 104
ACC (Automatic Color Calibration) Adjustment............................................................................ 104
Checking the copy image with color chart.....................................................................................105
Paper Tray Settings...........................................................................................................................105
Paper Library Data Installation........................................................................................................ 105
Installation Procedure (D135/D136).....................................................................................................107
Removing the Retainers of the Charge Roller Units (C, M, K)...................................................... 110

13
 Attaching the ITB Separation Lever................................................................................................. 118
Attaching the Service Pocket............................................................................................................123
Storing the Supply Port Cap of the Developer............................................................................... 125
Storing the Factory SP Sheet............................................................................................................125
Attaching the decals......................................................................................................................... 125
Machine Level Adjustment............................................................................................................... 127
Installing the Securing Bracket to Prevent the Power Cord from Falling Off................................129
How to Set the Toner Cartridge.......................................................................................................130
ACC (Automatic Color Calibration) Adjustment............................................................................ 131
Checking the copy image with the color chart...............................................................................132
Paper Tray Settings...........................................................................................................................132
Security Function Installation.................................................................................................................... 132
Moving the Machine.................................................................................................................................141
D137/D138.................................................................................................................................... 141
D135/D136.................................................................................................................................... 143
Finisher SR4090 (D703) /Booklet Finisher SR4100 (D704)................................................................... 145
Accessory Check....................................................................................................................................... 145
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................146
Auxiliary Trays.................................................................................................................................. 153
Output Jogger Unit Type M2 (D705)..........................................................................................................156
Component Check.....................................................................................................................................156
Installation.................................................................................................................................................. 156
Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)......................................................................................................................... 161
Accessory Check....................................................................................................................................... 161
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................162
Finisher SR4110 (D707).............................................................................................................................. 185
Accessories................................................................................................................................................ 185
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................186
Docking the Finisher D707.............................................................................................................. 188
Connecting the Finisher D707.........................................................................................................190
How to Use the Spacer to Correct Paper Skew.............................................................................191
SP Setting................................................................................................................................................... 194
Punch Unit PU5000 (B831)......................................................................................................................... 195

14
 Component Check.....................................................................................................................................195
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................196
Cooling Fan Unit Type M2 (D770)............................................................................................................. 202
Component Check.....................................................................................................................................202
Common Installation Procedure for Finisher SR4090 / Booklet Finisher SR4100 and Finisher SR4110
.................................................................................................................................................................... 203
Installation Procedure for Finisher SR4090/ Booklet FinisherSR4100................................................ 212
Installation Procedure for Finisher SR4110.............................................................................................218
Information for Cooling Fan Unit Type M2.............................................................................................231
Copy Tray Type M2 (D744)........................................................................................................................ 233
Component Check.....................................................................................................................................233
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................234
Decurl Unit DU5020 (D727) (D137/D138 Only)................................................................................... 249
Accessories................................................................................................................................................ 249
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................250
Connect the Downstream Peripheral Device..................................................................................258
Paper curl adjustment when Decurl Unit DU5020 connects with Finisher SR4090 or Booklet
Finisher SR4100............................................................................................................................... 261
Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020 (D751) (D137/D138 Only)........................................................................ 262
Accessory Check....................................................................................................................................... 262
Installation.................................................................................................................................................. 263
#01: When connecting the Buffer Pass Unit with the mainframe................................................. 266
#02: When connecting the Buffer Pass Unit with the Decurl Unit DU5020 (D727).................. 271
Common Procedure..........................................................................................................................276
Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 (D615).............................................................................................................282
Accessories................................................................................................................................................ 282
Installation.................................................................................................................................................. 283
Tapes................................................................................................................................................. 283
Paper Guide, Sponge Strip............................................................................................................. 284
Ground Plate.....................................................................................................................................286
Docking............................................................................................................................................. 286
Power Cord....................................................................................................................................... 288
Height Adjustment.............................................................................................................................289
Removing Parts for the Cover Interposer Tray CI4020 (D712)................................................... 290

15
 Proof Tray Auxiliary Plate.................................................................................................................291
Detecting Paper Skew...................................................................................................................... 291
Correcting Skew............................................................................................................................... 292
Checking Side-to-Side Registration.................................................................................................294
Correcting Side-to-Side Registration...............................................................................................294
Mail Box CS4010 (D708) (D135/D136 Only)....................................................................................... 296
Accessories................................................................................................................................................ 296
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................296
Cover Interposer Tray CI4010 (D711).......................................................................................................302
Accessories................................................................................................................................................ 302
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................303
Cover Interposer Tray CI4020 (D712).......................................................................................................320
Accessories................................................................................................................................................ 320
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................321
Setting up the Unit and Docking to the Copier...............................................................................321
Docking the Next Peripheral Device...............................................................................................324
Mounting the Tray Unit.....................................................................................................................324
LCIT RT4020 (D709).................................................................................................................................... 328
Accessories................................................................................................................................................ 328
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................328
Adjustment for the Rubber Foot Positions on the Rail..............................................................................336
LCIT (D709) Tray Heater..........................................................................................................................338
Accessories........................................................................................................................................338
Installation......................................................................................................................................... 339
Image Adjustments: Side-to-side registration.......................................................................................... 352
8 1/2" x 14" Paper Size Tray Type M2 (D745)....................................................................................... 354
Component List.......................................................................................................................................... 354
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................355
LCIT RT4030 (D710).................................................................................................................................... 363
Accessory Check....................................................................................................................................... 363
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................363
How to disconnect the LCIT from the main machine...................................................................... 374
LCIT (D710) Tray Heater..........................................................................................................................376

16
 Accessories........................................................................................................................................376
Installation......................................................................................................................................... 377
Image Adjustments: Side-to-side registration.......................................................................................... 383
A3/11"x17" Tray Unit Type M2 (D749)................................................................................................... 384
Component List.......................................................................................................................................... 384
Installation.................................................................................................................................................. 385
Copy Connector Type 3260 (B328)...........................................................................................................392
Accessory Check....................................................................................................................................... 392
Preparation................................................................................................................................................ 392
Installation.................................................................................................................................................. 393
Tab Sheet Holder Type M2 (D750)............................................................................................................ 399
Accessories................................................................................................................................................ 399
Installation.................................................................................................................................................. 399
IEEE802.11a/g/n Unit Type M2 (D164)..................................................................................................403
Component List.......................................................................................................................................... 403
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................403
User Tool Settings for IEEE 802.11a/g/n..............................................................................................406
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11 Wireless LAN................................................................................. 408
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D (D566)...................................................................................................... 409
Accessories................................................................................................................................................ 409
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................409
IEEE1284 Interface Board Type A (B679)................................................................................................. 411
Component List.......................................................................................................................................... 411
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................411
File Format Converter Type E (D377)..........................................................................................................413
Component List.......................................................................................................................................... 413
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................413
SD card for NetWare printing Type M2 (D719)....................................................................................... 415
Component List.......................................................................................................................................... 415
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................415
OCR Unit Type M2 (D166)..........................................................................................................................417
Accessories................................................................................................................................................ 417
Details About Searchable PDF................................................................................................................. 417

17
 Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................418
Restoration Procedure...............................................................................................................................420
Postscript3 Unit Type M2 (D719)................................................................................................................ 421
Accessories................................................................................................................................................ 421
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................421
IPDS Unit Type M2 (D719).......................................................................................................................... 423
Accessories................................................................................................................................................ 423
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................423
Browser Unit Type M2 (D719).................................................................................................................... 425
Accessories................................................................................................................................................ 425
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................425
Do the following steps if the customer is using the Ricoh JavaScript connected to a Web
application developed by Operius/RiDP...................................................................................... 427
Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870).........................................................................................428
Component Check.....................................................................................................................................428
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................428
Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M2 (D739) (D135/D136 Only).................................................432
Component Check.....................................................................................................................................432
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................433
DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type H (B869) (D135/D136 Only)........................................................... 441
Overview....................................................................................................................................................441
Component List.......................................................................................................................................... 441
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................441
Copy Data Security Unit Type G (D640).................................................................................................... 443
Component Check List...............................................................................................................................443
Installation.................................................................................................................................................. 443
User Tool Setting...............................................................................................................................444
Check All Connections..................................................................................................................... 445
SD Card Appli Move.................................................................................................................................... 446
Overview....................................................................................................................................................446
Move Exec................................................................................................................................................. 446
Undo Exec..................................................................................................................................................447
Caution.......................................................................................................................................................448

18
3. Preventive Maintenance
Preventive Maintenance Tables....................................................................................................................451
Image Quality Standards..............................................................................................................................452
Resolution...................................................................................................................................................452
Color shift................................................................................................................................................... 452
Magnification ratio error margin............................................................................................................. 453
Magnification ratio error margin deviation.............................................................................................453
Pitch error margin...................................................................................................................................... 453
Perpendicularity.........................................................................................................................................454
Linearity...................................................................................................................................................... 454
Parallelism.................................................................................................................................................. 454
Missing Image Area (D135/D136)....................................................................................................... 455
Missing Image Area (D137/D138)....................................................................................................... 456
Margin position......................................................................................................................................... 459
1st Side/2nd Side Positional Precision (Shift Length of 2nd Side Compared to 1st Side)................. 459
Paper Transfer Quality Standards................................................................................................................ 460
Registration................................................................................................................................................ 460
Exposure glass.................................................................................................................................. 460
ADF.................................................................................................................................................... 460
Skew........................................................................................................................................................... 461
Exposure glass.................................................................................................................................. 461
ADF ................................................................................................................................................... 461
PM Parts Settings............................................................................................................................................463
PM Parts Replacement Procedure............................................................................................................463
Preparation before Operation Check......................................................................................................465
Operation Check.......................................................................................................................................465
PM Counter Display...................................................................................................................................... 466
Note concerning Running Distance Data................................................................................................466
Opening the PM Counter......................................................................................................................... 467
PM Parts Screen Details............................................................................................................................ 468
All PM Parts list: Main Menu............................................................................................................468
Number Button Submenu.................................................................................................................469
Parts List for PM Yield Indicator....................................................................................................... 469

19
 Estimated Usage Rate/Estimated Remaining Days....................................................................... 470
Commissioning Status Report Print.................................................................................................. 471
Initial Adjustment SP Lists............................................................................................................................... 472
D137/D138............................................................................................................................................. 472
D135/D136............................................................................................................................................. 476
Cleaning Points.............................................................................................................................................. 479
Scanner...................................................................................................................................................... 479
Exposure Glass, ADF Exposure Glass, Reflective Plate, 1st Mirror, 2nd Mirror, 3rd Mirror,
Original Size Sensors.......................................................................................................................479
Laser Unit....................................................................................................................................................481
Toner shield glass............................................................................................................................. 481
Developer.................................................................................................................................................. 482
Development Unit............................................................................................................................. 482
Toner Supply..............................................................................................................................................483
Toner Supply Unit............................................................................................................................. 483
ITB Unit....................................................................................................................................................... 484
Rollers ............................................................................................................................................... 485
ID Sensor........................................................................................................................................... 485
Fusing......................................................................................................................................................... 486
Stripper Plate (Fusing / Pressure) ...................................................................................................486
Fusing Entrance Guide..................................................................................................................... 487
Thermistor (Fusing Belt).....................................................................................................................487
Thermistor (Hot Roller Shaft) (ProC5100S/5110S Only)........................................................... 488
Thermopile.........................................................................................................................................488
Other.......................................................................................................................................................... 489
Development Intake Dust Filter........................................................................................................ 489
Pressure Roller Dust Filter (D137/D138 only).............................................................................. 489
Paper Feed.................................................................................................................................................490
1st to 4th Transport Roller (Drive/Idle)...........................................................................................490
Registration Roller (Drive/Idle)....................................................................................................... 491
Relay Roller (Drive/Idle)..................................................................................................................492
Bypass Relay Roller (Drive/Idle).....................................................................................................493
Registration Sensor........................................................................................................................... 494

20
 Relay Sensor..................................................................................................................................... 494
Paper Dust Collection Unit............................................................................................................... 495
Duplex........................................................................................................................................................ 497
Heat Pipe Roller................................................................................................................................ 497
Heat Pipe Drive Roller...................................................................................................................... 497
Paper Exit Roller (Drive/Idle).......................................................................................................... 498
Inverter Feed Out Roller (Drive/Idle)..............................................................................................500
Inverter Exit Roller (Drive/Idle)........................................................................................................501
Paper Exit Relay Roller (Drive/Idle)................................................................................................502
Inverter Feed In Roller (Drive/Idle).................................................................................................504
Exit Transport Guide Plate (Upper/Middle/Left).......................................................................... 505
Duplex Unit Roller 1st to 4th (Drive/Idle).......................................................................................507
Duplex Exit Roller (Drive/Idle)........................................................................................................ 509
Transport Guide Plate (Upper/Lower)........................................................................................... 510
Purge Guide Plate (Lower)...............................................................................................................512
Lubrication Points........................................................................................................................................... 514
Fusing......................................................................................................................................................... 514
Bearing (Hot Roller/Pressure Roller) Lubrication...........................................................................514
Fusing Gear Lubrication................................................................................................................... 514
4. Replacement and Adjustment
Notes on the Main Power Switch.................................................................................................................517
Push Switch................................................................................................................................................ 517
Characteristics of the Push Switch (DC Switch).............................................................................. 517
Shutdown Method............................................................................................................................ 518
Forced Shutdown .............................................................................................................................519
Special Tools and Lubricants........................................................................................................................ 520
D137/D138............................................................................................................................................. 520
D135/D136............................................................................................................................................. 520
Outer Covers..................................................................................................................................................522
Right Cover................................................................................................................................................ 522
Right Middle Front Cover (D137/D138)...................................................................................... 522
Right Middle Front Cover (D135/D136)...................................................................................... 524
Right Middle Upper Cover (D137/D138)....................................................................................525

21
 Right Middle Upper Cover (D135/D136)....................................................................................527
Right Middle Rear Cover (D137/D138).......................................................................................528
Right Middle Rear Cover (D135/D136).......................................................................................529
Right Lower Cover............................................................................................................................ 530
Left Cover................................................................................................................................................... 532
Left Middle Cover............................................................................................................................. 532
Left Lower Cover............................................................................................................................... 535
Rear Cover.................................................................................................................................................537
Rear middle cover.............................................................................................................................537
Rear Lower Cover.............................................................................................................................538
Upper Cover.............................................................................................................................................. 539
Upper Front Cover (D137/D138)................................................................................................. 539
Upper Front Cover (D135/D136)................................................................................................. 540
Upper Rear Cover (Small)............................................................................................................... 542
Upper Left Cover/ Upper Right Cover........................................................................................... 542
Operation Panel (D137/D138)..................................................................................................................545
Operation Panel........................................................................................................................................ 545
LDCD Board...............................................................................................................................................546
OPU Board / OPR Board.........................................................................................................................547
LCD Board (Touch Panel Unit)..................................................................................................................549
Operation Panel (D135/D136)..................................................................................................................551
Operation Panel........................................................................................................................................ 551
Touch Panel Calibration............................................................................................................................552
LDCD Board...............................................................................................................................................555
OPU Board / OPR Board.........................................................................................................................556
LCD Board (Touch Panel Unit)..................................................................................................................557
ADF................................................................................................................................................................. 558
ADF Removal............................................................................................................................................. 558
Adjustment after Replacing the ADF........................................................................................................ 560
CIS RGB Adjustment ........................................................................................................................560
Checking the vertical registration.................................................................................................... 560
Checking the horizontal registration............................................................................................... 561
Checking the skew............................................................................................................................561

22
 Checking the magnification............................................................................................................. 562
Platen Adjustment..............................................................................................................................562
ADF Cover................................................................................................................................................. 563
ADF Front Cover............................................................................................................................... 563
ADF Rear Cover................................................................................................................................565
Feed Cover........................................................................................................................................566
Original Feed Unit.....................................................................................................................................566
Pick-up Roller / Transport Belt................................................................................................................. 567
ADF Separation Roller.............................................................................................................................. 570
Original Registration Sensor.....................................................................................................................571
Original Exit Sensor.................................................................................................................................. 572
ADF Control Board....................................................................................................................................574
Separation Sensor / Skew Correction Sensor....................................................................................... 575
Original Width Sensor / Interval Sensor................................................................................................ 576
B5 Width Sensor / A4 Width Sensor / LG Width Sensor.................................................................... 577
APS Feeler..................................................................................................................................................578
ADF Lift-Up Interlock SW / Lift-Up Sensor..............................................................................................579
Original Set Sensor................................................................................................................................... 580
A4 LEF/LT LEF Sensor............................................................................................................................... 581
Bottom Plate HP Sensor.............................................................................................................................581
Bottom Plate Position Sensor.....................................................................................................................582
ADF Feed Cover Interlock SW / Pick-up Roller HP Sensor...................................................................583
ADF Entrance Motor................................................................................................................................. 584
ADF Scanning Motor................................................................................................................................ 585
ADF Exit Motor.......................................................................................................................................... 585
ADF Bottom Plate Lift Motor......................................................................................................................586
ADF Pick-up Roller Lift Motor / ADF Transport Motor........................................................................... 587
ADF Feed Motor........................................................................................................................................589
CIS Unit...................................................................................................................................................... 590
Drawer Unit.................................................................................................................................................... 592
Layout (Motors)......................................................................................................................................... 592
Drawer Unit (Front)...........................................................................................................................592
Drawer Unit (Rear)........................................................................................................................... 593

23
 Layout (Boards)......................................................................................................................................... 593
Drawer Unit Cover.................................................................................................................................... 594
If the Drawer is Locked.....................................................................................................................595
DUB (Drawer Unit Board).........................................................................................................................600
Paper Separation AC Power Pack........................................................................................................... 600
Fusing Web Control Board-Drawer (D137/D138 only)......................................................................601
Curled Cord............................................................................................................................................... 602
Drawer Unit Connector.............................................................................................................................604
Drawer Unit Set Sensor.............................................................................................................................606
Drawer Unit Lock Sensor.......................................................................................................................... 606
Drawer Unit Handle Sensor..................................................................................................................... 608
Drawer Unit Lock Motor........................................................................................................................... 609
Registration Motor.....................................................................................................................................611
Exit Motor...................................................................................................................................................612
Duplex Inverter Entrance Motor...............................................................................................................612
Exit Inverter Motor.....................................................................................................................................613
Duplex Transport Motor........................................................................................................................... 614
Duplex Exit Motor..................................................................................................................................... 615
Cleaning Web Motor (D137/D138 only)............................................................................................ 616
Cleaning Web Contact Motor (D137/D138 only).............................................................................. 617
Fusing Heat Pipe Cooling Fan..................................................................................................................618
IH Coil Cooling Fan.................................................................................................................................. 620
Fusing Pressure Roller Intake Fan (D137/D138 only).......................................................................... 621
Toner Supply Unit.......................................................................................................................................... 624
Toner Supply Unit Front Cover................................................................................................................. 624
Toner Supply Unit......................................................................................................................................624
ID Chip Connector Board (KCMY)..........................................................................................................627
Toner Supply Unit Inner Cover.................................................................................................................628
Sub Hopper Unit (KCMY).........................................................................................................................629
Adjustment after Sub Hopper Unit (KCMY) replacement............................................................. 631
Toner End Sensor (KCMY)....................................................................................................................... 632
Sub Hopper Motor (KCMY).....................................................................................................................632
Toner Supply Board (TSB)........................................................................................................................ 632

24
 Toner Cartridge Guide..............................................................................................................................633
Toner Supply Motor (KCMY)................................................................................................................... 636
Scanner Unit...................................................................................................................................................638
Exposure Glass..........................................................................................................................................638
ADF Exposure Glass / Gap Sheet (D135/D136)................................................................................639
How to Remove the ADF Exposure Glass/Gap Sheet..................................................................639
How to Attach the ADF Exposure Glass/Gap Sheet.................................................................... 640
Modification Procedure for Original Transport...................................................................................... 642
Replacing Parts of the ADF.............................................................................................................. 642
Removing the Scanner Parts............................................................................................................ 644
Lens Block / Original Size Sensor...........................................................................................................644
Adjustment after Replacing the Lens Block..................................................................................... 646
Exposure Lamp (LED)................................................................................................................................ 646
Scanner Drive Motor.................................................................................................................................648
Scanner HP Sensor....................................................................................................................................650
DF Position Sensor..................................................................................................................................... 651
SIO Board..................................................................................................................................................653
Scanner Unit.............................................................................................................................................. 655
Scanner Wire.............................................................................................................................................660
Preparation for Replacing a Scanner Wire.................................................................................... 660
Replacing the Scanner Wire............................................................................................................661
Preparation for Reassembling the Scanner Wire........................................................................... 663
Reassembling the Scanner Wire..................................................................................................... 664
Installing the Scanner Heater................................................................................................................... 665
Accessories........................................................................................................................................665
Installation......................................................................................................................................... 666
Magnification and Registration Adjustment............................................................................................ 669
Sub Scan Magnification Adjustment...............................................................................................669
Sub Scan Registration Adjustment...................................................................................................669
Main Scan Registration Adjustment................................................................................................ 670
Laser Unit........................................................................................................................................................ 671
Before You Begin.......................................................................................................................................671
Caution Decals..................................................................................................................................671

25
 Laser Unit....................................................................................................................................................672
Before Replacement......................................................................................................................... 672
Replacement......................................................................................................................................672
How to Distinguish between the CK Laser Unit and YM Laser Unit..............................................674
Notes on Installation of a New Laser Unit......................................................................................676
Adjustment after Laser Unit Replacement........................................................................................676
Laser Unit Cooling Fan (Left / Right)....................................................................................................... 677
PCDU.............................................................................................................................................................. 680
Faceplate................................................................................................................................................... 680
PCDU..........................................................................................................................................................681
Charge Roller Unit.....................................................................................................................................683
Drum Cleaning Unit Removal................................................................................................................... 684
Notes on Replacing the Drum Cleaning Unit and Drum Cleaning Blade....................................688
OPC Drum..................................................................................................................................................689
Attaching the New OPC Drum........................................................................................................ 689
Drum Cleaning Unit Internal Components...............................................................................................692
Separation of the Lubrication Unit and Cleaning Unit...................................................................692
Lubrication Unit................................................................................................................................. 694
Cleaning Unit................................................................................................................................... 698
Assembling the Cleaning Unit and Lubrication Unit with New Seals........................................... 699
Development Unit.......................................................................................................................................... 702
Development Unit...................................................................................................................................... 702
Development Filter.....................................................................................................................................704
Removing Old Developer......................................................................................................................... 705
General............................................................................................................................................. 705
PART 1: Preparations for Developer Removal................................................................................705
PART 2: Developer Removal Procedure......................................................................................... 707
Adding New Developer........................................................................................................................... 710
Adding New Developer (Summary)............................................................................................... 711
Adding New Developer and Adjustment....................................................................................... 711
Image Transfer Belt Unit................................................................................................................................ 718
ITB Unit Removal....................................................................................................................................... 718
ITB Replacement........................................................................................................................................ 719

26
 Lubrication after replacement.......................................................................................................... 724
ID/MUSIC Sensors...................................................................................................................................725
ITB HP Sensor............................................................................................................................................ 726
PTR Separation Sensor..............................................................................................................................726
ITB Lift (YMC) Sensor................................................................................................................................ 727
Image Transfer Roller (K).......................................................................................................................... 728
Image Transfer Roller (YMC)....................................................................................................................729
ITB Bias Roller............................................................................................................................................ 731
Transfer Power Pack/Separation Power Pack........................................................................................736
TDRB (Transfer Drive Relay Board)..........................................................................................................737
Anti-condensation Heater.........................................................................................................................738
PTR Separation Motor...............................................................................................................................739
AC Transfer Power Pack (D137/D138 Only)....................................................................................... 740
ITB Motor................................................................................................................................................... 741
ITB Drive Shaft Gear / Encoder Sensor.................................................................................................. 741
ITB Driven Shaft Encoder Sensor..............................................................................................................744
ITB Cleaning Unit........................................................................................................................................... 746
ITB Cleaning Unit.......................................................................................................................................746
ITB Cleaning Blade................................................................................................................................... 747
ITB Lubricant Brush.................................................................................................................................... 748
ITB Lubricant Bar........................................................................................................................................750
ITB Lubricant Blade....................................................................................................................................751
ITB Cleaning Unit Set Sensor....................................................................................................................751
ITB Paper Dust Cleaning Brush Roller...................................................................................................... 752
Lubrication after Replacement..................................................................................................................755
Paper Transfer Roller Unit............................................................................................................................. 757
Paper Transfer Roller Unit......................................................................................................................... 757
Paper Discharge Plate...............................................................................................................................760
Paper Transfer Roller.................................................................................................................................760
Fusing Unit...................................................................................................................................................... 762
Screw List....................................................................................................................................................762
Removing the Fusing Unit..........................................................................................................................764
Fusing Heat Pipe........................................................................................................................................767

27
 Fusing Unit Cover...................................................................................................................................... 768
Fusing Front / Rear Cover............................................................................................................... 768
Entrance Drawer Cover................................................................................................................... 768
Exit Drawer Cover............................................................................................................................ 769
Fusing Upper Cover......................................................................................................................... 770
Separation Unit................................................................................................................................. 770
Fusing Unit Plate........................................................................................................................................ 772
IH Coil Unit................................................................................................................................................ 775
Fusing Cleaning Web Unit (D137/D138 Only)................................................................................... 777
Fusing Cleaning Web (D137/D138 Only)........................................................................................... 779
Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller (D137/D138 Only)................................................................................ 783
Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller Contact Sensor (Pro C5100S/Pro C5110S)........................................785
Separating the Fusing Unit........................................................................................................................785
Heating Roller, Fusing Roller, Fusing Belt................................................................................................787
Pressure Roller Stripper Plate....................................................................................................................794
Fusing Lamp............................................................................................................................................... 796
Pressure Roller............................................................................................................................................798
Thermistor (Fusing Belt)............................................................................................................................. 801
Thermistor (Hot Roller Shaft).....................................................................................................................802
Heating Roller Rotation Sensor................................................................................................................ 803
Pressure Roller Sensor (Rear)................................................................................................................... 804
Pressure Roller Sensor (Front)...................................................................................................................805
Hot Roller NC Sensor................................................................................................................................806
Thermopile (Pressure Roller)..................................................................................................................... 807
Thermostat (Pressure Roller)......................................................................................................................809
Fusing Paper Feed Sensor........................................................................................................................ 810
Adjustment after replacing the fusing paper feed sensor.............................................................. 811
Cleaning Web Set Sensor........................................................................................................................ 812
Cleaning Web End Sensor....................................................................................................................... 812
Cleaning Web Contact Sensor................................................................................................................ 813
Paper Transport Belt Unit...............................................................................................................................814
Paper Transport Belt Unit.......................................................................................................................... 814
Paper Transport Belt.................................................................................................................................. 815

28
 PTB Fans..................................................................................................................................................... 815
PTB Sensor................................................................................................................................................. 816
PTB Unit Set Sensor................................................................................................................................... 817
Tandem Tray.................................................................................................................................................. 818
Left Tandem Tray / Right Tandem Tray................................................................................................... 818
Feed Roller, Pick-up Roller and Separation Roller................................................................................. 820
Paper Feed Unit for Tray 1....................................................................................................................... 821
Rear Fence Home Position Sensor / Left Tray Paper Sensor.................................................................825
Rear Fence Return Sensor.........................................................................................................................826
Paper Height Sensors 1, 2, 3 / Tray Down Sensor / Right Tray Set Sensor.......................................828
Rear End Fence Closed Sensor................................................................................................................ 831
End Fence Rear Solenoid......................................................................................................................... 834
Left Tray Lock Solenoid............................................................................................................................. 836
Rear Fence Drive Motor............................................................................................................................837
1st Tray Lift Motor......................................................................................................................................837
Paper Feed Section (Tray 2-3 / Vertical Transport)...................................................................................839
Paper Tray..................................................................................................................................................839
Feed Roller, Pick-up Roller and Separation Roller................................................................................. 839
Paper Feed Unit......................................................................................................................................... 840
Pick-up Solenoid........................................................................................................................................842
Transport Sensor........................................................................................................................................842
Paper Feed Sensor.................................................................................................................................... 843
Paper Tray Upper Limit Sensor / Paper End Sensor.............................................................................. 843
Vertical Transport LED............................................................................................................................... 844
Paper Size Sensors....................................................................................................................................846
Paper Tray Set Sensors............................................................................................................................. 846
Paper Tray Lift Motor.................................................................................................................................847
Tray Heater................................................................................................................................................ 848
Upper Tray Heater........................................................................................................................... 848
Lower Tray Heater............................................................................................................................ 850
Tray Heater Setting................................................................................................................................... 851
By-pass Tray Unit (D137/D138)................................................................................................................ 853
By-pass Tray Unit Removal.......................................................................................................................853

29
 By-pass Tray Unit Separation.......................................................................................................... 855
By-pass Pick-up Roller / By-pass Feed Roller / By-pass Separation Roller........................................ 856
By-pass Tray Paper End Sensor............................................................................................................... 857
By-pass Paper Width Sensor....................................................................................................................858
By-pass Paper Length Sensor................................................................................................................... 859
By-pass Tray Lower Limit Sensor.............................................................................................................. 860
By-pass Tray Lift Motor............................................................................................................................. 860
By-pass Tray Upper Limit Sensor / By-pass Paper Feed Sensor.......................................................... 863
By-pass Pick-up Solenoid......................................................................................................................... 865
By-pass Tray Set Sensor........................................................................................................................... 866
By-pass Tray LED Connector (Red)..........................................................................................................866
By-pass Tray Unit (D135/D136)................................................................................................................ 868
By-pass Tray Unit Removal.......................................................................................................................868
By-pass Tray Unit Separation.......................................................................................................... 870
By-pass Pick-up Roller / By-pass Feed Roller / By-pass Separation Roller........................................ 872
By-pass Tray Paper End Sensor............................................................................................................... 873
By-pass Paper Width Sensor....................................................................................................................874
By-pass Paper Length Sensor................................................................................................................... 875
By-pass Paper Feed Sensor......................................................................................................................876
By-pass Pick-up Solenoid......................................................................................................................... 879
By-pass Tray LED Connector (Red)..........................................................................................................880
Paper Relay and Registration Section..........................................................................................................882
Registration Unit.........................................................................................................................................882
Relay Unit...................................................................................................................................................884
Registration Sensor....................................................................................................................................886
Paper Type Sensor.................................................................................................................................... 888
Relay Sensor.............................................................................................................................................. 889
By-pass Tray Paper Type Sensor............................................................................................................. 889
Paper Exit and Duplex Unit........................................................................................................................... 892
Paper Exit Unit........................................................................................................................................... 892
Paper Exit Sensor.......................................................................................................................................894
Paper Exit Relay Sensor............................................................................................................................ 895
Inverter Exit Sensor....................................................................................................................................896

30
 Inverter Feed-in Sensor............................................................................................................................. 897
Inverter Feed-out Sensor...........................................................................................................................899
Inverter Junction Gate Home Position Sensor......................................................................................... 900
Inverter Junction Gate Motor....................................................................................................................900
Duplex Inverter Solenoid.......................................................................................................................... 901
Paper Exit Left Guide Plate Sensor...........................................................................................................902
Paper Exit Upper Guide Plate Sensor......................................................................................................903
Duplex Unit.....................................................................................................................................................904
Purge Relay Sensor / Duplex Invert Sensor............................................................................................904
Duplex Invert Solenoid..............................................................................................................................905
Duplex Unit Entrance Sensor....................................................................................................................906
Duplex Unit Sensor 1................................................................................................................................ 907
Duplex Unit Sensor 2................................................................................................................................ 907
Duplex Unit Sensor 3................................................................................................................................ 908
Duplex Unit Sensor 4................................................................................................................................ 908
Duplex Exit Sensor.................................................................................................................................... 909
Horizontal Feed Guide Plate Open Sensor............................................................................................ 909
Roller HP Sensor 1.................................................................................................................................... 910
Roller HP Sensor 2.................................................................................................................................... 911
Sensor Shift Motor.....................................................................................................................................911
Edge Detection Unit...................................................................................................................................913
Edge Detection Sensor..............................................................................................................................914
Sensor Shift HP Switch.............................................................................................................................. 914
Roller Shift Motor 1 / Roller Shift Motor 2............................................................................................. 915
Paper Purge Unit............................................................................................................................................ 917
Paper Purge Unit........................................................................................................................................917
PCB: LSB.....................................................................................................................................................919
Push Switch................................................................................................................................................ 920
Duplex Inverter Motor...............................................................................................................................921
Purged Paper Sensor.................................................................................................................................922
LED: Connecter: Red................................................................................................................................. 923
Upper guide plate LED / Purge door LED......................................................................................924
Lower guide plate LED..................................................................................................................... 924

31
 Main Boards / HDD Unit..............................................................................................................................926
Layout......................................................................................................................................................... 926
Controller Board........................................................................................................................................927
When installing the New Controller Board.................................................................................... 929
HDD Unit.................................................................................................................................................... 930
After Installing the New HDD Unit.................................................................................................. 931
Disposal of HDD Unit....................................................................................................................... 931
Reinstallation..................................................................................................................................... 931
BCU............................................................................................................................................................ 932
NVRAM Replacement Procedure............................................................................................................ 933
NVRAM on the Controller Board.................................................................................................... 933
NVRAM (EEPROM) on the BCU..................................................................................................... 937
IPU.............................................................................................................................................................. 938
IOB............................................................................................................................................................. 939
When removing the motors that are behind the IOB.....................................................................940
PFB.............................................................................................................................................................. 940
When removing the motors that are behind the PFB......................................................................941
IH Inverter.................................................................................................................................................. 941
AC Drive Board......................................................................................................................................... 942
Notes on Replacing the AC Drive Board........................................................................................942
PSU1 / PSU2............................................................................................................................................ 943
When removing the motors and sensors that are behind the PSU1/PSU2.................................944
Potential Sensor Board..............................................................................................................................946
Combined High-Voltage Power Supply Board (Charge / Development) (KCMY)............................947
Combined High-Voltage Power Supply Board (KC).....................................................................947
Combined High-Voltage Power Supply Board (MY).................................................................... 948
Fusing Web Control Board-Main Machine (D137/D138 only)......................................................... 949
AC Drive Board Relay (D137/D138 only)............................................................................................949
Motors and Sensors.......................................................................................................................................950
Layout (Motor)...........................................................................................................................................950
Rear of the Machine (Top)...............................................................................................................950
Rear of the Machine (Middle)......................................................................................................... 951
Rear of the Machine (Bottom)..........................................................................................................952

32
 Drawer Unit (Front)...........................................................................................................................953
Drawer Unit (Rear)........................................................................................................................... 954
Drum Motor (KCMY) / Drum Encoder Sensor (KCMY)........................................................................ 954
Removing the Drive Exhaust Fan and the Potential Sensor Board................................................958
Drum HP Sensor (D137/D138 only)......................................................................................................960
Drum Cleaning Motor (KCMY)................................................................................................................960
Removing the Drive Exhaust Fan and the Potential Sensor Board................................................962
Development Motor (KCMY)................................................................................................................... 963
Removing the Drive Exhaust Fan and the Potential Sensor Board................................................965
Development Roller HP Sensor (KCMY)................................................................................................. 966
By-pass Feed Motor/Relay Motor.......................................................................................................... 966
PTR Motor / PTR Encoder Sensor............................................................................................................ 968
Paper Feed Motor/Transport Motor....................................................................................................... 970
1st Paper Feed Motor/1st Transport Motor.................................................................................. 970
Vertical Transport Motor.................................................................................................................. 971
2nd Paper Feed Motor/2nd Transport Motor, 3rd Paper Feed Motor/3rd Transport Motor.973
Fusing Drive Motor....................................................................................................................................974
Waste Toner Collection Motor.................................................................................................................976
Removing the Waste Toner Collection Motor................................................................................ 976
Removing the Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller Drive Motor and the Bracket.................................. 979
Waste Toner Lock Sensor......................................................................................................................... 980
Fusing Release Motor............................................................................................................................... 981
Removing the Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller Drive Motor and the Bracket.................................. 983
Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller Drive Motor (D137/D138 only)............................................................984
Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller Contact Motor (D137/D138 only)....................................................... 986
Fans and Filters.............................................................................................................................................. 988
Layout (Fans)..............................................................................................................................................988
Layout (Filters)............................................................................................................................................992
Controller Exhaust Fan.............................................................................................................................. 992
Controller Intake Fan.................................................................................................................................993
Development Exhaust Fans (Right / Left).................................................................................................994
Development Intake Fans (KCMY).......................................................................................................... 996
Drive Exhaust Fan...................................................................................................................................... 998

33
 Fusing Exit Exhaust Fan............................................................................................................................. 998
Fusing Pressure Roller Exhaust Fan (D137/D138 only)....................................................................... 998
Heat Pipe Panel Exhaust Fan................................................................................................................. 1000
Heat Pipe Panel Intake Fan.................................................................................................................... 1001
PTR Fusing Exhaust Fan...........................................................................................................................1003
ITB Motor Cooling Fan...........................................................................................................................1004
Ozone Exhaust Fan................................................................................................................................ 1005
Duplex Exhaust Fans (Front / Middle / Rear)..................................................................................... 1006
IH Coil Power Cooling Fan.................................................................................................................... 1007
ITB Cleaning Intake Fan......................................................................................................................... 1008
ID Sensor Cleaning Fan......................................................................................................................... 1009
PSU Fans (Right / Left)............................................................................................................................1010
Deodorizing Filters (Large / Small).......................................................................................................1011
Dust Filters (Large / Small).....................................................................................................................1012
Ozone Filters (Large / Small)................................................................................................................1013
Waste Toner Collection.............................................................................................................................. 1015
Waste Toner Bottle................................................................................................................................. 1015
Waste Toner Bottle Unit..........................................................................................................................1016
Installing the Relay Duct.................................................................................................................1018
Waste Toner Bottle Motor Sensor......................................................................................................... 1019
Waste Toner Full Sensor.........................................................................................................................1020
Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor.............................................................................................................. 1021
Waste Toner Transport Motor............................................................................................................... 1021
Waste Toner Upper Transport............................................................................................................... 1021
Waste Toner Vertical Transport............................................................................................................. 1022
Waste Toner Lower Transport................................................................................................................1024
Adjustment after Replacement....................................................................................................................1025
5. Troubleshooting
Service Call 101-195................................................................................................................................ 1027
SC100 (Engine: Scanning).................................................................................................................... 1027
Service Call 202-286................................................................................................................................ 1039
SC200 (Engine: Image Writing)........................................................................................................... 1039
Service Call 300-398................................................................................................................................ 1052

34
 SC300 (Engine: Charge, Development).............................................................................................. 1052
SC300 (Engine: Development)............................................................................................................. 1062
Service Call 400-498................................................................................................................................ 1075
SC400 (Engine: Around the Drum)....................................................................................................... 1075
SC300/400 (Engine: Transfer/Separation, Cleaning etc.).............................................................. 1080
Service Call 501-595................................................................................................................................ 1107
SC500 (Engine: Paper transport 1: Paper Feed, Duplex, Transport)................................................ 1107
SC500 (Engine: Paper Transport 2: Fusing, etc.)................................................................................ 1132
SC500 (Engine: Paper Transport 3: Feed, Duplex, Transport, Fusing)..............................................1156
SC500 (Engine: Others).........................................................................................................................1163
Service Call 620-689................................................................................................................................ 1164
SC600 (Engine: Communication and Others)..................................................................................... 1164
SC600 (Controller).................................................................................................................................1184
Service Call 700-780................................................................................................................................ 1197
SC700 (Engine: Peripherals)................................................................................................................. 1197
Service Call 816-899................................................................................................................................ 1251
SC800 (Controller).................................................................................................................................1251
Service Call 900-998................................................................................................................................ 1313
SC900 (Engine: Others).........................................................................................................................1313
SC900 (Controller).................................................................................................................................1315
Jam Detection.............................................................................................................................................. 1322
Jam Displays............................................................................................................................................1322
Removing Jammed Paper.......................................................................................................................1323
Printer Engine Jam History......................................................................................................................1323
How to check..................................................................................................................................1323
Display............................................................................................................................................ 1324
Jam Codes and Position Codes............................................................................................................. 1324
ADF..................................................................................................................................................1325
Main Machine................................................................................................................................1325
LCIT RT4020 (D709).....................................................................................................................1328
LCIT RT4030 (D710).....................................................................................................................1329
Finisher SR4090 (D703)...............................................................................................................1329
Booklet Finisher SR4100 (D704)................................................................................................. 1331

35
 Finisher SR4110 (D707)...............................................................................................................1333
Multi Folding Unit FD4000 (D615):............................................................................................ 1334
Mail Box CS4010 (D708)............................................................................................................1336
Cover Interposer Tray CI4010 (D711)....................................................................................... 1337
Cover Interposer Tray CI4020 (D712)....................................................................................... 1337
Decurl Unit DU5020......................................................................................................................1338
Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020 (D751).............................................................................................1339
Plockmatic Bookletmaker...............................................................................................................1340
GBC Stream Punch........................................................................................................................ 1340
Sensor Locations..................................................................................................................................... 1341
Paper Size Codes................................................................................................................................... 1341
Fan Defect Detection...................................................................................................................................1343
Fan Locations and Fan SC..................................................................................................................... 1343
Adjustment................................................................................................................................................... 1347
Adjustment 001: ACC (Automatic Color Calibration).........................................................................1347
Overview........................................................................................................................................ 1347
Procedure........................................................................................................................................1347
Adjustment 002: Manual Gamma Adjustment.....................................................................................1348
Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 1348
Printer Mode Adjustment............................................................................................................... 1348
Copier Mode Adjustment.............................................................................................................. 1352
Adjustment 003: Scanner Registration..................................................................................................1355
Overview........................................................................................................................................ 1355
Adjustment Procedure.................................................................................................................... 1355
Adjustment 004: ADF Registration........................................................................................................ 1355
Overview........................................................................................................................................ 1355
Adjustment Procedure.................................................................................................................... 1356
Adjustment 005: Registration.................................................................................................................1356
Overview........................................................................................................................................ 1356
Cause.............................................................................................................................................. 1356
Contents.......................................................................................................................................... 1356
Adjustment 006: Fusing Nip Width Adjustment for Envelopes........................................................... 1364
Overview........................................................................................................................................ 1364

36
 Adjustment Procedure.................................................................................................................... 1364
Adjustment 007: Adjustments Required for Improved Glossiness...................................................... 1365
Overview........................................................................................................................................ 1365
Adjustments Required for Improved Glossiness (Pro C5110S /Pro C5100S)........................ 1365
Adjustments Required for Improved Glossiness (MP C8002SP/MP C6502SP).....................1366
Adjustment 008: Margin Adjustment.................................................................................................... 1366
Overview........................................................................................................................................ 1366
Margin adjustment......................................................................................................................... 1367
Adjustment 009: Staple misalignment (3 mm or more) occurs........................................................... 1368
Symptom......................................................................................................................................... 1368
Cause.............................................................................................................................................. 1369
Solution........................................................................................................................................... 1369
Image Quality..............................................................................................................................................1373
Definitions of Abnormal Images............................................................................................................ 1373
Large classification: Points............................................................................................................. 1373
Large classification: Lines...............................................................................................................1374
Large classification: Plane............................................................................................................. 1377
Image Quality 001: Spots..................................................................................................................... 1383
Overview........................................................................................................................................ 1383
Troubleshooting for Color spots (189mm/40mm pitch)............................................................ 1384
Troubleshooting for White Spots in Low-Temperature, Low-Humidity Environment.................1385
Troubleshooting for White spots Appear in Winter Environment (Pro C5110S/Pro C5100S).......
......................................................................................................................................................... 1386
Troubleshooting for White spots................................................................................................... 1387
Troubleshooting for White spots with toner cores....................................................................... 1389
Troubleshooting for White, fish-shape stains............................................................................... 1390
Troubleshooting for Small granular toner fixation (Pro C5110S /Pro C5100S).................... 1391
Image Quality 002: Streaks.................................................................................................................. 1393
Overview........................................................................................................................................ 1393
Troubleshooting for Vertical streaks caused by contact with the toner adhering to the guide plate.
......................................................................................................................................................... 1394
Troubleshooting for Streaks made by Paper Edges.................................................................... 1398
Troubleshooting for Horizontal White Streaks in Small Solid Black Areas............................... 1407
Image Quality 003: Bands.................................................................................................................... 1408

37
 Troubleshooting for Blurred Image in 189mm Pitch (OPC Drum Circumference)....................1408
Troubleshooting fuzzy line in originating in cyan drum (Pro C5110S/Pro C5100S).............1409
Troubleshooting Roller marks........................................................................................................ 1411
Troubleshooting for 2-3mm pitch banding.................................................................................. 1416
Troubleshooting for Banding Caused by the PCDU (Pro C5110S/Pro C5100S).................. 1418
Troubleshooting for “shock-jitter” in B/W mode (Pro C5110S/Pro C5100S).......................1423
Image Quality 004: Non-Reproduction............................................................................................... 1432
Troubleshooting for Halo image................................................................................................... 1432
Image Quality 005: Unevenness.......................................................................................................... 1433
Overview........................................................................................................................................ 1433
Troubleshooting for Density Difference between Left and Right.................................................1433
Troubleshooting for Vertical band of halftone images................................................................1437
Troubleshooting for Uneven Density in the Area 85mm from the Trailing Edge.......................1439
Troubleshooting for Uneven density in the area 85mm from the trailing edge in low-temperature,
low-humidity environment..............................................................................................................1441
Troubleshooting for Grainy image............................................................................................... 1442
Troubleshooting for Density unevenness and dust when using AC transfer (Pro C5110S /Pro
C5100S).........................................................................................................................................1443
Troubleshooting for Uneven glossiness when feeding large size paper after small size paper........
......................................................................................................................................................... 1449
Troubleshooting blurred image on front and rear sides toward the Trailing Edge...................1451
Troubleshooting for Random Pitch Banding Caused by Lubricant Falling from the Drum Cleaning
Unit.................................................................................................................................................. 1454
Troubleshooting for 3mm-Pitch Banding on Paper with Paper Thickness 6 (Pro C5110S/
C5100S).........................................................................................................................................1455
Image Quality 006: Stains.....................................................................................................................1457
Overview........................................................................................................................................ 1457
Troubleshooting for Stains in the area 76mm from the trailing edge.........................................1457
Troubleshooting for Stains on the side edges of paper...............................................................1459
Image Quality 007: Toner Flaking Off................................................................................................. 1459
Troubleshooting for Blocking on the Paper Output Tray.............................................................1459
Paper Transport........................................................................................................................................... 1463
Paper Transport 001: Curls....................................................................................................................1463
Paper Transport 002: Envelopes...........................................................................................................1466

38
 Troubleshooting for Envelopes Are Wrinkled..............................................................................1466
Troubleshooting for Feed Direction Limitations Applied on Certain Types of Envelopes.........1466
Paper Transport 003: Twining Jams......................................................................................................1467
Troubleshooting for Twining Jams in the Lower Part of the Fusing Unit Caused by Insufficient
Margins...........................................................................................................................................1467
Other Problems............................................................................................................................................1470
Other 001: Drawer Unit.........................................................................................................................1470
Drawer Unit Lock Motor Emergency............................................................................................ 1470
Troubleshooting for Too Much Weight/Abnormal Noise on Pulling Out/Pushing In the Drawer
Unit.................................................................................................................................................. 1472
Other 002: Correspondance Table for Adjustment Settings...............................................................1474
Correspondence Table for Adjustment Settings for Operators and SP Mode..........................1474
Correspondance Table for Adjustment Setting and SP Mode (D137/D138 Only)............... 1476
Other 003: Correspondance Table for IMSS Settings........................................................................1479
Correspondence Table for IMSS Settings and SP Mode (D137/D138 Only)....................... 1479
Other 004: SC........................................................................................................................................ 1485
Troubleshooting for SC516 after Repeated J097.......................................................................1485
Troubleshooting SC 570-00 (fusing belt smoothing roller error).............................................. 1486
Troubleshooting SC515-01..........................................................................................................1489
Troubleshooting SC515-02..........................................................................................................1491
Other 005: HDD Troubleshooting.........................................................................................................1494
Symptom......................................................................................................................................... 1494
Cause.............................................................................................................................................. 1494
Solution........................................................................................................................................... 1494
Other 006: Original Size Misdetection................................................................................................1496
Symptom......................................................................................................................................... 1496
Cause.............................................................................................................................................. 1499
Solution........................................................................................................................................... 1499
Other 007: Improper Message When Setting the Tandem Tray........................................................1500
Symptom......................................................................................................................................... 1500
Cause.............................................................................................................................................. 1501
Solution........................................................................................................................................... 1501
Other 008: Skew in sub-scan direction................................................................................................ 1502
Symptom......................................................................................................................................... 1503

39
 Cause.............................................................................................................................................. 1503
Solution........................................................................................................................................... 1503
Procedure........................................................................................................................................1503
Problems Related to Peripheral Devices....................................................................................................1507
Peripherals 001: Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020...................................................................................... 1507
Troubleshooting for Fan Noise Is Large....................................................................................... 1507
Peripherals 002: Finisher SR4090/SR4100....................................................................................... 1507
Troubleshooting for Proof Tray Detected to Be Full Too Soon................................................... 1507
Troubleshooting for Envelopes Are Not Fed................................................................................1508
Troubleshooting for toner rubbing off along the fold line........................................................... 1509
Troubleshooting Creases and Jam in Stapler Unit (SR4100).....................................................1509
Corner Stapling Failure/Stack Failure/Large Misalignment..................................................... 1512
1st Sheet of Stapled Stack Misaligned........................................................................................ 1516
Staple Misalignment Troubleshooting.......................................................................................... 1518
Shift Tray Stalls Causing Paper Jam..............................................................................................1522
Poor Stacking on Shift Tray........................................................................................................... 1525
How to improve center-folding accuracy (SR4100).................................................................. 1529
SP Settings for adjusting Shift Tray Jogger/Corner Stapling/Booklet Stapling....................... 1533
Blown Fuse Conditions................................................................................................................................1537
IDB (D1365492)....................................................................................................................................1537
AC Control Board (D0165460)........................................................................................................... 1537
PSU...........................................................................................................................................................1538
PSU1 (AZ240226)........................................................................................................................1538
PSU2 (AX240230)........................................................................................................................ 1539
DUB (D1365121).................................................................................................................................. 1541
Potential Sensor Board (D1365450 [100V], D1365455 [200V])..................................................1542
TSB (D1365425)................................................................................................................................... 1542
IPU (D1365724).................................................................................................................................... 1543
IOB (D1385110)................................................................................................................................... 1544
Controller (D1365700/D1365705).................................................................................................. 1547
Operation Panel......................................................................................................................................1547
Pro OP-R (D1387395)..................................................................................................................1547
Office OP-L (D1491478)............................................................................................................. 1548

40
 Option Board.......................................................................................................................................... 1548
IEEE1284 (B5955710)................................................................................................................ 1548
Copy connector (B5815710)...................................................................................................... 1549
Wireless Lan: 11n (D1645230)...................................................................................................1550
Giga-Ethenet Board (D7306036)............................................................................................... 1550
6. Energy Saving
Energy Saving............................................................................................................................................. 1553
Energy Save............................................................................................................................................ 1553
If the Energy Saver button is pressed during machine operation...............................................1553
Energy Saver Timer.................................................................................................................................1555
Paper Save.................................................................................................................................................. 1556
Effectiveness of Duplex/Combine Function..........................................................................................1556
Paper Savings and Counter.......................................................................................................... 1557

41
42
1. Product Information

Product Overview
Component Layout

1. ADF 11. Fusing Unit

2. Scanner Unit 12. Exit Transport

3. Laser Unit 13. Exit Inverter Transport

4. PCDU 14. Duplex Transport

5. Bypass Unit 15. Vertical Transport

6. ITB Unit 16. Tray 1 (Tandem Tray)

7. Belt Cleaning Unit 17. Tray 2, Tray 3 (Universal Tray)

8. Relay Transport 18. Used Toner Collection Bottle

43
 1. Product Information

9. PTR Unit 19. Purge Tray

10. PTB Unit

Paper Path

1. ADF Transport
2. Bypass Transport
3. LCIT Transport
4. Duplex Transport
5. Simplex Transport

44
 Product Overview

Drive Layout

Front View

1. 10. Cleaning Web Drive Motor

: Cartridge Drive Motor
: Toner Supply Transport Coil Motor

2. PTR Lift Motor 11. Cleaning Web Contact Motor

3. Registaration Motor 12. Duplex Transport Motor

4. Duplex Exit Motor 13. Inverter Entrance Motor

5. Sensor Shift Motor 14. Inverter Entrance Junction

6. Drawer Lock Motor 15. Exit Motor

45
 1. Product Information

7. Roller Shift Motor 2 16. Belt Smoothing Roller Contact Motor

8. Roller Shift Motor 1 17. Fusing Motor

9. Duplex Inverter Motor

Rear View

1.Scanner Carriage Motor 14. Used Toner Bottle Collection Motor

2. Exit Motor (ADF) 15. PTR Drive Motor

3. Transport Motor (ADF) 16. Rear Fence Drive Motor

46
 Product Overview

4. Tray Lift Motor (ADF) 17. Bottom Plate Lift Motor

: For Tray 2
: For Tray 3

5. Feed Motor (ADF) 18. Feed Motor

: For Tray 2
: For Tray 3

6. Entrance Motor (ADF) 19. Transport Motor

: For Tray 2
: For Tray 3

7. Pick-up Lift Motor (ADF) 20. Tandem Tray Lift Motor

8. Relay Motor (ADF) 21. Relay Transport Motor

9. 22. Feed Motor (For Tray 1)

: Drum Cleaning Motor
: Development Motor
: Drum Motor

10. Image Transfer Roller Lift Motor (Gear 23. Transport Motor (For tray 1)
Box)

11. Fusing Contact Motor 24. Bypass/Relay Transport Motor

12. Used Toner Collection Motor 25. Bypass Feed Motor

13. Fusing Drive Motor

47
 1. Product Information

Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration

D137/D138 (Pro Models)

Item Machine Code Call out

D703-17 (NA/EU/AP)
Finisher SR4090 [14]
D703-21(CHN)

D704-17 (NA/EU/AP)
Booklet Finisher SR4100 [12]
D704-21 (CHN)

Output Jogger Unit Type M2 D705-01 [13]

Punch Unit PU3060 NA D706-00 -

Punch Unit PU3060 EU D706-01 -

Punch Unit PU3060 SC D706-02 -

Finisher SR4110 D707-17 [11]

Punch Unit PU5000 NA B831-01 -

Punch Unit PU5000 EU B831-02 -

Punch Unit PU5000 SC B831-03 -

48
 Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration

Item Machine Code Call out

Copy Tray Type M2 D744-01 [1]

D709-17 (NA/TWN)
LCIT RT4020 [4]
D709-27 (EU/AP/CHN)

8 1/2" x 14" Paper Size Tray Type M2 D745-17 [3]

LCIT RT4030 D710-17 [2]

Cover Interposer Tray CI4010 D711-17 [15]

Cover Interposer Tray CI4020 D712-17 [9]

A3/11"x17" Tray Unit Type M2 D749-01 [5]

Tab Sheet Holder Type M2 D750-01 -

Decurl Unit DU5020 D727-17 [7]

D751-17 (NA)
Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020 [8]
D751-27 (EU/AP/CHN)

D615-17 (NA/TWN)
Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 [10]
D615-27 (EU/AP/CHN)

D859-01 (NA/EU/AP/CHN)
Waste Toner Bottle MP C8002 -
D859-17 (TWN)

Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A B870-11 -

Card Reader Tray Type1075 B498-01 -

D719-10 (NA)
Postscript3 Unit Type M2 D719-11 (EU) -
D719-12 (AP/CHN)

D719-15 (NA)
IPDS Unit Type M2 D719-16 (EU) -
D719-17 (AP/CHN)

Unicode Font Package for SAP® 1 License B869-01 -

Unicode Font Package for SAP® 10 License B869-02 -

49
 1. Product Information

Item Machine Code Call out

Unicode Font Package for SAP® 100 License B869-03 -

SD Card for Fonts Type D D641-54 -

Copy Data Security Unit Type G D640-41 -

File Format Converter Type E D377-04 -

IEEE1284 Interface Board Type A B679-17 -

IEEE802.11a/g/n Unit Type M2 D164-01 -

Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D D566-01 -

SD card for NetWare printing Type M2 D719-46 -

D719-41 (NA)
Browser Unit Type M2 D719-42 (EU) -
D719-43 (AP/CHN)

D166-25 (NA)
OCR Unit Type M2 D166-26 (EU) -
D166-24 (AP/CHN)

Copy Connector Type 3260 B328-11 [6]

Color Controller E-42B D728-02 -

D729-01(NA)
Color Controller E-22B -
D729-02 (EU/AP/CHN)

Fiery Impose D728-05 -

Fiery Compose D525-15 -

Fiery Impose-Compose D729-04 -

50
 Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration

D135/D136 (Office Models)

Item Machine Code Call out

D703-17 (NA/EU/AP)
Finisher SR4090 [13]
D703-21 (CHN)

D704-17 (NA/EU/AP)
Booklet Finisher SR4100 [11]
D704-21 (CHN)

Output Jogger Unit Type M2 D705-01 [12]

Punch Unit PU3060 NA D706-00 -

D706-01 (EU/AP)
Punch Unit PU3060 EU -
D706-03 (CHN)

Punch Unit PU3060 SC D706-02 -

Finisher SR4110 D707-17 [10]

Punch Unit PU5000 NA B831-01 -

Punch Unit PU5000 EU B831-02 -

Punch Unit PU5000 SC B831-03 -

Mail Box CS4010 D708-17 [14]

51
 1. Product Information

Item Machine Code Call out

Copy Tray Type M2 D744-01 [1]

D709-17 (EU)
LCIT RT4020 [4]
D709-27 (NA/AP/CHN)

8 1/2" x 14" Paper Size Tray Type M2 D745-17 [3]

LCIT RT4030 D710-17 [2]

Cover Interposer Tray CI4010 D711-17 [9]

Cover Interposer Tray CI4020 D712-17 [7]

A3/11"x17" Tray Unit Type M2 D749-01 [5]

Tab Sheet Holder Type M2 D750-01 -

D615-17 (NA)
Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 [8]
D615-27 (EU/AP/CHN)

Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A B870-11 -

Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M2 D739-06 -

Waste Toner Bottle MP C8002 D859-01

D718-01 (NA)
D718-02 (EU)
Fax Option Type M2 -
D718-03 (AP)
D718-05 (CHN)

D718-11 (NA)
G3 Interface Unit Type M2 -
D718-12 (EU/AP)

Memory Unit Type B 32MB G578-17 -

D719-21 (NA)
Fax Connection Unit Type M2 D719-22 (EU) -
D719-23 (AP/CHN)

D166-25 (NA)
OCR Unit Type M2 D166-26 (EU) -
D166-24 (AP/CHN)

52
 Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration

Item Machine Code Call out

D719-10 (NA)
Postscript3 Unit Type M2 D719-11 (EU) -
D719-12 (AP)

D719-15 (NA)
IPDS Unit Type M2 D719-16 (EU) -
D719-17 (AP)

Unicode Font Package for SAP® 1 License B869-01 -

Unicode Font Package for SAP® 10 License B869-02 -

Unicode Font Package for SAP® 100 License B869-03 -

SD Card for Fonts Type D D641-54 -

Copy Data Security Unit Type G D640-41 -

Data Overwrite Security Unit Type H D377-06 -

File Format Converter Type E D377-04 -

IEEE1284 Interface Board Type A B679-17 -

IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Unit Type M2 D164-01 -

Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D D566-01 -

SD card for NetWare printing Type M2 D719-46 -

D719-41 (NA)
Browser Unit Type M2 D719-42 (EU) -
D719-43 (AP/CHN)

Copy Connector Type 3260 B328-11 [6]

D729-01(NA)
Color Controller E-22B -
D729-02 (EU/AP/CHN)

53
 1. Product Information

Specifications
See "Appendices" for the following information:
• General Specifications
• Supported Paper Sizes
• Software Accessories
• Optional Equipment

54
 Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products

Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with

Predecessor Products
New features of D137/D138 and D135/D136

Developed Image Quality

Items Description D137/D138 D135/D136

The CH-C1 series adopts new chemical

New Chemical toner in order to enhance image quality
Yes Yes
Toner and meet the demand of higher image
quality in commercial printers.

The CH-C1 series realizes a high image

quality of 1200x4800dpi at a low price
VCSEL Yes Yes
compared to Taurus-C1 by the
advanced 40 channel VCSEL.

Improvement of Banding Issues

Items Description D137/D138 D135/D136

CH-C1 has new OPC drive technology

called PPG-Drive. The combination of
PPG Drive (1*) Yes Yes
PPG-Drive and highly precise drive
control can keep OPC rotation stable.

CVEC is a technology to keep ITB speed

variation stable and reduce color
inconsistency. The decentering of the
CVEC (2*) driven shaft can be adjusted by Yes Yes
monitoring the differences in outputs from
the drive shaft encoder and the driven
shaft encoder in the ITB unit.

55
 1. Product Information

Items Description D137/D138 D135/D136

CH-C1 Pro supports DEMS in order to

adjust the toner adhesion and banding.
When the gap between development
roller and OPC drum changes, color
DEMS (3*) Yes No
inconsistency will occur due to changes
in toner adhesion. CH-C1 Pro supports
DEMS in order to adjust the toner
adhesion.

(1*): Precision Planetary Gear-Drive

(2*):Compensation function of belt speed Variation of Encoder roller Cycle
(3*): Development Electric-field Modulation System

Improvement of the Scratch Mark Issue

Items Description D137/D138 D135/D136

CH-C1 Pro has a new fusing belt

smoothing roller to improve the scratch
Fusing Belt mark issue. This roller gives pressure and
Yes No
Smoothing Roller rubs against the belt surface to smoothen
the rough parts caused by the paper
edges.

Improvement of the Toner Dusting Issue

Items Description D137/D138 D135/D136

An intake air duct at the development

Intake air duct unit’s trough area, which prevents toner Yes Yes
from dropping onto the paper

56
 Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products

Developed Printing Quality of Textured Paper

Items Description D137/D138 D135/D136

In order to improve printing quality on

textured media, CH-C1 Pro uses AC
AC transfer transfer. This can increase toner transfer Yes No
to the media by generating better
adherence between toner and ITB.

The elastic fusing belt has a thicker elastic

layer to reach the toner on the bottom of
Elastic fusing belt textured media and realizes better fusing Yes No
by providing stable pressure and heat on
the media surface.

To keep image quality and performance

on heavy coated media, CH-C1 Pro
Solid fusing roller Yes No
supports solid fusing rollers (same as Pro
C751EX series).

Developed User Appliance

Items Description D137/D138 D135/D136

The front cover of the CH-C1 series is like

a drawer and operators can directly
access the inner unit.
Easy Jam Fix Yes Yes
LED lights and jam animations appear
when the user opens the drawer to fix
paper jam.

Active Tray Each tray has an indicator that will light

Yes No
Indicator up when it is feeding paper.

Same as the Pro C901 series and Pro

C751EX series, the CH-C1 Pro also has
Paper Library a Paper Library to offer customers easy Yes No
and simple paper settings on the
operation panel.

CH-C1 Pro is designed with a

TCRU Yes No
TCRU/ORU concept.

57
 1. Product Information

Items Description D137/D138 D135/D136

Toner cartridge replacement during

Toner Replacement Yes Yes
machine operation

Controller features

Items Description D137/D138 D135/D136

Capture of part of the controller and

Capturing log engine log contents onto an SD card Yes Yes
(operation possible from the LCD)

58
2. Installation

Installation Requirements

• Install the machine in a safe place to maintain security.

• Make sure that the operation instructions are kept at the customer's hand.

Environment

Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 90°F)

Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH

Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight.)

Ventilation: Room air should turn over at least 30 m3/hr/person

Ambient Dust: Less than 0.10 mg/m3 (2.7 x 10/6 oz/yd3)

59
 2. Installation

1. Avoid areas exposed to sudden temperature changes:

1) Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner.
2) Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater.
2. Do not place the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gases.
3. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea level. (D135/
D136/D137/D138 for NA can be installed only up to 2,500m (8,200 ft.))
4. Place the main machine on a strong and level base. Inclination on any side should be no more
than 5 mm (0.2").
5. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations.

Minimum Space Requirements

Place the main machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown:

Installation space

The following space is required for the user to use the machine. If you cannot secure this space, then you
will not be able to ensure the machine’s usability. Make this space to avoid causing damage.

RTB 172
Modified

1 Rear 100mm (4")

2 Right 900mm (35.5")

3 Front 400mm (15.7")

4 Left 100mm (4")

60
 Installation Requirements

Dimensions

D137/D138

61
 2. Installation

D135/D136

Power Requirements

• Make sure that the wall outlet is near the main machine and easily accessible. Make sure the plug
is firmly inserted in the outlet.
• Avoid multi-wiring.
• Be sure to ground the machine.
• Never set anything on the power cord.

Input voltage level (D137/D138)

Destination Model Power supply voltage Rated current consumption

D137 208 to 240V 12A

NA
D138 208 to 240V 12A

D137 220 to 240V 12 to 10A

EU
D138 220 to 240V 12 to 10A

62
 Installation Requirements

Destination Model Power supply voltage Rated current consumption

D137 220 to 240V 12 to 10A

AP
D138 220 to 240V 12 to 10A

D137 220 to 240V 12 to 10A

CHN
D138 220 to 240V 12 to 10A

Input voltage level (D135/D136)

Destination Model Power supply voltage Rated current consumption

D135 120 to 127V 16A

NA
D136 208 to 240V 12A

D135 220 to 240V 12 to 10A

EU
D136 220 to 240V 12 to 10A

D135 220 to 240V 12 to 10A

AP
D136 220 to 240V 12 to 10A

D135 220 to 240V 12 to 10A

CHN
D136 220 to 240V 12 to 10A

63
 2. Installation

Main Machine Installation

Special Tools and Lubricants

D137/D138

The following special tools should be prepared for maintenance of this model in the field:
Unique or Common:
U: Unique for this model
C: Common with listed

Item Part Number Description Q’ty Unique or Common

1 D0159501 ZINC STEARATE 1 C (*1)

2 D0159500 G104 YELLOW TONER 1 C (*1)

3 VSSG9002 FLUOTRIBO MG GREASE: 100G 1 C (*2)

4 B6455020 SD Card 1 C(General)

5 B6456705 PCMCIA Card Adapter 1 C (General)

6 G0219350 Loop-back Connector – Parallel 1 C (General)

7 C4019503 20X Magnification Scope 1 C (General)

8 A0929503 C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set) 1 C (General)

9 B6795100 Plug - IEEE1284 Type C 1 C (General)

• These items are common with the following models.

(*1): Common with Venus-C2/Venus-C3
(*2): Common with Taurus-C1
• Loop-back Connector [Parallel (item 6)] requires Plug [IEEE1284 Type C (item 9)].
• A PC (Personal Computer) is required for creating the Encryption key file on an SD card when
replacing the controller board in which HDD encryption has been enabled.

64
 Main Machine Installation

D135/D136

The following special tools should be prepared for maintenance of this model in the field:
Unique or Common:
U: Unique for this model
C: Common with listed

Item Part Number Description Q’ty Unique or Common

1 D0159501 ZINC STEARATE 1 C (*1)

2 D0159500 G104 YELLOW TONER 1 C (*1)

FLUOTRIBO MG GREASE :
3 VSSG9002 1 C (*2)
100G

4 B6455020 SD Card 1 C (*4)

5 C4019503 20X Magnification Scope 1 C (*4)

6 A0929503 C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set) 1 C (*4)

7 A2579300 Grease Barrierta – S552R 1 C (*1)

8 A1849501 OPTICS ADJUSTMENT TOOL 2 C (*3)

9 D0747690 BRUSH:BLOWER 1 C (*2)

10 A2579300 GREASE-BARRIERTA S552R 1 C (*4)

11 D0149800 GREASE-KS660B 1 C (*1)

12 A2579100 SILICONE OIL TYPE SS 1 C (*4)

13 VSSA9001 LAUNA OIL 40N 1 C (*4)

• These items are common with the following models.

(*1): Common with Venus-C2/Venus-C3
(*2): Common with Taurus-C1
(*3): Common with Apollon-C2.5/Athena-C2.5
(*4): General (common with multiple models)
• A PC (Personal Computer) is required for creating the Encryption key file on an SD card when
replacing the controller board in which HDD encryption has been enabled.

65
 2. Installation

Installation Flow Chart

66
 Main Machine Installation

Accessory Check

D137/D138

Q’ty
No Description
D137 D138

1 PCU Pocket 1 1

2 Developer Funnel 1 1

3 Tube Type Lamp 1 1

4 Operation Panel Arm Upper Cover 1 1

5 Operation Panel Arm Cover 1 1

6 Operation Panel Rear Cover 1 1

7 Operation Panel Arm 1 1

8 Screw Cover 5 5

9 Tapping Screw - 3 x 6 24 24

10 Printing Sample 1 1

11 Paper (White, 100 sheets) 1 1

12 Decal - ADF Paper Set 1 1

13 Leveling Shoes 4 4

14 Decal - Paper Set Direction 3 3

15 Cloth Holder 1 1

16 Cloth - DF Exposure Glass 1 1

17 Rivet - Dia5 2 2

18 Development Cap 1 1

19 Logotype Plate (NA Only) 1 1

20 Decal - Function : Multi Language 1 1

67
 2. Installation

Q’ty
No Description
D137 D138

21 Sheet - Logo (NA Only) 1 1

22 Decal - Caution: ADF Paper Set 1 1

- Sheet - Exposure Glass 1 1

- Power Supply Cord 1 1

- Sheet - Application : Multi Language 1 1

- Sheet - Pro 1 1

- Sheet - Scanner Protection 1 1

- Sheet - Safety (EU Only) 1 1

- Decal - EMC Address (EU Only) 1 1

- Sheet - TEL Name (CHN Only) 1 1

- Guarantee (CHN Only) 1 1

- CD-ROM-Driver 2 2

- CD-ROM-OI (NA/ AP/TWN Only) 2 2

- CD-ROM-OI (EU Only) 4 4

- Sheet - EULA: 20 languages 1 1

- Seal - Caution: 20 languages 1 1

- Operation Instructions 4 4

- Sheet - Security Password 1 1

- SMC Report 1 1

68
 Main Machine Installation

D135/D136

Q’ty
Description
D135 D136

1 PCU Pocket 1 1

2 Developer Funnel 1 1

3 Decal - Paper Size 1 1

69
 2. Installation

Q’ty
Description
D135 D136

4 Decal - Paper Set Direction 3 3

5 Decal - Function : Multi Language 1 1

6 Decal - ADF Paper Set 1 1

7 Leveling Shoes 4 4

8 Cloth - DF Exposure Glass 1 1

9 Cloth Holder 1 1

10 Development Cap 1 1

11 Rivet - Dia5 2 2

12 Logotype Plate (NA/EU/AP/TWN Only) 1 1

13 Sheet - Logo (NA/EU/AP/TWN Only) 1 1

14 Decal - Caution: ADF Paper Set 1 1

15 Decal - Paper Feed (NA/CHN Only) - 1

16 Decal - Paper Exit (NA/CHN Only) - 1

17 Decal - Model Name Plate (NA Only) - 1

- Power Supply Cord 1 1

- Sheet - Exposure Glass 1 1

- Sheet - Application : Multi Language 1 1

- Decal - Power Supply Cord (NA/CHN Only) - 1

- Sheet - Safety (EU Only) 1 1

- Decal - EMC Address (EU Only) 1 1

- Sheet - TEL Name (CHN Only) 1 1

- Guarantee (CHN Only) 1 1

- SMC Report 1 1

- Sheet - Scanner Protection 1 1

70
 Main Machine Installation

Q’ty
Description
D135 D136

- CD-ROM-Driver 2 2

- CD-ROM-OI (NA/AP/TWN Only) 2 2

- CD-ROM-OI (EU Only) 4 4

- Sheet - EULA Sheet: 20 languages 1 1

- Seal - Caution: 20 languages 1 1

- Operation Instructions 4 4

- Sheet - Security Password 1 1

71
 2. Installation

Installation Procedure (D137/D138)

1. Unpack the machine and remove all the wrapping.

2. Place the machine at the installation site.
3. Remove all filament tape from the machine.

4. Open the tandem tray [A] and remove the filament tape at the duplex unit [B].

5. Remove the filament tape and the cushion at the ADF.

72
 Main Machine Installation

6. Open the ADF [A] and release the lever to open the white board. Then remove the protection
sheet.

7. Remove the power cable from paper tray 2.

8. Remove the operation panel from paper tray 3.

73
 2. Installation

Removing the Retainers of the Charge Roller Units (C, M, K)

The shipping retainers [A] must be removed from the charge roller units (C, M, K).

• These retainers is not included in the Yellow (Y) charge roller unit.

1. Pull out the drawer unit and remove its cover [A]. ( x7)

74
 Main Machine Installation

• Make sure to hold down the lock lever ([A] in the photo below) when you pull out the unit.
(The unit is locked in place by this lever).

2. Close the drawer unit.

• When you push the unit back in to the machine, you can close the guide plate [A] of the
paper exit and duplex unit.

75
 2. Installation

3. Remove the ITB cleaning intake fan [A] together with the duct ( x 1).

4. Open the front cover of the toner supply unit [A].

5. Remove the fixing screws of the toner supply unit [A] ( x 3).

76
 Main Machine Installation

6. Pull out the toner supply unit [A].

7. Remove the toner supply unit [A]. ( x2)

8. Remove the filament tape [A] from the faceplate.

77
 2. Installation

9. Remove the screws fixing the face plate ( x6).

10. Remove the handles.

11. Attach the handles and pull out the units slowly and evenly.

78
 Main Machine Installation

12. Hold the grips and remove the face plate.

13. Remove all filament tapes [A] of Magenta and Cyan units.

79
 2. Installation

14. Unlock the lever [A] and pull out the PCDU [B] from the machine.

15. Place the PCDU [A] on the PCU stand [B].

16. Remove the charge roller unit and place it on a clean, flat, and level surface with the roller facing
up ( x2).

80
 Main Machine Installation

• Make sure that the surface is flat and level.

17. Remove the filament tape [A] and retainers [B] from both ends of the charge roller unit.

18. Reattach the charger roller unit and PCDU, and then attach the face plate.

• After attaching the face plate, check the status of the locking levers again by looking through
the holes as shown.

81
 2. Installation

[A]: The locking lever is properly fit into the hole in the machine frame.
[B]: The locking lever is not properly fit into the hole in the machine frame.

Attaching the ITB Separation Lever

When unpacking the machine, the ITB separation lever is not yet attached to the correct location. During
machine installation, you must install the lever.
1. Open the drawer unit [A], and remove the ITB separation lever [B].

82
 Main Machine Installation

2. Drawer unit cover [A] ( x 7*)

* D137/D138 use TCRU screws

3. Close the drawer unit

• After removing the drawer unit cover, when the drawer unit is returned to the machine, you
can close the guide plate [A] of the paper exit and duplex unit.

83
 2. Installation

• When the drawer unit is pushed back into the machine, it is locked in place by the lock lever
[A]. (Make sure to hold down this lever whenever pulling out the unit).

4. ITB cleaning intake fan [A] along with the duct ( x 1*).

* D137/D138 use TCRU screws

5. Open the toner supply unit front cover [A].

84
 Main Machine Installation

6. Remove the fixing screws of the toner supply unit [A] ( x 3*).

* D137/D138 use TCRU screws

7. Slide the toner supply unit [A] to the front.

85
 2. Installation

8. Attach the ITB separation lever [A] horizontally from the right side of the machine.

9. Turn the ITB separation lever [A] clockwise until it is vertical.

86
 Main Machine Installation

10. Return the toner supply unit to the machine and secure it with the screws.
11. Attach the ITB cleaning intake fan and drawer unit cover

Operation Panel Attachment

1. In order to easily remove the right middle upper cover [A], remove the fixing screws on the left side
of the rear middle cover [B] ( x 2).

2. Open the by-pass tray unit [A]. Remove the right middle upper cover [B], moving it downward ( x
1).

87
 2. Installation

• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.

3. Attach the arm stay [A] for the operation panel ( x 5).

88
 Main Machine Installation

4. Attach the operation panel arm ( x 5, x 3).

• Position the hook of the operation panel arm [A] over the arm stay [B].

89
 2. Installation

5. Open the by-pass tray unit and attach the arm cover [A] ( x 2).

6. Attach the screw covers [B] on the arm cover [A].

7. Attach the operation panel [A] to fit the hook of the operation panel arm [B].

90
 Main Machine Installation

8. Secure the operation panel [A] ( x 4, x 3).

9. Attach the rear cover [A] ( x 3) and the screw cover [B].

91
 2. Installation

10. Attach the arm upper cover [A] ( x 2) and the screw covers [B].

11. Remove the protection sheet [A].

92
 Main Machine Installation

Operator Call Light Attachment

1. Connect the machine and operation call light [A] ( x 1).

2. Fold back the harness [A] and clamp it.

3. Attach the operation call light [A] ( x 3).

93
 2. Installation

• When attaching the operator call light, be careful not to pinch the harness. Fix the light after it
was confirmed visually from the front and back.

Attaching the Service Pocket

When Attaching to the Machine
1. Attach the service pocket [A] for the funnel/PCU holder to the left lower (rear) (rivet x 2). Put
the funnel [B], PCU holder [C] and Development roller/Drum rotation tools into the service
pocket.

94
 Main Machine Installation

When Attaching to the Finisher

• Finisher SR4090/ Booklet Finisher SR4100: Attach to the following locations.
Rear side (upper): Operating instructions [A]
Rear side (lower): Funnel/ PCU holder [B]

• Finisher SR4110: Attach to the following locations.

Rear side (upper): Operating instructions [A]
Rear side (lower): Funnel/ PCU holder [B]

95
 2. Installation

Storing the Supply Port Caps for the Developer

TCRU/ORU Contracts
When a TCRU/ORU user removes the PCDU from the machine, they must use the caps (x 4) to
prevent developer spill. When installing the machine, attach the caps [A] to the clamping position
shown below.

Not TCRU/ORU Contracts

Store the caps [A] (x 4) in the service pocket for the operating instructions. Use them during
maintenance if needed.

96
 Main Machine Installation

Storing the Factory SP Sheet

On a newly delivered machine, the factory SP sheet is located on the exposure glass.
Open the tandem tray [A], and remove the paper cassette decal [B]. Confirm that the factory SP sheet
[C] is stored inside.

Attaching the decals

1. Prepare the ADF paper set decal [A] and ADF caution decal ([B] or [C]).

97
 2. Installation

• [B]: ADF caution decal for CHN

• [C]: ADF caution decal for other countries
2. Attach the ADF caution decal to the position [A] on the ADF.

3. Attach the ADF paper set decal [A] in the indentation in the ADF.

98
 Main Machine Installation

4. According to the paper that will be used by the customer, select and attach the following decals to
the 1st tray, 2nd tray and 3rd tray.

RTB 155
Attach a
protective sheet to
the tandem tray.

• Paper type, brand, etc can be written on the blank space.

Machine Level Adjustment

When installing the main machine, make the machine level.

• If the machine is not leveled, the tilt of the machine reduces the accuracy in side-to-side registration.
• The front and rear side of the machine must be less than 5 mm (0.2") away from level.

99
 2. Installation

1. Place the four shoes [A] below the bolts [B] under each corner of the machine.
2. Turn the nuts [B] to lower the bolt until the bolts reach the leveling shoes [A].
Example below: Front side

• Use a wrench to raise or lower the nuts.

3. Open the ADF, and then place a level [A] on the exposure glass.

4. Adjust the machine level until the machine is less than 5mm from level (measure from left-to-right).
• When the right side of the machine is lower: Lower the nuts of the right side of the machine
(front and rear) to lift the right side of the machine.

100
 Main Machine Installation

• When the left side of the machine is lower: Lower the nuts of the left side of the machine (front
and rear) to lift the left side of the machine.
5. Open the ADF, and then place the level [A] along the side.

6. Adjust the machine level until the machine is less than 5mm from level (measure from front-to-rear).
• When the front side of the machine is lower: Lower the nuts of the front side of the machine
(left and right) to lift the front of the machine.
• When the rear side of the machine is lower: Lower the nuts of the rear side of the machine (left
and right) to lift the rear of the machine.

Installing the Securing Bracket to Prevent the Power Cord from Falling Off

1. Install the securing bracket [A] to prevent the power cord from falling off. ( x1)
Example below: D137/D138

101
 2. Installation

• D137/D138 machines have two power cords. Install a securing bracket for each power
cord.

How to Set the Toner Cartridge

• Be careful when setting the toner cartridges because the toner cartridges have different shapes,
and the cartridge may be damaged if you try to force a cartridge into the wrong place. The
position of the toner cartridges is Y, M, C, K from the left.

1. Open the toner supply unit front cover [A].

102
 Main Machine Installation

2. Unpack the new toner cartridge.

3. Reverse the toner cartridge and shake 5-6 times while grasping both ends.

4. Set each color toner cartridge. Push the toner cartridge until it locks into place.

• Make sure to remove the retainer before installing the K toner catridge.

103
 2. Installation

Executing DEMS

Execute DEMS (SP3-040-001) to correct uneven image density.

ACC (Automatic Color Calibration) Adjustment

1. Check that there are no clamps or other parts that you forgot to remove. Then, plug the power cord
into the power source.
2. Turn the main power switch ON.
3. Tap [User Tools].
4. To print a color pattern, select: Maintenance > Auto Color Calibration.
5. Tap [Start] for the Copier function.
6. Tap [Start Printing].
7. Put the color test pattern face-down with the arrow pointing to the rear left corner of the exposure
glass.
8. Tap [Start Scanning]. The machine scans the pattern once.
9. Do Steps 6-8 for the Printer function.

104
 Main Machine Installation

Checking the copy image with color chart

If you want to install any options, install them using the installation procedure before doing the
procedure below.
1. Switch the machine to copier mode.
2. Make sure that there is A3 or DLT paper in one of the trays.
3. Put a "Color Chart C-4" on the exposure glass.
4. Select full color mode and print one copy of the chart.
5. Check the results of the copy with the customer.

Paper Tray Settings

Adjust the side-to-side registration for each paper tray as necessary.

• SP1-003-001 (Side-to-Side Reg: Tray1)
• SP1-003-002 (Side-to-Side Reg: Tray2)
• SP1-003-003 (Side-to-Side Reg: Tray3)
• SP1-003-004 (Side-to-Side Reg: Tray4)

Paper Library Data Installation

Follow this procedure to install the Paper Library data.

1. Create a folder in the root directory of an SD card and name the folder "mqp".
2. Copy the paper database file into the "mqp" folder, and then rename the copied file "library.mqp".
3. Make sure that the machine is OFF.
4. Insert the SD card containing the "library.mqp" file into SD card Slot 2 (lower slot) on the rear side
of the machine.

105
 2. Installation

5. Turn the machine main power ON.

6. Make sure that the data version of the SD card is newer than the data version of the flash ROM on
the controller. If it is not, store the latest data version of the Paper Library onto an SD card.
• The version of the data on the SD card can be checked with SP5711-202.
• The version of the data in the flash ROM on the controller can be checked with SP5711-201.
7. Access SP5-711-001 and tap [EXECUTE].
8. Tap [EXECUTE] again.
9. When the machine displays "Completed" and prompts you to re-boot, tap [Exit] to exit SP mode.
10. Turn the machine main power OFF and remove the SD card from Slot 2.
11. Turn the machine main power ON.
12. Check the Paper Library data version in SP5-711-201 (Flash ROM) to confirm that the Paper
Library data has been updated.

• Note the following 2 types of MQP data:

• MediaLib XX ProC5100 A(AB) : For ProC5100S only
• MediaLib XX ProC5110 A(AB) : For ProC5110S only
Backing up and restoring paper library data
This table describes the methods for backing up and restoring Paper Library data.

Adjustment Setting for

SP mode SD slot
Skilled Operators

Yes:
MQP data Install No Lower slot
SP5-711-001

106
 Main Machine Installation

Adjustment Setting for

SP mode SD slot
Skilled Operators

Custom Back up Yes No Slot on operation panel

paper
Library Restore Yes No Slot on operation panel

Saved Back up Yes No Upper slot

paper Yes:
Library Restore No Lower slot
SP5-711-002

How to back up and restore Custom paper library/Saved paper library in Adjustment Settings
for Skilled Operators
1. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot on the operation panel.
2. Tap [User Tools], and then tap [Adjustment Settings for Skilled Operators].
3. Tap [05: Machine Maintenance].
4. Tap [0703: Backup / Restore Custom Paper Data].
5. Tap [Back Up Saved Paper Library], [Back Up Custom Paper Settings], or [Restore Custom
Paper Settings].

Installation Procedure (D135/D136)

1. Unpack the machine and remove all the wrapping.

2. Place the machine at the installation site.
3. Remove all filament tape from the machine.

107
 2. Installation

4. Open the tandem tray [A] and remove the filament tape at the duplex unit [B].

5. Remove the filament tape and the cushion at the ADF.

108
 Main Machine Installation

6. Open the ADF [A] and release the lever to open the white board. Then remove the protection
sheet.

7. Remove the power cable from paper tray 2.

109
 2. Installation

8. Remove the protection sheet

Removing the Retainers of the Charge Roller Units (C, M, K)

The shipping retainers [A] must be removed from the charge roller units (C, M, K).

• These retainers is not included in the charge roller unit Y.

110
 Main Machine Installation

1. Pull out the drawer unit and remove its cover [A] ( x7).

• Make sure to hold down the lock lever ([A] in the photo below) when you pull out the unit.
(The unit is locked in place by this lever).

111
 2. Installation

2. Close the drawer unit.

• When you push the unit back in to the machine, you can close the guide plate [A] of the
paper exit and duplex unit.

3. Remove the ITB cleaning intake fan [A] together with the duct ( x 1).

4. Open the front cover of the toner supply unit [A].

112
 Main Machine Installation

5. Remove the fixing screws of the toner supply unit [A] ( x 3).

6. Pull out the toner supply unit [A].

113
 2. Installation

7. Remove the toner supply unit [A]. ( x2)

8. Remove the filament tape [A] from the faceplate.

9. Remove the screws fixing the face plate. ( x6)

10. Remove the handles.

114
 Main Machine Installation

11. Attach the handles and pull out the units slowly and evenly.

12. Hold the grips and remove the face plate.

13. Remove all filament tape [A] of Magenta and Cyan units.

115
 2. Installation

14. Unlock the lever [A] and pull out the PCDU [B] from the machine.

15. Place the PCDU [A] on the PCU stand [B].

116
 Main Machine Installation

16. Remove the charge roller unit and place it on a clean, flat surface with the roller facing up ( x2).

• Make sure that the surface is flat and level.

17. Remove the filament tapes [A] and retainers [B] from both ends of the charge roller unit.

18. Reattach the charger roller unit and PCDU, and then attach the face plate.

117
 2. Installation

• After attaching the face plate, check the status of the locking levers again by looking through
the holes as shown.
[A]: The locking lever is properly fit in the hole in the machine frame.
[B]: The locking lever is not properly fit in the hole in the machine frame.

Attaching the ITB Separation Lever

When unpacking the machine, the ITB separation lever is not yet attached to the correct location. During
machine installation, you must install the lever.
1. Open the drawer unit [A], and remove the ITB separation lever [B].

118
 Main Machine Installation

2. Drawer unit cover [A] ( x 7)

3. Close the drawer unit

• After removing the drawer unit cover, when the drawer unit is returned to the machine, you
can close the guide plate [A] of the paper exit and duplex unit.

119
 2. Installation

• When the drawer unit is pushed back into the machine, it is locked in place by the lock lever
[A]. (Make sure to hold down this lever whenever pulling out the unit).

4. ITB cleaning intake fan [A] along with the duct ( x 1).

5. Open the toner supply unit front cover [A].

120
 Main Machine Installation

6. Remove the fixing screws of the toner supply unit [A] ( x 3).

7. Slide the toner supply unit [A] to the front.

121
 2. Installation

8. Attach the ITB separation lever [A] horizontally from the right side of the machine.

9. Turn the ITB separation lever [A] clockwise until it is vertical.

122
 Main Machine Installation

10. Return the toner supply unit to the machine and secure it with the screws.
11. Attach the ITB cleaning intake fan and drawer unit cover

Attaching the Service Pocket

When Attaching to the Machine
1. Attach the service pocket [A] for the funnel/PCU holder to the left lower (rear) (rivet x 2). Put
the funnel [B], PCU holder [C], Development roller/Drum rotation tools and development
caps into the service pocket.

When Attaching to the Finisher

• Finisher SR4090/ Booklet Finisher SR4100: Attach to the following locations.
Rear side (upper): Operating instructions [A]
Rear side (lower): Funnel/ PCU holder [B]

123
 2. Installation

• Finisher SR4110: Attach to the following locations.

Rear side (upper): Operating instructions [A]
Rear side (lower): Funnel/ PCU holder [B]

124
 Main Machine Installation

Storing the Supply Port Cap of the Developer

Store the caps [A] (x 4) in the service pocket for the operating instructions. Use them during maintenance
if needed.

Storing the Factory SP Sheet

On a newly delivered machine, the factory SP sheet is located on the exposure glass.
Open the tandem tray [A], and remove the paper cassette decal [B]. Confirm that the factory SP sheet
[C] is stored inside.

Attaching the decals

1. Prepare the ADF paper set decal [A] and ADF caution decal ([B] or [C]).

125
 2. Installation

• [B]: ADF caution decal for CHN

• [C]: ADF caution decal for other countries
2. Attach the ADF caution decal to the position [A] on the ADF.

3. Attach the ADF paper set decal [A] in the indentation in the ADF.

126
 Main Machine Installation

4. According to the paper set by customer, select and attach the following decals to the 1st tray, 2nd
tray and 3rd tray.

RTB 155
Attach a
protective sheet
to the tandem
tray.

• Paper brand can be written on the blank space.

Machine Level Adjustment

When installing the main machine, make the machine level.

• If the machine is not leveled, the tilt of the machine reduces the accuracy in side-to-side registration.
• The front and rear side of the machine must be less than 5 mm (0.2") away from level.

127
 2. Installation

1. Place the four shoes [A] below the bolts [B] under each corner of the machine.
2. Turn the nuts [B] to lower the bolt until the bolts reaches to the leveling shoes [A].
Example below: Front side

• Use a wrench to raise or lower the nuts.

3. Open the ADF, and then place a level [A] on the exposure glass.

4. Adjust the machine level until the machine is less than 5mm from level (measure from left-to-right).
• When the right side of the machine is lower: Lower the nuts of the right side of the machine
(front and rear) to lift the right side of the machine.

128
 Main Machine Installation

• When the left side of the machine is lower: Lower the nuts of the left side of the machine (front
and rear) to lift the left side of the machine.
5. Open the ADF, and then place the level [A] along the side.

6. Adjust the machine level until the machine is less than 5mm from level (measure from front-to-rear).
• When the front side of the machine is lower: Lower the nuts of the front side of the machine
(left and right) to lift the front of the machine.
• When the rear side of the machine is lower: Lower the nuts of the rear side of the machine (left
and right) to lift the rear of the machine.

Installing the Securing Bracket to Prevent the Power Cord from Falling Off

1. Install the securing bracket [A] to prevent the power cord from falling off. ( x1)
Example below: D135/D136

129
 2. Installation

• D135/D136 machines have two power cords. Install a securing bracket for each power
cord.

How to Set the Toner Cartridge

• Be careful when setting the toner cartridges because the toner cartridges have different shapes,
and the cartridge may be damaged if you try to force a cartridge into the wrong place. The
position of the toner cartridges is Y, M, C, K from the left.

1. Open the toner supply unit front cover [A].

130
 Main Machine Installation

2. Unpack the new toner cartridge.

3. Reverse the toner cartridge and shake 5-6 times while grasping both ends.

4. Set each color toner cartridge. Push the toner cartridge until it locks into place.

ACC (Automatic Color Calibration) Adjustment

1. Check that there are no clamps etc. that you forgot to remove, and plug the power cord into its
power source.
2. Turn the main power switch ON.
3. Tap [User Tools].
4. To print a color pattern, select: Maintenance > Auto Color Calibration.
5. Tap [Start] for the Copier function.
6. Tap [Start Printing].
7. Put the color test pattern face-down with the arrow pointing to the rear left corner of the exposure
glass.
8. Tap [Start Scanning]. The machine scans the pattern once.
9. Do Steps 6-8 for the Printer function.

131
 2. Installation

Checking the copy image with the color chart

If you want to install any options, install them using the installation procedure before doing the
procedure below.
1. Switch the machine to copier mode.
2. Make sure that there is A3 or DLT paper in one of the trays.
3. Put a "Color Chart C-4" on the exposure glass.
4. Select full color mode and print one copy of the chart.
5. Check the results of the copy with the customer.

Paper Tray Settings

Adjust the side-to-side registration for each paper tray as necessary.

• SP1-003-001 (Side-to-Side Reg: Tray1)
• SP1-003-002 (Side-to-Side Reg: Tray2)
• SP1-003-003 (Side-to-Side Reg: Tray3)
• SP1-003-004 (Side-to-Side Reg: Tray4)

Security Function Installation

The machine contains the Security functions (Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit) built into
the controller board.
If you are installing a new machine, it is recommended to activate the Data Overwrite Security and HDD
Encryption unit by selecting "Format All Data" from “System Settings” on the operation panel.

• This method is recommended because there is no user data on the hard drive yet (Address Book
data, image data, etc.).
If the customer wishes to activate the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit on a machine
that is already running, it is recommended to activate the unit by selecting "All Data" from “System
Settings” on the operation panel.

• Selecting "All Data" will preserve the data that has already been saved to the hard drive. (If
"Format All Data" is selected, all user data saved to the hard drive up to that point will be erased).
Immediately after encryption is enabled, the encryption setting process will take several minutes to
complete before you can begin using the machine.

132
 Main Machine Installation

• If encryption is enabled after data has been stored on the disk, or of the encryption key is changed,
this process can take up to three and a half hours or more.
The machine cannot be operated while data is being encrypted.
Once the encryption process begins, it cannot be stopped.
Make sure that the machine's main power is not turned off while the encryption process is in progress.
If the machine's main power is turned off while the encryption process is in progress, the hard disk will be
damaged and all data on it will be unusable.
Print the encryption key and keep the encryption key (which is printed as a paper sheet).
Keep the encryption key in a safe place. If the encryption key is lost and is needed, the controller board,
hard disk and NVRAM must all be replaced at the same time.

• "NVRAM" mentioned in here means the NVRAM on the Controller Board.

• "NVRAM" or EEPROM on the BCU has nothing to do with this.
Please use the following procedure when the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption is
reinstalled.
Data Overwrite Security
Before You Begin the Procedure
1. Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at their factory default values.
(1) Supervisor login password
(2) Administrator login name
(3) Administrator login password
If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be
changed before you do the installation procedure.
2. Make sure that “Admin. Authentication” is on.
[System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools] -> [Administrator Authentication Management] ->
[Admin. Authentication]
If this setting is off, tell the customer this setting must be on before you do the installation
procedure.
3. Make sure that “Administrator Tools” is enabled (selected).
[System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools] -> [Administrator Authentication Management] ->
[Available Settings]
If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be enabled (selected)
before you do the installation procedure.

133
 2. Installation

Installation Procedure
1. Connect the network cable if it needs to be connected.
2. Turn on the main power switch.
3. Go into the SP mode and push “EXECUTE” in SP5-878-001.
4. Exit the SP mode and turn off the operation switch. Then turn off the main power switch.
5. Turn on the machine power.
6. Do SP5-990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report).
7. Go into the User Tools mode, and select [System Settings] [Administrator Tools] [Auto
Erase Memory Setting] [On].
8. Exit the User Tools mode.

This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten,

Icon [1]
and blinks during overwriting.

This icon is lit when there is no temporary data to be

Icon [2]
overwritten.

9. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon appears.
10. Check the overwrite erase icon.
The icon [1] is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks during
overwriting.

134
 Main Machine Installation

The icon [2] is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten.

HDD Encryption
Before You Begin the Procedure:
1. Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at the factory default settings.
(1) Supervisor login password
(2) Administrator login name
(3) Administrator login password
These settings must be set up by the customer before the HDD Encryption unit can be installed.
2. Confirm that "Admin. Authentication" is on: [User tools/Counter] key -> [System Settings] ->
[Administrator Tools] -> [Administrator Authentication Management] -> [Admin.
Authentication] -> [On]
If this setting is off, tell the customer that this setting must be on before you can do the
installation procedure.
3. Confirm that "Administrator Tools" is selected and enabled.
[User tools/Counter] key -> [System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools] -> [Administrator
Authentication Management] -> [Available Settings]
"Available Settings" is not displayed until step 2 is done.
If this setting is not selected, tell the customer that this setting must be selected before you can
do the installation procedure.
Installation Procedure:
1. Turn on the main power switch, and then enter the SP mode.
2. Select SP5878-002, and then press "Execute" on the LCD.
3. Exit the SP mode after "Completed" is displayed on the LCD.
4. Turn off the main power switch.
Enable Encryption Setting:
1. Press the [User tools/Counter] key.
2. Press [System Settings].
3. Press [Administrator Tools].
4. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].If this item is not visible, press [Next] to display more
settings.
5. Press [Encrypt].

135
 2. Installation

6. Select the data to be carried over to the hard disk and not be reset.
To carry all of the data over to the hard disk, select [All Data].
To carry over only the machine settings data, select [File System Data Only].
To reset all of the data, select [Format All Data].

7. The following message will be displayed. Press the [Start] key to print the encryption key for
safe keeping.

136
 Main Machine Installation

8. Press [Exit] to remove the following message.

9. Press [Exit] again.

10. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.

• After step 10, the initial operation display appears as below. However, HDD data
encryption has not been completed at this moment. Step 11 and step 12 should be
performed in order to encrypt the HDD data.

137
 2. Installation

11. Turn the main power switch off and on.

12. "Memory Conversion complete. Turn the man power switch off" is displayed as below. Then
turn the main power switch off and on.

13. Then initial operation display appears again. After this step, HDD data encryption has
already been completed.

138
 Main Machine Installation

Check the Encryption Settings

1. Press the [User tools/Counter] key.
2. Press [System Settings].
3. Press [Administrator Tools].

4. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].

139
 2. Installation

5. Please confirm whether the encryption has been completed or not on this display.
Print the encryption key
Use the following procedure to print the key again if it has been lost or misplaced.
1. Press the [User tools/Counter] key.
2. Press [System Settings].
3. Press [Administrator Tools].
4. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].
If this item is not visible, press [Next] to display more settings.
1. Press [Print Encryption Key].

140
 Main Machine Installation

Encryption key sample

The encryption key is printed out as a sheet of paper like the example shown above.
Please instruct the customer to keep it in a safe place.

Moving the Machine

Moving the SR4090/SR4100 finishers

D137/D138 RTB 25

1. Turn off the main power switch, and then unplug the power cable from the main machine.
2. Close all the doors and trays that are openable and closable, and then secure them in place with
shipping tape.
3. Make sure to follow all the precautions listed below when moving the machine. This is to prevent
the machine from being damaged and the drawer unit from coming out.
• Do not put a load on the ADF
• When moving the machine, push the machine instead of pulling the machine. Pulling the
machine may cause damage to the covers.
• When pushing the machine, push the upper side of the machine in the areas marked with red
rectangles below. If you move the machine over an uneven surface, insert your hands under

141
 2. Installation

the machine at the places marked with red rectangles below, and then lift the machine slightly
to get over the uneven surface.
• When you move the machine, face the left or right side of the machine toward the direction of
movement. Then, push the machine forward at a slow walking speed. Go slower if there are
any uneven areas on the floor.
• However, if you cannot face the left or right side forward, move the machine with the front
side facing forward (in the direction you are moving).
• Do not face the rear side of machine toward the direction of movement. This is because if the
floor is inclined upward, the trays and drawer unit may come out.

• Do not push or lift the locations marked with red rectangles below. You may damage the
machine.

142
 Main Machine Installation

D135/D136

1. Turn off the main power switch, and then unplug the power cable from the main machine.
2. Close all the doors and trays that are openable and closable, and then secure them in place with
shipping tape.
3. Make sure to follow all the precautions listed below when moving the machine. This is to prevent
the machine from being damaged and the drawer unit from coming out.
• Do not put a load on the ADF
• When moving the machine, push the machine instead of pulling the machine. Pulling the
machine may cause damage of the covers.
• When pushing the machine, push the upper side of the machine in the areas marked with red
rectangles below. If you move the machine over an uneven surface, insert your hands under
the machine at the places marked with red rectangles below, and then lift the machine slightly
to get over the uneven surface.
• When you move the machine, face the left or right side of the machine toward the direction of
movement. Then, push the machine forward at a slow walking speed. Go slower if there are
any uneven areas on the floor.
• However, if you cannot face the left or right side forward, move the machine with the front
side facing forward (in the direction you are moving).
• Do not face the rear side of machine toward the direction of movement. This is because if the
floor is inclined upward, the trays and drawer unit may come out.

• Do not push or lift the location marked with red rectangles below. You may damage the
machine.

143
 2. Installation

144
 Finisher SR4090 (D703) /Booklet Finisher SR4100 (D704)

Finisher SR4090 (D703) /Booklet Finisher

SR4100 (D704)
Accessory Check

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.

Q’ty
No Description
SR4090 SR4100

1 Lower output tray - 1

Shift Auxiliary Tray (use only when the Multi-Folding Unit

2 1 1
FD4000 is installed.)

3 Proof Auxiliary Tray 1 1

4 Cushion (with double-sided tape) 1 1

5 Docking Bracket 1 1

6 Upper output tray 1 1

7 Tapping screws – M3 x 6 6 6

8 Screw (Plastic) 2 2

9 Screws– M4 x 20 4 4

10 Tapping screws – M3 x 8 1 1

11 Grounding Plate 1 1

12 Joint Bracket 1 1

13 End Fence for lower output tray - 1

14 Proof Support Tray 1 1

15 Tray Holder - 1

16 Cover: Right Upper 1 1

17 Seal: Coupling 1 1

18 Holder: Stand 4 4

145
 2. Installation

Installation Procedure

• Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing the following procedure.

1. Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and packing materials from the finisher.

2. Open the front door [A], and then remove all tapes and packing materials from the inside of the
finisher.
3. Pull out the jogger unit [B], and then remove all tapes and retainers.

146
 Finisher SR4090 (D703) /Booklet Finisher SR4100 (D704)

4. Remove the upper bracket with the red tag attached [A] ( x 2).

5. Remove the lower bracket with the red tag attached [A] ( x 2).

6. Install the docking bracket [A] on the finisher. ( x 2; M3 x 6 )

147
 2. Installation

7. Attach the Cover: Right Upper [A] to the finisher. ( x 2)

• If the Cover Interposer Tray CI4010 (D711) is to be installed, DO NOT attach the Cover:
Right Upper.
8. Install the ground plate [B] on the finisher. ( x 2; M3 x 6 )

148
 Finisher SR4090 (D703) /Booklet Finisher SR4100 (D704)

9. Attach the cushion [A] to the finisher.

• Make sure that the cushion is placed within 0 to 1 mm from the edge of the cover.
10. Secure the docking bracket [A] with the screws in the center of each elliptical screw hole ( x 4;
M4x20).

149
 2. Installation

11. Attach the Seal Coupling [A] to the left side of the copier.

12. Remove the connector cover [A] from the main machine.

13. Open the front door [A] of the finisher, and pull the lock lever [B]. ( x 1)

150
 Finisher SR4090 (D703) /Booklet Finisher SR4100 (D704)

14. Slowly push the finisher against the left side of the machine, keeping its front door open until the
brackets go into their slots.

15. Push the lock lever [A], and then secure it ( x 1).

16. Connect the finisher connector [A] to the machine.

151
 2. Installation

17. Close the front door of the finisher.

18. Install the upper output tray [A] ( x 1; M3 x 8).

19. Only for D704, install the lower output tray [A].

20. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.

152
 Finisher SR4090 (D703) /Booklet Finisher SR4100 (D704)

21. Check the finisher operation.

22. Print out five A3 or DLT sheets to the proof tray and check the side-to-side registration as follows:
A3 sheets: Use the scale marks on the FRONT exit roller [B].
• If the paper edge lines up with the center marking [D], the paper is aligned correctly.
• If the paper edge is aligned with marks to the right of center, the paper is shifted toward the
front (operator) side.
• If the paper edge is aligned with marks to the left of center, the paper is shifted toward the
rear (non-operator) side.
DLT sheets: Use the scale marks on the REAR exit roller [A].
Check the side-to-side registration in the same way, using the rear rollers.
23. If side-to-side registration is shifted, see page 1368 "Adjustment 009: Staple misalignment (3 mm or
more) occurs" and correct the shift.

[A]: Scale marks for DLT

[B]: Scale marks for A3
[C]: 7 scale marks in 2mm intervals
[D]: Center mark
24. Print out some sheets with center-folding and make sure that the folding line is not misaligned or
shifted.

• If the folding line is misaligned or shifted, see the Troubleshooting section and make
adjustments. (See page 1529 "How to improve center-folding accuracy (SR4100)")

Auxiliary Trays

Make sure that the customer understands the following points about these auxiliary trays:

153
 2. Installation

• The trailing edges of excessively curled or Z-folded paper can activate the tray full sensors before
the tray is actually full.
• Once the "Exit Tray Full" message displays, the job cannot continue until some sheets are removed
from the tray which is only partially full. The trays are designed to prevent this problem.
Shift Auxiliary Tray
Install the shift auxiliary tray [A] ONLY when the “Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 (D615)” is included
in the configuration. Note that the Shift Auxiliary Tray [A] may generate unexpected side effects,
for example, paper jams caused by displaced paper height detection feeler [B].

Proof Auxiliary Tray

Install the proof auxiliary tray [B] on the proof tray [A] when using the Z-fold function.

154
 Finisher SR4090 (D703) /Booklet Finisher SR4100 (D704)

Proof Support Tray

Install the proof support tray [A] on the proof tray when the trailing edges of paper are excessively
curled.

155
 2. Installation

Output Jogger Unit Type M2 (D705)

This option is for the Finisher SR4090 (D703) /Booklet Finisher SR4100 (D704) only.
It jogs the sheets delivered to the finisher shift tray.

Component Check

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.

No Description Qty

1 Jogger Unit 1

2 Tapping Screws M3 x 6 2

Installation

• Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing the following procedure.

1. Disconnect the finisher from the main frame.

2. Remove the cover plate [A]. ( x 2). Keep the screws.

156
 Output Jogger Unit Type M2 (D705)

3. Use the flat head of a screwdriver to remove the left upper cover [A]. (hook x 3)

4. Rear cover [A] ( x 2)

157
 2. Installation

5. Open the clamp [A] to release the connector [B].

6. Connect the connector to the upper left cover and close the clamp..

7. Attach the rear cover [A] ( x 2)

158
 Output Jogger Unit Type M2 (D705)

8. Attach the jogger unit [A] to the finisher. ( x 2)

• When you install the jogger unit, put the hooks of the frame of the jogger unit into the holes in
the left and right sides of the finisher frame.
9. Fasten the connector [A] of the jogger unit to the socket. ( x 1)

159
 2. Installation

10. Reattach the jogger unit cover [A] to the jogger unit ( x 2).

160
 Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

Accessory Check

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.

No Description Qty

1 Paper Chip Guide 1

2 Hopper Bracket 1

3 Punch Unit Slide Stay 1

4 Registration Guide Plate 1

5 Registration Sensor Bracket 1

6 Punch Unit 1

7 Punch Waste Hopper 1

8 Stepper Motor Bracket 1

9 Harness Connector Cable-PCB 1

10 Tapping Screw (M3 x 6) 14

11 E-ring 1

161
 2. Installation

Installation Procedure

• Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing the following procedure.

1. If the finisher is connected to the machine, disconnect it.

2. If the finisher is installed on the machine, remove it.
3. Remove the rear upper cover [A] of the finisher. ( x 2 )

4. Remove the rear lower cover [A] of the finisher. ( x 2 )

162
 Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

5. Open the front door [A], and then remove the punch hopper bracket [B]. ( x 2 )

6. Pull out the stapling unit [A]. (Booklet Finisher SR4100 (D704) only)

7. Remove the inner upper cover [A] from the front side of the finisher. ( x 2)

163
 2. Installation

• Disconnect the harness from the back side of the inner upper cover when you remove the
inner upper cover.

8. Remove screw [A] of the transport guide plate from the rear side of the finisher. ( x 1 )

164
 Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

9. Remove the transport guide plate [A].

10. Install the punch unit slide stay [A] from the rear side of the finisher.

11. Fasten the punch unit slide stay. (Front side [A]: x 2, Rear side [B]: x 2)
• Front side:

165
 2. Installation

• Rear side:

12. Insert the paper chip guide [A] into the finisher as shown below.

13. Install the paper chip guide. (Front side [A]: hook x 2, Rear side [B]: hook x 2, snap ring x 1)

166
 Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

• Hook the paper chip guide onto the front side of the finisher first, and then hook it onto the
rear side of the finisher.
• Front side:

• Rear side:

14. Fasten the paper chip guide with an E-ring from the rear side of the finisher. (snap ring x 1)

167
 2. Installation

• When fastening the paper chip guide with the snap ring, make sure the front side of the paper
chip guide is hooked onto the small-diameter slot [A].

15. Insert the hopper bracket [A] into the finisher as shown below.

168
 Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

16. Hook the hopper bracket onto the frame [A] [B] of the finisher.

169
 2. Installation

• Make sure the hooks [A] and [B] of the hopper bracket are also hooked onto the finisher.

170
 Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

17. Fasten the hopper bracket [A]. ( x 2)

171
 2. Installation

18. Route the harness of the hopper bracket [A] inside the finisher as shown.

19. Route the harness of the hopper bracket to the rear side of the finisher. (locking edge saddle x 1,
x 3)

20. Insert the registration guide plate [A] from the rear side of the finisher.

• Hook [A] and [B] of the registration guide plate onto the slotted holes of the finisher.

172
 Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

21. Fasten the registration guide plate. (front side: x 1, rear side: x 1)
• Front side:

• Rear side:

173
 2. Installation

22. Inert the registration sensor bracket from the rear side of the finisher.

• Hook [A] of the registration sensor bracket into the slotted holes of the finisher.

23. Fasten the registration sensor bracket. (rear side: x 2)

174
 Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

24. Inert the punch unit [A] from the rear side of the finisher.

• Make sure the shaft [A] on the finisher is inserted into the punch unit [B].

175
 2. Installation

• When inserting the punch unit, make sure the bracket [A] of the punch unit is in the right
position as shown below.

25. Fasten the punch unit. (rear side: x 2)

176
 Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

• Make sure the bracket of the punch unit fits the embossed parts [A] on the finisher.

26. Install the stepper motor bracket [A] from the rear side of the finisher.

177
 2. Installation

• Insert the hole [A] of the stepper motor bracket into the shaft [B] on the rear side of the finisher.

• Make sure the rack [A] of the punch unit is engaging with the pinion [B] of the stepper motor
bracket when you insert the stepper motor bracket.

27. Fasten the stepper motor bracket. ( x 2)

178
 Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

28. Connect the harness [A] of the registration sensor bracket to the harness [B] from the hopper
bracket. ( x 1)

29. Connect the harness [A] of the registration sensor bracket to the harness [B] from the punch unit.
( x 1)

179
 2. Installation

30. Connect the harness connector cable provided with the punch unit to the main board [A] of the
finisher. ( x 2)

• The end that is split into two connectors must be connected to the main board.
31. Route the harness connector cable as shown below. ( x 6)

180
 Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

• Route the harness inside the I/F bracket [A] as shown below.

32. Connect the harness connector cable to the PCB [A] on the punch unit. ( x 3)

181
 2. Installation

33. Connect the harness [A] of the stepper motor bracket to the PCB [B] in the punch unit. ( x 3)

34. Connect the harness [A] of the registration sensor bracket to the PCB [B] in the punch unit. ( x 1)

35. Gather the harnesses of steps 32-34 [A] with your hands, and then fasten them with the clamps as
shown below. ( x 6)

182
 Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

• When you clamp the harness in clamp [A], clamp the harness between the two binds [B].

• Route the harness [A] of the punch unit over the PCB as shown below.

36. Slide the punch waste hopper [A] into the finisher from the rear.

183
 2. Installation

37. Pull back the stapling unit.

38. Re-attach the covers, and then re-install the finisher on the main machine. ( page 145 "Finisher
SR4090 (D703) /Booklet Finisher SR4100 (D704)")
39. Connect the finisher connector to the main machine.
40. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
41. Check the finisher operation.

184
 Finisher SR4110 (D707)

Finisher SR4110 (D707)

Accessories

Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.

Description Q'ty

1. Side Tray 1

2. Sponge Strip 1

3. Ground Plate 1

4. Entrance Guide Plate 1

5. Joint Bracket 1

6. Shift Tray 4

7. Support Plate 1

8. Support Plate Pocket 1

9. Tapping Screws – M3 x 6 2

10. Tapping Screws – M3 x 8 4

11. Tapping Screws – M4 x 8 2

12. Screws – M4 x 14 4

13. Screws – M4 x 20 4

14. Leveling Shoes 1

15. Support Plate for Shift Tray 1

16. Coupling Seal 1

17. Support Plate for Proof Tray 1

• The output jogger unit is pre-installed on this finisher, so it is not an option.

185
 2. Installation

Spacer
A spacer for correcting paper skew is attached to the bottom right of the finisher.

[A]: Spacer for skew correction and side-to-side registration adjustment

Installation Procedure

• Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you do this procedure.

1. Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
2. Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and shipping retainers.

186
 Finisher SR4110 (D707)

3. Open the front door and remove the shipping retainers.

4. Remove the brackets, tags, and wires in this order: [A]> [B]> [C] ( x 2 each).
5. Be sure to remove the two sheets of paper [D].

6. Install the ground plate [A]. ( x 2; M3 x 6)

Set the ground plate so that there is no gap between the plate and the bottom frame of the finisher
(as shown).
7. Install the table extension [B]. ( x 2; M4 x 8)
The edge of the table extension should be aligned with the edge of the finisher.
8. Attach the cushion [C] to the right side of the upper cover.
9. Install the entrance guide plate [D]. ( x 2; M3 x 6)

187
 2. Installation

10. Insert the shift tray [A] into the grooves and fasten it. ( x 4; M3 x 8)

Docking the Finisher D707

The Finisher (D707) is docked to one of the following:

• Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 (D615)
• Cover Interposer Tray CI4020 (D712)
• Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020 (D751) (D137/D138 Only)
• Decurl Unit DU5020 (D727) (D137/D138 Only)
• Main Machine
Finisher D707 to Cover Interposer Tray CI4020
1. Fasten the joint bracket [A] to the Cover Interposer Tray CI4020.

188
 Finisher SR4110 (D707)

2. Dock the finisher. (See “Connecting the Finisher D707”)

• Attach the black mylar [A] provided with the cover interposer tray accessories to the relay
guide plate [B] of the Finisher D707.

RTB 159
Delete this note

Finisher D707 to Main Machine or Other Upstream Unit

1. Remove the connector cover [A].
2. Fasten the joint bracket [B] to the Copier.

189
 2. Installation

3. Attach the coupling seal [A] to the copier.

4. Dock the finisher. (See “Connecting the Finisher D707”)

Connecting the Finisher D707

1. Open the front door of the finisher.

2. Pull out the locking lever [A]. ( x 1)
3. Align the finisher [B] with the joint brackets [C], then slowly push the finisher onto the brackets.
4. Connect the finisher cable [D] to the copier
5. Push in the locking lever. [A]
6. Check that the top edges of the finisher are parallel with edges of the device (or copier) to the right.
7. Fasten the locking lever [A]. ( x 1)
8. Close the front door.

190
 Finisher SR4110 (D707)

9. Set the leveling shoes [A] (x4) under the feet.

10. Turn the nuts to adjust the height of the finisher until it is level.

How to Use the Spacer to Correct Paper Skew

A spacer for correcting paper skew is attached to the bottom right of the finisher.

191
 2. Installation

[A] Spacer for skew correction and side-to-side registration adjustment

1. Check to see if the paper is skewed when it is exited from the machine.
2. If skew correction is required, dock the finisher to the copier using the M4x20 screws included with
the finisher.

• This is because the M4x14 screws will not be long enough when the spacer(s) are attached.

• When you attach the bracket, attach the spacer(s) as follows:

• If the leading edge is skewed about 2mm toward the front (operator) side of the
machine, attach a 2mm spacer to the rear side of the joint bracket.
• If the leading edge is skewed about 2mm toward the rear (non-operator) side of the
machine, attach a 2mm spacer to the front side of the joint bracket.

[A]: Joint Bracket

[B]: Spacer

192
 Finisher SR4110 (D707)

[C]: Finisher side

[D]: Main machine (Mainframe) side
[E]: Adjustable direction

[A]: Screws (with spacer(s): M4 x 20, without spacer(s): M4 x 14)

[B]: Joint Bracket
[C]: Without spacer
[D]: With 1-2 spacers
[E]: Exterior Cover
3. If skew correction is NOT required, dock the finisher to the copier using the M4x14 screws
included with the finisher.

• This is because without the spacer, the M4x20 screws are too long and the bracket cannot be
fastened in place.

193
 2. Installation

[A]: Folding Unit

[B]: Joint Bracket
[C]: Screw (M4 x 20)
[D}: Screw is too long and cannot be fully inserted

SP Setting

1. Enter the SP mode.

2. Do SP5841-11 and enter the name of the staples used for corner stapling.
• This is the name that shows when the user prints the Inquiry List.
• To print this list push User Tools> [Inquiry]> [Print Inquiry List]> [Start].

194
 Punch Unit PU5000 (B831)

Punch Unit PU5000 (B831)

Component Check

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list:

No. Description Q'ty

1. Punch Unit 1

2. Punch Waste Collection Hopper 1

3. Spacer (2 mm) 1

4. Spacer (1 mm) 2

5. Knob 1

6. Step Screw 1

7. Screw (M4 x 6) Black 1

8. Screw (M3 x 10) 2

9. Spring 1

10. Sensor Arm and Sensor 1

195
 2. Installation

Installation Procedure

This punch unit is for the D707 finisher only.

• Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure.

1. If the finisher is connected to the main machine, disconnect it.

2. Open the front door and remove the rear cover ( x 2).
3. Unpack the punch unit and remove the step screw from the lower section of the unit.

4. Remove the motor protector plate [A] ( x 4).

5. Remove the cam lock plate [B] ( x 2).

6. Pull out the stapling unit.

7. Remove the inner cover [A] ( x 4, M3 x 8).

196
 Punch Unit PU5000 (B831)

8. Behind the inner cover at [B] and [C], press the lock tab to the right to release the inner cover from
the frame.
9. Remove the plastic knockouts [D].

10. Remove the rear cover. ( x 2)

11. Remove the punch cover [A]. ( x 1)

12. Remove the paper guide [A] ( x 4).

197
 2. Installation

13. Position the 2 mm spacer [A] and attach the punch unit [B] ( x 2, M3 x 10).
14. Use one of the screws removed from the motor protector plate to fasten the remaining two spacers
to the frame as shown.

• These extra spacers can be used to adjust the position of the punch holes (front to rear, across
the page).

15. At the front, fasten the punch unit knob [A] ( x 1, M4 x 6).

198
 Punch Unit PU5000 (B831)

16. Remove the harness cover [A] ( x 2) and middle cover [B] ( x 2).

17. Install the sensor arm [A] ( x 1, small step screw (M3 x 4). Make sure that the sensor arm swings
freely on the step screw.
18. Attach the spring [B].

199
 2. Installation

19. Connect the PCB harness connector [A] to CN135 of the finisher PCB and to CN600 of the punch
unit PCB.
20. Connect the harness [B] to CN136 of the finisher PCB.
21. Connect the single end of the hopper full sensor connector cable [C] to the hopper full sensor on
the arm ( x 1, x 2).

• No special DIP switch settings are required for this punch unit. A signal from the punch
identifies itself by sending a signal to the copier.

22. Reattach the harness cover [A] ( x 2) and middle cover [B] ( x 2).

200
 Punch Unit PU5000 (B831)

23. Slide the punch waste collection hopper [A] into the finisher.

24. Reattach the inner cover and rear cover.

25. Close the front door and re-connect the finisher to the machine.

201
 2. Installation

Cooling Fan Unit Type M2 (D770) D135 RTB 146

New procedure

• This option is to be installed to Finisher SR4090 (D703) or Booklet Finisher SR4100 (D704) or
Finisher SR4110 (D707).
• When installing this option to the Finisher SR4090 (D703) or Booklet Finisher SR4100 (D704),
install it after installing the Output Jogger Unit Type M2 (D705).
• This option is purposed to cool down the sheets delivered to the finisher shift tray.

Component Check

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.

No Description Qty

1 Cooling Fan Assembly 1

2 Interface Unit 1

3 Tapping Screw M3 X 16 1

4 Locking Wire Saddle CKN-13 3

5 Haness: Fan: Separation 1

6 Harness: Fan 1

7 Tapping Screw M3 X 6 3

8 Wire Saddle : LWSM-0511A 1

9 PCB: OKB 1

10 Bracket (for Finisher SR4110) 1

11 Lower Cover (for Finisher SR4110) 1

12 Upper Cover (for Finisher SR4110) 1

202
 Cooling Fan Unit Type M2 (D770)

Common Installation Procedure for Finisher SR4090 / Booklet Finisher SR4100

and Finisher SR4110

• Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing the following procedure.

1. Remove the left middle cover. ( page 532 "Left Middle Cover")
2. Remove the rear middle cover. ( page 537 "Rear middle cover")
3. Attach the PCB: OKB [B] to bracket [A] ( x 1; M3X6 tapping screw / accessory #7).

203
 2. Installation

4. Attach the Wire Saddle: LWSM-0511A [B] (accessory #8) to the bracket [A].

5. Connect the connectors [A] and [B] of the Harness: Fan: Separation (accessory #5) to the
PCB:OKB.

204
 Cooling Fan Unit Type M2 (D770)

6. Lock harness [A] Harness: Fan: Separation (accessory #5) ( x 5).

205
 2. Installation

7. Connect the harness [A] Harness: Fan: Separation (accessory #5) clamped in step 6 to the
connector [B] of Harness: Fan (accessory #6).

8. Disconnect the connector [A], then connect [A] to the connector [B] of the Harness: Fan (accessory
#6) connected in step 7.

206
 Cooling Fan Unit Type M2 (D770)

9. Connect the remaining connector [A] of the Harness: Fan (accessory #6) to connector [B].

10. Lock the Harness: Fan (accessory #6) with the clamp as shown.

207
 2. Installation

11. Disconnect connector [A].

• When disconnecting the white relay connector [B], make sure it remains connected to the
connector attached to the purple harness [C]. If it remains connected to the connector
attached to the red, white and black harnesses, harnesses could be connected falsely in the
following steps.
12. Connect the remaining connectors [A] and [B] of the Harness: Fan: Separation (accessory #5) to
connectors [C] and [D] disconnected in step 11.

208
 Cooling Fan Unit Type M2 (D770)

• Harnesses [A] and [C] should be purple.

• Harnesses [B] and [D] should be different colors.
13. Clamp the harness [A] with the clamp.

14. Attach the Left Middle Cover ( x 2) and Rear Middle Cover ( x 4).
15. Remove the upper screw [A] from the rear lower cover ( x 1).

209
 2. Installation

16. Peel off the tapes from the Velcro [B] attached to the interface unit [A] (accessory #2).

17. Align the screw hole [C] against the surface of the cover [A], and attach the interface unit [B] with
its Velcro against the surface of the cover.

210
 Cooling Fan Unit Type M2 (D770)

18. Attach the interface unit [A] to the lower left cover with M3X16 screw (accessory #3).

19. Connect connector [A] to the copier.

211
 2. Installation

Installation Procedure for Finisher SR4090/ Booklet FinisherSR4100

1. Remove the cover [A] from the Output Jogger Unit Type M2 ( x 2).

• The removed cover will not be used.

2. Remove the cover [A] from the Cooling Fan Assembly ( x4).
Do not remove screw [B].

3. Remove the cover [A] and take out the cooling fan unit [B] ( x4).

212
 Cooling Fan Unit Type M2 (D770)

4. Route the ends of the harness [B] through the hole [A] on the fan unit bracket.

5. Attach the bracket [A] by fastening the screw (M3X6; x1) to the hole [B] . Then, fix the ground wire
[C] to the hole [D] with screw (M3X6; x1).

213
 2. Installation

6. Mount the fan unit [A] on the Output Jogger Unit Type M2 [B] ( x 4).
• Screws #1 and #3 will fasten the fan unit, output jogger unit and copier.
• Screws #2 and #4 will fasten the fan unit and output jogger unit.

7. Attach the cover [A] removed in step 3 ( x 4).

214
 Cooling Fan Unit Type M2 (D770)

8. Connect the harness of the fan unit ( x1). Clamp the harness with the clamps ( x 2).

9. Attach the cover [A] of the cooling fan unit ( x 2).

Make sure the tabs on both sides of the cover [B] (colored in grey) lap over the plate (colored in
green).

215
 2. Installation

10. Insert the 4 tabs [B] to the upper cover to attach the cover [A].

216
 Cooling Fan Unit Type M2 (D770)

11. Bind the interface unit harness [A] and clamp it with the Locking Wire Saddle CKN-13 [B]
(accessory #4) as shown.

217
 2. Installation

• Depending on the number of options installed between the copier and Finisher SR4090/
SR4100, 3 pcs of Locking Wire Saddle CKN-13 might be needed to clamp the harness.

Installation Procedure for Finisher SR4110

1. Remove the upper cover [A] from the Cooling Fan Assembly ( x2).

2. Remove the lower cover [A] from the Cooling Fan Assembly ( x2).

3. Place the Fan Assembly [A] on a table with the upper and lower covers removed.

218
 Cooling Fan Unit Type M2 (D770)

4. Release the 3 clamps attached to the cooling fan assembly.

5. Disconnect the connector.

6. Remove the bracket [A] ( x 2).

219
 2. Installation

7. Remove the rocker switches [B] and [C] from the bracket [A] removed in step 6 (connectors [D], [E]
and [F]).

8. Remove the fan motor [A] from the bracket [B] ( x4, x1).

9. Remove the spring plate [B] ( x1) and the resistor harness [C] from the bracket [A].

220
 Cooling Fan Unit Type M2 (D770)

10. Assemble the fan motor [A] and bracket [B] (for Finisher SR4110) (accessory #10) ( x4).

11. Remove the knob screw [C] and snap ring [B] from the upper cover [A] removed from the cooling
fan unit in step 1.

221
 2. Installation

12. Remove the air shield [B] from the upper cover [A].

13. Remove the bracket [B] from the air shield [A] ( x2).

14. Assemble the air shield [A] and Upper Cover (for Finisher SR4110) [B] (accessory #12) with the
snap ring and knob screw removed in step 11.

222
 Cooling Fan Unit Type M2 (D770)

15. Attach the spring plate [B] removed in step 9 to the Lower Cover (for Finisher SR4110) (accessory
#11) [A] ( x1).

16. Prepare the following parts:

• Rocker switches [A] and [B]
• Harness removed in step 9 [C]
• Lower cover of Finisher SR4110 [D]

223
 2. Installation

17. Route the harnesses through the openings [D] and attach the rocker switches [B] and [C] to the
lower cover of Finisher SR4110 [A].

• Attach the rocker switch [B] so that the white dot marking positions to the side indicated with
the arrow in the photo below.
• Attach the rocker switch [C] so that the side connected with the harness corresponds to the
direction of the arrow shown in the photo below.

18. Insert the resistor harness [A] into the spring plate [B].

224
 Cooling Fan Unit Type M2 (D770)

19. Connect the connectors [A] and [B].

20. Connect the 2 connectors [A] to the rocker switch [B].

21. Remove the clamp [B] from the bracket [A] removed in step 7. Then attach the clamp [B] to the hole
[C] on the lower cover of Finisher SR4110.

225
 2. Installation

22. Remove the jogger unit cover [A] from Finisher SR4110 ( x2).

23. Mount the fan motor unit on Finisher SR4110 by aligning the hooks [A] and [B] with the cutouts [C]
and [D] ( x2).

226
 Cooling Fan Unit Type M2 (D770)

24. Attach the lower cover [A] assembled in step 21 by inserting the tabs [B] and [C] to the grooves [D]
and [E] located under the cooling fan unit ( x2).

• Grooves [D] and [E] refer to the wider groove (toward the upstream of the unit).

227
 2. Installation

25. Connect the connectors [A] and [B].

228
 Cooling Fan Unit Type M2 (D770)

26. Fix the harness [A] from the interface unit mounted on the copier in page 203 "Common Installation
Procedure for Finisher SR4090 / Booklet Finisher SR4100 and Finisher SR4110" ( x 1 for ground
wire [B], x 1 for bracket [C], x1 [D]).

27. Clamp the harness ( x1).

28. Mount the upper cover [A] assembled in step 14 on the cooling fan unit ( x5).

229
 2. Installation

29. Bind the harness of the interface unit [A] and clamp it with Locking Wire Saddle CKN-13 [B]
(accessory #4).

• Depending on the number of options installed between the copier and Finisher SR4110, 3
pcs of Locking Wire Saddle CKN-13 might be needed to clamp the harness.

230
 Cooling Fan Unit Type M2 (D770)

Information for Cooling Fan Unit Type M2

Cooling Fan Unit Type M2 activates under the following condition.

Main Power Switch [A] of Mainframe

Cooling Fan Unit Type M2 Printing/Copying Ready status

ON Active Inactive

OFF Inactive Inactive

• Always keep the main power switch of the Cooling Fan Unit Type M2 ON, because the
power is supplied from mainframe.
• Cooling Fan Unit Type M2 does not activate even with the mainframe power switched ON, if
the printer is in ready status. Cooling Fan is activated only while print/copy operations.
Instruction for Customer
How to adjust the fan power
Cooling Fan Unit Type M2 is equipped with an fan power adjustment switch [B]. Fan power can be
set to either maximum or minimum. If poor stacking is confirmed as a result of excess air volume, set
this switch to minimum.
If the air volume needs to be fine adjusted, rotate the knob screw [C], which will change the
position of the air shield [D] inside the unit. Air shield can be fixed at the desired position by
tightening the knob screw. (Air shield [D] is located inside the meshed cover.)

1: Max air volume

231
 2. Installation

2: Min air volume

232
 Copy Tray Type M2 (D744)

Copy Tray Type M2 (D744)

Component Check

Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.

No. Description Q'ty

1. COPY TRAY:EXIT:ASS'Y 1

2. BRACKET:COOLING UNIT:ASS'Y 1

3. COOLING UNIT:ASS'Y 1

4. CLAMP:LWC-3A 1

5. TAPPING SCREW:4X8 2

6. TAPPING SCREW:ROUND POINT:3X6 2

7. SCREW:M4X20 4

8. LEVER 1

9. BRACKET:SENSOR:PAPER VOLUME SENSOR 1

10. SPRING PLATE:SENSOR:EXIT 1

11. PHOTOINTERRUPTOR:GP1A173LCS2F 1

12. CLAMPS:WES-0507 1

13. SHEET:COPY TRAY:EXIT 1

14. DECAL:CAUTION:EXIT 1

15. TAPPING SCREW - M3X6 1

16. TAPPING SCREW:3X8 2

17. CONNECTOR:2-292246-2 (for use with D135/D136 only) 1

18. CLAMP:LWSM-0511A 1

19. PCB:OKB 1

20. HARNESS:EXIT:TRAY:COOLING UNIT:OKB 1

233
 2. Installation

No. Description Q'ty

21. TAPPING SCREW:ROUND POINT:3X6 1

Installation Procedure

• Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you do this procedure.

234
 Copy Tray Type M2 (D744)

1. Remove the rear middle cover. ( x 4)

2. Remove the left middle cover [A]. ( x 2)

3. Open the drawer unit [A].

4. Attach the sheet [A] to the left side of the drawer unit.

235
 2. Installation

• There are four cutouts in the sheet.

• Align the left-most cutout with the corner [A] of the paper exit.

5. Attach the paper height sensor [A] and harness clamp [B] to the sensor bracket [C].
6. Attach the actuator [F] to the actuator arm bracket [D].
7. Attach the actuator bracket [D] to the sensor bracket [C]. ( x 1; M3 x 6)
8. Connect the sensor harness [E] to the sensor bracket [A]. ( x 1, x 1)
9. Attach the sensor bracket [C] to the main machine. ( x 2; M4 x 8)

236
 Copy Tray Type M2 (D744)

10. D135/D136 only: Remove the interface cable cover. ( x 1)

11. D135/D136 only: Attach the "CONNECTOR: 2-292246-2". ( x 2; M3 x 8)

12. Attach the PCB:OKB ( x 1)

237
 2. Installation

13. Attach the CLAMP:LWSM-0511A.

14. Connect the branched (divided) end of the HARNESS:EXIT:TRAY:COOLING UNIT:OKB to the
PCB:OKB.

15. Bind the harness as shown in the photo. ( x 5)

238
 Copy Tray Type M2 (D744)

16. D135/D136 only: Connect the harness tied with a bind to the rear side of “CONNECTOR:
2-292246-2”.

• If you leave this harness unconnected or connect it to the front side, SC534-02 (Duplex
Exhaust Fan/Rear Lock) will occur.

• D137/D138: Connect the harness tied with a bind to the peripheral interface port as shown
in the following steps.
• Disconnect the harnesses from the peripheral interface port.

239
 2. Installation

• Connect the harness tied with a bind to the rear side of the peripheral interface port.

• Reconnect the front side of the harness disconnected in the first step to the peripheral
interface port.

17. Disconnect the harness [A].

18. Connect the “HARNESS:EXIT:TRAY:COOLING UNIT:OKB” to the harness that was disconnected
in Step 17 above.

240
 Copy Tray Type M2 (D744)

• In this step, make sure to connect the purple harnesses to each other, and the black/white
harnesses to each other. DO NOT connect harnesses of a different color. If the colors are
different, SC534-02 (Duplex Exhaust Fan/Rear Lock) will occur.

• [A]: Correct
• [B]: Incorrect
• 1 (OK):Purple harnesses connected to each other
• 2 (OK): Black/white harnesses connected to each other
• 3 (NG): Black/white harness connected to purple harness
19. Bind the harnesses that you connected in Step 18, so that they run between the two clamps ( x
2).

241
 2. Installation

• If you do not bind the harnesses, they may get caught on the left middle cover and trigger
SC547-02 (Zero Cross Error).
20. Make four holes [A] in the left cover with a screwdriver.

21. Reattach the left upper cover. ( x2)

22. Reattach the rear middle cover. ( x 4)
23. D135/D136 only: Remove the connector cover from the rear middle cover.

242
 Copy Tray Type M2 (D744)

24. Attach the copy tray [A].

• Remove the packing material from the copy tray before attaching the tray.

243
 2. Installation

25. Install the cooling unit [A] on the cooling unit bracket [B]. (hook x2)

26. Fasten the cooling unit to the cooling unit bracket. ( x2; M3 x 6)

244
 Copy Tray Type M2 (D744)

27. Install the cooling unit bracket [A] on the left side of the main machine. ( x4; M4 x 20)

245
 2. Installation

28. Attach the cable clamp [A] provided with the copy tray to the main machine. Then route the
harness as shown below. ( x 1)

29. D135/D136 only: Connect the interface cable of the cooling unit to the interface [A] whose cover
you removed in Step 23.

• If you leave this connector unconnected, SC534-02 (Duplex Exhaust Fan/Rear Lock) occurs.
30. Turn the machine main power switch ON.
31. Set SP1-907-001 (Exit Tray Full Detection) to “1: ON”.

• The default setting of this SP is “0: OFF”. It must be set to “1: ON” in order for tray full
detection to work.
32. Attach the decal [A] to the left side of the main machine.

246
 Copy Tray Type M2 (D744)

• Align the lower side of the decal with the marker [A] on the main machine when you attach
the decal to the main machine.

33. Turn the power switch [A] of the cooling fan ON.

247
 2. Installation

• Always keep the power switch of the cooling fan ON. This is because the fan is installed prevent
paper from sticking together and jamming during duplex printing due to undried toner. (The fan
stops when the print/copy job is complete).
• If the sound of the fan is unacceptable to the customer, or the air from the fan pushes thin paper off
the exit tray, advise the customer to power off the fan as necessary.
• If jams still occur while the fan is ON, tilt the fan 90 degrees, as described in page 1459
"Troubleshooting for Blocking on the Paper Output Tray".

248
 Decurl Unit DU5020 (D727) (D137/D138 Only)

Decurl Unit DU5020 (D727) (D137/D138

Only)

• The decurl unit is top heavy and has an extremely narrow base. It can fall over easily. Work
carefully to avoid knocking it over.
• Do not set this unit upright until you are ready to install it and connect it to the side of the main
machine.
• Never leave this unit standing upright and unattended in the work area during installation.

Accessories

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following illustration and list.

No. Description Q'ty

1. Screws M3x6 3

2. Screws M4x8 1

3. Screws M4x16 4

4. Screws M4x8 4

5. Leveling Shoes 3

6. Joint Bracket – L 1

7. Joint Bracket – R 1

8. Small Bracket 1

9. Sponge Strip 1

10. Paper Guide 1

11. Mylar – Black 1

12 Mylar – Transparent 1

249
 2. Installation

Installation Procedure

• Make sure that the main machine is switched off and that its power cord is disconnected before
doing the following procedure.

1. Remove the retainers [A]. ( x 4)

• Keep the screws. They will be needed to reinstall the retainers after connecting the decurl unit
with the main unit.

250
 Decurl Unit DU5020 (D727) (D137/D138 Only)

2. Loosen the screws [A] of the retainers. ( x 2)

3. Install the retainers on the decurl unit. ( x 4)

Install the retainers [A] alternately on both sides of the decurl unit as shown below.
• Left side of the decurl unit

251
 2. Installation

• Right side of the decurl unit

4. Fasten the screws [A] loosened in step 2. ( x 2)

• Left side of the decurl unit

• Right side of the decurl unit

252
 Decurl Unit DU5020 (D727) (D137/D138 Only)

5. Open the front door.

6. Remove tapes and retainers.

7. Disassemble the paper guide for this peripheral unit [A]. ( x 2)

8. Attach the transparent mylar [B].

• [C]: 0 to 1 mm
9. Assemble the paper guide. ( x2)
10. Peel the tape from the sponge strip [A] and attach it to the top right edge of the unit.

253
 2. Installation

11. Attach the paper guide [B]. ( x2; M3x6)

12. Attach the following to the main machine:

• [A] Right joint bracket, marked "R" ( x2; M4x16)
• [B] Left joint bracket, marked "L" ( x2; M4x16).

254
 Decurl Unit DU5020 (D727) (D137/D138 Only)

13. Remove the interface connector cover [A] from the main machine.

14. Open the front door [A].

15. Remove the screw of the lock bar [B] ( x1). Keep this screw.

16. Remove the retainers installed in step 3. ( x4)

17. Push the decurl unit [A] against the main machine so that the lock bar is below the joint brackets.

255
 2. Installation

18. Push in the lock bar [A] and fasten it with the screw removed in step 15. ( x 1)

19. Reinstall the retainers [A] removed in step 16 as shown below. ( x 4)

20. Connect the I/F cable [A] of the decurl unit to the main machine.

256
 Decurl Unit DU5020 (D727) (D137/D138 Only)

21. Set the leveling shoes [A].

22. Adjust the height of the unit and make sure that it is level.

23. Remove the paper guide of the downstream peripheral device.

24. Disassemble the paper guide [A]. ( x2)
25. Attach the black sheet [B].

257
 2. Installation

• [C]: 0 to 1 mm
• [D]: 0 to 1 mm

• If the downstream peripheral device is Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020 (D751), don’t attach the
black mylar. The mylar for the decurl unit is provided with the buffer pass unit.

Connect the Downstream Peripheral Device

If the down stream peripheral device is Finisher SR4090 (D703) or Booklet Finisher SR4100
(D704)
1. Attach the following to the decurl unit.
[A]: Right joint bracket( x2; M4x8)
[B]: Left joint bracket ( x2; M4x8).

258
 Decurl Unit DU5020 (D727) (D137/D138 Only)

If the downstream peripheral device is Cover Interposer Tray CI4010 (D711) or Cover
Interposer Tray CI4020 (D712)
1. Install the small bracket [A] on the cover interposer tray [B]. ( x1)

2. Connect the downstream unit.

If the downstream peripheral device does not have a connecting section (such as Buffer Pass
Unit Type 5020 (D751))
1. Remove the rear upper cover [A] of the decurl unit. ( x4)

259
 2. Installation

2. Remove the rear lower cover [A] of the decurl unit. ( x2)

3. Remove the connecting bracket [A].

260
 Decurl Unit DU5020 (D727) (D137/D138 Only)

4. Connect the downstream unit.

• When you remove the decurl unit, hold it in the lower half, lower than the middle.

Paper curl adjustment when Decurl Unit DU5020 connects with Finisher SR4090 or
Booklet Finisher SR4100

1. Print out 10 sheets of A4/LT in stapling mode, LEF.

2. Check the paper curl.
3. Adjust the paper curl in [System setting] - [Paper curl Correction level].

261
 2. Installation

Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020 (D751) (D137/

D138 Only)
Accessory Check

No. Description Q'ty

1. Screws (M4 x 8) 2

2. Screws (M4 x 16) 4

3. Leveling Shoes 4

4. Docking Bracket (L) 1

5. Docking Bracket (R) 1

6. Wide Mylar (50.0mm width) 2

7. Narrow Mylar (35.5mm width) 2

8. Sponge Strip 1

9. Power Cord 1

10. Ground Plate 1

262
 Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020 (D751) (D137/D138 Only)

Installation

• The unit must be connected to a power source that is close to the unit and easily accessible.
• Make sure that the main machine is switched off and that its power cord is disconnected before
doing the following procedure.
• The buffer pass unit is unstable and can fall over easily. To avoid personal injury or damage to the
unit, use caution when you pull out the buffer pass unit drawer until the unit has been docked to the
main machine.
• The power cord that comes with the buffer pass unit is for use with this equipment only. Do not use it
with other appliances. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
• Rated Voltage of Output Connector [A] for Accessories: Max. DC 24 V.

Fuse Rating (DC5V, DC24V Fuse)

PCB: CTB

263
 2. Installation

ID Rating Manufacturer Type No.

[A] CP1 DC32V/5A IDEC CORP NRPS10-G5A

[B] CP2 DC6V/1.5A TYCO ELECTRONICS CORP miniSMDC150F

1. Remove all visible external tapes on the external surfaces.

2. Open the front door [A] and remove all visible tapes.

• There are no tapes inside the unit.

• The unit is top heavy and unstable. Use caution when you pull out the buffer pass unit drawer
until this unit has been connected to the main machine.

3. Remove the right cover [A] of the buffer pass unit. ( x 6)

264
 Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020 (D751) (D137/D138 Only)

4. Attach the ground plate [A]. ( x 2)

5. Remove the entrance guide [A]. ( x 2)

265
 2. Installation

#01: When connecting the Buffer Pass Unit with the mainframe

• If the Buffer Pass Unit is to be connected to the Decurl Unit DU5020 (D727), go to "#02: When
connecting the Buffer Pass Unit with the Decurl Unit DU5020 (D727)".
This section describes the procedure for attaching the Wide Mylar to the entrance guide that was
removed in step 5.

[A]: Wide Mylar (50mm, accessory item #6)

[A]: Upper entrance guide

[B]: Lower entrance guide
Attaching the Wide Mylar to the Upper entrance guide
1. Peel off the sheet from the double stick tape [C] on the Wide Mylar.

266
 Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020 (D751) (D137/D138 Only)

2. Attach the Wide Mylar to the Upper entrance guide by aligning the edge [D] of the Mylar
with the edge (1) of the guide plate, and edge [E] of the double stick tape with the edge (2) of
the guide plate.

3. Confirm the Wide Mylar is attached correctly to the Upper entrance guide as shown in the
photo below.

Attaching the Wide Mylar to the Upper entrance guide

1. Peel off the sheet from the double stick tape [C] on the Wide Mylar.
2. Attach the Wide Mylar to the Lower entrance guide by aligning the edge [D] of the Mylar
with the edge (1) of the guide plate, and edge [E] of the double stick tape with the edge (2) of
the guide plate.

267
 2. Installation

3. Confirm the Wide Mylar is attached correctly to the Lower entrance guide as shown in the
photo below.

1. Attach the entrance guide to the buffer pass unit. ( x 2)

2. Attach the right cover of the buffer pass unit. ( x 6)
3. Attach the sponge strip [A] (accessories item #8) to the Buffer Pass Unit as shown in the illustration
below.

268
 Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020 (D751) (D137/D138 Only)

4. Attach the docking bracket Right [A] (accessories item #5) and docking bracket Left [B]
(accessories item #4) to the main frame. ( x 2 each)

5. Remove the connector cover [A] from the mainframe.

269
 2. Installation

6. Open the front door, then pull out the locking lever [A]. ( x 1)

7. Push the buffer pass unit against the mainframe to dock the units.
8. Push the lock lever [A] and fasten it with the screw removed in step 6. ( x 1)

9. Connect the I/F cable of the buffer pass unit to the socket [A] on the mainframe.

270
 Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020 (D751) (D137/D138 Only)

Go to page 276 "Common Procedure".

#02: When connecting the Buffer Pass Unit with the Decurl Unit DU5020 (D727)

This section describes the procedure for attaching the Wide Mylar to the entrance guide that was
removed in step 5.

[A]: Wide Mylar (50mm, accessories item #6)

271
 2. Installation

[A]: Upper entrance guide

[B]: Lower entrance guide
Attaching the Wide Mylar to the Upper entrance guide
1. Peel off the sheet from the double stick tape [C] on the Wide Mylar.
2. Attach the Wide Mylar to the Upper entrance guide by aligning the edge [D] of the Mylar
with the edge (1) of the guide plate, and the shorter edge [E] of the Mylar with the edge (2)
of the guide plate.

• Alignment position of edge [E] is different from when connecting the buffer pass unit to
the mainframe.

3. Confirm the Wide Mylar is attached correctly to the Upper entrance guide as shown in the
photo below.

272
 Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020 (D751) (D137/D138 Only)

Attaching the Wide Mylar to the Lower entrance guide

1. Peel off the sheet from the double stick tape [C] on the Wide Mylar.
2. Attach the Wide Mylar to the Lower entrance guide by aligning the edge [D] of the Mylar
with the edge (1) of the guide plate, and edge [E] of the double stick tape with the edge (2) of
the guide plate.

• Same as when connecting buffer pass unit to the mainframe.

3. Confirm the Wide Mylar is attached correctly to the Lower entrance guide as shown in the
photo below.

273
 2. Installation

1. Attach the entrance guide to the buffer pass unit. ( x 2)

2. Attach the right cover of the buffer pass unit. ( x 6)
3. Remove the rear upper cover [A] of the Decurl Unit. ( x 4)

4. Remove the lower rear cover [A] of the Decurl Unit. ( x 2)

274
 Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020 (D751) (D137/D138 Only)

5. Remove the bracket [A] from the Decurl Unit. ( x 3)

6. Attach the docking bracket Right [A] (accessories item #5) and docking bracket Left [B]
(accessories item #4) to the paper exit side of the Decurl Unit. ( x2 each)

275
 2. Installation

7. Connect the I/F cable of the Decurl Unit to the socket [A] of the mainframe. Then connect the Buffer
Pass Unit with the Decurl Unit similarly to steps 4 through 6 of page 266 "#01: When connecting
the Buffer Pass Unit with the mainframe".

Go to page 276 "Common Procedure".

Common Procedure

1. Set the leveling shoes [A] and adjust the height of the unit.

276
 Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020 (D751) (D137/D138 Only)

2. Remove the 2 screws [A] on the front side of clamping bracket [D].
3. Turn the Kc5 lever [B] counter clockwise and pull out the buffer pass unit drawer [C].
4. Remove the clamping bracket [D]. ( x 2)
5. Remove the 4 shipping brackets [E]. ( x 1 each)
6. Slide in the buffer pass unit drawer [C].
7. Close the front door [F].

277
 2. Installation

8. Attach the docking bracket [A] of the downstream unit to the left side of the buffer pass unit.
(Illustration below is an example showing the bracket for SR4110.)

9. Attach the Narrow Mylar [A] (35.5mm, accessories item #7) to the entrance guide of the
downstream unit (for example, the SR4110) by referring to the procedure described on the
following page.

278
 Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020 (D751) (D137/D138 Only)

Attaching the Narrow Mylar to the Upper entrance guide

1. Peel off the sheet from the double stick tape [A] on the Narrow Mylar.
2. Attach the Narrow Mylar to the Upper entrance guide by aligning the edge [B] of the double
stick tape with the edge (1) of the guide plate, and the edge [C] of the double stick tape with
the edge (2) of the guide plate.

3. Confirm the Narrow Mylar is attached correctly to the Upper entrance guide as shown in the
photo below.

Attaching the Narrow Mylar to the Lower entrance guide

1. Peel off the sheet from the double stick tape [A] on the Narrow Mylar.
2. Attach the Narrow Mylar to the Lower entrance guide by aligning the edge [B] of the Mylar
with the edge (1) of the guide plate, and edge [C] of the double stick tape with the edge (2)
of the guide plate.

279
 2. Installation

3. Confirm the Narrow Mylar is attached correctly to the Lower entrance guide as shown in the
photo below.

1. Dock the downstream unit to the buffer pass unit.

2. Connect the power cord [A] provided with the buffer pass unit to the power inlet on the buffer pass
unit.

3. Connect the buffer pass unit power cord to the wall socket, and then connect the mainframe power
cord to the wall socket.

280
 Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020 (D751) (D137/D138 Only)

• Make sure the power cords are plugged to the wall socket in the above order. Otherwise, the
buffer pass unit will not be recognized by the mainframe when turning on the power in the
following step, and cause a paper jam in the buffer pass unit.
4. Turn ON the main power switch on the mainframe.
5. Confirm proper function of the buffer pass unit to complete the procedure.

281
 2. Installation

Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 (D615)

Accessories

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following illustration and list.

No. Description Q'ty

1. Joint Bracket 1

2. Paper Guide – Long (for D135/D136/D137/D138) 1

3. Paper Guide – Short (for D131/D132/D133) 1

4. Proof Tray Auxiliary Plate - Bottom 1

5. Ground Plate 1

6. Screws 3x6 2

7. Screws M3x6 2

8. Screws M4x20 4

9. Screws M4x14 (Not used) 4

10. Leveling Shoes 5

11. Power Cord *1 1

12. Sponge Strip 1

*1: When using this unit in China, do not use this power cord provided with this unit. Contact your
supervisor and use the power cord specified for use in China.

282
 Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 (D615)

Installation

• The unit must be connected to a power source that is close to the unit and easily accessible.
• Make sure that the main machine is switched off and that its power cord is disconnected before
doing the following procedure.

Tapes

1. Remove all tape and packing material from the front, left, rear, and right sides.

2. Open the front door [A].

3. Remove all tape from inside [B].

283
 2. Installation

Paper Guide, Sponge Strip

1. Fasten the joint bracket [A] to the left side of the upstream unit. ( x4; M4x20)

2. Fasten the joint bracket provided with the downstream device to the left side of the multi-folding
unit, if a downstream device is going to be installed. ( x4; M4x14)

284
 Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 (D615)

• Use the screws provided with the downstream device.

3. Select the long paper guide for the installation.
• Two paper guides are provided.
• The short paper guide is for another machine (D131/D132/D133).

• If the upstream peripheral device is the Decurl Unit DU5020 (D727), attach the black mylar
provided with the cover interposer tray or decurl unit to this paper guide.
4. Attach the long paper guide [A] to the left side of the multi-folding unit. ( x2; M3x6)
5. Peel the tape from the sponge strip [B] and attach the strip to the top right edge of the multi-folding
unit.

285
 2. Installation

Ground Plate

1. Attach the ground plate [A] to the lower right edge of the unit. ( x2; M3x6)

Docking

Do the step 8 to 12, only if the upstream unit is the Cover Interposer Tray CI4020 (D712).
1. Open the front door [A].
2. At the front right corner, remove the screw of the lock bar [B] ( x1 M3x6). Keep this screw.
3. Push in the lock bar.

286
 Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 (D615)

4. Slowly push the unit [C] against the left side of the upstream unit (or main machine) so that the lock
bar is directly and squarely under the arms of the joint bracket.
5. Pull out the lock bar so it slides up into the notches in the arms on both ends of the joint bracket [D].
6. Fasten the lock bar by re-attaching the screw removed in Step 2 ( x1).
7. Connect the I/F cable [E] to the upstream unit (or main machine).

• If you are connecting to the main machine, you must first remove the plastic cap on the I/F
cable connection point.

8. Remove:
• [A] Rear upper cover ( x4)
• [B] Rear lower cover ( x3)

287
 2. Installation

9. Use a short screwdriver to loosen bracket [A] ( x2).

10. Fasten the bracket to the upstream unit at [B] ( x1).
11. Tighten the screws ( x3).

12. Re-attach the rear covers.

Power Cord

1. Insert the power cord socket [A] into the power connection point.

• In China, do not use this power cord provided with this unit. Contact your supervisor and use
the power cord specified for use in China.

288
 Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 (D615)

2. Plug in the power cord for the Multi-Folding Unit into an AC wall outlet.
3. Disconnect the power cord from the copier, and then press the main power switch.

• This releases the charge remaining inside the machine. If you do not do this step, the copier
will not recognize the Multi-Folding Unit and paper jams will occur. (See page 517 "Notes
on the Main Power Switch".)
4. Plug in the power cord for the copier into an AC wall outlet.
5. Turn on the main power switch.

• If the copier main power turns on automatically when you plug in the cord, wait until the
machine finishes warming up. Then, turn the main power OFF and ON again.
6. Make sure that the Multi-Folding Unit operates correctly.

Height Adjustment

Adjust the height of the unit and make sure that it is level.
1. Turn the lower nut to lower the bolt.
2. Set the leveling shoes [A] below the bolt.

289
 2. Installation

Removing Parts for the Cover Interposer Tray CI4020 (D712)

Three parts must be removed before the tray unit of the cover interposer tray can be mounted on top of
the Multi Folding Unit.
1. Open the front door.

• The following parts require removal only if the upstream unit is the Cover Interposer Tray
CI4020 (D712).
• These parts must be removed so that the tray unit of the Cover Interposer Tray will fit on top of
the Multi Folding Unit.
2. Remove:
• [A] Bracket ( x1)
• [B] Cross-piece ( x2)
• [C] Metal plate from the door ( x2)
3. After removing [B] and [C], reattach [A].

290
 Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 (D615)

Proof Tray Auxiliary Plate

1. Install the proof tray auxiliary plate.

• Set the plate [A] in the center aligned with the diagonal groove.
• The back should be flat against the end fence.
2. When the plate is not being used, open the front door and store the plate at [B] inside the inner
cover.
• The plate should be used when Z-folded paper (all sizes) is output to the proof tray.
• If the plate is not used with Z-folded output, the pages could mix and overlap.

Detecting Paper Skew

Do this check to detect the presence of skew in the paper path.

1. Make sure that the I/F cable of the unit is connected to the upstream unit.

291
 2. Installation

2. If a peripheral unit is connected on the left side, disconnect it and pull it away.
3. Execute a straight-through run.
4. Check the scale where each sheet exits.
• The rear scale is for DLT-size paper.
• The front scale [2] is for A3-size paper.
• Be sure to read the correct scale for the paper size in use.

[A] Centered. No adjustment necessary.

[B] Trailing edge skew to the front, total skew more than ±2 mm. Adjustment required.

[C] Trailing edge skew to the rear, total skew more than ±2 mm. Adjustment required.

Correcting Skew

1. Disconnect the multi folding unit from the upstream unit.

2. Remove the spacers from the multi folding unit.

292
 Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 (D615)

3. Loosen the screws ( x4) of the joint bracket attached to the upstream unit.
4. Insert a spacer and tighten the screws.
If the trailing edge of the paper is skewing toward the front of the machine, insert a spacer [A]
under the rear end of the bracket and tighten the screws.
-or-
If the trailing edge is skewing toward the rear of the machine, insert a spacer [B] under the front
end of the bracket and tighten the screws.

5. Do another run to check the adjustment. If skew is still present, insert another spacer.
• Each spacer is 2 mm thick.
• Only two spacers are provided, so the maximum adjustment is 4 mm (using two spacers).

293
 2. Installation

Checking Side-to-Side Registration

Do this procedure to confirm that the paper is centered in the paper path.
1. Make sure that the I/F cable of the unit is connected to the upstream unit.
2. Disconnect the unit to the left of the unit to be tested.
3. Execute a run by feeding paper from Tray 2 of the host machine.
4. When each sheet exits, check the position of the paper on the scale to see if the paper is centered.
• Read the rear scale for DLT-size paper
• Read the front scale for A3-size paper.
• The scale lines are spaced 2 mm apart.
5. The paper must not deviate more than ±2 mm on the scale.

[A] Leading/trailing edges centered. No adjustment necessary.

[B] Leading/trailing edges offset to the rear by more than 2 mm. Adjustment required.

[C] Leading/trailing edges offset to the front by more than 2 mm. Adjustment required.

If the edge of the paper is on the scale at the center [A], no adjustment is required.
-or-
If the edge of the paper is ±2 mm off the center line on the scale, adjustment is required. Do the
procedure in the next section.

Correcting Side-to-Side Registration

1. Disconnect the multi-folding unit from the upstream unit.

294
 Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 (D615)

2. On the joint bracket attached to the upstream unit, loosen screws , , , and .
3. Remove bracket [A] ( x1), rotate it 90 degrees, and re-fasten the screw. Changing the position of
this bracket aligns the oval cut-out horizontally and frees the joint bracket so it can slide from side
to side.
4. Look at the scale [B].
5. Slide the bracket to the left or right and tighten the screw.
6. If the deviation from center was toward the front, slide the bracket to the rear and tighten the screw
.
-or-
If the deviation from center was toward the rear, side the bracket to the front and tighten the screw
.
7. Tighten screws , , and .
8. Do another test run, so that you can check the results of the adjustment.

295
 2. Installation

Mail Box CS4010 (D708) (D135/D136 Only)

The Mail Box CS4010 is installed on the Finisher SR4090 or Booklet Finisher SR4100. It cannot be
installed with the Cover Interposer Tray CI4010. (Either the mailbox or cover interposer tray can be
installed on top of the finisher, but not both.)

Accessories

Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.

No. Description Qty

1. Trays 9

2. Guide plate 1

3. Tapping screws - M3x8 6

4. Decals (bin display) 1

Installation Procedure

• Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you start this procedure.

1. Remove the filament tape [A].

296
 Mail Box CS4010 (D708) (D135/D136 Only)

• Move the mailbox carefully. It is easy to cause damage to the corner leaf plate [B].

2. If the Cover Interposer Tray CI4010 is installed on the Finisher SR4090 or Booklet Finisher
SR4100, remove it.

• The cover interposer tray and mailbox cannot be installed on the finisher at the same time.
3. Remove the finisher from the main machine.
• Disconnect the finisher connector [A] to the machine.

297
 2. Installation

• Open the front door [A] of the finisher, and pull the lock lever [B]. ( x 1)

• Remove the finisher from the main machine.

4. Remove the top cover [A] from the finisher ( x 2).

298
 Mail Box CS4010 (D708) (D135/D136 Only)

5. Install the finisher on the main machine.

• Slowly push the finisher against the left side of the machine, keeping its front door open until
the brackets go into their slots.

• Push the lock lever [A], and then secure it ( x 1).

299
 2. Installation

• Connect the finisher connector [A] to the machine.

6. Attach the guide plate [A] to the top of the finisher ( x 2, M3 x 8).

300
 Mail Box CS4010 (D708) (D135/D136 Only)

7. Attach the mailbox [A] to the top of the finisher ( x 4, M3 x 8).

8. Attach the 9 trays [B] to the mailbox.
9. Give the decals [C] to the customer. The customer will write on these and attach them at the correct
location.

10. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.

11. Check the finisher operation.

301
 2. Installation

Cover Interposer Tray CI4010 (D711)

Cover Interposer Tray CI4010 (D711) is for installation on the Finisher SR4090 (D703)/Booklet
Finisher SR4100 (D704) only and not on Finisher SR4110 (D707).
Cover Interposer Tray CI4010 (D711) inserts cover or slip sheets into copied or printed outputs.

Accessories

Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.

No. Description Q'ty

1 Plate Extension (bottom) 1

2 Rear cover extension (bottom) 1

3 Front door extension (top) 1

4 Front door extension (bottom) 1

5 Connecting Bracket (rear) 1

6 Connecting Bracket (front) 1

7 Front Joint Bracket 1

8 Rear Joint Bracket 1

9 Right front corner plate 1

10 Right Rear Cover Plate 1

11 Cushion (with double-sided tape) 1

12 Label 1

13 Gasket Seals 2

14 Screws– M4 x 14 4

15 Shoulder screw 2

16 Tapping screws – M3 x 6 6

17 Tapping screws – M4 x 16 3

18 Tapping screws – 3 x 6 2

302
 Cover Interposer Tray CI4010 (D711)

No. Description Q'ty

19 GUIDE PLATE:CONNECTING:LOWER 1

Installation Procedure

• Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing the following procedure.

1. Remove all tape and retainers from the cover interposer tray.

303
 2. Installation

2. If the finisher is connected to the main machine, disconnect it.

• Disconnect the finisher connector [A] from the main machine.

• Open the front door [A] of the finisher, and pull the lock lever [B]. ( x 1)

304
 Cover Interposer Tray CI4010 (D711)

• Disconnect the finisher from the main machine.

3. Remove the front joint bracket [A] and rear joint bracket [B]. ( x 4)

305
 2. Installation

4. Remove the cover [A] from the finisher.

5. Remove the docking bracket [A] from the finisher. ( x 2)

Also see RTB 130

306
 Cover Interposer Tray CI4010 (D711)

6. If the "Decurler Unit DU5020 (D727)" or "Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020 (D751)" is included in the
configuration, the original guide plate [A] must be replaced with "GUIDE PLATE: CONNECTING:
LOWER" (item#19 of accessories).

• With the original guide plate installed, lever [A] will catch the optional device if released for
jam recovery.
1) Release the lever [A].

307
 2. Installation

2) Remove the guide plate [A] ( x 2).

The original guide plate will no longer be used and does not have to be stored.
3) Attach the new guide plate [A] (item#19 of accessories) to the frame of the cover interposer (
x 2).

4) Lift up the lever to its home position.

7. Install the front connecting bracket [A] and rear connecting bracket [B]. ( x 2; 3 x 6)

308
 Cover Interposer Tray CI4010 (D711)

8. Install the shoulder screws from inside the finisher. ( x 2; shoulder screws)
• Front side [A]: ( x 1)
• Rear side [B]: ( x 1)

9. Open the finisher front door, and then install the cover interposer tray [A] on the finisher.

309
 2. Installation

• Make sure the cover interposer tray is set on the shoulder screws installed in step 7.

10. Fasten the cover interposer tray on the finisher. ( x 1; M3 x 6)

11. Install the 4 screws in the front door of the finisher. ( x 4; M4 x 8)

310
 Cover Interposer Tray CI4010 (D711)

12. Install the bottom front cover extension [A] on the front door. ( x 2; screws installed in step 10)

13. Install the top front cover extension [A] on the front door. ( x 2; screws installed in step 10)

311
 2. Installation

14. Install the rear cover extension [A] on the right side of the finisher. ( x 2; M3 x 6)

15. Remove the ground plate [A] from the finisher. ( x 2)

312
 Cover Interposer Tray CI4010 (D711)

16. Install the ground plate [A] provided with the cover interposer tray. ( x 2; M3 x 6)

17. Install the ground plate [A] removed in step 14. ( x 2; screws removed in step 15)

18. Peel the 2 labels from the finisher.

• Front side: The label is placed at [A]
• Rear side: The label is placed at [B].

313
 2. Installation

19. Temporary tighten the screw [A] at the front side of the finisher. ( x 1; M4 x 16)

20. Install the right front corner plate [A], and fasten the screw installed in step 18. ( x 1; M4 x 16)

21. Temporary tighten the two screws [A] at the rear side of the finisher. ( x 2; M4 x 16)

314
 Cover Interposer Tray CI4010 (D711)

22. Install the right rear cover plate [A], and fasten the screws installed in step 20. ( x 2; M4 x 16)

23. Attach the cushion [A] to the finisher.

315
 2. Installation

24. Open the front door of the finisher, and pull the lock lever [A]. ( x 1)

• Keep the screw that you removed.

25. Install the front joint bracket [A]. ( x 2; M4 x 14)
26. Install the rear joint bracket [B]. ( x 2; M4 x 14)

316
 Cover Interposer Tray CI4010 (D711)

27. Attach the gasket seals [A] and [B].

317
 2. Installation

28. Slowly push the finisher with cover interposer tray against the left side of the machine, keeping its
front door open until the brackets go into their slots.

29. Push the lock lever [A], and then secure it. ( x 1; screw removed in step 23).

30. Connect the finisher connector [A] to the main machine.

31. Plug the machine and switch the machine on.

318
 Cover Interposer Tray CI4010 (D711)

32. Enter the [System Settings].

33. Set the [Interposer] for the [Front Cover Sheet Tray], [Back Cover Sheet Tray], and [Designation
Sheet 2 Tray] of the [Tray Paper Settings].

319
 2. Installation

Cover Interposer Tray CI4020 (D712)

Cover Interposer Tray CI4020 (D712) is for installation on the Finisher SR4110 (D707) only and not on
Finisher SR4090 (D703)/Booklet Finisher SR4100 (D704).
Cover Interposer Tray CI4020 (D712) inserts cover or slip sheets into copied or printed outputs.

Accessories

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.

No. Description Q'ty

1. Base Cover (Tray Unit) 1

2. Rear Cover 1

3. Spacer 1

4. Relay Guide Plate 1

5. "L" Hinge Pins (Tray Unit Front Cover) 2

6. Sponge Strip 1

7. Leveling Shoes 4

8. Front Docking Bracket 1

9. Rear Docking Bracket 1

10. Screw (M4 x 14) 4

11. Screw (M3 x 6) 2

12. Screw (M3 x 8) 1

13. Screws (M4 x 8) 7

14. Flat Knob Screw 1

320
 Cover Interposer Tray CI4020 (D712)

Installation Procedure

Setting up the Unit and Docking to the Copier

• Unplug the power cord before starting the following procedure.

1. Remove all the tape and shipping materials from the tray unit [A].

2. Remove cover [A].

321
 2. Installation

3. Remove all tape and shipping materials from the transport unit [B].

4. Remove the interface connector cover [A].

5. Attach the rear docking bracket [B] ( x2; M4x14).
6. Attach the front docking bracket [C] ( x2; M4x14).

7. Peel the tape from the back of the sponge strip [A] and attach it as shown.
8. Attach the relay guide plate [B] ( x2; M3x6).
9. Remove the ground plate [C] from the bottom cross-piece ( x2).
10. Turn the ground plate over.
11. Reattach the ground plate with the same screws as shown ( x2).

322
 Cover Interposer Tray CI4020 (D712)

12. Open the front door of the cover interposer tray.

13. Pull out the locking lever [A].
14. Align the finisher [B] with the joint brackets [C], then slowly push the finisher onto the brackets.
15. Connect the finisher cable [D] to the copier
16. Push in the locking lever.
17. Check that the top edges of the finisher are parallel with edges of the finisher (or copier) to the
right.
18. Fasten the locking lever [A]. ( x 1)

19. Push the runners [A] and [B] in and re-fasten them again with the screws.

323
 2. Installation

20. Close the front door.

Docking the Next Peripheral Device

The next peripheral device to the left of the cover interposer tray must be installed before you can mount
the tray unit on top of the transport unit of the cover interposer tray.
• The tray unit of the cover interposer tray is supported by the top of the next peripheral device in line
to the left, as well as the transport unit of the cover interposer.
• The next peripheral device to the left of the cover interposer must be set up and docked to the cover
interposer before the transport unit of the cover interposer can be mounted.
Connect the next peripheral unit now.
• Finisher SR4110 ( page 185 "Finisher SR4110 (D707)")

• Never attempt to mount the cover interposer tray unit until the next device in line has been docked
to the transport unit (base) of the cover interposer tray.
• To prevent bending the frame of the tray unit and damaging its alignment, always remove the tray
unit from the cover interposer tray transport unit: (1) Before disconnecting either the cover
interposer tray or the next peripheral device to the left, or (2) Before doing any maintenance on
either the cover interposer tray or the next peripheral device to the left.

Mounting the Tray Unit

1. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x2).

2. Confirm that the connectors [B] are free.
3. Place the tray unit [C] on top of the cover interposer transport unit.

324
 Cover Interposer Tray CI4020 (D712)

4. Attach the knob screw [D] ( x1).

5. Connect the harness connectors [E] ( x5)

6. Reattach the rear cover.

7. Remove the front inner cover [A] from the dual-tray unit ( x2).
8. Fasten the tray unit to the top of the transport unit with the knob screws [B] ( x2; M4x8).

9. Attach the base cover [A] ( x1; M4x10).

10. Confirm that the holes in the cover match the positions of the reference pins.

325
 2. Installation

11. Re-attach the front inner cover [B] (removed at step 7 above).
12. Position the tray unit front door [C] so that its hinges match the posts on the frame of the tray unit.
13. Hold the lower L-pin [D] as shown, insert it halfway, push it up, then rotate it into its groove.
14. Hold the upper L-pin [E] as shown, insert it halfway, push it down, then rotate it into its groove.

15. Attach the spacer [A] to the rear of the transport unit ( x2; M4x12).

16. Set the leveling shoes [A] (x4) under the feet.

326
 Cover Interposer Tray CI4020 (D712)

17. Turn the nuts to adjust the height of the cover interposer until it is level.

327
 2. Installation

LCIT RT4020 (D709)

Accessories

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.

No Description Q'ty

1 Stay 1

2 Rail 1

3 Tapping screws – M3 x 6 2

4 Tapping screws – M4 x 14 2

5 Shoulder screws 2

6 Decal: caution chart: paper set direction 1

7 Decal: LED 1

Installation Procedure

• Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing the following procedure.

1. Remove all tape and retainers from the LCT.

328
 LCIT RT4020 (D709)

2. Remove the paper entrance cover [A] from the main machine. ( x 2)

3. Install the stay [A] on the main machine. (M3 x 6; x 2)

329
 2. Installation

4. Remove the connector cover [A] from the main machine.

5. Install the rail [A] on the right side of the main machine. (M4 x 14; x 2)

330
 LCIT RT4020 (D709)

• The rail must be standing on the floor. If the screw holes on the LCT are too high or too low,
and do not overlap the vertical screw slots in the rail, the rubber feet of the rail must be
adjusted. ( page 336 "Adjustment for the Rubber Foot Positions on the Rail")
6. Set the LCT [A] on the rail [B], and then slide it towards the main machine.

7. Install the LCT on the main machine.

331
 2. Installation

8. Open the top right cover [A].

9. Right cover [A] ( x2)

10. Fasten the rail to the LCT. (shoulder screws; x 2)

332
 LCIT RT4020 (D709)

• When you fasten the rail to the LCT, the screw holes [B] of the rail need to be in the same
position as the screw holes [A] of the LCT.

11. Reattach the right cover, and then connect the plug [A] of the LCT power connector to the side of
the machine.

333
 2. Installation

12. Prepare the Decal: caution chart: paper set direction [A].

13. Open the top right cover and attach the decal as shown below.
Select one of the decals according to the paper that will be used by the customer.

334
 LCIT RT4020 (D709)

• Paper type, brand, etc can be written on the blank space.

14. Attach a decal to the front.

D137/D138: Attach the Decal: LED supplied with the LCIT.

D135/D136: Attach a blank sheet on the paper size decal supplied with the main machine.

335
 2. Installation

15. Plug in the machine and turn it on.

• To move down the paper tray, cover the photosensor with your left hand and press the bottom
plate operation button [A].

Adjustment for the Rubber Foot Positions on the Rail

The rail must be standing on the floor. If the screw holes on the LCT are too high or too low, and do not
overlap the vertical screw slots in the rail, the rubber feet of the rail must be adjusted. Change the rubber
foot positions on the rail before installing the rail.
1. The rubber feet are placed at [A] as shown below.

336
 LCIT RT4020 (D709)

2. The slotted screw holes in the rail for attaching the rail to the LCT have a tolerance for the height
(-/+ 2 mm). If you can install the rail within -/+ 2 mm in height, you do not need to do the
following steps.
3. If you cannot install the rail within -/+ 2 mm in height, change the rubber foot position to adjust the
height of the rail.
• If the screw holes of the main machine are above the slotted holes of the rail, change the
rubber foot position as shown below.

• If the screw holes of the main machine are below the slotted holes of the rail, change the
rubber foot position as shown below.

337
 2. Installation

• When changing the rubber foot position, remove the rail bracket [A]. ( x 4). After changing the
rubber foot position, reinstall the rail bracket.

LCIT (D709) Tray Heater

Accessories

Check the accessories against the list below.

338
 LCIT RT4020 (D709)

No Description Q'ty

1 Heater: 15W 1

2 Heater Harness 1

3 Harness clamp 4

4 Harness clamp 1

5 Tapping Screw:4x6 2

6 Tapping Screw:4x8 2

7 Tapping Screw - M3x6 2

8 Screw: Polished Round/Spring:M4x8 1

9 Screw: Polished Round/Spring:M3x8 1

Installation

1. Open the top right cover [A].

339
 2. Installation

2. To move down the paper tray, cover the photosensor with your left hand and press the bottom
plate operation button [A].

3. Remove the side fences [A]. ( x 4)

340
 LCIT RT4020 (D709)

4. Close the top right cover to move the paper tray upward. (The paper tray stops in about 30
seconds.)
5. Switch the machine off and unplug the machine.
6. Disconnect the LCT power connector from the machine.
7. Open the top right cover [A].

8. Right cover [A] ( x2)

341
 2. Installation

9. Release the LCT from the main machine. ( x 2)

10. Slide the LCT [A] against the main machine, and then remove it from the rail [B].

11. Top right cover [A] ( x1)

342
 LCIT RT4020 (D709)

12. Top left cover [A] ( x2)

13. Rear left cover [A] ( x2)

14. Rear cover [A] ( x2)

343
 2. Installation

15. Left cover [A] ( x2)

16. Remove the bottom bracket [A]. ( x 3)

344
 LCIT RT4020 (D709)

17. Attach the clamp [A] on the undersurface of the LCT. ( x 1)

18. Attach the clamp [A] on the undersurface of the LCT. ( x 1)

345
 2. Installation

19. Attach the three clamps [A] on the front side of the LCT. ( x 3)

20. Install the tray heater [A] in the LCT. (M4 x 6; x 2)

21. Route the heater harness to the right side of the LCT as shown below. ( x 1)

346
 LCIT RT4020 (D709)

22. Clamp the harness routed from the left side of the LCT. ( x 1)

23. Install the heater bracket [A] in the LCT. (M4 x 8; x 2)

24. Connect the heater bracket [A] and heater harness [B]. ( x 1)

347
 2. Installation

25. Route the heater harness and heater bracket [A] as shown below. ( x 3)

26. Attach the ground wire [A] to the LCT. (M4 x 8; x 1)

27. Remove the heater harness cover [A] from the rear cover ( x 2).

348
 LCIT RT4020 (D709)

28. Reattach the following covers.

• Left cover
• Rear cover
• Rear left cover
• Top left cover
• Top right cover
When attaching the rear cover, pass the heater harness through the hole where the heater harness
cover was.
29. Remove the rear lower cover of the main machine.
30. Fix the heater bracket [A]. ( x 2)

31. Attach the heater harness [A] and ground wire [B]. ( x 1, x 1)
To attach the ground wire, remove the screw and replace it with the polished round screw M3.

349
 2. Installation

32. Attach the rear lower cover of the main machine.

33. Set the LCT [A] on the rail [B], and then slide it towards the main machine.

34. Install the LCT on the main machine.

350
 LCIT RT4020 (D709)

35. Open the top right cover, and then fasten the rail to the LCT. (shoulder screws; x 2)

• When you fasten the rail to the LCT, the screw holes [B] of the rail needs to be in the same
position as the screw holes [A] of the LCT.

351
 2. Installation

36. Reattach the right cover. ( x 2)

37. Remove the cover of the main machine.
38. Connect the heater bracket to the main machine.
39. Reattach the cover of the main machine.
40. Connect the LCT power connector to the main machine, and then turn on the main power.
41. To move down the paper tray, cover the photosensor with your left hand and press the bottom
plate operation button [A].

42. Reattach the side fence.

43. Close the top right cover.

Image Adjustments: Side-to-side registration

1. Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-109-003, No. 14) to print the test pattern.
2. Go to SP1-003-007 (Side-to-Side Reg: LCT).
3. Load paper (A4 LEF) in the LCT tray, and then copy a couple of sheets.
4. Enter the value in SP1-003-007 to adjust the blank margin [A] to 2 mm.
The default value is 0mm. Press [+] to broaden the margin, and press [-] to narrow it. You can
adjust the value in 0.1mm intervals.

352
 LCIT RT4020 (D709)

5. Exit the SP mode.

353
 2. Installation

8 1/2" x 14" Paper Size Tray Type M2 (D745)

Component List

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.

No. Description Q'ty

1 Cover 1

2 B4/LG frame 1

3 Bottom plate extension 1

4 Rear bracket 1

5 Front bracket 1

6 Harness clamp 1

7 Tapping screws - M4x8 6

8 Tapping bind screws - M4x8 4

354
 8 1/2" x 14" Paper Size Tray Type M2 (D745)

Installation Procedure

1. Open the upper right cover [A].

2. Move down the paper tray, cover the photosensor with your left hand and press the bottom plate
operation button [A].

3. Move the front side fence [A] and rear side fence [B] to the B4 or LG position.

355
 2. Installation

4. Close the upper right cover [A] to move the paper tray up. (The paper tray stops in about 30
seconds.)
5. Switch the machine off and unplug the machine.
6. Disconnect the LCT power connector from the machine.
7. Remove the right cover of the LCT. ( page 328 "LCIT RT4020 (D709)")
8. Release the LCT from the main machine. ( x 2)

9. Slide the LCT [A] against the main machine, and then remove it from the rail [B].

356
 8 1/2" x 14" Paper Size Tray Type M2 (D745)

10. Remove the following covers. ( page 328 "LCIT RT4020 (D709)")
• Upper right cover
• Upper left cover
• Rear left cover
• Rear cover
• Left cover
11. Remove the lower limit sensor bracket [A]. ( x 1, x 1)

12. Install the lower limit sensor bracket [A]. ( x 1)

357
 2. Installation

13. Pull the sensor connector wire removed in step 11 through the hole [A] from the left side of the LCT.
14. Release the sensor connector wire from the clamp [B].

15. Put the sensor connector wire to the right side of the LCT through the hole [A].

16. Connect the sensor connector wire to the upper limit sensor [A]. ( x 1)

358
 8 1/2" x 14" Paper Size Tray Type M2 (D745)

17. Attach the harness clamp to the rear of the plate [A]. Use this clamp to hold the sensor connector
wire.

18. Reattach the following covers.

• Left cover
• Rear cover
• Rear left cover
• Upper left cover
19. Remove the right stay [A]. ( x 2)

359
 2. Installation

20. Attach the right stay [A] below. ( x 2)

21. Attach the front bracket [A] with the beveled corner down. ( x 2)

360
 8 1/2" x 14" Paper Size Tray Type M2 (D745)

• If the brackets are not easy to install, lift the bottom plate with your hand.
22. Attach the rear bracket [B] with the beveled corner down. ( x 2)
23. Attach the bottom plate extension [C] with the hex screws. ( x 4)

24. Attach the B4/LG frame [C] with the hex screws. ( x 2)

361
 2. Installation

25. Attach the right cover [B]. ( x 2)

26. Attach the upper right cover [A] provided with the 8 1/2" x 14" Paper Size Tray Type M2. ( x 1)

27. Install the LCT on the main machine. ( page 328 "LCIT RT4020 (D709)")
28. Plug in the machine and turn it on.
29. Go into the SP mode and do 5-959-003.
30. Input "5" for B4 SEF or "6" for 8.5" x 14" SEF.

362
 LCIT RT4030 (D710)

LCIT RT4030 (D710)

Accessory Check

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.

No Description Q'ty

1 Shoes 4

2 Upper Joint Brackets 2

3 Lower Joint Bracket 1

4 Tapping screws – M4 x 8 4

5 Stay 1

6 Decal: caution chart: paper set direction 1

7 Decal: LED 1

8 Decal: transport: cover

9 Decal: misfeed removal: manual feed: 250

Installation Procedure

• Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing the following procedure.

363
 2. Installation

1. Remove all tape and retainers from the LCT.

2. Open the front door [A] and paper tray unit [B], and remove all tape and retainers from the LCT.

3. Remove the paper entrance cover [A] from the main machine. ( x 2)

364
 LCIT RT4030 (D710)

4. Install the stay [A] on the main machine. (M4 x 8; x 2)

• Set the embossed side of the stay against the main machine.

365
 2. Installation

5. Remove the connector cover [A] and LCT connecting cover [B].

6. Install the upper joint brackets [A] and [B].

366
 LCIT RT4030 (D710)

7. Install the lower joint brackets [A].

8. Remove the ground plate [A]. ( x 2)

367
 2. Installation

9. Change the orientation of the ground plate, and then install it as shown below. ( x 2)

10. Open the front cover [A].

11. Remove the screw [B] and release the lock plate [C]. (M4 x 8; x 1)

12. Install the LCT [B] on the main machine [A].

368
 LCIT RT4030 (D710)

13. Reattach the left corner plate [A]. (M4 x 8; x 1)

14. Set the leveling shoes [A]. (front left, front right, rear left, rear right side of the LCT)

15. Connect the LCIT I/F cable [A] to the main machine.

369
 2. Installation

16. Open the by-pass tray unit [A].

• Push down the lever [A] when opening the by-pass unit.

17. Prepare the caution decal [A] provided with the LCT.

370
 LCIT RT4030 (D710)

18. Attach the caution decal to [A] on the by-pass tray unit.

• [B]: 2mm
• [C]: 2mm
19. Prepare the sponge decal [A] provided with the LCT.

371
 2. Installation

20. Attach the sponge decal to [A] on the exit cover.

• Attach the sponge decal [A] on the corner of the exit cover.

• [B]: 50 mm
• [C]: 65 mm

372
 LCIT RT4030 (D710)

21. Prepare the Decal: caution chart: paper set direction [A].

22. Draw out the paper tray and attach the decal [A] on the top of the front door.
Select one of the decals according to the paper that will be used by the customer.

• Paper type, brand, etc. can be written on the blank space.

23. Attach a decal to the front door.

373
 2. Installation

D137/D138: Attach the Decal: LED supplied with the LCIT.

D135/D136: Attach a blank sheet on the paper size decal supplied with the main machine.

24. Plug in the machine and turn it on.

How to disconnect the LCIT from the main machine

1. Open the front cover [A]. Remove the screw [B] and pull the lock bracket [C] in the direction
indicated with the arrow.

374
 LCIT RT4030 (D710)

2. Disconnect the LCIT from the main machine while pressing the lock bracket [D] in the direction
indicated with the arrow.

• Lock bracket [D] is located at the rear side of the LCIT frame [E].

375
 2. Installation

LCIT (D710) Tray Heater

Accessories

Check the accessories against the list below.

376
 LCIT RT4030 (D710)

No Description Q'ty

1 Heater: 15W 1

2 Heater Harness 1

3 Intermediate Harness 1

4 Harness Clamp 1

5 Tapping Screw:4x8 3

6 Tapping Screw - M3x6 2

7 Screw: Polished Round/Spring:M4x8 1

8 Screw: Polished Round/Spring:M3x8 1

Installation

• Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing the following procedure.

• When installing the tray heater, make sure the LCT is installed in the main machine.
1. Right cover [A] ( x4)

377
 2. Installation

2. Right rear cover [A] ( x4)

3. Left rear cover [A]

378
 LCIT RT4030 (D710)

4. Connect the heater [A], intermediate harness [B], heater harness [C]. ( x 3)

5. Pull out the paper tray, and then install the heater [A]. ( x 3)

379
 2. Installation

6. Route the harness with the clamp [A] as shown below, and then attach it to the rear side of the LCT.
( x 3)

7. Attach the clamp [A] to the rear side of the LCT.

8. Clamp the heater harness. ( x 1)

380
 LCIT RT4030 (D710)

9. Attach the ground wire [A] to the LCT. (M4 x 8; x 3)

10. Remove the LCT bracket [A]. ( x 2)

11. Attach the heater bracket [A]. ( x 2)

381
 2. Installation

12. Reattach the exterior covers.

13. Remove the rear lower cover of the main machine.
14. Fix the heater bracket [A]. ( x 2)

15. Attach the heater harness [A] and ground wire [B]. ( x 1, x 1)
To attach the ground wire, remove the screw and replace it with the polished round screw M3.

382
 LCIT RT4030 (D710)

16. Attach the rear lower cover of the main machine.

Image Adjustments: Side-to-side registration

1. Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-109-003, No. 14) to print the test pattern.
2. Go to SP1-003-007 (Side-to-Side Reg: LCT).
3. Load paper (A4 LEF) in the LCT tray, and then copy a couple of sheets.
4. Enter the value in SP1-003-007 to adjust the blank margin [A] to 2 mm.
The default value is 0mm. Press [+] to broaden the margin, and press [-] to narrow it. You can
adjust the value in 0.1mm intervals.

5. Exit the SP mode.

383
 2. Installation

A3/11"x17" Tray Unit Type M2 (D749)

Component List

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following illustration and list.

No. Description Q'ty

1. Screw – M3 x 4 4

2. Tapping screws –M3 x 6 3

3. Screw – M3 x 6 1

4. Pin Bracket 1

5. Harness 1

6. Paper Size Decal 1

7. Paper Set Direction Decal 1

384
 A3/11"x17" Tray Unit Type M2 (D749)

Installation

• The unit must be connected to a power source that is close to the unit and easily accessible.
• Make sure that the main machine is switched off and that its power cord is disconnected before
doing the following procedures.

1. Remove the stay [A] ( x2).

2. Remove the retainers [B] [C] and the shipping material [D] ( x1).

3. Check the position of the front and back side fences and make sure that they are set for DLT or A3.
4. If you need to adjust the positions of the side fences for the paper to be loaded in the tray, remove
the front panel [A] ( x10).

385
 2. Installation

5. Remove the fences and adjust their positions for the paper to be loaded:
[F] Side fence ( x1)
[G] Back fence ( x1)
[H] End fence ( x1)

386
 A3/11"x17" Tray Unit Type M2 (D749)

6. Reattach the front panel. ( x10)

7. Open the front doors.
8. Pull out the tandem feed tray [A] and remove the paper cassette decal [B].

9. Remove the factory SP sheet [A] and SD card holder [B].

• These parts will be installed in the A3/11"x17" Tray Unit later.

10. Push the right tandem tray [A] into the machine.

387
 2. Installation

11. Remove the left tandem tray [A] (left rail: x 2 (M3 x 8), right rail: x 3 (M3 x 10)).

12. From the left tandem tray, remove the front cover [A] ( x 2).

388
 A3/11"x17" Tray Unit Type M2 (D749)

13. Pull out the right tandem tray [A] then remove it ( x2).

14. Insert the short connector [A] into the socket inside the machine [B]. ( x1)

• Hold the connector as shown in the illustration.

389
 2. Installation

15. Using the screw provided in the accessories, attach the pin bracket [A] to the center rail. ( x2)
16. Using the screws provided in the accessories for the right rail and left rail, install the tray [B] on the
right rail [C], center rail [D], and left rail [E]. ( x4)

• Make sure that the pin on the pin bracket passes through the hole in the tray bottom plate.

390
 A3/11"x17" Tray Unit Type M2 (D749)

• Make sure that bosses [A] (two each on the left/right rails) pass through the holes in the tray.
If you close the tray without doing this, it will be impossible to open the tray.

17. Return the factory SP sheet and SD card holder that you removed in Step 9.
18. Re-install the front cover [A] ( x2).

19. Turn on the machine.

20. Use SP5959-2 to select the paper size for Tray 1 (A3 or DLT).
21. After selecting the paper size, switch the machine off and on and check that the selected paper size
is displayed on the operation panel.

391
 2. Installation

Copy Connector Type 3260 (B328)

Accessory Check

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following illustration and list.

No. Description Q’ty

1. Copy Connector Board B328 2

2. Repeater Hub 1394 2

3. Ferrite Core 2

4. Power Repeater Cable 2

5. Coupling Interface Cable 1394 3

6. Keytop for V-C1 (Not used) 4

7. Keytop (Not Used) 4

Preparation

Before you begin the installation procedure:

392
 Copy Connector Type 3260 (B328)

• Measure the distance between the machines to be connected.

Determine the number of cables and repeater hubs that are necessary based on the distance
measured between the machines.

Power Repeater Hubs

Distance Interface Cables Required
Required

Less than 9.0 m (Less than 29.5 ft) 1 2

9.0 to 13.5 m (29.5 to 112.5 ft.) 2 3

Installation

• Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing the following procedure.

1. Remove the rear middle cover. ( x4)

• Check the positions of the bosses and hooks before removing the lower cover.

393
 2. Installation

2. Remove the controller box cover. ( x 4)

3. Remove the cover [A] of Slot A. ( x 2)

394
 Copy Connector Type 3260 (B328)

4. Install the Copier Connection Kit Board B328 [A] in Slot A and fasten it. ( x 2)

5. Connect the power repeater cable [A] to CN525 [B] on the controller board.
6. Connect the other end of the power repeater cable [A] to CN4 [C] on the copy connector board.

395
 2. Installation

• Pass the power repeater cable [A] under the harness [D] on the controller board when you
connect it to the copy connector board.
7. Connect the end of the interface cable [B] to the copy connector board [A].

8. Attach the ferrite core [A] to the end of the interface cable [B].

• Attach the ferrite core 30 mm [A] from the end of the interface cable.

396
 Copy Connector Type 3260 (B328)

9. Connect the other end of the interface cable [A] and repeater hub [B].

10. Repeat Steps 1 to 9 to install the connector kit on the second machine.
11. Connect the interface cable [A] from the second machine to the repeater hub [B].

397
 2. Installation

• Measure the distance between the machines to be connected. Determine the number of
cables and repeater hubs that are necessary based on the distance measured between the
machines. ( page 392 "Preparation")
12. Reattach the covers.

398
 Tab Sheet Holder Type M2 (D750)

Tab Sheet Holder Type M2 (D750)

The tab sheet holder can installed in trays 2 and 3, and allows the user to load tab stock.

Accessories

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.

No. Description Q'ty

1 Tab Sheet Holder 1

2 Decal 1

Installation

1. Attach the decal [B] to the tab sheet holder [A].

399
 2. Installation

2. Check that the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out until it stops.

3. Install the tab sheet holder on the end fence of the paper tray.

• When the tab sheet holder is installed correctly, you can hear a clicking noise.

400
 Tab Sheet Holder Type M2 (D750)

• [A]: End fence

• [B]: Tab sheet holder
4. Load tab stock in the paper tray.

• Load tab stock so that the side with the tab faces the tab sheet holder.
5. Adjust the end fence position so that the tab sheet holder will fit the tab stock.

6. Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.

• When removing the tab stock holder, spread the hook [A] of the tab sheet holder and then remove
it as shown below.

401
 2. Installation

402
 IEEE802.11a/g/n Unit Type M2 (D164)

IEEE802.11a/g/n Unit Type M2 (D164)

Component List

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.

No Description Q'ty

1 IEEE802.11a/g/n Unit 1

2 Velcro Fasteners 2

3 Clamps 8

• Don’t disassemble the IEEE802.11a/g/n Unit. When you need to replace the IEEE802.11a/g/n
board, replace the entire IEEE802.11a/g/n Unit.
• Provide the caution chart to the customer.
• It is prohibited by law to disassemble and modify this product. If illegal modifications are added to
this product for its use, we shall not assume any responsibility.
• Depending on the environment where you use this product or the access point you select,
restrictions may be imposed on the use of some usable channels. If wireless LAN communications
are not possible, check the environment or access point.

Installation Procedure

• Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.

403
 2. Installation

• To prevent damage to the controller box, always work carefully. Never put your hand or a tool into
the box when you remove the controller box or install an option.
• To prevent damage to the circuits on the boards, always touch a metal surface to remove static
charge from your hands before you handle a board.
• The usable frequency range of this product may be used by products (industrial, scientific, or
medical devices) of other companies. Also, outdoor use of wireless devices may be restricted. Pay
attention to where you use this product.

1. Remove the slot cover [A] from the board slot B. ( x 2)

2. Insert the wireless LAN board into the I/F slot and fasten it with the screws. ( x 2)

• Confirm that the interface board is firmly connected to the controller board.
3. Look at the markings on the antenna bracket.
4. Look at the ferrite core of the antenna cable.

404
 IEEE802.11a/g/n Unit Type M2 (D164)

• ANT1. Antenna 1 [A] transmits and receives. It must be installed on the rear middle side of the
main machine. (The core on the Antenna 1 cable is black.)
• ANT2. Antenna 2 [B] only receives. It is installed on the rear right corner of the machine. (The
core on the Antenna 2 cable is white.)
5. Peel off the double-sided tapes on the Velcro fasteners, and then attach them at the rear middle [B]
and rear right [A] of the machine.

• [A] has to be kept 12 cm away from [B].

6. Attach Antenna 1 [A] (having a black ferrite core) to the rear middle of the machine.
7. Attach Antenna 2 [B] (having a white ferrite core) to the rear right of the machine.
8. Attach the eight clamps as shown above.
9. Set the cables of Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 in the clamps and close them. ( x 8)

405
 2. Installation

• Make sure that the cables are not slack. Keep them wired tightly along the covers.
10. Turn on the main machine.
11. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option.: User Tools > Printer Features > List/Test Print
> Configuration Page
You may have to move the machine if the reception is not clear.
• Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of equipment that
generates strong magnetic fields.
• Put the machine as close as possible to the access point.

User Tool Settings for IEEE 802.11a/g/n

Go into the User Tools mode and do the procedure below. These settings take effect every time the
machine is powered on.

• You cannot use IEEE 802.11a/g/n if you use Ethernet.

1. Press the “User Tools” key.
2. On the touch panel, touch “System Settings”.

• Select “Interface Settings”> “Network” > “LAN Type”. The “LAN Type” (default: Ethernet)
must be set for either Ethernet or wireless LAN.
3. Select “Interface Settings”> “Wireless LAN”. Only the wireless LAN options show.

406
 IEEE802.11a/g/n Unit Type M2 (D164)

4. Set the “Communication Mode“.

5. Enter the “SSID setting”. (The setting is case sensitive.)
6. Set the “Ad-hoc Channel”. You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected. The allowed
range for the channel settings may vary for different countries.
• Region A (mainly Europe and Asia)
2412 - 2462 MHz (1 - 11 channels)
5180 - 5240 MHz (36, 40, 44 and 48 channels)
(default: 11)

• In some countries, only the following channels are available: 2412 - 2462 MHz (1 - 11
channels)
• Region B (mainly North America)
2412 - 2462 MHz (1 - 11 channels)
5180 - 5240 MHz (36, 40, 44 and 48 channels)
(default: 11)
7. Set the “Security Method” to specify the encryption of the Wireless LAN.
• The “WEP” (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is designed to protect wireless data
transmission. The same WEP key is required on the receiving side in order to unlock encoded
data. There are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys.
• Range of Allowed Settings:
64 bit: 10 characters
128 bit: 26 characters
• Specify “WPA2” when “Communication Mode” is set to “Infrastructure Mode”. Set the
“WPA2 Authent. Method”.
• WPA2 Authent. Method:
Select either “WPA2-PSK” or “WPA2”.
If you select “WPA2-PSK”, enter the pre-shared key (PSK) of 8-63 characters in ASCII
code.
When “WPA2” is selected, authentication settings and certificate installation settings are
required.
8. Press “Wireless LAN Signal” to check the machine's radio wave status using the operation panel.
• Press “Restore Factory Defaults” to initialize the wireless LAN settings.

407
 2. Installation

SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11 Wireless LAN

The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11

SP No. Name Function

5840
Channel MAX Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the country.
006

5840 Sets the minimum range of the channels settings allowed for your
Channel MIN
007 country.

Sets the transmission speed.

5840 Transmission Auto, 54 Mbps, 48 Mbps, 36 Mbps, 24 Mbps, 18 Mbps, 12 Mbps,
008 Speed 9 Mbps, 6 Mbps, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 1 Mbps (default:
Auto).

5840
WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
011

Name Function

SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting.

WEP Key Used to confirm the current WEP key setting.

UP
mode Used to show the maximum length of the string that can be used for
WEP Mode
the WEP Key entry.

WPA2 Authent. Used to confirm the current WPA authentication setting and preshared
Method key.

408
 Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D (D566)

Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D (D566)

Accessories

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.

No Description Q'ty

1 Bluetooth Module 1

2 CD-ROM 1

Installation Procedure

• Turn off the power of the main unit when connecting the Bluetooth unit. Do not attach or remove the
Bluetooth unit while the power of the main unit is turned on.

• To prevent damage to the controller box, always work carefully. Never put your hand or a tool into
the box when you remove the controller box or install an option.
• To prevent damage to the circuits on the boards, always touch a metal surface to remove static
charge from your hands before you handle a board.

1. Insert the Bluetooth unit into the USB Host Interface [A].

409
 2. Installation

2. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option.: User Tools > Printer Features > List/Test Print
> Configuration Page

410
 IEEE1284 Interface Board Type A (B679)

IEEE1284 Interface Board Type A (B679)

Component List

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.

No Description Q'ty

1 PCB Unit 1

Installation Procedure

• Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.

• To prevent damage to the controller box, always work carefully. Never put your hand or a tool into
the box when you remove the controller box or install an option.
• To prevent damage to the circuits on the boards, always touch a metal surface to remove static
charge from your hands before you handle a board.

1. Remove the slot cover [A] from the board slot B. ( x 2)

411
 2. Installation

2. Insert the IEEE1284 interface board into the I/F slot and fasten it with the screws. ( x 2)
3. Turn on the main machine.
4. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option.: User Tools > Printer Features > List/Test Print
> Configuration Page

412
 File Format Converter Type E (D377)

File Format Converter Type E (D377)

Component List

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.

No Description Q'ty

1 PCB Unit 1

Installation Procedure

• Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.

• To prevent damage to the controller box, always work carefully. Never put your hand or a tool into
the box when you remove the controller box or install an option.
• To prevent damage to the circuits on the boards, always touch a metal surface to remove static
charge from your hands before you handle a board.

1. Remove the slot cover [A] from the board slot B. ( x 2)

413
 2. Installation

2. Insert the file format converter into the I/F slot and fasten it with the screws. ( x 2)
3. Turn on the main machine.
4. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option.: User Tools > Printer Features > List/Test Print
> Configuration Page

414
 SD card for NetWare printing Type M2 (D719)

SD card for NetWare printing Type M2 (D719)

Component List

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.

No. Description Q'ty

1 SD Card 1

Installation Procedure

• Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.

1. Remove the SD-card slot cover [A] from the SD Card slots. ( x 1)

415
 2. Installation

2. Insert the SD card (SD card for NetWare printing) in SD slot 2 (lower) [A] with its label face
towards the front of the machine. Then push it slowly into SD slot 2 (lower) until you hear a click.

3. Perform the SD Card Appli Move. ( page 446 "SD Card Appli Move")

• After the SD Card Aplli Move is completed, do the following procedure.

1. Remove the SD Card from the SD slot 2 (lower).
2. Attach the SD-card slot cover, and then turn on the machine ( x 1)
3. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option.: User Tools > Printer Features > List/Test
Print > Configuration Page

416
 OCR Unit Type M2 (D166)

OCR Unit Type M2 (D166)

OCR unit allows you to use the searchable PDF function with the scanner application.

Accessories

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.

No. Description Q’ty

1. SD Card 1

Details About Searchable PDF

• Searchable PDF embeds the text information in the scanned document without processing the data
on your computer.
If this option is installed:
• You can search the text in the scanned document.
• You can add extra text to the file name.
• The orientation of the originals is detected, and the document is automatically rotated.
• The OCR unit is provided on an SD card. By installing the SD card on the main machine, the
function key is added to the operation panel. You don’t need to install the OCR unit on the
computer.
• After installing the OCR unit, you can specify the settings of the searchable PDF function.

417
 2. Installation

• The machine embeds the text information of the scanned document after scanning the originals
(after the originals are ejected from the ADF). Therefore, you can remove the originals from the
exposure glass or ADF.
• You can use other applications such as copy and printer while the machine embeds the text
information of the scanned document.

Installation Procedure

• Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.

1. Remove the SD-card slot cover [A] from the SD Card slots. ( x 1)

2. Insert the SD card (OCR Unit) in SD card slot 1 (upper) [A] or SD slot 2 (lower) [B] with its label
face towards the front of the machine. Then push it slowly into the SD slot until you hear a click.

3. Turn on the main power switch.

4. Go to SP 5-878-004 (Option Setup: OCR) and press [EXECUTE].
The SD card ID is recorded in NVRAM, and the machine ID of the main machine is recorded in the
SD card.

418
 OCR Unit Type M2 (D166)

5. When the display tells you that the execution is completed, press [Exit].

• If the execution failed, the display tells you that the execution failed.
• If the execution failed, do the following.
Check if the SD card is already used.
Turn off the main power switch, and do steps 1 to 5 again.
6. Turn the main power switch off and on.
7. Go to SP 5-878-004 (Option Setup: OCR) and press [EXECUTE].
The OCR dictionary is copied to the HDD from the SD card.

• SP 5-878-004 links the SD card and the machine in the first execution, and then copies the
OCR dictionary to the HDD in the second execution.
8. Turn off the main power switch, and then remove the SD card form the SD card slot.

• Keep the SD card in the SD card storage location. You need the original SD card if the HDD is
broken.
9. Re-attach the SD card slot cover.
10. Turn on the main power switch.
11. Press [Send File Type / Name] on the [Scanner] screen.

12. Check if [OCR Settings] is displayed on the [Send File Type / Name] screen.

419
 2. Installation

• You can switch the searchable PDF function on and off in the [OCR Settings] screen after installing
the OCR unit.
• If you want to use the searchable PDF function, select [On] for [OCR Settings]. (Default: [Off])

Restoration Procedure

When you install the OCR Unit Type M2, the searchable PDF function is saved on the HDD and the SD
card ID is saved in NVRAM.
Therefore, you need to re-install the OCR Unit Type M2 after replacing the HDD or NVRAM.
When the original SD card exists
• When you replace the HDD
Re-install the OCR Unit Type M2 from the original SD card.
• When you replace the NVRAM
If you upload / download the NVRAM data, re-install the OCR Unit Type M2 from the
original SD card.
If you don’t upload / download the NVRAM data, order a new SD card (service part) of the
OCR Unit Type M2. Then re-install the OCR Unit Type M2 from the new SD card.
• When you replace the HDD and NVRAM at the same time
Re-install the OCR Unit Type M2 from the original SD card.
When the original SD card is lost
Order a new SD card (service part) of the OCR Unit Type M2, and then re-install from the new SD
card.

• When you re-install the OCR Unit Type M2, do the same procedure as the original installation
procedure. ( page 418 "Installation Procedure")

420
 Postscript3 Unit Type M2 (D719)

Postscript3 Unit Type M2 (D719)

Accessories

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.

No. Description Q’ty

1 PostScript3 Emulation SD Card 1

2 Decal 1

Installation Procedure

• Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.

1. Remove the SD-card slot cover [A] from the SD Card slots. ( x 1)

2. Insert the SD card (PostScript3 Unit) in SD slot 2 (lower) [A] with its label face towards the front of
the machine. Then push it slowly into SD slot 2 (lower) until you hear a click.

421
 2. Installation

3. Perform the SD Card Appli Move. ( page 446 "SD Card Appli Move")

• After the SD Card Aplli Move is completed, do the following procedure.

1. Remove the SD Card from SD slot 2 (lower).
2. Attach the SD-card slot cover, and then turn on the machine ( x 1)
3. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option.: User Tools > Printer Features > List/Test
Print > Configuration Page

422
 IPDS Unit Type M2 (D719)

IPDS Unit Type M2 (D719)

Accessories

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.

No Description Q'ty

1 IPDS Emulation SD Card 1

2 Decal 1

Installation Procedure

• Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.

1. Remove the SD-card slot cover [A] from the SD Card slots. ( x 1)

2. Insert the SD card (IPDS Unit) in SD slot 2 (lower) [A] with its label face towards the front of the
machine. Then push it slowly into SD slot 2 (lower) until you hear a click.

423
 2. Installation

3. Perform the SD Card Appli Move. ( page 446 "SD Card Appli Move")

• After the SD Card Aplli Move is completed, do the following procedure.

1. Remove the SD Card from SD slot 2 (lower).
2. Attach the SD-card slot cover, and then turn on the machine ( x 1)
3. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option.: User Tools > Printer Features > List/Test
Print > Configuration Page

424
 Browser Unit Type M2 (D719)

Browser Unit Type M2 (D719)

Accessories

No. Description Q'ty

1 SD Card 1

Installation Procedure

• Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.

1. Turn the main switch OFF.

2. Remove the SD-card slot cover [A] from the SD Card slots. ( x 1)

3. Insert the SD card (Browser Unit) in SD slot 2 (lower) [A].

425
 2. Installation

4. Turn the main switch ON.

5. D135/D136: Press the “User Tools/Counter” key.
D137/D138: Press the “User Tools” key.
6. On the touch panel, touch “Extended Feature settings”.
7. Touch “Extended Feature settings” in the Extended Feature Settings Menu.
8. Make sure that “Extended JS” application was automatically installed in the Startup Settings tab.
9. Turn the main switch OFF/ON.
10. Perform the SD Card Appli Move. ( page 446 "SD Card Appli Move")

• After the SD Card Appli Move is completed, do the following procedure.

1. Remove the SD Card from SD slot 2 (lower).
2. Attach the SD-card slot cover, and then turn on the machine ( x 1)
3. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option.: User Tools > Printer Features > List/
Test Print > Configuration Page
11. D135/D136: Press the “User Tools/Counter” key.
D137/D138: Press the “User Tools” key.
12. Touch “Edit home”.
13. Touch “Add Icon”.
14. Touch “Browse”.
15. Touch a blank square to set the location for the browser icon.
16. Touch “Exit” to complete the addition of the browser icon.
17. Execute SP5-801-024 (Clear Memory: BROWSER).

426
 Browser Unit Type M2 (D719)

Do the following steps if the customer is using the Ricoh JavaScript connected to a
Web application developed by Operius/RiDP.

1. Turn the main switch ON.

2. D135/D136: Press the “User Tools/Counter” key.
D137/D138: Press the “User Tools” key.
3. On the touch panel, touch “Browser Features”.
4. Touch “JavaScript”.
5. Change the Extended JavaScript setting to “Active”.

427
 2. Installation

Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870)

Component Check

Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.

No. Description Q’ty

1 Key Counter Interface Board 1

2 Harness 1

3 Tapping Screw: M3 x 6 4

4 Stud Stay 4

5 Harness Clamp 1

6 Band 1

Installation Procedure

• Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure.

1. Remove the rear middle cover. ( page 522 "Outer Covers")

2. Remove the controller box cover [A]. ( x 4)

428
 Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870)

3. Install the four stud stays on the controller box.

4. Install the optional counter interface board [A] on the four stud stays.

5. Release the extension harness (13-pin) [B] from the clamps [A] in the controller box. ( x2)

429
 2. Installation

6. Connect the harness [A] to CN3 [B] on the optional counter interface board. ( x 1)

7. Route the harness [A] inside the controller box as shown below. ( x 3)

8. Remove the part [A] of the rear middle cover with a flathead screwdriver.

430
 Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870)

9. Connect the harness from the optional counter device to CN4 [A] on the optional counter interface
board through the cut off part of the right rear cover. ( x 1)

10. Reassemble the machine.

431
 2. Installation

Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M2

(D739) (D135/D136 Only)
Component Check

No. Description Q’ty

1 IC Card Upper Cover 1

2 IC Card Cover 1

3 Sponge 2

4 Cable Clamp 3

5 Harness Clamp 3

6 Front Upper Cover*1 1

*1: Not used in this machine

432
 Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M2 (D739) (D135/D136 Only)

Installation Procedure

• Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure.

1. Remove the following covers. ( page 522 "Outer Covers")

• Upper front cover
• Upper rear cover
• Upper right cover
• Right middle upper cover
2. Remove the screws and connectors of the operation panel [A]. ( x 2, x 2)

3. Pull the operation panel [A] and lower cover [B] forward to remove it.

• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.

433
 2. Installation

4. Remove the IC card cover [A] from the operation panel lower cover.

5. Attach the IC card R/W you want to install [A] on the operation panel lower cover.

434
 Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M2 (D739) (D135/D136 Only)

6. Pass the USB cable through hole [A] from the back side of the operation panel lower cover, and
then connect the USB cable [B] to the IC card R/W.

7. Route the USB cable [A] along the back side of the operation panel lower cover. (hook x 2)

8. Keep the USB cable routed [A] on the back side of the operation panel lower cover, and then re-
attach the operation panel lower cover.

435
 2. Installation

9. Install the IC card upper cover [B] on the IC card cover [A].

10. Install the IC card cover [A] on the operation panel lower cover.

11. Route the USB cable [A] inside the right middle upper cover. ( x 3)

436
 Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M2 (D739) (D135/D136 Only)

12. Route the USB cable [A] under the upper rear cover, and then pull it out to the rear side of the
machine.

13. Hold the USB cable with the clamp [A]. ( x 1)

14. Route the USB cable [A] along the rear side of the machine as shown below. (hook x 3)

437
 2. Installation

15. Attach the cable clamp [A] to the side surface of the controller box.

16. Hold the USB cable with the clamp [A]. ( x 1)

17. Reattach the rear middle cover.

• When your reattach the rear middle cover [B], pull out the USB cable [A] to the outside as
shown below.

438
 Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M2 (D739) (D135/D136 Only)

18. Connect the USB cable [A] to the USB host interface. ( x 1)

19. Attach the cable clamps to the rear middle cover, and then route the USB cable. ( x3)

439
 2. Installation

20. Reassemble the machine.

21. Turn on the main power switch.
22. Make sure that SP5-985-002 (Device Setting - On Board USB) is set to “1”.

440
 DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type H (B869) (D135/D136 Only)

DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type H (B869)

(D135/D136 Only)
Overview

This option should be installed only for the customer who requires the CC certified Data Overwrite
Security function.
This option is for D135/D136 copiers (Office version) ONLY.
The function of this option is completely the same as the Data Overwrite Security in Security Functions,
which is standard on this machine. ( page 132 "Security Function Installation")

Component List

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.

No. Description Q’ty

1. SD Card 1

Installation Procedure

1. Remove the SD-card slot cover [A] from the SD Card slots. ( x 1)

441
 2. Installation

2. Insert the SD card (DataOverwriteSecurity Unit) in SD slot 1 (upper) [A] with its label face towards
the front of the machine. Then push it slowly into SD slot 1 (upper) until you hear a click.

3. Install the application using SP5-878-001.

442
 Copy Data Security Unit Type G (D640)

Copy Data Security Unit Type G (D640)

Component Check List

Installation of this unit requires the following components. Other components included in this kit are not
used for installation on this machine.

No. Description Q’ty

1 Copy data security unit board 1

2 Screws 2

Installation

• Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.

1. Controller box cover ( page 927 "Controller Board")

2. Connect the connector [A] on the copy data security unit board to the CN581 [B] on the IPU board
of the copier.

443
 2. Installation

3. Attach the copy data security unit board [A] to the IPU board bracket ( x 2).

4. Reassemble the machine.

User Tool Setting

1. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.

2. Go into the User Tools mode, and select System Settings > Administrator Tools > Copy Data
Security Option > "On".

444
 Copy Data Security Unit Type G (D640)

3. Exit User Tools.

4. Check the operation.

• The machine will issue an SC165-00 error if the machine is powered on with the Copy Data
Security Unit Board removed and the "Data Security for Copying" feature set to "ON".
• The machine will issue an uncertain SC165-00 error if the machine is powered on with a
defective Copy Data Security Unit Board and the "Data Security for Copying" feature set to
"OFF".
• When you remove this option from the machine, first set the setting to "OFF" with the user tool
before removing this board. If you forget to do this, the "Data Security for Copying" feature
cannot appear in the user tool settings. And then SC165-00 will appear every time the
machine is switched on, and the machine cannot be used.
Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see "Check All Connections" at the end of this
section).

Check All Connections

Make sure that the machine can recognize the option.

1. Plug in the power cord.
2. Turn on the main switch.
3. Enter the printer user mode. Then print the configuration page.
User Tools > Printer Features > List Test Print > Configuration Page
4. All installed options are shown in the "System Reference" column.

445
 2. Installation

SD Card Appli Move

Overview

The service program "SD Card Appli Move" (SP5-873) lets you move application programs from one
SD card to another SD card.
Be very careful when you do the SD Card Appli Move procedure:
• The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program from an SD card
to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card after you move the application
program from one card to another card.
• Do not use the SD card if it has been used before for other purposes. Normal operation is not
guaranteed when such an SD card is used.
• Open the tandem tray [A] and remove the paper cassette decal [B]. Keep the SD card inside after
you move the application program from one card to another card. This is done for the following
reasons:
• The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application program.
• You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.

• Do not move OCR Unit Type M2 (optional) to another SD card.

Move Exec

The menu "Move Exec" (SP5-873-001) lets you move application programs from the original SD card
to another SD card.

446
 SD Card Appli Move

• Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the
machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a
firmware upgrade or application merge.
1. Turn the main switch off.
2. Make sure that a target SD card is in SD Card Slot 1 [A]. The application program is moved to this
SD card.
3. Insert the source SD card with the application program in SD Card Slot 2 [B].The application
program is copied from this source SD card.

4. Turn the main switch on.

5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-001 "Move Exec".
7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
8. Turn the main switch off.
9. Remove the source SD card from SD Card Slot 2 [B].
10. Turn the main switch on.
11. Check that the application programs run normally.

Undo Exec

"Undo Exec" (SP5-873-002) lets you move back application programs from an SD card in SD Card
Slot 1 (upper) to the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2 (lower). You can use this program when, for
example, you have mistakenly copied some programs by using Move Exec (SP5-873-001).

447
 2. Installation

• Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the
machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a
firmware upgrade or application merge.
1. Turn the main switch off.
2. Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2 [B]. The application program is copied back into this
card.
3. Insert the SD card with the application program in SD Card Slot 1 [A].The application program is
copied back from this SD card.

4. Turn the main switch on.

5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-002 "Undo Exec."
7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
8. Turn the main switch off.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2 [B].
10. Turn the main switch on.
11. Check that the application programs run normally.

Caution

• If the customer uses the SD card on a PC, operation cannot be guaranteed.

• The SD card from which you moved an application cannot be used again.
• The SD card itself is the proof of purchase. Therefore, the application must be purchased again if
the card is lost.

448
 SD Card Appli Move

• Follow the procedure below to store the SD card from which you moved an application in the
machine.

• If the SD card is lost, it will be impossible to determine which application has been installed in the
case of a machine failure.
• Also, the empty SD card will required when moving back an application.
1. Pull out the tandem tray [A] and remove the paper cassette decal [B].

2. Remove the factory SP sheet [A].

3. Remove the SD card holder [A] ( x 1).

449
 2. Installation

4. Set the SD card in the SD card holder.

450
3. Preventive Maintenance

Preventive Maintenance Tables

See "Appendices" for the following information:
• Preventive Maintenance Items
• Other Yield Parts

451
 3. Preventive Maintenance

Image Quality Standards

Resolution

Item Specification Chart Measuring method

Copy (100%/ Ave 5.0 lines/mm or Book: S-5 Copy onto plain paper using
Enlargement), Black more (revised) Auto Image Density/5
and White (1C) Min 4.5lines/mm or notches and then determine
more resolution.

Copy (Reduction), Min 4.5×M lines/mm DF: S-5Y

Black and White (1C) or more (revised)

Color shift

Item Specification Chart Measuring method

Engine, Main Ave.+3 150.0 m L-Pattern

Scan/Sub Scan

Engine, Main Ave.+3 120.0 m

Print within 1 minute after
Scan/Sub Scan (after
MUSIC correction.
MUSIC)

452
 Image Quality Standards

Magnification ratio error margin

Item Specification Chart Measuring method

Engine, Main Scan, 0.75% or less Mono_CCD Copy the scale and compare
Black and White (1C) it with the scale at 100 mm to
see if it is within specification.
Engine, Sub Scan, 0.50% or less Scale chart
Leave the sheet for 3 minutes
Black and White (1C)
or more after it has been
Copy (100%), Main 0.75% or less output before measuring.
Scan, Black and White
(1C)

Copy (100%), Sub 0.80% or less

Scan, Black and White
(1C)

Copy (Reduction), 1.00% or less

Main Scan/Sub Scan,
Black and White (1C)
The swelling/shrinkage of
Copy (Enlargement), 1.00% or less paper caused by humidity
Main Scan/Sub Scan, are excluded.
Black and White (1C)
First side of the sheet only.

Magnification ratio error margin deviation

Item Specification Chart Measuring method

Copy (100% / 1.00% or less Scale chart

Leave the sheet for 3 minutes
Enlargement /
or more after it has been
Reduction), Black and
output before measuring.
White (1C)

Pitch error margin

Item Specification Chart Measuring method

Engine, Black and 1.50% or less For a line of about 1/2 inch
Mono_CCD
White(1C) in length.

453
 3. Preventive Maintenance

Perpendicularity

Item Specification Chart Measuring method

Engine, Black and ±0.70mm/200mm or Measure with the full length

Mono_CCD
White(1C) less (90° ± 0.20°) and width of the image.

Copy (100%), Black ±1.00mm/200mm or Scale chart

and White (1C) less

Linearity

Item Specification Chart Measuring method

Engine, Black and ±0.20mm/100mm or Measure with the full length

Mono_CCD
White(1C) less and width of the image.

Scale chart

Copy, Black and White ±0.50mm/100mm or

1. Inner line
(1C) less
2. 100mm
3. Base line
4. Copy
5. 100mm
6. 0.5mm

Parallelism

Item Specification Chart Measuring method

Item Specification Chart Measuring method

Engine, Black and Measure with the full length

± 1.0mm or less Mono_CCD
White(1C) and width of the image.

454
 Image Quality Standards

Missing Image Area (D135/D136)

Item Specification Chart Measuring method

[Uncoated paper]
Paper thickness 1 to 3:
5.0±1.5mm Since there is a variability of
about 1 mm in the sizes of
Paper thickness 4 to 8:
sheets of paper, correct the
Engine (leading edge), 4.0+1.8/-1.2mm
size of the sheet before
Black and White(1C) [Coated paper] measuring.
Paper thickness 1 to 4:
5.0±1.5mm
Paper thickness 5 to 8:
4.0+1.8/-1.2mm

Engine (left/right),
2.0±1.5mm Trim
Black and White(1C)

[Uncoated paper]
Paper thickness 1 to 4:
5.0±2.0mm 1. Paper feed direction
Paper thickness 5 to 8: 52gsm short grain, leading
Engine (trailing edge), 4.0±2.0mm edge: 5±1.5mm
Black and White(1C) [Coated paper] First side, trailing edge:0.5 to
Paper thickness 1 to 6: 7.0mm
5.0±2.0mm (for reference only)
Paper thickness 7 to 8:
4.0±2.0mm

455
 3. Preventive Maintenance

Item Specification Chart Measuring method

[Uncoated paper]
Paper thickness 1 to 3:
5.0±1.5mm Since there is a variability of
about 1 mm in the sizes of
Paper thickness 4 to 8:
sheets of paper, correct the
Copy (leading edge), 4.0+1.8/-1.2mm
size of the sheet before
Black and White(1C) [Coated paper] measuring.
Paper thickness 1 to 4:
5.0±1.5mm
Paper thickness 5 to 8:
4.0+1.8/-1.2mm

Copy (left/right), Black Exposure glass

2.0±1.5mm
and White(1C) open

[Uncoated paper]
Paper thickness 1 to 4:
5.0±2.0mm 1. Paper feed direction
Paper thickness 5 to 8: 52gsm short grain, leading
Copy (trailing edge), 4.0±2.0mm edge: 5±1.5mm
Black and White(1C) [Coated paper] First side, trailing edge:0.5 to
Paper thickness 1 to 6: 7.0mm
5.0±2.0mm (for reference only)
Paper thickness 7 to 8:
4.0±2.0mm

Missing Image Area (D137/D138)

Item Specification Chart Measuring method

Engine, Black and ±0.70mm/200mm or Measure with the full length

Mono_CCD
White(1C) less (90° ± 0.20°) and width of the image.

456
 Image Quality Standards

Item Specification Chart Measuring method

[Uncoated paper]
Paper thickness 1 to 3:
5.0±1.5mm Since there is a variability of
about 1 mm in the sizes of
Paper thickness 4 to 8:
sheets of paper, correct the
Engine (leading edge), 4.0±1.5mm
size of the sheet before
Black and White(1C) [Coated paper] measuring.
Paper thickness 1 to 4:
5.0±1.5mm
Paper thickness 5 to 8:
4.0±1.5mm

Engine (left/right),
2.0±1.5mm Trim
Black and White(1C)

[Uncoated paper]
Paper thickness 1 to 4:
5.0±2.0mm 1. Paper feed direction
Paper thickness 4 to 8: 52gsm short grain, leading
Engine (trailing edge), 4.0±2.0mm edge: 5±1.5mm
Black and White(1C) [Coated paper] First side, trailing edge:0.5 to
Paper thickness 1 to 6: 7.0mm
5.0±2.0mm (for reference only)
Paper thickness 7 to 8:
4.0±2.0mm

457
 3. Preventive Maintenance

Item Specification Chart Measuring method

[Uncoated paper]
Paper thickness 1 to 3:
5.0±1.5mm Since there is a variability of
about 1 mm in the sizes of
Paper thickness 4 to 8:
sheets of paper, correct the
Copy (leading edge), 4.0±1.5mm
size of the sheet before
Black and White(1C) [Coated paper] measuring.
Paper thickness 1 to 4:
5.0±1.5mm
Paper thickness 5 to 8:
4.0±1.5mm

Copy (left/right), Black Exposure glass

2.0±1.5mm
and White(1C) open

[Uncoated paper]
Paper thickness 1 to 4:
5.0±2.0mm 1. Paper feed direction
Paper thickness 5 to 8: 52gsm short grain, leading
Copy (trailing edge), 4.0±2.0mm edge: 5±1.5mm
Black and White(1C) [Coated paper] First side, trailing edge:0.5 to
Paper thickness 1 to 6: 7.0mm
5.0±2.0mm (for reference only)
Paper thickness 7 to 8:
4.0±2.0mm

458
 Image Quality Standards

Margin position

Item Specification Chart Measuring method

Engine (simplex), Main ±2.0 or less Mono_CCD

Scan/Sub Scan, Black
and White (1C)

Engine (duplex), Main ±3.0 or less

Scan, Black and White
(1C)

Engine (duplex), Sub ±4.0 or less

Scan, Black and White
(1C)

1st Side/2nd Side Positional Precision (Shift Length of 2nd Side Compared to
1st Side)

Item Specification Chart Measuring method

Engine, Main ±1 mm or less Measure after adjusting image

Scan/Sub Scan, Black (for reference only) Trim position and magnification
and White (1C) ratio in SP mode.

459
 3. Preventive Maintenance

Paper Transfer Quality Standards

Registration

Exposure glass

Item Specification Note

Simplex (1st print side), 100% 0±2mm (Vertically and

or reduction horizontally)

Simplex (1st print side), 0±2mm × M mm (Vertically and

M: Magnification ratio
enlargement horizontally)

Duplex (2nd print side), 100% 0±2mm (Vertically and

or reduction horizontally)

Duplex (2nd print side), 0±2mm × (2×M+1) mm

M: Magnification ratio
enlargement (Vertically and horizontally)

ADF

Item Specification Note

Simplex (1st print side), non-B6 Main Scan: 0±4mm

original, 100% or reduction Sub Scan: 0±3mm

Simplex (1st print side), non-B6 Main Scan: 0±(2×M+2)mm

M: Magnification ratio
original, enlargement Sub Scan: 0±(2×M+1)mm

Simplex (1st print side), B6 Main Scan: 0±5mm

original, 100% or reduction Sub Scan: 0±4mm

Simplex (1st print side), B6 Main Scan: 0±(2×M+3)mm

M: Magnification ratio
original, enlargement Sub Scan: 0±(2×M+2)mm

Duplex (2nd print side), non-B6 Main Scan: 0±4mm

original, 100% or reduction Sub Scan: 0±3mm

460
 Paper Transfer Quality Standards

Item Specification Note

Duplex (2nd print side), non-B6 Main Scan: 0±(2×M+3)mm

M: Magnification ratio
original, enlargement Sub Scan: 0±(2×M+2)mm

Skew

Exposure glass

Item Specification Note

Simplex, A4 SEF or larger*1 ±1.0mm/200mm or less

Excluding paper longer than 12
Simplex, B5 SEF or smaller *2 ±1.0mm/100mm or less ×18inches.

2nd side, A4 SEF or larger*1 ±1.0mm/200mm or less *1 Feed length 279mm or more
*2 Feed length 257mm or less
2nd side, B5 SEF or smaller *2 ±1.0mm/100mm or less

ADF

Original Printed paper Specification Note

Main Scan: 3.5mm/

1st side, A3 to B5/A6 200mm or less
B5 SEF or smaller
LEF Sub Scan: 3.0mm/
200mm or less

Main Scan: ±2.5mm/

1st side, A3 to B5/A6 200mm or less
A3/DLT to A4/LT
LEF Sub Scan: 2.0mm/
200mm or less

Main Scan and Sub

1st side, other than A3
B5 SEF or smaller Scan: ±4.0mm/
to B5/A6 LEF
200mm or less

Main Scan and Sub

1st side, other than A3
A3/DLT to A4/LT Scan: ±3.0mm/
to B5/A6 LEF
200mm or less

461
 3. Preventive Maintenance

Original Printed paper Specification Note

Main Scan and Sub

2nd side, A3 to A5 B5 SEF or smaller Scan: ±4.0mm/
200mm or less

Main Scan and Sub

2nd side, A3 to A5 A3/DLT to A4/LT Scan: ±3.0mm/
200mm or less

462
 PM Parts Settings

PM Parts Settings
PM Parts Replacement Procedure

PM parts replacement procedure for this model is different from predecessor models. If the PM counter is
reset in “PM parts display”, flag is set (SP3701-XXX) and initial process SPs are run automatically for the
replaced part. See below for details. If the PM counter is reset in SP7622-XXX, procedure is the same as
predecessor models.
Comparison of the PM parts replacement procedure

463
 3. Preventive Maintenance

• If the counter for the Lubricant Bar is reset in SP7622-XX, make sure to set the flag in SP3701-
XXX. Otherwise, the lubricant end detection (SP3810-XXX) will not be reset and the banner
message indicating near-end will remain on the operation panel.
PM part replacement procedure
1. Turn off the power on the operation panel button, and unplug the AC power cord.
2. Turn off the main power switch located inside the door.
3. Replace the PM parts.
4. Plug in the AC power cord and turn on the main power switch with either the bypass tray door
[A] or vertical transport door [B] opened.

• Make sure to open either the bypass tray or vertical transport door before turning on the
main power. Otherwise, troubles could occur as a result of unneeded initialization
processes.
5. Enter the SP mode and push the PM parts counter reset button in the PM Parts display. (
page 466 "PM Counter Display")

• Pressing the reset button in PM Counter Display does not reset the PM counter. The PM
counter is reset after closing the door in step 6.
6. Close the bypass tray door (or the vertical transport door). The machine will reset the PM
counters automatically followed by an initialization process. ( page 472 "Initial
Adjustment SP Lists")
7. Check the Initial Adjustment SP Lists and execute initialization in the SP mode, if required. (
page 472 "Initial Adjustment SP Lists")

464
 PM Parts Settings

8. Enter SP5-990-004 and check the counter values in the SMC logging data.
Make sure that the PM counters for the replaced units are "0" in the PM parts display.
If a PM counter for a unit that had been replaced does not display “0,” reset that counter in
the procedure described above.
9. Exit the SP mode.

• Machine operation will automatically stop when the PM counters for the fusing cleaning web
and drum lubricant bar reach their yield.
• Counter clearance is not required when replacing the developer, as this counter is cleared by
SP3-024 (Developer Fill: Execute).
• Counter clearance triggers the initialization of the parts described in this section. When
initialization is required for these parts, open the front door and clear the counter.

Preparation before Operation Check

1. Clean the exposure glasses (for DF and book scanning). Check the PM table to see if any other
cleaning is scheduled at this time.
2. Enter the user tools mode.
3. Do the "Automatic Color Calibration (ACC)" for the copier mode & printer mode.
4. Exit the User Tools mode, and then enter the SP mode.
5. Do the "Forced line position adjustment"
• First do SP2-111-3 (Mode c).
• Then do SP2-111-1 (Mode a).
• Check the process by viewing the operation panel to confirm successful results. Results can
also be viewed in SP 2-194-10 to 12.
6. Exit the SP mode.

Operation Check

Print out a sample image and confirm proper image quality.

465
 3. Preventive Maintenance

PM Counter Display
The PM Counter main menu and submenu allow you to view the PM counts for both units and individual
components.
On the CH-C1, Estimated usage rate / Remaining days and Commissioning Status Report have been
added to this menu.
Similarly to the Taurus, CH-C1 applies the running distance calculation to display the usage rate and
remaining days of parts.
With this system, PM can be scheduled with more accuracy in accordance with the machine usage
conditions unique to every user.
Please refer to the usage rate and remaining days when doing PM for the CH-C1.

Note concerning Running Distance Data

Since the PM parts yield is based on set conditions (for example, CH-C1 Pro: A4LEF, 26P/J, FC70%,
etc), if a machine is used in an unexpected manner, parts could reach their life before the prescribed
yield (EM), or could exceed the prescribed yield.
However, if the machine uses the running distance of the parts (which is a calculation based on the total
number of revolutions made by the parts), PM can be carried out at more precise times, because the
running distance reflects the actual status of the machine.

466
 PM Counter Display

Opening the PM Counter

1. Enter the SP mode.

2. Touch [PM Counter].

All PM Parts List.

Displays all PM items (all PM items, not only PM units). Lists all PM items regardless of PM yield
indicator settings.
Parts list for PM yield indicator
Displays on the items with their PM yield indicator settings set to "Yes".
Clear all PM settings
Resets all PM counter settings to "0" at the same time. PM items can be reset one by one with the
[Clear] button.
Counter list print out
Prints the PM counter on paper.

467
 3. Preventive Maintenance

Estimated Usage Rate/Estimated Remain Days

Displays the estimated usage rate (0 to 100%) and remaining days (255 to 0 days) of the PM
items, in which the calculation is based on page counter value and running distance, allowing
more accuracy in comparison to the conventional PM page counter.
Commissioning Status Report Print
Prints the status report.

PM Parts Screen Details

All PM Parts list: Main Menu

The "All PM Parts list" displays all PM units and individual items. This list shows all PM items, regardless
of their "PM yield indicator settings".

[A]: Number buttons. Pressing a number button opens a submenu.

[B]: Descriptions. The # mark denotes a "unit" (not an individual item).
[C]: PM yield buttons. Function is the same as the "PM yield indicator settings" button.
[D]: Current PM counter value.
[E]: Target PM interval. This can be changed by pressing a number button [A].
[F]: PM counter clear button. Function is the same as the [Clear current counter] button.

• The fusing belt smoothing roller and fusing cleaning web unit are prescribed as PM parts only for
D137/D138. These parts do not appear in the "All PM Parts list" because the PM counter of these
parts is not based on page count. To check if PM is needed or not for these parts, check the
"Remaining Days" on the "Estimated Usage Rate/Estimated Remaining Days" screen. (
page 470 "Estimated Usage Rate/Estimated Remaining Days") Make sure to clear the counter
with the [Clear] button after replacing these parts.

468
 PM Counter Display

Number Button Submenu

Press any number button to open the submenu for a part. In the example below, the number button
[001] #Development Unit was pressed.

[A]: Clear current counter. Press to reset the selected PM counter (in this example 001 #Development
Unit) to "0". You can also clear the settings by pressing the [Clear] button on the right side of the PM
Counter Main Menu ([F] in the previous section).
[B]: Change target yield. Press the change the target PM yield. To change the setting:
• Press [Change target yield]
• Enter the number for the new target with the 10-key pad.
• Press [#] on the operation panel.
[C]: PM yield indicator settings. [Yes] is the default. Press [No] to remove the current item from the "Parts
list for PM yield indicator".
• When set to "Yes", items marked with the # mark (# = a unit) will not have their individual items
displayed automatically in the "Parts list for PM yield indicator list".
• When set to "No", items marked with the # mark (# = a unit) only the individual components will
appear in the list (the units will not appear).
[D]: PM counter history. This is a summary of the most recent counts
• Latest 1. The latest PM count since the unit (or part) was replaced.
• Latest 2. The previous PM count since the unit (or part) was replaced.
• Latest 3. The previous but one PM count since the unit (or part) was replaced.

Parts List for PM Yield Indicator

This list shows the PM Parts Main Menu with only items set to "Yes" displayed.

469
 3. Preventive Maintenance

• The # mark denotes a unit.

• Items without the # (for example, 065 ITB) denote individual components.
• An asterisk (*) will appear in the Exceed column [A] to show items that have exceeded their target
PM yields.

Estimated Usage Rate/Estimated Remaining Days

Displays the estimated usage rate (0 to 100%) and remaining days (255 to 0 days) of the PM items
against the PM yield, which are based on calculations using the page counter and running distance.

[A]: Number buttons. Pressing a number button opens a submenu.

[B]: Descriptions. The # mark denotes a “unit” (not an individual item)
[C]: Displays the estimated usage rate (0 to 100%)
[D]: Displays the estimated remaining days (255 to 0 days)
[E]: Clear button

470
 PM Counter Display

Calculation of Estimated remaining days (255 to 0 days) and Estimated usage rate (0 to 100%)
• Calculation of estimated remaining days (255 to 0 days)
Displays either the page counter (SP7-951-XXX) or the running distance (SP7952-XXX), whichever
is smaller. Note that parts such as rollers always show the page counter value, because running
distance is not counted.
Remaining days by page counter (SP7-951-XXX) = (A – B) / C
A: Standard end value as pages (SP7623-xxx)
B: PM page counter (SP7621-xxx)
C: Average PM page counter per day = PM page counter (SP7621-xxx)/Number of days since
last replacement
Remaining days by running distance (SP7952-XXX) = (A – B) / C
A: Standard end value as distance (SP7940-xxx)
B: PM distance counter (SP7944-xxx)
C: Average distance per day = PM distance counter (SP7944-xxx) /Number of days since last
replacement
• Calculation of estimated usage rate (0 to 100%)
Displays either the page counter (SP7-954-xxx) and running distance (SP7-942-xxx), whichever is
larger. Note that parts such as rollers always show the page counter value, because running
distance is not counted.
Estimated usage rate % (by Page counter) is calculated as follows.
Current page counter value <SP7-621-xxx> / Standard page end value <SP7-623-xxx> x 100
Estimated usage rate % (by Running distance) is calculated as follows.
Current distance <SP7-944-xxx> / Standard distance end value <SP7-940-xxx> x 100

Commissioning Status Report Print

Prints out the status report.

Contents of the status report are as follows:
1. SP7403-001 to 010SC History
2. SP7507-001 to 010 Print Engine Jam History
3. SP7508-001 to 010 Original Jam History
4. SP7910-001,002ROM No(-001:System/Copy, -002:Engine)
5. SP7911-001,002Firmware version (-001:System/Copy, -002:Engine)
6. SP8581-001 T: Counter (-001: Total, -002: Total Full Color, -003B&W/Single Color, -010:Total
Color, -011:Total B/W)
7. SP8591-001 O: Counter (-001:A3/DLT Counter, -002:Duplex Counter)

471
 3. Preventive Maintenance

Initial Adjustment SP Lists

D137 RTB 94
This section describes the following: Important notes on waste toner bottle counter reset
• Automatic execution to be performed after replacement
• SP that needs to be done manually after replacement

• Parts of the automatic adjustment items that are described in this section are automatically executed
as a trigger counter is cleared. Therefore, press the counter clear button for the corresponding parts
and turn the power off and on for automatic execution
• Initial adjustment for "Force Apply Lubricant Execute" is done manually. This is because it is
necessary to perform this after separating the ITB cleaning blade from the ITB. For more
information, check the replacement and adjustment procedures for each part..

D137/D138

Manual Auto/
Parts list Adjustment SP SP description SP time
SP Manual

SP3-030-001 Initial TD Sensor Initial setting

Auto 50s
to 006 Execute of TD sensor
Developer No Manual ProCon
Auto SP3-011-002 Exe Density Pro Con 15 to 85s
Adjustment

Development SP3-040-001 DEMS : DEMS Control 110 to

Yes Manual
Filter to 005 EXECUTE (Pro Only) 180s

SP3-032-001 Initial cleaning Initial cleaning

Auto 15s
to 006 setting : Execute setting
Cleaning Unit Yes
SP3-040-001 DEMS : DEMS Control 110 to
Manual
to 005 EXECUTE (Pro Only) 180s

SP3-032-001 Initial cleaning Initial cleaning

Auto 15s
Cleaning to 006 setting Execute setting
Yes
Blade SP3-040-001 DEMS : DEMS Control 110 to
Manual
to 005 EXECUTE (Pro Only) 180s

Lubrication SP3-040-001 DEMS : DEMS Control 110 to

Yes Manual
Roller to 005 EXECUTE (Pro Only) 180s

472
 Initial Adjustment SP Lists

Manual Auto/
Parts list Adjustment SP SP description SP time
SP Manual

SP3-040-001 DEMS : DEMS Control 110 to

Lubricant Bar Yes Manual
to 005 EXECUTE (Pro Only) 180s

Lubricant SP3-040-001 DEMS : DEMS Control 110 to

Yes Manual
Blade to 005 EXECUTE (Pro Only) 180s

SP3-040-001 DEMS : DEMS Control 110 to

Joint Yes Manual
to 005 EXECUTE (Pro Only) 180s

SP3-040-001 DEMS : DEMS Control 110 to

Gears Yes Manual
to 005 EXECUTE (Pro Only) 180s

Manual ProCon
Auto SP3-011-002 Exe Density Pro Con 15 to 85s
Charge Roller Adjustment
Yes
Unit
SP3-040-001 DEMS : DEMS Control 110 to
Manual
to 005 EXECUTE (Pro Only) 180s

Manual ProCon
Auto SP3-011-002 Exe Density Pro Con 15 to 85s
Charge Roller Yes Adjustment

SP3-040-001 DEMS : DEMS Control 110 to

Manual
to 005 EXECUTE (Pro Only) 180s

Cleaner: SP3-040-001 DEMS : DEMS Control 110 to

Yes Manual
Charge Roller to 005 EXECUTE (Pro Only) 180s

Gear: Charge SP3-040-001 DEMS : DEMS Control 110 to

Yes Manual
Roller to 005 EXECUTE (Pro Only) 180s

Manual ProCon
Auto SP3-011-002 Exe Density Pro Con 15 to 85s
Adjustment

OPC Drum Yes Forced line

Auto SP2-111-004 MUSIC 15s
Position

SP3-040-001 DEMS : DEMS Control 110 to

Manual
to 005 EXECUTE (Pro Only) 180s

473
 3. Preventive Maintenance

Manual Auto/
Parts list Adjustment SP SP description SP time
SP Manual

Dancing Control speed control

Auto SP2-924-004 45 to 60s
Belt of ITB+MUSIC

Manual ProCon
Image
Auto SP3-011-002 Exe Density Pro Con 15 to 85s
Transfer Belt Yes
Adjustment
Unit
Force Apply
Manual SP2-696-001 Lubricant Lubrication 180s
Execute

Dancing Control speed control

Auto SP2-924-004 45 to 60s
Belt of ITB+MUSIC

Manual ProCon
Auto SP3-011-002 Exe Density Pro Con 15 to 85s
Transfer Belt Yes
Adjustment

Force Apply
Manual SP2-696-001 Lubricant Lubrication 180s
Execute

Dancing Control speed control

Auto SP2-924-004 45 to 60s
Belt of ITB+MUSIC
Image
No Manual ProCon
Transfer Roller
Auto SP3-011-002 Exe Density Pro Con 15 to 85s
Adjustment

Dancing Control speed control

Auto SP2-924-004 45 to 60s
Belt of ITB+MUSIC
ITB Bias Roller No Manual ProCon
Auto SP3-011-002 Exe Density Pro Con 15 to 85s
Adjustment

ITB drive shaft Dancing Control speed control

Yes Manual SP2-924-004 45 to 60s
gear Belt of ITB+MUSIC

474
 Initial Adjustment SP Lists

Manual Auto/
Parts list Adjustment SP SP description SP time
SP Manual

Dancing Control speed control

Auto SP2-924-004 45 to 60s
Belt of ITB+MUSIC
ITB Cleaning
Yes Force Apply
Unit
Manual SP2-696-001 Lubricant Lubrication 180s
Execute

Dancing Control speed control

Auto SP2-924-004 45 to 60s
Belt of ITB+MUSIC
ITB Cleaning
Yes Force Apply
Blade
Manual SP2-696-001 Lubricant Lubrication 180s
Execute

ITB Lubricant
No - - - - -
Brush

Force Apply
ITB Lubricant
No Manual SP2-696-001 Lubricant Lubrication 180s
Bar
Execute

Force Apply
ITB Lubricant
No Manual SP2-696-001 Lubricant Lubrication 180s
Blade
Execute

Manual ProCon
Paper Transfer
No Auto SP3-011-002 Exe Density Pro Con 15 to 85s
Roller Unit
Adjustment

Paper
Discharge No - - - - -
Plate

Manual ProCon
Paper Transfer
No Auto SP3-011-002 Exe Density Pro Con 15 to 85s
Roller
Adjustment

475
 3. Preventive Maintenance

D135/D136

Manual Auto/
Parts list Adjustment SP Parts list SP time
SP Manual

SP3-030-0 Initial TD Sensor Initial setting

Auto 50s
01 to 006 Execute of TD sensor
Developer No Manual ProCon
SP3-011-0
Auto Exe Density Pro Con 15 to 85s
02
Adjustment

Development
No - - - - -
Filter

SP3-032-0 Initial cleaning Initial cleaning

Cleaning Unit No Auto 15s
01 to 006 setting: Execute setting

SP3-032-0 Initial cleaning Initial cleaning

No Auto 15s
01 to 006 setting: Execute setting

Cleaning Blade No - - - - -

No - - - - -

Lubrication
No - - - - -
Roller

Lubricant Bar No - - - - -

Lubricant Blade No - - - - -

Manual ProCon
Charge Roller SP3-011-0
No Auto Exe Density Pro Con 15 to 85s
Unit 02
Adjustment

Manual ProCon
SP3-011-0
Charge Roller No Auto Exe Density Pro Con 15 to 85s
02
Adjustment

No - - - - -

Cleaner: Charge
No - - - - -
Roller

476
 Initial Adjustment SP Lists

Manual Auto/
Parts list Adjustment SP Parts list SP time
SP Manual

Manual ProCon
SP3-011-0
Auto Exe Density Pro Con 15 to 85s
02
OPC Drum No Adjustment

SP2-111-0 Forced line

Auto MUSIC 15s
04 Position

SP2-924-0 Dancing Control speed control

Auto 45 to 60s
04 Belt of ITB+MUSIC

Manual ProCon
SP3-011-0
Image Transfer Auto Exe Density Pro Con 15 to 85s
Yes 02
Belt Unit Adjustment

Force Apply
SP2-696-0
Manual Lubricant Lubrication 180s
01
Execute

SP2-924-0 Dancing Control speed control

Auto 45 to 60s
04 Belt of ITB+MUSIC

Manual ProCon
SP3-011-0
Auto Exe Density Pro Con 15 to 85s
Transfer Belt Yes 02
Adjustment

Force Apply
SP2-696-0
Manual Lubricant Lubrication 180s
01
Execute

SP2-924-0 Dancing Control speed control

Auto 45 to 60s
04 Belt of ITB+MUSIC
Image Transfer
No Manual ProCon
Roller SP3-011-0
Auto Exe Density Pro Con 15 to 85s
02
Adjustment

SP2-924-0 Dancing Control speed control

Auto 45 to 60s
04 Belt of ITB+MUSIC
ITB Bias Roller No Manual ProCon
SP3-011-0
Auto Exe Density Pro Con 15 to 85s
02
Adjustment

477
 3. Preventive Maintenance

Manual Auto/
Parts list Adjustment SP Parts list SP time
SP Manual

ITB drive shaft SP2-924-0 Dancing Control speed control

Yes Manual 45 to 60s
gear 04 Belt of ITB+MUSIC

SP2-924-0 Dancing Control speed control

Auto 45 to 60s
04 Belt of ITB+MUSIC
ITB Cleaning
Yes Force Apply
Unit SP2-696-0
Manual Lubricant Lubrication 180s
01
Execute

SP2-924-0 Dancing Control speed control

Auto 45 to 60s
04 Belt of ITB+MUSIC
ITB Cleaning
Yes Force Apply
Blade SP2-696-0
Manual Lubricant Lubrication 180s
01
Execute

ITB Lubricant
No - - - - -
Brush

Force Apply
ITB Lubricant SP2-696-0
Yes Manual Lubricant Lubrication 180s
Bar 01
Execute

Force Apply
ITB Lubricant SP2-696-0
Yes Manual Lubricant Lubrication 180s
Blade 01
Execute

Manual ProCon
Paper Transfer SP3-011-0
No Auto Exe Density Pro Con 15 to 85s
Roller Unit 02
Adjustment

Paper Discharge
No - - - - -
Plate

Manual ProCon
Paper Transfer SP3-011-0
No Auto Exe Density Pro Con 15 to 85s
Roller 02
Adjustment

478
 Cleaning Points

Cleaning Points
Scanner

Exposure Glass, ADF Exposure Glass, Reflective Plate, 1st Mirror, 2nd Mirror, 3rd
Mirror, Original Size Sensors

1. Exposure glass ( page 638)

2. Clean the front and back of the exposure glass with a glass cleaner.
3. Move the non-adhesive surface (left), then clean the front and back of the ADF exposure glass [A]
with a glass cleaner.

4. First, turn the gear [A] and move the 1st scanner carriage [B] to the center.

479
 3. Preventive Maintenance

• Do not touch the mirror, reflector, or light guide plate in the scanner carriage.
5. Clean the reflective plate [A] with a dry optical cloth.

6. Clean the 1st mirror [A], 2nd mirror [B] and 3rd mirror [C] with a dry optical cloth.

480
 Cleaning Points

7. Clean the original size sensors [A] with a dry cloth.

Laser Unit

Toner shield glass

1. Open the drawer unit [A] and remove the Toner Shield Glass Cleaning Tool [B].

481
 3. Preventive Maintenance

2. Toner supply unit. ( page 624)

3. Insert the Toner Shield Glass Cleaning Tool [A] to the slot [B], and slide it back-and-forth about 5
times to clean the toner shield glass on the laser units. Do this procedure for all 4 colors.

Developer

Development Unit

Do the following cleaning at 300k.

1. Development unit ( page 702)
2. Wipe off the toner at the toner receptacle [A] with a dry cloth.

482
 Cleaning Points

3. Clean off the toner adhering around the unit with a dry cloth.

Toner Supply

Toner Supply Unit

1. Open the toner supply unit front cover [A].

2. Remove the toner cartridge [A].

Clean the toner supply unit [B] with a damp cloth that has been wrung out.

483
 3. Preventive Maintenance

Clean the sponge seal [C] of the supply port with a dry cloth.
e.g.: Y

• In order to prevent the scattering of toner, do not use a blower brush to clean.

ITB Unit

As shown below, there are seven parts to clean at a certain interval.

1. ID Sensor
2. ITB Drive Roller

484
 Cleaning Points

3. Pre-Transfer Roller
4. ITB Cleaning Blade Counter Roller
5. ITB Lubricant Blade Counter Roller
6. Back-up Roller
7. ITB Driven Roller

Rollers

Rollers need cleaning every 900k prints

1. Transfer Belt (page 719 "ITB Replacement")

2. With a dry cloth, wipe each roller.

ID Sensor

Clean the ID sensor every 600k prints.

1. Bracket with the ID sensor

485
 3. Preventive Maintenance

2. With a damp cloth, wipe the ID sensor (three areas indicated below).

Fusing

Stripper Plate (Fusing / Pressure)

1. Pull the fusing unit out and then raise the stripper unit to open it.
2. With a dry cloth, wipe the circled area shown below.
Fusing Stripper Plate: Clean the surface and the back.
Pressure Stripper Plate: Clean the seven pawls of the stripper plate.

486
 Cleaning Points

• Do not wipe too strongly.

Fusing Entrance Guide

1. Pull the fusing unit out.

2. With a dry cloth, wipe the circled area shown below.

Thermistor (Fusing Belt)

1. Access the thermistor (Fusing Belt) (page 801 "Thermistor (Fusing Belt)")
2. Wipe the circled area shown below.

487
 3. Preventive Maintenance

Thermistor (Hot Roller Shaft) (ProC5100S/5110S Only)

1. Access the thermistor (hot roller shaft) (page 802 "Thermistor (Hot Roller Shaft)")
2. With a dry cloth, wipe the circled area shown below.

Thermopile

1. Access the thermopile. (page 807 "Thermopile (Pressure Roller)")

2. With a dry cloth, wipe the surface of the lens.

• Do not wipe too strongly.

488
 Cleaning Points

Other

Development Intake Dust Filter

1. Access the development intake filter. ( page 996 "Development Intake Fans (KCMY)")
2. Clean the locations marked with a red circle below with some dry cloth.

Pressure Roller Dust Filter (D137/D138 only)

1. Access the pressure roller intake filter. ( page 621 "Fusing Pressure Roller Intake Fan (D137/
D138 only)")
2. Clean the locations marked with a red circle below with some dry cloth.

489
 3. Preventive Maintenance

Paper Feed

1st to 4th Transport Roller (Drive/Idle)

1. Open the vertical transport door [A].

2. Wipe the 1st to 4th feed roller (drive) with damp cloth.

• [A]: 1st feed roller (drive)

• [B]: 2nd feed roller (drive)
• [C]: 3rd feed roller (drive)
• [D]: 4th feed roller (drive)
3. Wipe the 1st to 4th feed roller (idle) with damp cloth.

490
 Cleaning Points

• [A]: 1st feed roller (idle)

• [B]: 2nd feed roller (idle)
• [C]: 3rd feed roller (idle)
• [D]: 4th feed roller (idle)

Registration Roller (Drive/Idle)

1. Pull out the drawer unit [A].

2. Open the registration section and wipe the registration roller (drive/idle) with a damp cloth.

491
 3. Preventive Maintenance

• [A]: Registration roller (Drive)

• [B]: Registration roller (Idle)

Relay Roller (Drive/Idle)

1. Remove the registration unit. ( page 882)

2. Remove the relay unit. ( page 884)
3. Wipe the relay roller (drive) [A] with a damp cloth.

4. Remove the relay sensor. ( page 889)

5. Wipe the relay roller (idle) [A] with a damp cloth.

492
 Cleaning Points

Bypass Relay Roller (Drive/Idle)

1. Pull out the drawer unit [A].

2. Wipe the by-pass relay roller (drive/idle) with a damp cloth while rotating the joint [A].

• [B]: By-pass relay roller (Drive)

493
 3. Preventive Maintenance

• [C]: By-pass relay roller (Idle)

Registration Sensor

1. Pull out the drawer unit [A].

2. Open the registration section and clean the registration sensor [A] with a blower brush.

Relay Sensor

1. Open the drawer unit cover [A].

494
 Cleaning Points

2. Clean the relay sensor [A] with a blower brush

Paper Dust Collection Unit

1. Pull out the drawer unit [A].

495
 3. Preventive Maintenance

2. Remove the upper cover [A] of the paper dust collection unit. ( x2)

3. Remove the paper dust, and then wipe the dust collection unit [A] with a dry cloth.

4. Reattach the upper cover of the paper dust collection unit.

5. Wipe the by-pass relay roller (drive/idle) with a damp cloth while rotating the joint [A].

496
 Cleaning Points

• [B]: By-pass relay roller (Drive)

• [C]: By-pass relay roller (Idle)

Duplex

Heat Pipe Roller

1. Remove the fusing unit. ( page 764)

2. Wipe the heat pipe roller [A] with a damp cloth.

Heat Pipe Drive Roller

1. Remove the fusing unit. ( page 764)

2. Wipe the heat pipe drive roller [A] with a damp cloth.

497
 3. Preventive Maintenance

Paper Exit Roller (Drive/Idle)

1. Pull out the drawer unit [A].

2. Wipe the paper exit roller (drive) [A] with a damp cloth.

498
 Cleaning Points

3. Hold up the exit guide plate [A].

4. Wipe the paper exit roller (idle) [A] with a damp cloth

499
 3. Preventive Maintenance

Inverter Feed Out Roller (Drive/Idle)

1. Pull out the drawer unit [A].

2. Open the paper exit feed guide plate [A].

3. Wipe the inverter feed out roller (drive/idle) with a damp cloth.

500
 Cleaning Points

• [A]: Inverter feed out roller (Drive)

• [B]: Inverter feed out roller (Idle)

Inverter Exit Roller (Drive/Idle)

1. Pull out the drawer unit [A].

2. Open the paper exit feed guide plate [A].

501
 3. Preventive Maintenance

3. Wipe the inverter exit roller (drive/idle) with a damp cloth.

• [A]: Inverter exit roller (Drive)

• [B]: Inverter exit roller (Idle)

Paper Exit Relay Roller (Drive/Idle)

1. Pull out the drawer unit [A].

502
 Cleaning Points

2. Hold up the exit guide plate [A].

3. Wipe the paper exit relay roller (drive/idle) with a damp cloth.

• [A]: Paper exit relay roller (Drive)

• [B]: Paper exit relay roller (Idle)

503
 3. Preventive Maintenance

Inverter Feed In Roller (Drive/Idle)

1. Pull out the drawer unit [A].

2. Hold up the exit guide plate [A].

3. Remove the fusing unit. ( page 764)

4. Remove the separation pawl (e-ring x 2).
5. Wipe the inverter feed roller (drive/idle) with a damp cloth.

504
 Cleaning Points

• [A]: Inverter feed roller (Drive)

• [B]: Inverter feed roller (Idle)

Exit Transport Guide Plate (Upper/Middle/Left)

1. Pull out the drawer unit [A].

2. Open the reverse guide plate [A].

505
 3. Preventive Maintenance

3. Open the paper exit feed guide plate.

4. Wipe the paper exit feed guide plate (left) [A] with a dry cloth.

5. Hold up the paper exit guide plate [A].

506
 Cleaning Points

6. Wipe the paper exit feed guide plate (upper/middle) with a dry cloth.

• [A]: Paper exit feed guide plate (Upper)

• [B]: Paper exit feed guide plate (Middle)

Duplex Unit Roller 1st to 4th (Drive/Idle)

1. Pull out the drawer unit [A].

2. Push down the guide plate [A].

507
 3. Preventive Maintenance

3. Wipe the duplex feed roller 1st to 4th (drive) and duplex feed roller 2nd to 4th (idle) with a damp
cloth.

• [A]: Duplex feed roller 1st (Drive)

• [B]: Duplex feed roller 2nd (Drive)
• [C]: Duplex feed roller 3rd (Drive)
• [D]: Duplex feed roller 4th (Drive)
• [E]: Duplex feed roller 2nc (Idle)
• [F]: Duplex feed roller 3rd (Idle)
• [G]: Duplex feed roller 4th (Idle)
4. Remove the fusing unit. ( page 764)

508
 Cleaning Points

5. Wipe the duplex feed roller 1st (idle) [A] with a damp cloth.

Duplex Exit Roller (Drive/Idle)

1. Pull out the drawer unit [A].

2. Push down the guide plate [A].

509
 3. Preventive Maintenance

3. Wipe the duplex exit roller (drive/idle) with a damp cloth.

• [A]: Duplex exit roller (Drive)

• [B]: Duplex exit roller (Idle)

Transport Guide Plate (Upper/Lower)

1. Pull out the drawer unit [A].

510
 Cleaning Points

2. Push down the guide plate [A].

3. Wipe the transport guide plate (upper/lower) with a damp cloth.

511
 3. Preventive Maintenance

• [A]: Transport guide plate (Upper)

• [B]: Transport guide plate (Lower)

Purge Guide Plate (Lower)

1. Open the purge door [A].

2. Move the purge guide plate (lower) [A] to the upright position.

3. Wipe the area [A] under the transport guide plate (lower) with a damp cloth.

512
Cleaning Points

513
 3. Preventive Maintenance

Lubrication Points
Fusing

Bearing (Hot Roller/Pressure Roller) Lubrication

1. Detach the bearing (page 787 "Heating Roller, Fusing Roller, Fusing Belt")
2. Use grease (Barrierta S552R) to lubricate the inner surface of the bearing.
3. Rotate the inner surface of the bearing to check if the bearing can rotate smoothly.

• Replace the bearing if it cannot rotate smoothly.

Fusing Gear Lubrication

1. While rotating the gear [B], lubricate the small diameter teeth of the gear [A] and all teeth
of the gear [B] circled below.

514
 Lubrication Points

2. Make sure that grease is applied to all the gears.

[Left]: FLUOTRIBO MG Grease 4.0g

[Right]: FLUOTRIBO MG Grease 1.5g

• The max. and min. amount of grease you should use is shown below.
[A]: Min. Amount
[B]: Max. Amount

515
 3. Preventive Maintenance

[A]: Min. Amount

[B]: Max. Amount

516
4. Replacement and Adjustment

Notes on the Main Power Switch

Push Switch

The main power button of this machine has been changed to a push-button switch (push button) from the
conventional rocker switch. The push switch has characteristics and specifications different from the
rocker switch. Care must be taken when replacing and adjusting parts.

Characteristics of the Push Switch (DC Switch)

Power is supplied to the machine even when the main power switch is turned OFF.
The push switch in this machine uses DC (direct current). Therefore, if the AC power cord is
connected to an electrical outlet, power is supplied to the controller board, the operation unit and
other modules even when the main power is turned OFF. When replacing the controller board and
the operation unit in this state, not only these boards, it will damage other electrical components.
So, when performing maintenance work such as replacing parts, in addition to turning off the main
power with the push switch, always unplug the AC power cord.
When you disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet, inside the machine there is still
residual charge.
When you disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet, inside the machine for a while there
is still residual charge. Therefore, if you remove boards in this state, it can cause a blown fuse or
memory failure.
• How to remove the residual charge inside the machine
After you unplug the power cord from the AC wall outlet, in order to remove the residual
charge from inside the machine, be sure to press the main power switch. Thus, the charge
remaining in the machine is released, and it is possible to remove boards.
When you reconnect the AC power cord into an AC wall outlet, the machine will start
automatically.
In order to remove the residual charge, push the main power switch while you disconnect the AC
power cord. At that time, the power ON flag inside the machine is set. Therefore, after you finish
work on the machine and reconnect the power cord to the AC, even if you do not press the main
power switch, the machine will start automatically and the moving parts will begin to move. When
working on moving parts, be careful that fingers or clothes do not get caught.

517
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• Automatic restart deals with cases when you accidentally unplugged the AC power cord or
unexpected power outages. By keeping the power flag ON, after the resumption of power,
the machine will start up automatically.
In rare cases, when you reconnect the AC power cord to a power outlet, the machine does not
start automatically. In this case, the machine has not failed. The cause is due to the timing of
releasing the residual charge. If you press the main power switch while the residual charge was
already released, the power ON flag will not be set. At this time, start the machine manually by
pressing the main power switch.

• If an option that is powered independently from a different power source, i.e. the Multi-Folding Unit
FD4000 (for D135/D136/D137/D138) or the Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020 (for D137/D138), is
included in the configuration, always follow the procedure below when reconnecting the AC
power cord into an AC wall outlet after disconnecting it and pressing the main power switch to
release the charge. If you do not follow the procedure below, the option that is powered
independently will not be recognized by the copier and paper jams will occur.
1. Connect the AC power cord of the option into an AC wall outlet, and then connect the AC
power cord of the copier into an AC wall outlet.
2. After the copier starts up automatically, press the main power switch of the copier again to
power off and on the machine, and then run a copy job to check the operation.

Shutdown Method

1. Press the main power switch [A] on the left side of the machine.
2. Take out the power cord
3. Wait 3 minutes (this is the time required if you will remove the rear cover and access the interior of
the machine, to take out the controller board for example).
Note: If some LEDs on any of the boards are blinking or lit, current is still flowing.
After the shutdown process, the main power is turned off automatically.

518
 Notes on the Main Power Switch

When the shutdown is complete

Main power LED: Off
Operation panel LED: Off

• How to start from shutdown

• To start the machine, press the main power switch. However, if you press the main power switch
between the beginning and the end of a shutdown, the machine will not start.

Forced Shutdown

In case normal shutdown does not complete for some reason, the machine has a forced shutdown
function.
To make a forced shutdown, press and hold the main power switch for 6 seconds.
In general, do not use the forced shutdown.

• Forced shutdown may damage the hard disk and memory, and can cause damage to the machine.
Use a forced shutdown only if it is unavoidable.

519
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Special Tools and Lubricants

D137/D138

The following special tools should be prepared for maintenance of this model in the field:
Unique or Common:
U: Unique for this model
C: Common with listed

Item Part Number Description Q’ty Unique or Common

1 D0159501 ZINC STEARATE 1 C (*1)

2 D0159500 G104 YELLOW TONER 1 C (*1)

3 VSSG9002 FLUOTRIBO MG GREASE: 100G 1 C (*2)

4 B6455020 SD Card 1 C(General)

5 B6456705 PCMCIA Card Adapter 1 C (General)

6 G0219350 Loop-back Connector – Parallel 1 C (General)

7 C4019503 20X Magnification Scope 1 C (General)

8 A0929503 C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set) 1 C (General)

9 B6795100 Plug - IEEE1284 Type C 1 C (General)

• These items are common with the following models.

(*1): Common with Venus-C2/Venus-C3
(*2): Common with Taurus-C1
• Loop-back Connector [Parallel (item 6)] requires Plug [IEEE1284 Type C (item 9)].
• A PC (Personal Computer) is required for creating the Encryption key file on an SD card when
replacing the controller board in which HDD encryption has been enabled.

D135/D136

The following special tools should be prepared for maintenance of this model in the field:
Unique or Common:

520
 Special Tools and Lubricants

U: Unique for this model

C: Common with listed

Item Part Number Description Q’ty Unique or Common

1 D0159501 ZINC STEARATE 1 C (*1)

2 D0159500 G104 YELLOW TONER 1 C (*1)

FLUOTRIBO MG GREASE :
3 VSSG9002 1 C (*2)
100G

4 B6455020 SD Card 1 C(General)

5 C4019503 20X Magnification Scope 1 C (General)

6 A0929503 C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set) 1 C (General)

7 A2579300 Grease Barrierta – S552R 1 C (*1)

8 A1849501 OPTICS ADJUSTMENT TOOL 2 C (*3)

• These items are common with the following models.

(*1): Common with Venus-C2/Venus-C3
(*2): Common with Taurus-C1
(*3): Common with Apollon-C2.5/Athena-C2.5
• A PC (Personal Computer) is required for creating the Encryption key file on an SD card when
replacing the controller board in which HDD encryption has been enabled.

521
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Outer Covers
Right Cover

Right Middle Front Cover (D137/D138)

1. LCT cover [A] ( x 2)

2. Screw covers [B] on the arm cover [A] of the operation panel

3. Arm cover [A] of the operation panel ( x 2)

522
 Outer Covers

4. Remove the fixing screws of the right middle front cover ( x 2)

5. Open the toner supply unit front cover [A] and by-pass tray unit [C]. Slide the right middle front
cover [B] to the left.

• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.

523
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Right Middle Front Cover (D135/D136)

1. LCT cover [A] ( x 2)

2. Remove the fixing screws of the right middle front cover [A] ( x 2)

524
 Outer Covers

3. Open the toner supply unit front cover [A] and by-pass tray unit [C]. Slide the right middle front
cover [B] to the left.

• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.

Right Middle Upper Cover (D137/D138)

1. In order to easily remove the right middle upper cover [A], remove the fixing screws on the left side
of the rear middle cover [B] ( x 2).

525
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Open the by-pass tray unit [A]. Remove the right middle upper cover [B], moving it downward ( x
1).

• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.

526
 Outer Covers

Right Middle Upper Cover (D135/D136)

1. In order to easily remove the right middle upper cover [A], remove the fixing screws on the left side
of the rear middle cover [B] ( x 2).

2. Open the by-pass tray unit [A]. Remove the right middle upper cover [B], moving it downward ( x
1).

• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.

527
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Right Middle Rear Cover (D137/D138)

1. Right middle upper cover (D137/D138) ( page 525)

2. LCT cover [A] ( x 2)

3. Slide the right middle rear cover [A] to the left ( x 2)

• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.

528
 Outer Covers

Right Middle Rear Cover (D135/D136)

1. Right middle upper cover (D135/D136) ( page 527)

2. LCT cover [A] ( x 2)

3. Slide the right middle rear cover [A] to the left ( x 2)

529
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.

Right Lower Cover

1. In order to easily remove the right lower cover [A], remove the fixing screws on the left side of the
rear lower cover [B] ( x 2).

2. LCT cover [A] ( x 2)

3. Remove the fixing screws of the right lower cover ( x 4).

530
 Outer Covers

4. Open the vertical tranport door [A]. Remove the hooks (x 2) located on the upper side of the right
lower cover [B], then remove by sliding downward.

• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.

531
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Left Cover

Left Middle Cover

1. In order to easily remove the left middle cover [A], remove the fixing screws on the right side of the
rear middle cover [B] and rear lower cover [C] ( x 3).

2. Remove the fixing screws of the left middle cover( x 2).

532
 Outer Covers

3. Remove the left middle cover [A].

• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.

533
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Notes on left middle cover attachment

• Attach the left middle cover to align the left middle cover [A] and the upper cover [B].

• Attach the hook [A] to fit location [B] on the machine.

• Attach the hook [C] to fit location [D] on the machine.

534
 Outer Covers

Left Lower Cover

1. Purge cover [A] (pin x 2)

2. Remove the fixing screws of the left lower cover( x 2).

535
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. While holding the right side of the left lower cover [A], remove it in a downward direction.

• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.

536
 Outer Covers

Rear Cover

Rear middle cover

1. Remove the rear middle cover [A] by moving it upward ( x 4).

537
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.

Rear Lower Cover

1. Rear middle cover ( page 537)

2. Rear Lower Cover [A] ( x 4).

538
 Outer Covers

• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.

Upper Cover

Upper Front Cover (D137/D138)

1. Open the ADF and remove the fixing screws of the upper front cover [A] ( x 2).

2. Lift the upper front cover [A] and slide it forward.

539
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.

Upper Front Cover (D135/D136)

1. Open the ADF and remove the fixing screws of the upper front cover [A] ( x 2).

540
 Outer Covers

2. Disconnect the left hook of the upper front cover [A].

3. Slide the upper front cover [A] to the right.

• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.

541
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Upper Rear Cover (Small)

1. Open the ADF and remove the fixing screws of the upper rear cover (small) [A] ( x 2).

Upper Left Cover/ Upper Right Cover

1. Upper front cover ( D137/D138: page 539, D135/D136: page 540)

2. Upper rear cover (small) ( page 542)
3. Remove the upper left cover [A] and upper right cover [B] by sliding them toward the rear.

542
 Outer Covers

• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.
• Upper left cover

• Upper right cover

543
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

544
 Operation Panel (D137/D138)

Operation Panel (D137/D138)

Operation Panel

1. Remove the screw covers [A] on the back of the operation panel. Remove the arm upper cover [B]
( x 2).

2. Screw cover [A] and the rear cover [B] ( x 3)

3. Operation panel ( x 4, x 3)

545
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

LDCD Board

1. Operation Panel ( page 545)

2. Rear cover [A] ( x 8)

3. Bracket [A] ( x 10)

546
 Operation Panel (D137/D138)

4. LDCD board [A] ( x 4, x 1, x 2, flat cable x 2)

OPU Board / OPR Board

1. Remove the connector and the clamp that is connected to the LDCD board [A] ( x 1, x 1, flat
cable x 1).

547
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Bracket [A] ( x 15, flat cable x 2)

3. OPU board ( x 4)

4. OPR board ( x 7)

548
 Operation Panel (D137/D138)

LCD Board (Touch Panel Unit)

1. Remove the connector and the clamp that is connected to the LDCD board [A] ( x 1, x 1, flat
cable x 1).

2. Bracket [A] ( x 15, flat cable x 2)

549
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. LCD Board (Touch Panel Unit) [A] ( x 1)

550
 Operation Panel (D135/D136)

Operation Panel (D135/D136)

Operation Panel

1. Upper right cover ( page 542 "Upper Left Cover/ Upper Right Cover")
2. Remove the fixing screws and connectors of the operating unit [A] ( x 2, x 2)

3. Slide the operation panel [A] and lower cover [B] forward.

• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.

551
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Remove the operation panel [B] from the lower cover [A] ( x 5).

Touch Panel Calibration

1. Operation Panel ( page 551)

2. Turn the operation panel (including the lower cover) [A] and remove the fixing screws ( x 2,).

552
 Operation Panel (D135/D136)

3. For tilt adjustment, loosen the screws in three places.

4. Lift the lower cover [B] to pivot the hooks [A] on the front side. Then align the cover [B] with the ribs
[C].

553
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

1. Fix the ribs and lower cover with the screws you removed in step 2 ( x 2,).
e.g.: right side

2. Tighten the screws in three places to fix the operation panel.

554
 Operation Panel (D135/D136)

LDCD Board

1. Operation Panel ( page 551)

2. Middle cover [A] ( x 6)

3. Bracket [A] ( x 5, x 1)

555
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. LDCD board [A] ( x 4, x 2, flat cable x 1)

OPU Board / OPR Board

1. LDCD board [A] along with the bracket ( x 6, x 2, flat cable x 5)

2. OPU board ( x 1)

3. OPR board ( x 6)

556
 Operation Panel (D135/D136)

LCD Board (Touch Panel Unit)

1. LDCD board [A] along with the bracket ( x 6, x 2, flat cable x 5)

2. LCD Board (Touch Panel Unit) [A]

557
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

ADF
ADF Removal

1. Remove the rear middle cover [A] by moving it upward ( x 4).

2. Controller box cover [A] ( x 4).

3. Disconnect the interface cable [A] ( x 1, x 1) and CIS unit cable [B] ( x 1, x 1, x 4)
from the rear of the machine.

558
 ADF

4. Open the ADF [A].

5. Remove the fixing screws of the ADF ( x 2).

559
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

6. While holding the left and right sides of the ADF, lift up to remove it.

• Because of the weight of the ADF, handle with care.

Adjustment after Replacing the ADF

CIS RGB Adjustment

Enter the four-digit numeric values for RGB that are listed on the paper that comes with the ADF into the
following SP.
R: SP4-712-001 (CIS GB Adj Value: R)
G: SP4-713-001 (CIS GB Adj Value: G)
B: SP4-714-001 (CIS GB Adj Value: B)

Checking the vertical registration

SP6-006-001 (ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Front)

SP6-006-002 (ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Rear)
1. Create an original as shown in the following picture.

560
 ADF

*The arrows indicate the direction of feed.

2. Copy the original and make sure that the position of the line [A] is within 0±1mm
3. If not within the standard, adjust with the SP modes.

Checking the horizontal registration

SP6-006-010 (ADF Adjustment L-Edge Regist (1-Pass): Front)

SP6-006-011 (ADF Adjustment L-Edge Regist (1-Pass): Rear)
1. Copy the original and make sure that the position of the line [B] is within 0±2mm.
2. If not within the standard, adjust with the SP modes.

Checking the skew

1. Make sure that the difference between both end positions of the line [A] is within 0±2mm.
2. If not within the standard, change the position of the fixing screw [A] to the long hole [B] at the right
hinge.

561
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Checking the magnification

SP6-017-001 (DF Magnification Adj.)

1. Copy the original and make sure that the length of the line [B] is within 100±1mm.
2. If not within the standard, adjust with the SP mode.

Platen Adjustment

1. Open the ADF and remove the white cover (magic tape x 10).

2. Put the white cover [A] in the correct position on the exposure glass, aligning it with the glass cover
[B] and the rear scale [C].

562
 ADF

3. Close the ADF [A] slowly and paste the ADF and the white cover [B] with the magic tapes.

ADF Cover

ADF Front Cover

1. Open the feed cover [A].

563
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Slide the ADF front cover [A] to the left ( x 2, hook x 4).

• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.

564
 ADF

ADF Rear Cover

1. Open the feed cover [A].

2. Cover [A] ( x 1).

3. Lift off the rear cover [A] ( x 2, hook x 4).

• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.

565
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Feed Cover

1. ADF front cover ( “ADF Front Cover” in page 563 "ADF Cover")
2. ADF rear cover ( “ADF Rear Cover” in page 563 "ADF Cover")
3. Feed cover [A] ( x 3, x 1)

Original Feed Unit

1. Open the feed cover.

566
 ADF

2. Remove the snap-fit [A].

3. Original feed unit [A] (Pull the original feed unit, remove the back side of the shaft. Then, remove
the bushing in the foreground.)

Pick-up Roller / Transport Belt

1. Original feed unit ( page 566)

2. Slide the resin bushing [A], and then remove the pick-up roller unit [B].

567
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• At re-assembly, make sure that the tab on the front guide plate [A] is above the pick-up roller
[B].

3. Pick-up roller cover [A] and pick-up roller [B] (snap-fit x 2, bushing x 2, one-way clutch x 1)

568
 ADF

4. Lift the left and right sides of the feed belt holder [A], then remove it.

5. Remove the feed belt [B] from the feed belt holder [A].

569
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

ADF Separation Roller

1. Open the feed cover.

2. Original feed unit ( page 566)
3. ADF separation roller cover [A].

4. ADF separation roller [A] and torque limiter clutch [B] (snap-fit x 1)

570
 ADF

Original Registration Sensor

1. Entrance lower guide [A] ( x 2).

2. Scanning guide plate [A] (hook x 1).

3. Original registration sensor [A] along with the bracket ( x 1, x 1).

571
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Original Registration Sensor [A] (hook x 4).

Original Exit Sensor

1. Entrance lower guide [A] ( x 2).

572
 ADF

2. Scanning guide plate [A] (hook x 1).

3. Open the white cover [A].

4. Remove the original exit sensor [B], which is mounted on the upper guide [A] ( x 6).

573
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Remove the original exit sensor [B] from the upper guide [A] ( x 1, x 1).

ADF Control Board

1. ADF rear cover ( “ADF Rear Cover ” in page 563 "ADF Cover")
2. ADF control board [A] ( x 4, all s)

574
 ADF

Separation Sensor / Skew Correction Sensor

1. Feed upper guide [A] in the feed cover ( x 3)

2. Remove the sensors along with the bracket [A] ( x 1)

575
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Separation Sensor [A] and Skew Correction Sensor [B] ( x 1 each)

Original Width Sensor / Interval Sensor

1. Feed cover ( “Feed Cover ” in page 563 "ADF Cover")

2. Guide plate [A] ( x 3)

3. Interval sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)

576
 ADF

4. Remove the original width sensor guide plate [A] ( x 2), then remove the original width sensors (x
5) [B] ( x 1 each).

B5 Width Sensor / A4 Width Sensor / LG Width Sensor

1. Raise the document tray [A], then remove the lower cover [B] ( x 4).

577
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. B5 Width Sensor [A] ( x 1)

3. A4 Width Sensor [B] ( x 1)
4. LG Width Sensor[C] ( x 1)

APS Feeler

1. ADF rear cover ( “ADF Rear Cover” in page 563 "ADF Cover")
2. APS Feeler [A] ( x 1)

578
 ADF

ADF Lift-Up Interlock SW / Lift-Up Sensor

1. ADF Control Board ( page 574)

2. ADF lift-up interlock SW [A] along with the bracket ( x 3, x 2)

3. Lift-Up Sensor [A] along with the bracket ( x 1, x 1)

579
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Original Set Sensor

1. ADF front cover ( “ADF Front Cover” in page 563 "ADF Cover")
2. Remove the screw and raise the original tray [A].

3. Original set sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)

580
 ADF

A4 LEF/LT LEF Sensor

1. ADF front cover ( “ADF Front Cover” in page 563 "ADF Cover")
2. Remove the screw and raise the original tray [A].

3. A4 LEF/LT LEF Sensor [A] (hook x 1, x 1)

Bottom Plate HP Sensor

1. Original feed unit ( page 566)

2. ADF front cover ( “ADF Front Cover” in page 563 "ADF Cover")
3. Remove the screw and raise the original tray [A].

581
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Bottom plate HP sensor [A] ( x 1)

Bottom Plate Position Sensor

1. ADF rear cover ( “ADF Rear Cover” in page 563 "ADF Cover")
2. Original feed unit ( page 566)
3. Bottom plate position sensor [A] ( x 1)

582
 ADF

ADF Feed Cover Interlock SW / Pick-up Roller HP Sensor

1. ADF rear cover ( “ADF Rear Cover” in page 563 "ADF Cover")
2. Remove the ADF feed cover interlock SW [A] from the retaining bracket (snap-fit x 1, spring x 1,
pin x 1).

3. ADF feed cover interlock SW [A] ( x 2, x 2)

4. Pick-up roller HP sensor [A] along with the bracket ( x 1, x 1, x 1)

583
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

ADF Entrance Motor

1. ADF rear cover ( “ADF Rear Cover” in page 563 "ADF Cover")
2. ADF entrance motor [A] along with the frame ( x 2, x 2, x 2, spring x 1, timing belt x 1)

3. ADF entrance motor [A] ( x 4)

584
 ADF

ADF Scanning Motor

1. ADF entrance motor along with the frame ( page 584 "ADF Entrance Motor")
2. ADF read motor [A] along with the bracket ( x 2, x 1 , spring x 1, timing belt x 1)

3. ADF scanning motor [A] ( x 2)

ADF Exit Motor

1. ADF Control Board ( page 574)

2. ADF exit motor [A] along with the bracket ( x 2, x 1, spring x 1, timing belt x 1)

585
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. ADF exit motor [A] ( x 3)

ADF Bottom Plate Lift Motor

1. ADF entrance motor along with the frame ( page 584 "ADF Entrance Motor")
2. ADF bottom plate lift motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)

586
 ADF

ADF Pick-up Roller Lift Motor / ADF Transport Motor

1. ADF rear cover ( “ADF Rear Cover” in page 563 "ADF Cover")
2. Frame (black) [A] ( x 3)

3. ADF pick-up roller lift motor [A] ( x 2, x 1, timing belt x 1)

587
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. ADF transport motor [A] along with the bracket ( x 2, x 1, timing belt x 1)

5. ADF transport motor [A] ( x 3)

588
 ADF

ADF Feed Motor

1. ADF rear cover ( “ADF Rear Cover” in page 563 "ADF Cover")
2. Remove the fixing screws of the frame (black) [A] ( x 2).

3. ADF entrance motor along with the frame ( page 584 "ADF Entrance Motor")
4. ADF feed motor [A] along with the bracket ( x 2, x 1, spring x 1, timing belt x 1)

5. ADF feed motor [A] ( x 2)

589
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

CIS Unit

1. Original Feed Unit ( page 566)

2. ADF Separation Roller ( page 570)
3. ADF front cover ( “ADF Front Cover” in page 563 "ADF Cover")
4. Guide plate (large) [A] ( x 3)

5. Guide plate (small) [A] ( x 2)

590
 ADF

6. Guide plate [A] ( x 1)

7. CIS unit [A] ( x 2, x3)

• To prevent scratches on the surface of the CIS glass, removal of the CIS unit must be done with
the white cover [A] open.

591
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Drawer Unit
Layout (Motors)

Drawer Unit (Front)

To replace the motors on the front of the drawer unit, first remove the drawer unit cover. (
page 594 "Drawer Unit Cover")

Replacement
No. Part Name Remarks
procedure

1 Exit Motor page 612

2 Duplex Inverter Entrance Motor page 612

3 Duplex Transport Motor page 614

4 Registration Motor page 611

5 Duplex Exit Motor page 615

6 Cleaning Web Motor page 616 D137/ D138 only

592
 Drawer Unit

Drawer Unit (Rear)

Replacement
No. Part Name Remarks
procedure

1 Exit Inverter Motor page 613

2 Cleaning Web Contact Motor page 617 D137/ D138 only

Layout (Boards)

593
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Replacement
No. Part Name Remarks
procedure

1 Paper Separation AC Power Pack page 600

2 DUB page 600

3 Fusing Web Control Board-Drawer page 601 D137/ D138 only

Drawer Unit Cover

1. Open the drawer unit [A].

2. Drawer unit cover [A] ( x 7*)

594
 Drawer Unit

* D137/D138 use TCRU/ORU screws

• After removing the drawer unit cover, when the drawer unit is returned to the machine, you
can close the guide plate [A] of the paper exit and duplex unit.

If the Drawer is Locked

When the drawer is locked, deal with the problem depending on the symptom. ( page 1470 "Other
001: Drawer Unit")
This section shows the procedure to unlock when there is a failure of the drawer unit lock sensor or
drawer unit lock motor.
1. Left middle cover of the outer cover ( page 532)
2. Right middle front cover of the outer cover ( D137/D138: page 522. D135/D136:
page 524)

595
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the fixing screws of the left and right sides of the drawer unit cover [A] ( x 5).

4. Open the paper feed tray, then remove the fixing screw on the bottom of the drawer unit cover [A].

5. Insert the driver from the flapper handle [A], and remove the bracket screw [B].

596
 Drawer Unit

6. Put a hand in the flapper handle [A] and pull the drawer unit cover [B] to the front. Then hold the
guide plate [C] of the paper exit and duplex unit, and remove the drawer unit cover [A] in an
upward direction.

7. Drawer unit lock motor cover [A] ( x 3)

597
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

8. Drawer unit lock motor block [A] ( x 1, snap-fit x 1, x 3, x1)

9. Turn the lock shaft [A] clockwise to release the lock.

598
 Drawer Unit

10. Turn the paper transfer roller shaft [A] clockwise by using the link [B] to separate the paper transfer
roller unit from the ITB. You can pull the drawer unit out.

• When mounting the motor block, screw the motor in first. Then, assemble links [A], [B] and [C]
as shown below. There is also a diagram embossed on the motor cover to help you to install
the links correctly.
• Lock shaft (Cut surface to the upper left) [A]
• Link (Long hole to the right) [B]
• Paper transfer roller shaft (Cut surface to the lower side) [C]

599
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

DUB (Drawer Unit Board)

1. Drawer unit cover ( page 594)

2. Registration unit ( page 882)
3. Paper transfer roller unit ( page 757)
4. DUB cover [A] ( x 1)

5. DUB [A] ( x 6, all s)

Paper Separation AC Power Pack

1. Paper transfer roller unit ( page 757)

2. Cover [A] ( x 4, hook x 2)

600
 Drawer Unit

3. Paper separation AC power pack [A] ( x 5, all s)

Fusing Web Control Board-Drawer (D137/D138 only)

1. Paper transfer roller unit ( page 757)

2. Cover [A] ( x 2, hook x 2)

601
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Fusing web control board-drawer [A] ( x 1, all x 4)

Curled Cord

1. Drawer unit cover ( page 594)

2. Registration unit ( page 882)
3. Relay unit ( page 884)
4. Paper transfer roller unit ( page 757)
5. Remove the curled cord connector and fixing material [A] that is connected to the rear of the
machine.

602
 Drawer Unit

• When mounting the curled cord, fit the fixing material in the hole on the rear of the machine.

6. Remove the left and right clamps fixing the curled cord [A].

7. DUB cover [A] ( x 1)

603
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

8. Curled cord ( x 2, x 2)

Drawer Unit Connector

1. In order to facilitate the work, pull the drawer unit out half way, then press the release levers (one
on the left side and one on the right side, shown by the red arrows) and pull the drawer unit [A] out
fully.

604
 Drawer Unit

• In a low-temperature environment (below 15°C), the tension of the curled cord may be
reduced. So, do not pull the drawer unit out for a long time, or the curled cord will be
deformed and will not curl up again when you try to slide the drawer unit back in. As a guide,
every 30 minutes, push the drawer unit back to the half-way position. There is no decrease in
tension of the curled cord with a low-temperature environment if the drawer unit is open half-
way.
2. Drawer unit connector bracket [A] ( x 4)

3. Remove the drawer unit connector [A] (x 2) by pressing the ends ( x 2 each).

605
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Drawer Unit Set Sensor

1. IOB along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine ( page 940 "When
removing the motors that are behind the IOB")
2. Drawer unit set sensor [A] ( x 1)

Drawer Unit Lock Sensor

1. In order to facilitate the work, pull the drawer unit out half way, then press the release levers (one
on the left side and one on the right side, shown by the red arrows) and pull the drawer unit [A] out
fully.

606
 Drawer Unit

• In a low-temperature environment (below 15°C), the tension of the curled cord may be
reduced. So, do not pull the drawer unit out for a long time, or the curled cord will be
deformed and will not curl up again when you try to slide the drawer unit back in. As a guide,
every 30 minutes, push the drawer unit back to the half-way position. There is no decrease in
tension of the curled cord with a low-temperature environment if the drawer unit is open half-
way.
2. Drawer Unit Lock Sensor [A] along with the bracket ( x 1)

607
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Drawer Unit Handle Sensor

1. Drawer unit cover ( page 594)

2. Right cover [A] and left cover [B] ( x 2 each)

3. Middle cover ( x 5)

4. Drawer unit handle sensor [A] ( x 1)

608
 Drawer Unit

Drawer Unit Lock Motor

1. Drawer unit cover ( page 594)

2. Drawer unit lock motor cover [A] ( x 3)

3. Drawer unit lock motor block [A] ( x 1, snap-fit x 1, x 3, x1)

609
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• When mounting the motor block, screw the motor in first. Then, assemble links [A], [B] and [C]
as shown below. There is also a diagram embossed on the motor cover to help you to install
the links correctly.
• Lock shaft (Cut surface to the upper left) [A]
• Link (Long hole to the right) [B]
• Paper transfer roller shaft (Cut surface to the lower side) [C]

4. Drawer unit lock motor holder [A] ( x 5)

610
 Drawer Unit

5. Take off the gears, and remove the drawer unit lock motor [A] ( x 2)

Registration Motor

1. Drawer unit cover ( page 594)

2. Registration motor [A] ( x 2, x 1, timing belt x 1)

611
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Exit Motor

1. Drawer unit cover ( page 594)

2. Exit motor [A] ( x 2, x 1, timing belt x 1)

Duplex Inverter Entrance Motor

1. Drawer unit cover ( page 594)

612
 Drawer Unit

2. Duplex inverter entrance motor [A] ( x 2, x 1, timing belt x 1)

Exit Inverter Motor

1. In order to facilitate the work, pull the drawer unit out half way, then press the release levers (one
on the left side and one on the right side, shown by the red arrows) and pull the drawer unit [A] out
fully.

613
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• In a low-temperature environment (below 15°C), the tension of the curled cord may be
reduced. So, do not pull the drawer unit out for a long time, or the curled cord will be
deformed and will not curl up again when you try to slide the drawer unit back in. As a guide,
every 30 minutes, push the drawer unit back to the half-way position. There is no decrease in
tension of the curled cord with a low-temperature environment if the drawer unit is open half-
way.
2. Exit Inverter Motor [A] ( x 2, x 1, timing belt x 1)

Duplex Transport Motor

1. Drawer unit cover ( page 594)

2. Duplex transport motor [A] ( x 2, x 1, timing belt x 1)

614
 Drawer Unit

Duplex Exit Motor

1. Drawer unit cover ( page 594)

2. Duplex exit motor [A] ( x 2, x 1, timing belt x 1)

615
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Cleaning Web Motor (D137/D138 only)

1. Drawer unit cover ( page 594)

2. Cleaning Web Motor block [A] (torsion spring x 1, x 1, x 1)

3. Cleaning Web Motor [A] along with the bracket ( x 2)

4. Cleaning Web Motor [A] ( x 2)

616
 Drawer Unit

Cleaning Web Contact Motor (D137/D138 only)

1. In order to facilitate the work, pull the drawer unit out half way, then press the release levers (one
on the left side and one on the right side, shown by the red arrows) and pull the drawer unit [A] out
fully.

• In a low-temperature environment (below 15°C), the tension of the curled cord may be
reduced. So, do not pull the drawer unit out for a long time, or the curled cord will be
deformed and will not curl up again when you try to slide the drawer unit back in. As a guide,
every 30 minutes, push the drawer unit back to the half-way position. There is no decrease in
tension of the curled cord with a low-temperature environment if the drawer unit is open half-
way.
2. Exit inverter motor [A] along with the bracket ( x 3, x 1)

617
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Cleaning Web Contact Motor [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1)

Fusing Heat Pipe Cooling Fan

1. Drawer unit cover ( page 594)

2. Disconnect the connector, clamp, etc., in order to remove the duct together with the fusing heat
pipe cooling fan [A].

618
 Drawer Unit

3. Fusing heat pipe cooling fan [A] along with the duct ( x 3, x 3, hook x 2)

4. Fusing heat pipe cooling fan [A]

619
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

IH Coil Cooling Fan

1. Drawer unit cover ( page 594)

2. Disconnect the connector, clamp, etc., in order to remove the duct together with the IH coil cooling
fan [A].

3. IH coil cooling fan [A] along with the duct ( x 3, x 3, hook x 2)

4. IH coil cooling fan [A]

620
 Drawer Unit

Fusing Pressure Roller Intake Fan (D137/D138 only)

1. Drawer unit cover ( page 594)

2. Fusing unit ( page 764)
3. Inner cover [A] ( x 2, x 1)

4. Disconnect the connector, clamp, etc., of the duct [A] for the fusing heat pipe cooling fan and IH
coil cooling fan.

621
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Duct [A] for the fusing heat pipe cooling fan and IH coil cooling fan ( x 2, x 3, hook x 4 (On
the left side, there is a hook on the top and bottom.))

6. Fusing pressure roller intake fan [A] ( x 2, x 1)

622
Drawer Unit

623
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Toner Supply Unit

Toner Supply Unit Front Cover

1. Open the toner supply unit front cover [A].

2. Remove the toner supply unit front cover [A] by sliding it to the left, fastener x 1).

Toner Supply Unit

1. Drawer unit cover ( page 594)

2. ITB cleaning intake fan [A] along with the duct ( x 1*).

624
 Toner Supply Unit

* D137/D138 use TCRU/ORU screws

3. Open the toner supply unit front cover [A].

4. Remove the fixing screws of the toner supply unit [A] ( x 3*).

625
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

* D137/D138 use TCRU/ORU screws

5. Slide the toner supply unit [A] to the front.

6. Pull out the toner supply unit [A], and remove it from the slide rail with the handles on the left and
right ( x 2*).

626
 Toner Supply Unit

* D137/D138 use TCRU/ORU screws

• When attaching the toner supply unit to the machine, the hooks of the toner supply unit should
be fit into the holes in the slide rails.

ID Chip Connector Board (KCMY)

1. Toner supply unit ( page 624)

2. ID chip connector board cover [A].
e.g.: Y

627
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. ID chip connector board [A] ( x 2, x 1).

Toner Supply Unit Inner Cover

1. Toner supply unit front cover ( page 624)

2. Drawer unit cover ( page 594)
3. ITB cleaning intake fan [A] along with the duct ( x 1*).

* D137/D138 use TCRU/ORU screws

628
 Toner Supply Unit

4. Toner supply unit inner cover [A] ( x 4).

Sub Hopper Unit (KCMY)

1. Toner supply unit inner cover ( page 628)

2. CMY: Sub Hopper Unit [A] ( x 2 each, all s)
e.g.: Y

3. K: Disconnect all the connectors and clamps connected to the sub hopper unit [A] and toner supply
board (TSB) [B] ( x 2).

629
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Sub hopper unit [A] ( x 2)

• When installing the sub hopper unit, take care not to tuck the toner fall prevention sheet [A]
attached to the toner supply unit.
[B]: Normal state
[C]: Toner fall prevention sheet is tucked

630
 Toner Supply Unit

Adjustment after Sub Hopper Unit (KCMY) replacement

After replacing the Sub Hopper Unit, you have to execute Density Adjustment Process Control.
1. Turn on the main power switch with the by-pass tray unit [A] or the vertical transport door [B] open.

2. Enter SP mode and close the by-pass tray unit or vertical transport door.
3. Execute SP3-011-002 (Manual ProCon:Exe > Density Adjustment).

631
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Confirm that SP3-012-001 (ProCon OK? > History:Latest) shows “11111111”.

Toner End Sensor (KCMY)

1. Sub Hopper Unit ( page 629)

2. Toner end sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)

Sub Hopper Motor (KCMY)

1. Sub Hopper Unit ( page 629)

2. Sub hopper motor [A] ( x 2 each, x 1 each)

Toner Supply Board (TSB)

1. Sub Hopper Unit (K) ( page 629)

2. Toner Supply Board (TSB) [A] ( x 2)

632
 Toner Supply Unit

Toner Cartridge Guide

1. Toner supply unit inner cover ( page 628)

2. Drawer unit cover ( page 594)
3. ITB cleaning intake fan [A] along with the duct ( x 1*).

* D137/D138 use TCRU/ORU screws

4. Remove the fixing screws of the toner supply unit [A] ( x 3*).

633
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

* D137/D138 use TCRU/ORU screws

5. Slide forward the toner supply unit [A].

6. Toner cartridge [A]

634
 Toner Supply Unit

7. Toner cartridge guide [A] ( x 8)

• When installing, tighten the screws on the bottom while holding from the top as shown below.

635
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Toner Supply Motor (KCMY)

1. Toner cartridge guide ( page 633)

2. Remove the ID chip connector cover [B] from the back of the toner supply unit [A].
e.g.: Y

3. Toner supply motor [A] along with the bracket ( x 3, x 1, x 3)

• It will be easier to access the clamp shown below if you remove the development intake fan.
( page 996 "Development Intake Fans (KCMY)")

636
 Toner Supply Unit

4. Toner supply motor [A] ( x 2)

e.g.: Y

637
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Scanner Unit
Exposure Glass

1. Rear scale [A] ( x 3)

2. Glass cover [A] ( x 2)

3. Exposure glass [A]

638
 Scanner Unit

• When attaching the glass cover, ensure that the glass cover is not riding on the upper front
cover or the upper rear small cover.

ADF Exposure Glass / Gap Sheet (D135/D136)

• The document transport system of the ADF is different between D135/D136 and D137/D138.
D135/D136 uses a new non-contact transport system, so the glass replacement procedure is
changed accordingly.

How to Remove the ADF Exposure Glass/Gap Sheet

1. Exposure glass ( page 638)

2. Remove the gap sheet (black) [A], ADF exposure glass [B] and exposure glasss seal (transparent)
[C].

639
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

How to Attach the ADF Exposure Glass/Gap Sheet

1. Clean the place to attach the exposure glass seal on the exposure glass bracket with alcohol.
2. Attach the exposure glass seal* [C] along the marking [B] on the exposure glass bracket [A].

* The tip of the seal is cut at an angle.

3. Peel off the release paper of the exposure glass seal.
4. Attach the ADF exposure glass [B] along the lancing parts [A] on the exposure glass bracket.

640
 Scanner Unit

• Attach the ADF exposure glass, so that the marking [A] is on the upper left.

5. Attach in the order of exposure glass, glass cover and rear scale.
6. Clean the ADF exposure glass with a dry cloth.
7. Peel off the release paper of the gap sheet.
8. Fit the gap sheet* [C] to the convex portion [A] on the glass cover.

641
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

*The tip of the seal is cut at an angle. Its tip faces the front [B].

• When replacing an ADF exposure glass, replace with a new exposure glass seal and a gap
sheet as well.
• ADF Exposure Glass (D137/D138): Same as for D135/D136, except there is no gap sheet.

Modification Procedure for Original Transport

For D135/D136, if you change from contact transport to non-contact transport, it is necessary to
replace parts of the scanner unit and the ADF.

Replacing Parts of the ADF

1. Open the ADF

2. Entrance lower guide unit [A] ( x 2).

• Entrance lower guide unit for non-contact transport: the following areas are black [A].
• Entrance lower guide unit for contact transport (part number: D6833401): the following
areas are clear and colorless [B].

642
 Scanner Unit

3. Scanning guide plate [A] (hook x 1).

• Scanning guide plate for non-contact transport: the following areas are black [A].
• Scanning guide plate for contact transport (part number: D6833350): the following areas are
white [B].

4. Attach the scanning guide plate for contact transport [A] (hook x 1).
5. Attach the entrance lower guide unit for contact transport [B] ( x 2).

643
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

6. Enter the SP mode, set "98" at SP4-688-002 (Scan Image Density Adjustment 1-pass).

Removing the Scanner Parts

1. Exposure glass ( page 638)

2. Remove the gap sheet (black) [A] from the ADF exposure glass [B].

3. Clean the ADF exposure glass with alcohol.

Lens Block / Original Size Sensor

1. Exposure glass ( page 638)

2. Lens cover [A] ( x 5)

644
 Scanner Unit

3. Original size sensors [A] ( x 2) and the sensor cradle [B] ( x 2)

4. IDB [A] ( x 2, x 2)

645
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Lens Block [A] ( x 4, x 3)

Adjustment after Replacing the Lens Block

SP4-008-001: Sub Scan Magnification Adj ( ”Sub Scan Magnification Adjustment” in page 669
"Magnification and Registration Adjustment")
SP4-010-001: Sub Scan Registration Adj ( ”Sub Scan Registration Adjustment” in page 669
"Magnification and Registration Adjustment")
SP4-011-001: Main Scan Reg ( ”Main Scan Registration Adjustment” in page 669
"Magnification and Registration Adjustment")

Exposure Lamp (LED)

1. Exposure glass ( page 638)

2. Upper front cover ( D137/D138: page 539, D135/D136: page 540)
3. Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the notched section [B].

646
 Scanner Unit

• Do not touch the mirror, reflector, or light guide plate in the scanner carriage.
4. Exposure lamp (LED) [A] ( x 2, x 1)

• When attaching the exposure lamp, put the harness in the hook.

647
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Scanner Drive Motor

1. Upper right cover ( page 542 "Upper Left Cover/ Upper Right Cover")

• In the case of D135/D136, also remove the operation panel. ( page 551 "Operation
Panel")
2. Pull out the toner supply unit. ( page 624)
3. Right side stay [A] ( x 5)

• Iin the case of D135/D136, remove the operation panel bracket [A] ( x 7).

648
 Scanner Unit

4. Scanner drive motor [A] along with the bracket ( x 3, x 1, spring x 1, timing belt x 1)

5. Motor bracket [A] ( x 2)

6. Motor cushion [A] ( x 2)

649
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• When attaching the motor, make sure that the timing belt does not come off. Slide the motor a
few times. Screw the motor into place while the spring is pulled.

Scanner HP Sensor

1. Exposure glass ( page 638)

2. Upper left cover ( page 542 "Upper Left Cover/ Upper Right Cover")
3. Left bracket [A] ( x 5)

4. Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the center. Peel off the shielding plate [B], Then remove the
scanner HP sensor ( x 1).

650
 Scanner Unit

DF Position Sensor

1. ADF ( page 558)

2. Upper rear small cover [A] ( x 2)

3. Operator call light [A] ( x 3, x 1)

651
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• The operatior call light is not attached to D135/D136, so this step is not required.
4. Upper rear cover [A] ( x 2)

5. DF position sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1, spring plate x 1)

652
 Scanner Unit

SIO Board

1. Upper rear small cover [A] ( x 2)

2. Slide the upper right cover [A] toward the rear.

3. Remove the fixing screws on the right side of the rear middle cover [A] ( x 2).

653
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Open the by-pass tray unit, then remove the right middle cover [A] ( x 1).

5. SIO board [A] ( x 5, x 5)

• The 5 screws for the SIO board are accessed from holes in the right frame of the machine.

654
 Scanner Unit

Scanner Unit

1. Upper left cover/ upper right cover ( page 542 "Upper Left Cover/ Upper Right Cover")

• In the case of D135/D136, also remove the operation panel. ( page 551 "Operation
Panel")
2. Rear middle cover [A] ( x 4)

3. Slide the controller box cover [A] to the right ( x 4).

655
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Disconnect the interface cable [A] from the rear of the machine ( x 1, x 1, x 2, bind x 1).

• When connecting the scanner cable, do not forget to attach the bind. As shown in the pictures
below, the binding position should be in the middle of the cable.

656
 Scanner Unit

5. Remove the interface cable [A] through the right side [B] of the machine ( x 3).

6. Disconnect the connector of the scanner unit [A] ( x 2).

7. Fixing screws on the left side stay [A] ( x 2)

657
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

8. Fixing screws on the right side stay [A] ( x 3)

• For steps 7-8 in the procedure described above, in the case of D135/D136, remove the
operation panel bracket [A] ( x 7).

9. D137/D138: Scanner unit [A] ( x 4)

658
 Scanner Unit

D135/D136: Scanner unit [A] ( x 4)

10. Hold the handles at the left and right, and remove the scanner unit [A] from the machine.

659
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Scanner Wire

Preparation for Replacing a Scanner Wire

1. Exposure glass ( page 638)

2. Left stay [A] and right stay [B] ( x 5 each)

3. Front frame [A] ( x 7)

660
 Scanner Unit

Replacing the Scanner Wire

1. Move the 1st sacanner carriage [B] to a position where the screw [A] of the bracket can be seen.

2. Remove the springs of the tension brackets (rear: [A] / front: [B]).

661
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Loosen the fixing screws of the tension brackets (rear: [A] / front: [B]).

4. Remove the retaining brackets (rear: [A] / front [B]) from the wire ( x 1 each).

662
 Scanner Unit

5. Remove the tip and the rear end of the wire (rear / front).
6. Unscrew the wire pulleys (rear: [A] / front [B]) and drive pulley [C]. Remove the wire pulleys from
the shaft.

7. Remove the rear and front wires.

Preparation for Reassembling the Scanner Wire

1. Pass the wire from the side where there is no projection on the pulley. [A]

663
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Place the beads on the middle of the wire in the groove. [B]
3. Attach tape across the pulley to temporarily hold the wires in place. [C]

Reassembling the Scanner Wire

1. Remove the 1st scanner carriage from the scanner unit.

2. Position the 2nd scanner carriage with the positioning pins (part number: A1849501)
3. Set the wire pulley through the shaft. (Do not tighten the screw of the front side pulley yet.)
4. Turn the wire and remove the tape.
5. Set the spring. (Do not tighten the screw yet.)
6. Tighten the screw of the drive pulley.
7. Remove the positioning pins temporarily. Then move the 2nd carriage to fit in the wire.
8. Set the positioning pins again and tighten screws of the front pulley and tension bracket.

• If the scanner does not move smoothly, and it is possible to set positioning pins, re-adjust using
the above procedure.
9. Set the 1st scanner carriage with the positioning pins. Attach the retaining bracket. Then fix the wire
and the carriage.

664
 Scanner Unit

• If replacing anything other than the wire, adjust SP4-010-001 (Sub Scan Registration Adj).

Installing the Scanner Heater

Accessories

Check the accessories against the list below.

No Description Q'ty

1 Heater 1

665
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

No Description Q'ty

2 Tapping Screw - M3x6 2

• The part number for the scanner heater is the same across all models except the D135-17. See the
table below. Also see D137 RTB 119

Model Area Voltage Part number

D135-17 NA 120 to 127V B2291678

D135-21 CHN 220 to 240V D1381688

D135-27 EU 220 to 240V D1381688

D135-29 AP 220 to 240V D1381688

D136-17 NA 208 to 240V D1381688

D136-21 CHN 220 to 240V D1381688

D136-27 EU 220 to 240V D1381688

D136-29 AP 220 to 240V D1381688

Installation

• Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
• Do the following procedure not to damage any harnesses.
• Check that all harnesses are not damaged nor pinched after installation.

1. Exposure Glass ( page 638)

2. Left middle cover ( page 532)
3. First, turn the gear [A] and move the 1st scanner carriage [B] to the position of the lens cover [C].

666
 Scanner Unit

4. Pass the scanner heater [A] under the 2nd carriage [B]. Then put the connector [C] from the left
side of the scanner unit [D].

5. Attach the scanner heater [A] ( x 2).

667
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• The screw on the left side of the scanner heater is accessed from the scanner frame.

6. Connect the connector [A] of the scanner heater to the machine ( x 1, x 2).

668
 Scanner Unit

Magnification and Registration Adjustment

Sub Scan Magnification Adjustment

Measuring Tool
150 mm scale
Adjustment Method
Copy the scale and check that the length of the 100 mm scale on the copy is the same as the
original, within the standard value (±0.8%) for a 100 mm scale.
It should be measured 10 minutes after the copy has been fed out.

Adjustment Procedure
1. Enter SP mode.
2. Select SP4-008.
If you decrease the adjustment value, this will increase the scanner speed, and the output image is
compressed in the feed direction.
If you increase the adjustment value, this will decrease the scanner speed, and the output image is
extended in the feed direction.

Sub Scan Registration Adjustment

Measuring Tool
C4 chart
Adjustment Method
Copy the C4 chart. Check whether there is an image in the center of the paper.

669
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Adjustment Procedure
1. Enter SP mode.
2. Select SP4-010.
The image is moved downward by increasing the adjustment value.
The image is moved upward by decreasing the adjustment value.

Main Scan Registration Adjustment

Measuring Tool
C4 chart
Adjustment Method
Copy the C4 chart. Check whether there is an image in the center of the paper.
Adjustment Procedure
1. Enter SP mode.
2. Select SP4-011.
The image is moved to the right by increasing the adjustment value.
The image is moved to the left by decreasing the adjustment value.

670
 Laser Unit

Laser Unit
Before You Begin

• This laser unit employs 80 laser beams produced by a Class III LD with a wavelength of 772 to
792 nm and intensity of 1.4 mW (40 beams). Direct exposure to the eyes could cause permanent
blindness.
• Before adjusting or replacing the laser unit, push the main power switch to power the machine off
then unplug the machine from the power source. Allow the machine to cool for a few minutes. The
polygon motor continues to rotate for approximately one to three minutes after the machine is
switched off.
• Do not turn on the power when the laser unit and the polygon cover are not installed. Ensure that
after assembly, the polygon cover is completely closed.
• Do not turn on the power when the synchronization detectors are disconnected. Ensure that after
assembly, the synchronization detectors are set correctly.

Caution Decals

D137/D138, D135/D136

671
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

D135/D136 only

Laser Unit

• Each laser unit is composed of two laser diode assemblies.

Before Replacement

1. Plug in the power cord, and then turn ON the main power switch.
2. Reset the motors for skew adjustment to the zero point with the following SPs:.
• SP2-104-002: set to "0"
• SP2-104-003: set to "0"
• SP2-104-004: set to "0"

• If you do not do the above adjustment, MUSIC may not work. This is because one or more of the
motors may be at or near the upper or lower limit (± 50). In such a case, if you do not zero the
motor positions before MUSIC is done, the range that the motor can move will be restricted and the
adjustment may not be done correctly.

Replacement

1. Scanner unit ( page 655)

2. Spring plates [A] ( x 4)

672
 Laser Unit

3. For the Laser unit (CK) [A], remove the stay [B] first. ( x 1)

4. Remove the connectors from the laser unit [A]. ( x 4; includes a USB connector)
e.g.: CK

5. Laser unit [A] ( x 4)

e.g.: CK

673
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

6. Grasp the handles on the left and right, and lift out the laser unit.

How to Distinguish between the CK Laser Unit and YM Laser Unit

CK Laser Unit
Bar code label [A]: White characters on black background
Bottom center [B]: No screws

674
 Laser Unit

YM Laser Unit
Bar code label [A]: Black characters on white background
Center bottom [B]: A pentagonal protrusion is screwed in

675
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Notes on Installation of a New Laser Unit

The polygon mirror of the new laser unit is protected by fall prevention materials. Therefore, when
installing the unit in the machine, it is necessary to remove the materials
1. Remove the polygon cover [A] ( x 4).

2. Turn over the polygon cover [A], remove the fall prevention materials [B] and the red tag [C].

3. Attach the polygon cover to the laser unit ( x 4).

Adjustment after Laser Unit Replacement

Do the following steps.

1. Plug in the power cord, and then turn ON the main power switch.
2. Execute the following SPs to download the correction values from the new laser unit.
SP2-108-1: Image Parameter-K/C Writing Unit
SP2-108-2: Image Parameter-Y/M Writing Unit

676
 Laser Unit

• During the download of the correction values, you can turn off the power, or open the door.
• If an SC or a display of "failure" occurs, you can run the download again after turning the
power OFF and ON.
3. Correct the color registration with the User Tools.
[User Tools/Counter/Inquiry]-[Management]-[Color Registration]-[OK]
4. If necessary, adjust the registration, skew, and magnification. For information about how to adjust,
refer to Adjustment in Troubleshooting. ( page 1347 "Adjustment")

Laser Unit Cooling Fan (Left / Right)

1. Laser unit ( page 672)

• Remove the laser unit cooling fan (left) after removing the laser unit (YM).
• Remove the laser unit cooling fan (right) after removing the laser unit (CK).
2. For the laser unit cooling fan (left), first, remove the cover [A] ( x 2), and then remove the clamp
of the cooling fan cord.

3. Laser unit cooling fan along with the bracket ( x 2, x 1, x 1)

e.g.: Left

677
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Laser unit cooling fan [A] (hook x 2)

• It is also possible to leave the bracket on the machine side, and remove the laser unit cooling
fan [A] only.

678
Laser Unit

679
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

PCDU
Faceplate

1. Toner supply unit ( page 624)

2. Turn the transfer belt release lever counterclockwise and remove the fixing screws of the faceplate
( x 6*).

* D137/D138 use TCRU/ORU screws

3. Take off the handles.

4. Pull out the units using the handles in the circled areas as shown below. Pull out little by little over
the entire surface uniformly throughout.

680
 PCDU

5. Remove the faceplate with the grips.

• Do not close the drawer unit with the faceplate removed, because there is a risk of damage to
the paper transfer roller unit.

PCDU

1. Faceplate ( page 680)

2. Unlock the lever [A] and pull out the PCDU [B] from the machine.

681
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Place the PCDU [A] on the cradle [B] that was laid down on paper in advance.

• When installing the PCDU, ensure that the locking lever is fit in the hole of the machine frame.
[A]: The locking lever is properly fit in the hole in the machine frame.
[B]: The locking lever is not properly fit in the hole in the machine frame.

682
 PCDU

• After installing the faceplate, check the status of the locking levers again by looking through
the holes as shown below. The levers should be straight, as shown above [A], and not at an
angle [B]. However, some force is required to attach the faceplate, and this could knock the
levers out of their horizontal alignment.

• D137/D138: After you take the PCDU out of the machine and put it back, or replace it with a
new one, carry out SP3-040-001 to SP3-040-005 (DEMS: Execute).

Charge Roller Unit

1. PCDU ( page 681)

2. Charge roller unit [A] ( x 2*)

683
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

* D137/D138 use TCRU/ORU screws

• After removing the charge roller unit, place it on a clean, flat surface with the roller facing up.

Drum Cleaning Unit Removal

1. PCDU ( page 681)

2. Front faceplace [A] ( x 3*)

684
 PCDU

* D137/D138 use TCRU/ORU screws

3. Spopper [A] at the rear ( x 1*)

* D137/D138 use a TCRU/ORU screw

4. Slide the bracket [A] to the rear.

685
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Drum cleaning unit [A] ( x 1)

• When installing the drum cleaning unit, ensure that it (the front side) is fit into the grooves of
the development unit.

686
 PCDU

• After removing the cleaning unit, lubricant and toner streaks [B] remain on the surface of the
OPC drum [A]. This will cause stains on the charge roller. Therefore, rotate the OPC drum in
the direction of the arrow [C] before you install the new drum cleaning unit.

• After replacing the cleaning unit, attach the special tools [A] to the OPC drum (these are
shipped with the cleaning unit). With the flange [C], rotate 1-2 times in the direction of the
arrow [D].

687
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Notes on Replacing the Drum Cleaning Unit and Drum Cleaning Blade

Do not replace the drum cleaning unit or the drum cleaning blade at the same time as the following
parts.
• ITB
• ITB Cleaning Unit
• ITB Cleaning Blade
• ITB Lubricant Bar
• ITB Lubricant Blade
After replacing the drum cleaning unit or the drum cleaning blade, cleaning initial setting is performed
automatically. On the other hand, after replacing the above five parts, you need to run SP2-696-001
(Force Apply Lubricant Execute) manually before cleaning initial setting runs. ( page 724
"Lubrication after replacement"). This is because, if cleaning initial setting runs automatically before
running SP2-696-001 (Force Apply Lubricant Execute) manually, the ITB cleaning blade will be turned
up
If you need to replace the above five parts at the same time as replacing the drum cleaning unit or the
drum cleaning blade, use the following procedure.
1. Clear the counter of the drum cleaning unit or the drum cleaning blade.
2. Replace the drum cleaning unit or the drum cleaning blade. (The cleaning initial setting
automatically runs)
3. Clear the counters of the above five parts

688
 PCDU

4. Replace the above five parts

5. Run SP2-696-001 (Force Apply Lubricant Execute) manually

OPC Drum

1. Charge roller unit ( page 683)

2. Drum cleaning unit ( page 684)
3. To remove the drum [A], move it to the front side (to the left as shown above), then pull it out from
the rear side (the right side as shown above).

• After removing the OPC drum, place it on a clean, flat surface.

Attaching the New OPC Drum

1. When replacing, apply the lubricant powder (D0159501) (zinc stearate) evenly with a brush to
the OPC drum.

689
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• Use the blower brush (D0747690) when applying lubricant powder (zinc stearate) to the
OPC drum.

2. Lay the protective sheet (black) [B] that had been wrapped around the new OPC drum on the
development unit [A].

690
 PCDU

3. Attach the new OPC drum [A] and remove the protective sheet (black) [B] from the bottom.

• The surface of a newly replaced drum needs to be lubricated. In the lubrication process where the
drum is manually rotated, the two tools [A] function to fix the shaft so that the drum rotates precisely
on its axis.
• Attach the tools [A] to the front and rear sides of the drum [B].
• Make sure the tools are inserted all the way in. Hold the flange [C] and rotate the drum in the
direction toward the development unit [D].
• The two tools [A] are accessory parts of the machine.

691
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Drum Cleaning Unit Internal Components

Separation of the Lubrication Unit and Cleaning Unit

1. Drum cleaning unit ( page 684)

2. Front cover [B] of the cleaning unit [A] ( x 1)

692
 PCDU

3. Remove the following five gears (gear [A]: x 1).

4. Rear cover [A] ( x 1)

693
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Remove the fixing screw on the rear side and separate into cleaning unit [A] and lubrication unit
[B].

• When installing the cleaning unit and the lubrication unit, ensure that the shaft of the cleaning
unit is fit into the hole in the vibration plate [A].

Lubrication Unit

1. Separation of the lubrication unit and cleaning Unit ( page 692 "Drum Cleaning Unit Internal
Components")
2. Lubricant blade [A] ( x 2)

694
 PCDU

• When assembling, position the lubricant blade on the earth plate [A] of the lubrication unit.

3. Joint at the rear side [A]

4. Cover [A] ( x 2)

695
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Lubricant bar [A]

6. Bearing with the side seal (front) [A], bearing with the side seal (rear) [B] and lubrication roller [C]

696
 PCDU

• When installing a new lubricant bar, a new lubrication roller must be installed.
• When installing the lubrication roller, ensure that the roller is fit into the groove of the
lubrication unit

7. Remove the side seal (front) [A] and the side seal (rear) [B] from the bearings.

697
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Cleaning Unit

1. Separate the lubrication unit and cleaning unit ( page 692 "Drum Cleaning Unit Internal
Components")
2. Drum cleaning blade [A] ( x 2)

3. Remove the side seal (rear) [A] and the side seal (front) [B] from the cleaning unit.

698
 PCDU

Assembling the Cleaning Unit and Lubrication Unit with New Seals

• Replace the cleaning blade, lubrication blade and side seals as a set.
1. Assemble the cleaning unit and the lubrication unit. ( page 692 "Drum Cleaning Unit Internal
Components")
2. Clean the area [A] of the cleaning unit and the lubrication unit where the side seals were attached
with alcohol and a cloth.
e.g.: cleaning unit

3. Attach new side seals [A] to both sides of the cleaning unit and the lubrication unit.
Align the edges of the side seal with the edges of the unit and attach them.
Ensure there is no gap between the side seals and the blade [B].
e.g.: cleaning unit

699
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. After attaching the side seals (x 2 each) on the cleaning unit and the lubrication unit, apply the
lubricant powder (D0159501) (zinc stearate) with a brush on the side seals [A].
e.g. (enlarged): cleaning unit

5. Apply the lubricant powder (D0159501) (zinc stearate) and yellow toner (D0159500) at the
lubrication roller [A].

700
 PCDU

• Use the blower brush (D0747690) when applying lubricant powder (zinc stearate) and yellow
toner in Step 4 and 5.

701
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Development Unit
Development Unit

1. PCDU ( page 681)

2. Charge roller unit ( page 683)
3. Drum cleaning unit ( page 684)
4. OPC drum ( page 689)
5. Development unit [A]

• D137/D138: After you take this part out of the machine and put it back, or replace it with a
new one, carry out SP3-040-001 to SP3-040-005 (DEMS: Execute).

• Since the development unit and face plates (front [A], rear [B]) are integrated, do not remove
the following screws.

702
 Development Unit

• When carrying the developing unit, do not hold the frame [A]. The frame may become bent or
broken if load is applied to it.

• When installing the new development unit, attach the color identification seals [A] that come
with the unit to the supply port.

703
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Development Filter

1. Filter cover [A] from the right side.

2. Filter cover [A]

704
 Development Unit

Removing Old Developer

General

Replacing the developer without completely removing old developer causes the machine to operate in a
condition in which the applied toner density value is lower than the actual value. This happens because
the toner density sensor (TD sensor) initialization process (SP3-030-001 to 006), which is performed
when replacing the developer, always sets back the toner density readings to the prescribed standard
value 7.0% regardless of the actual toner density, e.g. actual toner density could be 8% after replacing
with fresh developer but the TD sensor is calibrated to read this as 7%.
Continuous machine operation in this condition and incomplete developer replacement will eventually
cause the actual toner density to become too high and result in toner scattering.
This bulletin announces the procedures on how to remove old developer to prevent toner scattering, in
two parts.
Following are the expected effects:
• Easier developer removal as a result of improved developer fluidity
• Toner density will come close to the standard 7% after developer replacement even if the dev unit is
not completely cleared and contains a slight amount of old developer.

PART 1: Preparations for Developer Removal

1. Before removing the developer, enter the SP mode and check the current toner density.

Table1 Toner density check SP

SP No. Color

SP 3-200-001 K

705
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. Color

SP 3-200-002 C

SP 3-200-003 M

SP 3-200-004 Y

If the toner density is 7%±0.5, skip the following procedures and go to PART 2.
If the toner density is not 7%±0.5 (7.5% or higher), continue this procedure.
2. Refer to the table below and determine the print volume according to the toner density confirmed in
the previous step. The actual printing will be done in step 5.

Table2 Print volume based toner density and paper size

Toner Density A4/LT A3/DLT

12% 110 55

11% 90 45

10% 70 35

9% 45 23

8% 20 10

7.5% 10 5

7% 0 0

3. Refer to the tables below and change the SP values for toner supply mode and supply rate to “0”
for the dev unit(s) requiring the developer replacement.

Table 3-1 Toner Supply Mode

SP No. Color Default Change to

SP 3-400-001 K 4 0

SP 3-400-002 C 4 0

SP 3-400-003 M 4 0

SP 3-400-004 Y 4 0

• The default value “4” supplies toner in DANC (Divided Image Active Noise Control) mode.

706
 Development Unit

• Changed value “0” supplies toner in constant supply mode.

Table 3-2 Toner Supply Rate

SP No. Color Default Change to

SP 3-440-001 K 5 0

SP 3-440-002 C 5 0

SP 3-440-003 M 5 0

SP 3-440-004 Y 5 0

4. Select test pattern “26” from SP2-109-003 and specify the color in SP2-109-005.

Table 4 Test Pattern Settings

SP No. Settings

SP 2-109-003 26 Solid

SP 2-109-005 Specify color

5. Print the test pattern on A4/LT or A3/DLT for the volume determined in step 2.
6. Check the latest toner density in SP3-200-001 to 004. (Table 1)
7. Repeat steps 1 to 5 until you achieve the standard toner density 7%±0.5.
8. Set the SP settings for toner supply mode and supply rate (changed in step 3) back to the default
values; “4” for toner supply mode and “5%” for supply rate.

• Make sure to set the toner supply mode and supply rate carry back to default. Otherwise,
image density will appear light.
9. Continue with the procedures described in “Part 2”.

PART 2: Developer Removal Procedure

1. Development unit ( page 702)

2. Take out the old developer from the supply port [A] into the plastic bag that came with the new
developer.

707
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• When carrying the developing unit, do not hold the frame. It may become bent or broken if
load is applied to the frame.
3. Remove the old developer while turning the screw [B] clockwise, using the special tool [A].

4. When the developer is no longer ejected from the supply port, rotate the development roller [A]
counterclockwise

708
 Development Unit

5. Repeat until the developer does not come out of the supply port
6. Tilt the development unit towards the development roller. The developer in the unit is gathered at
the development roller side.
7. Once again, dump the developer until there is no adhesion around the development roller [A].

8. Turn the development roller clockwise, and make sure that there is no adhesion of the roller around
the roller.

• If you are in an environment that can use a vacuum cleaner, remove the development guide
plate [A] ( x 2) and remove the developer attached to the roller with the vacuum cleaner.

709
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• If you are in an environment where use of a vacuum cleaner is not possible, make sure that all
old developer is removed from the center of the development roller until about 1cm from the
edge [A]. After filling with new developer and there is more old developer than this
remaining, a development motor lock may occur.

Adding New Developer

Before you refill a development unit, remove all the old developer in accordance with the ‘Removing
Old Developer’ procedure described above.

710
 Development Unit

Adding New Developer (Summary)

Adding New Developer and Adjustment

1. Turn off the power.

2. Toner supply unit ( page 624)
3. Turn on the machine.
4. Attach the funnel [A] to the the supply port [B] of the development unit.

711
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• Protrusion [A] at the bottom of the funnel is the stopper. Make sure that the protrusion is
inserted securely into the slot at the back side of the supply port [B] of the development unit.

5. Shake the developer pack [A] 5 or 6 times.

712
 Development Unit

6. Enter SP mode and execute SP3-024-00x (Developer Fill). See the table below.

Filling Developer SP
SP Description

3-024-001 Developer Fill :Exe Execute: ALL

3-024-002 Developer Fill :Exe Execute: COL

3-024-003 Developer Fill :Exe Execute: K

3-024-004 Developer Fill :Exe Execute: C

3-024-005 Developer Fill :Exe Execute: M

3-024-006 Developer Fill :Exe Execute: Y

3-024-007 Developer Fill :Exe Choose: From Left: YMCK

3-024-008 Developer Fill :Exe Execute: Chosen Color

7. Fill the developer [A] while tapping the funnel. It should finish within 60 seconds. Make sure that
the error message "Failed" does not appear.

713
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• Execution time for filling developer is 60 seconds as the default. The time interval for execution
can be adjusted. If more time is needed to empty the developer pack, increase the time
interval with SP3-024-11 (Developer Fill: Exe Drive Time Upper Limit).
• If the filling is not completed in time, see the result code table below.
8. After the filling completion message is displayed on the touch panel display, enter SP3-025-001
(Dev Fill OK? From Left:YMCK) to confirm that developer installation succeeded.
You will see a 4-digit number: 1111. Reading from left-to-right each number is a result code for the
Y, M, C, K developer execution with SP3-024-00. Refer to the result code table below.

Result code table for filling developer

Code Meaning Comment Conditions Recovery Procedure

No
0 - - -
execution

714
 Development Unit

Code Meaning Comment Conditions Recovery Procedure

Even the results display of SP3025 shows

success, developer may remain in the
funnel. In this case, implement the
following output checks in order to fill the
remaining developer.
• Set to ON “1” at SP5-805-068
(Output Check Used Toner Bottle
Succeed Motor).
1 - -
ed • Set to ON “1” at SP5-805-069
(Output Check Toner Discharge
Motor).
• Set to ON “1” at SP5-805-112,
-113, -114 or 115 (Output Check
Dev Motor).
• After the completion of filling, set the
output checks to OFF.

Deal with this in the following order.

• Turn off the main power.
• Carefully remove the funnel for
which the developer is remaining.
• Remove the PCDU and attach the
Before cap to the supply port.
When the time
execution, TD • Tilt the PCDU about 45 degrees to
expires at the
No sensor output the side of the toner supply unit,
developer is
2 develope was above closer to the developer supply port
filled with
r exited 1.0V side in the vicinity of the TD sensor.
about 150 to
(developer • Attach the PCDU.
200g
present).
• Attach the funnel that has the
developer remaining.
• Turn on the main power and run the
developer filling with SP3-024.
• Make sure that the "1" is the result
with SP3-025.

715
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Code Meaning Comment Conditions Recovery Procedure

Deal with this in the following order.

Before • Turn off the main power.
Removing the
execution, TD • Remove the PCDU and remove the
developer in
No sensor output developer in the PCDU.
EM, if the
2 develope was above
developer • Attach the PCDU and the funnel
r exited 1.0V
remains in the
(developer • Enter SP mode and execute
developing unit
present). SP3-024-00x (Developer Fill).
• Fill the developer

After
execution, TD When the time
No sensor output expires the rest
• Enter SP mode and execute
3 develope was below of the
SP3-024-00x (Developer Fill).
r entered 1.0V (no developer is
developer less than 150g
present).

The used If the waste • Replace the waste toner bottle.

Used
toner bottle toner bottle is
4 toner • Enter SP mode and execute
was detected full when filling
bottle full SP3-024-00x (Developer Fill).
full. the developer

If the
The development
Develop • Clear the SC325 to SC328.
development motor is locked
ment
5 motor was (SC325 to • Enter SP mode and execute
motor
not SC328) when SP3-024-00x (Developer Fill).
lock
operating. filling the
developer

One or both One or both

motors motors locked:
Used locked: Used Used Toner • Clear the SC 486/SC488.
toner Toner Transport
6 • Enter SP mode and execute
transport Transport Motor, Used
lock Motor, Used Toner Bottle SP3-024-00x (Developer Fill).
Toner Bottle Motor. (SC
Motor. 486/SC488)

716
 Development Unit

Code Meaning Comment Conditions Recovery Procedure

By-pass tray
cover
opened,
waste toner Deal with this in the following order.
When the
front cover
situation on the • Enter SP mode and execute
Forced opened, the
9 left happend SP3-024-00x (Developer Fill).
abort machine was
when filling the • If the result code is not "1", replace
powered off,
developer the developer.
or some other
event
interrupted
execution.

9. Remove the funnel and turn off the power.

10. Attach the toner supply unit and turn on the power.

• After turning on the main power switch, initialization for the TD sensor and process control
automatically starts.
11. Confirm the initialization results for the TD sensor (SP3-031-00x (Init TD Sensor: Exe Execute)). If
the initialization is successful, the result shows “1111”.

• If "1111" is not displayed, solve along the steps that are described in the troubleshooting.
12. Confirm the initialization results for the process control (SP3-012-001 (ProCon OK?
History:Latest)). If the initialization is successful, the result shows “11111111”.

717
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Image Transfer Belt Unit

ITB Unit Removal

1. Faceplate (page 680 "Faceplate")

2. ITB Cleaning Unit (page 746 "ITB Cleaning Unit")
3. Bracket [A] ( x2)

4. Pull the drawer unit. Then pull the ITB Unit [A] out to detach it.

• Make sure that the image transfer rollers do not contact the transfer belt when you remove the
ITB unit. You can check it with the lever shown in the picture below. The lever indicates either
“HP” or “O” depending on the state of the image transfer rollers.
• HP: Image transfer rollers contact the ITB.
• O: Imager transfer rollers do not contact the ITB.

718
 Image Transfer Belt Unit

• When you remove or install the ITB unit, be sure not to let the transfer belt touch the drawer
unit.
• Be sure to place the ITB unit on a flat surface.
• Execute SP2924-004 after you remove and re-install the ITB unit.

ITB Replacement

Before you start:

• Clear the counter for the ITB in PM counter mode (or use SP mode to turn SP3701-093 or 094 “0
1”)
• Turn the machine off.

1. ITB Unit (page 718 "ITB Unit Removal")

2. Make sure that the image transfer roller lever is in the “HP” state (page 718 "ITB Unit
Removal").

719
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Both side brackets [A], [B] ( x2 each, Spring x2)

4. Anti-toner-scatterring cover [A] ( x2)

720
 Image Transfer Belt Unit

5. Stay [A] on the left side ( x2)

6. Stay [A] on the right side. ( x3)

721
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

7. Bracket with ID Sensors [A]. ( x1, x1, x2)

8. Center stay [A] ( x1)

722
 Image Transfer Belt Unit

9. Hold the frames [A] of the encoder roller and pull them towards you.

10. Tension roller [A] ( x1, Bracket x1)

11. Pull the transfer belt [A] upward to remove it.

• Be sure to install the new transfer belt with the number at the rear of the machine (the lower
side in the picture below).
• Be sure to attach the new transfer belt without slackness.

723
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• After the replacement, some procedures need to be done. See “Lubrication after
replacement” described below.

Lubrication after replacement

1. Turn on the machine.

2. Enter the SP mode and push the PM parts counter reset button in the PM Parts display.
3. Replace Image Transfer Belt.
4. Attach the toner hopper unit.

• Do not install the belt cleaning fan yet.

5. Attach drawer unit cover.
6. Rotate the blade release lever to move the cleaning blade away from the ITB.
7. Pull out (open) the drawer unit.

724
 Image Transfer Belt Unit

8. Keep the drawer unit open, and then turn the machine main power ON.

• The automatic adjustment will not be performed when the machine is turned ON, since the
drawer unit is pulled out/opened.
9. Enter the SP mode and choose SP2-696-001 (Force Apply Lubricant Execute).
10. Push [Execute] on the operation panel and then push the drawer unit into the machine.

• When the drawer unit is pushed into the machine, lubrication starts automatically. This
operation takes about 3 minutes to complete.
11. Turn the machine off when the lubrication finishes (the machine’s activity stops).
12. Withdraw the drawer unit and rotate the blade release lever in order to make the
cleaning blade contact the ITB.
13. Re-install the belt cleaning fan. ( x1)
14. Push the drawer unit into the machine.
15. Turn the machine on.

• The machine will then execute the automatic corrections.

ID/MUSIC Sensors

1. Bracket with the ID sensor

2. Detach the ID sensor board [A] from the bracket. ( x5, x3, x1)

725
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

ITB HP Sensor

1. Detach the ID sensor from the bracket. (page 725 "ID/MUSIC Sensors")
2. Cover [A] ( x1, Hook x3)

3. ITB HP Sensor [A] ( x2, x1)

PTR Separation Sensor

1. Transfer Belt (page 719 "ITB Replacement")

726
 Image Transfer Belt Unit

2. Bracket with PTR separation sensor [A] ( x2)

3. Detach the PTR separation sensor [A] from the bracket [A]. (Hook, x1)

ITB Lift (YMC) Sensor

1. Transfer Belt (page 719 "ITB Replacement")

2. Rotate the cam [A] and make its widest part point to the bearing (“image transfer roller
rises up” state) as shown below.

727
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• Be sure to re-rotate the cam and drop the image transfer roller down after the replacement.
3. ITB Lift (YMC) Sensor ( x1, Hook)

Image Transfer Roller (K)

1. Transfer Belt (page 719 "ITB Replacement")

2. Raise the lever [A].

• Be sure to re-rotate the cam and drop the image transfer roller down after the replacement.

728
 Image Transfer Belt Unit

3. “ x1” that fixes the image transfer roller (K) [A]

4. Slide the image transfer roller (K) [A] towards you and remove it.

Image Transfer Roller (YMC)

1. Transfer Belt (page 719 "ITB Replacement")

729
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Rotate the cams and make the wider parts [A] [B] point to the bearing (“rise up” state).

• Be sure to re-rotate the cam and drop the image transfer roller down after the replacement.
3. “ x1” that fixes the image transfer roller (C) [A]

730
 Image Transfer Belt Unit

4. Slide the image transfer roller (C) [A] to the rear side and remove it.

5. Remove the image transfer roller (M), (Y) as in the previous step.

ITB Bias Roller

1. Transfer Belt (page 719 "ITB Replacement")

2. PTR Separation Sensor Bracket [A] ( x2, x 1)

731
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Actuator [A] ( x1)

4. Separate the drawer bracket [A] from the drawer ( x3).

5. Harness Guide [A] and Bracket [B] ( x5, Grounding Plate x1)

732
 Image Transfer Belt Unit

6. Re-attach the drawer bracket [A] ( x3)

• Be sure not to pinch the harness when you re-attach the drawer bracket.

733
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

7. Loosen the motor bracket [A] ( x2, Spring x1). Then remove the belt [B].

8. Pulley [A] ( x1)

734
 Image Transfer Belt Unit

9. Bearing Bracket [A] ( x2, Bearing x1)

10. Drop the ITB bias roller [A] down and remove the parallel pin [B].

11. Pull the ITB bias roller [A] upward and release its lower end to remove it.

• Each side cam of the ITB bias roller must be attached in the correct direction. Re-attach these
cams, directing each cam’s widest part inward.

735
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Transfer Power Pack/Separation Power Pack

1. Transfer Belt (page 719 "ITB Replacement")

736
 Image Transfer Belt Unit

2. Bracket [A] ( x2)

3. Transfer Power Pack/Separation Power Pack [A] ( x6, all)

TDRB (Transfer Drive Relay Board)

1. Transfer Belt (page 719 "ITB Replacement")

2. Image Transfer Roller (C) (page 729 "Image Transfer Roller (YMC)")

737
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Bracket [A] ( x2)

4. TDRB [A] ( x4, all)

Anti-condensation Heater

1. Transfer Belt (page 719 "ITB Replacement")

738
 Image Transfer Belt Unit

2. Detach the bracket with the drawer connector [A] from the ITB unit. ( x3)

3. Disconnect the white connector and push the red connector into the back of the ITB frame.

4. Detach the heater from the ITB unit. ( x2)

PTR Separation Motor

1. ITB Unit (page 718 "ITB Unit Removal")

739
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Bracket with the PTR separation motor [A] (Spring x1, x2, Belt x1)

3. Separate the bracket [A] and the PTR separation motor [B] ( x2, x1)

4. Detach the vibration-proof pad [A] from the motor. ( x2)

AC Transfer Power Pack (D137/D138 Only)

1. Image Transfer Roller (C) (page 729 "Image Transfer Roller (YMC)")

740
 Image Transfer Belt Unit

2. AC Transfer Power Pack [A] ( x6, all)

ITB Motor

1. ITB Unit (page 718 "ITB Unit Removal")

2. ITB Motor [A] ( x4, x1)

ITB Drive Shaft Gear / Encoder Sensor

1. Transfer Belt (page 719 "ITB Replacement")

741
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Motor Bracket [A] ( x4, x1)

3. Housing [A] ( x4)

• Do not remove only the housing [A]. Remove it [A] with the gear.

742
 Image Transfer Belt Unit

4. Detach the ITB drive shaft gear [A] from the housing

• Be sure to handle the gear carefully not to break the encoder [A].
• To prevent breaking the encoder [A] when you install the ITB drive shaft gear, remove the ITB
drive shaft encoder sensor from the housing first. Then install the ITB drive shaft gear.

743
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Disconnect the harness from the housing to detach the ITB drive shaft encoder sensor [A].

ITB Driven Shaft Encoder Sensor

1. ITB Unit (page 718 "ITB Unit Removal")

2. ITB Driven Shaft Encoder Sensor [A] (Pin x2, x1)

744
Image Transfer Belt Unit

745
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

ITB Cleaning Unit

Before you start replacement of the ITB cleaning unit or its components (ITB cleaning blade / Lubricant
bar / ITB lubricant blade):
1. Clear the counter for the ITB in PM counter mode (or use SP mode to turn SP3701-093 or 094 “0
1”)
2. Turn the machine off.

ITB Cleaning Unit

1. ITB Motor Cooling Fan (page 1004 "ITB Motor Cooling Fan")
2. Release the lock lever.

3. Pull the ITB cleaning unit [A] out. ( x1)

746
 ITB Cleaning Unit

ITB Cleaning Blade

• ITB cleaning blade, ITB lubricant brush and ITB lubricant bar must be replaced together as a set.

1. ITB Cleaning Unit (page 746 "ITB Cleaning Unit")

2. ITB Cleaning Blade [A] ( x2)

• Be sure to use a brush to apply yellow toner (D0149500) evenly on the lined faces of the
new ITB blade before the installment as shown below.

747
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• Use the blower brush (D0747690) when applying yellow toner to the new ITB blade.

ITB Lubricant Brush

• ITB cleaning blade, ITB lubricant brush and ITB lubricant bar must be replaced together as a set.

1. ITB Cleaning Unit (page 746 "ITB Cleaning Unit")

748
 ITB Cleaning Unit

2. Rotate the lock lever [A] in the arrowed direction as shown below.

3. Lock lever [A] ( x1)

4. Snap ring [A] x1, Gear x1 [B], Belt x1 [C], Bearing [D]

749
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. [A] x1, Spacer [B] x1, Bearing [C] x1

6. ITB Lubricant Brush [A]

ITB Lubricant Bar

• ITB cleaning blade, ITB lubricant brush and ITB lubricant bar must be replaced together as a set.

1. ITB Lubricant Brush (page 748 "ITB Lubricant Brush")

750
 ITB Cleaning Unit

2. Detach the ITB lubricant bar [A] from the ITB cleaning unit.

ITB Lubricant Blade

1. ITB Cleaning Unit (page 746 "ITB Cleaning Unit")

2. ITB Lubricant Blade [A] ( x2)

ITB Cleaning Unit Set Sensor

1. Toner Supply Unit (page 624 "Toner Supply Unit")

751
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. ITB Cleaning Unit Set Sensor [A] ( x3, x1, Hook)

ITB Paper Dust Cleaning Brush Roller

1. ITB Cleaning Unit (page 746 "ITB Cleaning Unit")

2. Rotate the lock lever [A] in the arrowed direction as shown below.

752
 ITB Cleaning Unit

3. Lock lever [A] ( x1)

4. Snap ring [A] x2, Gear x2 [B], Belt x1 [C], [D] x1, Gear [E] x1, Bearing [F] x1

5. Coupling [A] ( x1), Bearing [B] ( x1)

753
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

6. Bearing [A] that has a sponge

7. ITB Paper Dust Cleaning Brush Roller [A]

754
 ITB Cleaning Unit

8. Install the new cleaning brush roller and then use a brush to apply zinc stearate
(D0149501) and yellow toner (D0149500) in a 40 ~ 50 mm area (shown below) of the
installed cleaning brush roller.

• Use the blower brush (D0747690) when applying zinc stearate and yellow toner to the
cleaning brush roller.

Lubrication after Replacement

After the replacement of the ITB cleaning unit or its components (ITB cleaning blade / Lubricant bar /
ITB lubricant blade), you should follow these steps below to lubricate:

1. Rotate the blade release lever to move the cleaning blade away from the ITB.
2. Turn on the machine, while keeping the drawer unit withdrawn.
3. Enter the SP mode and choose “SP2-696-001 (Force Apply Lubricant Execute).
4. Push [Execute] on the operation panel and then push the drawer unit into the machine.

755
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Lubrication starts (the operation takes 3 minutes).

6. Turn the machine off when the lubrication finishes (the machine’s activity stops).
7. Withdraw the drawer unit and rotate the blade release lever in order to make the
cleaning blade contact the ITB
8. Re-install the belt cleaning fan ( x1).
9. Attach the toner supply unit.
10. Attach the drawer cover and then push the drawer unit in.
11. Turn the machine on. The machine will execute automatic corrections.

756
 Paper Transfer Roller Unit

Paper Transfer Roller Unit

Paper Transfer Roller Unit

1. Pull the drawer unit out.

2. Drawer Unit Cover (page 594 "Drawer Unit Cover")
3. Cover [A] ( x2, x1)

4. Remove the harnesses from the inner cover [A] ( x4)

757
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Inner Cover [A] ( x3)

6. Release the link plate [A] ( x1)

• When mounting the motor block, screw the motor in first. Then, assemble links [A], [B] and [C]
as shown below. There is also a diagram embossed on the motor cover to help you to install
the links correctly.
• Lock shaft (Cut surface to the upper left) [A]
• Link (Long hole to the right) [B]
• Paper transfer roller shaft (Cut surface to the lower side) [C]

758
 Paper Transfer Roller Unit

7. “Shoulder x2” on both sides of the paper transfer unit [A]

759
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

8. Paper Transfer Roller unit [A] ( x1)

Paper Discharge Plate

1. Pull the drawer unit out.

2. Paper Discharge Plate [A] ( x2)

Paper Transfer Roller

1. Pull the drawer unit out.

760
 Paper Transfer Roller Unit

2. Paper Discharge Plate [A] ( x2)

3. Lift the paper transfer roller [A] to remove it.

761
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Fusing Unit
Screw List

The fusing unit has many types of screws. A screw list is shown below.
In the procedures, the screw types used are shown as (A ) ~ (M ).

• Example: Cover [A] (A x2)

This means “the two screws that fixes cover [A] are A : SCREW:M3X6 listed below”.
• If (E x 2), it means “Cover [A] is fixed with two E : HEXAGONAL BOLT:DOUBLE
SCREW:M3X10.”

A : SCREW:M3X6 B : HEXAGONAL BOLT:W/WASHER:M3X8

C : STEPPED SCREW:M3 D : TCRU/ORU SCREW M4

762
 Fusing Unit

E : HEXAGONAL BOLT:DOUBLE
F : STEPPED SCREW:DIA5:M3X3.8
SCREW:M3X10

G : HEXAGON HEAD BOLT WITH

H : STEPPED SCREW - M3
WASHER:M3X6

I : TAPPING SCREW:3X10 J : SCREW:GUIDE PLATE:ADF

763
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

K : SCREW:M3X4 L : SCREW:CLAMP:FRONT

M : TCRU/ORU SCREW M3

Removing the Fusing Unit

1. Drawer Unit Cover (page 594 "Drawer Unit Cover")

764
 Fusing Unit

2. Keep pressing in the locks [A] [B] and withdraw the drawer unit fully.

3. Open the inner cover [A] (D x1)

765
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. ”D x2” on the front side of the fusing unit [A].

5. Open the guide plate [A].

6. Raise the lever [A] to lift the inner guide plate [B] up.

766
 Fusing Unit

7. Hold the handgrips to detach the fusing unit [A].

Fusing Heat Pipe

1. Fusing Unit (page 764 "Removing the Fusing Unit")

2. Open the cover [A] and then remove the fusing heat pipe unit [B]. (D x2)

767
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Fusing Unit Cover

Fusing Front / Rear Cover

1. Fusing Unit (page 764 "Removing the Fusing Unit")

2. Fusing Front Cover [A] (B x3)

3. Fusing Rear Inner Cover [B] and Fusing Rear Cover [A]. (B x4)

Entrance Drawer Cover

1. Fusing Unit (page 764 "Removing the Fusing Unit")

768
 Fusing Unit

2. Entrance Drawar Cover [A] (B x2)

Exit Drawer Cover

1. Fusing Unit (page 764 "Removing the Fusing Unit")

2. Exit Drawer Cover [A] (B x2)

769
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Fusing Upper Cover

1. Fusing Unit (page 764 "Removing the Fusing Unit")

2. Fusing Upper Cover [A] (G x2, C x1)

• Two types of screws are used to fasten the fusing upper cover. Refer to the diagram below to
check each screw location.
• In the diagram below, [A]:G ( EXAGON HEAD BOLT WITH WASHER:M3X6), [B]:C
(HEXAGONAL BOLT:W/WASHER:M3X8)

Separation Unit

1. Fusing Unit (page 764 "Removing the Fusing Unit")

770
 Fusing Unit

2. Stoppers [B], [C] on Fusing Upper Cover [A] (M ×2)

3. Open the separation unit [A].

771
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Separation Unit [A] (slide pins [B] [C] on both sides as shown below)

Fusing Unit Plate

1. Fusing Front Cover, Fusing Rear Cover, Entrance Drawer Cover, Exit Entracne Drawer
Cover (page 768 "Fusing Unit Cover")
2. Fusing Unit Plate [A] (A x5)

In Pro C5100S/Pro C5110, you also need to remove “A x1” shown below.

772
 Fusing Unit

3. Drawer Connector [A], [B] (E x4)

773
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Rear plate [A] (A x5, B x1 x1, Harness Cover [B] x1)

• Only [A] is B (HEXAGONAL BOLT:W/WASHER:M3X8). The others are A

(SCREW:M3X6) in the picture below.

In Pro C5100S/Pro C5110, you also need to remove “A x2” and the couplings [A], [B] shown
below.

774
 Fusing Unit

• When re-attaching the harness cover, hook one of the harnesses on the tab (circled below) that is
on the back of the harness cover as shown below.

IH Coil Unit

1. Fusing Front Cover, Fusing Rear Cover, Drawer Cover (page 768 "Fusing Unit Cover")
2. Drawer Connector [A] (E x2)

775
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Spring [A], [B]

4. A x2

776
 Fusing Unit

5. F x2

RTB 143
Note added after step 5
6. Disconnect the drawer connector [A] and [B].

7. IH Coil Unit [A]

Fusing Cleaning Web Unit (D137/D138 Only)

1. Fusing Heat Pipe (page 767 "Fusing Heat Pipe")

777
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Push the stopper [A] on the left side of the fusing cleaning web unit in the arrow direction
as shown below.

3. Raise the fusing cleaning web unit [A] as shown below to make it upright, and then
remove it.

• The frame on the right side of the fusing cleaning web unit has a C-cut hole as shown below.

778
 Fusing Unit

Fusing Cleaning Web (D137/D138 Only)

1. Fusing Cleaning Web Unit (page 777 "Fusing Cleaning Web Unit (D137/D138 Only)")
2. Cover [A] (B x1, C x1)

• See the picture below to make sure which screw is used in which location.
• [A]: C (STEPPED SCREW:M3), [B]: B (HEXAGONAL BOLT:W/WASHER:M3X8)

779
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Bracket [A] (A x4)

4. Bracket [A] (A x3), and then the other screws (A x2).

780
 Fusing Unit

5. Gears [A], [B], [C] and Bearings [D], [E]

6. Gear [A] ( x1) and Bearing [B] ( x1)

7. Bearing [A]

781
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

8. Bracket [A] (A x1)

9. Gear [A] (loosen Hexagonal Socket x1)

10. Bracket [A] (A x3)

782
 Fusing Unit

11. Feeler [A] (Spring x1) and Bearing [B] ( x1)

12. Stay [A] (A x2)

13. Fusing Cleaning Web [A]

Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller (D137/D138 Only)

1. Separation Unit (page 768 "Fusing Unit Cover")

783
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the screw to release the stopper. (M x1)

3. Raise the finger grips of the fusing belt smoothing roller [A] to hold them, and then slide
and remove the fusing belt smoothing roller [A].

• Do not touch the side cams [B] [C] of the fusing belt smoothing roller [A]. The rim of the cams
is greased.

784
 Fusing Unit

Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller Contact Sensor (Pro C5100S/Pro C5110S)

1. Fusing Rear Cover (page 768 "Fusing Unit Cover")

2. Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller Contact Sensor [A] (Hook, x1)

Separating the Fusing Unit

1. Fusing Unit Plate (page 772 "Fusing Unit Plate")

785
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. “H x1”and Bracket [A] (I x2) on the front side

3. “H x1”, “I x2”, Bracket [A] on the rear side, and Connector [B]

786
 Fusing Unit

4. Separate the fusing unit into the upper part and the lower part.

Heating Roller, Fusing Roller, Fusing Belt

1. Separate the fusing unit into the upper part and the lower part. (page 785 "Separating
the Fusing Unit")
2. Turn the upper part [A] over.

787
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Gear [A]

4. Bracket [A] (A x2)

788
 Fusing Unit

5. “A x2 “and Bracket [A] (A x1)

6. Rotation Sensor [A] (A x1, Spring [B] x1)

789
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

7. Gear [A] ( x1, Washer x1)

8. Brackets [A], [B] (J [C] x1, C-ring [D] x1, A x2)

790
 Fusing Unit

9. Bracket [A] on the front side, and Grounding Plate [B] (A x2, K x1)

• See the picture below to make sure which screw is used in which location.
• [A]:K (SCREW:M3X4), Others: A (SCREW:M3X6)

791
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

10. Bracket [A], [B] (L [C] x1, J [D] x1 , A x3, C-ring [E] x1)

• Detach the bracket [A] and then the bracket [B].

11. C-ring [A] x1

792
 Fusing Unit

12. Entrance Stay [A]

13. Detach the fusing belt unit from both side-frames. (Bearings [A], [B])

793
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

14. Detach the hot roller [A] and the heating roller [B] from the fusing belt [C].

• When you detach the rollers and the belt from the frame, hold the ends of the hot roller shaft
to lift it. Then move it above the heating roller to detach the whole thing (hot/heating rollers
and fusing belt).

Pressure Roller Stripper Plate

1. Separate the fusing unit into the upper part and the lower part (page 785 "Separating the
Fusing Unit")
2. Pressure Roller Stripper Guide Plate [A] (C x2, B x1)

• See the picture below to make sure which screw is used in which location.
• [A]:B (HEXAGONAL BOLT:W/WASHER:M3X8), Others: C (STEPPED SCREW:M3)

794
 Fusing Unit

3. Release the springs on both sides of the pressure roller stripper plate [A].

795
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Raise and make the pressure roller stripper plate [A] upright to remove it.

• The frame of the pressure roller stripper plate has C-cut holes.

Fusing Lamp

• In the procedure pictures below, the fusing unit is separated. But you need only to remove the
fusing unit plate to remove or install the fusing lamp.

1. Fusing Front Cover (page 768 "Fusing Unit Cover")

2. Harness Guide [A] (B x1)

796
 Fusing Unit

3. Harness Guide [A] (B x1)

4. [A] x1

5. Bracket [A] (A x1)

797
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

6. Fusing Lamp [A]

Pressure Roller

1. Separate the fusing unit into the upper part and the lower part. (page 785 "Separating
the Fusing Unit")
2. Fusing Lamp (page 796 "Fusing Lamp")
3. Gear [A] (C-ring [B] x1)

798
 Fusing Unit

4. Detach the pressure roller fixing plates [A], [B] from the lower part. (A x3)

5. Pressure Roller [A]

799
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

6. Pressure Roller Fixing Plates [A], [B] (C-ring [C] x1, Bearing [D] x2)

• When re-installing the bearings on the pressure roller, pay attention to the direction of the
bearings [A] (the brimmed part comes to the outside) as shown below (Diagram 1).
• When re-installing the pressure roller on the fusing unit frame, be sure to make the brimmed
parts [A] of the bearings come to the outside of the frame [B] as shown below (Diagram 2).
Diagram 1

800
 Fusing Unit

Diagram 2

Thermistor (Fusing Belt)

1. Separate the fusing unit into the upper part and the lower part. (page 785 "Separating
the Fusing Unit")

801
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Bracket with Thermistor [A] (A x2)

3. Thermistor (Fusing Belt) [A] (E x1, x1)

Thermistor (Hot Roller Shaft)

1. Fusing Front Cover, Fusing Upper Cover (page 768 "Fusing Unit Cover")

802
 Fusing Unit

2. Bracket with Thermistor (Hot Roller Shaft) [A] (A x1)

3. Thermistor (Hot Roller Shaft) [A] (E x1, x1)

Heating Roller Rotation Sensor

1. Fusing Rear Cover (page 768 "Fusing Unit Cover")

2. Fusing Unit Plate (page 772 "Fusing Unit Plate")

803
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Bracket with Heating Roller Rotation Sensor [A] (A x1)

4. Heating Roller Rotation Sensor [A] (Hook, x1)

Pressure Roller Sensor (Rear)

1. Fusing Unit (page 764 "Removing the Fusing Unit")

2. Turn the lower part [A] over.

804
 Fusing Unit

3. Bracket [A] with Pressure Roller Sensor (Rear) (A x1)

4. Detach the fusing pressure roller sensor (rear) [A] from the bracket. (Hook, x1)

Pressure Roller Sensor (Front)

1. Fusing Unit (page 764 "Removing the Fusing Unit")

2. Turn the lower part [A] over.

805
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Bracket [A] with Pressure Roller Sensor (Front) (A x1)

4. Detach the pressure roller sensor (front) from the bracket. (Hook, x1)

Hot Roller NC Sensor

1. Fusing Upper Cover (page 768 "Fusing Unit Cover")

2. Hot Roller NC Sensor [A] (G x2, x1)

806
 Fusing Unit

Thermopile (Pressure Roller)

1. Separate the fusing unit into the upper part and the lower part. (page 785 "Separating
the Fusing Unit")
2. Bracket [A] (A x2)

3. Harness Guide Cover [A] (B x1)

4. Grounding Wire (B x1 [A] x 1)

807
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Harness Guide [A] (B x1)

6. Bracket [A] (A x6)

7. Bracket [A] with Thermopile (B x1)

808
 Fusing Unit

8. Thermopile Cover [A] (Hook x3)

9. Thermopile [A] ( x1)

Thermostat (Pressure Roller)

1. Separate the fusing unit into the upper part and the lower part. (page 785 "Separating
the Fusing Unit")
2. See “Thermopile (Pressure Roller) Steps 1 to 7”. (page 807 "Thermopile (Pressure
Roller)")

809
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Harness Guide [A] (G x1, C x1)

• The left side screw is G ( HEXAGON HEAD BOLT WITH WASHER:M3X6), the right side
screw is C ( STEPPED SCREW:M3) in the picture above.
4. Themostat (Pressure Roller) [A] (B x2)

Fusing Paper Feed Sensor

1. Separate the fusing unit into the upper part and the lower part (page 785 "Separating the
Fusing Unit").
2. Pressure Roller Stripper Plate (page 794 "Pressure Roller Stripper Plate")

810
 Fusing Unit

3. Detach the fusing paper feed sensor [A] from the bracket [B]. ( x1)

4. Fusing paper feed sensor [A] ( x1)

Adjustment after replacing the fusing paper feed sensor

Do the following procedure after replacing the fusing paper feed sensor.

1. Make sure the entire paper path is clear of paper.

2. Close the drawer unit and front right cover.

811
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Do SP1-134-001.
4. Confirm the value in SP1-134-002 is in between 200 and 400.
5. Reboot.

Cleaning Web Set Sensor

1. Fusing Unit (page 764 "Removing the Fusing Unit")

2. Cleaning Web Set Sensor [A] ( x1, Hook)

Cleaning Web End Sensor

1. Fusing Unit (page 764 "Removing the Fusing Unit")

2. Bracket [A] with Cleaning Web End Sensor ( x1)

812
 Fusing Unit

3. Cleaning Web End Sensor [A] ( x1, Hook)

Cleaning Web Contact Sensor

1. Fusing Unit (page 764 "Removing the Fusing Unit")

2. Bracket [A] with Cleaning Web Contact Sensor ( x1)

3. Cleaning Web Contact Sensor [A] ( x1, Hook)

813
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Paper Transport Belt Unit

To replace the paper transport belt unit, first remove the fusing unit. ( page 764)

Paper Transport Belt Unit

1. Inner cover [A] ( x 2)

2. Remove the springs and connector from the paper transport belt unit [A] (spring x 2, x 1).

3. Paper transport belt unit [A] ( x 1)

814
 Paper Transport Belt Unit

Paper Transport Belt

1. Paper transport belt unit ( page 814)

2. Slide the paper transport belt [A] (x 2) to the left or right.

PTB Fans

1. Paper transport belt unit ( page 814)

2. Disconnect the connectors of the PTB fans ( x 1 each).

815
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. After sliding the paper transport belts [A] to the left or right, remove the PTB fans [B] ( x 2 each).

PTB Sensor

1. Paper transport belt unit ( page 814)

2. PTB sensor [A] ( x 1)

816
 Paper Transport Belt Unit

PTB Unit Set Sensor

1. Paper transport belt unit ( page 814)

2. PTB unit set sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)

817
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Tandem Tray
Left Tandem Tray / Right Tandem Tray

1. Pull out paper tray 1 [A].

2. Push the right tandem tray [A] into the machine.

3. Remove the left tandem tray [A] (M3 x 8; x 2 on the left side, M3 x 10; x 3 on the right side).

818
 Tandem Tray

4. Remove the front cover [A] from the left tandem tray ( x 2).

5. Pull out the right tandem tray [A] and remove the screws (TCRU/ORU x2).

819
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Feed Roller, Pick-up Roller and Separation Roller

1. Pull out paper tray 1 [A].

2. Right side of the tray [A] (TCRU/ORU x 2)

3. Pick-up roller [A] and feed roller [B] ( x 1)

820
 Tandem Tray

4. Open the door of the vertical feed path and remove the separation roller [A] ( x 1).

Paper Feed Unit for Tray 1

1. Right lower cover of the machine exterior ( page 530)

2. Pull out paper trays 1 and 2.
3. Vertical transport unit [A] ( x 2)

821
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Paper guide plate for tray 2 [A] ( x 1)

5. Paper feed unit for tray 2 [A] ( x 2, x 1)

822
 Tandem Tray

6. LED cover [A] ( x 2)

7. Vertical transport LED [B] along with the bracket ( x 1)

8. Relay cover [A] ( x 2, x1)

823
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

9. Paper guide plate for tray 1 [A] ( x 1)

10. Pull out the left side of the paper feed unit for tray 1 [A], and then remove it. ( x 2, x1)
(Remove the bracket [B] in order to remove the paper feed unit for tray 1 easily ( x 2))

824
 Tandem Tray

Rear Fence Home Position Sensor / Left Tray Paper Sensor

1. Pull out paper tray 1 [A].

2. Side fence [A] ( x 1)

825
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Cover [A] ( x 1)

4. Rear Fence Home Position Sensor [A] / Left Tray Paper Sensor [B] ( x 1 each, x 1 each)

Rear Fence Return Sensor

1. Pull out paper tray 1 [A].

826
 Tandem Tray

2. Right side of the tray [A] (TCRU/ORU x 2)

3. Turn the bracket and remove the rear fence return sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1).

827
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Paper Height Sensors 1, 2, 3 / Tray Down Sensor / Right Tray Set Sensor

1. Right lower cover of the machine exterior ( page 530)

2. Pull out paper trays 1 and 2.
3. Right side of paper tray 1 [A] (TCRU/ORU x 2)

4. Vertical transport unit [A] ( x 2)

5. Paper guide plate [A] ( x 1)

828
 Tandem Tray

6. Paper feed unit for tray 2 [A] ( x 2, x 1)

7. LED cover [A] ( x 2)

8. Vertical transport LED [B] along with the bracket ( x 1)

829
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

9. Relay cover [A] ( x 2)

10. 5 sensors [A] along with the bracket, located inside the rear face of the machine ( x 3, x1
each (front x 4, back x 1), x 2 each).

830
 Tandem Tray

11. Paper height sensors 1, 2, 3 [A], tray down sensor [B] and right tray set sensor [C]

Rear End Fence Closed Sensor

1. Right lower cover of the machine exterior ( page 530)

2. Pull out paper trays 1 and 2.
3. Right side of paper tray 1 [A] (TCRU/ORU x 2)

831
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Vertical transport unit [A] ( x 2)

5. Paper guide plate [A] ( x 1)

6. Paper feed unit for tray 2 [A] ( x 2, x 1)

832
 Tandem Tray

7. LED cover [A] ( x 2)

8. Vertical transport LED [B] along with the bracket ( x 1)

9. Relay cover [A] ( x 2)

833
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

10. Rear End Fence Closed Sensor [A], located inside of the rear face of the machine ( x 1)

End Fence Rear Solenoid

1. PSU1 / PSU2 along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine ( page 944
"When removing the motors and sensors that are behind the PSU1/PSU2")
2. Disconnect the connectors for the Rear End Fence Closed Sensor and the End Fence Rear Solenoid.

834
 Tandem Tray

3. Relay cover ( page 831 "Rear End Fence Closed Sensor")

4. End fence rear solenoid [A] along with the bracket, located inside the rear face of the machine (
x 4)

5. Bracket [A] ( x 1, spring x 1)

835
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

6. End fence rear solenoid [A] ( x 2)

Left Tray Lock Solenoid

1. PSU1 / PSU2 along with the bracket, located inside the rear face of the machine ( page 944
"When removing the motors and sensors that are behind the PSU1/PSU2")
2. Left tray lock solenoid [A] along with the bracket ( x 1, x 1)

3. Left tray lock solenoid [A] ( x 2, spring x 1)

836
 Tandem Tray

Rear Fence Drive Motor

1. PFB along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine ( page 941 "When
removing the motors that are behind the PFB")
2. PSU1 / PSU2 along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine ( page 944
"When removing the motors and sensors that are behind the PSU1/PSU2")
3. Rear fence drive motor [A] ( x 3, x 1)

1st Tray Lift Motor

1. PFB along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine ( page 941 "When
removing the motors that are behind the PFB")

837
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. PSU1 / PSU2 along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine ( page 944
"When removing the motors and sensors that are behind the PSU1/PSU2")
3. 1st Tray Lift Motor ( x 3, x 1)

838
 Paper Feed Section (Tray 2-3 / Vertical Transport)

Paper Feed Section (Tray 2-3 / Vertical

Transport)
Paper Tray

1. Pull out the paper tray [A].

Feed Roller, Pick-up Roller and Separation Roller

1. Pull out the paper tray.

2. Pick-up roller [A] and feed roller [B] (snap-fit x 1)
e.g.: Tray 2

839
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Separation roller [A] (snap-fit x 1)

e.g.: Tray 2

Paper Feed Unit

1. Right lower cover of the machine exterior ( page 530 "Right Lower Cover")
2. Pull out paper tray 2 (in the case of the paper feed unit for tray 2).

840
 Paper Feed Section (Tray 2-3 / Vertical Transport)

3. Vertical transport unit [A] (snap-fit x 2)

4. Paper guide plate [A] (snap-fit x 1)

5. Paper feed unit for tray 2 [A] ( x 2, x 1)

841
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• For tray 3, replace with the same procedure as for tray 2.

Pick-up Solenoid

1. Paper feed unit ( page 840)

2. Pick-up solenoid [A] ( x 1, x 1)

Transport Sensor

1. Paper feed unit ( page 840)

2. Transport sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)

842
 Paper Feed Section (Tray 2-3 / Vertical Transport)

Paper Feed Sensor

1. Paper feed unit ( page 840)

2. Paper feed sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)

Paper Tray Upper Limit Sensor / Paper End Sensor

1. Paper feed unit ( page 840)

843
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Paper tray upper limit sensor [A] and paper end sensor [B] ( x 1 each, x 1 each)

• When removing the paper end sensor, remove the hook from the opposite side of the photo
above.

Vertical Transport LED

1. Open the vertical transport door [A].

844
 Paper Feed Section (Tray 2-3 / Vertical Transport)

2. LED cover [A] ( x 2)

3. Remove the vertical transport LED [A] by lifting it upward ( x 1)

845
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Paper Size Sensors

1. PSU1 / PSU2 along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine ( page 944
"When removing the motors and sensors that are behind the PSU1/PSU2")
2. Disconnect two connectors [A] from the paper size sensors.

3. Pull out the paper trays from the front side of the machine and remove the two paper size sensors
[A].

Paper Tray Set Sensors

1. PSU1 / PSU2 along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine ( page 944
"When removing the motors and sensors that are behind the PSU1/PSU2")
2. Disconnect two connectors [A] from the paper tray set sensors.

846
 Paper Feed Section (Tray 2-3 / Vertical Transport)

3. Pull out the paper trays from the front side of the machine and remove the two paper tray set
sensors [A].

Paper Tray Lift Motor

1. PFB along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine ( page 941 "When
removing the motors that are behind the PFB")
2. PSU1 / PSU2 along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine ( page 944
"When removing the motors and sensors that are behind the PSU1/PSU2")
3. Paper feed motor for paper tray 2 or paper feed motor for paper tray 3 ( page 973 "2nd
Paper Feed Motor/2nd Transport Motor, 3rd Paper Feed Motor/3rd Transport Motor")
4. Tray pull-in device [A] ( x 3)
e.g.: for paper tray 2

847
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• This work must be done while the paper tray is pulled out.
5. Paper tray lift motor [A] ( x 3, x 1 each)
e.g.: for paper tray 2

• For tray 3, replace with the same procedure as for tray 2.

Tray Heater

Upper Tray Heater

1. Pull out the paper tray.

2. Right side of paper tray 1 [A] (TCRU/ORU x 2)

848
 Paper Feed Section (Tray 2-3 / Vertical Transport)

3. Remove the fixing screws of the bracket for the upper tray heater [A] ( x 2).

4. Connector cover [A] ( x 1)

5. Upper tray heater [A] along with the bracket ( x 1, x 2).

849
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

6. Upper tray heater [A] ( x 2 , x 1).

Lower Tray Heater

1. Pull out the paper tray.

2. Remove the fixing screws of the bracket for the lower tray heater [A] ( x 3).

3. Connector cover [A] ( x 1)

4. Lower tray heater [B] along with the bracket ( x 1, x 4).

850
 Paper Feed Section (Tray 2-3 / Vertical Transport)

5. Lower tray heater [A] ( x 2)

Tray Heater Setting

Turn on the tray heater depending on the needs of the user.

1. Rear lower cover ( page 538)
2. Remove the clamp and connect the connectors to CN402 [B] and CN401 [C] on the AC drive
board [A].

851
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

852
 By-pass Tray Unit (D137/D138)

By-pass Tray Unit (D137/D138)

By-pass Tray Unit Removal

1. In order to easily remove the right middle upper cover [A], remove the fixing screws on the right
side of the rear middle cover [B] ( x 2).

2. Open the by-pass tray unit [A]. Remove the right middle upper cover [B] downward ( x 1).

3. LCT cover [A] ( x 2)

853
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Slide the right middle rear cover [A] to the left ( x 2)

5. By-pass Tray Unit [A] ( x 1, x 1)

854
 By-pass Tray Unit (D137/D138)

By-pass Tray Unit Separation

1. Separate the paper feed unit [A] and bottom plate [B] of the by-pass tray unit ( x 2).

2. Remove the right arm [A] and separate the paper feed unit and bottom plate of the by-pass tray
unit.

855
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

By-pass Pick-up Roller / By-pass Feed Roller / By-pass Separation Roller

1. Open the by-pass tray [A].

2. By-pass pick-up roller [A] (hook x 1)

3. Open the by-pass tray unit [A] and remove the paper feed unit cover [B] ( x 1).

856
 By-pass Tray Unit (D137/D138)

4. By-pass feed roller [A] ( x 1)

5. By-pass separation roller [A] from the back of the by-pass tray unit ( x 1)

By-pass Tray Paper End Sensor

1. Separate the paper feed unit and bottom plate of the by-pass tray unit. ( page 853 "By-pass
Tray Unit Removal")
2. Remove the bottom plate [A] of the by-pass tray and turn it over.

857
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. By-pass tray paper end sensor [A] along with the bracket ( x 1)

4. By-pass tray paper end sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)

By-pass Paper Width Sensor

1. Separate the paper feed unit and bottom plate of the by-pass tray unit. ( page 853 "By-pass
Tray Unit Removal")
2. Remove the bottom plate [A] of the by-pass tray and turn it over.

858
 By-pass Tray Unit (D137/D138)

3. By-pass paper width sensor [A] (hook x 3, x 1)

By-pass Paper Length Sensor

1. Separate the paper feed unit and bottom plate of the by-pass tray unit. ( page 853 "By-pass
Tray Unit Removal")
2. Remove the bottom plate [A] of the by-pass tray and turn it over.

3. By-pass paper length sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks)

859
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

By-pass Tray Lower Limit Sensor

1. Separate the paper feed unit and bottom plate of the by-pass tray unit. ( page 853 "By-pass
Tray Unit Removal")
2. By-pass tray lower limit sensor [A] from the bottom plate ( x 1, hooks)

By-pass Tray Lift Motor

1. Separate the paper feed unit and bottom plate of the by-pass tray unit. ( page 853 "By-pass
Tray Unit Removal")
2. By-pass tray lift motor cover [A] from the bottom plate ( x 2)

860
 By-pass Tray Unit (D137/D138)

3. Fixing screws of the by-pass tray lift motor block [A] ( x 3)

4. Stay [A] (including the shaft) for lifting the bottom plate ( x 1, x 2)

5. By-pass tray lift motor block [A] (spring x 1)

861
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• When reinstalling the motor, press the spring [B] to rotate the gear. It is easy to insert the shaft
[A] for lifting the bottom plate.

6. By-pass tray lift motor [A] along with the bracket ( x 2)

7. By-pass tray lift motor [A] ( x 2)

862
 By-pass Tray Unit (D137/D138)

By-pass Tray Upper Limit Sensor / By-pass Paper Feed Sensor

1. Separate the paper feed unit and bottom plate of the by-pass tray unit. ( page 853 "By-pass
Tray Unit Removal")
2. By-pass paper feed unit cover [A] ( x 1)

3. Remove the fixing screws (x 7) and joints (x 2) of the by-pass paper feed unit [A] ( x 2)

863
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Bracket [A] of the by-pass paper feed unit ( x 4, x 1)

5. Lift the bracket [A] to remove ( x 3).

864
 By-pass Tray Unit (D137/D138)

6. By-pass tray upper limit sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)

7. By-pass paper feed sensor [B] ( x 1, x 1)

By-pass Pick-up Solenoid

1. Bracket of the by-pass paper feed unit ( page 863 "By-pass Tray Upper Limit Sensor / By-pass
Paper Feed Sensor")
2. By-pass pick-up solenoid [A] ( x 1, spring x 1, x 1)

865
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

By-pass Tray Set Sensor

1. Separate the paper feed unit and bottom plate of the by-pass tray unit. ( page 853 "By-pass
Tray Unit Removal")
2. By-pass tray set sensor [A] ( x 1)

By-pass Tray LED Connector (Red)

1. Open the by-pass tray unit and remove the LED cover [A] ( x 1).

866
 By-pass Tray Unit (D137/D138)

2. By-pass tray LED connector (Red) [A] ( x 1, x 1)

867
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

By-pass Tray Unit (D135/D136)

By-pass Tray Unit Removal

1. In order to easily remove the right middle upper cover [A], remove the fixing screws on the right
side of the rear middle cover [B] ( x 2).

2. Open the by-pass tray unit [A]. Remove the right middle upper cover [B] downward ( x 1).

3. LCT cover [A] ( x 2)

868
 By-pass Tray Unit (D135/D136)

4. Slide the right middle rear cover [A] to the left ( x 2)

5. By-pass Tray Unit [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)

869
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

By-pass Tray Unit Separation

1. Separate the paper feed unit [A] and bottom plate [B] of the by-pass tray unit ( x 2).

2. Remove the left arm [A] and right arm [B], and then separate the paper feed unit and bottom plate
of the by-pass tray unit.

870
 By-pass Tray Unit (D135/D136)

3. By-pass tray [A] from the bottom plate ( x 5)

4. Turn over the by-pass tray [A], then disconnect the connectors and clamps of the by-pass paper
width sensor [B] / by-pass paper length sensor [C].

871
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

By-pass Pick-up Roller / By-pass Feed Roller / By-pass Separation Roller

1. Open the by-pass tray [A].

2. By-pass pick-up roller [A] (hook x 1).

3. Open the by-pass tray unit [A] and remove the paper feed unit cover [B] ( x 1).

4. By-pass feed roller [A] ( x 1)

872
 By-pass Tray Unit (D135/D136)

5. By-pass separation roller [A] from the back of the by-pass tray unit ( x 1)

By-pass Tray Paper End Sensor

1. Open the by-pass tray [A].

2. Open the by-pass tray unit [A] and remove the paper feed unit cover [B] ( x 1)

873
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. By-pass tray paper end sensor [A] ( x 1)

By-pass Paper Width Sensor

1. Open the by-pass tray [A].

2. Remove the bottom plate [A] of the by-pass tray and turn it over ( x 5).

874
 By-pass Tray Unit (D135/D136)

3. By-pass paper width sensor [A] (hook x 2, x 1)

By-pass Paper Length Sensor

1. Open the by-pass tray [A].

2. Remove the bottom plate [A] of the by-pass tray and turn it over ( x 5).

875
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. By-pass paper length sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks)

By-pass Paper Feed Sensor

1. Separate the paper feed unit and bottom plate of the by-pass tray unit. ( page 868 "By-pass
Tray Unit Removal")
2. Remove the fixing screws (x 7) and joints (x 2) of the by-pass paper feed unit [A] ( x 2)

876
 By-pass Tray Unit (D135/D136)

3. Remove the connectors and clamps, then take out the paper feed unit [A].

4. By-pass paper feed unit cover [A] ( x 1)

877
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Bracket [A] of the by-pass paper feed unit ( x 7, x 1)

6. Bracket [A] for the by-pass paper feed unit (by-pass pick-up roller, by-pass feed roller, spring x 1)

878
 By-pass Tray Unit (D135/D136)

7. Lift the bracket [A] to remove (all s, all s).

8. By-pass paper feed sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)

By-pass Pick-up Solenoid

1. Bracket of the by-pass paper feed unit ( page 876 "By-pass Paper Feed Sensor")
2. By-pass pick-up solenoid [A] ( x 2, x 1)

879
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

By-pass Tray LED Connector (Red)

1. Open the by-pass tray unit and remove the LED cover [A] ( x 1).

2. By-pass tray LED connector (Red) [A] ( x 1, x 1)

880
By-pass Tray Unit (D135/D136)

881
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Paper Relay and Registration Section

Registration Unit

1. Drawer unit cover ( page 594)

2. In order to facilitate the work, press the release lever to fully open the drawer unit [A].

3. Inner cover [A] ( x 2, x 1)

4. Registration motor [A] along with the bracket ( x 3, x 4, x 3, timing belt x 1)

882
 Paper Relay and Registration Section

• When installing the motor, attach the timing belt.

5. Timing pulley [A] and positioning bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1)

883
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

6. Remove the registration unit [A] by sliding it to the left.

Relay Unit

1. Registration unit ( page 882)

2. Duplex exit motor [A] along with the bracket ( x 3, timing belt x 1)

• When installing the motor, attach the timing belt.

884
 Paper Relay and Registration Section

3. Joint [B] of the relay unit [A] from the bottom ( x 1)

4. Positioning bracket [B] of the relay unit [A] ( x 1)

• When installing, the positioning pin [A] must be within the hole in the relay unit.

885
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Remove the relay unit [A] by sliding it to the left ( x 1, x 1).

Registration Sensor

1. Open the drawer unit cover [A].

886
 Paper Relay and Registration Section

2. Registration unit cover [A] ( x 2)

3. Bracket [A] ( x 3)

4. Registration sensor [A] ( x 1)

887
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Paper Type Sensor

1. Relay unit ( page 884)

1. Relay unit bracket where the paper type sensor [A] is located ( x 6)

2. Paper type sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)

888
 Paper Relay and Registration Section

Relay Sensor

1. Open the drawer unit cover [A].

2. Relay sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)

By-pass Tray Paper Type Sensor

1. Open the drawer unit cover [A].

889
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Cover [A] ( x 2)

3. Bracket [A] ( x 2)

4. Turn over the bracket and remove the by-pass tray paper type sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1).

890
Paper Relay and Registration Section

891
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Paper Exit and Duplex Unit

Paper Exit Unit

1. Drawer unit cover ( page 594)

2. Fusing unit ( page 764)
3. Remove the paper exit inner cover [A] ( x 1) and turn it over, then disconnect the connector [B].

4. Cover [A] ( x 2)

5. Connector bracket [A] ( x 2)

892
 Paper Exit and Duplex Unit

6. Inverter exit motor [A] along with the bracket ( x 3)

7. Harness cover [A] ( x 1)

8. Motor assembly [A] along with the bracket ( x 4, x 3, timing belt x 1)

893
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

9. Paper exit unit [A] ( x 2, x 3)

Paper Exit Sensor

1. Open the drawer unit.

2. Paper exit sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)

894
 Paper Exit and Duplex Unit

Paper Exit Relay Sensor

1. Open the drawer unit.

2. Guide plate [A] ( x 4)

3. Paper exit relay sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)

895
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Inverter Exit Sensor

1. Fusing unit ( page 764)

2. Inverter exit sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)

896
 Paper Exit and Duplex Unit

Inverter Feed-in Sensor

1. Paper exit unit ( page 892)

2. Guide plate [A] ( x 1, x 1)

3. Roller [A] ( x 1)

4. Guide plate [A] ( x 4)

897
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Remove the guide [A] by sliding it to the right ( x 2, rib x 2).

6. Right side of the roller [A] ( x 1, Bearing x 1)

7. Inverter feed-in sensor [A] along with the bracket ( x 1, x 1)

898
 Paper Exit and Duplex Unit

Inverter Feed-out Sensor

1. Paper exit unit ( page 892)

2. Inverter feed-out sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)

899
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Inverter Junction Gate Home Position Sensor

1. Paper exit unit ( page 892)

2. Inverter junction gate home position sensor [A] ( x 1)

Inverter Junction Gate Motor

1. Paper exit unit ( page 892)

2. Before removing the inverter junction gate motor [A] along with the bracket, remove the joint [B]
and connctors.

3. Inverter junction gate motor [A] along with the bracket (gear x 2, x 3)

900
 Paper Exit and Duplex Unit

4. Inverter junction gate motor [A] ( x 2)

Duplex Inverter Solenoid

1. Inverter junction gate motor ( page 900)

2. Duplex inverter solenoid [A] along with the bracket ( x 3)

901
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Duplex inverter solenoid [A] ( x 2)

Paper Exit Left Guide Plate Sensor

1. Paper exit unit ( page 892)

2. Paper exit left guide plate sensor [A] ( x 1)

902
 Paper Exit and Duplex Unit

Paper Exit Upper Guide Plate Sensor

1. Paper exit unit ( page 892)

2. Open the paper exit upper guide plate [A] and remove the paper exit upper guide plate sensor [B]
( x 1)

903
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Duplex Unit
Purge Relay Sensor / Duplex Invert Sensor

1. Paper purge unit ( page 917)

2. Duplex invert solenoid ( page 905)
3. Remove the fixing screws of the guide plate [A] ( x 2).

4. Open the guide plate [A].

5. Purge relay sensor [A] along with the bracket ( x 2, x 1)

904
 Duplex Unit

6. Duplex invert sensor [A] along with the bracket ( x 1, x 1)

Duplex Invert Solenoid

1. Paper purge unit ( page 917)

2. Remove the springs of the duplex invert solenoid [A] (spring x 2).

905
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Duplex invert solenoid [A] ( x 2)

RTB 95, D137 RTB 147
The step was modified.

Duplex Unit Entrance Sensor

1. Fusing unit ( page 764)

2. Duplex unit entrance sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)

906
 Duplex Unit

Duplex Unit Sensor 1

1. Fusing unit ( page 764)

2. Duplex unit sensor 1 [A] ( x 1, x 1)

Duplex Unit Sensor 2

1. Fusing unit ( page 764)

2. Duplex unit sensor 2 [A] ( x 1, x 1)

907
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Duplex Unit Sensor 3

1. Paper transport belt unit ( page 814)

2. Duplex unit sensor 3 [A] ( x 1, x 1)

Duplex Unit Sensor 4

1. Edge detection unit ( page 913)

2. Duplex unit sensor 4 [A] ( x 1, x 1)

908
 Duplex Unit

Duplex Exit Sensor

1. Relay Unit ( page 884)

2. Duplex exit sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)

Horizontal Feed Guide Plate Open Sensor

1. Paper transport belt unit ( page 814)

2. Paper transfer roller unit ( page 757)
3. Remove the connector of the horizontal feed guide plate open sensor [A]

909
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Open the horizontal feed guide plate [A] and remove the cover [B] ( x 2).

5. Horizontal feed guide plate open sensor [A]

Roller HP Sensor 1

1. Paper transport belt unit ( page 814)

2. Roller HP sensor 1 [A] ( x 1, x 1)

910
 Duplex Unit

Roller HP Sensor 2

1. Paper transport belt unit ( page 814)

2. Paper transfer roller unit ( page 757)
3. Roller HP sensor 2 [A] ( x 1, x 1)

• Roller HP sensor 2 and sensor shift HP switch are in close proximity. When you connect a harness
to the roller HP sensor 2 or sensor shift HP switch after the replacement, be careful not to connect
the harness to an incorrect sensor. If you connect the harness to an incorrect sensor, SC515-02
occurs when duplex copying. The SC does not occur when turning on the machine or when making
one-sided copies.

Sensor Shift Motor

1. Paper transport belt unit ( page 814)

2. Paper transfer roller unit ( page 757)

911
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Drawer unit lock motor block ( page 595 "If the Drawer is Locked")
4. Sensor shift motor [A] along with the bracket ( x 2, x 1, x 1)

5. Sensor shift motor [A] ( x 2)

• When installing the motor, attach the timing belt at the edge detection unit.

912
 Duplex Unit

Edge Detection Unit

1. Sensor shift motor ( page 911)

2. Remove the fixing screws of the edge detection unit [A] ( x 2).

3. Edge detection unit [A] ( x 2)

913
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Edge Detection Sensor

1. Edge detection unit ( page 913)

2. Edge detection sensor [A] ( x 2, x 1)

Sensor Shift HP Switch

1. Edge detection unit ( page 913)

2. Sensor shift HP switch [A]

914
 Duplex Unit

• Roller HP sensor 2 and sensor shift HP switch are in close proximity. When you connect a harness
to the roller HP sensor 2 or sensor shift HP switch after the replacement, be careful not to connect
the harness to an incorrect sensor. If you connect the harness to an incorrect sensor, SC515-02
occurs when duplex copying. The SC does not occur when turning on the machine or when making
one-sided copies.

Roller Shift Motor 1 / Roller Shift Motor 2

1. Paper transport belt unit ( page 814)

2. Paper transfer roller unit ( page 757)
3. Cover [A] ( x 2)

4. Disconnect the connectors and clamps at the roller shift motor 1 [A] / roller shift motor 2 [B].

915
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Open the horizontal feed guide plate [A] and remove the cover [B] ( x 2).

6. Roller shift motor 1 [A] / Roller shift motor 2 [B] ( x 2 each, timing belt x 1 each)

916
 Paper Purge Unit

Paper Purge Unit

Paper Purge Unit

1. Open the drawer unit [A].

2. Open the guide plate [A] and remove it upward ( x 1).

3. Cover [A] ( x 2).

917
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Remove the fixing screw of the paper purge unit [A] ( x 1).

5. Paper purge unit [A] ( x 2)

918
 Paper Purge Unit

PCB: LSB

1. Left lower cover of the machine exterior ( page 535)

2. Purge door [A] (pin x 2)

3. Pull out the paper trays [A].

4. Remove the fixing screws of the upper inner cover [A] ( x 3).

5. Pull out the drawer unit [A] and remove the upper inner cover [B] (hook x 1).

919
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

6. LSB [A] along with the bracket ( x 2).

7. LSB [A] ( x 2, x 1).

Push Switch

1. LSB [A] along with the bracket ( page 919 "PCB: LSB")
2. Hold the sides of the push switch [A], remove by pulling ( x 1).

920
 Paper Purge Unit

Duplex Inverter Motor

1. Left lower cover of the machine exterior ( page 535)

2. Disconnect the connector of the duplex inverter motor [A].

3. Pull out the drawer unit and remove the duplex inverter motor unit [A] ( x 1).

921
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Duplex inverter motor [A] ( x 2, x 1, belt x 1).

Purged Paper Sensor

1. Left lower cover of the machine exterior ( page 535)

2. Guide plate [A] ( x 2).

922
 Paper Purge Unit

3. Purged paper sensor [A] along with the bracket ( x 1, x 1).

4. Turn the bracket and remove the purged paper sensor [A] ( x 1).

LED: Connecter: Red

LEDs are mounted at three points in the paper purge unit.

923
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Upper guide plate LED / Purge door LED

1. Upper inner cover ( page 919 "PCB: LSB")

2. Remove by pulling the upper guide plate LED [A] and the purge door LED [B] ( x 1 each).

Lower guide plate LED

1. Purge door [A] (pin x 2)

2. Lower inner cover [A] ( x 1).

924
 Paper Purge Unit

3. Remove by pulling the lower guide plate LED [A] ( x 1).

925
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Main Boards / HDD Unit

Layout

To replace the electrical components on the back of the machine, first remove the outer cover. (
page 537 "Rear Cover")

926
 Main Boards / HDD Unit

Replacement
No. Part Name Remarks
procedure

Combined High-Voltage Power Supply KC: front side, MC:

1 page 947
Board (Charge / Development) rear side

2 Controller Board page 927

3 HDD Unit page 930

Fusing Web Control Board-Main

4 page 949 D137/D138 only
Machine

5 AC Drive Board page 942

6 IH Inverter page 941

7 AC Drive Board Relay page 949 D137/D138 only

8 PFB page 940

9 BCU page 932

10 IPU page 938

Located behind the

11 IOB page 939
controller box

Located behind the

12 Potential Sensor Board page 946
drive exhaust fan

Located behind the AC

13 PSU1 page 943
drive board/IH inverter

Located behind the AC

14 PSU2 page 943
drive board/IH inverter

Controller Board

1. Controller box cover [A] ( x 4)

927
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Controller panel plate [A] ( x 4)

3. Controller board [A] ( x 7, x 4)

• There are two types of controller boards, one for D138/D136 and one for D137/D135.
Because there are different part numbers on these two controller boards, when replacing,
check the parts catalog to make sure that you install the correct type. If you install the wrong
board, the machine will not work.

928
 Main Boards / HDD Unit

When installing the New Controller Board

There are two NVRAMs ([A] and [B]) on the controller board. The two NVRAMs are one set. NVRAM
[A] is labeled "2M-1", and NVRAM [B] is labeled "2M-2".
When replacing the controller board, remove the NVRAMs from the old controller board. Then install
them at the same position on the new controller board. If this is not done, SC195-00 occurs.

• Install NVRAM (2M-1) in the socket that has "FRAM-1" [C] printed next to it on the controller
board. Install so that the indentation [E] on NVRAM (2M-1) is facing the direction of the arrow [G]
that is printed on the controller board.
• Install NVRAM (2M-2) in the socket that has "FRAM-2" [D] printed next to it on the controller
board. Install so that the indentation [F] on NVRAM (2M-2) is facing the direction of the arrow [H]
that is printed on the controller board.
• Note that if you install incorrectly, both the controller board and NVRAMs will be damaged.

• When replacing the controller board, first, check which ESA applications have been installed. After
replacing the controller board, re-install the ESA applications by following the installation
instructions for each application.

929
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• After reinstalling the ESA applications, print the SMC (SP-5-990-024/025 (SMC: SDK/
Application Info)). Then open the tandem tray [A] and remove the paper cassette decal [B]. Store
the SMC sheet [C] and the SD card(s) [D] that was used to install the ESA application(s).

HDD Unit

The HDD contains two separate hard disks (160 Gigabytes each x2 = 320 Gigabytes).
Before replacing the HDD unit, copy the address book data to an SD card from the HDD with
SP5846-051 if possible.

• Never remove an HDD unit from the work site without the consent of the client.
• The two disks are always replaced together as a unit. Never attempt to replace a single disk.
1. Controller box cover [A] ( x 4)

2. HDD unit ( x 3, x 3)

930
 Main Boards / HDD Unit

After Installing the New HDD Unit

1. Do SP5-832-001 to format the hard disk.

2. Do SP5-853-001 to copy the preset stamp data from the firmware to the hard disk.
3. Do SP5-846-052 to copy back the address book to the hard disk from the SD card to which you
havealready copied the address book data if possible.
4. Turn the main power switch off/on.

• Make sure the cables are correctly connected on the controller board.
Red cable: Upper socket
Black cable: Lower socket
• If the connections are reversed, the machine will issue an error at startup. If it occurs just
reconnect the HDD correctly and start again. The HDD will not be damaged by such an
incorrect startup.

Disposal of HDD Unit

• If the customer has any concerns about the security of any information on the HDD, the HDD
mustremain with the customer for disposal or safe keeping.
• The HDD may contain proprietary or classified (Confidential, Secret) information. Specifically,
theHDD contains document server documents and data stored in temporary files created
automaticallyduring copy job sorting and jam recovery. Such data is stored on the HDD in a
special format so itcannot normally be read but can be recovered with illegal methods.

Reinstallation

• Explain to the customer that the following information stored on the HDD is lost when the HDD
isreplaced: document server documents, fixed stamps, document server address book

931
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• The address book and document server documents (if needed) must be input again.
• If the customer is using the Data Overwrite Security, the Data Encryption feature or OCR Scanned
PDF, these applicationsmust be installed again.

BCU

1. Controller box cover [A] ( x 4)

2. BCU [A] ( x 2)

• BCU procured as a service part does not contain the NVRAM (EEPROM) [A].
• When installing a new BCU procured as a service part, make sure to remove the NVRAM
from the old BCU and install it on the new BCU.
• Install so that the indentation [B] on the NVRAM corresponds with the mark [C] printed on the
BCU. Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the BCU and NVRAM.
• If you forget to install the NVRAM on the new BCU, the machine will not activate and remain
in "Please wait" status even with the main power switch turned on.

932
 Main Boards / HDD Unit

3. Turn on the main power switch and register the machine serial number onto the new BCU by
entering the machine serial number in SP5-811-004 (Machine Serial / Set: BCU).

• Inputting a wrong serial number will cause the machine to display SC995-001 (CPM set
error).
4. Select the paper size system in SP5-131-001.
0: DOM (Japan)
1: NA
2: EU
5. Specify the area code in SP5-807-001.
1: DOM (Japan)
2: NA
3: EU
4: TWN
5: AA
6: CHN

• Setting the wrong area code will cause the machine to display SC995-04 (CPM set error).

NVRAM Replacement Procedure

NVRAM on the Controller Board

1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the machine.

933
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Print out the SMC data (“ALL”) in SP5-990-001.

3. Turn off the main power switch.
4. Insert a blank SD card into slot #2, and then turn on the main power switch.
5. Upload the NVRAM data to the blank SD card in SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload).

• Make sure to note the following SP settings as they will not be automatically uploaded to the
SD card. These settings will be input manually in Step 16.
• SP5-193-001 (External Controller Info. Setting)
0: No external controller, 1: EFI controller
• SP5-895-001 (Application invalidation / Printer )
0: valid, 1: invalid
• SP5-895-002 (Application invalidation / Scanner )
0: valid, 1: invalid
• SP5-985-001 (Device Setting / On Board NIC )
0: invalid, 1: valid
• SP5-985-002 (Device Setting / On Board USB )
0: invalid, 1:valid
6. Turn off the main power switch, and then unplug the AC power cord.
7. Remove the SD card containing the NVRAM data from slot #2.
8. Insert another blank SD card into slot #2, plug the AC power cord, and then turn on the main
power switch.
9. Upload the Address Book Data to the blank SD card in SP5-846-051 (UCS Setting / Back Up All
Addr Book).
Procedure for D135/D136 (Office model) only
If the Fax Option is installed on the machine, do the following:
• Print out the "Box Setting List". (User Tools -> Facsimile Features -> General Settings -> Box
Setting: Print List)
• Print out the "Program Special Sender List". (User Tools -> Facsimile Features -> Reception
Settings -> Program Special Sender: Print List)
• Take note of the settings in "User Tools -> Facsimile Features -> Reception Settings".
• Take note of the settings in "User Tools -> Facsimile Features -> Send Settings".
10. Turn off the main power switch, and then unplug the AC power cord.
11. Remove the SD card containing the Address Book Data from slot #2.
12. Replace the two NVRAMs on the Controller Board with the new ones.

934
 Main Boards / HDD Unit

• There are two NVRAMs on the controller board as mentioned in page 929. Make sure to
replace the two NVRAMs as a set.
• NVRAMs [A] and [B] installed on the Controller Board at the factory are labeled "2M-1" and
"2M-2" respectively. NVRAMs procured as service parts are labeled "FRAM1/D138E" and
"FRAM2/D138E".

• Install NVRAM "FRAM1/D138E" in the socket printed "FRAM-1" [C] on the controller board.
Install so that the indentation [E] on the NVRAM faces toward the direction indicated with the
arrow [G] printed on the controller board.
• Install NVRAM "FRAM2/D138E" in the socket printed "FRAM-2" [D] on the controller board.
Install so that the indentation [E] on the NVRAM faces toward the direction indicated with the
arrow [H] printed on the controller board.
• Work carefully to avoid mistake when installing the NVRAM. Incorrect installation will
damage both the NVRAM and controller board.

13. Plug in the AC power cord, and then turn ON the main power switch.

935
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• DO NOT insert the SD card containing the NVRAM data that you removed in Step 7 before
turning on the main switch.
• SC995-02 (Defective NVRAM) will appear when powering on the main power switch, but
ignore this SC. DO NOT turn off the main power switch. Continue with this procedure.
14. Re-insert the SD card containing the NVRAM data that you removed in Step 7 back into slot #2.
15. Download the old NVRAM data from the SD card onto the new NVRAM in SP5-825-001
(NVRAM Data Download).

• This will take about 2 or 3 minutes.

• After the download completes, message "Completed. You have to reboot." will appear, but
ignore this message and press the “Exit” button. DO NOT reboot at this moment.
• SC870-11 (Address Book Data Error) will appear in the banner, but DO NOT turn off the
main power switch. Continue with this procedure.
16. Input the following SP settings according to the notes took in Step 5.
• SP5-193-001 (External Controller Info. Setting)
• SP5-895-001 (Application invalidation / Printer)
• SP5-895-002 (Application invalidation / Scanner)
• SP5-985-001 (Device Setting / On Board NIC)
• SP5-985-002 (Device Setting / On Board USB)
Message "Completed. You have to reboot." will appear after inputting each of the above SP
settings, but ignore this message and press the “Exit” button. DO NOT reboot at this moment.
17. Turn off the main power switch. This will take about 3 minutes. Wait until the machine power is
turned off completely, and then remove the SD card from slot #2.
18. Turn on the main power switch.
19. Insert the SD card containing the Address Book Data removed in Step 11 into slot #2.
20. Execute SP5-846-052 (UCS Setting / Restore All Addr Book) to download the Address Book Data
on to the new NVRAM.

• SP5-846-052 will fail, if the settings in SP5-193-001, SP5-985-001 and SP5-985-002

input in Step 16 are incorrect.
Message "Completed. You have to reboot." will appear if SP5-846-052 results in success.
21. Turn off the main power switch and remove the SD card from slot #2.
22. Turn on the main power switch.

936
 Main Boards / HDD Unit

Procedure for D135/D136 (Office model) only

Confirm the “Reception Settings” and “Send Settings” correspond with the notes took in Step 9.
Correct the settings, if they are wrong.
23. Print out the SMC data (“ALL”) in SP5-990-001, and make sure that it matches with the SMC data
printed out in Step 2 (except for the total counter value).

• The total counter value is reset to “0” when the NVRAM is replaced.
24. Do the self-check Process Control.
25. Do ACC for the copier application program.
26. Do ACC for the printer application program.

NVRAM (EEPROM) on the BCU

Before performing the following procedure, contact your supervisor to obtain information on how to
input the machine serial number in the new NVRAM.
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the machine.
2. Print out the SMC data (SP5-990-001).
3. Turn off the main power switch.
4. Install an SD card into SD card slot #2 and then, turn on the main power switch.
5. Copy the NVRAM data to an SD card (SP5-824-001).
6. Turn off the main power switch, and then unplug the power cord.
7. Replace the NVRAM on the BCU and put back the covers.
8. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the main power switch.
Select the paper-size system in SP5-131-001 (Paper Size Type Selection).
0: DOM (JAPAN)
1: NA
2: EU
9. Specify the area code in SP5-807-001.
1: DOM (JAPAN)
2: NA
3: EU
4: TWN
5: AA
6: CHN

937
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• Setting the wrong area code will cause the system to display SC995-04(CPM Set Error).
10. Input the machine serial number according to the procedure instructed by your supervisor.

• Inputting an incorrect serial number will cause the system to display SC195-00 (Serial
Number Set Error).
11. Turn the main power switch off and on.
12. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM (SP5-825-001).
13. Turn off the main power switch, and then remove the SD card from SD card slot #2.
14. Turn on the main power switch.
15. Specify the SP and UP mode settings, if necessary.
16. Do the self-check Process Control.
17. Do ACC for the copier application program.
18. Do ACC for the printer application program.

• If the message “SD card for restoration is required.” appears after the NVRAM replacement,
restore the encryption key.

IPU

1. Controller box cover [A] ( x 4)

2. IPU_Sub [A] ( x 3)

938
 Main Boards / HDD Unit

3. IPU_Main [A] ( x 3)

IOB

1. Remove the retaining bracket [A] of the controller box which is located at the rear of the machine
( x 2).

2. Open the controller box [A] ( x 2).

939
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. IOB [A] ( x 2, all s)

When removing the motors that are behind the IOB

1. Disconnect all connectors on the IOB.

2. Remove the IOB [A] along with the bracket by sliding it to the right ( x 2).

PFB

1. PFB [A] ( x 6, all s)

940
 Main Boards / HDD Unit

When removing the motors that are behind the PFB

1. Disconnect all connectors on the PFB.

2. Remove the PFB [A] along with the bracket by sliding it upwards ( x 2).

IH Inverter

1. IH inverter [A] ( x 9, all s)

941
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

AC Drive Board

1. AC drive board [A] ( x 8, all s)

Notes on Replacing the AC Drive Board

Depending on the model and the destination, it is necessary to remove a connector or harness from the
old board and install it on the new board.
D135 for NA
1. Remove the jumper harness [B] at CN405 and the connector [C] at CN420/T113/T114 on
the old AC drive board [A].

942
 Main Boards / HDD Unit

2. Install the jumper harness and the connector on the new AC drive board.
D135 for EU/AP/CHN
1. Remove the the jumper harness [B] at CN405 on the old AC drive board [A].

2. Install the jumper harness on the new AC drive board.

PSU1 / PSU2

1. IH Inverter [A] and AC drive board [B] along with the bracket ( x 8, all s)

943
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

RTB 151
Caution when handling these boards

2. PSU1 [A] ( x 8, all s)

3. PSU2 [A] ( x 8, all s)

When removing the motors and sensors that are behind the PSU1/PSU2

1. Disconnect all connectors on the PSU1/PSU2.

2. Remove the upper stays (right and left) [A] ( x 4).

944
 Main Boards / HDD Unit

3. Remove the fixing screws of the PTR fusing exhaust fan [A] ( x 3).

4. Remove the PSU1/PSU2 [A] along with the bracket (upper side: x 2, lower side: x 7).

945
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Potential Sensor Board

1. Slide the drive exhaust fan [A] upward along with the duct ( x 3, x 1).

2. Harness guide [A] and the connectors of the potential sensor board ( x 2, x 3).

946
 Main Boards / HDD Unit

3. Potential sensor board ( x 4)

Combined High-Voltage Power Supply Board (Charge / Development)

(KCMY)

Combined High-Voltage Power Supply Board (KC)

1. Combined high-voltage power supply board (KC) [A] ( x 6, x 3)

947
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Combined High-Voltage Power Supply Board (MY)

1. Remove the combined high-voltage power supply board (KC) [A] along with the bracket by sliding
it toward the left ( x 4, x 3)

2. Remove the combined high-voltage power supply board (MY) [A] by sliding it upwards ( x 5,
x 3).

948
 Main Boards / HDD Unit

Fusing Web Control Board-Main Machine (D137/D138 only)

1. Fusing web control board -main machine [A] ( x 1, x 1)

AC Drive Board Relay (D137/D138 only)

1. AC drive board relay [A] ( x 1, x 1)

949
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Motors and Sensors

Layout (Motor)

Rear of the Machine (Top)

To replace the motors and sensors on the back of the machine, first remove the outer cover. (
page 537 "Rear Cover")

Replacement
No. Part Name Remarks
procedure

K, C, M, Y from the left

1 Drum Cleaning Motor (KCMY) page 960 Y is located behind the potential
sensor board.

K, C, M, Y from the left

2 Development Motor (KCMY) page 963 M and Y are located behind the
potential sensor board.

950
 Motors and Sensors

Replacement
No. Part Name Remarks
procedure

K, C, M, Y from the left

3 Drum Motor (KCMY) page 954 Y is located behind the potential
sensor board.

Rear of the Machine (Middle)

To replace the motors and sensors on the back of the machine, first remove the outer cover. (
page 537 "Rear Cover")

Replacement
No. Part Name Remarks
procedure

1 By-pass Feed Motor page 966 Located behind the IOB

2 Relay Motor page 966 Located behind the IOB

3 PTR Motor page 968 Located behind the IOB

Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller Drive

4 page 984 D137/ D138 only
Motor

951
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Replacement
No. Part Name Remarks
procedure

5 Fusing Drive Motor page 974

6 Waste Toner Collection Motor page 976

D137/ D138 only

Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller
7 page 986 Located behind the fusing drive
Contact Motor
motor

Located behind the duct of the

8 Fusing Release Motor page 981
PTR fusing exhaust fan

9 1st Paper Feed Motor page 970 Located behind the IOB

10 1st Transport Motor page 970 Located behind the IOB

Rear of the Machine (Bottom)

To replace the motors and sensors on the back of the machine, first remove the outer cover. (
page 537 "Rear Cover")

Replacement
No. Part Name Remarks
procedure

1 Vertical Transport Motor page 971 Located behind the PFB

2 2nd Transport Motor page 973 Located behind the PFB

952
 Motors and Sensors

Replacement
No. Part Name Remarks
procedure

3 2nd Paper Feed Motor page 973 Located behind the PFB

4 3rd Paper Feed Motor page 973 Located behind the PFB

5 3rd Transport Motor page 973 Located behind the PFB

Drawer Unit (Front)

To replace the motors on the front of the drawer unit, first remove the drawer unit cover. ( page 537
"Rear Cover")

Replacement
No. Part Name Remarks
procedure

1 Exit Motor page 612

2 Duplex Inverter Entrance Motor page 612

3 Duplex Transport Motor page 614

4 Registration Motor page 611

5 Duplex Exit Motor page 615

6 Cleaning Web Motor page 616 D137/ D138 only

953
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Drawer Unit (Rear)

Replacement
No. Part Name Remarks
procedure

1 Exit Inverter Motor page 613

2 Cleaning Web Contact Motor page 617 D137/ D138 only

Drum Motor (KCMY) / Drum Encoder Sensor (KCMY)

• Insert a sheet of paper as shown below when removing the drum motor in Step 6.

• This will prevent the grease coated to the tip of the drum shaft from contacting the ITB unit.

954
 Motors and Sensors

1. Toner Supply Unit ( page 624)

2. Faceplate ( page 680)
3. Unlock the lever [A] and pull out the PCDU [B] from the machine.

4. Remove the retaining bracket [A] of the controller box which is located at the rear of the machine
( x 2).

955
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Open the controller box [A] ( x 2).

6. Drum motor as a unit [A] ( x 4, x 2).

e.g.: K

• The following four screws located on the outside of the bracket were positioned on the
bracket with a special jig. Do not loosen or remove these screws. If their position is shifted, the
drum shaft will become eccentric, and this may cause abnormal images.

956
 Motors and Sensors

7. Drum motor [A] ( x 1).

• Removing or assembling the drum shaft and motor

• The binding portion of the drum shaft [A] and the motor [B] must be maintained in a horizontal
state so that excessive load is not put on the drum shaft. In order to avoid deformation of the
fixing screw [C], use a box-type driver [D].

957
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• In the Pro version, there is a HP sensor and feeler mechanism on the drum motor. If you forget
the feeler, the machine does not work, an SC (SC421-01(K) / SC421-02(C) /
SC421-03(M) / SC421-04(Y)) occurs.
8. Drum encoder sensor [A] ( x 1, rivet x 2).

• The procedures for C and M are the same as for K.

• For Y, it is necessary to remove the drive exhaust fan and potential sensor board before you
can do step 6 above. ( page 958 "Removing the Drive Exhaust Fan and the Potential
Sensor Board")

Removing the Drive Exhaust Fan and the Potential Sensor Board

1. Slide the drive exhaust fan [A] upward along with the duct ( x 3, x 1).

958
 Motors and Sensors

2. Potential sensor board along with the bracket ( x 4)

• Access to the drum motor (Y) [A] is possible.

959
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Drum HP Sensor (D137/D138 only)

1. Drum motor ( page 954)

2. Drum HP Sensors (x 2) [A] ( x 2 each, rivet x 2 each)

Drum Cleaning Motor (KCMY)

1. Remove the retaining bracket [A] of the controller box which is located at the rear of the machine
( x 2).

960
 Motors and Sensors

2. Open the controller box [A] ( x 2).

3. Vertical transport LED [B] along with the bracket ( x 3, x 1).

e.g.: K

• The procedures for C and M are the same as for K.

961
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• For Y, it is necessary to remove the drive exhaust fan and potential sensor board before you
can do step 3 above. ( page 962 "Removing the Drive Exhaust Fan and the Potential
Sensor Board")

Removing the Drive Exhaust Fan and the Potential Sensor Board

1. Slide the drive exhaust fan [A] upward along with the duct ( x 3, x 1).

2. Potential sensor board along with the bracket ( x 4)

• Access to the drum cleaning motor (Y) [A] is possible.

962
 Motors and Sensors

Development Motor (KCMY)

1. Remove the retaining bracket [A] of the controller box which is located at the rear of the machine
( x 2).

2. Open the controller box [A] ( x 2).

3. Development motor [A] ( x 4, x 1).

e.g.: K

963
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• Do not loosen or remove screws [A], [B] and [C] in the photograph below. These screws are
positioned with a special jig. Loosening the screws will affect the driving of the development
unit and leads to the occurrence of an abnormal image.

• The procedures for C and M are the same as for K.

• For M and Y, it is necessary to remove the drive exhaust fan and potential sensor board
before you can do step 3 above. ( page 965 "Removing the Drive Exhaust Fan and the
Potential Sensor Board")

964
 Motors and Sensors

Removing the Drive Exhaust Fan and the Potential Sensor Board

1. Slide the drive exhaust fan [A] upward along with the duct ( x 3, x 1).

2. Potential sensor board along with the bracket ( x 4)

• Access to the development motor (M) [A] and development motor (Y) [B] is possible.

965
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Development Roller HP Sensor (KCMY)

1. Drum motor ( page 954)

2. Development Roller HP Sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)

By-pass Feed Motor/Relay Motor

1. IOB along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine ( page 940 "When
removing the motors that are behind the IOB")
2. By-pass feed motor [A] and relay motor [B] along with the bracket ( x 3, x 1 each, x 3)

966
 Motors and Sensors

3. By-pass feed motor [A] and relay motor [B] ( x 2, each)

967
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• When installing motors, attach the timing belt.

PTR Motor / PTR Encoder Sensor

1. IOB along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine ( page 940 "When
removing the motors that are behind the IOB")
2. PTR motor [A] ( x4, x 1, x 1)

968
 Motors and Sensors

3. PTR encoder sensors (x 2) [A] (rivet x 2 each, x 1 each)

4. PTR encoder sensor cover [A] ( x1)

• When installing the PTR encoder sensor, put the sensor [A] on the cover [B] and fasten the
sensor with rivets.

969
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Paper Feed Motor/Transport Motor

1st Paper Feed Motor/1st Transport Motor

1. IOB along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine ( page 940 "When
removing the motors that are behind the IOB")
2. 1st paper feed motor [A] and 1st transport motor [B] along with the bracket ( x 3, x 1 each)

3. 1st paper feed motor [A] and 1st transport motor [B] ( x 2 each)

970
 Motors and Sensors

• When installing motors, attach the timing belt.

Vertical Transport Motor

1. PFB along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine ( page 941 "When
removing the motors that are behind the PFB")
2. Vertical transport motor [A] along with the bracket ( x 4, x 1)

971
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Vertical transport motor [A] ( x 2)

• When installing motors, attach the timing belt.

972
 Motors and Sensors

2nd Paper Feed Motor/2nd Transport Motor, 3rd Paper Feed Motor/3rd Transport
Motor

1. PFB along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine ( page 941 "When
removing the motors that are behind the PFB")
2nd paper feed motor/2nd transport motor [A] and 3rd paper feed motor/3rd transport motor [B]
are attached to one bracket.

2. Paper feed motors and transport motors (x 4) [A] along with the bracket ( x 4, x 1 each)

3. 2nd transport motor [A], 2nd paper feed motor [B], 3rd transport motor [C] and 3rd paper feed
motor [D] ( x 2 each)

973
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• When installing motors, attach the timing belt.

Fusing Drive Motor

1. Remove the retaining bracket [A] of the controller box which is located at the rear of the machine
( x 2).

2. Open the controller box [A] ( x 2).

974
 Motors and Sensors

3. PTR fusing exhaust fan and the grounding plate [A] along with the duct
D137/D138: x 6, x 2, x6

D135/D136: x 6, x 1, x5

975
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Fusing drive motor [A] ( x 4, x 1).

Waste Toner Collection Motor

Removing the Waste Toner Collection Motor

1. Remove the retaining bracket [A] of the controller box which is located at the rear of the machine
( x 2).

976
 Motors and Sensors

2. Open the controller box [A] ( x 2).

3. PTR fusing exhaust fan and the grounding plate [A] along with the duct
D137/D138: x 6, x 2, x6

D135/D136: x 6, x 1, x5

977
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Fusing drive motor [A] along with the bracket ( x 5, x 1, x 2).

• For D137/D138, in order to remove the fusing drive motor along with the bracket, you must
remove the bracket of the fusing belt smoothing roller drive motor. ( page 979
"Removing the Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller Drive Motor and the Bracket")

978
 Motors and Sensors

5. Waste toner collection motor [A] ( x 3, x 1)

Removing the Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller Drive Motor and the Bracket

1. Fusing belt smoothing roller drive motor [A] ( x 4, x 1)

2. The bracket [A] of the fusing belt release roller drive motor ( x 3).

979
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• Access to the bracket [A] of the fusing drive motor is possible.

Waste Toner Lock Sensor

1. Remove the retaining bracket [A] of the controller box which is located at the rear of the machine
( x 2).

2. Open the controller box [A] ( x 2).

3. Waste toner lock sensor [A] ( x 1)

980
 Motors and Sensors

Fusing Release Motor

1. Remove the retaining bracket [A] of the controller box which is located at the rear of the machine
( x 2).

2. Open the controller box [A] ( x 2).

3. PTR fusing exhaust fan and the grounding plate [A] along with the duct
D137/D138: x 6, x 2, x6

981
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

D135/D136: x 6, x 1, x5

4. Fusing release motor [A] ( x 3, x 1)

982
 Motors and Sensors

• For D137/D138, in order to remove the fusing release motor, you must remove the bracket
of the fusing belt smoothing roller drive motor. ( page 983 "Removing the Fusing Belt
Smoothing Roller Drive Motor and the Bracket")

Removing the Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller Drive Motor and the Bracket

1. Fusing belt smoothing roller drive motor [A] ( x 4, x 1)

2. The bracket [A] of the fusing belt release roller drive motor ( x 3).

983
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

• Access to the fusing release motor is possible.

Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller Drive Motor (D137/D138 only)

1. Remove the retaining bracket [A] of the controller box which is located at the rear of the machine
( x 2).

2. Open the controller box [A] ( x 2).

984
 Motors and Sensors

3. PTR fusing exhaust fan and the grounding plate [A] along with the duct ( x 6, x 2, x 6)

4. Fusing belt smoothing roller drive motor [A] ( x 4, x 1)

985
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller Contact Motor (D137/D138 only)

1. Fusing Release Motor ( page 981)

2. Fusing drive motor [A] along with the bracket ( x 5, x 1, x 2)

3. Fusing belt release roller contact motor [A] along with the bracket ( x 5, x 1)

4. Fusing belt release roller contact motor [A] ( x 2)

986
Motors and Sensors

987
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Fans and Filters

Layout (Fans)

Main Machine (Rear)

988
 Fans and Filters

Main Machine (Front)

989
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Drawer (Inside)

Replacement
No. Part Name Remarks
procedure

1 Heat Pipe Panel Intake Fan page 1001

2 Development Exhaust Fan (Right) page 994

3 Development Exhaust Fan (Left) page 994

4 Heat Pipe Panel Exhaust Fan page 1000

5 Fusing Exit Exhaust Fan page 998

6 Drive Exhaust Fan page 998

7 Ozone Exhaust Fan page 1005

8 Controller Exhaust Fan page 992

9 Fusing Pressure Roller Exhaust Fan page 998 D137/D138 only

10 PTR Fusing Exhaust Fan page 1003

11 Controller Intake Fan page 993

990
 Fans and Filters

Replacement
No. Part Name Remarks
procedure

12 PSU Fan (Left) page 1010

13 IH Coil Power Cooling Fan page 1007

14 PSU Fan (Right) page 1010

15 ITB Motor Cooling Fan page 1004

16 ID Sensor Cleaning Fan page 1009

17 Laser Unit Cooling Fan (Left) page 677

18 Laser Unit Cooling Fan (Right) page 677

19 Development Intake Fan (K) page 996

20 Development Intake Fan (C) page 996

21 ITB Cleaning Intake Fan page 1008

22 Development Intake Fan (M) page 996

23 Development Intake Fan (Y) page 996

24 Duplex Exhaust Fan (Front) page 1006

25 Duplex Exhaust Fan (Middle) page 1006

26 Duplex Exhaust Fan (Rear) page 1006

27 IH Coil Cooling Fan page 1007

28 Fusing Pressure Roller Intake Fan page 621 D137/D138 only

29 Fusing Heat Pipe Cooling Fan page 618

30 PTB Fan (Front) page 815

31 PTB Fan (Rear) page 815

991
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Layout (Filters)

Replacement
No. Part Name Remarks
procedure

1 Dust Filter (Large) page 1012

2 Ozone Filter (Large) page 1013

3 Deodorizing Filter (Small) page 1011

4 Dust Filter (Small) page 1012

5 Ozone Filter (Small) page 1013

6 Deodorizing Filter (Large) page 1011

Controller Exhaust Fan

1. Rear middle cover ( page 537)

2. Controller exhaust fan [A] ( x 2, x 1)

992
 Fans and Filters

Controller Intake Fan

1. Rear middle cover ( page 537)

2. Remove the retaining bracket [A] of the controller box which is located at the rear of the machine
( x 2).

3. Open the controller box [A] ( x 2).

993
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Controller intake fan [A] ( x 1, x 1)

Development Exhaust Fans (Right / Left)

1. Rear middle cover ( page 537)

2. Disconnect the harness to remove the development exhaust fans [A] along with the duct ( x1
each)

994
 Fans and Filters

3. Disconnect the left clamp to remove the development exhaust fan (right) [A] ( x 1).

4. Development exhaust fans (Right / Left) [A] along with the duct ( x 2 each)
e.g.: Development exhaust fan (right)

995
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Remove the hooks and take out the development exhaust fans (right / left) [A]
e.g.: Development exhaust fan (right)

Development Intake Fans (KCMY)

1. Toner supply unit inner cover ( page 628)

2. Development intake fans (KCM) [A] ( x 2 each, x 1 each)

996
 Fans and Filters

• Development intake fan (Y) [A] from the right side ( x 2, x 1)

3. Development intake fan ( x2, hook x 1)

997
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Drive Exhaust Fan

1. Rear middle cover ( page 537)

2. Drive exhaust fan [A] ( x 2, x 1)

Fusing Exit Exhaust Fan

1. Rear middle cover ( page 537)

2. Fusing exit exhaust fan [A] ( x 2, x 1)

Fusing Pressure Roller Exhaust Fan (D137/D138 only)

1. Rear middle cover ( page 537)

2. Rear lower cover ( page 538)
3. Remove the retaining bracket [A] of the controller box which is located at the rear of the machine
( x 2).

998
 Fans and Filters

4. Open the controller box [A] ( x 2).

5. Remove the PTR fusing exhaust fan [A] and the grounding plate along with the duct ( x 6, x 2,
x 6).

6. Fusing pressure roller exhaust fan [A] along with the duct ( x 2, x 1)

999
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

7. Fusing pressure roller exhaust fan [A] ( x 2, x 1)

Heat Pipe Panel Exhaust Fan

1. Rear middle cover ( page 537)

2. Drive exhaust fan [A] along with the duct ( x 3)

3. Fusing exit exhaust fan ( page 998)

1000
 Fans and Filters

4. Heat pipe panel exhaust fan [A] along with the duct ( x 2, x 1)

5. Remove the hooks and take out the heat pipe panel exhaust fan [A].

Heat Pipe Panel Intake Fan

1. Left middle cover ( page 532)

2. PCDU ( page 681)
3. Remove the toner supply unit [A] and remove the left slide stay [B] ( x 2).

1001
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Stay [A] ( x 1)

5. Duct [A] (hook x 2)

1002
 Fans and Filters

6. Heat pipe panel intake fan [A] along with the bracket ( x 3, x 1)

7. Heat pipe panel intake fan [A] ( x 2)

PTR Fusing Exhaust Fan

1. Rear middle cover ( page 537)

2. PTR fusing exhaust fan [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1)

1003
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

ITB Motor Cooling Fan

1. Rear middle cover ( page 537)

2. Remove the retaining bracket [A] of the controller box which is located at the rear of the machine
( x 2).

3. Open the controller box [A] ( x 2).

4. ITB motor cooling fan [A] along with the bracket ( x 2, x 1)

1004
 Fans and Filters

5. ITB motor cooling fan [A] ( x 2, x 1)

Ozone Exhaust Fan

1. Frame [A] ( x1, all s, all s)

2. Ozone exhaust fan [A] along with the duct ( x 5)

1005
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Ozone exhaust fan [A] ( x 2, x 1)

Duplex Exhaust Fans (Front / Middle / Rear)

1. Left middle cover ( page 532)

2. Duplex exhaust fan (front) [A], duplex exhaust fan (middle) [B] and duplex exhaust fan (rear) [C]
along with the duct ( x 2, x 1, x 1)

1006
 Fans and Filters

3. Duplex exhaust fans [A] ( x 2)

IH Coil Power Cooling Fan

1. Rear middle cover ( page 537)

2. Rear lower cover ( page 538)
3. IH coil power cooling fan [A] along with the bracket ( x 2, x 1, x 1)

4. IH coil power cooling fan [A] (hook x 2)

1007
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

ITB Cleaning Intake Fan

1. Drawer unit cover ( page 594)

2. ITB cleaning intake fan [A] along with the duct ( x 1)

3. Cover [A] ( x 1, hook x 2)

4. ITB cleaning intake fan [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)

1008
 Fans and Filters

ID Sensor Cleaning Fan

1. Rear middle cover ( page 537)

2. ID sensor cleaning fan [A] along with the bracket ( x 2, x 1)

3. ID sensor cleaning fan [A] ( x 2)

1009
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

PSU Fans (Right / Left)

1. PSU 1 ( page 943)

2. Disconnect the connectors (x 3) of the PSU fan (right) [A] and PSU fan (left) [B] at the back of the
PSU 1.

3. PSU fan (right) [A] and PSU fan (left) [B] ( x 2 each)

1010
 Fans and Filters

Deodorizing Filters (Large / Small)

1. Deodorizing filter (large) [A]

2. Deodorizing filter (small) [A]

1011
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Dust Filters (Large / Small)

1. Dust filter (large) [A]

2. Dust filter (small) [A]

1012
 Fans and Filters

Ozone Filters (Large / Small)

1. Ozone filter (large) [A]

2. Ozone filter (small) [A]

1013
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

1014
 Waste Toner Collection

Waste Toner Collection

D137 RTB 94
Procedure
modified Waste Toner Bottle

1. Open the waste toner bottle door [A] and take out the waste toner bottle [B], holding the bottle at
the decal location.

• To prevent the waste toner from spilling from the rear side [A], do not incline the bottle to the
rear direction when replacing the waste toner bottle.

1015
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Waste Toner Bottle Unit

1. Left cover ( page 532)

2. Rear cover ( page 537)
3. Remove the fixing screws (x 2) of the duplex exhaust fan (rear) [A] and disconnect the connector of
the duplex inverter motor [B].

4. Open the drawer unit [A] and remove the duplex inverter motor unit [B].

5. Pull out the relay duct [A] with swinging plate [B].

1016
 Waste Toner Collection

6. IH inverter [A] and AC drive board [B] along with the bracket ( x 8, all s, all s)

7. Bracket [A] ( x 3)

1017
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

8. Waste toner bottle unit [A]

Installing the Relay Duct

Install the relay duct and swinging plate using the following procedure.
1. Remove the relay duct seal [A] and hook the cutout [B] onto the relay duct [C].

2. Attach the relay duct [A] to the waste toner bottle unit and drop the swinging plate [B] in the unit.

1018
 Waste Toner Collection

3. Clean the attachment surface with alcohol and attach a seal [A].

Waste Toner Bottle Motor Sensor

1. Rear middle cover and rear lower cover ( page 537 "Rear Cover")
2. IH inverter [A] and AC drive board [B] along with the bracket ( x 8, all s, all s)

1019
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Waste toner bottle motor sensor [A] ( x 1)

Waste Toner Full Sensor

1. Waste toner bottle unit ( page 1016)

2. Remove the cover [A] and remove the waste toner full sensor [B] ( x 1).

1020
 Waste Toner Collection

Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor

1. Waste toner bottle unit ( page 1016)

2. Remove the cover [A] and remove the waste toner bottle set sensor [B].

Waste Toner Transport Motor

1. Waste toner bottle unit ( page 1016)

2. Waste toner transport motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)

Waste Toner Upper Transport

1. PCDU (four colors) ( page 681)

2. ITB unit ( page 718)
3. Close the drawer unit.
4. Remove the fixing screws of the waste toner upper transport [A] ( x 4)

1021
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Remove the hooks of K [B], M, C and Y in that order, then remove the waste toner upper transport
[A].

Waste Toner Vertical Transport

1. PCDU (four colors) ( page 681)

2. ITB unit ( page 718)
3. Remove the fixing screws of the waste toner vertical transport [A] ( x 5)

1022
 Waste Toner Collection

4. Duct [A]

5. Because of the cam [B] at the bottom, remove the waste toner vertical transport [A] in the upper-left
direction.

1023
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Waste Toner Lower Transport

1. PSU1/PSU2 along with the bracket ( page 944 "When removing the motors and sensors that
are behind the PSU1/PSU2")
2. Relay duct with swinging plate ( page 1016 "Waste Toner Bottle Unit")
3. Waste toner lower transport [A] ( x 2)

• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.

• When installing, first install the waste toner lower transport, then install the relay duct with
swinging plate. ( page 1018 "Installing the Relay Duct")

1024
 Adjustment after Replacement

Adjustment after Replacement

The following items need to be adjusted after replacement of parts.

Part Implementation items References

• CIS RGB Adjustment (SP4-712/713/714)

• ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Registration
(SP6-006-001/002) page 560
ADF "Adjustment after
• ADF Adjustment L-Edge Regist (1-Pass) Replacing the ADF"
(SP6-006-010/011)
• DF Magnification Adj.(SP6-017)

• Main Scan Registration Adjustment

(SP4-011-001) page 669
• Sub Scan Registration Adjustment "Magnification and
Lens Block
(SP4-010-001) Registration
• Sub Scan Magnification Adjustment Adjustment"
(SP4-008-001)

• Sub Scan Magnification Adjustment page 669

(SP4-008-001) "Magnification and
Scanner Drive Motor
Registration
Adjustment"

• Make a test copy. Make sure there is no page 669

deviation in registration and magnification. If "Magnification and
Scanner Wire
there is a deviation, adjust the SPs for Registration
registration and magnification. Adjustment"

• Image Parameters (SP2-108-001/002) page 676

• Color Registration (User Tools) "Adjustment after
Laser Unit
Laser Unit
Replacement"

1025
 4. Replacement and Adjustment

Part Implementation items References

PCDU • DEMS: Execute

Drum Unit (SP3-040-001/002/003/004/005)

Development Unit
Development Filter
Drum Cleaning Unit
Lubricant Blade
Drum Cleaning Blade
Lubrication Roller
Charge Roller Unit

Image Transfer Belt • Force Apply Lubricant Execute (SP2-696-001) page 724
Unit "Lubrication after
Transfer Belt replacement"

ITB Cleaning Unit • Force Apply Lubricant Execute (SP2-696-001)

ITB Cleaning Blade page 755
"Lubrication after
ITB Lubricant Bar Replacement"
ITB Lubricant Blade

1026
5. Troubleshooting

Service Call 101-195

SC100 (Engine: Scanning)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Lamp Error (Scanning)

The white level peak did not reach the prescribed threshold when the
white plate was scanned.

• LED defective
• IDB (LED driver) defective
• SBU defective
• IPU defective
• Power/signal harness defective
• Condensation in scanner unit
• Mirrors or lenses dirty or positioned incorrectly
SC101-01 D • White plate dirty or installed incorrectly

• Cycle the machine off/on.

• Reconnect the power/signal harness.
• Reattach/clean the mirrors/lenses.
• Reattach/clean the white plate.
• Replace the LED board.
• Replace the IDB board.
• Replace the SIO board.
• Replace the SBU board.
• Replace the IPU board.
• Replace the power/signal harness.

1027
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Lamp Error (LED illumination adjustment)

LED error was detected.

• LED defective
• IDB (LED driver) defective
• Power/signal harness defective
SC101-02 D
• Cycle the machine off/on.
• Reconnect the power/signal harness.
• Replace the LED board.
• Replace the IDB board.
• Replace the SIO board.
• Replace the power/signal harness.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

LED Illumination Adjustment Error

The white level peak reached the prescribed threshold when the white
plate was scanned after a specified number of adjustments.

• LED defective
• IDB (LED driver) defective
• SBU defective
• IPU defective
SC102-00 D • Power/signal harness defective

• Cycle the machine off/on.

• Reconnect the power/signal harness.
• Replace the IDB board.
• Replace the SIO board.
• Replace the SBU board.
• Replace the IPU board.
• Replace the power/signal harness.

1028
 Service Call 101-195

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Scanner Home Position Error 1

The scanner home position sensor does not go OFF.

Details:
Error detection timing
• During homing (when the machine is turned ON or when it returns
from energy save mode)
• During an automatic adjustment (when the machine is turned ON or
when it returns from energy save mode)
• During a scan from the ADF or exposure glass.
After an error occurs
SC120-00 D • Stop process, Operation panel display, LED indication, Logging
• Scanner is not usable (Copier/Scanner/Document Server
applications)
• Printer is usable.

• Scanner motor driver defective

• Scanner motor defective
• Scanner HP sensor defective
• Harness defective
• Timing belt, pulley, wire, or carriage not installed correctly

Replace the part.

1029
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Scanner Home Position Error 2

The scanner home position sensor does not go ON.

Details:
Error detection timing
• During homing
• During an automatic adjustment
• During a scan from the ADF or exposure glass.
After an error occurs
• Stop process, Operation panel display, LED indication, Logging
SC121-00 D
• Scanner is not usable (Copier/Scanner/Document Server
applications).
• Printer is usable.

• Scanner motor driver defective

• Scanner motor defective
• Scanner HP sensor defective
• Harness defective
• Timing belt, pulley, wire, or carriage not installed correctly

Replace the part.

1030
 Service Call 101-195

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Black level detection error

The black level cannot be adjusted within the target during auto gain
control.

• SBU defective
• IPU defective
SC141-00 D • Power/signal harness defective

• Cycle the machine off/on.

• Reconnect the power/signal harness.
• Replace the SBU board.
• Replace the IPU board.
• Replace the power/signal harness.

1031
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

White level detection error

• The white level cannot be adjusted to the second target level within
the target during auto gain control.

• SBU defective
• LED defective
• IDB (LED driver) defective
• IPU defective
• Power/signal harness defective
• Scanner drive error
• Condensation in scanner unit
• Mirrors or lenses dirty or positioned incorrectly
SC142-00 D
• White plate dirty or installed incorrectly

• Cycle the machine off/on.

• Reconnect the power/signal harness.
• Reattach/clean the mirrors/lenses.
• Reattach/clean the white plate.
• Replace the SBU board.
• Replace the LED board.
• Replace the IDB board.
• Replace the IPU board.
• Replace the SIO board.
• Replace the power/signal harness.

1032
 Service Call 101-195

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SBU Communication Error

• Connection to SBU cannot be confirmed. (Connection detection

error)
• Cannot communicate with the SBU, or the communication result is
abnormal.

• SBU defective
• The other side of the communication (BCU, IPU etc.) defective
SC144-00 D
• Power/signal harness defective

• Cycle the machine off/on.

• Reconnect the power/signal harness.
• Replace the SBU board.
• Replace the IPU board.
• Replace the BCU board.
• Replace the power/signal harness.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

IPU Error (LSYNC abnormal)

An error occurred during the self-diagnostic test performed every time the
machine is turned on, or returns to full operation from energy save mode.

• IPU (BiCU, iCTL) board defective (ASIC-LEO connection failure,

SC161-01 D
LSYNC abnormal, etc.)
• Cable between SBU and IPU (or BiCU) defective

• Replace the IPU (or BiCU) board.

• Check the cable between SBU and IPU (or BiCU)

1033
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

IPU error (Ri response abnormal)

The machine detects an error during an access to the Ri.

SC161-02 D
IPU (BiCU, iCTL) board defective (Ri response abnormal, etc.)

Replace the IPU (or BiCU) board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Copy data security unit error

• The copy data security option is enabled in the User Tools but the
option board is detected as missing or defective.
• The copy data security option was detected as defective when the
machine was turned on or returned from energy save mode.
SC165-00 D
• Copy data security unit board not installed correctly
• Copy data security unit board defective

• Reinstall the copy data security unit board.

• Replace the copy data security unit board.

1034
 Service Call 101-195

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

CIS transmission error

The data read from the ASIC register on the CIS were not as expected.
Details:
• Occurs when a serial communication error between the CIS board
and the DF board is detected. Occurs also when an error is detected
during initialization of the ASIC on the CIS.
• This can happen during initialization and feeding. The first and
second consecutive occurrences of each constitute jams. The third
occurrence constitutes an SC.
SC185-00 D
• Connector or harness between DF board and CIS board is
disconnected or defective
• ASIC on the CIS is defective
• Boot failure of ASIC on the CIS

• Reconnect the power/signal harness.

• Replace the CIS and CIPB.
• Replace the ADF main control board.
• Replace the power/signal harness.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC186-00 D CIS LED error

1035
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

During initialization:
• The ratio between the average values of leading-edge area and
rear-edge area is out of specification.
• Shading data peak value is below specification.
During scanning:
• Shading data peak value is below specification.
Details:
During initialization:
• Occurs when one out of two CIS LEDs is malfunctioning, causing the
difference between the average values of leading-edge area and
rear-edge area to be large (CIS LED error detection).
• Occurs when both of the CIS LEDs are malfunctioning (unlit),
causing the shading data peak value to be extremely low (CIS white
level adjustment).
During scanning:
• Occurs when both of the CIS LEDs are malfunctioning (unlit),
causing the shading data peak value to be extremely low (CIS scan
control, gray balance adjustment/confirmation).
• The first and second consecutive occurrences of each constitute
initial/feed jams. The third occurrence constitutes an SC.

During initialization:
• One or two out of two CIS LEDs are defective
During scanning:
• Both of the CIS LEDs are defective.

• Reconnect the power/signal harness.

• Replace the CIS and CIPB.
• Replace the CIS background white roller.
• Replace the power/signal harness.
• Replace the ADF main control board.

1036
 Service Call 101-195

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

CIS black level error

The black level scanned by CIS is abnormal.

Details:
• Occurs when abnormality is detected in the process of black level
SC187-00 D generation – detection.
• The first and second consecutive occurrences constitute initial jams.
The third occurrence constitutes an SC.

CIS defective

Replace the CIS unit of ADF.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

CIS white level error

• The shading data peak value read out from the CIS is abnormal.
• The shading data peak value is not within the specified range from
the target value. (The target value is set with SP4-784-001/
SP4-785-001/SP4-786-001.)
Details:
• Occurs when abnormality is detected in the process of CIS shading
data peak detection.
SC188-00 D
• The first and second consecutive occurrences constitute initial jams.
The third occurrence constitutes an SC.

CIS defective

• Reconnect the power/signal harness.

• Replace the CIS and CIPB.
• Replace the CIS background white roller.
• Replace the power/signal harness.

1037
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

CIS gray balance adjustment error

The difference between gray balance adjustment target value and the
value scanned from the GS20 chart was out of specification upon
execution of gray balance adjustment confirmation (SP4-705-002).
Details:
SC189-00 D • Occurs when gray balance adjustment fails.
• The first occurrence constitutes an SC (not an initial jam).

CIS defective

Replace the adjustment chart. (Degradation due to scratches and

smudges)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Machine serial number error

Comparison of the product identification code in the machine serial

number (11 digits).
SC195-00 D
The product identification code in the machine serial number (11 digits)
does not match.

Re-enter the machine serial number.

1038
 Service Call 202-286

Service Call 202-286

SC200 (Engine: Image Writing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC202-01 D Polygon Motor: ON Timeout Error: Bk

SC202-03 D Polygon Motor: ON Timeout Error: Ma

After the polygon motor turned on, or within 10 sec. after the rpm’s
changed, the motor did not enter READY status.

• The interface harness to the polygon motor driver damaged or not

connected correctly.
• Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective
• Polygon motor drive pulse cannot be output correctly. (Polygon
controller)
• XSCRDY signal observation failing (Polygon controller)

• Cycle the machine off/on.

• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the polygon harness.
• Replace the IPU board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC203-01 D Polygon Motor: OFF Timeout Error: Bk

SC203-03 D Polygon Motor: OFF Timeout Error: Ma

1039
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

The XSCRDY signal (polygon ready) never becomes inactive (H) after the
polygon motor went OFF.

• The interface harness to the polygon motor driver damaged or not

connected correctly.
• Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective
• Polygon motor drive pulse cannot be output correctly. (Polygon
controller)
• XSCRDY signal observation failing (Polygon controller)

• Cycle the machine off/on.

• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the polygon harness.
• Replace the IPU board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC204-01 D Polygon Motor: XSCRDY Signal Error: Bk

SC204-03 D Polygon Motor: XSCRDY Signal Error: Ma

During polygon motor rotation, the XSCRDY signal was inactive (H) for
longer than one rotation of the polygon.
Details:
• Occurs when the PATMOS polygon error determination register
detects that the XSCRDY signal was inactive (H) for longer than one
rotation of the polygon (7 cycles of PMCLK).
• The PATMOS polygon error determination register detects that the
XSCRDY signal was inactive (H) for longer than one rotation of the
polygon, and then refers to SCERR2.

• Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective

• The interface harness to the polygon motor driver damaged or not
connected correctly.

• Cycle the machine off/on.

• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the polygon harness.

1040
 Service Call 202-286

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC210-01 C Trailing Edge Beam Error: Bk

SC210-02 C Trailing Edge Beam Error: Cy

SC210-03 C Trailing Edge Beam Error: Ma

SC210-04 C Trailing Edge Beam Error: Ye

When the main scan magnification rate was measured, the value
measured between 2 points was out of specification.
Details:
• When a trailing edge beam detection error flag is asserted to VTEC
status register.
• The CPU detected an error flag when measuring the main scan
magnification rate.

• The interface harness to the beam detection unit damaged or not

connected correctly.
• Beam detection board defective
• Beam does not enter photodetector..
• Abnormality around VTEC
• LDB defective
• BCU defective
• Large main scan magnification rate

• Cycle the machine off/on.

• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the IPU board.
• Replace the BCU board.
• Correct the main scan magnification SP*
* SP2-184-006 through 009 = 269600
SP2-102-001,007 = 123
SP2-102-016 through 025 = 0
Adjust SP2-184-006 through 009 while checking the images until
the values of SP2-102-001,007 become 123 ± 30.

1041
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC220-01 D Leading Edge: LD1 synchronization detection error: Bk

SC220-02 D Leading Edge: LD1 synchronization detection error: Cy

SC220-03 D Leading Edge: LD1 synchronization detection error: Ma

SC220-04 D Leading Edge: LD1 synchronization detection error: Ye

The leading edge LD1 synchronization detection signal of the

corresponding color was not output within 100 ms while the polygon
mirror motor was operating at normal speed.
Details:
• When a synchronization detection error flag is asserted to VTEC
status register.
• After the polygon turned on, the CPU monitored for error flags in
100 ms cycles and detected an error flag.

• The interface harness to the synchronization detection unit damaged

or not connected correctly.
• Synchronization detection board defective
• Beam does not enter photodetector..
• Abnormality around VTEC
• LDB defective
• BCU defective
• Large main scan magnification rate

• Cycle the machine off/on.

• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the IPU board.
• Replace the BCU board.
• Correct the main scan magnification SP*
* SP2-184-006 through 009 = 269600
SP2-102-001,007 = 123
SP2-102-016 through 025 = 0
• Adjust SP2-184-006 through 009 while checking the images until
the values of SP2-102-001,007 become 123 ± 30.

1042
 Service Call 202-286

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC230-01 D FGATE ON error: Bk

SC230-02 D FGATE ON error: Cy

SC230-03 D FGATE ON error: Ma

SC230-04 D FGATE ON error: Ye

The FGATE signal did not turn ON within 200 msec after the writing
process of the corresponding color started.
Details:
The PFGATE register of PATMOS not asserted within 200 msec after the
writing process started.

• PATMOS defective
• Image processing ASIC defective
• BCU, controller board not connected correctly or defective
• Harness between IPU and LDB defective

• Cycle the machine off/on.

• Replace the IPU board.
• Replace the BCU board.
• Replace the controller board.
• Replace the LDB harness.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC231-01 D FGATE OFF error: Bk

SC231-02 D FGATE OFF error: Cy

SC231-03 D FGATE OFF error: Ma

SC231-04 D FGATE OFF error: Ye

1043
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

The FGATE signal did not turn OFF within 200 msec after the writing
process of the corresponding color ended. The FGATE signal did not turn
OFF when the next job of the corresponding color started.
Details:
• The PFGATE register of PATMOS not negated within 200 msec after
the writing process ended.
• The PFGATE register of PATMOS still asserted from the previous job
when the next writing process started.

• PATMOS defective
• Image processing ASIC defective

• Cycle the machine off/on.

• Replace the IPU board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC240-01 D LD error: Bk

SC240-03 D LD error: Ma

1044
 Service Call 202-286

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

When two errors were detected consecutively while monitoring the VTEC
for LD error registers in 350msec intervals after LD initialization.
Details:
The VTEC LD error flag was detected twice consecutively when the LD
turned on after initialization.

• LD degradation (LD broken, shift of output characteristics etc.)

• LD driver defective
• VTEC defective
• The interface harness damaged or not connected correctly.
• Large main scan magnification rate

• Cycle the main power off/on.

• Replace the IPU board.
• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the LD unit.
• Replace the harness.
• Correct the main scan magnification SP*
* SP2-184-006 through 009 = 269600
SP2-102-001,007 = 123
SP2-102-016 through 025 = 0
Adjust SP2-184-006 through 009 while checking the images until
the values of SP2-102-001,007 become 123 ± 30.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC260-01 C Laser Thermistor Error: Bk

SC260-03 C Laser Thermistor Error: Ma

1045
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• The reading of the thermistor in the laser unit was less than 10 °C
(50 °F), indicating that the thermistor has disconnected.
• The reading of the thermistor in the CK or YM laser unit was more
than 80 °C (176 °F), indicating that the thermistor has shorted out.
Details:
When the thermistor voltage is out of range (-10 to 80 °C) after the
machine was turned on.

• Thermistor defective
• Harness defective
• BCU defective

• Cycle the machine off/on.

• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the harness of laser unit.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC265-02 C Skew correction error: Cy

SC265-03 C Skew correction error: Ma

SC265-04 C Skew correction error: Ye

The skew control pulse total is not within range.

• Skew motor defective

• Harness defective
• Optical system defective

• Cycle the machine off/on.

• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the harness of laser unit.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC270-01 D LD ASIC communication error: Bk

SC270-03 D LD ASIC communication error: Ma

1046
 Service Call 202-286

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

On startup: Written to and read the same register but the values were
different.
VTEC: Monitored the parity and retried three times.
Details:
• On startup: Data 0x5A5A and 0xA5A5 are written to a
predetermined register. Then the register is read and the read data
is compared to the are compared
• VTEC: Monitors parity during communication. If it does not match,
retries up to three times. The second retry constitutes an SC.

• VTEC defective
• HORUS defective
• BCU defective
• IPU defective
• Harness defective

• Cycle the machine off/on.

• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the IPU board.
• Replace the BCU board.
• Replace the LDB harness.

1047
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

LD ASIC communication error: Others

On startup: “Door open” status was cleared but did not change to “Door
closed” status.
Details:
On startup: After clearing PATMOS “Door open” status, checks the status
of the door after “Door open” determination period. Failure to detect
“Door closed” status constitutes an SC.

• PATMOS defective
• HORUS defective
SC270-10 D
• BCU defective
• IPU defective
• Harness defective
• Interlock defective

• Cycle the machine off/on.

• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the IPU board.
• Replace the BCU board.
• Replace the LDB harness.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC274-01 D Image transfer error: Bk

SC274-03 D Image transfer error: Ma

1048
 Service Call 202-286

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• On detection of lane abnormality

• On detection of elastic buffer overflow/underflow
• On detection of STP error
• On detection of END error
Details:
• When DES status is detected as abnormal.

• IPU defective
• Harness defective
• LDB defective
• GAVD defective

• Cycle the machine off/on.

• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the IPU board.
• Replace the BCU board.
• Replace the LDB harness.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC276-01 D Microcomputer communication error: Bk

SC276-03 D Microcomputer communication error: Ma

APC microcomputer does not respond.

Details:
• Detected an abnormality concerning GAVD interruption.

• LDB defective

• Cycle the machine off/on.

• Replace the laser unit.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC285-00 D MUSIC error

1049
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

The results of MUSIC pattern reading failed 4 times while the machine is
turned ON.
Details:
• When MUSIC fails 4 times while the machine is turned ON. (The
count is cleared when the machine is turned OFF e.g. when entering
sleep mode.)
• TM sensor sampling error
• Sensor LED adjustment error
• Patch number error
• Transfer belt flaw error
• Main registration error
• Sub registration error
• Main scan magnification ratio error
• Main scan magnification ratio deviation error

• Belt flawed or smudged

• Sensor smudged or defective
• Pattern density defection

• Cycle the machine off/on.

• Replace the TM sensor.
• Replace the belt.
• Process control
• Cleaning

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC286-01 C LD shutter open error

1050
 Service Call 202-286

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Detected an erratic movement during closing or opening.

• Shutter motor movement error

• Sensor defective
• Links broken

• Cycle the machine off/on.(In case of a malfunction)

• Replace the laser unit. (In case of defective parts)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC286-02
RTB 157 SC286-02 D LD shutter close error

Detected an erratic movement during opening.

• Shutter motor movement error

• Sensor defective
• Links broken

• Cycle the machine off/on.(In case of a malfunction)

• Replace the laser unit. (In case of defective parts)

1051
 5. Troubleshooting

Service Call 300-398

SC300 (Engine: Charge, Development)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC300-01 D Charge Roller Power Pack Output Error (K)

SC300-02 D Charge Roller Power Pack Output Error (C)

SC300-03 D Charge Roller Power Pack Output Error (M)

SC300-04 D Charge Roller Power Pack Output Error (Y)

The interrupt that checks the status of the PCU power pack every 10 ms
detected SC signals 15 times consecutively.
Details:
In case of an overcurrent, the Charge Roller Power Pack outputs SC
signals. The machine monitors it, and issues an SC when an error occurs.

• High voltage harness shorted.

• Leakage around the charge roller caused by a conductive object.

• Remove the cause of leakage.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC312-01 D Charge FB Voltage Error (K)

SC312-02 D Charge FB Voltage Error (C)

SC312-03 D Charge FB Voltage Error (M)

SC312-04 D Charge FB Voltage Error (Y)

1052
 Service Call 300-398

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

On plotter startup, the charge FB (feed-back) voltage was 0.3V or less

for 15 consecutive readings.
Details:
SC issued when electric current does not pass after charge bias is
applied, which can be caused when a harness is disconnected or
damaged, or when the charge roller or the drum is not installed.

• High-voltage harness damaged or not connected correctly.

• Charge roller or drum not installed

• Fix the problem.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC320-01 D Development Power Pack Output Error (K)

SC320-02 D Development Power Pack Output Error (C)

SC320-03 D Development Power Pack Output Error (M)

SC320-04 D Development Power Pack Output Error (Y)

1053
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

When SC signals are detected 25 times consecutively in 20ms intervals

(500 msec).
Details:
When the development power pack is shorted, the development power
pack detects it by means of an SC signal (HIGH level). The IOB monitors
the SC signals as explained above.

• Development power pack shorted

Disconnect the high voltage cable from the output terminal of the
development power pack of the corresponding color, and check the
following points.
• PWM: Check the signal of the corresponding color.
• If the signal is fixed to HIGH during photocopying process, replace
the harness or the IOB.
• Check the output of the development power pack of the
corresponding color.
If the output is fixed to HIGH during photocopying process, replace
the power pack.
If the output is normal during photocopying process, test the resistance
between the highvoltage cable and the ground. If resistance is “0” or
nearly “0”, replace the high-voltage harness or PCU.

1054
 Service Call 300-398

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Development motor: Bk: Lock

Error detected by the TDCU.

If a command sent from the TDCU indicates an error, the engine issues an
SC.
ASAP command: Motor lock detection setting value (engine to TDCU):
0x5B
ASAP command: SC detection notification (TDCU to engine):
0x56_0x08
Details:
When the motor is on, each lock signal is checked every 100
milliseconds. If the High status is detected 20 times consecutively, the
machine determines that the motor is not running correctly. The machine
issues an SC and stops the motor.
SC325-00 D
• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Harness broken
• IOB defective
• Unit torque increased.

• Replace the motor.

• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the IOB.
• Replace the unit.
• Replace the driven unit.

1055
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Development motor: C: Lock

Error detected by the TDCU.

If a command sent from the TDCU indicates an error, the engine issues an
SC.
ASAP command: Motor lock detection setting value (engine to TDCU):
0x5B
ASAP command: SC detection notification (TDCU to engine):
0x56_0x02
Details:
When the motor is on, each lock signal is checked every 100
milliseconds. If the High status is detected 20 times consecutively, the
machine determines that the motor is not running correctly. The machine
issues an SC and stops the motor.
SC326-00 D
• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Harness broken
• IOB defective
• Unit torque increased.

• Replace the motor.

• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the IOB.
• Replace the unit.
• Replace the driven unit.

1056
 Service Call 300-398

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Development motor: M: Lock

Error detected by the TDCU.

If a command sent from the TDCU indicates an error, the engine issues an
SC.
ASAP command: Motor lock detection setting value (engine to TDCU):
0x5B
ASAP command: SC detection notification (TDCU to engine):
0x56_0x04
Details:
When the motor is on, each lock signal is checked every 100
milliseconds. If the High status is detected 20 times consecutively, the
machine determines that the motor is not running correctly. The machine
issues an SC and stops the motor.
SC327-00 D
• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Harness broken
• IOB defective
• Unit torque increased.

• Replace the motor.

• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the IOB.
• Replace the unit.
• Replace the driven unit.

1057
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Development motor: Y: Lock

Error detected by the TDCU.

If a command sent from the TDCU indicates an error, the engine issues an
SC.
ASAP command: Motor lock detection setting value (engine to TDCU):
0x5B
ASAP command: SC detection notification (TDCU to engine):
0x56_0x01
Details:
When the motor is on, each lock signal is checked every 100
milliseconds. If the High status is detected 20 times consecutively, the
machine determines that the motor is not running correctly. The machine
issues an SC and stops the motor.
SC328-00 D
• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Harness broken
• IOB defective
• Unit torque increased.

• Replace the motor.

• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the IOB.
• Replace the unit.
• Replace the driven unit.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC332-01 D Toner supply motor error (K)

SC332-02 D Toner supply motor error (C)

SC332-03 D Toner supply motor error (M)

SC332-04 D Toner supply motor error (Y)

1058
 Service Call 300-398

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Detected a lock signal which indicates overcurrent in the toner supply

bottle motor.
Details:
The lock signal is generated when the toner supply bottle motor current
exceeds 500 mA.
When a toner supply bottle motor is on, it is checked every 100
milliseconds for lock signals. The following steps are executed every
second.
• If the lock signal was detected 9 times in 10 samplings, the lock
counter increases by one. When the lock counter value is 23 or
larger, the SC is issued.
• If the lock signal was detected 8 times or less in 10 samplings, the
lock counter is cleared.
• If the samplings end before reaching the tenth time (due to bottle
replacement etc.), the lock counter value is kept as is. Sampling
starts again the next time the motor runs.
• The lock counter is cleared when the machine is turned off (also
when the machine enters sleep mode, in which the plotter is turned
off) or when an SC is issued.

• Toner bottle not set correctly or the torque is large.

• Toner bottle broken or defective
• Motor defective

• Toner bottle not set correctly, toner bottle broken, or large torque:
After the machine stops, ask the user to remove the toner bottle,
shake it and set it again. Then cycle the machine off/on to return
from SC status.
• Toner bottle broken or defective: Ask the user to remove the toner
bottle and set a normal bottle. Then cycle the machine off/on to
return from SC status.
• Motor defective: Turn off the machine and replace the motor. Then
cycle the machine off/on to return from SC status.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC336-01 D Developer Set Error (K)

1059
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC336-02 D Developer Set Error (C)

SC336-03 D Developer Set Error (M)

SC336-04 D Developer Set Error (Y)

When the TD sensor control voltage (Vtcnt) is 4.3V, the TD sensor output
(Vt) is less than 0.7V.
Details:
When executing TD sensor initialization (SP3-030), the machine checks
the development unit for the presence of developer. If the error condition
is detected at this point, the machine determines that there is no
developer and issues the SC.

• There is an extremely low amount of developer.

• Check the developer.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC348-01 D Toner supply error (K)

SC348-02 D Toner supply error (C)

SC348-03 D Toner supply error (M)

SC348-04 D Toner supply error (Y)

1060
 Service Call 300-398

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

K:
Amount of toner on the ID sensor pattern printed and read between
sheets (SP3-300-001) is less than the lower threshold (SP3-301-023)
and accumulated toner clutch ON time (SP3-301-041) is greater than
the upper threshold (SP3-301-031).
CMY:
Amount of toner on the ID sensor pattern printed and read between
sheets (SP3-300-002 to 004) is less than the lower threshold
(SP3-301-024) and accumulated toner clutch ON time (SP3-301-042
to 044) is greater than the upper threshold (SP3-301-031).
Details:
This SC is issued when the toner end sensor continues detecting the
presence of toner falsely.

• Toner end sensor cleaner spring broken

• Toner end sensor cleaner spring not set correctly
• Toner end sensor defective

• Replace the toner supply unit.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC351-01 C Development sleeve home position signal detection error (K)

SC351-02 C Development sleeve home position signal detection error (C)

SC351-03 C Development sleeve home position signal detection error (M)

SC351-04 C Development sleeve home position signal detection error (Y)

Cannot detect the home position signal within specified time.

• Home position sensor defective/loose connection/harness

damaged/Connecter disconnected
• Home position sensor smudged

• Check if the home position sensor connector is connected correctly.

• Check the home position sensor for abnormality.
• Replace the home position sensor if it is abnormal.
• Check the sensor for smudges. Blow it with air and check again.

1061
 5. Troubleshooting

SC300 (Engine: Development)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC360-01 D TD sensor adjustment error (K)

SC360-02 D TD sensor adjustment error (C)

SC360-03 D TD sensor adjustment error (M)

SC360-04 D TD sensor adjustment error (Y)

During TD sensor initialization, the TD sensor output voltage (Vt) cannot

be adjusted to the target range (target value ± 0.2V).
Details:
TD sensor initialization adjusts the TD sensor control voltage (Vtcnt) in
order to adjust the TD sensor output voltage (Vt) to target value ± 0.2V.
Adjustment flow:
1. Developer presence detection
2. Developer not detected.
OK: Proceeds to Vtcnt adjustment.
NG: SC336-0X
3. TD sensor calibration (Fluctuate Vtcnt and measure Vt)
4. TD sensor calibration result judgment
OK: TD sensor calibration succeeded.
NG: SC360-0X

• TD sensor defective
• Loose connection
• Harness broken
• Developer is not new

• Replace the TD sensor. RTB 173

• Replace the development unit.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC361-01 D TD sensor output error: Upper Limit (K)

SC361-02 D TD sensor output error: Upper Limit (C)

1062
 Service Call 300-398

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC361-03 D TD sensor output error: Upper Limit (M)

SC361-04 D TD sensor output error: Upper Limit (Y)

The TD sensor output (Vt) (SP3-210-001 to 004) exceeded 4.7 V 20

times consecutively.

• Toner density extremely low

• Check the toner supply system.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC362-01 D TD sensor output error: Lower limit (K)

SC362-02 D TD sensor output error: Lower limit (C)

SC362-03 D TD sensor output error: Lower limit (M)

SC362-04 D TD sensor output error: Lower limit (Y)

The TD sensor output (Vt) (SP3-210-001 to 004) fell below 0.5 V 10

times consecutively.

• TD sensor not connected correctly

• TD sensor defective

• Check the TD sensor connection.

• Check the home position sensor for abnormality.
• Replace the TD sensor if it is abnormal. RTB 173

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC370-01 D ID sensor calibration error (F)

SC370-02 D ID sensor calibration error (C)

SC370-03 D ID sensor calibration error (R)

1063
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

The voltage reading during process control for Vsg_reg was not within
the correct range (4.0 ± 0.5 V).
Details:
Vsg_reg is the voltage reading of the light reflected directly from the bare
surface of the ITB. ID sensor calibration adjusts the LED current so that
Vsg_reg becomes 4.0 ± 0.5 V.
Adjustment flow:
1. Vsg_reg confirmation
If Vsg_reg is smaller than 0.5V, SC371-0X is issued and process
control ends.
2. ID sensor calibration
Fluctuates the LED current and measures Vsg_reg.
3. LED current upper limit check
OK: Proceeds to Vsg upper/lower limit check
NG: SC372-0X is issued; proceeds to Vsg upper/lower limit check
4. Vsg upper/lower limit check
OK: Process control continued
NG: SC370-0X is issued and process control ends.

• ITB deformed, out of position or damaged

• Check the ITB.

• Fix the ITB if it is deformed, out of position, etc.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC371-01 D ID sensor output error (F)

SC371-02 D ID sensor output error (C)

SC371-03 D ID sensor output error (R)

1064
 Service Call 300-398

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

The ID sensor voltage reading of the light reflected directly (Vsg_reg) is

below 0.5 V.

• ID sensor connector disconnected/loose connection

• ID sensor defective

• Check if the ID sensor connector is connected. Connect it if

disconnected.
• Replace the ID sensor if defective.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC372-01 C ID sensor LED current upper limit error (F)

SC372-02 C ID sensor LED current upper limit error (C)

SC372-03 C ID sensor LED current upper limit error (R)

The ID sensor LED current exceeds the upper limit (SP3-320-015)

• ID sensor smudged
• ID sensor deteriorated
• ITB deteriorated (smudges, filming)

• Check the ID sensor window. Wipe it with a damp cloth if dirty

(never use dry cloth).
• If the ID sensor is deteriorated, replace it.
• If the ITB is smudged, check the ITB unit.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC373-01 D ID Sensor Pattern Density High Error (K)

SC373-02 D ID Sensor Pattern Density High Error (C)

SC373-03 D ID Sensor Pattern Density High Error (M)

SC373-04 D ID Sensor Pattern Density High Error (Y)

1065
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

K:
The density of the Black reading in the ID sensor patterns created
between pages (SP3-300-001) is greater than the threshold value set by
SP3-301-021.
CMY:
The density of the Cyan/Magenta/Yellow reading in the ID sensor
patterns created between pages (SP3-300-002 to o004) is greater than
the threshold value set by SP3-301-022.

• Excessive toner supply

• Replace the toner supply unit.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC374-01 D ID Sensor Pattern Density Low Error (K)

SC374-02 D ID Sensor Pattern Density Low Error (C)

SC374-03 D ID Sensor Pattern Density Low Error (M)

SC374-04 D ID Sensor Pattern Density Low Error (Y)

K:
The density of the Black reading in the ID sensor patterns created
between pages (SP3-300-001) was less than the threshold value set by
SP3-301-023 three times consecutively.
CMY:
The density of the Cyan reading in the ID sensor patterns created
between pages (SP3-300-002 to 004) is less than the threshold value set
by SP3301-24 three times consecutively.

• Abnormal development bias (Continuity fault)

• Image transfer error

• Check development bias continuity.

• Check the image transfer unit.

1066
 Service Call 300-398

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC381-01 D Potential sensor output high error (K)

SC381-02 D Potential sensor output high error (C)

SC381-03 D Potential sensor output high error (M)

SC381-04 D Potential sensor output high error (Y)

Vd(700) greater than 800[-V]

Details:
In Vd detection, which is done at the beginning of process control, the
measured potential (Vd) is converted to the potential when -700 V is
applied to the drum (Vd700) and used to check the potential sensor.

Potential sensor dirty (foreign object, such as toner, entering the probe
window) / potential sensor probe connector disconnected / potential
sensor probe defective.

• Use a blower brush to clean the window of the potential sensor

probe, then check the sensor again.
• Disconnect and reconnect the potential sensor probe connector,
then check the sensor again.
• Disconnect and reconnect the harness connecting the potential
sensor board and potential sensor probe, then check the sensor
again.
• If this does not solve the problem, replace the potential sensor
probe.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC382-01 D Potential sensor output low error (K)

SC382-02 D Potential sensor output low error (C)

SC382-03 D Potential sensor output low error (M)

SC382-04 D Potential sensor output low error (Y)

1067
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Vd(700) lesser than 500[-V]

Details:
In Vd detection, which is done at the beginning of process control, the
measured potential (Vd) is converted to the potential when -700 V is
applied to the drum (Vd700) and used to check the potential sensor.

• Potential sensor probe connector disconnected

• Potential sensor probe defective

• Disconnect and reconnect the harness connecting the IOB and

potential sensor board, then check the sensor again.
• If this does not solve the problem, replace the potential sensor
probe.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC395-01 D Drum motor (K) Lock: Encoder 1 error

SC395-02 D Drum motor (K) Lock: Encoder 2 error

SC395-03 D Drum motor (K) Lock: Encoder 1/2 error

SC395-04 D Drum motor (K) Lock: Hole error

SC395-05 D Drum motor (K) Lock: Overload error

SC396-01 D Drum motor (C) Lock: Encoder 1 error

SC396-02 D Drum motor (C) Lock: Encoder 2 error

SC396-03 D Drum motor (C) Lock: Encoder 1/2 error

SC396-04 D Drum motor (C) Lock: Hole error

SC396-05 D Drum motor (C) Lock: Overload error

SC397-01 D Drum motor (M) Lock: Encoder 1 error

SC397-02 D Drum motor (M) Lock: Encoder 2 error

SC397-03 D Drum motor (M) Lock: Encoder 1/2 error

SC397-04 D Drum motor (M) Lock: Hole error

SC397-05 D Drum motor (M) Lock: Overload error

1068
 Service Call 300-398

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC398-01 D Drum motor (Y) Lock: Encoder 1 error

SC398-02 D Drum motor (Y) Lock: Encoder 2 error

SC398-03 D Drum motor (Y) Lock: Encoder 1/2 error

SC398-04 D Drum motor (Y) Lock: Hole error

SC398-05 D Drum motor (Y) Lock: Overload error

Error detected by the TDCU.

If a command sent from the TDCU indicates an error, the engine issues an
SC.
ASAP command: Motor lock detection setting value (engine to TDCU):
0x5B
See table below for ASAP commands notifying SC detection.
Details:
TDCU Motor lock signal criteria:
• Drum motor
High if the motor speed is not within the range of target value ±
6.25%.
Low if the motor speed is within the range of target value ± 6.25%.
• ITB drive motor, PTR Motor
High if the motor speed is not within the range of target value ±
6.25%.
Low if the motor speed is within the range of target value ± 6.25%.

Target value:
If the default motor speed was adjusted using the SP, the adjusted value is
used as the target value.
Specification:
• When the motor is on, each lock signal is checked every 100
milliseconds. If the High status is detected 20 times consecutively,
the machine determines that the motor is not running correctly. The
machine issues an SC and stops the motor.

1069
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• Motor defective, connector disconnected, harness broken, IOB

defective, unit torque increased.
• Black drum sensor smudged, black drum sensor defective, black
drum sensor connector not set correctly, harness broken

• Replace the motor / reconnect the connector / replace the

harness / replace the IOB / replace the unit / replace the driven
unit.
• Clean the sensor / replace the sensor.
• Reconnect the sensor connector.
• Check the sensor harness.

ASAP Command: SC detection notification (TDCU to Engine): (SC395-01 to SC398-05)

SC No. ASAP Command: SC detection notification

0x55_0x08_0x01
0x55_0x08_0x02
SC395-01
0x55_0x08_0x03
0x55_0x08_0x04

0x55_0x08_0x05
0x55_0x08_0x0a
SC395-02
0x55_0x08_0x0f
0x55_0x08_0x14

1070
 Service Call 300-398

SC No. ASAP Command: SC detection notification

0x55_0x08_0x06
0x55_0x08_0x07
0x55_0x08_0x08
0x55_0x08_0x09
0x55_0x08_0x0b
0x55_0x08_0x0c
0x55_0x08_0x0d
0x55_0x08_0x0e
SC395-03
0x55_0x08_0x10
0x55_0x08_0x11
0x55_0x08_0x12
0x55_0x08_0x13
0x55_0x08_0x15
0x55_0x08_0x16
0x55_0x08_0x17
0x55_0x08_0x18

0x55_0x02_0x29
0x55_0x02_0x2a
SC395-04
0x55_0x02_0x2b
0x55_0x02_0x2c

SC395-05 0x55_0x02_0x34

0x55_0x02_0x01
0x55_0x02_0x02
SC396-01
0x55_0x02_0x03
0x55_0x02_0x04

0x55_0x02_0x05
0x55_0x02_0x0a
SC396-02
0x55_0x02_0x0f
0x55_0x02_0x14

1071
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. ASAP Command: SC detection notification

0x55_0x02_0x06
0x55_0x02_0x07
0x55_0x02_0x08
0x55_0x02_0x09
0x55_0x02_0x0b
0x55_0x02_0x0c
0x55_0x02_0x0d
0x55_0x02_0x0e
SC396-03
0x55_0x02_0x10
0x55_0x02_0x11
0x55_0x02_0x12
0x55_0x02_0x13
0x55_0x02_0x15
0x55_0x02_0x16
0x55_0x02_0x17
0x55_0x02_0x18

0x55_0x02_0x29
0x55_0x02_0x2a
SC396-04
0x55_0x02_0x2b
0x55_0x02_0x2c

SC396-05 0x55_0x02_0x34

0x55_0x04_0x01
0x55_0x04_0x02
SC397-01
0x55_0x04_0x03
0x55_0x04_0x04

0x55_0x04_0x05
0x55_0x04_0x0a
SC397-02
0x55_0x04_0x0f
0x55_0x04_0x14

1072
 Service Call 300-398

SC No. ASAP Command: SC detection notification

0x55_0x04_0x06
0x55_0x04_0x07
0x55_0x04_0x08
0x55_0x04_0x09
0x55_0x04_0x0b
0x55_0x04_0x0c
0x55_0x04_0x0d
0x55_0x04_0x0e
SC397-03
0x55_0x04_0x10
0x55_0x04_0x11
0x55_0x04_0x12
0x55_0x04_0x13
0x55_0x04_0x15
0x55_0x04_0x16
0x55_0x04_0x17
0x55_0x04_0x18

0x55_0x04_0x29
0x55_0x04_0x2a
SC397-04
0x55_0x04_0x2b
0x55_0x04_0x2c

SC397-05 0x55_0x04_0x34

0x55_0x01_0x01
0x55_0x01_0x02
SC398-01
0x55_0x01_0x03
0x55_0x01_0x04

0x55_0x01_0x05
0x55_0x01_0x0a
SC398-02
0x55_0x01_0x0f
0x55_0x01_0x14

1073
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. ASAP Command: SC detection notification

0x55_0x01_0x06
0x55_0x01_0x07
0x55_0x01_0x08
0x55_0x01_0x09
0x55_0x01_0x0b
0x55_0x01_0x0c
0x55_0x01_0x0d
0x55_0x01_0x0e
SC398-03
0x55_0x01_0x10
0x55_0x01_0x11
0x55_0x01_0x12
0x55_0x01_0x13
0x55_0x01_0x15
0x55_0x01_0x16
0x55_0x01_0x17
0x55_0x01_0x18

0x55_0x01_0x29
0x55_0x01_0x2a
SC398-04
0x55_0x01_0x2b
0x55_0x01_0x2c

SC398-05 0x55_0x01_0x34

1074
 Service Call 400-498

Service Call 400-498

SC400 (Engine: Around the Drum)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC400-01 D Development Gamma High Error (K)

SC400-02 D Development Gamma High Error (C)

SC400-03 D Development Gamma High Error (M)

SC400-04 D Development Gamma High Error (Y)

Development gamma > 3.0

Details:
This SC is issued when the development gamma measured during process
control was greater than 3.0

• Toner density too high

• Condensation

• Replace the developer.

• If condensation has formed, wait a while and repeat process
control.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC401-01 D Development Gamma Low Error (K)

SC401-02 D Development Gamma Low Error (C)

SC401-03 D Development Gamma Low Error (M)

SC401-04 D Development Gamma Low Error (Y)

1075
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Development gamma > 3.0

Details:
This SC is issued when the development gamma measured during process
control was smaller than 3.0

• Toner density error

• The dustproof glass is dirty.
• Transfer power pack defective
• PCDU set error

• Check the toner supply system.

• Clean the dustproof glass.
• Replace the transfer power pack.
• Check if the PCDU is installed correctly by looking at the locking
levers. ( page 681 "PCDU")

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC402-51 D Development gamma calculation error: Insufficient data (K)

SC402-52 D Development gamma calculation error: Insufficient data (C)

SC402-53 D Development gamma calculation error: Insufficient data (M)

SC402-54 D Development gamma calculation error: Insufficient data (KY

The number of valid data that can be used for development gamma
calculation is smaller than 2.

• Toner density error

• Condensation

• Replace the developer.

• If condensation has formed, wait a while and repeat process
control.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC402-61 D Development gamma calculation error: LD unlit (K)

1076
 Service Call 400-498

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC402-62 D Development gamma calculation error: LD unlit (C)

SC402-63 D Development gamma calculation error: LD unlit (M)

SC402-64 D Development gamma calculation error: LD unlit (Y)

Unable to draw gradation pattern

Details:
This SC is issued when the potential sensor fails to detect the gradation
pattern created during process control.

• LD unlit

• Check the LD system and electric components.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC403-01 C Development Start Voltage (Vk) High Error (K)

SC403-02 C Development Start Voltage (Vk) High Error (C)

SC403-03 C Development Start Voltage (Vk) High Error (M)

SC403-04 C Development Start Voltage (Vk) High Error (Y)

Development Start Voltage (Vk) > 300 [-V]

Details:
This SC is issued when the development start voltage measured during
process control exceeded 300[-V].

• Toner density error

• Replace the developer.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC404-01 C Development Start Voltage (Vk) Low Error (K)

SC404-02 C Development Start Voltage (Vk) Low Error (C)

SC404-03 C Development Start Voltage (Vk) Low Error (M)

SC404-04 C Development Start Voltage (Vk) Low Error (Y)

1077
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Development Start Voltage (Vk) < 300 [-V]

Details:
This SC is issued when the development start voltage measured during
process control was smaller than 300[-V].

• Toner density error

• Condensation

• Replace the developer.

• If condensation has formed, wait a while and repeat process
control.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC410-01 C Residual Voltage (Vr) Detection Error (K)

SC410-02 C Residual Voltage (Vr) Detection Error (C)

SC410-03 C Residual Voltage (Vr) Detection Error (M)

SC410-04 C Residual Voltage (Vr) Detection Error (Y)

Residual Voltage (Vr) > 200[-V]

Details:
This SC is issued when the residual voltage measured duringprocess
control exceeded 200 [-V].

• Toner density error

• Condensation

• Replace the developer.

• If condensation has formed, wait a while and repeat process
control.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC411-01 C Charge potential (Vd) Adjustment Error (K)

SC411-02 C Charge potential (Vd) Adjustment Error (C)

SC411-03 C Charge potential (Vd) Adjustment Error (M)

1078
 Service Call 400-498

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC411-04 C Charge potential (Vd) Adjustment Error (Y)

Failed to adjust the DC charge bias to the target range: Vd*± 8V.
Details:
This SC is issued when the machine fails to adjust the DC charge bias to
the target range: Vd*± 8V during process contol.

• Charge roller dirty

• Replace the charge roller.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC412-01 C LD input current (Vpl) Adjustment Error (K)

SC412-02 C LD input current (Vpl) Adjustment Error (C)

SC412-03 C LD input current (Vpl) Adjustment Error (M)

SC412-04 C LD input current (Vpl) Adjustment Error (Y)

Failed to adjust the LD power to the target range: Vpl*± 5V.

Details:
This SC is issued when the machine fails to adjust the LD power to the
target range: Vpl*± 5V during process contol.

• OPC drum deteriorated (Filming etc.)

• Charge roller dirty

• Replace the OPC drum.

• Replace the charge roller.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC421-01 C OPC home position signal detection error (K)

SC421-02 C OPC home position signal detection error (C)

SC421-03 C OPC home position signal detection error (M)

SC421-04 C OPC home position signal detection error (Y)

1079
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Failed to detect the home position signal within specified time.

• Home position sensor defective/Loose connection/Harness

broken/Connecter disconnected
• Home position sensor smudged

• Check the home position sensor connector.

• Check the home position sensor harness.
• Replace the home position sensor if it is found to be defective.
• Check the sensor for smudges. Blow it with air and check again.

SC300/400 (Engine: Transfer/Separation, Cleaning etc.)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Black drum drive FF control error.

Error detected by the TDCU.

If a command sent from the TDCU indicates an error, the engine issues an
SC.
ASAP command: 0x58_0x08

• Black drum motor defective

• Black sensor connector disconnected or harness broken
SC390-00 C
• Black drum encoder sensor defective
• Black drum encoder smudged or defective

• Replace the black drum encoder sensor.

• Replace the black drum encoder.
• Replace the black drum drive unit.
• Replace the black drum motor.
• Reconnect the connector or replace the harness.

1080
 Service Call 400-498

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Cyan drum drive FF control error.

Error detected by the TDCU.

If a command sent from the TDCU indicates an error, the engine issues an
SC.
ASAP command: 0x58_0x02

• Cyan drum motor defective

• Cyan sensor connector disconnected or harness broken
SC391-00 C
• Cyan drum encoder sensor defective
• Cyan drum encoder smudged or defective

• Replace the cyan drum encoder sensor.

• Replace the cyan drum encoder.
• Replace the cyan drum drive unit.
• Replace the cyan drum motor.
• Reconnect the connector or replace the harness.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Magenta drum drive FF control error.

Error detected by the TDCU.

If a command sent from the TDCU indicates an error, the engine issues an
SC.
ASAP command: 0x58_0x04

• Magenta drum motor defective

• Magenta sensor connector disconnected or harness broken
SC392-00 C
• Magenta drum encoder sensor defective
• Magenta drum encoder smudged or defective

• Replace the magenta drum encoder sensor.

• Replace the magenta drum encoder.
• Replace the magenta drum drive unit.
• Replace the magenta drum motor.
• Reconnect the connector or replace the harness.

1081
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Yellow drum drive FF control error.

Error detected by the TDCU.

If a command sent from the TDCU indicates an error, the engine issues an
SC.
ASAP command: 0x58_0x01

• Yellow drum motor defective

• Yellow sensor connector disconnected or harness broken
SC393-00 C
• Yellow drum encoder sensor defective
• Yellow drum encoder smudged or defective

• Replace the yellow drum encoder sensor.

• Replace the yellow drum encoder.
• Replace the yellow drum drive unit.
• Replace the yellow drum motor.
• Reconnect the connector or replace the harness.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC440-01 D Image Transfer Power Pack Voltage Leak (K)

SC440-02 D Image Transfer Power Pack Voltage Leak (C)

SC440-03 D Image Transfer Power Pack Voltage Leak (M)

SC440-04 D Image Transfer Power Pack Voltage Leak (Y)

1082
 Service Call 400-498

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

An interrupt checks the status of the power pack every 10 ms. This SC is
issued if a problem exists with 50 consecutive samplings (500 ms).
Details:
SC issued when the image transfer power pack output current is leaking.
The IOB checks for SC signals as described above.

• Image transfer power pack output current is leaking.

Remove the high voltage cable from the output terminal of the image
transfer power pack and check the following items.
• PWM signal check
If signal is fixed during image transfer, replace the cable or the IOB.
• Image transfer power pack output check
If output is fixed during image transfer, replace the power pack.
If output is normal during image transfer, replace the high voltage
cable, ITB or the transfer roller.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC440-11 D Image Transfer Power Pack Error (low output) (K)

SC440-12 D Image Transfer Power Pack Error (low output) (C)

SC440-13 D Image Transfer Power Pack Error (low output) (M)

SC440-14 D Image Transfer Power Pack Error (low output) (Y)

The transfer roller resistance level was "R-3" (detected voltage was lower
than 0.1kV).

• Image transfer power pack defective

• Problem with input harness to the image transfer power pack (loose
connection, harness broken, or connector disconnected).

• Fix or replace the image transfer power pack.

• Check the input harness and connector of the image transfer power
pack.

1083
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC442
SC442-00 D ITB Lift Error
RTB 168
Even though the ITB lift motor rotates, the ITB lift sensor failed to detect the
specified sensor feeler status within specified time.
Details:
• During home-positioning (operation for fixing the separated status)
(separation movement)
The sensor failed to detect the transition from “feeler present” to
“feeler absent” (separation movement) within 2000 msec from the
start of ITB lift motor rotation.
• During normal contact/separation movement (printing/process
control/MUSIC/forced toner consumption)
Contact movement:
The sensor failed to detect the transition from “feeler absent” to
“feeler present” (contact) within 2000 msec from the start of ITB lift
motor rotation.
Separation movement:
The sensor failed to detect the transition from “feeler present” to
“feeler absent” (separation) within 2000 msec from the start of ITB
lift motor rotation.

1084
 Service Call 400-498

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• During contact/separation movement under special conditions

(paper jam, paper end etc.)
Separation movement:
The sensor failed to detect the transition from “feeler present” to
“feeler absent” (separation) within 2000 msec from the start of ITB
lift motor rotation.
Detection timing: During contact/separation movement
Detection interval: 2msec or more

• Sensor smudged
• Motor/sensor defective
• Harness broken or problem with connection (such as a disconnected
connector)

• If smudged: cleaning
• If defective or broken: replacement
• Problem with connection: reconnection

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC443-01 C Image transfer roller end-of-life (K)

SC443-02 C Image transfer roller end-of-life (C)

SC443-03 C Image transfer roller end-of-life (M)

SC443-04 C Image transfer roller end-of-life (Y)

1085
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Resistance level of the image transfer roller was "R+3" during image
transfer voltage detection.

• Image transfer roller resistance increased through time (Roller end-

of-life)
• Connection fault between the image transfer power pack and the
image transfer roller (High voltage harness broken, connector
disconnected, or contact failure of image transfer roller bushes, etc.)
• Image transfer power pack defective

• Replace the image transfer roller.

• Reconnect or replace the high voltage harness or the unit.
• Fix or replace the image transfer power pack.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

ITB unit control error: driven shaft FB

Error detected by the TDCU.

If a command sent from the TDCU indicates an error, the engine issues an
SC.
ASAP command: 0x58_0x40

• ITB motor defective

• ITB unit set error
• Connector disconnected or harness broken
SC445-01 C
• Driven shaft encoder sensor defective
• Driven shaft encoder smudged or damaged

• Replace the ITB unit.

• Replace the ITB motor.
• Set the ITB unit again.
• Replace the driven shaft encoder.
• Reconnect the connectors
• Replace the harness.

1086
 Service Call 400-498

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

ITB unit control error: driven shaft eccentricity correction control

Error detected by the TDCU.

If a command sent from the TDCU indicates an error, the engine issues an
SC.
ASAP command: 0x58_0x20

• ITB motor defective

• ITB unit set error
• Connector disconnected or harness broken
• Driven shaft encoder sensor defective
• Driven shaft encoder smudged or damaged
SC445-02 C • Drive shaft encoder sensor defective
• Drive shaft encoder smudged or damaged

• Replace the ITB unit.

• Replace the ITB motor.
• Set the ITB unit again.
• Replace the driven shaft encoder sensor.
• Replace the driven shaft encoder.
• Replace the drive shaft encoder sensor.
• Replace the drive shaft encoder.
• Reconnect the connectors or replace the harness.
• Replace the ITB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC445-03 C ITB unit control error: dancing control

1087
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Error detected by the TDCU.

If a command sent from the TDCU indicates an error, the engine issues an
SC.
ASAP command: 0x58_0x10

• ITB motor defective

• ITB unit set error
• Connector disconnected or harness broken
• Driven shaft encoder sensor defective
• Driven shaft encoder smudged or damaged
• Drive shaft encoder sensor defective
• Drive shaft encoder smudged or damaged

• Replace the ITB unit.

• Replace the ITB motor.
• Set the ITB unit again.
• Replace the driven shaft encoder sensor.
• Replace the driven shaft encoder.
• Replace the drive shaft encoder sensor.
• Replace the drive shaft encoder.
• Reconnect the connectors or replace the harness.
• Replace the ITB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC446-01 D ITB: Lock: Encoder 1 error

SC446-02 D ITB: Lock: Encoder 2 error

SC446-03 D ITB: Lock: Encoder 1/2 error

SC446-04 D ITB: Lock: Hole error

SC446-05 D ITB: Lock: Overload error

1088
 Service Call 400-498

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Error detected by the TDCU.

If a command sent from the TDCU indicates an error, the engine issues an
SC.
ASAP command: Motor lock detection setting value (engine to TDCU):
0x5B
See table below for ASAP commands notifying SC detection.
Details:
TDCU Motor lock signal criteria:
• Drum motor
High if the motor speed is not within the range of target value ±
6.25%.
Low if the motor speed is within the range of target value ± 6.25%.
• ITB drive motor, PTR Motor
High if the motor speed is not within the range of target value ±
6.25%.
Low if the motor speed is within the range of target value ± 6.25%.
Target value:
If the default motor speed was adjusted using the SP, the adjusted value is
used as the target value.
Specification:
When the motor is on, each lock signal is checked every 100
milliseconds. If the High status is detected 20 times consecutively, the
machine determines that the motor is not running correctly. The machine
issues an SC and stops the motor.

1089
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• Motor defective, connector disconnected, harness broken, IOB

defective, unit torque increased.
• ITB drive R sensor smudged, ITB driven R sensor smudged, ITB drive
R sensor defective, ITB drive R sensor defective
• ITB drive R sensor connector not set correctly, ITB driven R sensor
connector not set correctly, harness broken

• Replace the motor / reconnect the connector / replace the

harness / replace the IOB / replace the unit / replace the driven
unit.
• Clean the sensor / replace the sensor.
• Reconnect the sensor connector.
• Check the sensor harness.

ASAP Command: SC detection notification (TDCU to Engine): (SC446-01 to SC446-05)

SC No. ASAP Command: SC detection notification

0x55_0x40_0x01
0x55_0x40_0x02
SC446-01
0x55_0x40_0x03
0x55_0x40_0x04

0x55_0x40_0x05
0x55_0x40_0x0a
SC446-02
0x55_0x40_0x0f
0x55_0x40_0x14

1090
 Service Call 400-498

SC No. ASAP Command: SC detection notification

0x55_0x40_0x06
0x55_0x40_0x07
0x55_0x40_0x08
0x55_0x40_0x09
0x55_0x40_0x0b
0x55_0x40_0x0c
0x55_0x40_0x0d
0x55_0x40_0x0e
SC446-03
0x55_0x40_0x10
0x55_0x40_0x11
0x55_0x40_0x12
0x55_0x40_0x13
0x55_0x40_0x15
0x55_0x40_0x16
0x55_0x40_0x17
0x55_0x40_0x18

0x55_0x40_0x29
0x55_0x40_0x2a
SC446-04
0x55_0x40_0x2b
0x55_0x40_0x2c

SC446-05 0x55_0x40_0x34

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC450-01 D ITB Power Pack error (leak): DC

SC450-02 D ITB Power Pack error (leak): AC

1091
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

An interrupt checks the status of the power pack every 10 ms. This SC is
issued if a problem exists with 50 consecutive samplings (500 ms).
Details:
SC issued when the ITB power pack output current is leaking.
The IOB checks for SC signals as described above. Distinguished
between DC and AC.

• ITB power pack output current is leaking.

Remove the high voltage cable from the output terminal of the ITB power
pack and check the following items.
• PWM signal check
If signal is fixed during image transfer, replace the cable or the IOB.
• ITB power pack output check
If output is fixed during image transfer, replace the power pack.
If output is normal during image transfer, replace the high voltage
cable, ITB or the transfer roller.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

ITB Power Pack Error (low output)

The ITB roller resistance level was "R-3" (detected voltage was lower than
0.1kV).

• ITB power pack defective

SC450-11 D
• Problem with input harness to the ITB power pack (loose connection,
harness broken, or connector disconnected).

• Fix or replace the ITB power pack.

• Check the input harness and connector of the ITB power pack.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC452-00 D PTR Lift Error

1092
 Service Call 400-498

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Even though the PTR lift motor rotates, the PTR lift sensor failed to detect
the specified sensor feeler status within specified time.
Details:
• During home-positioning (operation for fixing the separated status)
(separation movement)
The sensor failed to detect the transition from “feeler present” to
“feeler absent” (separation) within 2000 msec from the start of PTR
lift motor rotation.
• During normal contact/separation movement (printing/process
control/MUSIC/forced toner consumption)
Contact movement:
The sensor failed to detect the transition from “feeler absent” to
“feeler present” (contact) within 2000 msec from the start of PTR lift
motor rotation.
Separation movement:
The sensor failed to detect the transition from “feeler present” to
“feeler absent” (separation) within 2000 msec from the start of PTR
lift motor rotation.

• During contact/separation movement under special conditions

(paper jam, paper end etc.)
Separation movement:
The sensor failed to detect the transition from “feeler present” to
“feeler absent” (separation) within 2000 msec from the start of PTR
lift motor rotation.
Detection timing: During contact/separation movement
Detection interval: 2msec or less

• Sensor smudged
• Motor/sensor defective
• Harness broken or problem with connection (such as a disconnected
connector)

• If smudged: cleaning
• If defective or broken: replacement
• Problem with connection: reconnection

1093
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Paper Transfer Roller end-of-life

The paper transfer roller resistance level was "R+3".

• Paper transfer roller resistance increased through time (Roller end-

of-life)
• Connection fault between the paper transfer power pack and the
SC453-00 C paper transfer roller (High voltage harness broken, connector
disconnected, or contact failure of paper transfer roller bushes, etc.)
• Paper transfer power pack defective

• Replace the paper transfer roller.

• Reconnect or replace the high voltage harness or the unit.
• Fix or replace the paper transfer power pack.

1094
 Service Call 400-498

SC460 SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

D135 RTB 48
D135 RTB 116 Separation Power Pack Error (Leak)
D137 RTB 64
An interrupt checks the status of the power pack every 10 ms. This SC is
issued if a problem exists with 50 consecutive samplings (500 ms).
Details:
SC issued when the separation power pack output current is leaking.
The IOB checks for SC signals as described above.

• Image transfer power pack AC output is leaking.

Check if the drawer unit is closed correctly using the following procedure.
1. Turn off the machine power and pull out the drawer unit.
SC460-00 D 2. Close the drawer unit completely and turn on the machine power.
3. Make two or three copies and confirm the error message has
disappeared.
Remove the high voltage cable from the output terminal of the separation
power pack and check the following items.
• PWM signal check
If signal is fixed during image transfer, replace the cable or the IOB.
• Separation power pack output check
If output is fixed during image transfer, replace the power pack.
If output is normal during image transfer, replace the high voltage
cable or the quenching needle.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC465-01 D PTR motor: Lock: Encoder 1 error

SC465-02 D PTR motor (K) Lock: Encoder 2 error

SC465-03 D PTR motor (K) Lock: Encoder 1/2 error

SC465-04 D PTR motor (K) Lock: Hole error

SC465-05 D PTR motor (K) Lock: Overload error

1095
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Error detected by the TDCU.

If a command sent from the TDCU indicates an error, the engine issues an
SC.
ASAP command: Motor lock detection setting value (engine to TDCU):
0x5B
See table below for ASAP commands notifying SC detection.
Details:
TDCU Motor lock signal criteria:
• Drum motor
High if the motor speed is not within the range of target value ±
6.25%.
Low if the motor speed is within the range of target value ± 6.25%.
• ITB drive motor, PTR Motor
High if the motor speed is not within the range of target value ±
6.25%.
Low if the motor speed is within the range of target value ± 6.25%.
Target value:
If the default motor speed was adjusted using the SP, the adjusted value is
used as the target value.
Specification:
When the motor is on, each lock signal is checked every 100
milliseconds. If the High status is detected 20 times consecutively, the
machine determines that the motor is not running correctly. The machine
issues an SC and stops the motor.

1096
 Service Call 400-498

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• Motor defective, connector disconnected, harness broken, IOB

defective, unit torque increased.
• PTR sensor smudged or defective
• PTR sensor connector not set correctly, harness broken

• Replace the motor / reconnect the connector / replace the

harness / replace the IOB / replace the unit / replace the driven
unit.
• Clean the sensor / replace the sensor.
• Reconnect the sensor connector.
• Check the sensor harness.

ASAP Command: SC detection notification (TDCU to Engine): (SC465-01 to SC465-05)

SC No. ASAP Command: SC detection notification

0x55_0x80_0x01
0x55_0x80_0x02
SC465-01
0x55_0x80_0x03
0x55_0x80_0x04

0x55_0x80_0x05
0x55_0x80_0x0a
SC465-02
0x55_0x80_0x0f
0x55_0x80_0x14

1097
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. ASAP Command: SC detection notification

0x55_0x80_0x06
0x55_0x80_0x07
0x55_0x80_0x08
0x55_0x80_0x09
0x55_0x80_0x0b
0x55_0x80_0x0c
0x55_0x80_0x0d
0x55_0x80_0x0e
SC465-03
0x55_0x80_0x10
0x55_0x80_0x11
0x55_0x80_0x12
0x55_0x80_0x13
0x55_0x80_0x15
0x55_0x80_0x16
0x55_0x80_0x17
0x55_0x80_0x18

0x55_0x80_0x29
0x55_0x80_0x2a
SC446-04
0x55_0x80_0x2b
0x55_0x80_0x2c

SC446-05 0x55_0x80_0x34

1098
 Service Call 400-498

SC480
D137 RTB 72
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Drum cleaning motor: Bk: Lock

Error detected by the TDCU.

If a command sent from the TDCU indicates an error, the engine issues an
SC.
ASAP command: Motor lock detection setting value (engine to TDCU):
0x5B
ASAP command: SC detection notification (TDCU to engine):
0x57_0x08
Details:
When the motor is on, each lock signal is checked every 100
milliseconds. If the High status is detected 20 times consecutively, the
machine determines that the motor is not running correctly. The machine
issues an SC and stops the motor.
SC480-00 D
• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Harness broken
• IOB defective
• Unit torque increased.

• Replace the motor.

• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the IOB.
• Replace the unit.
• Replace the driven unit.

1099
 5. Troubleshooting

SC481 SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

D137 RTB 72
Drum cleaning motor: C: Lock

Error detected by the TDCU.

If a command sent from the TDCU indicates an error, the engine issues an
SC.
ASAP command: Motor lock detection setting value (engine to TDCU):
0x5B
ASAP command: SC detection notification (TDCU to engine):
0x57_0x02
Details:
When the motor is on, each lock signal is checked every 100
milliseconds. If the High status is detected 20 times consecutively, the
machine determines that the motor is not running correctly. The machine
issues an SC and stops the motor.
SC481-00 D
• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Harness broken
• IOB defective
• Unit torque increased.

• Replace the motor.

• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the IOB.
• Replace the unit.
• Replace the driven unit.

1100
 Service Call 400-498

SC482
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
D137 RTB 72

Drum cleaning motor: M: Lock

Error detected by the TDCU.

If a command sent from the TDCU indicates an error, the engine issues an
SC.
ASAP command: Motor lock detection setting value (engine to TDCU):
0x5B
ASAP command: SC detection notification (TDCU to engine):
0x57_0x04
Details:
When the motor is on, each lock signal is checked every 100
milliseconds. If the High status is detected 20 times consecutively, the
machine determines that the motor is not running correctly. The machine
issues an SC and stops the motor.
SC482-00 D
• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Harness broken
• IOB defective
• Unit torque increased.

• Replace the motor.

• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the IOB.
• Replace the unit.
• Replace the driven unit.

1101
 5. Troubleshooting

SC483
D137 RTB 72 SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Drum cleaning motor: Y: Lock

Error detected by the TDCU.

If a command sent from the TDCU indicates an error, the engine issues an
SC.
ASAP command: Motor lock detection setting value (engine to TDCU):
0x5B
ASAP command: SC detection notification (TDCU to engine):
0x57_0x01
Details:
When the motor is on, each lock signal is checked every 100
milliseconds. If the High status is detected 20 times consecutively, the
machine determines that the motor is not running correctly. The machine
issues an SC and stops the motor.
SC483-00 D
• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Harness broken
• IOB defective
• Unit torque increased.

• Replace the motor.

• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the IOB.
• Replace the unit.
• Replace the driven unit.

1102
 Service Call 400-498

SC486 SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

D135 RTB 135
D137 RTB 173 Bottle Waste Toner Lock Detection Error

Signals sent from the bottle waste toner motor lock sensor were either ON
or OFF 50 times consecutively.

• Physical obstruction is blocking waste toner transport path

• Bottle waste toner motor defective
• Sensor defective
• Harness broken
SC486-00 D
• Connection fault

• Physical obstruction is blocking waste toner transport path: Replace

or clean the waste toner transport section.
• Bottle waste toner motor defective: Replace the motor.
• Sensor defective: Replace the sensor.
• Harness broken: Replace the harness.
• Connection fault: Reconnect it.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Machine Waste Toner Lock Detection Error

The intervals of signals sent from the machine waste toner lock sensor
(normally 64.68msec) became either less than 30msec or more than
81msec.

• Physical obstruction is blocking waste toner transport path

• Machine waste toner motor defective
SC488-00 D • Sensor defective
• Harness broken
• Connection fault

• Physical obstruction is blocking waste toner transport path: Replace

or clean the waste toner transport section.
• Sensor defective or harness broken: Replace parts.
• Connection fault: Reconnect it.

1103
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

MUSIC Sensor Error

MUSIC failed while power was on.

Details:
• TM sensor sampling error
• Sensor LED adjustment abnormal
• Number of patches abnormal
• ITB scratched
• Main scan registration abnormal
• Sub scan registration abnormal

SC496-00 C • Main scan magnification abnormal

• Main scan magnification error diffusion abnormal

• ITB scratched or smudged

• Sensor smudged or defective
• Pattern density abnormal

• Cycle the machine off/on.

• Replace the TM sensor.
• Replace the ITB.
• Process control
• Cleaning

1104
 Service Call 400-498

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Temperature/Humidity Sensor Error (PCU)

One of the following occurred.

• The temperature sensor output was less than 0.5V or more than
2.8V for three seconds (one second x 3), indicating a problem with
the temperature sensor.
• The humidity sensor output was more than 2.4V for three seconds
(one second x 3), indicating a problem with the humidity sensor.
Details:
Detection is repeated after power off/on.
SC497-00 C If either of temperature/humidity sensors works correctly, the working
sensor will be used even after the SC is issued.
The machine continues working with the assumption that the temperature
is 23 degrees centigrade (if there is a problem with the temperature
sensor) and/or the humidity is 50% (if there is a problem with the
humidity sensor).

• Connector disconnected or harness broken

• Sensor defective

• Connector disconnected or harness broken: Revert connection.

• Sensor defective: Replace the sensor.

1105
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Temperature/Humidity Sensor Error (Main)

One of the following occurred.

• The temperature sensor output was less than 0.5V or more than
2.8V for three seconds (one second x 3), indicating a problem with
the temperature sensor.
• The humidity sensor output was more than 2.4V for three seconds
(one second x 3), indicating a problem with the humidity sensor.
Details:
Detection is repeated after power off/on.
SC498-00 C If either of temperature/humidity sensors works correctly, the working
sensor will be used even after the SC is issued.
The machine continues working with the assumption that the temperature
is 23 degrees centigrade (if there is a problem with the temperature
sensor) and/or the humidity is 50% (if there is a problem with the
humidity sensor)

• Connector disconnected or harness broken

• Sensor defective

• Connector disconnected or harness broken: Revert connection.

• Sensor defective: Replace the sensor.

1106
 Service Call 501-595

Service Call 501-595

SC500 (Engine: Paper transport 1: Paper Feed, Duplex, Transport)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

1st Tray Lift Error (A3 extended tray)

1st tray lift motor lift error was detected.

If detected for the first or second time: User is instructed to set paper
again.
If detected for the third time: SC displayed (only the corresponding tray)
The count of detections is reset when successful operation is detected and
at power off/on.

• 1st tray lift motor disconnected/harness broken/defective

• 1st tray lift sensor disconnected/defective/smudged
• Paper end sensor disconnected/defective/smudged
• Paper overloaded
SC501-01 B
• Foreign object (such as a piece of paper) is stuck between the paper
tray and the tray lift motor.
• Paper set incorrectly.

• Load paper again.

• Check the harness of the tray lift sensor,/reconnect the sensor
connector/clean the sensor/replace the sensor/replace the 1st
tray.
• Check the harness of the paper end sensor/reconnect the sensor
connector/clean the sensor/replace the sensor.
• Replace the 1st tray lift motor/reconnect the connector/replace the
harness/replace the PFB/Replace the right tray (of the tandem
tray)/replace the driven unit.

1107
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

1st Tray Lowering Error (A3 extended tray)

1st tray lift motor lower error was detected.

If detected for the first to fourth time: User is instructed to set paper again.
If detected for the fifth time: SC displayed (only the corresponding tray)
The count of detections is reset when successful operation is detected and
at power off/on

• 1st tray lift motor disconnected/harness broken/defective

• 1st tray lift sensor disconnected/defective/smudged
• Paper end sensor disconnected/defective/smudged
• Paper overloaded
SC501-02 B • Foreign object (such as a piece of paper) is stuck between the paper
tray and the tray lift motor.
• Paper set incorrectly.

• Load paper again.

• Check the harness of the tray lift sensor,/reconnect the sensor
connector/clean the sensor/replace the sensor/replace the 1st
tray.
• Check the harness of the paper end sensor/reconnect the sensor
connector/clean the sensor/replace the sensor.
• Replace the 1st tray lift motor/reconnect the connector/replace the
harness/replace the PFB/Replace the right tray (of the tandem
tray)/replace the driven unit.

1108
 Service Call 501-595

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

1st Tray Lift Error (Tandem tray/tandem LCT)

1st tray lift motor lift error was detected.

If detected for the first or second time: User is instructed to set paper
again.
If detected for the third time: SC displayed (only the corresponding tray)
The count of detections is reset when successful operation is detected and
at power off/on.

• 1st tray lift motor disconnected/harness broken/defective

• 1st tray lift sensor disconnected/defective/smudged
• Paper end sensor disconnected/defective/smudged
• Paper overloaded
SC501-11 B
• Foreign object (such as a piece of paper) is stuck between the paper
tray and the tray lift motor.
• Paper set incorrectly.

• Load paper again.

• Check the harness of the tray lift sensor,/reconnect the sensor
connector/clean the sensor/replace the sensor/replace the 1st
tray.
• Check the harness of the paper end sensor/reconnect the sensor
connector/clean the sensor/replace the sensor.
• Replace the 1st tray lift motor/reconnect the connector/replace the
harness/replace the PFB/Replace the right tray (of the tandem
tray)/replace the driven unit.

1109
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

1st Tray Lowering Error (Tandem tray/Tandem LCT)

1st tray lift motor lower error was detected.

If detected for the first to fourth time: User is instructed to set paper again.
If detected for the fifth time: SC displayed (only the corresponding tray)
The count of detections is reset when successful operation is detected and
at power off/on

• 1st tray lift motor disconnected/harness broken/defective

• 1st tray lift sensor disconnected/defective/smudged
• Paper end sensor disconnected/defective/smudged
• Paper overloaded
SC501-12 B • Foreign object (such as a piece of paper) is stuck between the paper
tray and the tray lift motor.
• Paper set incorrectly.

• Load paper again.

• Check the harness of the tray lift sensor,/reconnect the sensor
connector/clean the sensor/replace the sensor/replace the 1st
tray.
• Check the harness of the paper end sensor/reconnect the sensor
connector/clean the sensor/replace the sensor.
• Replace the 1st tray lift motor/reconnect the connector/replace the
harness/replace the PFB/Replace the right tray (of the tandem
tray)/replace the driven unit.

1110
 Service Call 501-595
SC501-13
D135 RTB 76
D137 RTB 207

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

1st Tray Lower Limit Error (Tandem tray/Tandem LCT)

1st tray lift motor lower limit error was detected.

If detected for the first or second time: User is instructed to set paper
again.
If detected for the third time: SC displayed (only the corresponding tray)
The count of detections is reset when successful operation is detected and
at power off/on.

• 1st tray lift motor disconnected/harness broken/defective

• 1st tray lift sensor disconnected/defective/smudged
• Paper end sensor disconnected/defective/smudged
• Paper overloaded
SC501-13 B
• Foreign object (such as a piece of paper) is stuck between the paper
tray and the tray lift motor.
• Paper set incorrectly.

• Load paper again.

• Check the harness of the tray lift sensor,/reconnect the sensor
connector/clean the sensor/replace the sensor/replace the 1st
tray.
• Check the harness of the paper end sensor/reconnect the sensor
connector/clean the sensor/replace the sensor.
• Replace the 1st tray lift motor/reconnect the connector/replace the
harness/replace the PFB/Replace the right tray (of the tandem
tray)/replace the driven unit.

1111
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Tandem Transport Fence Error

Transport motor return error detected.

Transport motor home position error detected.
If detected for the first or second time: User is instructed to set paper
again.
If detected for the third time: User is instructed to set paper again and SC
is recorded but not displayed.
The count of detections is reset when successful operation is detected and
at power off/on.

• Transport motor disconnected/defective

• Return sensor disconnected/defective/smudged
SC501-14 C • Home position sensor disconnected/defective/smudged
• Paper overloaded
• Foreign object (such as a piece of paper) is stuck between the paper
tray and the transport motor.
• Paper set incorrectly.

• Replace the transport motor/reconnect the connector/replace the

harness/replace the PFB/Replace the left tray/replace the driven
unit.
• Check the harness of the return sensor/reconnect the sensor
connector/clean the sensor/replace the sensor.
• Check the harness of the home position sensor/reconnect the sensor
connector/clean the sensor/replace the sensor.
• Load paper again.

1112
 Service Call 501-595

SC502 SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

D135 RTB 52
2nd Tray Lift Error

2nd tray lift motor lift error was detected.

If detected for the first or second time: User is instructed to set paper
again.
If detected for the third time: SC displayed (only the corresponding tray)
The count of detections is reset when successful operation is detected and
at power off/on.

• 2nd tray lift motor disconnected/harness broken/defective

• 2nd tray lift sensor disconnected/defective/smudged
SC502-01 B
• Paper overloaded
• Foreign object (such as a piece of paper) is stuck between the paper
tray and the tray lift motor.
• Paper set incorrectly.

• Load paper again.

• Check the harness of the tray lift sensor,/reconnect the sensor
connector/clean the sensor/replace the 2nd tray.
• Replace the 2nd tray lift motor/reconnect the connector/replace
the harness/replace the PFB/Replace the 2nd tray/replace the
driven unit.

1113
 5. Troubleshooting

SC502 SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

D135 RTB 52
2nd Tray Lowering Error

Tray lift motor lower error was detected.

If detected for the first to fourth time: User is instructed to set paper again.
If detected for the fifth time: SC displayed (only the corresponding tray)
The count of detections is reset when successful operation is detected and
at power off/on

• 2nd tray lift motor disconnected/harness broken/defective

• 2nd tray lift sensor disconnected/defective/smudged
SC502-02 B • Paper overloaded
• Foreign object (such as a piece of paper) is stuck between the paper
tray and the tray lift motor.
• Paper set incorrectly.

• Load paper again.

• Check the harness of the tray lift sensor,/reconnect the sensor
connector/clean the sensor/replace the 2nd tray.
• Replace the 2nd tray lift motor/reconnect the connector/replace
the harness/replace the PFB/Replace the 2nd tray/replace the
driven unit.

1114
 Service Call 501-595

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC503
D135 RTB 52 3rd Tray Lift Error

3rd tray lift motor lift error was detected.

If detected for the first or second time: User is instructed to set paper
again.
If detected for the third time: SC displayed (only the corresponding tray)
The count of detections is reset when successful operation is detected and
at power off/on.

• 3rd tray lift motor disconnected/harness broken/defective

• 3rd tray lift sensor disconnected/defective/smudged
SC503-01 B
• Paper overloaded
• Foreign object (such as a piece of paper) is stuck between the paper
tray and the tray lift motor.
• Paper set incorrectly.

• Load paper again.

• Check the harness of the tray lift sensor,/reconnect the sensor
connector/clean the sensor/replace the 3rd tray.
• Replace the 3rd tray lift motor/reconnect the connector/replace the
harness/replace the PFB/Replace the 3rd tray/replace the driven
unit.

1115
 5. Troubleshooting

SC503 SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

D135 RTB 52
3rd Tray Lowering Error

Tray lift motor lower error was detected.

If detected for the first to fourth time: User is instructed to set paper again.
If detected for the fifth time: SC displayed (only the corresponding tray)
The count of detections is reset when successful operation is detected and
at power off/on

• 3rd tray lift motor disconnected/harness broken/defective

• 3rd tray lift sensor disconnected/defective/smudged
SC503-02 B • Paper overloaded
• Foreign object (such as a piece of paper) is stuck between the paper
tray and the tray lift motor.
• Paper set incorrectly.

• Load paper again.

• Check the harness of the tray lift sensor,/reconnect the sensor
connector/clean the sensor/replace the 3rd tray.
• Replace the 3rd tray lift motor/reconnect the connector/replace the
harness/replace the PFB/Replace the 3rd tray/replace the driven
unit.

SC504
D135 RTB 52

1116
 Service Call 501-595

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

LCT Tray Error (Lift Sensor Error): D709

The following status was detected 5 times consecutively: The upper limit
sensor did not become on before pick-up solenoid is on at the start of tray
initialization.

• Pick-up solenoid defective/connecter disconnected

• Upper limit sensor defective/connecter disconnected
SC505-01 B
• Related harness broken
• PCB defective

• Replace or reconnect the pick-up solenoid.

• Replace or reconnect the lift sensor.
• Replace the corresponding harness.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

LCT Tray Error (Lift Timeout): D709

During Tray initialization, the tray bottom plate was lifted but the upper
limit sensor did not detect it after a specified time (30 seconds).

• Upper limit motor defective/connecter disconnected

• Upper limit sensor defective/connecter disconnected
SC505-02 B • Related harness broken
• PCB defective

• Replace or reconnect the lift motor.

• Replace or reconnect the upper limit sensor.
• Replace the corresponding harness.
• Replace the PCB.

1117
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

LCT Tray Error (Lowering Timeout): D709

• During Tray initialization, the tray bottom plate was lowered for
position check but the upper limit sensor was still on or none of
lower limit sensor and paper sensors 1 to 4 became on after a
specified time (30 seconds).
• When paper has run out or when the lowering switch was pressed,
the tray bottom plate was lowered but neither the lift sensor nor the
lower limit sensor became on after a specified time (30 seconds).

• Lift motor defective/connecter disconnected

• Upper limit sensor defective/connecter disconnected
• Lift sensor defective/connecter disconnected
SC505-03 B • Lower limit sensor defective/connecter disconnected
• Either of paper sensors 1 to 4 defective/connecter disconnected
• Related harness broken
• PCB defective

• Replace or reconnect the lift motor.

• Replace or reconnect the upper limit sensor.
• Replace or reconnect the lift sensor.
• Replace or reconnect the lower limit sensor.
• Replace or reconnect the paper sensors 1 to 4.
• Replace the corresponding harness.
• Replace the PCB.

1118
 Service Call 501-595

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

LCT Tray Error (Paper Overload Error): D709

During tray initialization, the upper limit sensor and the lower limit sensor
were both on for 5 times consecutively.

• Paper overloaded.
• Upper limit sensor defective/connecter disconnected
• Lower limit sensor defective/connecter disconnected
SC505-04 B • Related harness broken
• PCB defective

• Reduce loaded paper.

• Replace or reconnect the upper limit sensor.
• Replace or reconnect the lower limit sensor.
• Replace the corresponding harness.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

LCT Tray Error (Upper Limit Detection Error): D710

At the start of tray initialization, the upper limit sensor was detected as
being off for 5 times before the pick-up solenoid was on.

• Pick-up solenoid defective/connecter disconnected

• Upper limit sensor defective/connecter disconnected
SC505-11 B • Related harness broken
• PCB defective

• Replace or reconnect the pick-up solenoid.

• Replace or reconnect the upper limit sensor.
• Replace the corresponding harness.
• Replace the PCB.

1119
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

LCT Tray Error (Lift timeout): D710

During Tray initialization, the tray bottom plate was lifted but the upper
limit sensor did not detect it after a specified time (27 seconds).

• Lift motor defective/connecter disconnected

• Upper limit sensor defective/connecter disconnected
SC505-12 B • Related harness broken
• PCB defective

• Replace or reconnect the lift motor.

• Replace or reconnect the upper limit sensor.
• Replace the corresponding harness.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

LCT Tray Error (front blower fan error): D710

Started LD signal check one second after LCT front blower fan became on
and detected H level (abnormal) for 700 ms consecutively.

• Front blower fan defective/connecter disconnected

SC505-16 B • Related harness broken
• PCB defective

• Replace or reconnect the front blower fan.

• Replace the corresponding harness.
• Replace the PCB.

1120
 Service Call 501-595

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

LCT Tray Error (rear blower fan error): D710

Started LD signal check one second after LCT rear blower fan became on
and detected H level (abnormal) for 700 ms consecutively.

• Rear blower fan defective/connecter disconnected

SC505-17 B • Related harness broken
• PCB defective

• Replace or reconnect the rear blower fan.

• Replace the corresponding harness.
• Replace the PCB.

1121
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Bypass tray lift error

The bottom plate started CW but the tray upper limit sensor did not
become blocked within 3 seconds.
If detected for the first or second time: User is instructed to set paper
again.
If detected for the third time: SC displayed
The count of detections is reset when successful operation is detected and
at power off/on.

• Bypass tray upper limit sensor defective/disconnected/harness

broken
SC509-01 B • Bypass tray bottom plate lift motor defective/disconnected/harness
broken
• Circuit board (PFB) error
• Bypass tray bottom plate/bottom plate drive unit does not move e.g.
because physical obstacle (broken piece of the unit, etc.) is blocking
operation.

• Bypass tray bottom plate lift motor and bypass tray bottom plate
upper limit sensor check/cleaning/replacement/harness
reconnection/harness replacement
• Check or replace the circuit board (PFB).
• Check and/or replace the bypass tray bottom plate and bottom
plate lift drive unit.

1122
 Service Call 501-595

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Bypass tray lowering error

The bottom plate started CCW but the tray upper limit sensor did not
become non-blocked within 1.5 seconds.
If detected for the first or second time: User is instructed to set paper
again.
If detected for the third time: SC displayed
The count of detections is reset when successful operation is detected and
at power off/on.

• Bypass tray upper limit sensor defective/disconnected/harness

broken
SC509-02 B • Bypass tray bottom plate lift motor defective/disconnected/harness
broken
• Circuit board (PFB) error
• Bypass tray bottom plate/bottom plate drive unit does not move e.g.
because physical obstacle (broken piece of the unit, etc.) is blocking
operation.

• Bypass tray bottom plate lift motor and bypass tray bottom plate
upper limit sensor check/cleaning/replacement/harness
reconnection/harness replacement
• Check or replace the circuit board (PFB).
• Check and/or replace the bypass tray bottom plate and bottom
plate lift drive unit.

1123
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Bypass tray lower limit error

The bottom plate started CCW but the tray lower limit sensor did not
become blocked within 3 seconds.
If detected for the first or second time: User is instructed to set paper
again.
If detected for the third time: SC displayed
The count of detections is reset when successful operation is detected and
at power off/on.

• Bypass tray lower limit sensor defective/disconnected/harness

broken
SC509-03 B • Bypass tray bottom plate lift motor defective/disconnected/harness
broken
• Circuit board (PFB) error
• Bypass tray bottom plate/bottom plate drive unit does not move e.g.
because physical obstacle (broken piece of the unit, etc.) is blocking
operation.

• Bypass tray bottom plate lift motor and bypass tray bottom plate
lower limit sensor check/cleaning/replacement/harness
reconnection/harness replacement
• Check or replace the circuit board (PFB).
• Check and/or replace the bypass tray bottom plate and bottom
plate lift drive unit.

1124
 Service Call 501-595

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Bypass tray Paper Set Error

Both the upper limit sensor and the lower limit sensor were on when the
machine attempted to adjust the bottom plate position before starting
paper feed (at Job-In).
If detected for the first to fourth time: User is instructed to set paper again.
If detected for the fifth time: SC displayed (only the corresponding tray)
The count of detections is reset when successful operation is detected and
at power off/on.
SC509-04 B
• Bypass tray upper limit sensor defective/disconnected/harness
broken
• Circuit board (PFB) error
• Paper overloaded

• Bypass tray upper limit sensor and lower limit sensor check/
cleaning/replacement/harness reconnection/harness replacement
• Check or replace the circuit board (PFB).
• Check the paper capacity.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC520-02 C Exit Motor: Lock

SC520-03 C Duplex Inverter Entrance Motor: Lock

SC520-04 C Exit Inverter Motor: Lock

The motor error notification register is always monitored at 500 ms

intervals. When a register indicates an error five times consecutively, the
motor is assumed to be malfunctioning.

• Motor defective/connecter disconnected

• Harness broken/IOB defective
• Encoder defective
• Unit torque increased.

• Replace the motor or connector.

• Replace the harness or IOB.
• Replace the unit.

1125
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC521-01 C Duplex Inverter Motor: Lock

SC521-02 C Duplex Transport Motor: Lock

SC521-03 C Duplex Exit Motor: Lock

The motor error notification register is always monitored at 500 ms

intervals. When a register indicates an error five times consecutively, the
motor is assumed to be malfunctioning.

• Motor defective/connecter disconnected

• Harness broken/IOB defective
• Encoder defective
• Unit torque increased.

• Replace the motor or connector.

• Replace the harness or IOB.
• Replace the unit.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC522-01 C 1st Paper Feed Motor: Lock

SC522-03 C 2nd Paper Feed Motor: Lock

SC522-04 C 3rd Paper Feed Motor: Lock

The motor error notification register is always monitored at 500 ms

intervals. When a register indicates an error five times consecutively, the
motor is assumed to be malfunctioning.

• Motor defective/connecter disconnected

• Harness broken/IOB defective
• Encoder defective
• Unit torque increased.

• Replace the motor or connector.

• Replace the harness or IOB.
• Replace the unit.

1126
 Service Call 501-595

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC523-01 C 1st Transport Motor: Lock

SC523-02 C 2nd Transport Motor: Lock

SC523-03 C 3rd Transport Motor: Lock

SC523-04 C 4th Transport Motor: Lock

The motor error notification register is always monitored at 500 ms

intervals. When a register indicates an error five times consecutively, the
motor is assumed to be malfunctioning.

• Motor defective/connecter disconnected

• Harness broken/IOB defective
• Encoder defective
• Unit torque increased.

• Replace the motor or connector.

• Replace the harness or IOB.
• Replace the unit.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC524-01 C Relay Motor: Lock

SC524-02 C Registration Motor: Lock

SC524-03 C Bypass Tray Feed Motor: Lock

The motor error notification register is always monitored at 500 ms

intervals. When a register indicates an error five times consecutively, the
motor is assumed to be malfunctioning.

• Motor defective/connecter disconnected

• Harness broken/IOB defective
• Encoder defective
• Unit torque increased.

• Replace the motor or connector.

• Replace the harness or IOB.
• Replace the unit.

1127
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Drawer Unit Lock Motor Error

Sensor signal did not change for 3000 msec while the drawer lock motor
was running.

• Drawer unit lock motor defective

• Drawer unit lock sensor defective
• Connecter disconnected
SC525-01 D • Harness broken
• Circuit board defective

• Replace the drawer unit lock motor.

• Replace the drawer unit lock sensor.
• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the circuit board.

SC525-02 SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

D135 RTB 45
D137 RTB 67 Drawer Unit Handle Sensor Error

The drawer unit handle sensor was non-blocked for 90 seconds or

longer.

• Drawer unit handle sensor defective

• Connecter disconnected
SC525-02 D • Harness broken
• Circuit board defective

• Replace the drawer unit handle sensor.

• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the circuit board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC526-01 D Transport Motor 1 Rotation Error

1128
 Service Call 501-595

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC526-02 D Transport Motor 2 Rotation Error

2 seconds after motor startup, the motor lock error signal (LOCK signal)
was detected for 1200 msec or more.

• Motor defective
• Harness broken
• Circuit board defective

• Replace the motor.

• Reconnect the connector.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC527-01 D Cooling Fan Alarm 1

SC527-02 D Cooling Fan Alarm 2

SC527-03 D Cooling Fan Alarm 3

SC527-04 D Cooling Fan Alarm

SC527-05 D Exhaust Fan Alarm 1

SC527-06 D Exhaust Fan Alarm 2

SC527-07 D Exhaust Fan Alarm 3

SC527-08 D Exhaust Fan Alarm 4

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC530-01 D Fusing Pressure Roller Intake Fan Lock (D137/D138 only)

SC530-02 D Fusing Pressure Roller Exhaust Fan Lock (D137/D138 only)

SC530-03 D Heat Pipe Panel Intake Fan Lock

SC530-04 D Heat Pipe Panel Exhaust Fan Lock

SC530-05 D Fusing Exit Exhaust Fan Lock

SC530-06 D ITB Cleaning Intake Fan Lock

SC530-07 D IH Coil Cooling Fan Lock

1129
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC530-08 D PTR Fusing Exhaust Fan Lock

SC530-09 D IH Coil Power Cooling Fan Lock

SC531-01 D Development Intake Fan/Y Lock

SC531-02 D Development Intake Fan/M Lock

SC531-03 D Development Intake Fan/C Lock

SC531-04 D Development Intake Fan/K Lock

SC531-05 D Development Exhaust Fan/Right Lock

SC531-06 D Development Exhaust Fan/Left Lock

SC532-02 D Controller Exhaust Fan Lock

SC532-03 D PSU Fan/Right Lock

SC532-04 D PSU Fan/Left Lock

SC533-01 D Laser Unit Cooling Fan/Right Lock

SC533-02 D Laser Unit Cooling Fan/Left Lock

SC534-01 D Duplex Exhaust Fan/Front Lock

SC534-02 D Duplex Exhaust Fan/Rear Lock

SC534-03 D Duplex Exhaust Fan/Middle Lock

SC535-02 D Drive Exhaust Fan Lock

SC536-01 D Paper cooling pipe fan lock

SC537-01 D Ozone Exhaust Fan Lock

SC538-01 D ID Sensor Cleaning Fan Lock

SC539-01 D Paper Transport Belt Fan/Front Lock

SC539-02 D Paper Transport Belt Fan/Rear Lock

1130
 Service Call 501-595

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

When a motor is on, the lock sensor is checked every 100 milliseconds. If
lock signal is missing 51 times consecutively, the machine determines that
the motor is not running correctly.

• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Harness broken
• IOB defective

• Replace the motor.

• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the IOB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Y Development Temperature Detection Error

Temperature Sensor Output Error: 0.35V or lower (100 degrees

centigrade or higher) or 3.07V or higher (-30 degrees centigrade or
lower).
Details:
In case of a Temperature Sensor Output Error: 0.35V or lower (100
degrees centigrade or higher) or 3.07V or higher (-30 degrees
centigrade or lower), the machine determines the sensor is malfunctioning
and assumes that the temperature is 100 degrees centigrade.
SC587-00 D If the sensor is determined as malfunctioning 3 times consecutively (3
outputs, each of which is an average of 6 readings), the machine issues
the SC and no longer use the sensor, using the assumed temperature
"100 degrees centigrade" instead.
However, the sensor is used again after power off/on.

• Connecter disconnected or harness broken

• Sensor defective

• Connecter disconnected or harness broken: Revert connection.

• Sensor defective: Replace the sensor.

1131
 5. Troubleshooting

SC500 (Engine: Paper Transport 2: Fusing, etc.)

SC540
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
RTB 203
Fusing Motor: Lock

The IOB detects the fusing motor lock error (rotation speed out of
specification).
Vodka assignment: GPIO29DATA[7]
Details:
When the motor is on, each lock signal is checked every 100
milliseconds. If the High status is detected 20 times consecutively, the
machine determines that the motor is not running correctly. The machine
issues an SC and stops the motor.

• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
SC540-00 A
• Harness broken
• IOB defective
• Unit torque increased.
• Executed "Middle-Low Speed" mode of SP5805/5806 (Output
Check) on D135/D137/D138 machines.

• Replace the motor.

• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the IOB.
• Replace the unit.
• Replace the driven unit.

1132
 Service Call 501-595

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Sensor 1: Heating Roller Center Disconnection

0 degrees or lower was detected for (t1) seconds consecutively.

Number of times: 10 or more
D135 (Japan): 50 (seconds)
D136 (Japan)/D135 (NA): 50 (seconds)
D136 (NA)/D135 (EU)/D136(EU): 50 (seconds)
D137 (Japan): 50 (seconds)
D138 (Japan)/D137 (NA)/D138 (NA)/D137 (EU)/D138 (EU): 50
(seconds)
SC541-00 A
Monitored at: All times, though SC is not issued when temperature is not
controlled (when in off mode/sleep mode, when a door, excluding the
toner supply door, is open, or when the heater relay is off).

• Thermopile disconnection
• Connecter contact failure

• Replace the thermopile.

• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the connector.
• Replace the connector.

1133
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Sensor 1: Heating Roller Center: Reload Failure: Timeout 1

Failed to reach (T2) degrees centigrade after (t4) seconds from the start
of heater control.
D135 (Japan):T2 = 80, t4 = 100
D136 (Japan)/D135 (NA): T2 = 80, t4 = 80
D136 (NA)/D135 (EU)/D136(EU): T2 = 80, t4 = 80
D137 (Japan): T2 = 80, t4 = 80
D138 (Japan)/D137 (NA)/D138 (NA)/D137 (EU)/D138 (EU): T2 =
SC542-02 A 80, t4 = 80
Monitored at: Startup (Power-on, when a cover is closed, when fuser
heater is under control)

• Thermopile lens smudged

• Input voltage out of specification

• Replace the thermopile.

• Use with supported input voltage
• Replace the IH coil/IH inverter.
• Replace the unit.

1134
 Service Call 501-595

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Sensor 1: Heating Roller Center: Reload Failure: Timeout 2

Failed to reach reload temperature after (t5) seconds from the start of
heater control.
D135 (Japan):t5 = 230
D136 (Japan)/D135 (NA): t5 = 230
D136 (NA)/D135 (EU)/D136(EU): t5 = 230
D137 (Japan): t5 = 230
D138 (Japan)/D137 (NA)/D138 (NA)/D137 (EU)/D138 (EU): t5 =
SC542-03 A 230
Monitored at: Startup (Power-on, when a cover is closed, when fuser
heater is under control)

• IH malfunctioning
• Overheating prevention device worked.

• Replace the thermopile.

• Use with supported input voltage
• Replace the IH coil/IH inverter.
• Replace the unit.

1135
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Sensor 1: Heating Roller Center: Overheat detection (software)

(T3) degrees centigrade or higher was detected for (t6) seconds

consecutively.
Number of times: 10 or more
D135 (Japan):T3 = 250, t6 = 1
D136 (Japan)/D135 (NA): T3 = 250, t6 = 1
D136 (NA)/D135 (EU)/D136(EU): T3 = 250, t6 = 1
D137 (Japan): T3 = 250, t6 = 1
SC543-00 A D138 (Japan)/D137 (NA)/D138 (NA)/D137 (EU)/D138 (EU): T3 =
250, t6 = 1
Monitored at: All times, though SC is not issued when temperature is not
controlled (when in off mode/sleep mode, when a door, excluding the
toner supply door, is open, or when the heater relay is off).

• Triac shorted.
• IOB board defective.

• Replace the IOB board.

• Replace the unit.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Heating Roller Center: Overheat detection (hardware)

Hardware detection of overheat condition.

The heating roller center thermopile was detected as the cause.

• IOB defective
• Fuser control software running out of control
SC544-00 A • Heating roller center thermopile defective
• IH inverter supplied continuously (software error or temperature
sensor malfunctioning

• After removing the cause of the SC, set "Fusing SC Clear" in the SP
mode.
• If necessary, replace: IOB/heating roller center thermopile/IH
coil/IH inverter.

1136
 Service Call 501-595

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Zero Cross Error (Relay contact welded)

When this error occurs, machine stops with fusing relay off and displays
the SC.

• Fusing relay defective (contact welded)

SC547-01 D • Fusing relay drive circuit defective

• Turn the main power off/on.

• If the fusing relay is damaged, replace the AC control board.
• Check the connection between the AC control board and the FSB
(fusing IOB) and replace the harness and/or circuit board if
necessary.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Zero Cross Error (Relay contact defective)

When this error occurs, the fusing heater trigger turns off and then, after a
specified time, machine stops with fusing relay off and displays the SC.

• Fusing relay defective (contact welded)

SC547-02 D • Fusing relay drive circuit defective

• Turn the main power off/on.

• If the fusing relay is damaged, replace the AC control board.
• Check the connection between the AC control board and the FSB
(fusing IOB) and replace the harness and/or circuit board if
necessary.

1137
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Zero Cross Error (low frequency error)

When this error occurs, the fusing heater trigger turns off and then, after a
specified time, machine stops with fusing relay off and displays the SC.

• Unstable commercial power supply frequency

SC547-03 D
• Turn the main power off/on.
• If the fusing relay is damaged, replace the AC control board.
• Check the connection between the AC control board and the FSB
(fusing IOB) and replace the harness and/or circuit board if
necessary.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC548 Fusing rotation detection

D135 RTB 47
D137 RTB 65 Blocking/non-blocking signal of the heating roller rotation sensor was
D137 RTB 198
not received within specified time.
D135 RTB 158

• The feeler for heating roller rotation detection deformed or broken.

SC548-00 A • Fusing motor defective
• Heating roller rotation sensor defective
• IOB defective

• After removing the cause of the SC, set "Fusing SC Clear" in the SP
mode, and then turn the main power off/on.

1138
 Service Call 501-595

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Refresh roller drive motor: Lock

The IOB detects the fusing motor lock error (rotation speed out of
specification).
Vodka assignment: GPIO28DATA[7]
Details:
When the motor is on, each lock signal is checked every 100
milliseconds. If the High status is detected 20 times consecutively, the
machine determines that the motor is not running correctly. The machine
issues an SC and stops the motor.

• Motor defective
SC550-01 D • Connecter disconnected
• Harness broken
• IOB defective
• Unit torque increased.

• Replace the motor.

• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the IOB.
• Replace the unit.
• Replace the driven unit.

1139
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Sensor 4: Pressure Roller Center Disconnection

0 degrees or lower was detected for (t1) seconds consecutively.

Number of times: 10 or more
D135 (Japan): 75 (seconds)
D136 (Japan)/D135 (NA): 75 (seconds)
D136 (NA)/D135 (EU)/D136(EU): 75 (seconds)
D137 (Japan): 75 (seconds)
D138 (Japan)/D137 (NA)/D138 (NA)/D137 (EU)/D138 (EU): 75
(seconds)
SC551-00 A
Monitored at: All times, though SC is not issued when temperature is not
controlled (when in off mode/sleep mode, when a door, excluding the
toner supply door, is open, or when the heater relay is off).

• Thermopile disconnection
• Connecter contact failure

• Replace the thermopile.

• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the connector.
• Replace the connector.

1140
 Service Call 501-595
SC552-02
D135 RTB 43
D137 RTB 69
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Sensor 4: Heating Roller Center: Reload Failure: Timeout 1

Failed to reach (T2) degrees centigrade after (t4) seconds from the start
of heater control.
D135 (Japan):T2 = 45, t4 = 80
D136 (Japan)/D135 (NA): T2 = 45, t4 = 60
D136 (NA)/D135 (EU)/D136(EU): T2 = 45, t4 = 60
D137 (Japan): T2 = 45, t4 = 60
D138 (Japan)/D137 (NA)/D138 (NA)/D137 (EU)/D138 (EU): T2 =
SC552-02 A 45, t4 = 60
Monitored at: Startup (Power-on, when a cover is closed, when fuser
heater is under control)

• Thermistor deformed or floating

• Input voltage out of specification

• Replace the thermopile.

• Use with supported input voltage
• Replace the pressure roller heater.
• Replace the unit.

1141
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Sensor 4: Heating Roller Center: Reload Failure: Timeout 2

Failed to reach reload temperature after (t5) seconds from the start of
heater control.
D135 (Japan):t5 = 230
D136 (Japan)/D135 (NA): t5 = 230
D136 (NA)/D135 (EU)/D136(EU): t5 = 230
D137 (Japan): t5 = 230
D138 (Japan)/D137 (NA)/D138 (NA)/D137 (EU)/D138 (EU): t5 =
SC552-03 A 230
Monitored at: Startup (Power-on, when a cover is closed, when fuser
heater is under control)

• Pressure heater malfunctioning

• Overheating prevention device worked.

• Replace the thermopile.

• Use with supported input voltage
• Replace the pressure roller heater.
• Replace the unit.

1142
 Service Call 501-595

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Sensor 4: Pressure Roller Center: Overheat detection (software)

(T3) degrees centigrade or higher was detected for (t6) seconds

consecutively.
Number of times: 10 or more
D135 (Japan):T3 = 220, t6 = 1
D136 (Japan)/D135 (NA): T3 = 220, t6 = 1
D136 (NA)/D135 (EU)/D136(EU): T3 = 220, t6 = 1
D137 (Japan): T3 = 220, t6 = 1
SC553-00 A D138 (Japan)/D137 (NA)/D138 (NA)/D137 (EU)/D138 (EU): T3 =
220, t6 = 1
Monitored at: All times, though SC is not issued when temperature is not
controlled (when in off mode/sleep mode, when a door, excluding the
toner supply door, is open, or when the heater relay is off).

• Triac shorted.
• IOB board defective.

• Replace the IOB board.

• Replace the unit.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Pressure Roller Center: Overheat detection (hardware)

Hardware detection of overheat condition.

The pressure roller center thermopile was detected as the cause.

• IOB defective
• Fuser control software running out of control
SC554-00 A
• Triac damaged (shorted).
• Pressure roller center thermopile defective

• After removing the cause of the SC, Set "Fusing SC Clear" in the SP
mode.
• If necessary, replace: IOB/pressure roller center thermopile/AC
drive.

1143
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC555
RTB 49
Heater 2: Heater Continuously On (Sensor 4: Thermopile: Pressure Roller
Center)

Target temperature was not reached (t7) seconds after reload.

Time elapsed after reload (excluding paper transport time) (t8)
D135 (Japan): t7 = 90, t8 = 90
D136 (Japan)/D135 (NA): t7 = 90, t8 = 90
D136 (NA)/D135 (EU)/D136(EU): t7 = 90, t8 = 90
D137 (Japan): t7 = 90, t8 = 90
D138 (Japan)/D137 (NA)/D138 (NA)/D137 (EU)/D138 (EU): t7 =
SC555-00 A 90, t8 = 90
Monitored at: All times, though SC is not issued when temperature is not
controlled (when in off mode/sleep mode, when a door, excluding the
toner supply door, is open, or when the heater relay is off).

• Thermopile detection error

• Heater disconnection
• Overheating prevention device worked.

• Replace the thermopile.

• Replace the heater.
• Replace the unit.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Zero Cross Error (high frequency)

-
Details:
SC557-00 C
The SC code is logged and the operation of the machine is not affected.

• Unstable commercial power supply frequency

No action required.

1144
 Service Call 501-595

SC559
D135 RTB 137
D137 RTB 176
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Fusing jam: 3 counts

Fusing jam (fusing exit sensor late jam) was detected 3 times
consecutively.
Details:
This SC can be set ON/OFF. The factory setting is OFF; set it ON when
requested by the customer.
SP1-142-001:
0: OFF (factory setting)
SC559-00 A 1: ON (set by service personnel at the request of customer)
This prevents collateral problems (such as thermistor floating) that may be
caused by repeated jams in the fusing unit.
• The jam counter is not reset by power off/on.
• When paper is output successfully, the jam counter is reset.

• Paper jam in the fusing unit

• Sensor defective

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Web unit contact error

Contact/separation control failed 3 times consecutively.

Monitored when contact/separation mechanism is operating.

• Web unit contact motor/sensor defective

• Feeler deformed or damaged
SC560-00 D
• Contact/separation mechanism defective

• Replace the motor.

• Replace the sensor.
• Replace the feeler.
• Replace the unit.

1145
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Sensor 2: Heating Roller Front Disconnection

0 degrees or lower was detected for (t1) seconds consecutively.

Number of times: 10 or more
D135 (Japan): 50 (seconds)
D136 (Japan)/D135 (NA): 50 (seconds)
D136 (NA)/D135 (EU)/D136(EU): 50 (seconds)
D137 (Japan): 50 (seconds)
D138 (Japan)/D137 (NA)/D138 (NA)/D137 (EU)/D138 (EU): 50
(seconds)
SC561-00 A
Monitored at: All times, though SC is not issued when temperature is not
controlled (when in off mode/sleep mode, when a door, excluding the
toner supply door, is open, or when the heater relay is off).

• Thermistor disconnection
• Connecter contact failure

• Replace the thermistor.

• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the connector.
• Replace the connector.

1146
 Service Call 501-595

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Sensor 2: Heating Roller Front: Reload Failure: Timeout 1

Failed to reach (T2) degrees centigrade after (t4) seconds from the start
of heater control.
D135 (Japan):T2 = 45, t4 = 80
D136 (Japan)/D135 (NA): T2 = 45, t4 = 80
D136 (NA)/D135 (EU)/D136(EU): T2 = 45, t4 = 80
D137 (Japan): T2 = 45, t4 = 80
D138 (Japan)/D137 (NA)/D138 (NA)/D137 (EU)/D138 (EU): T2 =
45, t4 = 80
SC562-02 A Monitored at: Startup (Power-on, when a cover is closed, when fuser
heater is under control)

• Thermopile lens smudged

• Thermistor deformed or floating
• Input voltage out of specification

• Replace the thermopile.

• Use with supported input voltage
• Replace the IH coil/IH inverter.
• Replace the unit.

1147
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Sensor 2: Heating Roller Front: Reload Failure: Timeout 2

Failed to reach reload temperature after (t5) seconds from the start of
heater control.
D135 (Japan):t5 = 350
D136 (Japan)/D135 (NA): t5 = 350
D136 (NA)/D135 (EU)/D136(EU): t5 = 350
D137 (Japan): t5 = 350
D138 (Japan)/D137 (NA)/D138 (NA)/D137 (EU)/D138 (EU): t5 =
SC562-03 A 350
Monitored at: Startup (Power-on, when a cover is closed, when fuser
heater is under control)

• IH malfunctioning
• Overheating prevention device worked.

• Replace the thermopile.

• Use with supported input voltage
• Replace the IH coil/IH inverter.
• Replace the unit.

1148
 Service Call 501-595

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Sensor 2: Heating Roller Front: Overheat detection (software)

(T3) degrees centigrade or higher was detected for (t6) seconds

consecutively.
Number of times: 10 or more
D135 (Japan):T3 = 250, t5 = 1
D136 (Japan)/D135 (NA): T3 = 250, t5 = 1
D136 (NA)/D135 (EU)/D136(EU): T3 = 250, t5 = 1
D137 (Japan): T3 = 250, t5 = 1
SC563-00 A D138 (Japan)/D137 (NA)/D138 (NA)/D137 (EU)/D138 (EU): T3 =
250, t5 = 1
Monitored at: All times, though SC is not issued when temperature is not
controlled (when in off mode/sleep mode, when a door, excluding the
toner supply door, is open, or when the heater relay is off).

• Triac shorted.
• IOB board defective.

• Replace the IOB board.

• Replace the unit.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Heating Roller Front: Overheat detection (hardware)

Hardware detection of overheat condition.

The heating roller front thermistor was detected as the cause.

• IOB defective
• Fuser control software running out of control
SC564-00 A • Heating roller front thermistor defective
• IH inverter supplied continuously (software error or temperature
sensor malfunctioning

• After removing the cause of the SC, Set "Fusing SC Clear" in the SP
mode.
• If necessary, replace: IOB/heating roller front thermistor/IH coil/IH
inverter.

1149
 5. Troubleshooting

SC569-02 SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

RTB 49
Pressure Release Error: HP failed 3 times

Pressure release/Home position/control failed 3 times consecutively.

Monitored when the pressure release mechanism is operating.
Pressure Change: SP1-151-001 1:On/0: Off
When this SP is set to OFF, SC detection is disabled.

• Pressure release motor, sensor defective

SC569-02 D
• Feeler deformed or damaged
• Pressure release mechanism defective

• Replace the motor.

• Replace the sensor.
• Replace the feeler.
• Replace the unit.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Pressure Release Error: Overrun

When sensor A shows Low and Sensor B shows High.

Except when home position is detected.
Monitored when the pressure release mechanism is operating.
Pressure Change: SP1-151-001 1:On/0: Off
When this SP is set to OFF, SC detection is disabled.

SC569-03 D • Pressure release motor, sensor defective

• Feeler deformed or damaged
• Pressure release mechanism defective

• Replace the motor.

• Replace the sensor.
• Replace the feeler.
• Replace the unit.

1150
 Service Call 501-595

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Pressure Release Error: Overrun

When "Sensor A: Low" is not detected within 1000 msec from the start of
pressure application.
Monitored when the pressure release mechanism is operating.
Pressure Change: SP1-151-001 1:On/0: Off
When this SP is set to OFF, SC detection is disabled.

SC569-04 D • Pressure release motor, sensor defective

• Feeler deformed or damaged
• Pressure release mechanism defective

• Replace the motor.

• Replace the sensor.
• Replace the feeler.
• Replace the unit.

SC570 SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

D137 RTB 116
Refresh Roller Contact Error

Contact/separation/control failed 3 times consecutively.

Monitored when the contact/separation mechanism is operating.

• Refresh roller contact motor, sensor defective

• Feeler deformed or damaged
SC570-00 D
• Contact/separation mechanism defective

• Replace the motor.

• Replace the sensor.
• Replace the feeler.
• Replace the unit.

1151
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Sensor 6: Fusing Roller Front Side Disconnection

0 degrees or lower was detected for (t1) seconds consecutively.

Number of times: 10 or more
D135 (Japan): 75 (seconds)
D136 (Japan)/D135 (NA): 75 (seconds)
D136 (NA)/D135 (EU)/D136(EU): 75 (seconds)
D137 (Japan): 75 (seconds)
D138 (Japan)/D137 (NA)/D138 (NA)/D137 (EU)/D138 (EU): 75
(seconds)
SC576-00 A
Monitored at: All times, though SC is not issued when temperature is not
controlled (when in off mode/sleep mode, when a door, excluding the
toner supply door, is open, or when the heater relay is off).

• Thermopile disconnection
• Connecter contact failure

• Replace the NC sensor.

• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the connector.
• Replace the unit.

1152
 Service Call 501-595

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Sensor 6: Fusing Roller Front Side: Overheat detection (software)

(T3) degrees centigrade or higher was detected for (t6) seconds

consecutively.
Number of times: 10 or more
D135 (Japan):T3 = 250, t6 = 1
D136 (Japan)/D135 (NA): T3 = 250, t6 = 1
D136 (NA)/D135 (EU)/D136(EU): T3 = 250, t6 = 1
D137 (Japan): T3 = 250, t6 = 1
SC577-00 A D138 (Japan)/D137 (NA)/D138 (NA)/D137 (EU)/D138 (EU): T3 =
250, t6 = 1
Monitored at: All times, though SC is not issued when temperature is not
controlled (when in off mode/sleep mode, when a door, excluding the
toner supply door, is open, or when the heater relay is off).

• Triac shorted.
• IOB board defective.

• Replace the IOB board.

• Replace the unit.

1153
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Sensor 7: Fusing Roller Core Disconnection

0 degrees or lower was detected for 1000 seconds consecutively.

Number of times: 10 or more
Monitored at: All times, though SC is not issued when temperature is not
controlled (when in off mode/sleep mode, when a door, excluding the
toner supply door, is open, or when the heater relay is off).
Monitored only when SP1-107-024 is set to ON.
SP1-107-024:
SC579-00 A 0: OFF (default)
1: ON

• Thermistor disconnection
• Connecter contact failure

• Replace the thermistor.

• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the connector.
• Replace the unit.

1154
 Service Call 501-595

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Sensor 7: Fusing Roller Core: Reload Failure: Timeout 2

Failed to reach reload temperature after (t5) seconds from the start of
heater control.
D135 (Japan):t5 = 2700
D136 (Japan)/D135 (NA): t5 = 2700
D136 (NA)/D135 (EU)/D136(EU): t5 = 2700
D137 (Japan): t5 = 2700
D138 (Japan)/D137 (NA)/D138 (NA)/D137 (EU)/D138 (EU): t5 =
SC580-03 A 230
Monitored at: Startup (Power-on, when a cover is closed, when fuser
heater is under control)

• IH malfunctioning
• Overheating prevention device worked.

• Replace the thermopile.

• Use with supported input voltage
• Replace the IH coil/IH inverter.
• Replace the unit.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

IGBT Overvoltage Error

Error notification from the IH inverter with a command (0x64 bit 0)

• Fusing unit defective

SC582-01 A • IH inverter malfunctioning

• After removing the cause of the SC, set "Fusing SC Clear" in the SP
mode, and then turn the main power off/on.
• If necessary, replace: Fusing unit, IH inverter

1155
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• IH Input Voltage Error

• Error notification from the IH inverter with a command (0x64 bit 1)

• Input voltage abnormal

• Harness broken
SC582-02 A • IH inverter defective
• IOB defective

• After removing the cause of the SC, set "Fusing SC Clear" in the SP
mode, and then turn the main power off/on.
• If necessary, replace: Harness, IH inverter, IOB

SC500 (Engine: Paper Transport 3: Feed, Duplex, Transport, Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Paper Thickness Sensor Error

During initial calibration of the paper thickness sensor, the number of

times the sensor failed to output an appropriate value reached 3.
The counter is reset at the start of initial calibration.

• Paper thickness sensor harness broken/connecter disconnected

SC511-01 C • Paper thickness sensor dirty with paper dust, etc.

• Foreign object on the section of the roller which is used for paper
thickness detection.

• Check the harness and connector of the sensor.

• Clean or replace the sensor.
• Clean or replace the section of the roller which is used for paper
thickness detection.

1156
 Service Call 501-595

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Bypass Tray Paper Thickness Sensor Error

During initial calibration of the bypass tray paper thickness sensor, the
number of times the sensor failed to output an appropriate value reached
3.
The counter is reset at the start of initial calibration.

• Paper thickness sensor harness broken/connecter disconnected

SC511-02 C • Paper thickness sensor dirty with paper dust, etc.
• Foreign object on the section of the roller which is used for paper
thickness detection.

• Check the harness and connector of the sensor.

• Clean or replace the sensor.
• Clean or replace the section of the roller which is used for paper
thickness detection.

1157
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Inverter Junction Gate Motor Error

Inverter junction gate home position sensor did not turn on or off within
150msec from the start of home position detection operation (motor drive
start).
Details:
If detected for the first or second time:
• During paper transport, this is not handled as a jam/SC; paper is
fed normally and the error counter increases.
• Otherwise (during initialization), a jam alert is displayed to instruct
the user to remove jammed paper, and the error counter increases.
If detected for the third time:
• Displays the SC No. on the operation panel.
SC514-00 D
• Inverter junction gate motor defective/connector disconnected/
harness broken
• Inverter junction gate home position sensor defective/connector
disconnected/harness broken
• Circuit board (PFB, DUB) defective
• Junction gate/junction gate drive unit does not move e.g. because
physical obstacle (piece of paper, etc.) is blocking operation.

• Inverter junction gate motor and inverter junction gate home position
sensor check/cleaning/replacement/harness reconnection/
harness replacement
• Check or replace the circuit board (PFB, DUB).
• Check and/or replace the inverter junction gate and inverter
junction gate drive unit.

1158
 Service Call 501-595

SC515-01 SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

D135 RTB 58
D137 RTB 112 Roller Shift Motor 1 Error

When an error occurs during roller shift motor 1 home position detection,
the machine handles it as a jam (JAM097) and stops operation, and
displays the SC No. on the control panel.

• Roller shift motor 1 connector disconnected or defective

• Motor driver defective
• Roller home position sensor 1 connector disconnected or defective
• Roller shift motor 1 does not move because of overload which may
SC515-01 B be due to foreign objects, etc.
• Roller home position sensor 1 deformed, damaged or connected
incorrectly

• Clean the roller home position sensor 1 and check its harness.
• Reconnect the connectors of roller shift motor 1 and roller home
position sensor 1.
• Check and, if necessary, replace: roller shift motor 1, roller home
position sensor 1, harness, circuit board (PFB, DUB), unit, driven
unit.

1159
 5. Troubleshooting

SC515-02
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
D135 RTB 54
D135 RTB 59
Roller Shift Motor 2 Error
D137 RTB 77
D137 RTB 196
When an error occurs during roller shift motor 2 home position detection,
the machine handles it as a jam (JAM097) and stops operation, and
displays the SC No. on the control panel.

• Roller shift motor 2 connector disconnected or defective

• Motor driver defective
• Roller home position sensor 2 connector disconnected or defective
• Roller shift motor 2 does not move because of overload which may
SC515-02 B be due to foreign objects, etc.
• Roller home position sensor 2 deformed, damaged or connected
incorrectly

• Clean the roller home position sensor 2 and check its harness.
• Reconnect the connectors of roller shift motor 2 and roller home
position sensor 2.
• Check and, if necessary, replace: roller shift motor 2, roller home
position sensor 2, harness, circuit board (PFB, DUB), unit, driven
unit.

1160
 Service Call 501-595

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Sensor Shift Motor Home Position Error

When an error occurs during sensor shift motor home position detection,
the machine handles it as a jam (JAM097) and stops operation, and
displays the SC No. on the control panel.

• Sensor shift motor connector disconnected or defective

• Motor driver defective
• Sensor shift home position sensor connector disconnected or
defective
SC516-01 B • Sensor shift motor does not move because of overload which may
be due to foreign objects, etc.
• Sensor shift home position sensor deformed, damaged or connected
incorrectly

• Clean the sensor shift home position sensor and check its harness.
• Reconnect the connectors of sensor shift motor and sensor shift home
position sensor.
• Check and, if necessary, replace: sensor shift motor, sensor shift
home position sensor, harness, circuit board (PFB, DUB), unit, driven
unit.

1161
 5. Troubleshooting

SC516-02
D135 RTB 46 SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
D135 RTB 90
D137 RTB 66 Sensor Shift Motor Edge Detection Error
D137 RTB 93
When an error occurs during sensor shift motor edge detection, the
machine handles it as a jam (JAM097) the first two times and displays the
SC No. on the control panel the third time.

• Sensor shift motor connector disconnected or defective

• Motor driver defective
• Edge detection sensor connector disconnected or defective
• Sensor shift motor does not move because of overload which may
be due to foreign objects, etc.
SC516-02 B
• Sensor shift home position sensor deformed, damaged or connected
incorrectly
• Wrong paper size

• Load paper again.

• Clean the edge detection sensor and check its harness.
• Reconnect the connectors of sensor shift motor and edge detection
sensor.
• Check and, if necessary, replace: sensor shift motor, edge detection
sensor, harness, circuit board (PFB, DUB), unit, driven unit.

SC595
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
RTB 205
TDCU Hardware Error

Command notification from the TDCU.

SC595-00 D
• STM defective, brush motor defective, harness disconnected

• Replace the TDCU, harness, and motor.

1162
 Service Call 501-595

SC500 (Engine: Others)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Secondary Power Cord Not Connected

The main power cord is connected but the secondary power cord is not
connected.

SC581-00 D The secondary power cord is not connected.

• Turn the machine off and plug in the secondary power cord again.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the AC drive/IOB.

1163
 5. Troubleshooting

Service Call 620-689

SC600 (Engine: Communication and Others)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC620-01 D ADF Communication Error

SC620-02 D ADF Communication Error

Communication error between the main machine and ADF connected

with ASAP.
SC620-01: A BREAK was detected after a successful connection.
SC620-02: Communication timeout after a successful connection.
Details:
SC is issued when an error is detected after ADF connection was
recognized at power-on.
There will be no response either, if the ADF was not connected at power-
on. In this case, however, SC is not issued and functions that do not use
the ADF (copying from the exposure glass) are available.

• ADF connection fault.

• ADF defective
• IPU board defective
• Electrical noise on the line

• Check ADF cable connection.

• Replace the ADF.
• Replace the IPU board.

1164
 Service Call 620-689

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Finisher/mail box communication error

Detected an error when connecting the communication line.

Received a communication error notification from the URAT.

• Finisher control board defective.

SC621-00 D • BCU or IOB defective
• Connection fault between finisher and main machine.

• Reconnect the Finisher/mail box interface cable.

• Replace the BCU or replace the finisher/mail box
• Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Paper bank communication error.

Communication error between main machine and paper bank/LCT.

• Paper bank control board defective.

SC622-00 D • BCU or IOB defective

• Paper bank-main machine connection fault.

• Reconnect the paper bank connection cable. / Replace the BCU./

Replace the paper bank.
• Turn the main power off/on.

1165
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

TDCU communication error.

ASAP communication protocol error

• A BREAK signal was detected at power-on.
• Non-response (100 ms) was detected 3 times consecutively during
normal operation.
SC625-00 D
• NAK was received 3 times before ACK was received during normal
operation.
• A BREAK signal was detected during normal operation.

• IOB defective

• Replace the IOB.

SC626-01 SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

D135 RTB 54
D137 RTB 77 SC626-01 D DUB communication error at power-on

SC626-02 D DUB communication error during normal operation

SC626-03 D DUB BREAK detection during normal operation

1166
 Service Call 620-689

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

ASAP communication protocol error

• A BREAK signal was detected at power-on.
• Non-response (100 ms) was detected 3 times consecutively during
normal operation.
• NAK was received 3 times before ACK was received during normal
operation.
• A BREAK signal was detected during normal operation.

• DUB defective
• PFB defective
• Harness between DUB and PFB broken
• Connecter between DUB and PFB disconnected
• Unintended electrical noise

• Replace the DUB.

• Replace the PFB.
• Replace the harness between DUB and PFB.
• Replace the connector between DUB and PFB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC626-04 D TSB communication error at power-on

SC626-05 D TSB communication error during normal operation

SC626-06 D TSB BREAK detection during normal operation

1167
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

ASAP communication protocol error

• A BREAK signal was detected at power-on.
• Non-response (100 ms) was detected 3 times consecutively during
normal operation.
• NAK was received 3 times before ACK was received during normal
operation.
• A BREAK signal was detected during normal operation.

• TSB defective
• IOB defective
• Harness between TSB and IOB broken
• Connecter between TSB and IOB disconnected
• Unintended electrical noise

• Replace the TSB.

• Replace the IOB.
• Replace the harness between TSB and IOB.
• Replace the connector between TSB and IOB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC664-01 D

SC664-02 D VODKA SRAM program expansion error

SC664-03 D

VODKA1
SC664-01: VODKA SRAM access permission error (Write permission
denied)
SC664-02: VODKA SRAM write error (write result abnormal)
SC664-03: VODKA program startup error

• Electric noises and hardware defect

• IOB replacement, harness check

1168
 Service Call 620-689

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC664-11 D

SC664-12 D VODKA SRAM program expansion error

SC664-13 D

VODKA2
SC664-11: VODKA SRAM access permission error (Write permission
denied)
SC664-12: VODKA SRAM write error (write result abnormal)
SC664-13: VODKA program startup error

• Electric noises and hardware defect

• IOB replacement, harness check

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC664-21 D

SC664-22 D VODKA SRAM program expansion error

SC664-23 D

VODKA3
SC664-21: VODKA SRAM access permission error (Write permission
denied)
SC664-22: VODKA SRAM write error (write result abnormal)
SC664-23: VODKA program startup error

• Electric noises and hardware defect

• IOB replacement, harness check

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC664-31 D

SC664-32 D VODKA SRAM program expansion error

SC664-33 D

1169
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

VODKA4
SC664-31: VODKA SRAM access permission error (Write permission
denied)
SC664-32: VODKA SRAM write error (write result abnormal)
SC664-33: VODKA program startup error

• Electric noises and hardware defect

• IOB replacement, harness check

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC664-41 D

SC664-42 D VODKA SRAM program expansion error

SC664-43 D

VODKA5
SC664-41: VODKA SRAM access permission error (Write permission
denied)
SC664-42: VODKA SRAM write error (write result abnormal)
SC664-33: VODKA program startup error

• Electric noises and hardware defect

• IOB replacement, harness check

1170
 Service Call 620-689

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

FFC set detection (Error between IPU and BCU)

The HORUS port on the BCU is used for FFC connection detection to
detect FFC (harness) disconnection and loose connection between BCU
and IPU. By checking the "H" or "L" status of this port, the connection
status can be checked.
• Normal condition (Connector connected): "H" at the HORUS port
on the BCU.
• Abnormal condition (Connector not connected): "L" at the HORUS
port on the BCU.
Details:
SC665-01 D • When a connector is disconnected, the voltage level becomes "L"
level (0V level) because there is a pull-down resistor in the BCU.

• FFC harness between BCU and IPU broken

• FFC harness between BCU and IPU not connected fully
• BCU damaged
• IPU damaged

• Replace the FFC harness between BCU and IPU.

• Reconnect the FFC harness between BCU and IPU.
• Replace the BCU board.
• Replace the IPU.

1171
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

FFC set detection (Error between BCU and IOB)

The HORUS port on the BCU is used for FFC connection detection to
detect FFC (harness) disconnection and loose connection between BCU
and IOB. By checking the voltage level of the AD terminal, the connection
status can be checked.
Details:
• When the harness between BCU and IOB becomes disconnected,
the number of parallelly connected resistors changes and therefore
the voltage input to the AD terminal changes.
SC665-02 D
• FFC harness between BCU and IOB broken
• FFC harness between BCU and IOB not connected fully
• BCU damaged
• IOB damaged

• Replace the FFC harness between BCU and IOB.

• Reconnect the FFC harness between BCU and IOB.
• Replace the BCU board.
• Replace the IOB.

1172
 Service Call 620-689

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

FFC set detection (Error between IOB and PFB)

The HORUS port on the BCU is used for FFC connection detection to
detect FFC (harness) disconnection and loose connection between IOB
and PFB. By checking the voltage level of the AD terminal, the connection
status can be checked.
Details:
• When the harness between IOB and PFB becomes disconnected,
the number of parallelly connected resistors changes and therefore
the voltage input to the AD terminal changes.

• FFC harness between IOB and PFB broken

SC665-03 D
• FFC harness between IOB and PFB not connected fully
• BCU damaged
• IOB damaged
• PFB damaged

• Replace the FFC harness between IOB and PFB.

• Reconnect the FFC harness between IOB and PFB.
• Replace the BCU board.
• Replace the IOB.
• Replace the PFB.

1173
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

IOB does not start

The IOB_WAKE signal of the IOB and the PFB is not "WAKE".
(Occurs when either 2 Vodkas in the IOB or 3 Vodkas in the PFB are in
the reset status.
Details:
• Detected when IOB_WAKE signal from the 2 Vodkas on the IOB
(PIB function, FSB function) and 3 Vodkas on the FSB stay in the
WAKE status.
• IOB_WAKE signal is output from 5 Vodkas as explained above and
if at least one of them is "WAKE", IOB_WAKE is not canceled.

• IOB damaged
SC665-04 D • PFB damaged
• BCU defective
• Harness between BCU and IOB: Ground fault
• Harness between IOB and PFB: Ground fault
• PSU5V not output

• Replace the harness between IOB and PFB.

• Replace the harness between BCU and IOB.
• Replace the IOB.
• Replace the PFB.
• Replace the BCU board.
• Replace the PSU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC669 EEPROM Communication Error

SC669-01 D EEPROM OPEN: ID error

SC669-02 D EEPROM OPEN: Channel error

SC669-03 D EEPROM OPEN: Device error

SC669-04 D EEPROM OPEN: Communication abort error

SC669-05 D EEPROM OPEN: Communication timeout error

1174
 Service Call 620-689

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC669-06 D EEPROM OPEN: Operation stopped error

SC669-07 D EEPROM OPEN: Buffer full

SC669-08 D EEPROM OPEN: No error code

SC669-09 D EEPROM CLOSE: ID error

SC669-10 D EEPROM CLOSE: No error code

SC669-11 D EEPROM Data write: ID error

SC669-12 D EEPROM Data write: Channel error

SC669-13 D EEPROM Data write: Device error

SC669-14 D EEPROM Data write: Communication abort error

SC669-15 D EEPROM Data write: Communication timeout error

SC669-16 D EEPROM Data write: Operation stopped error

SC669-17 D EEPROM Data write: Buffer full

SC669-18 D EEPROM Data write: No error code

SC669-19 D EEPROM Data read: ID error

SC669-20 D EEPROM Data read: Channel error

SC669-21 D EEPROM Data read: Device error

SC669-22 D EEPROM Data read: Communication abort error

SC669-23 D EEPROM Data read: Communication timeout error

SC669-24 D EEPROM Data read: Operation stopped error

SC669-25 D EEPROM Data read: Buffer full

SC669-26 D EEPROM Data read: No error code

SC669-27 D EEPROM Device detection: ID error

SC669-28 D EEPROM Device detection: Channel error

SC669-29 D EEPROM Device detection: Device error

SC669-30 D EEPROM Device detection: Communication abort error

1175
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC669-31 D EEPROM Device detection: Communication timeout error

SC669-32 D EEPROM Device detection: Operation stopped error

SC669-33 D EEPROM Device detection: Buffer full

SC669-34 D EEPROM Device detection: No error code

Received a error notification during EEPROM communication and does

not resume after 3 retries.

• Electrical noise
• EEPROM not connected fully
• EEPROM not installed
• EEPROM damaged
• BCU damaged

• Cycle the machine off/on.

• Reconnect the EEPROM.
• Replace the EEPROM.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC681 Toner Cartridge: ID Chip Communication Error

SC681-01 D Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (K_Invalid Device ID)

SC681-02 D Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (M_Invalid Device ID)

SC681-03 D Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (C_Invalid Device ID)

SC681-04 D Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (Y_Invalid Device ID)

Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (K_Channel error (e.g. bus

SC681-05 D
disconnection))

Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (M_Channel error (e.g. bus

SC681-06 D
disconnection))

Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (C_Channel error (e.g. bus

SC681-07 D
disconnection))

1176
 Service Call 620-689

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (Y_Channel error (e.g. bus

SC681-08 D
disconnection))

Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (K_Device Error (No ID

SC681-09 D
chip))

Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (M_Device Error (No ID

SC681-11 D
chip))

Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (C_Device Error (No ID

SC681-12 D
chip))

Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (Y_Device Error (No ID

SC681-13 D
chip))

Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (K_Communication aborted

SC681-14 D
(error during communication))

Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (M_Communication aborted

SC681-16 D
(error during communication))

Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (C_Communication aborted

SC681-17 D
(error during communication))

Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (Y_Communication aborted

SC681-18 D
(error during communication))

SC681-19 D Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (K_Communication timeout)

SC681-21 D Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (M_Communication timeout)

SC681-22 D Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (C_Communication timeout)

SC681-23 D Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (Y_Communication timeout)

Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (K_Device stopped

SC681-24 D
(logically stopped))

Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (M_Device stopped

SC681-26 D
(logically stopped))

Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (C_Device stopped

SC681-27 D
(logically stopped))

Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (Y_Device stopped

SC681-28 D
(logically stopped))

1177
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC681-29 D Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (K_Requested buffer full)

SC681-31 D Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (M_Requested buffer full)

SC681-32 D Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (C_Requested buffer full)

SC681-33 D Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (Y_Requested buffer full)

SC681-34 D Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (K_No error code)

SC681-35 D Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (M_No error code)

SC681-36 D Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (C_No error code)

SC681-37 D Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (Y_No error code)

SC681-38 D Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (K_Invalid Device ID)

SC681-39 D Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (M_Invalid Device ID)

1178
 Service Call 620-689

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Errors defined in I2C communication

• When abnormality occurs at cable connection
• When error notification was received during communication with the
tag and operation is not resumed after 3 retries.

There was an error during (wired) communication with the ID chip on the
toner bottle.
SC681-01 to 04: Device ID data corrupted.
SC681-06 to 09: Contact fault (e.g. Bus disconnection)
SC681-11 to 14: No ID chip
SC681-16 to 19/21 to 24/26 to 39: Noise
SC681-31 to 34/36 to 39: Software problem
• Toner supply set error
• ID chip defective
• Harness broken
• BCU damaged
• IOB damaged
• TSB damaged
• TCB damaged
• Unintended noise

• Cycle the machine off/on.

• Set the toner supply again.
• Replace the ID chip.
• Fix the harness.
• Replace the BCU board.
• Replace the IOB.
• Replace the TSB.
• Replace the TCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC682 PCU: ID Chip Communication Error

SC682-01 D PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(K_Invalid Device ID)

1179
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC682-02 D PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(M_Invalid Device ID)

SC682-03 D PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(C_Invalid Device ID)

SC682-04 D PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(Y_Invalid Device ID)

PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(K_Channel error (e.g. bus

SC682-05 D
disconnection))

PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(M_Channel error (e.g. bus

SC682-06 D
disconnection))

PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(C_Channel error (e.g. bus

SC682-07 D
disconnection))

PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(Y_Channel error (e.g. bus

SC682-08 D
disconnection))

SC682-09 D PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(K_Device Error (No ID chip))

SC682-11 D PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(M_Device Error (No ID chip))

SC682-12 D PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(C_Device Error (No ID chip))

SC682-13 D PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(Y_Device Error (No ID chip))

PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(K_Communication aborted (error

SC682-14 D
during communication))

PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(M_Communication aborted (error

SC682-16 D
during communication))

PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(C_Communication aborted (error

SC682-17 D
during communication))

PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(Y_Communication aborted (error

SC682-18 D
during communication))

SC682-19 D PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(K_Communication timeout)

SC682-21 D PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(M_Communication timeout)

SC682-22 D PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(C_Communication timeout)

SC682-23 D PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(Y_Communication timeout)

1180
 Service Call 620-689

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(K_Device stopped (logically

SC682-24 D
stopped))

PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(M_Device stopped (logically

SC682-26 D
stopped))

PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(C_Device stopped (logically

SC682-27 D
stopped))

PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(Y_Device stopped (logically

SC682-28 D
stopped))

SC682-29 D PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(K_Requested buffer full)

SC682-31 D PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(M_Requested buffer full)

SC682-32 D PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(C_Requested buffer full)

SC682-33 D PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(Y_Requested buffer full)

SC682-34 D PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(K_No error code)

SC682-35 D PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(M_No error code)

SC682-36 D PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(C_No error code)

SC682-37 D PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(Y_No error code)

SC682-38 D PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(K_Invalid Device ID)

SC682-39 D PCU: ID Chip Communication Error(M_Invalid Device ID)

1181
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Errors defined in I2C communication

• When abnormality occurs at cable connection
• When error notification was received during communication with the
tag and operation is not resumed after 3 retries.

There was an error during (wired) communication with the ID chip on the
toner bottle.
• PCU set error
• HST sensor defective
• Harness broken
• BCU damaged
• IOB damaged
• Unintended noise

• Set the PCU again.

• Replace the HST sensor.
• Fix the harness.
• Replace the BCU board.
• Replace the IOB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC684 Fusing: ID Chip Communication Error

SC684-01 D Fusing: ID Chip Communication Error(Invalid Device ID)

Fusing: ID Chip Communication Error(Channel error (e.g. bus

SC684-02 D
disconnection))

SC684-03 D Fusing: ID Chip Communication Error(Device Error (No ID chip))

Fusing: ID Chip Communication Error(Communication aborted (error

SC684-04 D
during communication))

SC684-05 D Fusing: ID Chip Communication Error(Communication timeout)

Fusing: ID Chip Communication Error(Device stopped (logically

SC684-06 D
stopped))

SC684-07 D Fusing: ID Chip Communication Error(Requested buffer full)

1182
 Service Call 620-689

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC684-08 D Fusing: ID Chip Communication Error(No error code)

Errors defined in I2C communication

• Fusing unit set error

• ID chip defective
• Harness broken
• IOB damaged
• Unintended noise

• Set the fusing unit again.

• Replace the ID chip.
• Fix the harness.
• Replace the IOB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

DC Power Supply Voltage Error

Uses the power supply status signal monitored by the VODKA on the
IOB.
Tracks for 1 second from the time the converter SW trigger turns ON
(SWTRG1=0 to 1).
Target: 24VS1-N

• PSU malfunctioning
• IOB malfunctioning
SC685-00 D • Connecter disconnected
• Harness broken or ground fault
• Load fault

• Replace the PSU.

• Replace the IOB.
• Set the connector again.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the part where ground fault occurred.
• Turn the main power off/on.

1183
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

PER Not Received Error

Unable to receive the PER command from the controller.

SC687-00 D
• Communication error

• Cycle the machine off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

IH Inverter Communication Error

IH inverter not responding to request

IH inverter communication error (ASAP IV compliant)
IH inverter response information unavailable

SC689-00 D • Harness broken

• IH inverter defective
• IOB defective

• Remove the cause of the SC and then turn off/on the power or main
power.
• Replace the harness/IH inverter/IOB as required.

SC600 (Controller)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Counter device error 1

After 3 attempts to send a data frame to the optional counter device via
the serial communication line, no ACK signal was received within 100
ms.
SC632-00 B
Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board and
copier control board is disconnected or damaged.

• Turn the main power off/on.

• Check the serial communication line.

1184
 Service Call 620-689

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Counter device error 2

After communication was established, the controller received the brake

signal from the accounting device.

SC633-00 B Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board and
copier control board is disconnected or damaged.

• Turn the main power off/on.

• Check the serial communication line.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Counter device error 3

A backup RAM error was returned by the counter device.

SC634-00 B Counter device control board or the backup battery of counter device
defective

• Replace the counter device control board.

• Replace the backup battery.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Counter device error 4

A backup battery error was returned by the counter device.

SC635-00 B Counter device control board or the backup battery of counter device
defective

• Replace the counter device control board.

• Replace the backup battery.

1185
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

IC Card Error (Expanded authentication module error)

Issued when expanded authentication management is set to "ON" but

either of the following occur.
• There is no expanded authentication module in the machine.
• The SD card or the file of the expanded authentication module is
broken.
• There is no DESS module in the machine.

• There is no DESS module in the machine (models on which the

SC636-01 D function is optional).
• There is no expanded authentication module in the machine.
• The SD card or the file of the expanded authentication module is
broken.

• Set a working SD card/expanded authentication module file.

• Install the DESS module.
• In the SSP mode set SP5-401-160 to 0.
• In the SSP mode, set SP5-401-161 to 0.
• Replace the NVRAM.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

IC Card Error (Version error)

The version of the expanded authentication module is not correct.

SC636-02 D
Incorrect module version

Install the correct file of the expanded authentication module.

1186
 Service Call 620-689

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

IC Card Error (OSM user code file error)

• The correct "usercode" file could not be found in the root folder of
the SD card.
• The "usercode" file on the SD card could not be read.

• The "usercode" file does not exist on the SD card.

SC636-11 D • The "usercode" file on the SD card is an invalid file.
• Data in the "usercode" file on the SD card is invalid.
• "usercode" file was not moved when moving the application to
another SD card

Use the user code configuration tool for OSM users (Idissuer.exe) to
create the "usercode" and store it in the root folder of the SD card
containing the IC card module (eccm.mod).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Tracking Information Notification Error (Tracking application error)

Tracking information was lost.

SC637-01 D • Tracking SDK application error

• Internal notification error

Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Tracking Information Notification Error (Management server error)

Tracking information was lost.

Communication with tracking management server failed.

SC637-02 D • Network error
• tracking management server error
• Tracking SDK application error

Turn the main power off/on.

1187
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Communication error between BCU and Controller board.

Controller board does not respond after BCU tries to communicate three
times.

• Controller board software error

SC641-00 D
• Connect error between BCU and Controller board
• Engine board software error

• Check connections between Controller board and BCU.

• Turn the main switch off and on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Remote Service Modem Communication Error (Dialup authentication

failure)

• An error related to communication (dialup connection, modem

board etc.) using the RC Gate Type M was detected or an error that
prevents RC Gate operation was detected at power on.
• Displayed only when an error is detected while RC Gate is
operating.
SC650-01 B
• SC is not issued if an error occurs during RC Gate installation
(because it can be referenced using SP).

Dialup authentication failure

Check the following SPs.

• SP5-816-156
• SP5-816-157

1188
 Service Call 620-689

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Remote Service Modem Communication Error (dialup failing because of

incorrect modem configuration)

• An error related to communication (dialup connection, modem

board etc.) using the RC Gate Type M was detected or an error that
prevents RC Gate operation was detected at power on.
• Displayed only when an error is detected while RC Gate is
SC650-04 B operating.
• SC is not issued if an error occurs during RC Gate installation
(because it can be referenced using SP).

Dialup failing because of incorrect modem configuration

Check if the setting of SP5-816-160 is correct.

If it is correct, then there is a software bug.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Remote Service Modem Communication Error (insufficient current or

connection fault)

• An error related to communication (dialup connection, modem

board etc.) using the RC Gate Type M was detected or an error that
prevents RC Gate operation was detected at power on.

SC650-05 B • Displayed only when an error is detected while RC Gate is

operating.
• SC is not issued if an error occurs during RC Gate installation
(because it can be referenced using SP).

Insufficient current or connection fault

The line is not supported and nothing can be done.

1189
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Remote Service Modem Communication Error (RC Gate Type Mwas

installed but modem is not present (detected during operation))

• An error related to communication (dialup connection, modem

board etc.) using the RC Gate Type M was detected or an error that
prevents RC Gate operation was detected at power on.
• Displayed only when an error is detected while RC Gate is
operating.

SC650-13 B • SC is not issued if an error occurs during RC Gate installation

(because it can be referenced using SP).

RC Gate Type Mwas installed but modem is not present (detected during
operation)

• If a modem board is not installed, install it.

• Check again if the modem driver configurations (SP5-816-160,
SP5-816-165 to 171, SP5-816-165 to 171) are correct.
• If the problem is not solved, replace the modem.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Remote Service Modem Communication Error (RC Gate Type N was

installed but modem is present or wired/wireless LAN is not working
correctly)

• An error related to communication (dialup connection, modem

board etc.) using the RC Gate was detected or an error that
prevents RC Gate operation was detected at power on.
• Displayed only when an error is detected while RC Gate is
SC650-14 B operating.
• SC is not issued if an error occurs during RC Gate installation
(because it can be referenced using SP).

RC Gate Type N was installed but modem is present or wired/wireless

LAN is not working correctly

• If a modem board is attached, remove it.

• Check if wired/wireless LAN works.

1190
 Service Call 620-689

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Illegal Remote Service Dial-up (Chat program parameter error)

An unexpected error occurred when RC Gate Type M dialed up the NRS

SC651-01 C Center.

Software bug

Logging only.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Illegal Remote Service Dial-up (Chat program execution error)

An unexpected error occurred when RC Gate dialed up the NRS Center.

SC651-02 C
Software bug

Logging only.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Remote service ID2 mismatching

There was an authentication mismatch between ID2 for @Remote, the

controller board, and NVRAM.

• Used controller board installed

• Used NVRAM installed (such action is not allowed.)

SC652-00 D • If this occurs during RC Gate installation:

Check the validity of the certificate and the NVRAM, check the
machine serial number, write the common certificate, and then begin
installation again.
• If this occurs after RC Gate installation:
Clear the RC Gate install status, check the validity of the certificate
and the NVRAM, check the machine serial number, write the
common certificate, and then begin installation again.

1191
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Incorrect remote service ID2

ID2 stored in the NVRAM has either of the following problems.

• Number of characters is not 17.
• Includes a character that cannot be printed.
SC653-00 D • All spaces
• NULL

Replace the NVRAM.

Clear the RC Gate install status, write the common certificate, and then
begin installation again.

1192
 Service Call 620-689

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Engine start up error

• Case 1
• /ENGRDY signal was not asserted when the machine was
turned on or returned from energy saver mode.
• /IPURDY signal was not asserted when the machine was
turned on or returned from energy saver mode.
• EC response was not received within specified time from power
on.
• PC response was not received within specified time from power
on.
• SC response was not received within specified time from power
on.
• Writing to Rapi driver failed (the other party not found through
PCI).
SC670-00 D • Case 2
• Unexpected down status was detected after /ENGRDY
assertion.

• Case 1
• Engine board does not start up.
• Case 2
• Engine board reset unexpectedly.

Check the connection between the engine board and the controller
board.
• If it is always reproduced, replace the engine board. If the problem
persists, consider replacing the controller board or other boards
between them.
• If reproducibility is low, multiple causes are to be considered, such
as software, engine board, controller board, and PSU.

1193
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Controller start up error

After the machine was powered on, communication between the

controller and the operation panel was not established.

• Controller stalled
• Board installed incorrectly
• Controller board defective
SC672-10 D
• Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective
• Controller late

• Turn the main power off/on.

• Check the connection of the controller board.
• Replace the controller board.
• Check the control panel harness.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Controller start up error

After the machine was powered on, communication between the

controller and the operation panel was not established, or
communication with controller was interrupted after a normal startup.

• Controller stalled
• Board installed incorrectly
SC672-11 D • Controller board defective
• Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective
• Controller late

• Turn the main power off/on.

• Check the connection of the controller board.
• Replace the controller board.
• Check the control panel harness.

1194
 Service Call 620-689

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Controller start up error

Communication with controller was interrupted after a normal startup.

• Controller stalled
• Board installed incorrectly
• Controller board defective
SC672-12 D • Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective
• Controller late

• Turn the main power off/on.

• Check the connection of the controller board.
• Replace the controller board.
• Check the control panel harness.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Controller start up error

The operation panel detected that the controller is down.

• Controller stalled
• Board installed incorrectly
• Controller board defective
SC672-13 D • Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective
• Controller late

• Turn the main power off/on.

• Check the connection of the controller board.
• Replace the controller board.
• Check the control panel harness.

1195
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Controller start up error

The operation panel software ended abnormally.

• Controller stalled
• Board installed incorrectly
• Controller board defective
SC672-99 D • Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective
• Controller late

• Turn the main power off/on.

• Check the connection of the controller board.
• Replace the controller board.
• Check the control panel harness.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Connection error of Smart Operation Panel

The main machine does not respond to the smart operation panel.
SC673-10 D
The SP setting for the smart operation panel is mismatch.

• Set the SP5748-201 (OpePanel Setting) to [1: ON].

SC681
RTB 164

1196
 Service Call 700-780

Service Call 700-780

SC700 (Engine: Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Bottom plate lift motor error (1-pass ADF)

The bottom plate HP sensor does not detect the home position of the
bottom plate after the bottom plate lift motor switches on and lowers the
bottom plate. Or, the bottom plate position sensor does not detect the
position of the plate after the lift motor switches on and raises the bottom
plate.
Details:
The ADF notifies the main machine of the error. The first two occurences
are displayed as jams.
SC700-01 D
• Bottom plate position sensor output error
• Bottom plate HP sensor output error
• Bottom plate lift motor error (does not rotate)
• ARDF main board defective

• Check the connections of the sensor harnesses and motor harnesses.

• Replace the sensor harnesses and motor harnesses.
• Replace the sensor or motor.
• Replace the ARDF main board.

1197
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Original pick up error (1-pass ADF)

The pick-up motor is turned on but the pick-up home position sensor is not
detecting it.
Details:
The ADF notifies the main machine of the error. The first two occurences
are displayed as jams.

SC700-02 D • Pick-up HP sensor output error

• Pick-up motor error (does not rotate)
• ARDF main board defective

• Check the connections of the sensor harnesses and motor harnesses.

• Replace the sensor harnesses and motor harnesses.
• Replace the sensor or motor.
• Replace the ARDF main board.

1198
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Feed motor error (1-pass ADF)

Error signal detected while the motor is driven.

Details:
When encoder channel A (B) error or overload error is detected among
the feed motor error notification registers.
The first two occurences, however, are displayed as jams.

• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
SC700-04 D • Harness broken
• Overload

• Check the harness connection.

• Replace the encoder harness.
• Replace the motor.
• Replace the board.
• Remove torn paper from the paper path, remove foreign objects
from the drive area, and check for motor/motor bracket
deformation.

1199
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Pull-out motor error (1-pass ADF)

Error signal detected while the motor is driven.

Details:
When encoder channel A (B) error or overload error is detected among
the pull-out motor error notification registers.
The first two occurences, however, are displayed as jams.

• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
SC700-05 D • Harness broken
• Overload

• Check the harness connection.

• Replace the encoder harness.
• Replace the motor.
• Replace the board.
• Remove torn paper from the paper path, remove foreign objects
from the drive area, and check for motor/motor bracket
deformation.

1200
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Intermediate motor error (1-pass ADF)

Error signal detected while the motor is driven.

Details:
When encoder channel A (B) error or overload error is detected among
the intermediate motor error notification registers.
The first two occurences, however, are displayed as jams.

• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
SC700-06 D • Harness broken
• Overload

• Check the harness connection.

• Replace the encoder harness.
• Replace the motor.
• Replace the board.
• Remove torn paper from the paper path, remove foreign objects
from the drive area, and check for motor/motor bracket
deformation.

1201
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Scanning motor error (1-pass ADF)

Error signal detected while the motor is driven.

Details:
When encoder channel A (B) error or overload error is detected among
the scanning motor error notification registers.
The first two occurences, however, are displayed as jams.

• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
SC700-07 D • Harness broken
• Overload

• Check the harness connection.

• Replace the encoder harness.
• Replace the motor.
• Replace the board.
• Remove torn paper from the paper path, remove foreign objects
from the drive area, and check for motor/motor bracket
deformation.

1202
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Exit motor error (1-pass ADF)

Error signal detected while the motor is driven.

Details:
When encoder channel A (B) error or overload error is detected among
the exit motor error notification registers.
The first two occurences, however, are displayed as jams.

• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
SC700-09 D • Harness broken
• Overload

• Check the harness connection.

• Replace the encoder harness.
• Replace the motor.
• Replace the board.
• Remove torn paper from the paper path, remove foreign objects
from the drive area, and check for motor/motor bracket
deformation.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Original pick-up motor driver error (1-pass ADF)

Motor driver IC error flag was asserted when a jam occurred.

Details:
The protection mechanism of the motor driver IC detected overcurrent or
overheat and output an error.

Motor driver IC detected an error.

SC701-02 D
• Check the motor harness connection.
• Check for torn paper on the paper path or foreign objects in the
drive area.
• Replace the motor harness.
• Replace the motor.
• Replace the board.

1203
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Protection device break error 4 (1-pass ADF)

The non-interlock power supply system protection device broke the circuit
with the 24V power supply on.
Details:
A motor defect or a short circuit occurred in either the pick-up motor,
transmission stamp, or bottom plate lift motor and the non-interlock power
system protection device broke the circuit.
SC702-04 D
• Motor defect in non-interlock power supply system.
• Harness broken

• Replace the pick-up motor, transmission stamp solenoid, or bottom

plate lift motor.
• Replace the harness of pick-up motor, transmission stamp solenoid,
or bottom plate lift motor.
• Replace the board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Protection device break error 5 (1-pass ADF)

The non-interlock power supply system protection device broke the circuit
with the 24V power supply on.
Details:
A motor defect or a short circuit occurred in either the feed motor, pull-out
motor, intermediate motor, scanning motor, or exit motor and the non-
interlock power system protection device broke the circuit.
SC702-05 D
• Motor defect in non-interlock power supply system.
• Harness broken

• Replace the feed motor, pull-out motor, intermediate motor,

scanning motor, or exit motor.
• Replace the harness of feed motor, pull-out motor, intermediate
motor, scanning motor, or exit motor.
• Replace the board.

1204
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Downstream device communication error (D751)

• Communication with the downstream device has established, but the

device is not responding to the command sent out, even after being
sent three times.
• The port level of the downstream device does not become H level
(break cancel) within specified time.
SC719-07 D
• Interface cable (downstream device side) connector disconnected
or broken
• Board defective (Buffer pass unit or downstream device)

• Replace the interface cable between buffer pass unit and

downstream device or reconnect the connectors.
• Replace the board (of the buffer pass unit or downstream device).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Buffer pass unit_CTB_+24V_Power supply error

Detected +24V power OFF of the Buffer pass unit PCB: CTB.

• Buffer pass unit PSU defect

• Connecter disconnected
• Harness ground fault/broken
• 24V load (motor/fan) layer short
SC719-08 D • PCB defective
• Fuse tripped (PSU, PCB)

• Replace the Buffer pass unit PSU.

• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the motor/fan.
• Replace the PCB.

1205
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Buffer pass unit_CTB_+24VINT_Power supply error

Detected +24VINT power OFF of the Buffer pass unit PCB: CTB.

• Buffer pass unit PSU defect

• Connecter disconnected
• Harness ground fault/broken
• 24V load (motor/fan) layer short
• PCB defective
SC719-09 D
• Fuse tripped (PSU, PCB)
• PCB relay defect

• Replace the Buffer pass unit PSU.

• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the motor/fan.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Downstream device communication error (D703/D704)

Communication with the downstream device has established, but the

device is not responding to the command sent out, even after being sent
three times.

• Interface cable (downstream device side) connector disconnected

SC720-01 D or broken
• PCB of downstream device defective
• Controller PCB defective

• Replace the controller board.

• Replace the PCB of downstream device.
• Replace the interface cable.

1206
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Protection device break error 1 (D703/D704)

Protection device break error (fuse tripped)

• Short-circuit
SC720-03 B • Overload
• Motor/solenoid defective

• Check the harness.

• Replace the PCB/motor/solenoid.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Protection device break error 1 (2000/3000-sheet finisher with

Mailbox)

Protection device break error (fuse tripped)

• Short-circuit
• Overload
• Motor/solenoid defective
SC720-04 B
2000/3000-sheet finisher
• Check the harness.
• Replace the PCB.
Mailbox
• Check the harness.
• Replace the PCB.
• Replace the motor/solenoid.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC720-10 B Entrance Transport Motor Error (2000/3000

SC720-11 B Horizontal Transport Motor Error (2000/3000

SC720-12 B Pre Stack Transport Motor Error (2000/3000

SC720-13 B Middle Transport Motor Error (2000/3000

1207
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC720-16 B Tray Exit Motor Error (2000/3000

Motor driver detected an error (DC motor control error).

(The first time: jam display, the second time: SC)

• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Encoder defective

• Check motor connection.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC720-20 B Lower Junction Gate Motor Error (2000/3000

SC720-24 B Paper Exit Gate Motor Error (2000/3000

• Motor driver detected an error (short-circuit or overheat). (SC from

the first time)
• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)

• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

1208
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC720-25 B Punch Motor Error (2000/3000

SC720-27 B Punch Drive Motor Error (2000/3000

SC720-28 B Paper Position Sensor Side Motor Error (2000/3000

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulse). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)

• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC720-30 B Jogger Motor Error (2000/3000

SC720-33 B Positioning Roller Motor Error (2000/3000

SC720-41 B Feed Out Motor Error (2000/3000

SC720-42 B Corner Stapler Movement Motor Error (2000/3000

1209
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• Motor driver detected an error (short-circuit or overheat). (SC from

the first time)
• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)

• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Corner Stapling Motor Error (D703/D704)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified time (t0 sec). (The first time: jam display, the second
time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified time (t1 sec). (The first time: jam display, the
second time: SC)
SC720-44 B • Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

1210
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC720-50 B Booklet Jogger Motor Error (2000/3000

SC720-51 B Booklet Guide Motor Error (2000/3000

SC720-53 B Booklet Fence Motor Error (2000/3000

• Motor driver detected an error (short-circuit or overheat). (SC from

the first time)
• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)

• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

1211
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Booklet Stapling Motor Error (D703/D704)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified time (t0 sec). (The first time: jam display, the second
time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified time (t1 sec). (The first time: jam display, the
second time: SC)
SC720-60 B • Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Movement Roller Transport Motor Error (D703/D704)

Motor driver detected an error (DC motor control error).

(The first time: jam display, the second time: SC)

• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
SC720-62 B
• Overload
• Encoder defective

• Check the motor connection.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the PCB.

1212
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Folding Transport Motor Error (D703/D704)

Motor driver detected an error (short-circuit or overheat). (The first time:

jam display, the second time: SC)

• Motor defective
SC720-63 B • Connecter disconnected
• Overload

• Check the motor connection.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC720-65 B Press Folding Motor Error (D703/D704)

• Motor driver detected an error (short-circuit or overheat). (SC from

the first time)
• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)

• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

1213
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Tray Lift Motor Error (D703/D704)

• Motor controller detected an error (overload). (The first time: jam

display, the second time: SC)
• When descending, paper sensor is still detecting paper after the
specified time (t0 sec). (The first time: jam display, the second time:
SC)
• When ascending, paper sensor did not detect paper within
specified time (t1 sec). (The first time: jam display, the second time:
SC720-70 B SC)

• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC720-71 B Shift Motor Error (D703/D704)

SC720-72 B Shift Jogger Front Motor Error (D703/D704)

SC720-73 B Shift Jogger Rear Motor Error (D703/D704)

SC720-74 B Shift Jogger Retraction Motor Error (D703/D704)

1214
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• Motor driver detected an error (short-circuit or overheat). (SC from

the first time)
• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)

• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

1215
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Stacking Roller Motor Error (D703/D704)

• Motor driver detected an error (DC motor control error). (The first
time: jam display, the second time: SC)
• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified time (t0 sec). (The first time: jam display, the second
time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified time (t1 sec). (The first time: jam display, the
SC720-75 B second time: SC)

• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC720-77 B Leading Edge Guide Motor Error (D703/D704)

1216
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• Motor driver detected an error (short-circuit or overheat). (SC from

the first time)
• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)

• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

1217
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Trailing Edge Pressure Plate Motor Error (D703/D704)

• Motor driver detected an error (DC motor control error). (The first
time: jam display, the second time: SC)
• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified time (t0 sec). (The first time: jam display, the second
time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified time (t1 sec). (The first time: jam display, the
SC720-78 B second time: SC)

• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Protection device break error 2 (D703/D704)

Protection device break error (fuse tripped)

• Short-circuit
• Overload
• Motor/solenoid defective
SC720-80 B
D703/D704:
• Check the harness/replace the PCB.
Inserter:
• Check the harness.
• Replace the PCB.
• Replace the motor.

1218
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Upper Transport Motor Error (D707)

• Motor pulse not detected for a specified time. (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• The motor speed does not reach the specified value after a specified
time (t1msec) from motor startup.

SC722-10 B • Motor defective

• Connecter disconnected
• Overload

• Check motor connection.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Lower Transport Motor Error (D707)

• Motor pulse not detected for a specified time. (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)

• Motor defective
SC722-14 B • Connecter disconnected
• Overload

• Check motor connection.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC722-15 B Pre-stack Tansport Motor Error (D707)

SC722-16 B Upper Tray Exit Motor Error (D707)

SC722-17 B Shift Tray Exit Motor Error (D707)

SC722-18 B Stapler Exit Motor Error (D707)

1219
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Motor driver detected an open circuit or short-circuit.

(SC from the first time)

• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected

• Check motor connection.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC722-20 B Upper Tray Junction Gate Motor Error (D707)

SC722-21 B Stapler Junction Gate Motor Error (D707)

SC722-22 B Pre-stack Junction Gate Motor Error (D707)

SC722-23 B Pre-stack Paper Stopper Motor Error (D707)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified time (t0 ms). (The first time: jam display, the second
time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified time (t1 ms). (The first time: jam display, the
second time: SC)

• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

1220
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Exit Guide Motor Error (D707)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified time (t0 ms). (The first time: jam display, the second
time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified time (t1 ms). (The first time: jam display, the
second time: SC)
SC722-24 B • Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Punch Motor Error (D707)

• No change to the punch home position sensor after a specified time

(t1ms) from punch operation. (The first time: jam display, the second
time: SC)
• No change to the punch home position sensor within a specified
number of pulses (p0 pulses) from punch operation. (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)
SC722-25 B • Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

1221
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Jogger Motor Error (D707)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified time (t0 ms). (The first time: jam display, the second
time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)
SC722-30 B • Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Positioning Roller Motor Error (D707)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)
SC722-33 B • Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

1222
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Positioning Roller Transport Motor Error (D707)

Motor driver detected an open circuit or short-circuit. (SC from the first
time)

• Motor defective
SC722-34 B • Connecter disconnected
• Home position sensor defective

• Check motor connection.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Stack Plate-Center Motor Error (D707)

• The drive unit in the staple tray does not return to the home position
within a specified time (t0ms). (The first time: jam display, the second
time: SC)
• When the drive unit in the staple tray was moving away from the
home position, the home position was still detected after a specified
time (t1ms). (The first time: jam display, the second time: SC)
SC722-35 B • Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

1223
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Stapler Plate-Front Motor Error (D707)

• The drive unit in the staple tray does not return to the home position
within a specified time (t0ms). (The first time: jam display, the second
time: SC)
• When the drive unit in the staple tray was moving away from the
home position, the home position was still detected after a specified
time (t1ms). (The first time: jam display, the second time: SC)
SC722-36 B • Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Stapler Plate-Rear Motor Error (D707)

• The drive unit in the staple tray does not return to the home position
within a specified time (t0ms). (The first time: jam display, the second
time: SC)
• When the drive unit in the staple tray was moving away from the
home position, the home position was still detected after a specified
time (t1ms). (The first time: jam display, the second time: SC)
SC722-37 B • Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

1224
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Stapler Movement Motor Error (D707)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified time (t0 ms). (The first time: jam display, the second
time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified time (t1 ms). (The first time: jam display, the
second time: SC)
SC722-39 B • Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Stapler Rotation Motor Error (D707)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified time (t0 ms). (The first time: jam display, the second
time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified time (t1 ms). (The first time: jam display, the
second time: SC)
SC722-40 B • Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

1225
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Stack Feed-Out Belt Motor Error (D707)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified time (t1 sec). (The first time: jam display, the
second time: SC)
SC722-41 B • Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Stapler Motor Error (D707)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)
SC722-42 B • Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

1226
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Stapler Rotation Motor Error (D707)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)
SC722-43 B • Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Stapler Hammer Motor Error (D707)

• The staple drive unit does not complete operation within specified
time (t0ms). (The first time: jam display, the second time: SC)
• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)

• Overload due to staple jam or number of sheets exceeding the limit,

SC722-44 B etc.
• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

1227
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Shift Tray Lift Motor Error (D707)

• When ascending, paper sensor did not detect paper within

specified time (t0 sec). (The first time: jam display, the second time:
SC)
• When descending, paper sensor is still detecting paper after the
specified time (t1 sec). (The first time: jam display, the second time:
SC)

SC722-70 B • Overload due to staple jam or number of sheets exceeding the limit,
etc.
• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Shift Motor Error (D707)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified time (t0 sec). (The first time: jam display, the second
time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified time (t1 sec). (The first time: jam display, the
second time: SC)

SC722-71 B • Overload due to staple jam or number of sheets exceeding the limit,
etc.
• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

1228
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Shift Jogger Motor Error (D707)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)

SC722-72 B • Overload due to staple jam or number of sheets exceeding the limit,
etc.
• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Shift Jogger Lift Motor Error (D707)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)

SC722-74 B • Overload due to staple jam or number of sheets exceeding the limit,
etc.
• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

1229
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Stacking Roller Drug Motor Error (D707)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)

SC722-75 B • Overload due to staple jam or number of sheets exceeding the limit,
etc.
• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Stacking Roller Motor Error (D707)

Motor driver detected an open circuit or short-circuit. (SC from the first
time)

• Motor defective
SC722-76 B
• Connecter disconnected

• Check motor connection.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the PCB.

1230
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Downstream device communication error (D615)

• Communication with the downstream device has established, but the

device is not responding to the command sent out, even after being
sent three times.
• The port level of the downstream device does not become H level
(break cancel) within specified time.

SC725-01 D • Interface cable (downstream device side) connector disconnected

or broken
• PCB of downstream device defective
• Controller PCB defective

• Replace the interface cable.

• Replace the PCB of downstream device.
• Replace the controller board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Reg. Roller Transport Motor Error (D615)

• Motor driver detected an error. (SC from the first time)

• Overcurrent to the motor.

SC725-12 B • Motor drive overheat

• Replace the controller board.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the harness.

1231
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Dynamic Roller Transport Motor Error (D615)

• Motor driver detected an error. (SC from the first time)

• Overcurrent to the motor.

SC725-13 B • Motor drive overheat

• Replace the controller board.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the harness.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Z-fold top tray exit motor error (D615)

• Motor driver detected an error. (SC from the first time)

• Overcurrent to the motor.

SC725-14 B • Motor drive overheat

• Replace the controller board.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the harness.

1232
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Z-fold stopper 1 Motor error (D615)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)
• Motor driver detected an error. (SC from the first time)
SC725-30 B • Overcurrent to the motor.
• Motor drive overheat
• Connector disconnected

• Replace the controller board.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the harness.
• Re-connect the connector.
• Replace the sensor.

1233
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

2nd Stopper Motor Error (D615)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)
• Motor driver detected an error. (SC from the first time)
SC725-31 B • Overcurrent to the motor.
• Motor drive overheat
• Connector disconnected

• Replace the controller board.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the harness.
• Re-connect the connector.
• Replace the sensor.

1234
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

3rd Stopper Motor Erro (D615)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)
• Motor driver detected an error. (SC from the first time)
SC725-32 B • Overcurrent to the motor.
• Motor drive overheat
• Connector disconnected

• Replace the controller board.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the harness.
• Re-connect the connector.
• Replace the sensor.

1235
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Jogger Fence Motor Error (D615)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)
• Motor driver detected an error. (SC from the first time)
SC725-33 B • Overcurrent to the motor.
• Motor drive overheat
• Connector disconnected

• Replace the controller board.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the harness.
• Re-connect the connector.
• Replace the sensor.

1236
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Dynamic Roller Lift Motor Error (D615)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)
• Motor driver detected an error. (SC from the first time)
SC725-34 B • Overcurrent to the motor.
• Motor drive overheat
• Connector disconnected

• Replace the controller board.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the harness.
• Re-connect the connector.
• Replace the sensor.

1237
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Registration Roller Release Motor Error (D615)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)
• Motor driver detected an error. (SC from the first time)
SC725-35 B • Overcurrent to the motor.
• Motor drive overheat
• Connector disconnected

• Replace the controller board.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the harness.
• Re-connect the connector.
• Replace the sensor.

1238
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

FM2 Direct-Send JG Motor Error (D615)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)
• Motor driver detected an error. (SC from the first time)
SC725-36 B • Overcurrent to the motor.
• Motor drive overheat
• Connector disconnected

• Replace the controller board.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the harness.
• Re-connect the connector.
• Replace the sensor.

1239
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

FM6 Pawl Motor Error (D615)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)
• Motor driver detected an error. (SC from the first time)
SC725-37 B • Overcurrent to the motor.
• Motor drive overheat
• Connector disconnected

• Replace the controller board.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the harness.
• Re-connect the connector.
• Replace the sensor.

1240
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Fold Plate Motor Error (D615)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)
• Motor driver detected an error. (SC from the first time)
SC725-38 B • Overcurrent to the motor.
• Motor drive overheat
• Connector disconnected

• Replace the controller board.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the harness.
• Re-connect the connector.
• Replace the sensor.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

1st Fold Motor Error (D615)

• Motor driver detected an error. (SC from the first time)

• Overcurrent to the motor.

SC725-39 B • Motor drive overheat

• Replace the controller board.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the harness.

1241
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

2nd Fold Motor Error (D615)

• Motor driver detected an error. (SC from the first time)

• Overcurrent to the motor.

SC725-40 B • Motor drive overheat

• Replace the controller board.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the harness.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Crease Motor Error (D615)

• Motor driver detected an error. (SC from the first time)

• Overcurrent to the motor.

SC725-41 B • Motor drive overheat

• Replace the controller board.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the harness.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Horizontal Transport Motor Error (D615)

• Motor driver detected an error. (SC from the first time)

• Overcurrent to the motor.

SC725-71 D • Motor drive overheat

• Replace the controller board.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the harness.

1242
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Horizontal exit motor error (D615)

• Motor driver detected an error. (SC from the first time)

• Overcurrent to the motor.

SC725-72 D • Motor drive overheat

• Replace the controller board.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the harness.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Horizontal exit motor error (D615)

• Motor driver detected an error. (SC from the first time)

• Overcurrent to the motor.

SC725-73 D • Motor drive overheat

• Replace the controller board.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the harness.

1243
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Entrance JG Motor Error (D615)

• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)
• Motor driver detected an error. (SC from the first time)
SC725-74 D • Overcurrent to the motor.
• Motor drive overheat
• Connector disconnected

• Replace the controller board.

• Replace the motor.
• Replace the harness.
• Re-connect the connector.
• Replace the sensor.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Downstream device communication error (D712)

• Communication with the downstream device has established, but the

device is not responding to the command sent out, even after being
sent three times.
• The port level of the downstream device does not become H level
(break cancel) within specified time.
SC740-01 D
• Interface cable (between inserter and downstream device)
connector disconnected or broken
• PCB (of inserter or downstream device) defective

• Reconnect or replace the interface cable (between inserter and

downstream device) connector disconnected or broken
• Replace the PCB.

1244
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Bottom Plate Lift Motor Error (D711)

• The lift motor rotates in the ascending direction but the upper limit
sensor does not detect within specified time (t0sec). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)
• The lift motor rotates in the descending direction but the lower limit
sensor does not detect within specified time (t0sec). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)

• Motor defective
SC740-10 B • Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Upper limit sensor defective
• Lower limit sensor defective

• Check the motor and upper limit sensor.

• Check the lower limit sensor.
• Replace the motor/upper limit sensor./lower limit sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

1245
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

1st Lift Motor Error (D712)

• The lift motor rotates in the ascending direction but the upper limit
sensor does not detect within specified time (t0sec). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)
• The lift motor rotates in the descending direction but the lower limit
sensor does not detect within specified time (t0sec). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)

• Lift motor defective/Connecter disconnected

• Upper limit sensor defective/Connecter disconnected
• Lower limit sensor defective/Connecter disconnected
SC740-10 B
• Harness broken
• PCB defective
• Mechanical defect of the tray lift mechanism

• Replace or reconnect the lift motor.

• Replace or reconnect the upper limit sensor.
• Replace or reconnect the lower limit sensor.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the PCB.
• Repair the tray lift mechanism

1246
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

1st Pick-Up Motor Error (D712)

• Home position is not detected within a specified number of pulses

after the pick-up motor is driven. (The first time: jam display, the
second time: SC)
• Home position is still detected after the pick-up motor has been
driven for a specified number of pulses. (The first time: jam display,
the second time: SC)

• Pick-up motor defective/connector disconnected

• Home position sensor defective/connecter disconnected
SC740-11 B
• Harness broken
• PCB defective
• Mechanical defect of the pick-up mechanism

• Replace or reconnect the pick-up motor.

• Replace or reconnect the home position sensor.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the PCB.
• Repair the pick-up mechanism

1247
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

2nd Lift Motor Error (D712)

• The lift motor rotates in the ascending direction but the upper limit
sensor does not detect within specified time (t0sec). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)
• The lift motor rotates in the descending direction but the lower limit
sensor does not detect within specified time (t0sec). (The first time:
jam display, the second time: SC)

• Lift motor defective/Connecter disconnected

• Upper limit sensor defective/Connecter disconnected
• Lower limit sensor defective/Connecter disconnected
SC740-20 B
• Harness broken
• PCB defective
• Mechanical defect of the tray lift mechanism

• Replace or reconnect the lift motor.

• Replace or reconnect the upper limit sensor.
• Replace or reconnect the lower limit sensor.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the PCB.
• Repair the tray lift mechanism

1248
 Service Call 700-780

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

2nd Pick-Up Motor Error (D712)

• Home position is not detected within a specified number of pulses

after the pick-up motor is driven. (The first time: jam display, the
second time: SC)
• Home position is still detected after the pick-up motor has been
driven for a specified number of pulses. (The first time: jam display,
the second time: SC)

• Pick-up motor defective/connecter disconnected

• Home position sensor defective/connecter disconnected
SC740-21 B
• Harness broken
• PCB defective
• Mechanical defect of the pick-up mechanism

• Replace or reconnect the pick-up motor.

• Replace or reconnect the home position sensor.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the PCB.
• Repair the pick-up mechanism

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Protection device break error 1 (Mailbox)

Protection device break error (fuse tripped)

• Short-circuit
• Overload
SC745-03 B
• Motor/solenoid defective

• Check the harness.

• Replace the PCB.
• Replace the motor/solenoid.

1249
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

De-curl Pressure Adjustment Motor Error (D727)

• The home position sensor did not change from non-blocked to

blocked 9 seconds after homing operation started.
• The home position sensor did not change from blocked to non-
blocked 1.2 seconds after homing operation started.

• Motor defective
SC773-00 D
• Connecter disconnected
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

• Check the connections of the motor and home position sensor.

• Replace the motor/home position sensor.
• Replace the PCB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

LCT high efficiency controller communication error

An error was detected during read/write access in SPI communication

between SPU and high-efficiency controller.

SC780-50 B • PCB defective

• High-efficiency controller defective
• High-efficiency controller system clock error

• Replace the PCB.

1250
 Service Call 816-899

Service Call 816-899

SC800 (Controller)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC816 [0x0000] Energy save I/O subsystem error

SC816-01 D Subsystem error

SC816-02 D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error

SC816-03 D Transition to STR was denied.

SC816-04 D Interrupt in kernel communication driver

SC816-05 D Preparation for transition to STR failed.

SC816-07 D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error

SC816-08 D Sysarch (LPUX_ENGINE_TIMERCTRL) error

SC816-09 D Sysarch (LPUX_RETURN_FACTOR_STR) error

SC816-10 D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error

SC816-11 D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error

SC816-12 D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error

SC816-13 D open() error

SC816-14 D Memory address error

SC816-15 D open() error

SC816-16 D open() error

SC816-17 D open() error

SC816-18 D open() error

SC816-19 D Double open() error

SC816-20 D open() error

SC816-22 D Parameter error

1251
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC816-23 D read() error

SC816-24 D read() error

SC816-25 D read() error

SC816-26 D write() communication retry error

SC816-27 D write() communication retry error

SC816-28 D write() communication retry error

SC816-29 D write() communication retry error

SC816-30 D write() communication retry error

SC816-35 D read() error

SC816-36 D Subsystem error

SC816-37 D Subsystem error

SC816-38 D Subsystem error

SC816-39 D Subsystem error

SC816-40 D Subsystem error

SC816-41 D Subsystem error

SC816-42 D Subsystem error

SC816-43 D Subsystem error

SC816-44 D Subsystem error

SC816-45 D Subsystem error

SC816-46 D Subsystem error

SC816-47 D Subsystem error

SC816--48 D Subsystem error

SC816--49 D Subsystem error

SC816--50 D Subsystem error

SC816--51 D Subsystem error

1252
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC816--52 D Subsystem error

SC816--53 D Subsystem error

SC816--54 D Subsystem error

SC816--55 D Subsystem error

SC816--56 D Subsystem error

SC816--57 D Subsystem error

SC816--58 D Subsystem error

SC816--59 D Subsystem error

SC816--60 D Subsystem error

SC816--61 D Subsystem error

SC816--62 D Subsystem error

SC816--63 D Subsystem error

SC816--64 D Subsystem error

SC816--65 D Subsystem error

SC816--66 D Subsystem error

SC816--67 D Subsystem error

SC816--68 D Subsystem error

SC816--69 D Subsystem error

SC816--70 D Subsystem error

SC816--71 D Subsystem error

SC816--72 D Subsystem error

SC816--73 D Subsystem error

SC816--74 D Subsystem error

SC816--75 D Subsystem error

SC816--76 D Subsystem error

1253
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC816--77 D Subsystem error

SC816--78 D Subsystem error

SC816--79 D Subsystem error

SC816--80 D Subsystem error

SC816--81 D Subsystem error

SC816--82 D Subsystem error

SC816--83 D Subsystem error

SC816--84 D Subsystem error

SC816--85 D Subsystem error

SC816--86 D Subsystem error

SC816--87 D Subsystem error

SC816--88 D Subsystem error

SC816--89 D Subsystem error

SC816--90 D Subsystem error

SC816--91 D Subsystem error

SC816--92 D Subsystem error

SC816--93 D Subsystem error

SC816--94 D Subsystem error

Energy save I/O subsystem detected some abnormality.

• Energy save I/O subsystem defective

• Energy save I/O subsystem detected a controller board error (non-
response).
• Error was detected during preparation for transition to STR.

• Turn the main power off/on.

• Replace the controller board.

1254
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Fatal kernel error

Due to a control error, a RAM overflow occurred during system

processing. One of the following messages was displayed on the
operation panel.

0x5032 HAIC-P2 error

0x5245 Link-up fail

0x5355 L2 Status Time Out

SC819-00 D 0x696e gwinit died

0x766d Vm_pageout: VM is full

554C USB loader defect

Other Other error

• System program defective

• Controller board defective
• Optional board defective
• Replace controller firmware

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

EEPROM access error

An error occurred during I/O processing.

• A read error occurred and 3 retries failed.
SC840-00 D
• A write error occurred.

EEPROM defective or end-of-life

1255
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

EEPROM read data error

Compared the data from 3 areas of the EEPROM mirror data with the
SC841-00 D original data and all 3 of them were different from the original data.

Data in the specific area of the EEPROM has been modified.

SC842-02 SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

D135 RTB 57
Nand-Flash updating verification error

During remote ROM update or ROM update, the SCS detected a write
SC842-00 C error (verify error) regarding the data written to the Nand-Flash.

Nand-Flash damaged

Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Nand-Flash bad block number exceeding the threshold

When the status of the Nand-Flash was checked at power-on or when

returning from energy saver mode, the number of bad blocks exceeded
SC842-01 B the threshold.

Nand-Flash bad block number exceeding the threshold

Replace the controller board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Number of times of Nand-Flash block erase exceeding the threshold

When the status of the Nand-Flash was checked at power-on or when

returning from energy saver mode, the number of times the block was
SC842-02 B erased exceeded the threshold.

Number of times of Nand-Flash block erase exceeding the threshold

Replace the controller board.

1256
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Bluetooth device connection error

The Bluetooth hardware (USB type) was connected after the machine
was turned on.
SC853-00 B
The Bluetooth hardware (USB type) was connected after the machine
was turned on.

Turn the main power with the Bluetooth hardware (USB type) connected.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Bluetooth device disconnected

The Bluetooth hardware (USB type) was disconnected after the machine
was turned on.
SC854-00 B
The Bluetooth hardware (USB type) was disconnected after the machine
was turned on.

Turn the main power with the Bluetooth hardware (USB type) connected.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Wireless LAN board error (driver attachment failure)

Wireless LAN board error (wireless LAN card: 802.11 is covered)

• Defective wireless LAN board

SC855-01 B
• Loose connection

• Turn the main power off/on.

• Replace wireless LAN board

1257
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Wireless LAN board error (driver initialization failure)

Wireless LAN board error (wireless LAN card: 802.11 is covered)

• Defective wireless LAN board

SC855-02 B
• Loose connection

• Turn the main power off/on.

• Replace wireless LAN board

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

USB I/F Error

The USB interface is unusable because of a driver error.

SC857-00 B USB driver error (There are three causes of USB error: RX error/CRC
error/STALL. SC is issued only in the case of STALL.)

• Check USB connection.

• Replace the controller board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Data encryption conversion error (HDD Key Setting Error)

A serious error occurred during an attempt to update the encryption key.

• Data in the USB Flash etc. corrupted

SC858-01 -
• Communication error because of electromagnetic interference etc.
• Controller board defective

Replace the board.

1258
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Data encryption conversion error (NVRAM read/write error)

A serious error occurred after data conversion during an attempt to

SC858-02 A update the encryption key.

NVRAM defective

Replace the board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Data encryption conversion error (NVRAM Before Replace error)

A serious error occurred after data conversion during an attempt to

SC858-30 A update the encryption key.

Software error such as conversion parameters being invalid.

Replace the board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Data encryption conversion error (Other Error)

A serious error occurred after data conversion during an attempt to

SC858-31 A update the encryption key.

Controller board defective

Replace the board.

1259
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Data encryption conversion HDD conversion error (HDD check error)

HDD was not converted correctly during an attempt to update the

encryption key.
Only an error screen is displayed and no SC is issued during conversion.
This SC is issued after machine restart.

• HDD conversion was selected in the Encryption key update function

SC859-01 B but the machine was turned on with the HDD removed.
• Power failure occurred during encryption key update.
• HDD was not successfully converted during encryption key update
due to HDD errors or cable noises.

• Check HDD connection.

• Format the HDD.
• If there is a problem with the HDD, it has to be replaced.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Data encryption conversion HDD conversion error (Power failure during

conversion)

HDD was not converted correctly during an attempt to update the

encryption key.
Only an error screen is displayed and no SC is issued during conversion.
This SC is issued after machine restart.
SC859-02 B
Details:
NVRAM/HDD conversion is incomplete.

Power failure occurred during encryption key update.

None
The display after restart instructs the user to format the HDD.

1260
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Data encryption conversion HDD conversion error (Data read/write

command error)

HDD was not converted correctly during an attempt to update the

encryption key.
Only an error screen is displayed and no SC is issued during conversion.
This SC is issued after machine restart.
Details:
SC859-10 B Abnormal DMAC return value has been received two or more times
(DMAC timeout, serial communication error etc.)

HDD was not successfully converted during encryption key update due to
HDD errors or cable noises.

• Check HDD connection.

• Format the HDD.
• If there is a problem with the HDD, it has to be replaced.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC860-00 B HDD startup error at main power on (HDD error)

1261
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• The HDD is connected but the driver detected the following errors.
• SS_NOT_READY:/* (-2)HDD does not become READY*/
• SS_BAD_LABEL:/* (-4)Wrong partition type*/
• SS_READ_ERROR:/* (-5)Error occurred while reading or
checking the label*/
• SS_WRITE_ERROR:/* (-6)Error occurred while writing or
checking the label*/
• SS_FS_ERROR:/* (-7)Failed to repair the filesystem*/
• SS_MOUNT_ERROR:/* (-8)Failed to mount the filesystem*/
• SS_COMMAND_ERROR:/* (-9)Drive not responding to
command*/
• SS_KERNEL_ERROR:/* (-10)Internal kernel error*/
• SS_SIZE_ERROR:/* (-11)Drive size too small*/
• SS_NO_PARTITION:/* (-12)The specified partition does not
exist*/
• SS_NO_FILE:/* (-13)Device file does not exist*/
• Attempted to acquire HDD status through the driver but there has
been no response for 30 seconds or more.

• Unformatted HDD
• Label data corrupted
• HDD defective

Format the HDD through SP mode.

1262
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in an area that does not belong to a partition, such as
the disklabel area.)

Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
SC863-01 D
• Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD,
HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently.
Print the SC log data and check them.

1263
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in partition "a".)

Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
SC863-02 D • Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD,
HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently.
Print the SC log data and check them.

1264
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in partition "b".)

Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
SC863-03 D • Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD,
HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently.
Print the SC log data and check them.

1265
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in partition "c".)

Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
SC863-04 D • Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD,
HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently.
Print the SC log data and check them.

1266
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in partition "d".)

Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
SC863-05 D • Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD,
HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently.
Print the SC log data and check them.

1267
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in partition "e".)

Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
SC863-06 D • Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD,
HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently.
Print the SC log data and check them.

1268
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in partition "f".)

Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
SC863-07 D • Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD,
HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently.
Print the SC log data and check them.

1269
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in partition "g".)

Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
SC863-08 D • Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD,
HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently.
Print the SC log data and check them.

1270
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in partition "h".)

Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
SC863-09 D • Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD,
HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently.
Print the SC log data and check them.

1271
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in partition "i".)

Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
SC863-10 D • Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD,
HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently.
Print the SC log data and check them.

1272
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in partition "j".)

Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
SC863-11 D • Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD,
HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently.
Print the SC log data and check them.

1273
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in partition "k".)

Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
SC863-12 D • Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD,
HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently.
Print the SC log data and check them.

1274
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in partition "l".)

Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
SC863-13 D • Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD,
HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently.
Print the SC log data and check them.

1275
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in partition "m".)

Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
SC863-14 D • Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD,
HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently.
Print the SC log data and check them.

1276
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in partition "n".)

Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
SC863-15 D • Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD,
HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently.
Print the SC log data and check them.

1277
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in partition "o".)

Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
SC863-16 D • Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD,
HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently.
Print the SC log data and check them.

1278
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in partition "p".)

Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
SC863-17 D • Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD,
HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently.
Print the SC log data and check them.

1279
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in partition "q".)

Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
SC863-18 D • Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD,
HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently.
Print the SC log data and check them.

1280
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in partition "r.)

Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
SC863-19 D • Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD,
HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently.
Print the SC log data and check them.

1281
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in partition "r.)

Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
SC863-20 D • Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD,
HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently.
Print the SC log data and check them.

1282
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in partition "t)

Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
SC863-21 D • Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD,
HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently.
Print the SC log data and check them.

1283
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in partition "u".)

Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
SC863-22 D • Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD,
HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently.
Print the SC log data and check them.

1284
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in partition "y".)

Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
SC863-23 D • Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD,
HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently.
Print the SC log data and check them.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-01 D (An error occurred in an area that does not belong to a partition, such as
the disklabel area.)

• Format the HDD.

• Replace the HDD.

1285
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-02 D
(An error occurred in partition "a".)

• Format the HDD.

• Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-03 D
(An error occurred in partition "b".)

• Format the HDD.

• Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-04 D
(An error occurred in partition "c".)

• Format the HDD.

• Replace the HDD.

1286
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-05 D
(An error occurred in partition "d".)

• Format the HDD.

• Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-06 D
(An error occurred in partition "e".)

• Format the HDD.

• Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-07 D
(An error occurred in partition "f".)

• Format the HDD.

• Replace the HDD.

1287
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-08 D
(An error occurred in partition "g".)

• Format the HDD.

• Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-09 D
(An error occurred in partition "h".)

• Format the HDD.

• Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-10 D
(An error occurred in partition "i".)

• Format the HDD.

• Replace the HDD.

1288
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-11 D
(An error occurred in partition "j".)

• Format the HDD.

• Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-12 D
(An error occurred in partition "k".)

• Format the HDD.

• Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-13 D
(An error occurred in partition "l".)

• Format the HDD.

• Replace the HDD.

1289
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-14 D
(An error occurred in partition "m".)

• Format the HDD.

• Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-15 D
(An error occurred in partition "n".)

• Format the HDD.

• Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-16 D
(An error occurred in partition "o".)

• Format the HDD.

• Replace the HDD.

1290
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-17 D
(An error occurred in partition "p".)

• Format the HDD.

• Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-18 D
(An error occurred in partition "q".)

• Format the HDD.

• Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-19 D
(An error occurred in partition "r".)

• Format the HDD.

• Replace the HDD.

1291
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-20 D
(An error occurred in partition "s".)

• Format the HDD.

• Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-21 D
(An error occurred in partition "t".)

• Format the HDD.

• Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-22 D
(An error occurred in partition "u".)

• Format the HDD.

• Replace the HDD.

1292
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-23 D
(An error occurred in partition "v".)

• Format the HDD.

• Replace the HDD.

SC865 SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

RTB 162
HDD access error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-00 D The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).

Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD access error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
SC865-01 D or SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in an area that does not belong to a partition, such as
the disklabel area.)

Replace the HDD.

1293
 5. Troubleshooting

SC865
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
RTB 162
HDD access error
D137 RTB
206
During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-02 D The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in partition "a".)

Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD access error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-03 D The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in partition "b".)

Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD access error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-03 D The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in partition "c".)

Replace the HDD.

1294
 Service Call 816-899

SC865 SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

RTB 162
HDD access error
D137 RTB
206 During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-05 D The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in partition "d".)

Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD access error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-06 D The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in partition "e".)

Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD access error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-07 D The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in partition "f".)

Replace the HDD.

1295
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC865
RTB 162
HDD access error
D137
RTB 206 During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-08 D The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in partition "g".)

Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD access error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-09 D The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in partition "h".)

Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD access error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-10 D The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in partition "i".)

Replace the HDD.

1296
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC865
RTB 162 HDD access error
D137
RTB 206 During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-11 D The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in partition "j".)

Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD access error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-12 D The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in partition "k".)

Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD access error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-13 D The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in partition "l".)

Replace the HDD.

1297
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC865
RTB 162
HDD access error
D137
RTB 206 During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-14 D The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in partition "m".)

Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD access error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-15 D The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in partition "n".)

Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD access error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-16 D The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in partition "o".)

Replace the HDD.

1298
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC865
RTB 162
HDD access error
D137 RTB
206 During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-17 D The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in partition "p".)

Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD access error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-18 D The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in partition "q".)

Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD access error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-19 D The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in partition "r".)

Replace the HDD.

1299
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC865
RTB 162 HDD access error
D137
During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.
RTB 206

SC865-20 D The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in partition "s".)

Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD access error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-21 D The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in partition "t".)

Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD access error

During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-22 D The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in partition "u".)

Replace the HDD.

1300
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC865
RTB 162 HDD access error
D137 RTB
During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.
206

SC865-23 D The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in partition "v".)

Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SD card authentication error

A license error of an application that is started from the SD card was

SC866-00 B detected.

Invalid program data is stored on the SD card.

Store a valid program data on the SD card.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SD card removed

The SD card that starts an application was removed from the slot.
SC867-00 D The SD card that starts an application was removed from the slot (mount
point of /mnt/sd0).

Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SD card removed

The SD card that starts an application was removed from the slot.
SC867-01 D The SD card that starts an application was removed from the slot (mount
point of /mnt/sd1).

Turn the main power off/on.

1301
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SD card removed

The SD card that starts an application was removed from the slot.
SC867-02 D The SD card that starts an application was removed from the slot (mount
point of /mnt/sd2).

Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SD card access error

The SD controller returned an error during operation.

(Error occurred at the mount point of /mnt/sd0)

• SD card defective

SC868-00 D • SD controller defective

• Reformat the SD card (using the "SD Formatter" made by

Panasonic).*
• Check the SD card insertion status.
• Replace the SD card.
• Replace the controller board.

* Do not format an SD card supplied with the main machine or sold as an option. You may only format SD
cards used for Firmware Update by a Customer Engineer.

1302
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SD card access error

The SD controller returned an error during operation.

(Error occurred at the mount point of /mnt/sd1)

• SD card defective
• SD controller defective

SD card that starts an application

• Turn the main power off and check the SD card insertion status.
• If no problem is found, insert the SD card and turn the main
power on.
SC868-01 D
• If an error occurs, replace the SD card.
• SD card for users
• In case of a file system error, reformat the SD card (using the
"SD Formatter" made by Panasonic).*
• In case of a device access error, turn the main power off and
check the SD card insertion status.
• If no problem is found, insert the SD card and turn the main
power on.
• If an error occurs, use another SD card.
• If the error persists

* Do not format an SD card supplied with the main machine or sold as an option. You may only format SD
cards used for Firmware Update by a Customer Engineer.

1303
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SD card access error

The SD controller returned an error during operation.

(Error occurred at the mount point of /mnt/sd1)

• SD card defective
• SD controller defective

SD card that starts an application

• Turn the main power off and check the SD card insertion status.
• If no problem is found, insert the SD card and turn the main
power on.
SC868-02 D
• If an error occurs, replace the SD card.
• SD card for users
• In case of a file system error, reformat the SD card (using the
"SD Formatter" made by Panasonic).*
• In case of a device access error, turn the main power off and
check the SD card insertion status.
• If no problem is found, insert the SD card and turn the main
power on.
• If an error occurs, use another SD card.
• If the error persists

* Do not format an SD card supplied with the main machine or sold as an option. You may only format SD
cards used for Firmware Update by a Customer Engineer.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC870-00 B Address Book data error (Anytime: Address Book Error.)

Address Book data error (On startup: Media required for storing the
SC870-01 B
Address Book is missing.)

Address Book data error (On startup: encryption is configured but the
SC870-02 B
module required for encryption (DESS) is missing.)

Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to store

SC870-03 B
internal Address Book.)

1304
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to store

SC870-04 B
delivery sender.)

Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to store

SC870-05 B
delivery destination.)

Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to store

SC870-06 B
information required for LDAP search.)

Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to initialize entries required

SC870-07 B
for machine operation.)

Address Book data error (Machine configuration: HDD is present but the
SC870-08 B
space for storing the Address Book is unusable.)

Address Book data error (Machine configuration: Inconsistency in the

SC870-09 B NVRAM area used for storing settings required for Address Book
configuration.)

Address Book data error (Machine configuration: Cannot make a

SC870-10 B
directory for storing the Address Book in the SD/USB FlashROM.)

Address Book data error(On startup: Inconsistency in Address Book entry

SC870-11 B
number.)

SC870-20 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to initialize file.)

SC870-21 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to generate file.)

SC870-22 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to open file.)

SC870-23 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to write to file.)

SC870-24 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to read file.)

SC870-25 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to check file size.)

SC870-26 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to delete data.)

SC870-27 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to add data.)

Address Book data error (Search: Failed to obtain data from cache when
SC870-30 B
searching in the machine Address Book. delivery destination/sender.)

Address Book data error (Search:Failed to obtain data from cache during
SC870-31 B
LDAP search.)

1305
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Address Book data error (Search:Failed to obtain data from cache while
SC870-32 B
searching the WS-Scanner Address Book.)

SC870-41 B Address Book data error (Cache: failed to obtain data from cache.)

Address Book data error (On startup: Detected abnormality of the

SC870-50 B
Address Book encryption status.)

Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to create directory

SC870-51 B
required for conversion between plaintext and encrypted text.)

Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to convert from

SC870-52 B
plaintext to encrypted text.)

Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to convert from

SC870-53 B
encrypted text to plaintext.)

Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Detected data

SC870-54 B
inconsistency when reading the encrypted Address Book.)

Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to delete file when
SC870-55 B
changing encryption setting.)

Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to erase the file that
SC870-56 B records the encryption key during an attempt to change the encryption
setting.)

Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to move a file during
SC870-57 B
an attempt to change the encryption setting.)

Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to delete a directory

SC870-58 B
during an attempt to change the encryption setting.)

Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Detected a resource

SC870-59 B
shortage during an attempt to change the encryption setting.)

Address Book data error (Unable to obtain the on/off setting for
SC870-60 B
administrator authentication (06A and later).)

1306
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

When an error related to the Address Book is detected during startup or

operation.

• Software bug
• Inconsistency of Address Book source location (machine/delivery
server/LDAP server)
• Inconsistency of Address Book encryption setting or encryption key
(NVRAM or HDD was replaced individually without formatting the
Address Book)
• Address Book storage device (SD/HDD) was temporarily removed
or hardware configuration does not match the application
configuration.
• Address Book data corruption was detected.

• Check the HDD connection.

• Initialize all UCS settings and address/authentication information
(SP5-846-046).
• Initialize the Address Book partition (SP5-832-006).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD mail reception error

An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the

machine was turned on.

• HDD defective
• Power was turned of while the machine used the HDD.
SC872-00 B
• Format the HDD (SP5-832-007).
• Replace the HDD.
When you do the above, the following information will be initialized.
• Partly received partial mail messages.
• Already-read statuses of POP3-received messages (All messages on
the mail server are handled as new messages).

1307
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

HDD mail reception error

An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the

machine was turned on.

• HDD defective
• Power was turned of while the machine used the HDD.
SC873-00 B
• Format the HDD (SP5-832-007).
• Replace the HDD.
When you do the above, the following information will be initialized.
• Default sender name/password (SMB/FTP/NCP)
• Administrator mail address
• Scanner delivery history

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC875-01 D Delete all error (HDD erasure) (hddchack –i error)

SC875-02 D Delete all error (HDD erasure) (Data deletion failure)

An error was detected before HDD/data erasure starts. (Failed to erase

data/failed to logically format HDD)

• HDD logical formatting failed.

• The modules failed to erase data.

Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Log Data Error 1

An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or

SC876-01 D during machine operation.

Damaged log data file

Initialize the HDD (SP5-832-004).

1308
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Log Data Error 2

An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or

during machine operation.
SC876-02 D
Log encryption is enabled but encryption module is not installed.

• Replace or set again the encryption module.

• Disable the log encryption setting.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Log Data Error 3

An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or

during machine operation.

SC876-03 D Inconsistency of encryption key between NV-RAM and HDD.

• Disable the log encryption setting.

• Initialize LCS memory (SP5801-019).
• Initialize the HDD (SP5-832-004).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Log Data Error 4

An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or

during machine operation.

SC876-04 D • Log encryption key is disabled but the log data file is encrypted.
(NVRAM data corruption)
• Log encryption key is enabled but the log data file is not encrypted.
(NVRAM data corruption)

Initialize the HDD (SP5-832-004).

1309
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Log Data Error 5

An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or

during machine operation.

• Only the NV-RAM has been replaced with one previously used in
another machine.
SC876-05 D • Only the HDD has been replaced with one previously used in
another machine.

• Attach the original NV-RAM.

• Attach the original HDD.
• With the configuration that caused the SC, initialize the HDD
(SP5-832-004).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Log Data Error 99

An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or

SC876-99 D during machine operation.

Other causes

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Data Overwrite Security card error

The "Auto Erase Memory" function of the Data Overwrite Security is set to
on but it cannot be done.

• Data Overwrite Security option SD card is broken.

SC877-00 B • Data Overwrite Security option SD card has been removed.

• If the SD card is broken, prepare a new Data Overwrite Security

option SD card and replace the NVRAM.
• If the SD card has been removed, turn the main power off and
reinstall a working Data Overwrite Security option SD card.

1310
 Service Call 816-899

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

TPM electronic authentication error

The machine failed TPM electronic authentication.

System hash registered in the TPM did not match the data on the USB
SC878-00 D flash.

• System module was updated in an unauthorized manner.

• USB flash is not working correctly.

Replace the board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

USB Flash error

USB Flash file system error

SC878-01 D
USB Flash file system has been destroyed.

Replace the controller board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

TPM error

Error occurred in the TPM or TPM driver.

SC878-02 D
TPM defective

Replace the controller board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

TCSD error

Error occurred in TPM software stack.

SC878-03 D • Unable to start TPM

• Necessary files missing from the TPM.

Replace the controller board.

1311
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

MLB error

Reply to MLB access was not returned within a specified time.

SC880-00 D MLB defective

• Replace the MLB.

• Remove the MLB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

D Authentication area error

• Software error detected.

• This error may occur even if IC card option (ERIE/AYU/Greenland
etc.) is not installed.

• This is caused by accumulation of abnormal authentication

SC881-01 information in the software. (User operation will not directly cause
it.)
• Occurs when authentication is done.
Example: When a job is sent to the printer/when logged on from the
operation panel/when logged on from a Web browser

Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

D Software performance error (signal reception end)

Occurs when an internal program behaves abnormally.

SC899-00 In case of a hardware defect

• Replace the hardware.
In case of a software error
• Turn the main power off/on.
• Try updating the firmware.

1312
 Service Call 900-998

Service Call 900-998

SC900 (Engine: Others)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

CPM setting error 1

Comparison of machine serial number (11 digits) and machine

identification code.
Details:
• Machine serial number cannot be identified because of BICU
replacement or malfunctioning.
SC995-01 D • Machine serial number cannot be identified because of NV-RAM
replacement

machine serial number (11 digits) or machine identification code does

not match.

• Enter the machine serial number using SP5-811, and then turn the
power on/off.
• Attach the NV-RAM that was installed previously.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

CPM setting error 2

Comparison of machine serial number (11 digits) and machine

identification code.
Details:
Machine serial number cannot be identified because of NV-RAM
SC995-02 D replacement or malfunctioning.

machine serial number (11 digits) or machine identification code does

not match.

• Attach the NV-RAM that was installed previously.

• Download data on the NV-RAM using SP5-825.

1313
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

CPM setting error 3

Comparison of machine serial number (11 digits) and machine

identification code.
Details:
SC995-03 D Unable to recognize machine identification code because the controller
was replaced incorrectly or is malfunctioning.

machine serial number (11 digits) or machine identification code does

not match.

Replace it with a specified controller.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

CPM setting error 4

Comparison of machine serial number (11 digits) and machine

identification code.
SC995-04 D machine serial number (11 digits) or machine identification code does
not match.

Return the parts to the original configuration, and then replace them
according to the manual.

1314
 Service Call 900-998

SC900 (Controller)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Electric counter error

The electric total counter value is out of specification.

Error is detected when increasing the total counter.

• Unexpected NV-RAM is attached.

SC900-00 D • NV-RAM defective
• NV-RAM data corrupted.
• Data written to unexpected area because of external factor etc.
• The count requested by the SRM on receiving PRT is not completed.

Replace the NV-RAM.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

External Controller Error 1

Notification from external application (external controller)

SC910-00 B
Subject to external application (external controller) specification

Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

External Controller Error 2

Notification from external application (external controller)

SC911-00 B
Subject to external application (external controller) specification

Turn the main power off/on.

1315
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

External Controller Error 3

Notification from external application (external controller)

SC912-00 B
Subject to external application (external controller) specification

Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

External Controller Error 4

Notification from external application (external controller)

SC913-00 B
Subject to external application (external controller) specification

Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

External Controller Error 5

Notification from external application (external controller)

SC914-00 B
Subject to external application (external controller) specification

Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC915-01 A External Controller Error 6 (Egret board error)

SC915-02 A External Controller Error 6 (HDD serial communication error)

SC915-03 A External Controller Error 6 (CPU temperature rise)

External Controller Error 6 (Unable to communicate with GW controller

SC915-04 A
because invalid command was received)

External Controller Error 6(Unable to communicate with GW controller

SC915-05 A
because of an error)

1316
 Service Call 900-998

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Notification from external application (external controller)

Notification from external application (external controller)

Replace the Egret controller board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

External controller down

While EAC (External Application Converter), the conversion

module, was operating normally, the receipt of a power line
interrupt signal from the FLUTE serial driver was detected, of
BREAK signal from the other station was detected.
SC919-00 D
External controller and the machine had been operating correctly (*) but
the external controller was turned off or rebooted, or the video bus was
disconnected.
* Printing or scanning using the external controller.

Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC920-00 B Printer application error (No response at PM startup)

SC920-01 B Printer application error (Timeout during PM operation)

SC920-02 B Printer application error (Unable to obtain work memory)

SC920-03 B Printer application error (Unable to start filter process)

SC920-04 B Printer application error (Abnormal termination of filter process)

When an error is detected in the application, which makes continued

operation impossible.

• Software bug
• Unexpected hardware configuration (such as insufficient memory)

Turn the main power off/on.

1317
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Printer application error (Resident font not found)

Resident font was not found at printer startup.

SC921-00 B
Preinstalled font files not found.

Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Printer application error (Optional font not found)

Optional font required by an emulation was not found at printer startup.

SC921-01 B
Optional emulation font not found

Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC925-00 B NetFile function error

SC925-01 B NetFile function error

1318
 Service Call 900-998

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

The NetFile file management on the HDD cannot be used, or a NetFile

management file is corrupted and operation cannot continue.

• HDD defective
• HDD inconsistency caused by power failure during HDD access,
etc.
• Software bug

If another SC related to HDD errors (SC860 to SC865) is issued at the

same time, the HDD is the cause. Solve the other SC.
• If SC860 to SC865 is not issued
• Turn the main power off/on.
• If this does not work, initialize the HDD NetFile partition
(SP5-832-011). Approval by the customer is required because
received fax message waiting to be delivered and documents
waiting to be captured will be lost.
Procedure:
1. Go into the User Tools mode and do "Delivery Settings" to print all
received fax documents that are scheduled for delivery. Then erase
them.
2. In the User Tools mode, do Document Management> Batch Delete
Transfer Documents.
3. Do SP5832-011, then turn the machine power off and on.
• If this does not solve the problem, initialize all partitions of the HDD
(SP5-832-001), then turn the machine power off and on.
Approval by the customer is required because documents and
Address Book information in the HDD will be lost. Received fax
messages stored are protected but the order may be changed.
• If this does not solve the problem, replace the HDD.

1319
 5. Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Software operation error

Software attempted an unexpected operation.

• Parameter error
• Internal parameter error
SC990-00 D • Insufficient work memory
• Operation error caused by abnormalities that are normally
undetectable.

• Turn the main power off/on.

• Reinstall the software of the controller and BICU board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Recoverable software operation error

Software attempted an unexpected operation.

SC991 covers recoverable errors as opposed toCS990.

• Parameter error
SC991-00 C • Internal parameter error
• Insufficient work memory
• Operation error caused by abnormalities that are normally
undetectable.

Logging only

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Undefined SC issued.

An SC, that is not controlled by the system, occurred.

SC992-00 D • An SC for the previous model was used mistakenly, etc.

• Basically a software bug.

Turn the main power off/on.

1320
 Service Call 900-998

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Operation error caused by abnormalities that are normally undetectable.

An error occurred because the number of records exceeded the

limit for images managed in the service layer of the firmware.
SC994-00 C
This can occur if there are too many application screens open
on the operation panel.

Logging only.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Application function selection error

The application selected by the operation panel key operated

abnormally (No response, abnormal ending).

SC997-00 D Software bug (mainly the application)

• Check the optional RAM, DIMM, boards required by the

application program.
• Check if the combination of downloaded programs are correct.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Application start error

• No application was registered to system within a specified time after

the main power was turned on.
(No application starts/All applications have been terminated
abnormally)
• Application started but cannot be drawn now for some reason.

SC998-00 D • Software bug (mainly the application)

• The optional RAM, DIMM, boards required by the application
program. Are not installed correctly.

• Turn the main power off/on.

• Check the optional RAM, DIMM, boards
• Check the combination of programs
• Replace the controller board.

1321
 5. Troubleshooting

Jam Detection
Jam Displays

When a jam occurs, the location is displayed on the operation panel.

D135/D136

1322
 Jam Detection

D137/D138

Removing Jammed Paper

See the decals on the machine for how to remove jammed paper.

Printer Engine Jam History

How to check

Plotter Jam History can be displayed using SP7-507.

• SP7-507-001 Plotter Jam History Latest
• SP7-507-002 Plotter Jam History Latest 1
• SP7-507-003 Plotter Jam History Latest 2
• SP7-507-004 Plotter Jam History Latest 3
• SP7-507-005 Plotter Jam History Latest 4

1323
 5. Troubleshooting

• SP7-507-006 Plotter Jam History Latest 5

• SP7-507-007 Plotter Jam History Latest 6
• SP7-507-008 Plotter Jam History Latest 7
• SP7-507-009 Plotter Jam History Latest 8
• SP7-507-010 Plotter Jam History Latest 9

Display

• CODE: Displays the jam code.

• SIZE: Displays the paper size code.
• TOTAL: Displays the total number of printer jams (SP7-502-001).
• DATE: Displays the date and time the jam occurred.

• The 10 latest printer jams are displayed.

• Initial jams are not recorded.

Jam Codes and Position Codes

• Jam code: Shows the cause of a jam. Appears in the log data.
• Position code: Shows the location of a jam. Appears on the operation panel.
These are lists of jam codes for the main machine and peripheral devices. Please note:
• Late jam. The paper has failed to arrive within the prescribed time due to a jam that has occurred
upstream of the referenced sensor.
• Lag jam. The paper has failed to leave the location of the referenced sensor within the prescribed
time due to a jam downstream of the referenced sensor.

1324
 Jam Detection

ADF

Jam code Jam description Position code

13 Separation Sensor: Late Jam P1

63 Separation Sensor: Lag Jam P1

14 Skew Correction Sensor: Late Jam P1

64 Skew Correction Sensor: Lag Jam P1

15 Original Set Sensor: Late Jam P1

65 Original Set Sensor: Lag Jam P1

16 Original Registration Sensor: Late Jam P2

66 Original Registration Sensor: Lag Jam P2

17 Original Exit Sensor: Late Jam P2

67 Original Exit Sensor: Lag Jam P2

239 Misfeed:Original Removed P1

1 Initial jam P1

1 Overload jam P1

Main Machine

Jam code Jam description Position code

1 Bypass Paper Feed Sensor A2

1 1st Tray Transport Sensor A1

1 2nd Tray Transport Sensor A1

1 3rd Transport Sensor A1

1 Main relay Sensor B

1 Registration Sensor B

1 PTB Paper Sensor C

1325
 5. Troubleshooting

Jam code Jam description Position code

1 Fusing Entrance Sensor D

1 Fusing Exit Sensor D

1 Invert/Entrance Sensor E

1 Invert/Exit Sensor E

1 Purged Paper Sensor E

1 Exit Invert Sensor E

1 Exid Relay Sensor E

1 Exid Sensor E

1 Invert/Duplex Sensor E

1 Duplex Entrance Sensor Z

1 Duplex Transport Sensor 1 Z

1 Duplex Transport Sensor 2 Z

1 Duplex Transport Sensor 3 Z

1 Duplex Transport Sensor 4 Z

1 Duplex Exit Sensor Z

1 Purged Paper Sensor E

3 Tray 1 No Feed A1

5 Tray 2 No Feed A1

6 Tray 3 No Feed A1

8 Bypass Tray No Feed A2

9 Duplex No Feed Z

10 1st Tray Transport Sensor: Late Jam A1

13 2nd Tray Transport Sensor: Late Jam A1

14 3rd Tray Transport Sensor: Late Jam A1

58 Bypass Feed Sensor: Lag Jam A2

1326
 Jam Detection

Jam code Jam description Position code

60 1st Tray Transport Sensor: Lag Jam A1

63 2nd Tray Transport Sensor: Lag Jam A1

64 3rd Tray Transport Sensor: Lag Jam A1

18 Main Relay Sensor: Late Jam B

18 Main Relay Sensor: Late Jam B

Code 19 19 Registration Sensor: Late Jam B
RTB 169
68 Main Relay Sensor: Lag Jam B

69 Registration Sensor: Lag Jam B

22 PTB Paper Sensor: Late Jam C

24 Fusing Exit Sensor: Late Jam D

72 PTB Paper Sensor: Lag Jam C

74 Fusing Exit Sensor: Lag Jam D

25 Invert/Entrance Sensor: Late Jam E

26 Invert/Exit Sensor: Late Jam E

28 Exit Invert Sensor: Late Jam E

29 ExitRelay Sensor: Late Jam E

30 Exit Sensor: Late Jam E

75 Invert/Entrance Sensor: Lag Jam E

76 Invert/Exit Sensor: Lag Jam E

78 Exit Invert Sensor: Lag Jam E

79 Exit Relay Sensor: Lag Jam E

80 Exit Sensor: Lag Jam E

31 Invert/Duplex Sensor: Late Jam E

33 Duplex Entrance Sensor: Late Jam Z

34 Duplex Transport Sensor 1: Late Jam Z

1327
 5. Troubleshooting

Jam code Jam description Position code

35 Duplex Transport Sensor 2: Late Jam Z

36 Duplex Transport Sensor 3: Late Jam Z

37 Duplex Transport Sensor 4: Late Jam Z

38 Duplex Exit Sensor: Late Jam Z

81 Invert/Duplex Sensor: Lag Jam E

83 Duplex Entrance Sensor: Lag Jam Z

84 Duplex Transport Sensor 1: Lag Jam Z

85 Duplex Transport Sensor 2: Lag Jam Z

86 Duplex Transport Sensor 3: Lag Jam Z

87 Duplex Transport Sensor 4: Lag Jam Z

88 Duplex Exit Sensor: Lag Jam Z

95 Multi feed (front) detected B

Only the location

Code 96
of remaining
RTB 169 96 Timing lost
paper is
displayed.

97 Shift cover Z

98 Paper thickness error B

99 Multi feed (back) detected B

LCIT RT4020 (D709)

Jam code Jam description Position code

1 Paper Feed Sensor U

1 Paper Transport Sensor B3

7 LCT No Feed U

57 Paper Feed Sensor: Lag Jam U

1328
 Jam Detection

Jam code Jam description Position code

17 Paper Transport Sensor: Late Jam U

67 Paper Transport Sensor: Lag Jam B3

LCIT RT4030 (D710)

Jam code Jam description Position code

1 LCT Feed Sensor U

1 LCT Transport Sensor U

1 LCT Exit Sensor U

1 Relay Sensor B3

7 LCT No Feed U

57 LCT Feed Sensor: Lag Jam U

15 LCT Transport Sensor: Late Jam U

65 LCT Transport Sensor: Lag Jam U

16 Relay Sensor: Late Jam U

66 LCT Exit Sensor: Lag Jam U

17 Relay Sensor: Late Jam U

67 Relay Sensor: Lag Jam B3

Finisher SR4090 (D703)

Jam code Jam description Position code

1 Entrance Sensor R1-R5

1 Horizontal Transport Sensor R1-R5

1 Switchback Transport Sensor R1-R5

1 Proof Tray Paper Exit Sensor R1-R5

1329
 5. Troubleshooting

Jam code Jam description Position code

1 Shift Tray Paper Exit Sensor R1-R5

150 Entrance Sensor: Late Jam R1-R5

151 Entrance Sensor: Lag Jam R1-R5

152 Horizontal Transport Sensor: Late Jam R1-R5

153 Horizontal Transport Sensor: Lag Jam R1-R5

154 Switchback Transport Sensor: Late Jam R1-R5

155 Switchback Transport Sensor: Lag Jam R1-R5

156 Proof Tray Jam R1-R5

157 Shift Tray Jam R1-R5

159 Entrance Transport Motor Jam R1-R5

160 Horizontal Transport Motor Jam R1-R5

161 Pre Stack Transport Motor Jam R1-R5

162 Middle Transport Motor Jam R1-R5

163 Tray Exit Motor Jam R1-R5

164 Trailing Edge Pressure Plate Motor Jam R1-R5

165 Paper Exit Gate Motor Jam R1-R5

166 Punch Motor Jam R1-R5

167 Punch Drive Motor Jam R1-R5

168 Paper Position Sensor Side Motor Jam R1-R5

169 Lower Junction Gate Motor Jam R1-R5

170 Jogger Motor Jam R1-R5

171 Positioning Roller Motor Jam R1-R5

172 Feed Out Motor Jam R1-R5

173 Corner Stapler Movement Motor Jam R1-R5

174 Corner Stapling Motor Jam R1-R5

1330
 Jam Detection

Jam code Jam description Position code

183 Tray Lift Motor Jam R1-R5

184 Shift Motor Jam R1-R5

185 Shift Jogger Front Motor Jam R1-R5

186 Shift Jogger Rear Motor Jam R1-R5

187 Shift Jogger Retraction Motor Jam R1-R5

188 Stacking Roller Motor Jam R1-R5

189 Leading Edge Guide Motor Jam R1-R5

190 Main Machine Data Corrupt R1-R5

Booklet Finisher SR4100 (D704)

Jam code Jam description Position code

1 Entrance Sensor R1-R5

1 Horizontal Transport Sensor R1-R5

1 Switchback Transport Sensor R1-R5

1 Proof Tray Paper Exit Sensor R1-R5

1 Shift Tray Paper Exit Sensor R1-R5

1 Booklet Paper Exit Sensor R6-R11

150 Entrance Sensor: Late Jam R1-R5

151 Entrance Sensor: Lag Jam R1-R5

152 Horizontal Transport Sensor: Late Jam R1-R5

153 Horizontal Transport Sensor: Lag Jam R1-R5

154 Switchback Transport Sensor: Late Jam R1-R5

155 Switchback Transport Sensor: Lag Jam R1-R5

156 Proof Tray Jam R1-R5

1331
 5. Troubleshooting

Jam code Jam description Position code

157 Shift Tray Jam R1-R5

158 Booklet Tray Jam R6-R11

159 Entrance Transport Motor Jam R1-R5

160 Horizontal Transport Motor Jam R1-R5

161 Pre Stack Transport Motor Jam R1-R5

162 Middle Transport Motor Jam R1-R5

163 Tray Exit Motor Jam R1-R5

164 Trailing Edge Pressure Plate Motor Jam R1-R5

165 Paper Exit Gate Motor Jam R1-R5

166 Punch Motor Jam R1-R5

167 Punch Drive Motor Jam R1-R5

168 Paper Position Sensor Side Motor Jam R1-R5

169 Lower Junction Gate Motor Jam R1-R5

170 Jogger Motor Jam R1-R5

171 Positioning Roller Motor Jam R1-R5

172 Feed Out Motor Jam R1-R5

173 Corner Stapler Movement Motor Jam R1-R5

174 Corner Stapling Motor Jam R1-R5

175 Booklet Jogger Motor Jam R6-R11

176 Booklet Guide Motor Jam R6-R11

177 Booklet Fence Motor Jam R6-R11

178 Booklet Stapling Motor Jam R6-R11

179 Movement Roller Transport Motor Jam R6-R11

180 Folding Transport Motor Jam R6-R11

182 Press Folding Motor Jam R6-R11

1332
 Jam Detection

Jam code Jam description Position code

183 Tray Lift Motor Jam R1-R5

184 Shift Motor Jam R1-R5

185 Shift Jogger Front Motor Jam R1-R5

186 Shift Jogger Rear Motor Jam R1-R5

187 Shift Jogger Retraction Motor Jam R1-R5

188 Stacking Roller Motor Jam R1-R5

189 Leading Edge Guide Motor Jam R1-R5

190 Main Machine Data Corrupt R1-R5

Finisher SR4110 (D707)

Jam code Jam description Position code

1 Entrance Sensor R1-3

1 Proof Tray Exit Sensor R1-3

1 Proof Tray Exit Sensor R1-3

1 Stapler Exit Sensor R4-8

1 Pre-Stack Sensor R4-8

100 Entrance: Late Jam R1-3

101 Entrance: Lag Jam R1-3

102 Proof Tray Exit: Late Jam R1-3

103 Proof Tray Exit: Lag Jam R1-3

104 Shift Tray Exit: Late Jam R1-3

105 Shift Tray Exit: Lag Jam R1-3

106 Stapler Exit: Late Jam R4-8

107 Stapler Exit: Lag Jam R4-8

1333
 5. Troubleshooting

Jam code Jam description Position code

108 Pre-stack Tray: Late Jam R4-8

109 Pre-Stack Tray: Lag Jam R4-8

110 Output Jam R4-8

111 Drive Mechanism Jam R1-3

112 Tray Lift Motor Jam R1-3

113 Jogger Motor Jam R4-8

114 Shift Motor Jam R1-3

115 Stapling Motor Jam R8-10

116 Output Motor Jam R4-8

117 Punch Motor Jam R1-3

118 Z-Fold Motor Jam R4-8

119 Pre-Stack Drive Mechanism Jam R4-8

120 Main Machine Data Corrupt R1-3

Multi Folding Unit FD4000 (D615):

Jam code Jam description Position code

1 Entrance Sensor N1 to N5

1 Horizontal Path Exit Sensor N1 to N5

1 Top Tray Exit Sensor N1 to N5

1 Top Tray Paper Path Sensor N1 to N5

1 Registration Sensor N6 to 22

1 1st Stopper Paper Sensor N6 to 22

1 2nd Stopper Paper Sensor N6 to 22

1 3rd Stopper Paper Sensor N6 to 22

1334
 Jam Detection

Jam code Jam description Position code

1 Horizontal Path Paper Sensor N1 to N5

1 Bypass Entrance Paper N6 to 22

1 Bypass Exit Paper Sensor N6 to 22

200 Entrance Sensor: Late Jam N1 to N5

201 Entrance Sensor: Lag Jam N1 to N5

202 Top Tray Exit Sensor: Late Jam N1 to N5

203 Top Tray Exit Sensor: Lag Jam N1 to N5

204 Horizontal Path Exit Sensor: Late Jam N1 to N5

205 Horizontal Path Exit Sensor: Lag Jam N1 to N5

206 1st Stopper HP Sensor: Late Jam N6 to N22

207 1st Stopper HP Sensor: Lag Jam N6 to N22

208 2nd Stopper HP Sensor: Late Jam N6 to N22

209 2nd Stopper HP Sensor: Lag Jam N6 to N22

210 3rd Stopper HP Sensor: Late Jam N6 to N22

211 3rd Stopper HP Sensor: Lag Jam N6 to N22

212 Skew Correction Jam N6 to N22

213 Folded Paper Path Jam N1 to N5

214 Entrance JG Motor Jam N1 to N5

215 1st Stopper Motor Jam N6 to N22

216 2nd Stopper Motor Jam N6 to N22

217 3rd Stopper Motor Jam N6 to N22

218 Dynamic Roller Trans. Motor Jam N6 to N22

219 Registration Roller Release Motor Jam N6 to N22

220 Fold Plate Motor Jam N6 to N22

221 Jogger Fence Motor Jam N6 to N22

1335
 5. Troubleshooting

Jam code Jam description Position code

222 Direct-Send JG Motor Jam N6 to N22

223 FM6 Pawl Motor Jam N6 to N22

Main Machine Data Corrupt N1 to N5,N6 to

249
N22

Mail Box CS4010 (D708)

Jam code Jam description Position code

1 Transport Sensor 1 W

1 Transport Sensor 2 W

1 Transport Sensor 3 W

1 Transport Sensor 4 W

1 Transport Sensor 5 W

350 Transport Sensor 1: Late Jam W

350 Transport Sensor 1: Lag Jam W

351 Transport Sensor 2: Late Jam W

351 Transport Sensor 2: Lag Jam W

352 Transport Sensor 3: Late Jam W

352 Transport Sensor 3: Lag Jam W

353 Transport Sensor 4: Late Jam W

353 Transport Sensor 4: Lag Jam W

354 Transport Sensor 5: Late Jam W

354 Transport Sensor 5: Lag Jam W

361 Main Machine Data Corrupt W

1336
 Jam Detection

Cover Interposer Tray CI4010 (D711)

Jam code Jam description Position code

1 Feed Sensor Q

1 Exit Sensor Q

370 Feed Sensor: Late Jam or Lag Jam Q

371 Exit Sensor: Late Jam or Lag Jam Q

372 Bottom Plate Motor Jam Q

Cover Interposer Tray CI4020 (D712)

Jam code Jam description Position code

1 1st Paper Feed Sensor Q1

1 2nd Paper Feed Sensor Q2

1 1st Transport Sensor Q1

1 2nd Transport Sensor Q2

1 1st Vertical Transport Sensor Q1

1 2nd Vertical Transport Sensor Q3 to Q4

1 Exit Sensor Q3 to Q4

1 Entrance Sensor Q3 to Q4

1 Exit Sensor Q3 to Q4

300 1st Paper Feed Sensor: Late Jam Q1

301 1st Paper Feed Sensor: Lag Jam Q1

302 2nd Paper Feed Sensor: Late Jam Q2

303 2nd Paper Feed Sensor: Lag Jam Q2

304 1st Transport Sensor: Late Jam Q1

305 1st Transport Sensor: Lag Jam Q1

1337
 5. Troubleshooting

Jam code Jam description Position code

306 2nd Transport Sensor: Late Jam Q2

307 2nd Transport Sensor: Lag Jam Q2

308 1st Vertical Transport Sensor: Late Jam Q1

309 1st Vertical Transport Sensor: Lag Jam Q1

310 2nd Vertical Transport Sensor: Late Jam Q3 to Q4

311 2nd Vertical Transport Sensor: Lag Jam Q3 to Q4

312 Exit Sensor: Late Jam Q3 to Q4

313 Exit Sensor: Lag Jam Q3 to Q4

314 Entrance Sensor: Late Jam Q3 to Q4

315 Entrance Sensor: Lag Jam Q3 to Q4

316 Exit Sensor: Late Jam Q3 to Q4

317 Exit Sensor: Lag Jam Q3 to Q4

318 1st Lift Motor Jam Q1

319 2nd Lift Motor Jam Q2

320 1st Pick-up Motor Jam Q1

321 2nd Pick-up Motor Jam Q2

349 Main Machine Data Corrupt Q3 to Q4

Decurl Unit DU5020

Jam code Jam description Position code

1 Entrance Sensor K1 to K4

1 Exit Sensor K1 to K4

380 Entrance Sensor: Late Jam K1 to K4

381 Exit Sensor: Late Jam K1 to K4

1338
 Jam Detection

Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020 (D751)

Jam code Jam description Position code

1 Transport Sensor 1 Kc1 to Kc9

1 Transport Sensor 2 Kc1 to Kc9

1 Transport Sensor 3 Kc1 to Kc9

1 Transport Sensor 4 Kc1 to Kc9

1 Transport Sensor 5 Kc1 to Kc9

1 Transport Sensor 6 Kc1 to Kc9

1 Transport Sensor 7 Kc1 to Kc9

1 Transport Sensor 8 Kc1 to Kc9

400 Transport Sensor 1: Late Jam Kc1 to Kc9

401 Transport Sensor 1: Lag Jam Kc1 to Kc9

402 Transport Sensor 2: Late Jam Kc1 to Kc9

403 Transport Sensor 2: Lag Jam Kc1 to Kc9

404 Transport Sensor 3: Late Jam Kc1 to Kc9

405 Transport Sensor 3: Lag Jam Kc1 to Kc9

406 Transport Sensor 4: Late Jam Kc1 to Kc9

407 Transport Sensor 4: Lag Jam Kc1 to Kc9

408 Transport Sensor 5: Late Jam Kc1 to Kc9

409 Transport Sensor 5: Lag Jam Kc1 to Kc9

410 Transport Sensor 6: Late Jam Kc1 to Kc9

411 Transport Sensor 6: Lag Jam Kc1 to Kc9

412 Transport Sensor 7: Late Jam Kc1 to Kc9

413 Transport Sensor 7: Lag Jam Kc1 to Kc9

414 Transport Sensor 8: Late Jam Kc1 to Kc9

1339
 5. Troubleshooting

Jam code Jam description Position code

415 Transport Sensor 8: Lag Jam Kc1 to Kc9

416 Main Machine Data Corrupt Kc1 to Kc9

Plockmatic Bookletmaker

Jam code Jam description Position code

Displayed by
148 Plockmatic Bookletmaker Jam
Plockmatic

GBC Stream Punch

Jam code Jam description Position code

Displayed by
149 GBC Stream Punch Jam
GBC

1340
 Jam Detection

Sensor Locations

Paper Size Codes

Paper size codes are as follows.

* The unit of Main Scan/Sub Scan Length is 0.1 mm.

Main
Orientatio Sub Scan
Size Code Paper Size Name Scan
n Length
Length

132(84H) A3 SEF 2970 4200

005(05H) A4 LEF 2970 2100

133(85H) A4 SEF 2100 2970

1341
 5. Troubleshooting

Main
Orientatio Sub Scan
Size Code Paper Size Name Scan
n Length
Length

141(8DH) B4 SEF 2570 3640

006(06H) A5 LEF 2100 1480

134(86H) A5 SEF 1480 2100

014(0EH) B5 LEF 2570 1820

142(8EH) B5 SEF 1820 2570

135(87H) A6 SEF 1050 1480

143(8FH) B6 SEF 1280 1820

160(A0H) 11”x17”(DLT) SEF 2794 4318

164(A4H) 8 1/2”x14”(LG) SEF 2159 3556

166(A6H) 8 1/2”x11”(LT) SEF 2159 2794

038(26H) 8 1/2”x11”(LT) LEF 2794 2159

172(ACH) 5 1/2”x8 1/2”(HLT) SEF 1397 2159

175(AFH) 12” x 18” SEF 3048 4572

1342
 Fan Defect Detection

Fan Defect Detection

Fan Locations and Fan SC

Main Machine (Rear)

1343
 5. Troubleshooting

Main Machine (Front)

1344
 Fan Defect Detection

Drawer (Inside)

SC Code SC Name Fan of to be detected Fan No.

SC531-01 Development Intake Fan (Y): Lock Development Intake Fan (Y) 23

SC531-02 Development Intake Fan (M): Lock Development Intake Fan (M) 22

SC531-03 Development Intake Fan (C): Lock Development Intake Fan (C) 20

SC531-04 Development Intake Fan (K): Lock Development Intake Fan (K) 19

Development Exhaust Fan (Right): Lock Development Exhaust Fan

SC531-05 2
(Right)

Development Exhaust Fan (Left): Lock Development Exhaust Fan

SC531-06 3
(Left)

Fusing Pressure Roller Intake

SC530-01 Fusing Pressure Roller Intake Fan: Lock 28
Fan

Fusing Pressure Roller Exhaust Fan: Fusing Pressure Roller Exhaust

SC530-02 9
Lock Fan

SC530-03 Heat Pipe Panel Intake Fan: Lock Heat Pipe Panel Intake Fan 1

1345
 5. Troubleshooting

SC Code SC Name Fan of to be detected Fan No.

SC530-04 Heat Pipe Panel Exhaust Fan: Lock Heat Pipe Panel Exhaust Fan 4

SC530-05 Fusing Exit Exhaust Fan: Lock Fusing Exit Exhaust Fan 5

SC530-06 ITB Cleaning Intake Fan: Lock ITB Cleaning Intake Fan 21

SC530-07 IH Coil Power Cooling Fan: Lock IH Coil Cooling Fan 27

SC530-08 PTR Fusing Exhaust Fan: Lock PTR Fusing Exhaust Fan 10

SC530-09 IH Coil Power Cooling Fan: Lock IH Coil Power Cooling Fan 13

SC532-01 Controller Intake Fan: Lock Controller Intake Fan 11

SC532-02 Controller Exhaust Fan: Lock Controller Exhaust Fan 8

SC532-03 PSU Fan (Rgiht): Lock PSU Fan (Rgiht) 14

SC532-04 PSU Fan (Left): Lock PSU Fan (Left) 12

SC533-01 Laser Unit Cooling Fan (Right): Lock Laser Unit Cooling Fan (Right) 18

SC533-02 Laser Unit Cooling Fan (Left): Lock Laser Unit Cooling Fan (Left) 17

SC534-01 Duplex Exhaust Fan (Front): Lock Duplex Exhaust Fan (Front) 24

SC534-02 Duplex Exhaust Fan (Rear): Lock Duplex Exhaust Fan (Rear) 26

SC534-03 Duplex Exhaust Fan (Middle): Lock Duplex Exhaust Fan (Middle) 25

SC535-02 Drive Exhaust Fan (Left): Lock Drive Exhaust Fan (Left) 6

SC536-01 Fusing Heat Pipe Cooling Fan: Lock Fusing Heat Pipe Cooling Fan 29

SC537-01 Ozone Exhaust Fan: Lock Ozone Exhaust Fan 7

ID Sensor Cleaning Fan / ITB

SC538-01 ID Sensor Cleaning Fan: Lock 16, 15
Motor Cooling Fan

SC539-01 PTB Fan (Front): Lock PTB Fan (Front) 30

SC539-02 PTB Fan (Rear): Lock PTB Fan (Rear) 31

1346
 Adjustment

Adjustment
Adjustment 001: ACC (Automatic Color Calibration)

Overview

Color Calibration can be performed by the Automatic Color Calibration (ACC) in "Maintenance" in
"User Tools".
There are two types of ACC.
• Copier Function ACC
• Printer Function ACC
ACC for the Printer Function has 5 modes according to the printer resolution.

Mode Resolution

600dpi 1bit Photo/

Calibration 1 600 x 600 dpi
Text

600dpi 2bit Photo/ Recommended Mode

Calibration 2 1800 x 600 dpi
Text

600dpi 4bit Photo/

Calibration 3 9000 x 600 dpi
Text

1200dpi 1bit Photo/

Calibration 4 1200 x 1200 dpi
Text

1200dpi 2bit Photo/

Calibration 5 3600 x 1200 dpi
Text

Procedure

1. Press [User Tools].

2. To print a color pattern, select Maintenance> Auto Color Calibration.
3. Touch [Start] for the selected function (Copier Function or Printer Function).
4. If "Printer Function" is selected, resolution ("1800 x 600 dpi" for example) should be selected next.
5. Touch "Start Printing". (The machine will print the Test Pattern after self-checking has been
completed).

1347
 5. Troubleshooting

6. Place the color test pattern face-down with the arrow aligned with the rear left corner of the
exposure glass.
7. Touch [Start Scanning] on the display. The machine scans the pattern one time.
8. Remove the pattern from the exposure glass.
9. Touch [Exit] three times to return to the Copy mode screen.

• When scanning the color test pattern, place about 10 sheets of white paper over the test pattern, in
order to prevent the test pattern from being away from the exposure glass.
• Please instruct the customer to perform the ACC periodically to keep good image quality.
• Both "Copier Function ACC" and "Printer Function ACC" should be performed as a set.
• ACC can be cancelled by pressing "Previous Settings" if the customer is not satisfied with the ACC
results.

Adjustment 002: Manual Gamma Adjustment

Overview

Printer Gamma can be adjusted with SP mode. Highlight (H), Shadow (S), Middle (M) and IDmax can
be set independently from the range 0 through 30 (15 is the default).

Printer Mode Adjustment

Overview
6 types of adjustment mode exist as shown in table

Mode SP number Mode SP number

2,400×600dpi Photo SP1-102 2,400×600dpi Text SP1-102

1,800×600dpi Photo SP1-102 1,800×600dpi Text SP1-102

600×600dpi Photo SP1-102 600×600dpi Text SP1-102

Adjustment Procedure
1. Perform ACC in Printer Function.
2. Enter Printer SP mode
3. Select the Mode to be adjusted with SP1102 (Resolution Setting)
4. Print out the Color Gray Scale pattern with SP1103-001.

1348
 Adjustment

SP1102 Mode to be adjusted Note

setting

0 1200dpi 2bit Photo Gamma

1 1200dpi 1bit Photo Gamma

2 600dpi 4bit Photo Gamma

3 600dpi 2bit Photo Gamma Default in Printer Mode

4 600dpi 1bit Photo Gamma

5 1200dpi 2bit Text Gamma

6 1200dpi 1bit Text Gamma

7 600dpi 4bit Text Gamma

8 600dpi 2bit Text Gamma Default in Printer Mode

9 600dpi 1bit Text Gamma

5. Compare the IDmax patch pattern on the C-4 test chart for each color and the corresponding
patch pattern on the Color Gray Scale printed with SP1103-001. (If no adjustment is
required, go step #8).
See NOTE 3 about the corresponding patch pattern.
6. Adjust the IDmax for CMYK with SP1104 (Gamma Adjustment) and save the adjusted value
with SP1105 (Save Toner Control Value).
7. Print out the Color Gray Scale pattern with SP1103-001 again.
8. Compare the Middle (M) patch pattern on the C-4 test chart for each color and the
corresponding patch pattern on the Color Gray Scale printed with SP1103-001. (If no
adjustment is required, go step #11).
See NOTE 3 about the corresponding patch pattern.
9. Adjust the Middle (M) for CMYK with SP1104 (Gamma Adjustment) and save the adjusted
value with SP1105 (Save Toner Control Value).
10. Print out the Color Gray Scale pattern with SP1103-001 again.
11. Compare the Shadow (S) patch pattern on the C-4 test chart for each color and the
corresponding patch pattern on the Color Gray Scale printed with SP1103-001. (If no
adjustment is required, go step #14).
See NOTE 3 about the corresponding patch pattern.
12. Adjust the Shadow (S) for CMYK with SP1104 (Gamma Adjustment) and save the adjusted
value with SP1105 (Save Toner Control Value).

1349
 5. Troubleshooting

13. Print out the Color Gray Scale pattern with SP1103-001 again.
14. Compare the Highlight (H) patch pattern on the C-4 test chart for each color and the
corresponding patch pattern on the Color Gray Scale printed with SP1103-001. (If no
adjustment is required, all adjustment is completed).
See NOTE 3 about the corresponding patch pattern.
15. Adjust the Highlight (H) for CMYK with SP1104 (Gamma Adjustment) and save the adjusted
value with SP1105 (Save Toner Control Value).
16. Turn the main power switch OFF and ON.
NOTE 1: Adjustment order should be IDmax -> Middle -> Shadow -> Highlight.
NOTE 2: SP1-104

Output ID K C M

Highlight SP1-104-001 SP1-104-021 SP1-104-041

Shadow SP1-104-002 SP1-104-022 SP1-104-042

Middle SP1-104-003 SP1-104-023 SP1-104-043

IDmax SP1-104-004 SP1-104-024 SP1-104-044

NOTE 3: Cross reference between C-4 test chart and Color

Gradation Patch Pattern on the C-4 test chart

Highlight: 2-5

1350
 Adjustment

Middle: 3-7
Shadow: 6-9
IDmax: 10

Gradation Patch Pattern on Gray Scale printed with SP1-103-001

The following table shows a cross reference between the gradation patch pattern on the C-4 test chart
and the Gray Scale printed with SP1-103-001.

C-4 test
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
chart

C -- 1 3 4 5 8 9 11 13 15-16
Gray Scale
printed with M 1 2 5 6 7 10 12 14 15 16
SP1-103-00 Y 1 3 5 7 9 10 13 14 15 16
1
K -- 1 3 4 5 7 10 13 16 --

15-16 Very Close

14, 15, 16 Close

-- Corresponding Patch does not exit

1351
 5. Troubleshooting

Gradation Patch Pattern Number

Adjustment Item Color Gray Scale printed
Color Chart C-4
with SP1103-001

C 16 10

M 16 10
IDmax
Y 16 10

K 16 9

C 8 6

M 7 5
Middle (M)
Y 7 4

K 7 6

C 13 9

M 12 7
Shadow (S)
Y 13 7

K 13 8

C 5 5

M 5 3
Highlight (H)
Y 5 3

K 4 4

Copier Mode Adjustment

Overview
This procedure shows how to adjust the printer gamma by SP mode manually after the ACC
(Automatic Color Calibration) has been performed. Adjustment should be performed only in the
‘Offset’ part of the screen, and not in the ‘Option’ part of the screen. Adjustable modes are "Text
mode", "Photo mode", "B&W text mode" and "B&W photo mode".
1. Perform ACC in copier mode with User Tools.
2. Take a copy of a C-4 test chart in the mode which you need to adjust.

1352
 Adjustment

3. Enter Copier SP mode.

4. Select SP4918-009 (Man Gamma Adj) and press "CHANGE"

5. If you touch the "Change" button, the following 3 screens will be displayed. These screens can
be changed by pressing the "Next" or "Previous" button.

1353
 5. Troubleshooting

6. Press the "Copy Window" button on the bottom left, then take a copy of the C-4 test chart.
Then compare the gradation patch pattern on the copied image and the C-4 test chart.

Step Output ID C-4 chart level Adjustment Reference

Adjust the 'Offset' value so that

1 the density of level 10 in the
ID max 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 0 gradation patch pattern on the
(K/C/M/Y)
copy becomes the same as
level 10 on the C-4 chart.

Adjust the 'Offset' value so that

1 the density of level 6 in the
Middle 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2 0 gradation patch pattern on the
(K/C/M/Y)
copy becomes the same as
level 10 on the C-4 chart.

Adjust the 'Offset' value so that

1 the density of level 8 in the
Shadow 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3 0 gradation patch pattern on the
(K/C/M/Y)
copy becomes the same as
level 10 on the C-4 chart.

Adjust the 'Offset' value so that

1 dirty background is not visible
Highlight 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4 0 on the copy and the density of
(K/C/M/Y)
level 3 is slightly lighter that of
level 3 on the C-4 chart.

1354
 Adjustment

Step Output ID C-4 chart level Adjustment Reference

Adjust the 'Offset' value so that

1 black scale levels 3 through 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 in the copy are seen as gray
K Highlight (no C, M, or Y should be
5 visible). If the black scale
(K/C/M/Y)
contains C, M, or Y, redo step
1 to 4.
- Only in Photo mode -

Adjustment 003: Scanner Registration

Overview

Scanning registration can be adjusted in the Main Scan and Sub Scan directions. Sub Scan
Magnification can also be adjusted.

Adjustment Procedure

Adjustment can be performed by the following SPs. ( page 669 "Magnification and Registration
Adjustment")
• SP4-011-001 (Main Scan Reg.): Registration in the Main Scan direction.
• SP4-010-001 (Sub Scan Registration Adj): Registration in the Sub Scan direction.
• SP4-008-001 (Sub Scan Magnification Adj): Magnification in the Sub Scan direction.

Adjustment 004: ADF Registration

Overview

Adjust the position and scaling applied to scanned images when using the ADF with the copier and
scanner functions. By specifying this setting, you can correct image misalignment, expansion, and
shrinkage due to non-uniform paper feeding.
This adjustment needs to be done before doing “Adjustment 005: Registration Adjustment”

1355
 5. Troubleshooting

Adjustment Procedure

Adjustment can be performed by the following SPs. ( page 560 "Adjustment after Replacing the
ADF")
• ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Front (SP6-006-001)
• ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Rear (SP6-006-002)
• L-Edge Regist (1-pass): Front (SP6-006-010)
• L-Edge Regist (1-pass): Rear (SP6-006-011)
• DF Magnification Adj. (SP6-017-001)

Adjustment 005: Registration

Overview

This troubleshooting covers all the procedures involving registration adjustments; skew, image position
and front-back magnification adjustment except ADF and scanner registration. Note that these
procedures should be done BEFORE making registration adjustments on the Fiery controller and
scanner/ADF of the machine.

Cause
Skew
• Incorrect positioning of the side fence
• Something in the paper path
• Insufficient paper buckling at registration roller
Image Shift
• Incorrect positioning of the side fence
• Change during transport according to the paper characteristics, such as thickness and
stickiness
Incorrect magnification between Front and Back
• Incorrect positioning of the side fence
• Paper Path Variation by paper Specification (Thick, stiffness etc)

Contents

Step 1. Side fence check

Step 2. Skew Adjustment for front and back.

1356
 Adjustment

Step 3. Image Adjustment for front.

Step 4. Image Adjustment for back.
Step 5. Adjustment of magnification for back.
Step 1. Side fence check
Check the side fence status for each paper tray. If not correct, adjust the trays.
Step 2. Skew Adjustment for front and back.
Step 2-1 Set A3 or DLT plain paper (63.1-80.0 gsm) in Tray 2 and apply the paper tray settings.
Step 2-2 Print 5 copies of the test pattern Trimming Area (SP2109-003-14) in b/w and simplex.
Step 2-3 Measure the two locations [A] and [B] on all 5 copies.
Step 2-4 You need to make an adjustment with SP1-004-001 so that the average values of [A]
and [B] are the same.

Front Side (1st Side)

*The arrow indicates the paper feed direction

Step 2-5 Make another 5 copies, this time in duplex.
Step 2-6 Measure the locations [C] and [D] on the back side.
Step 2-7 You need to make an adjustment with SP1-004-003 so that the average values of [C] and [D]
are the same.

1357
 5. Troubleshooting

Back Side (2nd Side)

*The arrow indicates the paper feed direction

Step 3. Image Adjustment for front
Step 3-1 Set A3 or DLT plain paper (63.1-80.0 gsm) in Tray 2 and apply the tray paper settings.
Step 3-2 Print 5 copies of the test pattern Trimming Area (SP2-109-003-14) in b/w, simplex.
Step 3-3 Measure the distance [A] and [B] on all 5 copies and calculate the average.
Step 3-4 You need to make an adjustment with SP1-003-XXX so that the average values of [A] and
[B] are the same. Refer to ‘Reference Information-2’ below.
(You can make an adjustment for each paper type with SP1-952-XXX for IMSS setting in the Pro
machine.)
Step 3-5 You need to make an adjustment with SP1-001-XXX so that the average values of [A] and
[B] are the same. Refer to ‘Reference Information-2’ below.
(You can make an adjustment for each paper type with SP1-950-XXX for IMSS setting in the Pro
machine.)
Step 3-6 If you finished the adjustment, check that the value of [C] is more than 4mm.

• If the value of [C] is less than 4mm, a jam may occur because of the fusing stripper pawls.
• So adjust the value of [C] so that it is more than 4mm.

1358
 Adjustment

*The arrow indicates the paper feed direction

Step 4. Image Adjustment for back
Step 4-1 Print 11 copies of the test pattern Trimming Area (SP2-109-003-14) in b/w, duplex, and
select 5 copies (from the 4th to the 8th copy) from among the 11.

• The first and the last 3 copies will not be used due to the higher possibility of image size
variations.
Step 4-2 Measure the distances [A2], [B2], [C2] and [D2] on all 5 copies and calculate the
average.

*The arrow indicates the paper feed direction

1359
 5. Troubleshooting

Solid line: Trimming area 1st side

Dashed line: Trimming area 2nd side
Step 4-3 You need to make an adjustment with SP1-003-006 so that the average values of [A2]
and [B2] are the same. Refer to ‘Reference Information-3’ below.
(You can make an adjustment for each paper type with SP1-953-XXX for IMSS setting in a Pro
machine.)
Step 4-4 You need to make an adjustment with SP1-001-003 so that the average values of [C2]
and [D2] are the same. Refer to ‘Reference Information-3’ below.
(You can make an adjustment for each paper type with SP1-951-XXX for IMSS setting in a Pro
machine.)
Step 5. Adjustment of magnification for back.
Step 5-1 Set A3 or DLT plain paper (63.1-80.0 gsm) in Tray 2 and apply the tray paper settings.
Step 5-2 Print 5 copies of the test pattern Trimming Area (SP2109-003-14) in b/w, Duplex.
Step 5-3 Measure the distance [A] and [B] on all 5 copies and calculate the average.
Step 5-4 You need to make an adjustment with SP2-102-043 so that the average values of [A3]
and [B3] are the same. Refer to ‘Reference Information-4’ below.
(You can make an adjustment for each paper type with SP2-952-XXX for IMSS setting in a Pro
machine.)
Step 5-5 You need to make an adjustment with SP2-102-044 so that the average values of [C3]
and [D3] are the same. Refer to ‘Reference Information-4’ below.
(You can make an adjustment for each paper type with SP2-953-XXX for IMSS setting in a Pro
machine.)

Reference Information-1 (Step 2. Skew adjustment for front and back)

1. Check the SP value for the tray being used.

1360
 Adjustment

2. Increase the value of the SP by 1 mm.

1. Example: If the current value is 1 mm, input 2 mm into the SP.
3. Print out.
If you can’t solve the skew, repeat steps 1 to 3.

Pro/Office Number Description Adjustment area

SP SP1-004-001 Reg buckle Adj(Tray 1,2,3,4) ±5.0mm

SP SP1-004-003 Reg buckle Adj(Duplex) ±5.0mm

Reference Information-2 (Step 3. Image Adjustment for front)

Side-to-Side Registration
1. Do the following calculation: ((average [B] - (average [A])/2 = X
2. Add X to the current values in SP1003. (If you use IMSS, SP1950)

SP1003
Current SP Value X Modified Value
Side-to-Side Reg

Tray 1

Tray 2

Duplex Tray

A3LCT Tray 3

A3LCT Tray 4

A3LCT Tray 5

Bypass Tray

Examples
SP1003
Current SP Value X Modified Value
Side-to-Side Reg

Example 1. 1.0 0.1 1.1

Example 2. 1.0 -0.2 0.8

Pro/Office Number Description Adjustment Area

SP SP1-003-XXX Side-to-Side Reg ±3.0mm

1361
 5. Troubleshooting

[For IMSS]

Pro Number Description Adjustment Area

Adjust Image Position of

IMSS 08 Side 1 Across Feed Direction ±3.0mm
(Each Custom Papers)

S-to-S Regist Adj (Each

SP SP1-952-XXX ±3.0mm
Custom Papers)

Lead Edge Registration

1. Do the following calculation: ((average [C] - (average[D])/2 = Y
2. Add Y to the current values in SP1001. If you use IMSS, SP1950

SP1001
Current SP Value X Modified Value
Side-to-Side Reg

Tray 1

Tray 2

Duplex Tray

A3LCT Tray 3

A3LCT Tray 4

A3LCT Tray 5

Bypass Tray

Pro/Office Number Description Adjustment Area

SP SP1-001-XXX Lead Edge Reg (Each trays) ±3.0mm

[For IMSS]

Pro Number Description Adjustment Area

Adjust Image Position of

IMSS 06 Side 1 With Feed Direction ±3.0mm
(Each Custom Papers)

L-Edge Regist Adj (Front)

SP SP1-950-XXX ±5.0mm
(Each Custom Papers)

1362
 Adjustment

Reference Information-3 (Step 4. Image Adjustment for back)

1. Do the following calculation:
(average [B2] - (average [A2])/2 = x
(average [C2]) - (average [D2])/2 = y
2. Make an adjustment in the same way as front image position adjustment.
3. Make a print out and check it.
If you can’t solve the magnification problem, repeat steps 1 to 3.

Pro/Office Number Description Adjustment Area

SP SP1-003-006 Side-to-Side Reg (Duplex) ±3.0mm

SP SP1-001-003 Lead Edge Reg (Duplex) ±9.0mm

For IMSS

Pro Number Description Adjustment Area

Adjust Image Position of Side

IMSS 09 ±3.0mm
2 Across Feed Direction

Adjust Image Position of Side

IMSS 07 ±9.0mm
2 With Feed Direction

S-to-S Regist Adj (Rear) (Each

SP SP1-953-XXX ±3.0mm
Custom papers)

L-Edge Regist Adj (Rear) (Each

SP SP1-951-XXX ±9.0mm
Custom papers)

Reference Information-4 (Step 5. Adjustment of magnification for back)

1. Do the following calculation:
average [A3]/average [B3]-1 = A
average [C3]/average [D3]-1 = C
2. Add A to the current values in SP2102-043. (If IMSS, SP2952)
3. Add C to the current values in SP2102-044. (If IMSS, SP2953)
4. Make a print out and check it.
If you can’t solve the magnification problem, repeat steps 1 to 4.

1363
 5. Troubleshooting

Pro/Office Number Description Adjustment Area

SP SP2-102-043 Verso Main Meg set& Adj ±0.5%

SP SP2-102-044 Verso Main Sub set& Adj ±0.5%

For IMSS

Pro Number Description Adjustment Area

Adjust Magnification of Side 2

IMSS 12 Across Feed Direction ±0.5%
(Each Custom Papers)

Adjust Magnification of Side 2

IMSS 13 With Feed Direction (Each ±0.5%
Custom Papers)

Verso Main Meg set& Adj

SP SP2952-XXX ±0.5%
(Each Custom Papers)

Verso Main Sub set& Adj

SP SP2-953-XXX ±0.5%
(Each Custom Papers)

• Adjustment step is 0.025%

Adjustment 006: Fusing Nip Width Adjustment for Envelopes

Overview

Adjust the nip width between the fusing belt and pressure roller for envelope printing. Changing this
setting may lead to insufficient fusing or cause the envelopes to wrinkle. When encountering such
problems, do the following adjustment.

Adjustment Procedure

To correct insufficient fusing, increase the value in the following SP by 5msec and check the result.
To correct wrinkles, decrease the value in the following SP by 5msec and check the result.

1364
 Adjustment

Pro/Office Number Description Adjustment Area

SP1-996-109 to
SP Envelope Nip Width Setting 0 to 2000msec
254

For IMSS

Pro Number Description Adjustment Area

Fusing Nip Width Adjustment for

IMSS 85 0 to 2000msec
Envelope (Custom papers)

SP1-996-001 to Envelope Nip Width Setting

SP 0 to 2000msec
100 (Custom papers)

Adjustment 007: Adjustments Required for Improved Glossiness

Overview

What to do when the customer is not satisfied with the glossiness of the copies made with the suggested
temperature is described below.

• Note that the adjustment procedures for Pro C5110S/Pro C5100S and MP C8002SP/MP
C6502SP Office differ.

Adjustments Required for Improved Glossiness (Pro C5110S /Pro C5100S)

1. In the SP mode or IMSS, increase the fusing heat roller temperature until the desired glossiness is
achieved.

SP1-984-XXX Htg Roller Temp Setting

0 to 200 °C
IMSS setting #74 Fusing Heat Roller Temperature Adjustment

• Do not set the temperature higher than 180°C.

• Following are possible side effects:
• Paper curls and jams
• Gloss streaks

1365
 5. Troubleshooting

• Blisters on coated paper

• Reduced gloss
2. Make 50 copies in A4/LT SEF and check the results.
3. If the results are unsatisfactory, set the process speed to “Low” in the SP mode or IMSS.

SP1-986-XXX “3” (default: 0)

IMSS setting #15:

Paper thickness 1 to 5: “1” (default: 0) 55.8ppm
Process Speed
Paper thickness 6: “3” (default: 1) 35.7ppm
Setting

4. For the process speed adjustment to take effect, turn the machine power OFF and then ON.

Adjustments Required for Improved Glossiness (MP C8002SP/MP C6502SP)

1. In [Tray Paper Settings] – [Paper Type], select [Coated Paper (Glossy)].

• This will increase the temperature of fusing roller but will also slow down the processing speed.

Adjustment 008: Margin Adjustment

Overview

Procedure for adjusting the leading edge margin [A] and trailing edge margin [B] is described below.

1366
 Adjustment

1: Paper feed direction

• Narrowing the margin too much may cause the side edge of the paper to be dirty.
• Take care because if you narrow the margin too much, paper may jam in the fusing unit separation
unit and damage the fusing unit.

Margin adjustment

1. Adjust the margins using the following SPs.

Leading edge margin adjustment

Pro/Office SP No. SP Name Value

Pro/Office SP2-122-201 to 254 [Erase Margin Adj Leading -3 to 6mm

Edge] (for each paper type/
thickness)

Pro SP2-122-001 to 100 [Erase Margin Adj Leading -3 to 6mm

Edge] (for each custom paper)

Pro/Office IMSS setting No. IMSS setting Value

Pro 10 Adjust Erase Margin of -3 to 6mm

Leading Edge (for each custom
paper)

1367
 5. Troubleshooting

Trailing edge margin adjustment

Pro/Office SP No. SP Name Value

Pro/Office SP2-123-201 to 254 [Erase Margin Adj Trailing -3 to 6mm

Edge] (for each paper type/
thickness)

Pro SP2-123-001 to 100 [Erase Margin Adj Trailing -3 to 6mm

Edge] (for each custom paper)

Pro/Office IMSS setting No. IMSS setting Value

Pro 11 Adjust Erase Margin of Trailing -3 to 6mm

Edge (for each custom paper)

• Adjust this SP in increments of ±0.5mm. Higher values will increase the margin, while lower
values will decrease the margin.
2. Make some test prints (simplex and duplex) and make sure that fusing jams and side edge smudges
do not occur.

Adjustment 009: Staple misalignment (3 mm or more) occurs

Symptom

Staple misalignment (3mm or more) occurs.

Sample:

1368
 Adjustment

Cause
Cause 1:
The paper contacts the jogger fence and skews inside the staple tray during standby.
Cause 2:
The side to side registration is not aligned when the paper is being transported from the mainframe
to the finisher.

Solution
Production line
The shape of the bracket was changed and applied from the following cut-in S/N:

Model Cut-in S/N

D688-17 E783Q810001

D689-17 E793Q910001

D703-17 E433Q810077

D704-17 E443Q810008

In the field
For Cause 1:
Update the firmware to Ver. 02.000.10 or newer.
For Cause 2:

1369
 5. Troubleshooting

Increase the width of the jogger fences when in standby mode from 7mm to 10mm.
See procedure below.
Procedure
Attach the modified docking bracket to make it possible to adjust side-to-side registration at joint
between mainframe and finisher in accordance with the procedure below.
1. Secure the docking bracket [A] in its default attachment position ( x 4).

Default attachment position (The screw head is centered)

2. Check the side-to-side registration by exiting to the proof tray.

1. Print out an A3 sheet to the proof tray.
2. Using the markings on the front-most exit roller (see photo below), check to see where the
paper edge is located when the paper is exited. For purposes of accuracy, print out about 5
sets.

1370
 Adjustment

[A]: Make sure to use the markings on the FRONT exit rollers. The roller markings at the rear
side are for DLT sized paper only, and do not apply to this.
[B]: Front exit rollers
[C]: Each marking represents 2mm. If the paper edge is lined up with the center marking, this
means the paper is aligned correctly. If the paper edge is lined up with any marking to the
right of center, this means the paper is shifted toward the front. If the paper edge is lined up
with any marking to the left of center, this means the paper is shifted toward the rear.
[D]: Center marking
3. Attach the small bracket [B] to the docking bracket [A] as shown (using the screw hole shown
by the red arrow), which will allow the docking bracket to slide side-to-side. Then, reattach
the docking bracket to the machine.

• If the paper shifts forward (toward the operator side), slide the docking bracket by the
same amount in the same direction. This is to move the Finisher toward the operator side.
Note: Each scale marking represents 2mm.
Ex: Paper is shifted 4mm from center toward the front

1371
 5. Troubleshooting

[A]: Proof tray

[B]: Docking BKT screw
• If the paper shifts toward the rear (non-operator side), slide the bracket in the same
direction as described below.
Ex: Paper is shifted 4mm from center toward the rear

[A]: Proof tray

[B]: Docking BKT screw
4. Check the side-to-side registration by printing out to the proof tray.
If the registration is still not corrected, do Steps 3 onward one more time.

1372
 Image Quality

Image Quality
Definitions of Abnormal Images

Large classification: Points

Middle classification1: Spots
Definition: White spots seen in solid image areas or black/color spots seen where there should be
nothing printed. The description "white spots" excludes those with toner cores.

Middle classification2 Sample Definition

Black (color) spots

Stains are visible as crisp black

(color) spots.

White spots
White spots are visible inside solid
image or halftone image area
because of missing toner.

Spots with toner

Toner aggregated inside the

machine has been transferred to
paper.

White spots with toner cores

White spots with pieces of
aggregated toner in the center
visible in solid color area. Pieces
of aggregated toner may be
irremovable.

1373
 5. Troubleshooting

Middle classification2 Sample Definition

Fish-shape stains
Stains in the shape of small fish
which appear to be swimming in
the paper feed direction.

Large classification: Lines

Middle classification1: Streaks
Definition: A smudge or a white area inside an image, in a linear shape with 1mm or smaller width.

Middle classification2 Sample Definition

Vertical black (color) streaks Black (color) streaks appearing in

the paper feed direction.

Vertical white streaks Image missing in the shape of

streaks in the paper feed direction.

Horizontal black (color) streaks Black (color) streaks appearing in

the direction perpendicular to the
paper feed direction.

Horizontal white streaks Image missing in the shape of

streaks in the direction
perpendicular to the paper feed
direction.

1374
 Image Quality

Middle classification2 Sample Definition

Horizontal glossy streaks Glossy streaks appearing in the

paper feed direction.

Horizontal white streaks Glossy streaks appearing in the

direction perpendicular to the
paper feed direction.

Image scratches Stains in the shape of vertical

streaks which seem to result from
being scratched by the guide
plate ribs or other parts.

Middle classification1: Bands

Definition: A smudge or a white area inside an image, in a linear shape with 1mm or larger width.

Middle classification2 Sample Definition

Jitter Blurred area visible as bands in

the direction perpendicular to the
paper feed direction.

Banding Pitch banding in the direction

perpendicular to the paper feed
direction. (Gear eyes: Color
unevenness in the same interval as
the pitch of the gear.)

1375
 5. Troubleshooting

Middle classification2 Sample Definition

Vertical white bands White bands in the paper feed

direction.

Horizontal white bands White bands in the direction

perpendicular to the paper feed
direction.

Vertical black (color) bands Black (color) bands in the paper

feed direction.

Horizontal black (color) bands Black (color) bands in the

direction perpendicular to the
paper feed direction.

Fuzzy lines Blurred images in the shape of

slightly winding bands in the
paper feed direction.

Roller tracks Stains on the transport rollers

transferred to paper.

1376
 Image Quality

Large classification: Plane

Middle classification1: Whole area
Definition: Images and text missing from the whole sheet.

Middle classification2 Sample Definition

All black Copied paper is all black.

Blank No image is reproduced.

Middle classification1: Non-reproduction

Definition: Parts of the developed images and letters are not reproduced.

Middle classification2 Sample Definition

White zone Part of a solid image or halftone is

missing.

Wormholes The outline of a letter (or a line) is

reproduced but the inside of it is
missing.

1377
 5. Troubleshooting

Middle classification2 Sample Definition

Halo There is a white line around a

solid object.

Negative residual image Previously copied image is

reproduced with its black and
white reversed on the same page
or the next page.

Positive residual image Previously copied image is

reproduced on the same page or
the next page.

Offset The same image is repeatedly

transferred in the same interval.

Missing image Developed image slided in the

subscan direction or missing.

Middle classification1: Unevenness

Definition: The density of the developed image is uneven.

1378
 Image Quality

Middle classification2 Sample Definition

High density Image density higher than

configured.

Low density Image density lower than

configured.

Uneven density Image density is uneven within the

same page.

Unevenness in indefinite shape Image density unevenness in

indefinite shapes.

Uneven glossiness The glossiness is uneven inside a

dark solid image. Check it by
looking at the paper from different
angles.

Color changing During repeated printing, the

color or the density changes from
sheet to sheet.

1379
 5. Troubleshooting

Middle classification2 Sample Definition

Color difference The colors differ between the

original and the copy.

Rough image Color is uneven and small white

spots are visible inside a solid
image. With color copiers, white
spots may not appear when two
colors are overlapped.

Earthworm shape White area in a shape similar to

an earthworm.

Moire When superimposed regular

pattern, it is a pattern of striped
periodic possible by pixel to
interfere with each other.
Halftones may become mosaics.

Blur Image seemingly blurred in all

directions.

Middle classification1: Stains

Definition: Areas outside letters or images are stained.

1380
 Image Quality

Middle classification2 Sample Definition

Background stains Granular stains are visible in

unprinted areas of the paper.

Backside stains Granular stains are visible on the

backside of the paper.

Toner scattered Toner scattered around a letter.

Edge stains The side edges of paper are

stained.

Middle classification1: Irregularity

Definition: Image or letter becoming irregular in comparison with the original.

Middle classification2 Sample Definition

Irregularity Image becoming irregular in

comparison with the original.

1381
 5. Troubleshooting

Middle classification2 Sample Definition

Image expansion Image expanded abnormally in

comparison with the original.

Image contraction Image contracted abnormally in

comparison with the original.

Skew The corners of an image copied

from a rectangle original are not
square.

Middle classification1: Scratches

Definition:Stains in the shape of vertical streaks which seem to result from being scratched by the
guide plate ribs or other parts.

Middle classification2 Sample Definition

Claw marks Stains of toner that got on the

paper when it came into contact
with drum/fuser pawls.

Middle classification1: Image shift

Definition:Stains in the shape of vertical streaks which seem to result from being scratched by the
guide plate ribs or other parts.

1382
 Image Quality

Middle classification2 Sample Definition

Vertical image shift Images and lines shifted in the

paper feed direction.

Horizontal image shift Images and lines shifted in the

direction perpendicular to the
paper feed direction.

Vertical color shift Color shifted in the paper feed

direction where colors should be
overlaid.

Horizontal color shift Color shifted in the direction

perpedicular to the paper feed
direction where colors should be
overlaid.

Image Quality 001: Spots

Overview

White spots seen in solid colored areas or color spots seen in areas without images. The description
"white spots" excludes those with toner cores.

Item Description

Color spots (189mm/40mm pitch) Color spots in 189mm/40 mm pitch may appear in solid
areas.

1383
 5. Troubleshooting

Item Description

White spots in low-temperature, low- White spots may appear in low-temperature, low-humidity
humidity environment (10 °C/15 %) environments.

White spots in Winter Environment White spots appear in an area ranging 40mm from the
(D137/D138) leading edge.

White spots White spots or black spots may appear when printing
halftone images in low-temperature, low-humidity
environments immediately after replacing the developer.

White spots with toner cores White spots with toner cores may appear inside solid
images.

White, fish-shape stains White points or short lines may appear in the feed direction
in 189 mm pitch.

Small granular toner fixation 0.5-1mm or trailing toner fixation may appear in halftone
images.

Troubleshooting for Color spots (189mm/40mm pitch)

Symptom
Colored spots appear at 40mm or 189mm intervals in solid image areas (black or white) or
throughout the entire image on the single-color Independent Pattern (1-dot), when printing onto A3
or SRA3 sheets.
Cause
• Scratches or foreign particles on the OPC surface
• Scratches or foreign particles on the charge rollers
Solution
Do the following:
1. Load A3 or SRA3 paper in the tray.
2. In SP2-1090-003, set the test pattern to solid white, solid black, and single color
Independent Pattern 1-dot.
3. Print out the pattern and check the interval of the spots.
If the symptom occurs at 189mm intervals:
• If there are any scratches on the OPC, replace the OPC.
• If there are no scratches, wipe the OPC surface with a damp cloth and then with a dry
cloth.

1384
 Image Quality

If the symptom occurs at 40mm intervals:

• If there are scratches on the charge rollers, replace the affected roller(s).
• If there are no scratches, wipe the surface of the roller with a damp cloth and then with a
dry cloth.

Troubleshooting for White Spots in Low-Temperature, Low-Humidity Environment

Symptom
1. Under the weight of Plain Paper 2: White spots may appear on the 2nd page of duplex
printing when using the paper with unsmooth surface and high electric resistance in LL
environment.
2. Higher than weight of Middle Thick Paper: White spots may appear on paper with unsmooth
surface and high electric resistance. (See sample image below)

Cause
1. The electrical resistance increases when the paper goes through the fusing roller and the
moisture of the paper evaporates.
2. Due to high electrical resistance characteristics of the paper.
Action
Lower transfer current by changing the following SP
Only change the paper type and thickness that the user needs to use.

D135/D136/D137/D138
SP No. SP Name

SP2-641-001 to 078 PTR Bias:BW

1385
 5. Troubleshooting

SP No. SP Name

SP2-642-001 to 078 PTR Bias:BW

SP2-651-001 to 078 PTR Bias:FC

SP2-652-001 to 078 PTR Bias:FC

D137/D138 only
No. IMSS setting

42 Paper Transfer Current Setting: B&W: Side 1

43 Paper Transfer Current Setting: Full Color: Side 1

44 Paper Transfer Current Setting: B&W: Side 2

45 Paper Transfer Current Setting: Full Color: Side 2

• Image may not be solid enough, in case of too low transfer current.

Troubleshooting for White spots Appear in Winter Environment (Pro C5110S/Pro

C5100S)
Symptom
White spots appear in an area ranging 40mm from the leading edge.

1386
 Image Quality

[A]: White spots

[B]: 40mm
[C]: Feed direction
Cause
Electrical discharge occurs at the PTR nip.
-In detail-
In low temp and low humidity environment, the resistivity of the PTR increases. To maintain the
prescribed electric current level in this adverse condition, the transfer voltage increases. Running
the machine in this condition using paper with high resistivity and low surface smoothness causes
electrical discharge at the PTR nip as a result of excessive transfer voltage.
The problem is likely to occur in the following conditions.
Model: D137/D138 only (AC transfer applies higher transfer voltage at the leading edge)
Environment : Low temperature & low humidity
Paper: High resistance & low surface smoothness
Image: Halftone
Solution
1. Decrease the paper transfer current from -75 micro A (default) to -60 micro A.
This will prevent the PTR voltage from increasing.
Possible side effect: Solid colors appear slightly faint.
2. Run a 50-100 page job. This will increase the machine internal temperature and prevent the
discharge from occurring at the PTR nip.
3. Request your customer to use paper with lower resistivity and higher surface smoothness.

Troubleshooting for White spots

Symptom
White or black spots appear when printing halftone images in low-temperature, low-humidity
environments (10C/15%) immediately after the developer is replaced.

• Black spots occur more frequently when printing onto coated paper.

1387
 5. Troubleshooting

Cause
Some carrier particles inside newly-installed developer have a relatively high electrical potential.
These particles may be transferred to the OPC in non-image areas as well, and then fall off before
image transfer. As a result, a white spot is developed on the image.
If these carrier particles are transferred to the ITB, toner around the carrier drops off, forming a
black spot.
Solution
Do the following.
D137/D138:
Execute “Adjust Image Density” (0201-01) inside the Skilled Operator Settings.

• This is effective when the development gamma is low (about 0.8 or less) or the OPC electric
potential is high, such as in low-temperature, low-humidity environments.
D135/D136:
Execute “Density Adjustment Process Control” by tapping the following buttons: [User Tools/
Counters] – [Management] – [Auto Color Calibration].

• This is effective when the development gamma is low (about 0.8 or less) or the OPC electric
potential is high, such as in low-temperature, low-humidity environments.
• After you do this, color calibration is optional.

1388
 Image Quality

CE:
Execute SP3-011-002 ([Manual ProCon :Exe] - Density Adjustment).

Troubleshooting for White spots with toner cores

Symptom
White spots with “toner cores” appear inside solid images/patches when printing under high-
temperature conditions.

Cause
• The machine is left unused for an extended time, and toner tends to clump inside the
development unit. As a result, toner may not be transferred onto the paper correctly.
• The PCDU is subjected to strong vibration or shock. This may cause toner on the wall of the
unit to fall inside the developer and form clumps.
• The toner is left outside the moisture bag too long. This may cause toner to form clumps.
Solution
Do the following, which will clear the toner clumps out of the development unit.
1. Make a test print and determine the affected color(s).
2. Print out 30-200 A3 sheets with solid images of the affected color(s).
3. If the symptom still occurs, replace the toner cartridge of the affected color.
4. Repeat Step 2.
5. If the symptom still occurs, replace the development unit/developer of the affected color.

1389
 5. Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting for White, fish-shape stains

Symptom
Rows of “Medaka” (small, white, fish-shaped specks) appear in solid image areas along the paper
feed direction at 189mm intervals when printing onto A3/SRA3 paper.

Cause
Small foreign objects or particles on the surface of the OPC drum
Solution
Do the action shown in the flowchart below.

1390
 Image Quality

Troubleshooting for Small granular toner fixation (Pro C5110S /Pro C5100S)
Symptom
Small clumps of toner are offset and appear as spots or short lines.

1391
 5. Troubleshooting

1. Short line
2. Spots (0.5 to 1 mm)
Cause
Toner clumps adhered to the pressure roller are not picked up by the cleaning web and offset to
the printed paper.
Following are conditions that increase the risk of this symptom:
• Halftone printing
• Duplex printing
• Uncoated (especially rough surfaced) paper
• Small size paper (B5, customer paper of 216mm in sub scan direction)

1392
 Image Quality

Flow chart

Image Quality 002: Streaks

Overview

A smudge or a white area inside an image, in a linear shape with 1mm or smaller width.

1393
 5. Troubleshooting

Item Description

Vertical streaks caused by contact with the

Vertical streaks may appear.
toner adhering to the guide plate

Streaks appear on the prints after switching the

Streaks made by Paper Edges
paper to a larger size

Horizontal white streaks may appear in the small

Horizontal white streaks in small solid black
solid black area when printing in HH environment
areas
(27° C 80%).

Troubleshooting for Vertical streaks caused by contact with the toner adhering to the
guide plate
Symptom
Vertical streaks appear.
Condition
Scratches tend to stand out when printing on relatively stiff thick coated paper.
Cause
Paper after fusing come into contact with small convex scratches or adhering toner on the guide
plate and vertical streaks appear.
Action (overview)
1. If the problem occurs in the position of the ribs of the heat pipe entrance guide plate, clean the
heat pipe entrance guide plate ribs.
2. If the problem occurs in other places, clean the paper transport path/duplex unit.
3. If cleaning does not improve the situation, lower the fusing temperature.
Action (detail 1): Clean the heat pipe entrance guide plate ribs.
Position of the heat pipe entrance guide plate ribs [A]

1394
 Image Quality

Action (detail 2): Clean the Paper Exit transport path/Duplex unit.
• If streaks appear on straight-fed one-sided prints or the second side of two side prints: (1)
Clean the upper part of the Paper Exit transport path.
• If streaks appear on first sides of two-sided prints: (2) Clean the lower part of the Paper Exit
transport path.
• If streaks appear on inverted one-sided prints: (3) Clean the lower left part of the Paper Exit
transport path.
• If streaks appear on the second side of two side prints: (4) Clean the duplex unit.
1. Upper part of the Paper Exit transport path

[A]: Paper Exit Upper Guide Plate

2. Lower part of the Paper Exit transport path

1395
 5. Troubleshooting

[A]: Fuser Exit Guide Plate

[B]: Heat Pipe Entrance Guide Plate
[C]: Paper Exit Junction Gate
[D]: Transport Ribs (22 positions)
[E]: Paper Exit Guide Plate (Clean this point intensively.)
3. Lower left part of the Paper Exit transport path

[A]: Paper Exit Lower Left Guide Plate (Clean this point intensively.)
[B]: Paper Exit Lower Right Guide Plate
[C]: Junction Gate Ends
4. Duplex unit

1396
 Image Quality

[A]: Duplex Transport guide plate (Upper) (Clean the turning point on the right intensively.)
[B]: Duplex Transport guide plate (Lower)
Action (detail 3): Lower the fusing temperature.
Enter SP mode and lower the fusing temperature with SP1-984. (Guideline: Lower it 10° C at a
time.)

• There is a risk of decreasing fusing ability. Be sure to check the printed results.

Pro/Office SP No. SP Name Value

Pro/Office SP1-984-109 to 254 Htg Roller Temp Setting 0 to 200

Pro/Office No. IMSS setting Value

Pro 74 (SP1-984-001 to Fusing Heat Roller 0 to 200

100) Temperature Adjustment

Reference
Following are features unique to the CH-C1 series that contribute to the vertical streaks.
• Chances of foreign materials to scratch the prints are high because the toner used for the
Charis series has a low melting point.
• Paper contacts the guide plate after fusing because the curve of the switchback exit path is
tight.

MPC7501/6501 ProC5100S/5110S ProC751EX/651EX

Curvature Ave R35 Ave R50 Ave R70

1397
 5. Troubleshooting

MPC7501/6501 ProC5100S/5110S ProC751EX/651EX

Straight: up to 300gsm Straight: up to 300gsm Straight: up to 300gsm

Supported Switchback: up to Switchback: up to Switchback: up to
paper (gsm) 163gsm 256gsm 256gsm
Duplex: up to 163gsm Duplex: up to 256gsm Duplex: up to 256gsm

SPR-F2
Toner CER CER-gamma
* Low melting point

Comparisonwith MPC7501/6501
Advantage: Curvature
Disadvantage: Support for thicker paper, Toner
Comparison with ProC751EX/651EX
Disadvantage: Support for thicker paper, Toner
Layout of the fusing exit paper path

[A]: Cooling roller

[B]: Fusing

Troubleshooting for Streaks made by Paper Edges

General
D137/D138 employs the new Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller feature to prevent streaks caused by
scratches on the fusing belt generated by paper edges.

1398
 Image Quality

Since this feature can be used by operators, please recommend usage of this feature to customers
who are troubled with the problem described below, especially for customers who use coated
and/or thick paper.
Symptom
Streaks appear along the feed direction when switching to a larger paper size.
Cause
Running a job continuously on a certain paper size causes the paper edges to damage the fusing
belt, which causes streaks on the printouts when switching to a larger paper size.

[A] The smaller size paper used prior to the job resulting in the streaks, which causes the damage to
the fusing belt
[B] Paper edge mark on the fusing belt
Solution (D137/D138)
Smooth the Fusing Belt with the Fusing Smoothing Roller using SP mode.

1399
 5. Troubleshooting

SP Operator menu Description Setting

SP1-133-110 0210 Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller 1: Yes 0: No

• One belt smoothing operation lasts for 3 minutes.

• Belt smoothing operation time can be adjusted in SP1-133-120 (default: 3 min).
• The yield of the belt smoothing roller is 180 minutes (= 60 times).
Effect
The photos in the table below show a sample of the effect brought from the belt smoothing
operation.

1400
 Image Quality

Condition 1: Printing on HML Condition 2: One smoothing Condition 3: Two smoothing

A3 after printing 10kp of full- operation (3 min) after operations (6 min) after
bleed solid on HMLSRA3 “Condition 1” “Condition 2”

• Effect will differ depending on the paper in use and job conditions.
Solution (D135/D136)
Polish the edges on the fusing belt using the tool in the following table.
See procedure below.

New P/N Description Q’ty Int Page Index Note

M077428
WEB:POLISH:FUSING:ASS'Y 1 - - - -
7

[A]: M0774287 WEB:POLISH:FUSING:ASS'Y

Procedure for Polishing the Fusing Belt
1. Pull out the drawer unit.

1401
 5. Troubleshooting

2. Press locks ([A], [B]) and remove the unit from the machine.

• Hold the locks down while you pull out the unit.

3. Open the top cover.

1402
 Image Quality

4. Rub the surface of the M0774287 polishing tool (WEB:POLISH:FUSING:ASS'Y) against the
surface of the fusing belt.

• After you finish each section of the fusing belt surface, rotate the fusing gear [A]
counterclockwise and do the next section. Repeat this until you have polished the entire
surface of the belt.
• Make sure to polish both the front and rear sides of the fusing belt. This is because
scratches are generated by the front and rear edges of paper.

1. Surface of polishing tool

2. Fusing belt

• This action will smoothen out any scratches on the fusing belt surface.
• When you rotate the fusing gear [A] counterclockwise, the fusing belt rotates clockwise.

1403
 5. Troubleshooting

5. After you finish polishing the entire belt, close the fusing unit cover.
6. Reattach the drawer unit.
7. Print out some sample copies and check whether the vertical lines appear.

• It is recommended to replace this web (M0774288) after each polishing of the fusing belt
(one web per fusing belt) in accordance with the following procedure.

New P/N Description Q’ty Int Page Index Note

M077428
WEB:POLISH:FUSING 1 - - - -
8

M0774288 WEB:POLISH:FUSING

Procedure for Replacing the Web

1. Remove the screw at the bottom of the tool.

1404
 Image Quality

2. Remove the metal plate [B] from the tool [A].

3. Peel off the used web (M0774288 WEB:POLISH:FUSING).

4. Peel off the seals on both ends of the new web, and then wrap the web around the tool.

1405
 5. Troubleshooting

5. Attach the metal plate to the tool.

6. Fasten the bottom screw to complete the procedure.

1406
 Image Quality

Troubleshooting for Horizontal White Streaks in Small Solid Black Areas

Symptom
White streaks may appear in feeding direction on the small solid black area (smaller than 3cm x
3cm). (See sample below in red circle)

Cause
Detailed description will be added when this manual is revised.
Action
1. Print black in FC mode.
PS driver and PCL driver
• Select “Print Quality” from Detailed Settings.
• Select “User Setting” as Settings for Images.
• Select “CMY+K” or “Black by K (Black) – Text Only” for PS driver, and “CMY+K” for
PCL driver as Gray Reproduction.
Fiery driver
• Select “Job Properties” of the affected image.
• Select “Expert setting” from “Color” tab.
• Select “Gray/Black Processing” Tab.
• Specify “Normal” for Black text and graphics in order to print in CMYK mode.
2. Increase image transfer current. (+5 to 10 A from the default)

D135/D136/D137/D138
SP No. SP Name

SP2-451-001 ITB K:Standard:FC

SP2-451-002 ITB K:Standard:BW

1407
 5. Troubleshooting

D137/D138 only
No. IMSS setting

37 Image Transfer Current Setting: B&W

38 Image Transfer Current Setting: FC: Black

• Transfer capability and image density may worse.

• Residual image in black halftone may appear.

Image Quality 003: Bands

Troubleshooting for Blurred Image in 189mm Pitch (OPC Drum Circumference)

Symptom
First few printouts after turning on the machine may have 189mm pitch blurred image (which
corresponds to the OPC drum circumference) on halftone images in high humidity environment.
(See sample below)

Cause
Charge failure caused by “corona products” that form on the OPC drum
If the symptom occurs when all of conditions below are met,

1408
 Image Quality

• Operation after a long break (as in the initial operation of the day)
• Halftone image
• High humidity
Action
1. Execute “Color Registration” from “Maintenance” in User Tools.
2. Execute “Auto Color Calibration” from “Maintenance” in User Tools.

Troubleshooting fuzzy line in originating in cyan drum (Pro C5110S/Pro C5100S)

This section provides troubleshooting procedures for the image quality issue known as “fuzzy lines”,
particularly for those originating in the Cyan station.
Symptom
Unwanted lines appear on the printouts in 189mm pitch (=drum circumference) in main scan
direction. The lines could either be solid or interrupted as shown below.

Solid lines Interrupted lines

• To check if the lines are originating in the Cyan station, print out a solid image in 100% Cyan.
Cause
The electrical charge applied to the ITB is discharged when the ITB passes under the Cyan drum.
This is because the ITB is closer to the Cyan drum than other drums when the ITB retracts.

1409
 5. Troubleshooting

• The problem is more likely to occur with a wrinkled ITB because the distance between the ITB
and drum could come closer at the wrinkled spots, resulting in the discharge. The unwanted
lines usually appear interrupted in this case.
• Also, the problem is more likely to occur with brand new units. Running the machine will
acclimatize the ITB and drum, and resolve the problem.
This diagram describes the condition of the ITB and drums when the ITB is in contact with all the
drums.

However, when the ITB retracts from the color drums, the distance between the ITB and Y, M and C
drums varies. The C drum is closest to the ITB.

Solution
For solid lines:
Replace the ITB drive roller.
If the problem persists even after replacing the ITB driver roller, print out 10 to 50 copies of solid
images in 100% Cyan to acclimatize the ITB and drum.
For interrupted lines:
Replace the ITB driver roller. This will help prevent wrinkles from forming on the ITB.

1410
 Image Quality

[A]: ITB drive roller

Model: D137/D138

Old Part New Part Q’ty Int Page Index Note

Description
Number Number

DRIVE ROLLER:
D1366070 D1356070 INTERMEDIATE 1 - - - -
TRANSFER:ASS'Y

S/N information
The production process was improved to prevent wrinkles from forming on the ITB for units of the
following S/N.
D13717: E253C900027-
D13721: E253C920001-
D13727: E253C930001-
D13729: E253C950001-
D13817: E263C900001-
D13821: E263C920001 -
D13827: E263C930001-
D13829: E263C950001-

Troubleshooting Roller marks

Symptom
Roller marks appear on the printouts when any of the following conditions are met:

1411
 5. Troubleshooting

• Coated paper
• Solid image
• High-temp / high-humidity environment (27 °C, 80% or higher)
Cause
Nip of the drive and idle rollers installed in the paper path after the fusing unit
Diagram describing the location of the roller marks caused by the Paper exit relay roller, Inverter
feed-in roller, Inverter exit roller, Inverter feed-out roller:

Diagram describing the location of the roller marks caused by the Paper exit roller:

Solution
Step 1: Clean or replace the drive/idle rollers.
If the roller marks do not disappear by cleaning or replacing the rollers, do Step 2.
Step 2: Decrease the fusing temp.
Step 1: Clean or replace the drive/idle rollers in the following units.

• Clean the rollers with dry cloth. DO NOT apply alcohol.

Paper Exit Unit

1412
 Image Quality

Open the guide plates and clean the following rollers.

[A]: Paper exit unit

[B]: Fusing unit
[C]: Sponge rollers (Paper exit relay)
[D]: Sponge rollers (Paper exit)
[E]: Rubber rollers (Paper exit)

[A]: Fusing unit

[B]: Paper exit unit

1413
 5. Troubleshooting

[C]: Heat pipe rollers

[D]: Rubber Rollers (Paper exit relay)

[A]: Sponge rollers (Inverter exit)

[B]: Rubber rollers (Inverter exit)
[C]: Sponge rollers (Inverter feed-out)
[D]: Rubber rollers (Inverter feed-out)
Inverter Feed-in
Remove the fusing unit. Remove the screw (circled in blue) to remove the inner cover. Remove the 2
E-rings (circled in red) to remove the junction gate.

[A]: Inner cover

[B]: Junction gate

1414
 Image Quality

[C]: Sponge rollers (Inverter feed-in)

[D]: Rubber rollers (Inverter feed-in)
Duplex Unit
To clean the rollers inside the Duplex unit, cover the cloth over an equipment with length, for
example, a ruler for extended reach.

[A]: Rubber rollers x 8

[B]: Rubber rollers x 7
[C]: Idle rollers x 8
Duplex Inverter Unit

1415
 5. Troubleshooting

[A]: Rubber rollers x 5

Step 2: Decreasing the fusing temp
Decrease the fusing temp by 1 step (10 °C) in either the IMSS or SP mode.

• Decreasing the fusing temp may cause poor fusing. Make sure to check the results after every
adjustment.

IMSS No. Description Range

74 Fusing Heat Roller Temperature Adjustment (for

0 to 200 °C
(SP1-984-001 to 100) each custom paper)

SP No. Description Range

Htg Roller Temp Setting (for each paper type/

SP1-984-109 to 254 0 to 200 °C
thickness)

Troubleshooting for 2-3mm pitch banding

Symptom
Banding (uneven density) in 2-3mm pitch

1416
 Image Quality

Cause
Vibration of the cleaning unit synchronizes with the vibration generated by the gears that rotate the
Cleaning Brush Roller, creating a resonance.
This occurs specifically when the Cleaning Brush Roller rotates in the following 2 speeds, which are
defined as “Environment Coefficient 7 & 8” based on the absolute humidity detected internally by
the machine.

Operation mode Absolute humidity Cleaning brush roller rotation speed

coefficient

Environment Coefficient 7 15-17.5 g/m3 1.63 (default)

Environment Coefficient 8 17.5-20 g/m3 1.76 (default)

Reference
Environment Coefficient 1-3: Low temperature and low humidity
Environment Coefficient 4-6: Optimum machine operational condition (laboratory)
Environment Coefficient 7-10: High temperature and high humidity
Solution
Enter the SP mode and modify the environment coefficient set for Environment Coefficient 7 and 8
as shown below.

SP2-225-038
1.63 (default) 1.90
Environment Coefficient 7

SP2-225-039
1.76 (default) 1.90
Environment Coefficient 8

1417
 5. Troubleshooting

* 1.90 is the default environment coefficient set for Environment Coefficient 9.

IMPORTANT
If you are not sure whether the uneven density problem you are trying to resolve is “Banding in
2-3mm pitch” or not, do the following procedure.
A) Set SP2-225-032 through 041 to “1.50”, and print the job showing the problem.
B) Set SP2-225-032 through 041 to “1.63”, and print the job showing the problem.
C) Set SP2-225-032 through 041 to “1.76”, and print the job showing the problem.
If the problem does not occur in condition A, but occurs either in conditions B or C, the problem is
judged to be Banding in 2-3mm pitch.

• DO NOT print more than 10 pages with the above modified SP setting. Make sure to set each
SP back to default after the test.

Environment Coefficient SP number Default

1 SP2-225-032 0.70

2 SP2-225-033 0.83

3 SP2-225-034 0.96

4 SP2-225-035 1.10

5 SP2-225-036 1.30

6 SP2-225-037 1.50

7 SP2-225-038 1.63

8 SP2-225-039 1.76

9 SP2-225-040 1.90

10 SP2-225-041 2.00

Side effect
Increased lubricant consumption

Troubleshooting for Banding Caused by the PCDU (Pro C5110S/Pro C5100S)

Symptom / Cause
Bands (uneven density) in a certain pitch appear across the entire page. The problem is caused by
the vibration of the components of the PCDU.

1418
 Image Quality

The pitch in which the bands appear differs depending on the component causing the problem.

• 53mm pitch: Primary development roller [A]

• 26.5mm pitch: Secondary development roller [B]
• 189mm pitch: Drum [C]
• 32mm pitch: Developer supply auger [D]
• 40mm pitch: Charge roller [E]
• 4 to 5mm pitch: Charge cleaning roller [F]

1419
 5. Troubleshooting

How to verify if the bands are caused by components of the PCDU

1. Execute Process Control (SP3-011-002).
2. Select the test patterns (CMYK) in SP2-109-003 and specify the values described in the table
below and print out the test patterns.

1420
 Image Quality

Test pattern (CMYK Chart) and Setting

K C M Y

2-109-003 26 26 26 26
(Test pattern no.)

2-109-006 5 0 0 0
(Bk output density)

2-109-007 0 5 0 0
SP
(C output density)

2-109-008 0 0 5 0
(M output density)

2-109-009 0 0 0 5
(Y output density)

3. Measure the pitch of the bands.

Solution
Bands caused by the Development Roller [53mm/26.5mm pitch]
1. Execute DEMS (SP3040-001).
2. Do the procedure: “Centering the axis of the Development roller” described on the last page.
3. If the problem does not resolve, replace the PCDU and execute DEMS (SP3040-001).
Bands caused by the Drum [189mm pitch]
1. Execute DEMS (SP3040-001).
2. Do the procedure: “Centering the axis of the Drum” described on the last page.
3. If the problem does not resolve, replace the PCDU and execute DEMS (SP3040-001).
Bands caused by the Toner Supply Auger [32mm pitch]
1. Reset the PCDU and execute DEMS (SP3040-001).
2. If the problem does not resolve, replace the PCDU and execute DEMS (SP3040-001).
Bands caused by the Charge Roller [40mm pitch]
1. Reset the charge roller unit and execute DEMS (SP3040-001).
Bands caused by the Charge Cleaning Roller [4-5mm pitch]
1. Execute Process Control (SP3-011-002).
2. Reset the charge roller unit and execute DEMS (SP3040-001).

1421
 5. Troubleshooting

3. If the problem does not resolve, replace the charge roller unit and execute DEMS
(SP3040-001).
Bands that appear in random pitch
1. Reset the PCDU and execute DEMS (SP3040-001).
2. Do the procedure: “Centering the axis of the Development roller” described on the next page.
3. Replace the charge roller unit and execute DEMS (SP3040-001).
4. Do the procedure: “Centering the axis of the Drum” described on the next page.
5. Replace the drum and execute DEMS (SP3040-001).
6. Replace the PCDU and execute DEMS (SP3040-001).
Centering the axis of the development roller
Ideally, the development roller and drum should revolve at the very center of the axis so that a
consistent gap is maintained between these components during the development process. This
however is not possible due to the margin of error.
To reduce the margin of error, center the axis of the development roller by fine adjusting the
engagement between the drive and coupling gears of the development roller.
1. Pull out the PCDU of the affected color.
2. Turn the coupling gear located at the rear side of the development unit 90 degrees
counterclockwise (viewed from rear).
3. Set the PCDU and execute DEMS (SP3040-001).
4. Print the test pattern and check the results.
5. Repeat the above steps, if improvement cannot be confirmed.

[A]: Joint of the development roller

[B]: Direction of rotation

1422
 Image Quality

Centering the axis of the drum

Similarly to the above procedure, center the axis of the drum by performing the following
procedure.
1. Pull out the PCDU.
2. Remove the rear cover.
3. Turn the drum motor 5 full rotations clockwise (viewed from rear).
4. Set the PCDU and attach the rear cover.
5. Execute DEMS (SP3040-001).
6. Print the test pattern and check the results.
7. Repeat the above steps, if improvement cannot be confirmed.

[A]: Drum motor

[B]: Turn clockwise

Troubleshooting for “shock-jitter” in B/W mode (Pro C5110S/Pro C5100S)

Symptom
One or more lines appear on the printout across the paper feed direction when printing in B/W
mode. This image quality issue is known as “shock-jitter”.

1423
 5. Troubleshooting

Cause
The primary cause of the problem is the difference in the rotation speed of the ITB motor and
Registration motor.
Details of the cause differ depending on the type of shock-jitter as described below.
Type 1
Difference in the rotation speed of the ITB motor and registration motor causes difference in the ITB
rotation speed and the paper transport speed, which generates a shock and disrupts the image
transfer process at the PTR. Image is disrupted when the trailing edge passes through the
registration roller.

1424
 Image Quality

Type 2
This type involves both of the following 2 factors.
A) Difference in the rotation speed of the ITB motor and registration motor causes difference in the
ITB rotation speed and the paper transport speed, which generates a shock and disrupts the image
transfer process at the PTR.
B) Depending on the type of paper in use the paper drags the ITB, which causes the ITB to rotate
slightly faster than the Bk drum. This disrupts the toner transfer from the Bk drum to the ITB.
As a result of the above, the image disrupted between the drum and ITB is transferred to the paper
at the PTR, which corresponds to the timing when the trailing edge passes through the registration
roller.

1425
 5. Troubleshooting

Shock-jitter of Type 2 generates the unwanted line toward the Leading edge.
Shock-jitter of Type 1 generates the unwanted line toward the Trailing edge.

1426
 Image Quality

• Shock-jitter of Types 1 and 2 can occur together on the same printout.

Solution
Fine adjust the line speed in the SP mode according to the paper in use. See following pages for
detailed procedure.

• Note the following side effect when adjusting the line speed.
• Image size will reduce in sub-scan direction as described in the table to the right. The
reduction ratio will differ depending on the machine.

Image size reduction in

Paper weight Line speed adjustment
sub-scan direction

-0.2% -0.20%

Weight 5 -0.4% -0.22%

-0.5% -0.26%

-0.2% -0.22%

Weight 6 -0.4% -0.25%

-0.5% -0.26%

-0.3% -0.24%

Weight 7 -0.5% -0.27%

-0.6% -0.29%

-0.3% -0.20%

Weight 8 -0.5% -0.28%

-0.6% -0.30%

How to verify if the lines are “shock-jitter”

Before fine adjusting the line speed, print a test pattern under the following conditions and check
the location of the lines to verify if the lines you are trying to resolve are shock-jitter.

1427
 5. Troubleshooting

[Test conditions]

Paper size A3/DLT or SRA3

Feed tray Tray1-4 or LCT

Print mode B/W mode

Weight Weight 3 (216-256 gsm) (=Weight 7 in

Customer Paper Settings)

No. of copies More than 2 (Shock-jitter does not appear

on the 1st sheet.)

Test pattern SP2109-003: 26

SP2019-005: 5

• Weight 3 paper is not necessarily needed for the check, but the weight of this paper tends to
display the lines more accurately in the expected location and makes the check easier.
[Check table]

D137
A3 A3 SRA3

a
Approx 130 mm Approx 128mm Approx 94 mm
(distance from LE)

1428
 Image Quality

A3 A3 SRA3

b
Approx 84 mm Approx 84 mm Approx 84 mm
(distance from TE)

D138
A3 A3 SRA3

a
Approx 161 mm Approx 159 mm Approx 121 mm
(distance from LE)

b
Approx 84 mm Approx 84 mm Approx 84 mm
(distance from TE)

Procedure: Line Speed Adjustment in the SP Mode

SP modification to fine adjust the line speed will reduce the line speed before the PTR in the
following locations: Registration, Duplex exit, Feed tray

[A]: Registration
[B]: Duplex exit
[C]: Feed tray
[D]: ITB Unit
[E]: PTR
[F]: Registration roller

• When modifying the SP values, make sure to apply the same modified value for all of the
following 7 SPs as a set.

1429
 5. Troubleshooting

SP
(Paper type / IMSS Description Adjustment range
weight)

16
SP1-019-001 to Registration Motor Feed -3.0 to 3.0 (0.1%
022 (SP1-961-001 to Speed Adjustment steps)
100)

17
SP1-008-001 to First Transport Motor Feed -3.0 to 3.0 (0.1%
008 (SP1-956-001 to Speed Adjustment steps)
100)

18
SP1-010-001 to Second Transport Motor -3.0 to 3.0 (0.1%
008 (SP1-957-001 to Feed Speed Adjustment steps)
100)

19
SP1-012-001 to Third Transport Motor -3.0 to 3.0 (0.1%
008 (SP1-958-001 to Feed Speed Adjustment steps)
100)

20 Relay Transport Motor

SP1-016-001 to -3.0 to 3.0 (0.1%
(SP1-959-001 to Feed Speed Adjustment:
022 steps)
100) CW

21 Relay Transport Motor

SP1-018-001 to -3.0 to 3.0 (0.1%
(SP1-960-001 to Feed Speed Adjustment:
022 steps)
100) CCW

29
SP1-034-001 to 2-sided Exit Motor Feed -3.0 to 3.0 (0.1%
022 (SP1-969-001 to Speed Adjustment steps)
100)

Example
The following table describes an example of reducing the line speed 0.2% for Weight 3 paper
(=Weight 7 in Custom Paper Settings).

1430
 Image Quality

SP Target motor Paper Default Modified

SP1-019-007 Plain: Weight3 -0.3 -0.5

SP1-019-014 Registration Motor Feed Speed Matte: Weight 3 -0.3 -0.5

Adjustment
Glossy: Weight
SP1-019-021 -0.3 -0.5
3

First Transport Motor Feed

SP1-008-007 Plain: Weight 3 -0.3 -0.5
Speed Adjustment

Second Transport Motor Feed

SP1-010-007 Plain: Weight 3 -0.3 -0.5
Speed Adjustment

Third Transport Motor Feed

SP1-012-007 Plain: Weight 3 -0.3 -0.5
Speed Adjustment

SP1-016-007 Plain: Weight 3 -0.3 -0.5

SP1-016-014 Relay Transport Motor Feed Matte: Weight 3 -0.3 -0.5

Speed Adjustment: CW
Glossy: Weight
SP1-016-021 -0.3 -0.5
3

SP1-018-007 Plain: Weight 3 -0.3 -0.5

SP1-018-014 Relay Transport Motor Feed Matte: Weight 3 -0.3 -0.5

Speed Adjustment: CCW
Glossy: Weight
SP1-018-021 -0.3 -0.5
3

SP1-034-007 Plain: Weight 3 -0.3 -0.5

SP1-034-014 2-sided Exit Motor Feed Speed Matte: Weight 3 -0.3 -0.5
Adjustment
Glossy: Weight
SP1-034-021 -0.3 -0.5
3

* Note that there are more than 7 SPs to adjust due to the adjustments needed for different paper types.

• SP mode and Custom Paper Settings apply different terms to express paper weight. This is due
to the application of a common firmware for D135/D136 and D137/D138.
• Refer to the comparison table below to prevent mistakes.

1431
 5. Troubleshooting

Paper weight Indication in SP mode Indication in Custom Paper Settings

52.3 to 65.9 gsm Plain: Thin Paper weight 1

66 to 80.9 gsm Plain 1 Paper weight 2

81 to 100.9 gsm Plain 2 Paper weight 3

101 to 127.4 gsm Mid-Weight Paper weight 4

127.5 to 150 gsm Weight 1 Paper weight 5

150.1 to 216 gsm Weight 2 Paper weight 6

216.1 to 256 gsm Weight 3 Paper weight 7

256.1 to 300 gsm Weight 4 Paper weight 8

Image Quality 004: Non-Reproduction

Troubleshooting for Halo image

Symptom
Halo may appear especially in low-temperature, low-humidity environment (See sample below)

Cause
Detailed description will be added when this RTB is revised.
Action
In case of GW controller
Change the dpi from “2400 x 600dpi” (Default setting) to “600 x 600dpi”
In case of EFI controller
Change the halftone mode from “200 Dot + Fine Text” to “175 Dot” from “Image” tab.

1432
 Image Quality

Image Quality 005: Unevenness

Overview

The density of images and text is uneven.

Item Description

Density difference between left and right

Vertical bands of density unevenness on back When making duplex prints on coated paper in low-
sides of duplex prints made on coated paper temperature, low-humidity environment (10°C,
in low-temperature, low-humidity environment 15%), vertical bands of density unevenness appear
on halftone images only on the back sides.

Uneven density in the area 85mm from the Uneven density of halftone image may appear in
trailing edge area 85mm from the trailing edge, which
correspond to the point where the paper leave the
registration rollers.

Uneven density in the area 85mm from the

Density of halftone image may be higher or lower in
trailing edge in low-temperature, low-humidity
area 85mm from the trailing edge.
environment

Grainy image The image density is not uniform across image areas
when printing onto paper that is not smooth under
High-temperature, High-humidity (27°C, 80%).

Density unevenness and dust when using AC With certain types of paper, the concave portions of
transfer (CH-C1 Pro only) the paper may be white or too dark, or there may
be thin lines of dust.

Uneven glossiness when feeding large size The glossiness may be uneven at the sides of the
paper after small size paper paper (outside the width of the small size paper).

Unevenness in indefinite shape on sides of Unevenness in indefinite shape may appear on both
paper sides of paper.

Troubleshooting for Density Difference between Left and Right

Overview
If uneven density occurs, follow this troubleshooting procedure.

1433
 5. Troubleshooting

Density difference between left and right

*The arrow indicates the paper feed didection

Density difference between middle and right/left

Cause
• Variation in Paper Transfer Roller
• Pressure deviation of ITB bias roller
Solution (Summary)
Step 1: Print a color-by-color solid image and check the color/type of image density difference.

1434
 Image Quality

Step 2: Adjust the image density deference between right and left.
Step 3: Adjust Image Density difference between middle and right/left.
Solution (Detailed)
Step 1: Print a color-by-color solid image and check the color/type of image density difference.
1. Select SP2-109-003-26 (Test Pattern: Pattern Selection: Full Dot)
2. Do SP2-109-005 (Test Pattern Color Selection) and select the appropriate color.
3. Do SP2-109-006 to 009 (Density: K.C.M.Y) and set the appropriate color’s density to 15.
4. Press the button “Copy mode” and move to the copy window
5. If you want to print a K solid image, select BW mode and A4 paper and print. If you want to
print a C, M, Y solid image, select FC mode and A4 paper and print.
6. Check the color and type of image density difference of the output.
If there is a density difference between right and left: Go to Step 2.
If there is a density difference between middle and right/left: Go to Step 3.
Step 2: Adjust the image density deference between right and left.
1. Select SP2-109-003-026 (Test Pattern: Pattern Selection: Full Dot)
2. Do SP2-109-005 (Test Pattern Color Selection) and select the appropriate color.
3. Do SP2-109-006 to 009 and set the density value of the appropriate color to 8.
4. Do the following SP or Adjust Settings for Skilled Operator and adjust the appropriate color’s
image density deference between right and left.

Model SP No. SP Name Value

SP2-113-001 to Adj Density Diff Main Scan

Pro/Office ±5
004 Dir K.C.M.Y

Adj Density Diff Main Scan

Pro 205-01 to 04 ±5
Dir K.C.M.Y

Press [+] to increase the density at the right, which means to decrease it at the left.
Press [-] to decrease the density at the right, which means to increase it at the left.

1435
 5. Troubleshooting

*The arrow indicates the paper feed direction

[A]: Leading edge
[B]: Right
[C]: Trailing edge
[D]: Left

• Depending on the machine’s other settings; this setting may have no effect.
5. Turn the main power off and then back on.
6. Print out halftone paper by following Steps 2-1 to 3 and check effect of the adjusted settings.
Step 3: Adjust Image Density difference between middle and right/left
1. Set the appropriate color’s ITB bias to 5 A by doing the following SP.
When adjusting the ITB bias for all paper types at once (excluding the paper library for the
Office version), please use the following SP

Model SP No. SP Name Remarks

Pro/Office SP2-451-001 ITB K:Standard FC BW mode

Pro/Office SP2-451-002 ITB K:Standard FC FC mode

Pro/Office SP2-461-001 ITB C:Standard FC FC mode

Pro/Office SP2-471-001 ITB M:Standard FC FC mode

Pro/Office SP2-481-001 ITB Y:Standard FC FC mode

1436
 Image Quality

When adjusting the ITB bias for all paper types in the paper library at once (Office only),
please use the following SP.

Model SP No. SP Name Remarks

Pro SP2-801-001 to ITB Bias:K:BW BW mode

100

Pro SP2-802-001 to ITB Bias:K:FC FC mode

100

Pro SP2-803-001 to ITB Bias:C:FC FC mode

100

Pro SP2-804-001 to ITB Bias:M:FC FC mode

100

Pro SP2-805-001 to ITB Bias:Y:FC FC mode

100

2. Print out a sheet with 100% Coverage using the same procedure as Steps 1-1, 2 and
compare with the 100% Coverage printed out in Step 1.
If the image density difference is improved, go to Step 3-3.
If the image density difference is worse, go to Step 3-4.
3. Decrease the value 1 A by 1 A (Minimum :-10 A from the default value)
4. Increase the value 1 A by 1 A.

Troubleshooting for Vertical band of halftone images

Symptom
Vertical bands of uneven image density appear in halftone images on the rear side of duplex
copies/prints when printing onto coated paper in low-temperature, low-humidity environments
(10°C, 15%).

1437
 5. Troubleshooting

1: Approximately 30mm
2: Approximately 50mm
[A]: Bands of low density (at approx. 30-50mm from center)
[B]: Density is relatively high at ends of bands
Cause
Friction between the paper and registration roller generates an electrical charge on some areas of
the paper, after the paper has passed through the fusing unit to fuse the first side. The areas on the
paper are charged differently, and these differences are visible as bands.
Solution
Lower the PTR bias for the second side.
D137/D138:
• The user can use the IMSS settings to lower the bias.
• If the symptom occurs in full-color mode, use [PTR Bias:FC:Side2: Custom Paper 001 to 100]
(2-814-001 to 100).
• If the symptom occurs in B/W mode, use [PTR Bias:BW:Side2: Custom Paper 001 to 100]
(2-812-001 to 100).

• When using plain paper, the setting can be changed using 2-652-012 to 028 (for each
paper thickness and type) and 2-642-012 to 028 (for each paper thickness and type).

1438
 Image Quality

D135/D136:
A customer engineer must perform the following adjustment:
• If the symptom occurs in full-color mode, lower the value of SP2-652-001 to 008 (for each
paper thickness).
• If the symptom occurs in B/W mode, lower the value of SP2-642-001 to 008 (for each
paper thickness).
• Adjust the value between the [default value] and [default value - 20 A].

• The density of solid images may be decreased if the bias is too low (especially high-density
solid image areas). In addition, other image problems may occur.

Troubleshooting for Uneven Density in the Area 85mm from the Trailing Edge
Symptom
Uneven density of halftone image may appear in area 85mm from the trailing edge. (See sample
below)

[A]: Paper feed direction

Cause
Uneven density may appear because of the difference of both sticking level and distance between
the ITB and the paper immediately before the paper transfer process.
Following factors tend to change the sticking level and the distance:

1439
 5. Troubleshooting

• When the rotation speed of the Transfer Timing Roller and PTR differ in great degree
• Thin paper stocks
In low-temperature, low-humidity environment, electric field is generated at the PTR entrance
Action
Do the one of the following workarounds.
1. Adjust the transfer timing roller speed. Change the figure by 0.1% each.

From SP mode (D135/D136/D137/D138):

SP No. SP Name

SP2-661-001 to 018 PTR Spd Adj:Std Spd

SP2-662-001 to 018 PTR Spd Adj:Mid Spd

SP2-663-001 to 018 PTR Spd Adj:Mid-Low Spd

SP2-664-001 to 018 PTR Spd Adj:Low Spd

From IMSS setting (D137/D138 only):

No. IMSS setting

22 Paper Transfer Feed Speed Adjustment

• Only change the paper type and thickness that the user needs to use.
2. Change either registration motor speed or transport motor speed. If you will go with this
workaround, please reset the transfer roller speed to default, then change the figure by 0.1%
each.

From SP mode (D135/D136/D137/D138):

SP No. SP Name

SP1-008-001 to 008 Fine Adj. Transport Motor 1 Speed

SP1-010-001 to 008 Fine Adj. Transport Motor 2 Speed

SP1-012-001 to 008 Fine Adj. Transport Motor 3 Speed

SP1-016-001 to 022 Fine Adj. Relay Motor CW Speed

SP1-019-001 to 022 Fine Adj. Registration Motor Speed

SP1-034-001 to 022 Fine Adj. Duplex Exit Motor Speed

1440
 Image Quality

From IMSS setting (D137/D138 only):

No. IMSS setting

16 Registration Motor Feed Speed Adjustment

17 First Transport Motor Feed Speed Adjustment

18 Second Transport Motor Feed Speed Adjustment

19 Third Transport Motor Feed Speed Adjustment

20 Relay Transport Motor Feed Speed Adjustment: CW

21 Relay Transport Motor Feed Speed Adjustment: CCW

29 2-sided Exit Motor Feed Speed Adjustment

• Only change the paper type and thickness that the user needs to use.
• Change the all the speed in the same figure.

Troubleshooting for Uneven density in the area 85mm from the trailing edge in low-
temperature, low-humidity environment
Symptom
The density in independent dot halftone or halftone areas may be higher or lower in the area
0-85mm from the trailing edge, when printing under low-temperature/low-humidity conditions.
Cause
• Variations in the attractive force and distance between the ITB and paper immediately before
paper transfer
• Toner scatters in the pre-transfer section after the paper clears the registration rollers, which
produces high image density in these areas.
Solution
Adjust the speed of the registration rollers as follows.
• If the image density is high, set the following to a lower value, and vice-versa.
• Change the value 1% at a time and check the results.

Pro/Office SP No. SP Name Value

Pro/Office SP2-451-001 [ITB K:Standard: FC] 0 to 70

1441
 5. Troubleshooting

Pro/Office SP No. SP Name Value

Pro SP2-802-001 to [ITB Bias:K:FC] (for each 0 to 70

100 custom paper)

Pro/Office IMSS setting No. IMSS setting Value

Pro 38 Image Transfer Current 0 to 70

Setting: FC: Black
(for each custom paper)

Troubleshooting for Grainy image

Symptom
The image density is not uniform across image areas when printing onto paper that is not smooth
under High-temperature, High-humidity. (See sample below)

Cause
When using paper that has an unsmooth surface, the strength of the electrical field between the ITB
and the concaved areas in the paper weakens, causing low image density only in these areas.
Action
D135/D136:
Increase toner density by following SPs.
1. Change process control target from SP mode (Ideal setting: +0.03 to 1.0 from the default)
SP: 3-620-111 to 114 (Plain : Maximum M/ A : K, C, M, Y)
2. Execute manual process control from SP mode.
SP: 3-011-002 (Manual ProCon: Density Adjustment)

1442
 Image Quality

D137/D138:
Increase the value of Toner Adhesion in the IMSS setting.

No. IMSS setting

33 Adjust Toner Adhesion (Black)

34 Adjust Toner Adhesion (Cyan)

35 Adjust Toner Adhesion (Magenta)

36 Adjust Toner Adhesion (Yellow)

Troubleshooting for Density unevenness and dust when using AC transfer (Pro
C5110S /Pro C5100S)
Symptom / Cause

Symptom Example Cause

Toner is not • Surface of the

transferred to the paper is rough.
indentations on • PTR voltage is too
texture paper. low.

Toner accumulates • Surface of the

and density is too paper is rough.
high in the • PTR voltage is too
indentations on high.
texture paper.

1443
 5. Troubleshooting

Symptom Example Cause

Scattered text and • Surface of the

thin line images paper is rough.
• PTR voltage is too
high.

The above problems are likely to occur under the following conditions:
• Printing on thick texture paper
• Continuous printing of low image coverage jobs (5% or lower)

1444
 Image Quality

Flow chart

[Textured Paper: Paper Transfer Voltage Setting]

B/W

1445
 5. Troubleshooting

IMSS No. / SP Description Range

66 Textured Paper: Paper Transfer Voltage 0.0 to 14.0kV

(SP2-851-001 to 100) Setting: B&W: Side 1 (Default: 8.0)

67 Textured Paper: Paper Transfer Voltage 0.0 to 14.0kV

(SP2-852-001 to 100) Setting: B&W: Side 2 (Default: 8.0)

Full color

IMSS No. / SP Description Range

68 Textured Paper: Paper Transfer Voltage 0.0 to 14.0kV

(SP2-853-001 to 100) Setting: Full Color: Side 1 (Default: 8.0)

69 Textured Paper: Paper Transfer Voltage 0.0 to 14.0kV

(SP2-854-001 to 100) Setting: Full Color: Side 2 (Default: 8.0)

[Textured Paper: Paper Transfer Current Setting]

B/W

IMSS No. / SP Description Range

42 Paper Transfer Current Setting: B&W: -300 to 0 A

(SP2-811-001 to 100) Side 1 (Default: -34)

44 Paper Transfer Current Setting: B&W: -300 to 0 A

(SP2-812-001 to 100) Side 2 (Default: -34)

Full color

IMSS No. / SP Description Range

43 Paper Transfer Current Setting: Full -300 to 0 A

(SP2-813-001 to 100) Color: Side 1 (Default: -34)

45 Paper Transfer Current Setting: Full -300 to 0 A

(SP2-814-001 to 100) Color: Side 2 (Default: -34)

1446
 Image Quality

Reference: PTR voltage vs. Toner transferability

Table 1: Problems when the PTR voltage does not reach the target
Cause PTR voltage waveform (AC + DC) Symptom

PTR voltage Insufficient toner

does not reach transfer
the target.

[A]: V (target)
[B]: V (actual)
[C]: Risk of poor toner transfer

PTR voltage is Excess toner

set too high. transfer
(Fluctuation of
the waveform
is too big.)
As a result,
electrical
discharge
occurs at the
PTR.

[A]: V (high AC)

[B]: Risk of electrical discharge

1447
 5. Troubleshooting

Cause PTR voltage waveform (AC + DC) Symptom

PTR transfer Image density

current is set decreases.
too high and
causes the
waveform to
shift to the
positive.

[A]: V (high DC)

[B]: Risk of low density

Table 2: Problems when the PTR voltage exceeds the target

Cause PTR voltage waveform (AC + DC) Symptom

PTR voltage Excess toner

exceeds the transfer
target and
causes
electrical
discharge at
the PTR.

[A]: V (actual)
[B]: V (target)
[C]: Risk of scattered text/line

1448
 Image Quality

Cause PTR voltage waveform (AC + DC) Symptom

PTR voltage is Insufficient toner

set too low. transfer
(Fluctuation of
the waveform
is too small.)

[A]: V (target)
[B]: V (low AC)
[C]: Risk of poor toner transfer

PTR transfer Excess toner

current is set transfer
too high and
causes the
waveform to
shift to the
negative. As a
result,
electrical
discharge
occurs at the
PTR.
[A]: V (low DC)
[B]: Risk of electrical discharge

Troubleshooting for Uneven glossiness when feeding large size paper after small size
paper
Symptom
The glossiness is uneven at the left and right sides of the paper, along the paper feed direction
(outside the width of the small-sized paper types), when printing onto wide paper types after
making many prints onto narrow paper.

1449
 5. Troubleshooting

1: Feed direction
[A]: Sides of the belt [A] that are wider than narrow paper types
Cause
Making many prints of narrow sheets leaves the sides of the belt [A] hot and the center relatively
cool. As a result, the surface temperature across the belt is uneven.
Solution
Do the following.
1. Change the SP values as shown below depending on the size of the (narrow) paper that was
used before the symptom occurred.

Size of paper that was previously

Corresponding SP
fed

Paper size Default Change

Paper size L Name No.
(example) value to

Switch:Rotation
216.0mm < L ≤ Start/Stop: End
B4 SEF 1-121-005 200 120
257.0mm Temp.:After
Job:B4

Switch:Rotation
182.0mm < L ≤ Letter SEF, Legal Start/Stop: End
1-121-006 200 120
216.0mm SEF, A4 SEF Temp.:After
Job:B5

B5 SEF, A5
Switch:Rotation
SEF, Half Letter
Start/Stop: End
L ≤ 182.0mm SEF, B6 SEF, 1-121-007 200 120
Temp.:After
A6 SEF,
Job:A5
Postcard

1450
 Image Quality

Illustration of paper size

1: Feed direction
2. Set SP1-121-003 (Switch:Rotation Start/Stop: Time:After Job) to a value of "100 sec".

Pro/Office SP No. SP Name Value

Pro/Office SP2-121-003 Switch:Rotation Start/Stop: 0 to 300

Time:After Job

3. Feed paper in the same way as when the problem occurred.

4. If the symptom still occurs, set SP1-121-003 (Switch:Rotation Start/Stop: Time:After Job) to a
value of "180sec" and check the results.
5. If the symptom still occurs, set SP1-121-003 (Switch:Rotation Start/Stop: Time:After Job) to a
value of "240sec" and check the results.
6. If the symptom still occurs, set SP1-121-003 (Switch:Rotation Start/Stop: Time:After Job) to a
value of "300sec" and check the results.

Troubleshooting blurred image on front and rear sides toward the Trailing Edge
Symptom
Image on both front (operator) and rear (non-operator) sides toward the trailing edge is blurred.

1451
 5. Troubleshooting

The problem could occur under any of the following conditions

• Paper with low stiffness
• Thin paper
• A3/DLT or larger
Cause
Line speed of the fusing unit is slightly faster than the ITB. This causes to pull the paper and affect the
image at 235mm from the leading edge, which corresponds to the distance between the two units.

Solution
Part 1: Line speed adjustment in IMSS (or in SP mode)
Decreasing the line speed of the fusing unit will prevent pulling of the paper between the fusing and
ITB units.

1452
 Image Quality

Part 2: Fusing entrance guide adjustment

Lowering the fusing entrance guide plate will make the paper path straighter (= shorter), which also
helps prevent the fusing and ITB units from pulling the paper.
Part 1: Line speed adjustment in IMSS (or in SP mode)
1. Decrease the fusing speed and paper exit motor speed 0.5% from the current value in IMSS
(or in SP mode).

IMSS No. / SP Description Range

23 Fusing Feed Speed Adjustment -10 to +10

(SP1-987-001 to 254)

24 Exit Motor Feed Speed Adjustment -3 to +3

(SP1-965-001 to 100)

Print out 20 copies of the affected image and check the result. If a different abnormal image
appears, restore the settings and do Part 2: Fusing entrance guide plate adjustment.
2. If no improvement, repeat step 1, however, this time by 0.5%.
3. Print out 20 copies of the affected image and check the result. If the problem persists, do Part
2: Fusing entrance guide plate adjustment.
Part 2: Fusing entrance guide plate adjustment
1. Remove the fusing unit from the mainframe.

[A]: Fusing entrance guide plate

2. Remove the screws fixing the guide plate at both front (operator) and rear (non-operator)
sides.

1453
 5. Troubleshooting

3. Set the screw removed in the previous step to the hole in the front most position for both
operator and non-operator sides. DO NOT fully fasten the screws yet.

4. Fully fasten the screws to complete the procedure.

Troubleshooting for Random Pitch Banding Caused by Lubricant Falling from the
Drum Cleaning Unit
Symptom
Banding appears on the printouts at random intervals/pitch.

Cause
The lubricant in the drum cleaning unit falls into the registration unit and creates smudges on the ITB
encoder sensor. As a result, the engine speed cannot be controlled correctly.
Solution
Clean the ITB encoder with a blower brush.

1454
 Image Quality

Troubleshooting for 3mm-Pitch Banding on Paper with Paper Thickness 6 (Pro

C5110S/C5100S)
Symptom
Bands (uneven density) in 3mm pitch appear across the entire page when printing on Thick6
paper.

Cause
PCB power output level is inconsistent.
How to verify if the bands are caused by inconsistent PCB power output level
1. Execute Process Control (SP3-011-002).
2. Select the test patterns (CMYK) in SP2-109-003 and specify the values described in the table
below and print out the test patterns.

1455
 5. Troubleshooting

Test pattern (CMYK Chart) and Setting

K C M Y

2-109-003
12 12 12 12
(Test pattern no.)

2-109-006
15 0 0 0
(Bk output density)

2-109-007
SP 0 15 0 0
(C output density)

2-109-008
0 0 15 0
(M output density)

2-109-009
0 0 0 15
(Y output density)

3. Measure the pitch of the bands.

Solution
1. Set the process speed to “3: Low speed” and decrease the fusing heat roller temperature 10
°C from the current temperature in IMSS (or in SP mode).

IMSS No. / SP Description Range

15 Process Speed Setting (for

each custom paper) 0 to 3 (Default: 0)
(SP1-986-001 to 100)

74 Fusing Heat Roller

(SP1-984-001 to 100) Temperature Adjustment (for 0 to 200
each custom paper)

2. Print the test pattern and check the results. If the fuseability has degraded, turn on the “Toner
reduction” mode provided that the image is of 3C and image quality is maintained.
3. Again, print the test pattern and check the results. If the fuseability is still poor, increase the
heating roller temperature 5°C. (DO NOT set the temp higher than 180°C.)
4. If the problem does not resolve, replace the PCB (K/C) and/or PCB (M/Y) depending on the
color showing the problem.

1456
 Image Quality

Image Quality 006: Stains

Overview

Areas outside letters or images are stained.

Item Description

Stains in the area 76mm from the trailing edge Stains in the shape of horizontal streaks may appear
in the area 76mm from the trailing edge.

Stains on the side edges of paper If the machine has been used for a long time, toner,
paper powder and foreign objects sticking to the
rollers may get on the side edges of the paper.

Troubleshooting for Stains in the area 76mm from the trailing edge
Symptom
Stains in the shape of horizontal streaks appear in the area 76mm from the trailing edge when
printing high-coverage images onto coated paper.

[A]: Feed direction

Cause
Fused toner passes through the heat pipe rollers, and sticks to the surfaces of the rollers. When the
heat pipe roller slips, it chips off toner that has been fixed on the paper. The offset toner may get on
the paper again, depending on the paper type and the image being printed.

1457
 5. Troubleshooting

Solution
Clean the heat pipe unit.
See Procedure below.
Procedure
1. Remove the fusing unit.
2. Open the separation unit [A] and remove the heat pipe unit [B] (5 screws).

3. Remove the toner stuck to the heat pipe rollers using sandpaper (#1500).

• Move the sandpaper back and forth horizontally and rotate the heat pipe roller to clean
it full-circle.

4. Wipe the places that you sanded in Step 3 with a damp cloth.

1458
 Image Quality

5. Re-attach the heat pipe unit to the fusing unit.

Troubleshooting for Stains on the side edges of paper

Symptom
Toner, paper dust, and foreign objects may stick to the rollers and then to the side edges of the
paper.
Cause
The machine has not been used for a long period of time.
Solution
Do the following.
1. If the paper has stains, match up their positions against the roller/rib map. If the positions of
the stains match those of the transport rollers, wipe the transport rollers, paper exit rollers,
duplex unit rollers, and rollers inside paper handling options with a damp (wrung-out) cloth.
2. If the stains appear to be caused the by the static discharge brushes, clean these brushes in
the paper exit section [A] and inverter section [B] on the left side with a blower brush.

Image Quality 007: Toner Flaking Off

Troubleshooting for Blocking on the Paper Output Tray

Symptom
Paper printed and stacked on the output tray stick together (known as “toner blocking”) when
printed in duplex.

1459
 5. Troubleshooting

Cause
Toner fused on the paper is not completely dried.
Solution
Activate the Cooling Fan included as an accessory to the Copy Tray Type M2.
If the above does not resolve the problem, set the cooling fan in the procedure described on the
following pages so that it faces in a 90° angle.

Procedure
1. Remove bracket [A] from bracket [B]. ( x 2)

2. Do the same on the other side. ( x 2)

• Work carefully to avoid dropping the unit.

1460
 Image Quality

3. Fit the bosses on bracket [B] to the holes on bracket [A] and fix the brackets. ( x 2)

4. Set the cooling unit [B] on the bracket [A] in a 90° angle.

1461
 5. Troubleshooting

5. Fix the cooling unit [A] with the bracket in a 90° angle. ( x2)

1462
 Paper Transport

Paper Transport
Paper Transport 001: Curls

Symptom
Thin paper curls inside the machine if the Decurl unit is not installed.
Cause
Thin paper types tend to “shrink” during the fusing process.
Solution
Do the action in the flowcharts below for each model (D137/D138, D135/D136).
D137/D138:

1463
 5. Troubleshooting

D135/D136:

1464
 Paper Transport

• Raising the heat roller temperature may cause the following side effects.

1465
 5. Troubleshooting

• Fusibility may be reduced

• Glossiness of the image may decrease
• Stains may be visible if printing halftone images onto uncoated paper

Paper Transport 002: Envelopes

Troubleshooting for Envelopes Are Wrinkled

Symptom
Poor fusing or wrinkles may occur when printing onto some types of envelopes.
Cause
The nip width (clearance) is not optimal for some types of envelopes.
Solution
Adjust the envelope nip width as follows.
Poor fusing:
Change the SP value in increments of +5msec and check the print results.
Wrinkles:
Change the SP value in increments of -5msec and check the print results.

Pro/Office SP No. SP Name Value

Pro/Office SP1-996-109 to 254 Envelope Nip Width Setting 0 to 2000msec

(for each paper thickness/
type)

Pro SP1-996-001 to 100 Envelope Nip Width Setting 0 to 2000msec

(for each custom paper)

Pro/Office IMSS setting No. IMSS setting Value

Pro 85 Fusing Nip Width Adjustment 0 to 2000msec

for Envelope

Troubleshooting for Feed Direction Limitations Applied on Certain Types of Envelopes

Symptom
The following may occur when printing onto the envelopes shown below:
• Wrinkles

1466
 Paper Transport

• Paper transport issues

• Flaps stick (closed) to the body of the envelope

• If the envelopes are fed in the SEF direction, they tend to warp in between the PTR unit and
fusing unit.

[A]: C6, [B]: 105x235, [C]: DLX

Cause
The heat of the fusing process may cause wrinkles to form or the adhesive on the flaps to melt if the
flaps are folded.
Solution
When feeding the types of envelopes described above, feed them from the bypass tray, in the LEF
direction (from the trailing edge), with the flaps open.

Paper Transport 003: Twining Jams

Troubleshooting for Twining Jams in the Lower Part of the Fusing Unit Caused by
Insufficient Margins
Symptom
An “accordion jam” may occur under the following conditions:
• Thin, coated paper
• A large amount of toner is needed to develop the images on the leading or trailing edge
• The margins at the leading and trailing edges are relatively narrow

1467
 5. Troubleshooting

1: Feed direction
[A]: Leading edge margin
[B]: Trailing edge margin
Cause
The margin at the leading or trailing edge is too narrow, which causes the paper to stick to the
pressure roller stripper plate.
Solution
Do the following:
1. Increase the margins the leading/trailing edges (up to a maximum of 10mm).
See page 1367 "Margin adjustment".

• If you adjust the margins without adjusting the image position, parts of the image may not
be printed. To adjust the image position, see Step 2 below.
2. If the symptom still occurs, try adjusting the position of the image at the same time. Change the
value in increments of -0.5mm, up to a maximum width of 10mm.

• Before you make any registration adjustments, make sure that the margin in the direction
you will move the image is wide enough.
Subscan registration adjustments:

1468
 Paper Transport

Pro/Office SP No. SP Name Value

Pro/Office SP1-001-004 to Lead Edge Reg (for each ±9.0

111 paper type)

Pro SP1-950-001 to L-Edge Regist Adj (Front) (for ±3.0

100 each custom paper)

Pro SP1-951-001 to L-Edge Regist Adj (Rear) (for ±3.0

100 each custom paper)

Pro/Office IMSS setting No. IMSS setting Value

Pro 6 Adjust Image Position of Side ±3.0

1 With Feed Direction

Pro 7 Adjust Image Position of Side ±3.0

2 With Feed Direction

3. If the symptom still occurs, check the following and replace parts as necessary.
• If the fusing belt is damaged, replace it.
• If the gap between the fusing stripper plate and fusing belt is wider than normal, replace
the fusing unit.
Note: The fusing stripper plate cannot be replaced individually (it can only be attached
and precision-adjusted at the factory).
• If the pressure roller is damaged, replace it.
• If the gap between the pressure roller stripper plate and pressure roller is wider than
normal, replace the pressure roller stripper plate.
• If the rib [A] has come loose, correct the position of the rib as shown.

1469
 5. Troubleshooting

Other Problems
Other 001: Drawer Unit

Drawer Unit Lock Motor Emergency

Overview
If you cannot open the drawer, follow this troubleshooting procedure.
Cause
1. The drawer is in a “Not-withdrawable” state.
2. There is a paper jam between the Drawer Unit and another unit (this is called a ‘straddling
jam’). In this case, the Drawer Unit is locked because if the user pulls out the drawer under
that condition, it would tear the paper.
3. The pressure of the PTR is not released correctly.
4. The Drawer Unit Lock Sensor or Drawer Unit Lock Motor is defective.
Solution (Summary)
Step 1: Check the machine state.
Step 2: Check whether the pressure of the PTR is released correctly.
Step 3: Check whether the Drawer Unit Lock Sensor or Drawer Unit Lock Motor is defective.
Step 4: Check for the presence or absence of a straddling jam.
Step 5: Release the Drawer Unit lock by removing the parts related to the Drawer Unit lock.
Step 6: Check whether the Drawer Unit Lock Sensor and Drawer Unit Lock Motor work correctly.
Step 7: Check the connections of the Drawer Unit Lock Sensor and Drawer Unit Lock Motor.
Solution (Detailed)
Step 1: Check the machine state.

Drawer Unit State List: Not withdrawable

Machine State Solution

Output
Wait till the output has
Correcting /Adjusting Warming-up, Process Control, MUSIC, Toner finished.
Operation Recovery, Web Cleaning

Forced shutdown due to blackout /

Forced Power off disconnection, or pressing and holding the Rebooting
power button

1470
 Other Problems

Machine State Solution

SC Issued SC670 / SC672 occurs See the SC table and

DUB / TSB Abnormal SC626 occurs follow the solution.

Cannot release the drawer lock correctly.

Defective Any Drawer SC525 occurs due to a problem with the
Go to Step 3
Lock-related Parts drawer unit lock motor or the PTR release
motor.

If there is a jam (such as the listed jams

below) that straddles the drawer unit and
other unit, jammed paper will be torn if you
pull out the drawer unit, and torn paper may
remain in the machine.
Jam between:
Straddling Jam Go to Step 2
The bypass unit and the registration unit
The relay unit and the vertical transport
The paper exit and the purge unit
So in this machine, the drawer unit is locked
when a straddling jam occurs.

Step 2: Check whether the pressure of the PTR is released correctly.

1. Remove the Drawer Unit Lock Motor Cover.
2. Check whether the D-cut surface direction of the axis points down.
If the D-cut surface direction is correct: Go to Step 4.
3. Release the pressure of the PTR by using the link plate. ( page 595 "If the Drawer is
Locked")
If the Drawer Unit can be withdrawn: Solution procedure is finished.
If the Drawer Unit can’t be withdrawn: Go to Step 3
Step 3: Check whether the Drawer Unit Lock Sensor or Drawer Unit Lock Motor is defective.
1. Do SP1040-001(Drawer Lock Motor Unlocking Operation).
If the Drawer Unit is unlocked: Go to Step 4.
If the Drawer Unit is still locked: Go to Step 5.
Step 4: Check for the presence or absence of a straddling jam.
1. Check whether there is jammed paper at the vertical transport, bypass unit, or purge unit.
If absent: Solution procedure is finished.

1471
 5. Troubleshooting

If present: Remove jammed paper. (Go to the next step.)

Step 5: Release the Drawer Unit lock by removing the parts related to the Drawer Unit lock.
1. Turn the main switch OFF.
2. Follow the procedure ‘If You Cannot Open the Drawer’ in the service manual, and release the
Drawer Unit lock.
Replacement and Adjustment > Drawer Unit > Drawer Unit Cover > If You Cannot Open the
Drawer
3. Turn the main switch ON.
If successful: Go to Step 6.
If an error occurs: Go to Step 7.
Step 6: Check whether the Drawer Unit Lock Sensor and Drawer Unit Lock Motor work correctly.
1. Do SP5803-204: Input Check Drawer Lock Sensor
2. Do SP5805-150: Output Check Drawer Lock Sensor
If successful: Solution procedure is finished.
If an error occurs: Go to Step 7.
Step 7: Check the connections of the Drawer Unit Lock Sensor and Drawer Unit Lock Motor
If the harness connection is correct: Replace the Drawer Unit Lock Sensor and/or Motor.
If the harness connection is poor: Connect it correctly. (Solution procedure is finished.)

Troubleshooting for Too Much Weight/Abnormal Noise on Pulling Out/Pushing In the

Drawer Unit
Symptom
It is very difficult to pull out/push in the drawer unit, and/or noise is made when this is done.
Cause
Grease on the positioning pins decreases over time.
Solution
Apply grease (Barrierta S552R) to the drawer unit positioning pins when the amount of grease gets
too low.

• As a rough figure, the grease needs to be applied every 2000 times the drawer unit is
opened.
Procedure
1. Press the release levers and pull out the drawer unit [A] all the way.

1472
 Other Problems

• If you are working in a low-temperature environment (15 °C or lower), make sure to

complete this step within 30 minutes. This is because the tension of the drawer cord will
decrease and the cord will stretch.

2. Apply Grease Barrierta S552R in thin layers to the drawer unit positioning pins.
Area: On and around the positioning pins
Amount: 0.05g - 0.1g
[A]: Drawer unit positioning pin (right-front)
[B]: Drawer unit positioning pin (right-rear)

1473
 5. Troubleshooting

[C]: Drawer unit positioning pin (front left)

[D]: Drawer unit positioning pin (rear left)

Other 002: Correspondance Table for Adjustment Settings

Correspondence Table for Adjustment Settings for Operators and SP Mode

The correspondence table for Adjustment Settings for Operators and SP settings is as follows.

1474
 Other Problems

02 Machine: Image Quality

No. Item SP No.

0209 Photoconductor Special Mode SP2-225

0210 Fusing Belt Smoothing SP1-133

0211 Fusing Ability by Paper Feed Speed SP1-135

03 Machine: Paper Feed/Output

No. Item SP No.

0106 Criteria for Paper Weight SP1-307

05 Machine: Maintenance
No. Item SP No.

0701 Temperature SP3-260

0702 Humidity inside the Machine SP3-261

07 Finishing: Finisher
No. Item SP No.

0401 Adjust Punch Position With Feed Direction SP6-100

0402 Adjust Punch Position Across Feed Direction SP6-101

0403 Adjust Staple Position SP6-111

0404 Adjust Staple Position for Booklet SP6-112

0405 Adjust Folding Position for Booklet SP6-113

0406 Adjust Folding Speed for Booklet SP6-114

0407 Correct Punch Skew SP6-102

0408 Punch Skew Correction SP6-103

0409 Paper Alignment in Shift Tray Across Feed Direction SP6-104

0410 Paper Alignment for Stapling Across Feed Direction SP6-107

0411 Paper Alignment for Booklet Across Feed Direction SP6-108

0412 Adjust Paper Tapping for Extra Feed for Stapling SP6-120

1475
 5. Troubleshooting

No. Item SP No.

0413 Adjust Claw Shift for Center Folding SP6-122

0501 Adjust Staple Position SP6-142

0502 Adjust Punch Position With Feed Direction SP6-140

Correspondance Table for Adjustment Setting and SP Mode (D137/D138 Only)

The correspondence table for TCRU adjustment settings and SP settings is as follows.

Number Skilled Operator Setting SP No

0101 Adjust Image Position With Feed Direction 1 001

0102 Adjust Image Position Across Feed Direction 1 003

0103 Adjust Registration Paper Buckle 1 004

0104 Adjust Registration Paper Buckle (Thick Paper) 1 004

0106 Criteria for Paper Weight 1 307

0107 Adjust Erase Margin of Leading Edge 2 121

0107 Adjust Erase Margin of Trailing Edge 2 121

0107 Adjust Erase Margin of Left Edge 2 121

0107 Adjust Erase Margin of Right Edge 2 121

0108 Adjust Wide LCT Fan Level 1 920

0109 Adjust Wide LCT Fan Timer 1 921

0110 Pickup Assist Setting 1 923

0120 Adjust Paper Curl 1 906

0130 Perpendicularity Adjustment 2 104

0140 Buffer Pass Unit Fan Activation Setting 1 932

0201 Adjust Image Density 3 001

0201 DEMS 3 040

0202 Image Density Adjustment Execute Interval 3 533

1476
 Other Problems

Number Skilled Operator Setting SP No

0203 Adjust Maximum Image Density 3 620

0204 Adjust Line Width 3 623

0205 Adjust Density Difference Across Feed Direction 2 113

0206 Adjust Cleaning Web Motor Interval 1 161

0207 Adjust Fusing Temperature on Standby 1 107

0208 Auto Color Selection Setting 2 907

0209 Photoconductor Special Mode 2 225

0210 Fusing Belt Smoothing 1 133

0211 Fusing Ability by Paper Feed Speed 1 135

0301 Execute Cleaning Initial Setting 3 032

0302 Execute Process Initial Setting 3 020

0303 ITB Manual Lubrication 2 696

0304 Tighten Fusing Cleaning Unit at Replacement 1 161

0305 Reset Replaceable Parts Counter 3 701

0306 Replaceable Parts Counter 7 621

0307 Target Value for Replaceable Part 7 623

0401 Adjust Punch Position With Feed Direction 6 100

0402 Adjust Punch Position Across Feed Direction 6 101

0403 Adjust Staple Position 6 111

0404 Adjust Staple Position for Booklet 6 112

0405 Adjust Folding Position for Booklet 6 113

0406 Adjust Folding Speed for Booklet 6 114

0407 Correct Punch Skew 6 102

0408 Punch Skew Correction 6 103

0409 Paper Alignment in Shift Tray Across Feed Direction 6 104

1477
 5. Troubleshooting

Number Skilled Operator Setting SP No

0410 Paper Alignment for Stapling Across Feed Direction 6 107

0411 Paper Alignment for Booklet Across Feed Direction 6 108

0412 Adjust Paper Tapping for Extra Feed for Stapling 6 120

0413 Adjust Claw Shift for Center Folding 6 122

0501 Adjust Staple Position 6 142

0502 Adjust Punch Position With Feed Direction 6 140

0503 Paper Alignment for Stapling Across Feed Direction 6 141

0504 Paper Alignment for Stapling With Feed Direction 6 145

0505 Paper Alignment in Shift Tray Across Feed Direction 6 143

0601 Half Fold Position (Multi-sheet Fold) 6 314

0602 Letter Fold-out Position 1 (Multi-sheet Fold) 6 315

0603 Letter Fold-out Position 2 (Multi-sheet Fold) 6 316

0604 Letter Fold-in Position 1 (Multi-sheet Fold) 6 317

0605 Letter Fold-in Position 2 (Multi-sheet Fold) 6 318

0606 Folding Unit Tray Full Detection 6 762

0607 Number of Sheets Folded after Full Detection 6 763

0701 Temperature 3 260

0702 Humidity inside the Machine 3 261

0703 Back Up / Restore Custom Paper Data - -

1478
 Other Problems

Other 003: Correspondance Table for IMSS Settings

Correspondence Table for IMSS Settings and SP Mode (D137/D138 Only)

Category No. IMSS setting SP No.

Paper Feed 1 Wide LCT Fan Setting 1 976 001 to 100

2 Adjust Wide LCT Fan Level 1 975 001 to 100

3 Pickup Assist Setting 1 977 001 to 100

Paper Path 4 Paper Weight Detection 1 954 001 to 100

5 Double Feed Detection 1 955 001 to 100

Registration 6 Adjust Image Position of Side 1 With Feed 1 950 001 to 100
Direction

7 Adjust Image Position of Side 2 With Feed 1 951 001 to 100

Direction

8 Adjust Image Position of Side 1 Across Feed 1 952 001 to 100

Direction

9 Adjust Image Position of Side 2 Across Feed 1 953 001 to 100

Direction

10 Adjust Erase Margin of Leading Edge 2 122 001 to 100

11 Adjust Erase Margin of Trailing Edge 2 123 001 to 100

12 Adjust Magnification of Side 2 Across Feed 2 952 001 to 100

Direction

13 Adjust Magnification of Side 2 With Feed 2 953 001 to 100

Direction

14 Trailing Edge Full Bleed 2 124 001 to 100

1479
 5. Troubleshooting

Category No. IMSS setting SP No.

Drive 15 Process Speed Setting 1 986 001 to 100

16 Registration Motor Feed Speed Adjustment 1 961 001 to 100

17 First Transport Motor Feed Speed 1 956 001 to 100

Adjustment

18 Second Transport Motor Feed Speed 1 957 001 to 100

Adjustment

19 Third Transport Motor Feed Speed 1 958 001 to 100

Adjustment

20 Relay Transport Motor Feed Speed 1 959 001 to 100

Adjustment: CW

21 Relay Transport Motor Feed Speed 1 960 001 to 100

Adjustment: CCW

22 Paper Transfer Feed Speed Adjustment 2 831 001 to 100

23 Fusing Feed Speed Adjustment 1 987 001 to 100

Drive 24 Exit Motor Feed Speed Adjustment 1 965 001 to 100

25 Switchback Entrance Feed Speed 1 966 001 to 100

Adjustment

26 Switchback Exit Feed Speed Adjustment: 1 967 001 to 100

CW

27 Switchback Exit Feed Speed Adjustment: 1 970 001 to 100

CCW

28 2-sided Switchback Motor Feed Speed 1 971 001 to 100

Adjustment: CCW

29 2-sided Exit Motor Feed Speed Adjustment 1 969 001 to 100

30 2-sided Transport Roller Shift Adjustment 1 1 981 001 to 100

31 2-sided Transport Roller Shift Adjustment 2 1 982 001 to 100

32 Deactivate 2-sided Transport Roller Shift 1 983 001 to 100

1480
 Other Problems

Category No. IMSS setting SP No.

Toner 33 Adjust Toner Adhesion (Black) 3 921 001 to 100

Adhesion
34 Adjust Toner Adhesion (Cyan) 3 922 001 to 100

35 Adjust Toner Adhesion (Magenta) 3 923 001 to 100

36 Adjust Toner Adhesion (Yellow) 3 924 001 to 100

Image Transfer 37 Image Transfer Current Setting: B&W 2 801 001 to 100

38 Image Transfer Current Setting: FC: Black 2 802 001 to 100

39 Image Transfer Current Setting: FC: Cyan 2 803 001 to 100

Image Transfer 40 Image Transfer Current Setting: FC: 2 804 001 to 100
Magenta

41 Image Transfer Current Setting: FC: Yellow 2 805 001 to 100

42 Paper Transfer Current Setting: B&W: Side 1 2 811 001 to 100

43 Paper Transfer Current Setting: Full Color: 2 813 001 to 100

Side 1

44 Paper Transfer Current Setting: B&W: Side 2 2 812 001 to 100

45 Paper Transfer Current Setting: Full Color: 2 814 001 to 100

Side 2

46 Paper Transfer Current; Lead Edge: B&W 2 821 001 to 100

47 Paper Transfer Current; Lead Edge: Full 2 822 001 to 100

Color

48 Paper Transfer Current; Lead Edge Distance: 2 823 001 to 100

B&W

49 Paper Transfer Current; Lead Edge Distance: 2 824 001 to 100

Full Color

1481
 5. Troubleshooting

Category No. IMSS setting SP No.

Image Transfer 50 Paper Transfer Current; Trail Edge: B&W 2 825 001 to 100

51 Paper Transfer Current; Trail Edge: Full 2 826 001 to 100

Color

52 Paper Transfer Current; Trail Edge Distance: 2 827 001 to 100

B&W

53 Paper Transfer Current; Trail Edge Distance: 2 828 001 to 100

Full Color

54 Paper Transfer CV Start Timing: B&W: Side 2 832 001 to 100

1

55 Paper Transfer CV Start Timing: B&W: Side 2 833 001 to 100

2

56 Paper Transfer CV Start Timing: Full Color: 2 834 001 to 100

Side 1

57 Paper Transfer CV Start Timing: Full Color: 2 835 001 to 100

Side 2

58 Paper Transfer CV Control Duration: B&W: 2 836 001 to 100

Side 1

59 Paper Transfer CV Control Duration: B&W: 2 837 001 to 100

Side 2

1482
 Other Problems

Category No. IMSS setting SP No.

Image Transfer 60 Paper Transfer CV Control Duration: Full 2 838 001 to 100
Color: Side 1

61 Paper Transfer CV Control Duration: Full 2 839 001 to 100

Color: Side 2

62 Paper Transfer Contact and Disengage 2 841 001 to 100

Mode

63 Adjust Contact Timing of Paper Transfer 2 842 001 to 100

64 Adjust Disengage Timing of Paper Transfer 2 843 001 to 100

65 Textured Paper Mode 2 850 001 to 100

66 Textured Paper: Paper Transfer Voltage 2 851 001 to 100

Setting: B&W: Side 1

67 Textured Paper: Paper Transfer Voltage 2 852 001 to 100

Setting: B&W: Side 2

68 Textured Paper: Paper Transfer Voltage 2 853 001 to 100

Setting: Full Color: Side 1

69 Textured Paper: Paper Transfer Voltage 2 854 001 to 100

Setting: Full Color: Side 2

Image Transfer 70 Textured Paper: AC Frequency of Paper 2 855 001 to 100

Transfer Voltage

71 Textured Paper: AC Duty Cycle of Paper 2 856 001 to 100

Transfer Voltage

72 Textured Paper: Paper Transfer Isolation 2 857 001 to 100

Voltage: Side 1

73 Textured Paper: Paper Transfer Isolation 2 858 001 to 100

Voltage: Side 2

1483
 5. Troubleshooting

Category No. IMSS setting SP No.

Fusing 74 Fusing Heat Roller Temperature Adjustment 1 984 001 to 100

75 Fusing Pressure Roller Temperature 1 985 001 to 100

Adjustment

76 Fusing Nip Width Setting 1 989 001 to 100

77 Adjust Fusing Temperature to Transfer Paper 1 995 001 to 100

78 Adjust Adding Fusing Temperature 1 1 993 001 to 100

79 Adjust Adding Fusing Temperature 2 1 994 001 to 100

80 Paper Feed Interval Setting 1 988 001 to 100

81 Reduce Initial CPM: Low Temperature 1 990 001 to 100

Environment

82 Reduce Initial CPM: Normal/High 1 991 001 to 100

Temperature Environment

83 Adjust Cleaning Web Motor Interval 1 992 001 to 100

84 Cleaning Web Contact and Disengage 1 998 001 to 100

85 Fusing Nip Width Adjustment for Envelope 1 996 001 to 100

Decurler 86 Paper Curl Correction Level 6 928 001 to 100

87 Adjust Paper Curl Correction Level 6 929 001 to 100

1484
 Other Problems

Category No. IMSS setting SP No.

Finisher 88 Adjust Z-fold Position 1 6 750 001 to 100

89 Adjust Z-fold Position 2 6 751 001 to 100

90 Half Fold Position: Single-sheet Fold 6 752 001 to 100

91 Adjust Letter Fold-out Position 1: Single- 6 753 001 to 100

sheet Fold

92 Adjust Letter Fold-out Position 2: Single- 6 754 001 to 100

sheet Fold

93 Adjust Letter Fold-in Position 1: Single-sheet 6 755 001 to 100

Fold

94 Adjust Letter Fold-in Position 2: Single-sheet 6 756 001 to 100

Fold

95 Double Parallel Fold Position 1 6 757 001 to 100

96 Double Parallel Fold Position 2 6 758 001 to 100

97 Adjust Gate Fold Position 1 6 759 001 to 100

98 Adjust Gate Fold Position 2 6 760 001 to 100

99 Adjust Gate Fold Position 3 6 761 001 to 100

Other 004: SC

Troubleshooting for SC516 after Repeated J097

Symptom
Unusual clattering noise is heard when a duplex job starts and the system starts to feed paper.
Jam074 occurs, followed by Jam097, which occurs 3 times in succession. The system finally stops
with an SC516-02 (sensor shift motor edge detection error).
Cause
The paper size (A4 or 81/2) fixed with the end fence on the tandem tray does not match with the
size specified on the control panel.
The shift roller in the duplex unit operates according to the paper size specified on the control
panel, resulting in the above jams and SC.

1485
 5. Troubleshooting

Solution
1. Check the paper size fixed with the end fence on the tandem tray.
Photo below describes an example of the end fence fixed to 8 1/2 size.

2. Check the paper size specified for the tandem tray on the control panel.

3. If the sizes do not match, enter SP5-959-001; Paper Size: 1st Tray (Tandem) and specify the
size according to the paper in use.
0: A4 LEF
1: 81/2 × 11 LEF
4. Turn the main power off/on.
5. Confirm proper duplex printing to complete the procedure.

Troubleshooting SC 570-00 (fusing belt smoothing roller error)

Symptom
SC570-00 (fusing belt smoothing roller operation error)

1486
 Other Problems

How to isolate the cause of the problem

Execute a forced fusing belt smoothing operation (SP1-133-110).
If the SC occurs, do Procedure 1.
If the SC does not occur, do Procedure 2.
Solution
Procedure 1
The goal of this procedure is to verify the parts (gear, feeler, sensor, harness, motor) that may be
damaged or not connected properly, causing the SC.
1. Set the value in SP1-133-120 (Fixed Operation Time: Manual) to “1”.
2. Execute SP1-133-110 (Manual Smoothing: Exe).
3. Set the value in SP1-133-120 (Fixed Operation Time: Manual) back to “180”.
4. Check if the gear [A] rotates.

If the gear rotates,

• Smoothing roller contact/separate Gear
• Smoothing roller contact/separate Feeler
• Smoothing roller contact/separate Sensor
may be damaged.
If the gear DOES NOT rotate,
• Harness
• Motor
may be damaged or its connection is loose.
5. Replace or fix the affected part(s) accordingly to complete the procedure.
Procedure 2

1487
 5. Troubleshooting

The goal of this procedure is to verify if the SC is caused by an incorrectly positioned feeler, which
may be caused by excess load put on the cam.
1. Open the upper guide plate [A] of the fusing unit and locate the belt smoothing roller contact/
separate feeler [B]. If the cut-out on the feeler is not visible, do Procedure 3.

* The top part of the fusing unit shown in this photo is gray because the unit is of the
prototype.

Incorrect Correct

Cut-out [A] on the feeler is visible. Cut-out on the feeler is not visible.

Continue with the next step. Do Procedure 3.

2. Check if the brackets [A] and/or [B] are deformed.

If deformed, replace the fusing unit to complete the procedure.
If the brackets are not deformed, excess load on the cam may be the problem. Do the next
step.
3. Apply Fluotribo grease to the sliding surfaces [C] and [D] of the brackets [A] and [B]. Grease
amount: 5 ± 1 mm in diameter (0.1 to 0.4 gm)

1488
 Other Problems

Procedure 3
The goal of this procedure is to reconfirm proper operation of the belt smoothing roller.
1. Set the value in SP1-133-120 (Fixed Operation Time: Manual) to “1”.
2. Execute SP1-133-110 (Manual Smoothing: Exe).
3. Set the value in SP1-133-120 (Fixed Operation Time: Manual) back to “180”.
4. Check if the SC occurs.
If it does not occur, repeat the above steps 1 through 3 three times and check if the SC still
does not occur to confirm the effect.
If it does occur, excess load on the cam may be the problem. Do Procedure 2.

Troubleshooting SC515-01
Symptom
SC515-01 (Roller Shift Motor 1 Error) before total print volume reaches 10K.
Cause
Because the machine is still new, grease is not completely spread across the roller shift motor
(duplex transport motor), causing the motor to lose steps.

1489
 5. Troubleshooting

Action
If SC515-01 is observed before the machine reaches 10K since installation, do the following
procedure to age the duplex transport roller/duplex exit roller.
1. Pull out the drawer unit and open the duplex unit lower guide plate.
2. Slide the idle rollers of duplex transport rollers [C] and [D] with your fingers toward the front
side of the machine as far as they go.

• Make sure to grip the edge of the rollers, not the surface.
3. Slide the drive rollers of duplex transport rollers [A] and [B] with your fingers toward the front
side of the machine as far as they go.

• Make sure to grip the edge of the rollers, not the surface.

[A]: Duplex transport roller 2 (drive)

[B]: Duplex transport roller 3 (drive)
[C]: Duplex transport roller 2 (idle)
[D]: Duplex transport roller 3 (idle)

4. Close the duplex unit lower guide plate and push the drawer unit back into the machine.

1490
 Other Problems

5. Set SP5-806-161 (Duplex Feed Mtr:Std Speed) to ON to rotate the duplex transport rollers 2
and 3.
6. While keeping SP5-806-161 set to ON, set SP5-806-195 (Shift Roller Motor1:Homing) ON
and then OFF. Repeat the ON/OFF cycle 10 times.
7. Set SP5-806-161 (Duplex Feed Mtr:Std Speed) back to OFF.
8. Pull out the drawer unit and open the duplex unit lower guide plate.
9. Slide the idle rollers of duplex transport rollers [C] and [D] with your fingers toward the back
side of the machine as far as they go.

• Make sure to grip the edge of the rollers, not the surface.

10. Slide the drive rollers of duplex transport rollers [A] and [B] with your fingers toward the back
side of the machine as far as they go.

• Make sure to grip the edge of the rollers, not the surface.
11. Close the duplex unit lower guide plate and push the drawer unit back into the machine.
12. Set SP5-806-195 (Shift Roller Motor1:Homing) ON and then OFF.
13. Repeat steps 8 through 12 five times and run a test job to confirm SC515-01 does not occur.

• If the SC persists, repeat steps 1 through 13.

Troubleshooting SC515-02
Symptom
SC515-02 (Roller Shift Motor 2 Error) before total print volume reaches 10K.

1491
 5. Troubleshooting

Cause
Because the machine is still new, grease is not completely spread across the roller shift motor
(duplex exit motor), causing the motor to lose steps.
Action
If SC515-02 is observed before the machine reaches 10K since installation, do the following
procedure to age the duplex transport roller/duplex exit roller.
1. Pull out the drawer unit and open the duplex unit lower guide plate.
2. Slide the drive rollers of duplex transport roller [C] and duplex exit roller [D] with your fingers
toward the front side of the machine as far as they go.

• Make sure to grip the edge of the rollers, not the surface.
3. Slide the drive rollers of duplex transport roller [A] and duplex exit roller [B] with your fingers
toward the front side of the machine as far as they go.

• Make sure to grip the edge of the rollers, not the surface.

[A]: Duplex transport roller 4 (drive)

[B]: Duplex exit roller (drive)
[C]: Duplex transport roller 4 (idle)
[D]: Duplex exit roller (idle)

1492
 Other Problems

1. Close the duplex unit lower guide plate and push the drawer unit back into the machine.
2. Set SP5-806-174 (Duplex Exit Mtr:Feed Speed:Std Speed) to ON to rotate the duplex
transport rollers 2 and 3.
3. While keeping SP5-806-161 set to ON, set SP5-806-200 (Shift Roller Motor2:Homing) ON
and then OFF. Repeat the ON/OFF cycle 10 times.
4. Set SP5-806-174 (Duplex Exit Mtr:Feed Speed:Std Speed) back to OFF.
5. Pull out the drawer unit and open the duplex unit lower guide plate.
6. Slide the idle rollers of duplex transport roller [C] and duplex exit roller [D] with your fingers
toward the back side of the machine as far as they go.

• Make sure to grip the edge of the rollers, not the surface.

1493
 5. Troubleshooting

Slide the drive rollers of duplex transport roller [A] and duplex exit roller [B] with your fingers
toward the back side of the machine as far as they go.
Caution: Make sure to grip the edge of the rollers, not the surface.
Close the duplex unit lower guide plate and push the drawer unit back into the machine.
Set SP5-806-195 (Shift Roller Motor1:Homing) ON and then OFF.
Repeat steps 8 through 12 five times and run a test job to confirm SC515-02 does not occur.

• If the SC persists, repeat steps 1 through 13.

Other 005: HDD Troubleshooting

Symptom

1. The “Please wait” display does not change to “Ready” after warming up at power ON or after
recovering from Energy Saver Mode.
2. HDD related SC occurrence (Mainly for SC860 to 865)

Cause

Mainly AC voltage supplied to the PSU is interrupted, possibly causing corruption of data in the HDD.
As a result, the fax function cannot boot up.

• This symptom can happen when the power is interrupted for an instant, or for a longer period (e.g.
the user pulls the power cord out of the outlet).
• If the power is interrupted, the area in the HDD that contains image data is corrupted easily.

Solution

Follow the action in the attached flowchart.

1494
Other Problems

1495
 5. Troubleshooting

Other 006: Original Size Misdetection

Symptom

When feeding originals with a different width perpendicular to the feed direction in Mixed Sizes mode,
the second original [A] fed through the ADF is detected as the wrong size [B]. Depending on the
combination of sizes (see chart below), this may cause a customer to be overcharged.

• This occurs depending on the value of SP5-131-001 (Paper Size Type Selection).
• This does not occur if the width of the two originals is the same perpendicular to the feed direction
(Ex., A3 SEF and A4 LEF).
• The symptom is limited to Mixed Sizes mode.

Value of SP5-131-001 is “0 (DOM/Japan)”

First original fed Second original fed [A] Size detected (error) [B]

A3 (SEF) DLT (SEF) A3 (SEF)

A3 (SEF) LT (LEF) A4 (LEF)

A4 (LEF) B5 (LEF)

A4 (LEF) DLT (SEF) A3 (SEF)

LT (LEF) B5 (LEF) A4 (LEF)

B4 (SEF) A4 (SEF) B4 (SEF)

B5 (LEF) LT (SEF)
B5 (SEF)

LT (SEF) B5 (SEF) LT (SEF)

A4 (SEF)

A4 (LEF) B5 (SEF) A3 (SEF)

A3 (SEF) LT (SEF)
A4 (SEF)
B4 (SEF)
11x15 (SEF)

1496
 Other Problems

First original fed Second original fed [A] Size detected (error) [B]

11x15 (SEF) B5 (SEF) A3 (SEF)

LT (LEF) LT (SEF)
DLT (SEF) A4 (SEF)
B4 (SEF)

Value of SP5-131-001 is “1(NA)”

First original fed Second original fed [A] Size detected (error) [B]

A4 (LEF) DLT (SEF) A3 (SEF)

DLT(SEF) 10×14(SEF) 11×15(SEF)

8.5x14(SEF)
71/ 4x10.5(SEF)
LT(SEF)

11×15(SEF) 10×14(SEF) 11×15(SEF)

LT(LEF) 8.5x14(SEF)
71/4x10.5(LEF) 332mm×242mm(SEF)
A3(SEF) A4(SEF)
A4(LEF) 71/4x10.5(SEF)
LT(SEF)
8×10(SEF)

10×14(SEF) 8.5x14(SEF) 10×14(SEF)

332mm×242mm(SEF)
A4(SEF)
71/ 4x10.5(SEF)
LT(SEF)
8×10(SEF)

8.5x14(SEF) 71/4x10.5(SEF) LT(SEF)

LT(SEF)

A3(SEF) DLT(SEF) A3(SEF)

A3(SEF) LT(LEF) A4(LEF)

A4(LEF) 71/4x10.5(LEF)

1497
 5. Troubleshooting

Value of SP5-131-001 is “2(EU)”

First original fed Second original fed [A] Size detected (error) [B]

A3(SEF) DLT(SEF) A3(SEF)

A4(LEF)

A3(SEF) LT(LEF) A4(LEF)

A4(LEF) 16K(LEF)
B5(LEF)

B4(SEF) 332mm×242mm(SEF) B4(SEF)

B5(LEF) A4(SEF)
LT(SEF)
16K(SEF)
B5(SEF)

F4(SEF) B5(SEF) LT(SEF)

A4(SEF)

A4(LEF) B5(SEF) A3(SEF)

A3(SEF) 16K(SEF)
LT(SEF)
A4(SEF)
F4(SEF)
B4(SEF)
8K(SEF)

16K(LEF) B5(SEF) A3(SEF)

8K(SEF) 16K(SEF)
LT(LEF) LT(SEF)
DLT(SEF) A4(SEF)
332mm×242mm(SEF)
B4(SEF)

1498
 Other Problems

Cause

The sensor actuators shown in red below continue to fluctuate/chatter after the original has passed
them. Due to the insufficient weight of the actuators, they continue to chatter while the next original is
passing their position.

Solution
Production line:
The ADF firmware was modified to Version 01.310:16 (Program# D6835550D).

• The interval between original feeds was decreased by 0.5 sec/ page.
Cut-in S/N

Model S/N Model S/N

D135-17 E234C100001 D136-17 E243CC00039-E243CC00042

E243CC00044
E243CC00046-E243CC00052
E243CC00075
E243CC00076
E244C100001

D135-21 E234C120001 D136-21 E244C120001

1499
 5. Troubleshooting

Model S/N Model S/N

D135-27 E234C130001 D136-27 E243CC30022

E243CC30048-E243CC30050
E243CC30052
E243CC30053
E243CC30055-E243CC30058
E244C130001

D135-29 E233CC50011 D136-29 E243CB50005

E233CC50012 E243CB50010
E233CC50015 E243CC50001-E243CC50010
E233CC50021- E233CC50025 E244C250001
E233CC50027
E233CC50029-E233CC50032
E233CC50035-E233CC50043
E233CC50045-E233CC50047
E233CC50050
E234C150001

In the field:
Upgrade the ADF firmware to Version 01.310:16 or newer.

Other 007: Improper Message When Setting the Tandem Tray

Symptom

The following message is displayed and the tandem tray does not lift up even after the customer has
pushed in the tandem tray, even if the amount of paper in the stack is correct:
“Reduce paper in the tray(s) to the limit mark and reset it correctly.”

1500
 Other Problems

Cause

The end fence [C] is not positioned correctly. As a result, the tandem tray set detection sensor [A] cannot
detect the actuator [B].

Solution

Do the following if the symptom occurs.

1. Confirm that the spring [A] is attached correctly as shown below.
2. Confirm that the end fence moves freely by the force of the spring in the direction of the red arrow.

• If the spring is not attached correctly, the actuator cannot move freely and the machine cannot
detect the actuator when the tray is pushed in.

1501
 5. Troubleshooting

3. Confirm that pins [B] and [C] are passing through the two holes on the bracket shown.

• If the cover is not attached correctly, the pins may not pass through these holes. As a result,
the end fence will not move correctly, even if the spring is attached correctly.

Other 008: Skew in sub-scan direction

• The troubleshooting procedure described in this section is effective ONLY for skews smaller than
0.2mm on A3/DLT SEF or A4/LT LEF. Do not apply the procedures for skews greater than 0.2mm.
• The troubleshooting procedure will take approximately 3 to 4 hours.
• While skew in sub-scan direction can be caused by many factors, for example, paper in the tray is
set improperly, skewed OPC drum shaft, skewed ITB etc., the troubleshooting procedure described
in this section focuses on skews owing to an improperly set Laser Unit. If the skew is caused by other
factors, the skew will persist even after performing the troubleshooting procedure.

1502
 Other Problems

Symptom

Line images skew as shown in the illustrations below.

Skew Type #01: Edge of the line at the rear side positions behind the edge at the front side in paper
feed direction.
Skew Type #02: Edge of the line at the front side positions behind the edge at the rear side in paper
feed direction.

Cause

The CK laser unit is not mounted level on the copier and causes the laser beams emitted on the OPC
drum to skew.
This copier does not have a skew adjustment motor for the K (black) laser unit because the laser beams
emitted from the K unit are used as reference for other colors (C, M and Y). Skew adjustments for C, M
and Y are performed automatically with the skew adjustment motors.

Solution

Insert shims in between the CK laser unit and copier frame to level the CK laser unit.

Procedure

1. Enter SP2-109-003 (Test Pattern/Pattern Selection) and select 14: Trimming Area.

1503
 5. Troubleshooting

2. Press the "Copy Window" button and print the "Trimming Area" pattern in black & white mode on
A3/DLT SEF or A4/LT LEF. Print out totally 5 sheets.

• Make sure to select Face Up paper feeding.

3. Measure the skew by folding the printout in half. Take average of skew amount on 5 sheets.

Skew Type #01

1504
 Other Problems

Skew Type #02

4. Remove the CK laser unit from the copier. (See page 671 "Laser Unit".)
5. Place the CK laser unit upside down on a table. Attach the shims to positions [A] or [B] by referring
to the table below. (Shim P/N: D1362140)

Skew 0- 0.034 - 0.067 - 0.100 - 0.134 - 0.166 -

amount 0.033mm 0.066mm 0.099mm 0.133mm 0.165mm 0.200mm

Number of
1 2 3 4 5 6 to 7
shims

1505
 5. Troubleshooting

[A]: Attach shims here for Skew Type #02.

[B]: Attach shims here for Skew Type #01.

• Do NOT attach more than 7 shims to each position. Doing so could cause unexpected side
effects, for example, banding level is getting worse at rear side or front side because the laser
writing focus will be abnormal due to the too large distance between laser unit and OPC
drum.
6. Put back the CK laser unit and confirm reduction in the amount of skew to complete the procedure.

1506
 Problems Related to Peripheral Devices

Problems Related to Peripheral Devices

Peripherals 001: Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020

Troubleshooting for Fan Noise Is Large

Symptom
The fan makes a large noise.
Cause
The fan is triggered automatically depending on machine internal settings, as well as the type of
paper used and temperature conditions as well.
Solution
Change the fan settings (TCRU adjustment settings).

No. Item SP No.

0140 Buffer Pass Unit Fan Activation Setting SP1-932

• The factory-default setting is “Operate with Paper Thickness 4 and higher”.

• Choose the appropriate setting among “Always On”, “Operate with Paper Thickness 3 and
higher”, “Operate with Paper Thickness 4 and higher”, “Operate with Paper Thickness 5 and
higher”, “Operate with Paper Thickness 6 and higher”, and “Always Off”.

• Note: There is a tradeoff whereby, the longer the fan is off, the greater tendency there is for
toner to flake off the paper.

Peripherals 002: Finisher SR4090/SR4100

Troubleshooting for Proof Tray Detected to Be Full Too Soon

Symptom
The machine detects the tray full condition for the proof tray before the number of sheets in the tray
has reached capacity when printing onto large-sized, thin, short-grained paper.

1507
 5. Troubleshooting

Cause
This type of paper is relatively weak and tends to buckle at the proof tray end fence (see photo).
This blocks the proof tray sensor.
Solution
Attach the proof support tray [A] (included with the finisher), as shown below.

Troubleshooting for Envelopes Are Not Fed

Symptom
Non-feed jams occur when a large amount of envelopes that have not been flattened enough for
feeding are loaded in the feed tray.
Cause
There is air inside the envelopes, which reduces the effective pressure applied by the pickup roller.
Solution
Do the action in the following flowchart:

1508
 Problems Related to Peripheral Devices

Troubleshooting for toner rubbing off along the fold line

Symptom
Toner rubs off onto the fold line of stapled Booklets.
Cause
The flat fold rollers in the flat fold booklet unit apply too much pressure to the paper.
Solution
Do the procedures described in “Adjustment of the Flat Fold Booklet Unit” in the Finisher Service
Manual (pg. 45).

Troubleshooting Creases and Jam in Stapler Unit (SR4100)

Symptoms
1. Crease [A] appears along the folded edge of a stapled booklet.
2. Paper jam occurs in the booklet stapler unit.

1509
 5. Troubleshooting

Cause
The lower flat fold roller [B], installed in the flat fold roller unit [A] is not set in the correct position,
possibly due to the shock when pulling out/pushing in the stapler unit.

Solution
1. Pull out the stapler unit [A].
2. To check if the lower flat fold roller [C] inside the flat fold roller unit [B] is set correctly or not,
rotate it with your finger.
• The roller should rotate smoothly, if it is set correctly.
• The roller will not rotate, if it is set incorrectly.

1510
 Problems Related to Peripheral Devices

3. Open the case [B] attached to the top half of the flat fold roller unit [A].
4. Set the lower flat fold roller [C] so that its shaft [D] sits on either of the grooves; [E] at the rear
or [F] at the front.
5. Close the case [B] to complete the procedure.

• The default position of the lower flat fold roller is set to groove [E] at the factory.

1511
 5. Troubleshooting

• If the folding operation causes to peel off the toner on the printout, change the roller
position to groove [F], which will reduce the pressure applied in the folding operation,
purposed for creating thick booklets.
• For more details, see page 47 of the Finisher SR4090 /Booklet Finisher SR4100 Field
Service Manual.

Corner Stapling Failure/Stack Failure/Large Misalignment

Symptom
Some sheets fail to be stapled or large misalignments occur with corner stapling.
Cause
Stacking and stapling is disabled because the drag rollers [B] are stuck on top of the staple tray
[C]. This could happen when the trailing edge of the stacked sheets are curled, because curled
sheets tend to pull the drag rollers. Another causing factor is when the stack has to be removed
manually due to a failure in feeding out the stack.

Correct Incorrect

How to check if the drag rollers are positioned correctly

1. Remove the rear upper cover.

1512
 Problems Related to Peripheral Devices

2. Open the front cover [A] and move the stapler unit [B] to the center.

3. Locate the drag rollers and check if they are positioned correctly by referring to the table
below.

1513
 5. Troubleshooting

Drag roller - FRONT

[B]: Incorrect position

[A]: Correct position
Drag roller is stuck on top of the staple tray.

Drag roller - REAR

[B]: Incorrect position

[A]: Correct position
Drag roller is stuck on top of the staple tray.

Solution
1. If the roller is stuck on top of the staple tray, bend the drag roller shaft [A] in the direction of
the arrow [B] and forcibly rotate the drag roller [C] in the direction of the arrow [D] to retrieve
the correct position.

1514
 Problems Related to Peripheral Devices

Drag roller - FRONT Drag roller - REAR

2. Confirm the spring of the drag roller is in position.

• Long arm [A] of the spring is in contact with the guide plate [B].
• Short arm [C] positions between the drag roller holder [D] and the weight [E].

Drag roller - FRONT Drag roller - REAR

1515
 5. Troubleshooting

View from a different angle (Drag roller - FRONT)

1st Sheet of Stapled Stack Misaligned

Symptom
In stapling mode, the 1st sheet of a stack is misaligned approximately 3mm to 5 mm. The problem
occurs with the following paper sizes if paper is pre-stacked: A4 SEF/LEF, B5 SEF/LEF, and LT
SEF/LEF.

Rear side of 1st sheet Front side of 1st sheet

Parallelly misaligned
misaligned misaligned

Cause
The 1st sheet of the pre-stacked paper bounces off the bottom pawl or does not reach the bottom
pawl.
Action
Do either of the following.
• SP6-118-(paper size): [CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN]
• SP6-120-(paper size): [CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN]

1516
 Problems Related to Peripheral Devices

Offset direction
• [CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN] (range: ±16 mm, step: 2 mm)
When adjusted in the + direction, pre-stack offset increases n the [A] direction.
When adjusted in the - direction, pre-stack offset decreases in the [B] direction.
• [CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN] (range: 0 to 30 mm, step: 10 mm)
Increasing this value shifts the sheet toward direction [C].

SP adjustment by type of misalignment

Rear side of the 1st Front side of the 1st Misaligned in parallel
sheet sheet

Type of misalignment

SP SP6-118 SP6-118 SP6-120

1517
 5. Troubleshooting

Adjustment value +10 mm -10 mm 20 mm

(estimation)

Check after SP adjustment

After modifying the SP value, make 50 sets of 2-sheet booklet stapled horizontally (2 points
stapling) and check the alignment accuracy.
If misalignment is observed even after the SP adjustment, make further adjustments in the SP.

Staple Misalignment Troubleshooting

Symptom
One of the following occurs when using stapling:
1. The first sheet of the stapled set is misalign with respect to the paper feed direction ([A] and [B]
below), or shifted along the paper feed direction ([C]). As a result, one or both of the staples
passes partially through the paper or misses the paper altogether.

2. One or more sheets in a stapled set is shifted up to 2mm along the paper feed direction with
respect to the other sheets in the set.

1518
 Problems Related to Peripheral Devices

Cause
• Symptom 1:
With stapling, the width of the jogger fences during pre-stacking of the first 1-2 sheets is
narrower than with other modes. As a result, in some cases, the first sheet cannot be aligned
correctly.
• Symptom 2:
Sometimes, the width of the jogger fences during stacking is narrower than expected. As a
result, one or more of the sheets juts out from the stack when the jogger fences close.
Solution
Symptom 1:
1. Set SP6116-001 to –014[CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3K FIN] to a value of “-1” (disabled).

• After this is done, the interval between jobs will be longer. Therefore, in cases where
there are few sheets in each stapled set, productivity will be the same as with the
predecessor finisher (SR4040).
2. Update the SR4100/4090 firmware to Ver. 02.020:10 (P/N D7045300H) or newer.
[SP6116-XXX: CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3K FIN]

1519
 5. Troubleshooting

[CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN]

Adjusts Maximum Pre-Stack Number for Corner Stapler for specified papers.
6116
Adjustment value: 0; 1 sheet Pre-Stack (Standard),
Adjustment value: -1: No Pre-Stack.

001 A3 SEF *ENG

002 B4 SEF ENG

[-1 to 0 / 0 / 1 page/step]
003 A4 SEF ENG

004 A4Y ENG

005 B5T ENG

006 B5Y ENG

007 DLT SEF ENG

[-1 to 0 / 0 / 1 page/step]
008 LG SEF ENG

009 LT SEF ENG

010 LT-Y ENG

011 8-Kai SEF ENG

012 16-Kai SEF ENG [-1 to 0 / 0 / 1 page/step]

013 16-Kai LEF ENG

Other ENG [-1 to 0 / 0 / 1 page/step]

Adjusts Maximum Pre-Stack Number for Corner Stapler for specified papers.
014
Adjustment value: 0; 1 sheet Pre-Stack (Standard),
Adjustment value: -1: No Pre-Stack.

Symptom 2:
1. Set SP6107-001 to -014([JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN]) to a higher value within the
setting range of 1.0mm – 1.5mm.
2. Make some test printouts and check the alignment of the paper.

• This check is necessary because if the value of SP6107 is too high, the jogger fences will
be too far apart.

1520
 Problems Related to Peripheral Devices

• SP6107 adjusts the width of the jogger fences (along the paper feed direction) used
during pre-stacking. A higher value increases this width, while a lower value decreases
the width.
[SP6107-XXX: JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN]]

[JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN]

Adjusts Corner Stapler Jogger width (Main Scan position) when jogging specified
papers.
6107 • Adjustment Value "-": Movement in the direction that Jogger width becomes
narrower than the standard value,
• Adjustment Value "+": Movement in the direction that Jogger width becomes
wider than the standard value.

001 A3 SEF *ENG

002 B4 SEF *ENG

[-1.5 to 1.5 / 0.0 / 0.5mm/step]
003 A4 SEF *ENG

004 A4Y *ENG

005 B5T *ENG

006 B5Y *ENG

007 DLT SEF *ENG

[-1.5 to 1.5 / 0.0 / 0.5mm/step]
008 LG SEF *ENG

009 LT SEF *ENG

010 LT-Y *ENG

011 8-Kai SEF *ENG

012 16-Kai SEF *ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 / 0.0 / 0.5mm/step]

013 16-Kai LEF *ENG

1521
 5. Troubleshooting

Other *ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 / 0.0 / 0.5mm/step]

Adjusts Corner Stapler Jogger width (Main Scan position) when jogging specified
papers.
014 • Adjustment Value "-": Movement in the direction that Jogger width becomes
narrower than the standard value,
• Adjustment Value "+": Movement in the direction that Jogger width becomes
wider than the standard value.

• Default setting of the follow units was changed to Pre-stack off (SP6116-001 to –014: -1)
• D13717: E253C900048-
• D13721: E253C920001-
• D13727: E253C930029-
• D13729: E253C950005-
• D13817: E263C900001-
• D13727: E263C920019-
• D13827: E263C930001-
• D13829: E263C950001-

Shift Tray Stalls Causing Paper Jam

Symptom
The shift tray [A] unexpectedly stalls at its highest or lowest positions and causes paper jams.

Cause
The shift tray paper feeler [A] is out of position.

1522
 Problems Related to Peripheral Devices

Correct Incorrect

The problem occurs if the Shift Auxiliary Tray [A] included with the finisher is set incorrectly.
In this condition, the feeler gets caught between the auxiliary tray and shift tray when the shift tray
moves up and is displaced.

1523
 5. Troubleshooting

• The Shift Auxiliary Tray [A] is to be used only when the configuration consists of the Multi-
Folding Unit FD4000. This auxiliary tray increases the stacking capacity of z-folded paper.
• If the Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 is not installed, do not attach the Shift Auxiliary Tray as it
may cause the shift tray to malfunction.
Solution
If the Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 is installed:
Start the finisher initialization process to raise the shift tray [A]. As you lift up and hold the shift tray
paper feeler [B] up, insert the two bosses [D] on the back of the Shift Auxiliary Tray to the two holes
[C] on the shift tray.

1524
 Problems Related to Peripheral Devices

Good Bad

The Shift Auxiliary Tray [A] is positioned above

There is no space between the Shift Auxiliary
the feeler, creating a space between the Shift
Tray [A] and shift tray [B].
Auxiliary Tray and shift tray [B].

If the Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 is not installed:

Do not use the Shift Auxiliary Tray [A] included with the finisher.

Poor Stacking on Shift Tray

Symptom
Poor stacking on shift tray [A]

1525
 5. Troubleshooting

Cause
The paper stacking holders [A] are incorrectly positioned and protruding from the end fence [B],
causing the paper to get caught on top of these holders.

Correct position of the paper stacking holders

Incorrect position of the paper stacking holders

Solution
1. Turn ON the main power of the mainframe or open/close the finisher front door to start the
initialization process.
2. Remove the following parts by referring to the procedures described in the service manual,
pages 5 to 13.

1526
 Problems Related to Peripheral Devices

• Shift tray
• Rear upper cover
• Paper exit cover
• Left cover
• End fence
3. Locate the paper stacking holder unit [A], and check if the paper stacking holder [B] is set
correctly against the eccentric cam [C].

Correct Incorrect

The center rib [B] of the eccentric cam [A] is The center rib [B] of the eccentric cam [A] is
facing straight up and the paper stacking slanted and the paper stacking holder [C] is
holder [C] is in contact with the flat surface not in contact with the flat surface of the
of the eccentric cam [A]. eccentric cam [A].

1527
 5. Troubleshooting

4. If the paper stacking holder is positioned incorrectly, replace the paper stacking holder unit
[A] with a new one ( x7). See field service manual for the procedure.

P/N of the paper stack holder unit: D7033700

Check after replacing the paper stack holder unit
After replacing the paper stacking holder unit, confirm proper operation of the paper stacking
holder as described below.
Job: A4/LT LEF, shift sort, 1 original x 10 copies
1. Before the job starts, the paper stacking holders [A] are at home position and are not
protruding from the end fence.

2. When the job starts, the paper stacking holders [A] move down to the holding position.

1528
 Problems Related to Peripheral Devices

3. Immediately after the leading edge of the first sheet of the job passes through the exit, the
paper stacking holders [A] retract and stay at home position until the job completes.

4. The initialization process is run after the job completes, in which the paper stacking holders
[A] move down to the holding position, and then, return to home position.

How to improve center-folding accuracy (SR4100)

Symptom 1
When sheets are center-folded, the fold line [B] is slanted, causing the front side [C] to be longer
than the rear side [D], resulting in a misalignment [A].

1529
 5. Troubleshooting

Symptom 2
When sheets are center-folded, the fold line [B] is slanted, causing the front side [C] to be shorter
than the rear side [D], resulting in a misalignment [A].

Cause
Incorrect angle between the bottom fence [A] and folding plate [B]

1530
 Problems Related to Peripheral Devices

Solution
1. Pull out the stapling unit [A] and remove the black thumbscrew [B], which fixes the bottom
fence.

2. Turn the bottom fence adjustment screw [A] to adjust the angle between the bottom fence [B]
and the folding plate [C].

• For Symptom 1, turn the bottom fence adjustment screw [A] clockwise [D] to incline the
bottom fence [B] in the [F] direction.
• For Symptom 2, turn the bottom fence adjustment screw [A] counterclockwise [E] to
decline the bottom fence [B] in the [G] direction.

1531
 5. Troubleshooting

Table: Adjustment value [a] per 1 revolution of the bottom fence adjustment screw

Symptom 1 Symptom 2

1: Feed direction 1: Feed direction

Paper size Clockwise Counterclockwise

B5 0.56 mm 0.55 mm

A4 0.64 mm 0.64 mm

B4 0.79 mm 0.78 mm

A3 0.91 mm 0.90 mm

3. Put back the black thumbscrew [B] removed in step 1 to the adjustment screw hole (long hole)
[A].

1532
 Problems Related to Peripheral Devices

4. If the adjustment up to this point has caused the folding position to shift to either left or right,
make corrections in SP6-113 ([BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN]).
Example: If the folding line appears as in below with a misalignment gap of 3mm, shift the
folding line “-1.5mm” in the (-) direction.

SP Settings for adjusting Shift Tray Jogger/Corner Stapling/Booklet Stapling

• See “System Maintenance 2” for paper size and orientation for each of the available adjustments
summarized in the following table.

1533
 5. Troubleshooting

SP # Description Range Step Adjustment

Shift tray 6104 ShiftTrayJogPosAdj: ±1.5 mm 0.5 mm + to widen

jogger 2K/3K FIN - to narrow
(Shift Tray Jogger the jogging movement in
Position Adjustment) main scan direction

6105 ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj: ±10 5 + to raise

2K/3K FIN degrees degrees - to lower
(Shift Tray Jogger the direction in which the
Retract Angle jogger retracts
Adjustment)

1534
 Problems Related to Peripheral Devices

SP # Description Range Step Adjustment

Corner 6107 JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr): ±1.5 mm 0.5 mm + to widen

stapling 2K/3K FIN - to narrow
(Corner Stapler Jogger the jogging movement in
Position Adjustment) main scan direction

6109 CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj: 0 to 2 1 time Specifies the number of

2K/3K FIN times jogging operation
(Corner Stapler Jogging
Time Adjustment)

6111 Staple Position Adj: ±3.5 mm 0.5 mm + to move stapling position

2K/3K FIN to the front (operator side)
(Staple Position - to move stapling position
Adjustment) to the rear (non-operator
side)

6116 CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj: -1 to 0 1 sheet Specifies the number of

2K/3KFIN sheets pre-stacked sheets
(Corner Stapler
Maximum Pre-Stack
Sheets Adjustment)

6118 CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj: ±16 mm 2 mm + to increase

2K/3KFIN - to decrease
(Corner Stapler Pre- the amount of offset in sub
Stack Offset scan direction
Adjustment)

6120 CrnStpPosExFeedAmtA 0 to 30 10 mm Increases the distance the

dj:2K/3KFIN mm sheets are transported by
(Corner Stapler the positioning roller
Positioning Roller
Excess Feed Amount
Adjustment)

1535
 5. Troubleshooting

SP # Description Range Step Adjustment

Booklet 6110 BookStplrJogTimeAdj: 0 to 2 1 time Specifies the number of

stapling 2K/3K FIN times jogging operation.
(Booklet Stapler
Jogging Time
Adjustment)

6112 BookletStaplerPosAdj: ±3 mm 0.2 mm + to move the stapling

2K/3K FIN position toward the LE
(Booklet Stapler Staple - to move the stapling
Position Adjustment) position toward the TE

6113 BookletFolderPosAdj: ±3 mm 0.2 mm + to move the saddle-

2K/3K FIN stitching position toward
(Booklet Folder Folding the LE
Position Adjustment) - to move the saddle-
stitching position toward
the TE

6117 BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj -7 to 0 1 sheet Specifies the number of

:2K/3KFIN sheets pre-stacked sheets. (Note
(Booklet Stapler that -3, -4, -5,--6, -7 will
Maximum Pre-Stack all result in “0”, i.e., no
Sheets Adjustment) pre-stacking.)

6119 BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj: ±30 mm 2 mm + to increase

2K/3KFIN - to decrease
(Booklet Stapler Pre- the amount of offset
Stack Offset between each pre-stacked
Adjustment) sheet

6122 BkFoldJogSolMovAmtA ±5 mm 1 mm + to move up

dj:2K/3KFIN - to move down
(Booklet Folder Jogger the stack junction gate in
Stack Junction Gate the booklet staple path
Move Amount
Adjustment)

1536
 Blown Fuse Conditions

Blown Fuse Conditions

IDB (D1365492)

FUSE Fuse part number Output Reason for Overcurrent Action

FU1 11071259 24V LEDB Replace the FFC/

LEDB/IDB

RTB 171 AC Control Board (D0165460)

This section
modified
FUSE Fuse part Output Reason for Overcurrent Action
number

FU101 11071252 AC Fusing Lanp Replace AC board or

Tray Heater harnesses

Scanner Heater
Switch of heater
PSU1 / PSU2

FU102 11071350 AC Potential Sensor Board Replace AC board or

harnesses

FU103 11071225 AC Tray Heater Replace AC board or

Scanner Heater harnesses

1537
 5. Troubleshooting

FUSE Fuse part Output Reason for Overcurrent Action

number

FU105 [100V] AC PSU1 Replace AC board or

11071347 harnesses

[200V]
11071344

FU106 [100V] AC PSU2 Replace AC board or

11071347 harnesses
[200V]
11071344

PSU

PSU1 (AZ240226)

FUSE Fuse part Output Reason for Overcurrent Action

number

FU1 11071351 5V Nothing Replace PSU or

Harnesses

1538
 Blown Fuse Conditions

FUSE Fuse part Output Reason for Overcurrent Action

number

FU2 11071351 5V Nothing Replace PSU or

Harnesses

PSU2 (AX240230)

FUSE Fuse part Output Reason for Overcurrent Action

number

FU1 11071351 24V IPU Replace PSU or

IOB Harnesses

Decurl Unit

FU2 11071351 24V DUB Replace PSU or

TDRB Harnesses

TSB

FU3 11071216 24V ADF Replace PSU or

LCT Harnesses

FU4 11071216 24V Finisher Replace PSU or

Harnesses

FU5 11071216 24V SIO Replace PSU or

Decurl Unit Harnesses

1539
 5. Troubleshooting

1540
 Blown Fuse Conditions

DUB (D1365121)

FUSE Fuse part Output Reason for Overcurrent Action

number

FU1 11071213 24VS - Motors - Replace DUB

Duplex Transport Motor or harnesses.

Duplex Exit Motor

Exit Inverter Motor
Duplex inverter entrance motor
Exit Motor
Registration motor
- STM -
Roller Shift Motor 1,2
Senser Shift Motor
Duplex inverter entrance motor
Cleaning Web Drive Motor
Cleaning Web Contact Motor

FU1 11071213 24VS - Fans - Replace DUB

PTB Fans or harnesses.

IH Coil Cooling Fan

Fusing Heat Pipe Cooling Fan
Fusing Pressure Roller Intake Fan
- Solenoids -
Inverter Exit SOL
Duplex SOL
- Boards -
FDB-D

1541
 5. Troubleshooting

Potential Sensor Board (D1365450 [100V], D1365455 [200V])

FUSE Fuse part Output Reason for Overcurrent Action

number

FU1 11071229 250V Potential Sensor Board Replace Potential

sensor board

TSB (D1365425)

FUSE Fuse part Output Reason for Overcurrent Action

number

FU1 11071229 24V Toner Feed Motor Replace TSB or

(Y/M/C/K) harnesses
Development Intake Fan
(Y/M/C/K)
ITB Cleaning Intake Fan

FU3 11071228 24VS_TSB Toner Cartridge Drive Replace TSB or

Motor (Y/M/C/K) harnesses

R100 16002100 24VS_TSB Toner Cartridge Drive Replace TSB or

Motor (Y/M/C/K) harnesses

1542
 Blown Fuse Conditions

IPU (D1365724)

FUSE Fuse part Output Reason for Overcurrent Action

number

FU2 11071302 5VX Operation Panel Replace the IPU

FU3 11071127 5VX IOB, SIO, PEACE

FU6 11071118 5VX USB

FU5 11090016 24V Operator Call Light Power OFF/ON

1543
 5. Troubleshooting

IOB (D1385110)

FUSE Fuse part Output Reason for Overcurrent Action

number

FU1 11071110 +24VS5 Drum Motor (Y/M/C/K) Replace the

PTR Motor PCB

ITB Lift (YMC) Motor

Voltage Sensor
High-Voltage Power Supply
Developer Bias Power Supply
AC Transfer Power Supply
ITB Power Supply
PTR Power Supply

1544
 Blown Fuse Conditions

FUSE Fuse part Output Reason for Overcurrent Action

number

FU2 11071229 +24VS5 Fusing Pressure Roller Exhaust Fan Replace the
Duplex Exhaust Fan (Front/Middle/ PCB
Rear)
Fusing Drive Motor
Hot Roller Release Motor
Fusing Belt Smoothing Drive Motor
Fusing Belt Smoothing Release
Motor

FU3 11071110 +24V6 Skew Motor Y/M/C Replace the

Shutter Motor PCB

Laser Unit Cooling Fan(Left and

Right)
Controller Exhaust Fan
ID Sensor Cleaning Fan
PCL (Y/M/C/K)
Development Motor (Y/M/C/K)

FU4 11071110 +24V6 Drum CleaningMotor (Y/M/C/K) Replace the

Weste Toner Bottle Motor PCB

Heat Pipe Panel Intake Fan

Heat Pipe Panel Exhaust Fan
PTR Fusing Exhaust Fan
Development Exhaust Fan / Right,
Left
Ozone Exhaust Fan
Fusing Exit Exhaust Fan
Drive Exhaust Fan
PSU Fun

FU5 11090007 +5V_PTC HST Sensor (Y/M/C/K) Replace the

Toner cartridge ID Chip PCB
(Y/M/C/K)
Fusing ID Chip (Y/M/C/K)

1545
 5. Troubleshooting

FUSE Fuse part Output Reason for Overcurrent Action

number

FU6 11071107 +24VS5 Drum Motor:Y Replace the

PCB

FU7 11071107 +24VS5 Drum Motor:M Replace the

PCB

FU8 11071107 +24VS5 Drum Motor:C Replace the

PCB

FU9 11071107 +24VS5 Drum Motor:K Replace the

PCB

FU10 11071107 +24VS5 PTR Motor Replace the

PCB

1546
 Blown Fuse Conditions

Controller (D1365700/D1365705)

FUSE Fuse part Output Reason for Overcurrent Action

number

FU1 11071229 5VX USB Bluetooth Replace the CTL

FU2 IC Card
FU3 SD Card
FU4 CPU FAN
Case FAN
RiO3 Option
PCIe Option
LAN
USB Device

Operation Panel

Pro OP-R (D1387395)

FUSE Fuse part Output Reason for Overcurrent Action

number

FU1 11090049 3.3V SDCard I/F Replace Pro OP-R

1547
 5. Troubleshooting

Office OP-L (D1491478)

FUSE Fuse part Output Reason for Overcurrent Action

number

FU2 11090049 3.3V SDCardI/F Replace Office OP-L

Option Board

IEEE1284 (B5955710)

FUSE Fuse part Output Reason for Overcurrent Action

number

FU1 11090044 5VEP IEEE1284 Replace IEEE1284B

oard

1548
 Blown Fuse Conditions

FUSE Fuse part Output Reason for Overcurrent Action

number

FU2 11090007 3.3VEP IEEE1284 Replace IEEE1284

Board

Copy connector (B5815710)

FUSE Fuse part Output Reason for Overcurrent Action

number

FU1 11090020 BUSOUTPUT Connector Hub Replace the board

FU2 12VEP inner of connector board

FU3 11090007 5VEP Connector Hub Replace the board

inner of connector board

1549
 5. Troubleshooting

Wireless Lan: 11n (D1645230)

FUSE Fuse part Output Reason for Overcurrent Action

number

FU1 11090042 3.3VEP Inner of W-LAN Replace the W-LAN

Giga-Ethenet Board (D7306036)

FUSE Fuse part Output Reason for Overcurrent Action

number

FU1 11090044 3.3VE Inner of PCIe-Gig Replace the board

1550
Blown Fuse Conditions

1551
 5. Troubleshooting

1552
6. Energy Saving

Energy Saving
Energy Save

If the Energy Saver button is pressed during machine operation

Previous models:
The job in progress is cancelled and the machine switches to Energy Saver mode immediately.
This model:
The following sequence is followed.
1. The [Energy Saver] key lights up and a pop-up message is displayed informing the user that the
machine will switch to Energy Saver mode as soon as the current job is completed. The job
continues until the end.
2. When the job has been completed, the machine enters Energy Saver mode.

• If the [Energy Saver] key is pressed again during the job, the machine returns to the Ready
condition.

1553
 6. Energy Saving

*1: The machine return to ready status by doing one of the following,
• Press the [Energy Saver] key
• Open the platen cover
• Set an original in the ADF
*2: Recovering from the Energy Saver mode is the same. Do one of the following.
• Press the [Energy Saver] key
• Open the platen cover
• Set an original in the ADF

1554
 Energy Saving

Energy Saver Timer

• With this timer, the user can choose when the machine will automatically enter and recover from
Energy Saver mode, as well as when it will turn on and off. The user does not need to worry about
turning the machine on or off in the morning, during lunchtime, or when leaving the office. As a
result, the machine contributes to overall energy saving in the user’s office environment, while at the
same time helping to improve work efficiency.
• The user is able to control how far the machine will power down, i.e. only to Energy Saver mode or
all the way off.
• With auto power ON and OFF, the user need not remember to turn the machine on and off every
day.
• Auto power ON:
Improves work efficiency, as machine warm-up is already completed by the time the user is ready
to begin work (the user is not made to wait).
• Auto power OFF:
Prevents unnecessary power consumption during after-work hours, saving power.

• The user can disable the Weekly Timer, so that the machine power is not turned on automatically
during extended periods of inactivity (Ex. Summer holiday).
• A password can be set so that the machine can be used during this period if necessary, but only by
the select group who know this password.

• You can set the energy saver timer setting on “Weekly Timer” in “Timer Settings” menu under
“System Settings”.

1555
 6. Energy Saving

Paper Save
Effectiveness of Duplex/Combine Function

Duplexing and the combine functions reduce the amount of paper used. This means that less energy
overall is used for paper production, which improves the environment.

1. Duplex:

Reduce paper volume in half!

2. Combine mode:

Reduce paper volume in half!

1556
 Paper Save

3. Duplex + Combine:

Using both features together can further reduce paper volume by 3/4!
To check the paper consumption, look at the total counter and the duplex counter.
The total counter counts all pages printed.
• For one duplex page, the total counter goes up by 2.
• For a duplex job of a three-page original, the total counter goes up by 3.
• The duplex counter counts pages that have images on both sides.
• For one duplex page, the duplex counter goes up by 1.
• For a duplex job of a three-page original, the duplex counter will only increase by 1, even though
two sheets are used.

Paper Savings and Counter

• Total counter: SP 8581-001

• Duplex counter: SP 8411-001
• Single-sided with combine mode: SP 8421-004
• Duplex with combine mode: SP 8421-005
The following table shows paper savings and how the counters increase for some simple examples of
single-sided and duplex jobs.

Duplex mode:
Duplex
Simplex Sheet Duplex Sheets Total counter
Originals Paper Saved counter
used used SP8501-001
SP8411-001

1 1 1 0 1 0

2 2 1 1 2 1

1557
 6. Energy Saving

Duplex
Simplex Sheet Duplex Sheets Total counter
Originals Paper Saved counter
used used SP8501-001
SP8411-001

3 3 2 1 3 1

4 4 2 2 4 2

5 5 3 2 5 2

10 10 5 5 10 5

20 20 10 10 20 10

If combine mode is used, the total and duplex counters work in the same way as explained previously.
The following table shows paper savings and how the counters increase for some simple examples of
duplex/combine jobs.

2 in 1 mode:
Duplex
Simplex Sheet Duplex Sheets Total counter
Originals Paper Saved counter
used used SP8501-001
SP8411-001

1 1 1 0 1 1

2 2 1 1 1 1

3 3 2 1 2 2

4 4 2 2 2 2

5 5 3 2 3 2

10 10 5 5 5 5

20 20 10 10 10 10

Duplex + 2 in 1 mode:
Duplex
Simplex Sheet Duplex Sheets Total counter
Originals Paper Saved counter
used used SP8501-001
SP8411-001

1 1 1 0 1 1

2 2 1 1 1 1

1558
 Paper Save

Duplex
Simplex Sheet Duplex Sheets Total counter
Originals Paper Saved counter
used used SP8501-001
SP8411-001

3 3 1 2 2 2

4 4 1 3 2 2

5 5 2 3 3 3

6 6 2 4 3 3

7 7 2 5 4 4

8 8 2 6 4 4

9 9 3 6 5 5

10 10 3 7 5 5

11 11 3 8 6 6

12 12 3 9 6 6

1559
 MEMO

1560 EN paper
 Model CH-C1
Machine Code:
D135/D136/D137/D138
Appendices

24 April, 2014
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Appendices:Specifications
Specifications...................................................................................................................................................... 3
General Specifications...................................................................................................................................3
Printer Specifications...................................................................................................................................... 8
Scan Specifications......................................................................................................................................10
Other Specifications.................................................................................................................................... 12
HDD Specifications............................................................................................................................. 12
Speed Specification............................................................................................................................ 13
OFF/Sleep mode Watts, Return time................................................................................................14
Noise....................................................................................................................................................14
Supported Paper Sizes.................................................................................................................................... 15
Original Size Detection............................................................................................................................... 15
Paper Feed................................................................................................................................................... 17
Tray, Bypass tray, LCT........................................................................................................................ 17
Paper Exit......................................................................................................................................................19
Main unit: Main unit tray/1bin: inner 1bin tray............................................................................... 19
Software Accessories.......................................................................................................................................22
Printer Drivers............................................................................................................................................... 22
Scanner and LAN fax drivers......................................................................................................................23
Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................................................ 24
Finisher SR4090 (D70300)........................................................................................................................24
Booklet Finisher SR4100 (D70400)..........................................................................................................26
Finisher SR 4110 (D70700).......................................................................................................................29
Copy Tray Type M2 (D74400)................................................................................................................. 32
Decurl Unit DU5020 (D72700) Pro Models Only.................................................................................. 33
Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020 (D75100) Pro Models Only....................................................................... 33
Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 (D61500)......................................................................................................33
Mail Box CS4010 (D70800) Office Models Only................................................................................. 34
Cover Interposer Tray CI4010 (D71100)................................................................................................ 35
Cover Interposer Tray CI4020 (D71200)................................................................................................ 35
LCIT RT4020 (D70900)............................................................................................................................. 36
LCIT RT4030 (D71000) ............................................................................................................................ 36

1
 2. Appendices:Preventive Maintenance Tables
Preventive Maintenance.................................................................................................................................. 39
Preventive Maintenance Items.................................................................................................................... 39
PM Parts............................................................................................................................................... 39
Mainframe........................................................................................................................................... 39

2
1. Appendices:Specifications

Specifications
General Specifications

Item Office Pro

Configuration: console

Intel(R) Celeron(R) Processor P4505

CPU:
1.86GHz

RAM: 2.5GB (Standard)

Color Support: Full Color

Photoreceptor Type: OPC Drum

Copy System: Laser Beam Electrostatic Transfer System

Develop System: Dry Two-component Triple Shaft O.D. Cycle Develop System

Fusing System: Oil-less Belt Fusing System

Original Holder type: Fixed Holder

Original Scanning System: Flat Scanning System

• D135 • D137
Color: 7.5 Sec. or less Color: 10.6 Sec. or less
(A4/LT LEF) (A4/LT LEF)
Black & White: 5.5 Sec. or Black & White: 10.3 Sec. of
less (A4/LT LEF) less (A4/LT LEF)
First copy time:
• D136 • D138
Color: 6.4 Sec. or less Color: 9.6 Sec. or less
(A4/LT LEF) (A4/LT LEF)
Black & White: 4.8 Sec. or Black & White: 9.2 Sec. or
less (A4/LT LEF) less (A4/LT LEF)

3
 1. Appendices:Specifications

Item Office Pro

D135: 65 Pages/Min. (Black & D137:65 Pages/Min. (Black &

White, Color) White, Color)
Copying speed:
D136: 80 Pages/Min.(Black & D138:80 Pages/Min. (Black &
White, Color) White, Color)

Warm-up time: All Models: 300Sec. or

60 Sec. or less (Temperature:
(Temperature:20C/68F, less(Temperature: 20C/68F,
20C/68F, NRP)
NRP) NRP)

Originals: Sheet/Book/Object

297 x 432mm/11.7” x17” (Both Book, ADF):A3/DLT Full size

Maximum original size:
(Max. placeable original size: 11" x 17")

Copy Paper Size: Main Unit Tray1:

A4 LEF/LT LEF
*With A3/DLT Optional kit:
Fixed Form Size: A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, 12" x 18", DLT, LG, LT, HLT,
F/F4

Main Unit Tray2/3/4:

13 x 19.2" SEF, 13 x 19"SEF, 12.6 x 19.2"SEF, 12.6 x 18.5" SEF
13 x 18" SEF, SRA3 SEF, 12 x 18" SEF,SRA4 SEF/LEF,
A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B4 SEF, B5 SEF/LEF,
DLT SEF, LG SEF, 8.5 x 13" SEF, LT SEF/LEF,8 x 10" SEF/LEF,
8.25 x 14" SEF, 8.25 x 13" SEF, Executive SEF/LEF, HLT SEF/LEF,
8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF,11 x 15" SEF, 11 x 14" SEF, 10 x 15" SEF,
Custom size:
Horizontal: 139.7mm to 330.2mm / 5.5” x 13”
Vertical: 139.7mm to 487.7mm / 5.5” x 19.2”

4
 Specifications

Item Office Pro

Bypass Tray:
13 x 19.2" SEF, 13 x 19"SEF, 12.6 x 19.2"SEF, 12.6 x 18.5" SEF, 13
x 18" SEF, SRA3 SEF, 12 x 18" SEF,SRA4 SEF/LEF, A3, B4, A4, B5,
A5, B6, 12" x 18",DLT,LG,LT,HLT,F/F4, C6, Com10, Monarch, C5,
DL Env.
Custom Size:
Horizontal: 90mm to 330.2mm
Vertical: 148mm to 487.7mm

A4 LCT:
A4 LEF, LT LEF, B5 LEF
* With B4/LG Optional Kit
Fixed Form Size: B4 SEF, LG SEF,A4 SEF, LT SEF

A3 LCT:
13 x 19.2" SEF, 13 x 19"SEF, 12.6 x 19.2"SEF, 12.6 x 18.5" SEF, 13
x 18" SEF, SRA3 SEF, 12 x 18" SEF,SRA4 SEF/LEF, A3 SEF, A4 SEF/
LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, A6 SEF, B4 SEF, B5 SEF/LEF, B6 SEF,DLT SEF, LG
SEF, 8.5 x 13" SEF, LT SEF/LEF, 8.25 x 14" SEF, 8.25 x 13" SEF, 8 x
13" SEF, 8 x 10.5" LT SEF/LEF, 8 x 10" SEF/LEF, Executive SEF/LEF,
HLT SEF/LEF, Line Slider 1 SEF/LEF, Line Slider 2 SEF, 8K SEF, 16K
SEF/LEF,11 x 15" SEF, 11 x 14" SEF, 10 x 15" SEF, 10 x 14" SEF,
xxxx BD SEF/LEF
Custom Paper:
Horizontal:100mm to 330.2mm/3.9” x 13”
Vertical:139.7mm to 487.7mm/5.5 x 19.2”

• Main Unit Tray: 52.3 to 256 g/m2

• Bypass Tray: 52.3 to 300 g/m2
Paper Thickness: • Duplex: 52.3 to 256 g/m2
• A4LCT: 52.3 to 216 g/m2
• A3LCT: 52.3 to 300 g/m2

5
 1. Appendices:Specifications

Item Office Pro

• Leading Edge: • Leading Edge:

4.2(+1.8/-1.2)mm/0.17” <Non-Coat Paper>
(+0.07”/0.05”) Paper Thickness 1 to 3:
• Left/Right: 2.0±1.5mm/ 5.0±1.5mm/0.2”±0.06”
0.08”±0.06” Paper Thickness 4 to 8:
• Trailing Edge: 4(+1.8/-1.2)mm/0.2”
5.0±2.0mm(0.5 to 7.0mm (+0.07”/-0.05”)
with simplex)/0.2”±0.08” <Coat Paper>
(0.02” to 0.28” with Paper Thickness 1 to 4:
simplex) 5.0±1.5mm
Paper Thickness 5 to 8:
4(+1.8/-1.2)mm/0.2”
(+0.07”/-0.05”)
Missing image area: • Left/Right: 2.0±1.5mm/
0.08”±0.06”
• Trailing Edge:
<Non-Coat Paper>
Paper Thickness 1 to 4:
5.0±2.0mm/0.2”±0.08”
Paper Thickness 5 to 8:
4.0±2.0mm/0.16”±0.08”
<Coat Paper>
Paper Thickness 1 to 6:
5.0±2.0mm/0.2”±0.08
Paper Thickness 7 to 8:
4.0±2.0mm/0.16”±0.08”

4.000, 2.000, 1.410, 1.220, 1.150, 0.930, 0.870, 0.820, 0.710,

0.610, 0.500, 0.250
Copy Scale (Fix) Scale Error Range
Actual Size: Main Scan ±1.5%, Sub Scan ±2.75%
Variable Size: Main Scan ±1.5%, Sub Scan ±2.75%

Copy Scale (Zoom) 25 to 400%(1%/Step)

Resolution (Scanning) 600dpi (Main Scan) x 600dpi (Sub Scan)

Resolution(Writing) 1200dpi (Main Scan) x 4800dpi (Sub Scan)

6
 Specifications

Item Office Pro

Tone 256

Standard:
• 500 Sheets x 2 + 550 Sheets x 3 + Office: 100 Sheets/Pro:250
Sheets (Bypass)
Feeding System / Paper Optional:
Capacity • A4 LCT RT4020: 4400Sheets / 4000 Sheets (A4 LCT)
• A3 LCT RT4030: 2200Sheets / 2000Sheets (A3 Plus LCT)
• Paper capacity Using A3 kit for tandem LCT: 1000 Sheets (A3/
DLT)

Continuance Copy Amount 1 to 999 Sheets

• D135: 100V/15A, • D137: 100V/15A x 2,

50/60Hz 50/60Hz

Power Source • D136: 100V/15A x 2, • D138: 200V/15A,

50/60Hz 50/60Hz
*D136 consumption current *Total consumption current is
is 20A Max. 20A Max.

• D135: 1500W or less (full • D137: 2000W or less (full

system) system)
• D136: 2000W or less (full • D138: 2400W or less (full
Max. Watts
system) system)
*Optional Power Source not
included

• Standard Main Unit: 750mm×880mm x 1050mm/29.5” x

34.6” x 41.3” or less (Pro Width 835mm/32.9” or less) *Height
up to contact glass
Dimensions (W x D x H)
• Standard Main Unit: 750mm x 880mm x 1230mm/29.5” x
34.6” x 48.42” or less (Pro Width 835mm or less/32.9” or less)
*Height up to ADF

7
 1. Appendices:Specifications

Item Office Pro

• Standard Main Unit (Width x

Depth)
Width: Bypass tray cover to
Output tray Leading edge
Depth: Front cover Max. to Rear
cover
Unit Occupation 1110 x 856mm TBD
Dimensions (W x D)
• Max. (Width x Depth)
Width: Main Unit + LCT + 3000
Sheets Finisher + inserting paper
Depth: Open cover 90 Deg. to
Rear cover
1914 x 1456mm/75.4” x 57.3”

Weight: 241 kg or less 261 kg or less

Class1 (This Unit falls under to “class 1 laser product” based on JIS C
Laser Standard
6802 (IEC 60825-1) Laser product safety regulation.)

Printer Specifications

Item Spec.

Configuration: Build in

• Fixed form size:

Max. A3 Vertical (297x420mm), 12” x 18”Vertical
Print Size (304.8x457.2mm)
• Custom:
Max. 305×600mm/12” x 23.6” (Bypass Tray)

• D135: 65 Pages/Min. • D137: 65 Pages/Min.

(B&W, Color) (B&W, Color)
Continuance Print Speed
• D136: 80 Page/Min. • D138: 80 Pages/Min.
(B&W, Color) (B&W, Color)

Resolution: 200dpi / 300dpi / 400dpi / 600dpi / 1200dpi

8
 Specifications

Item Spec.

Standard:
RPCS, RPDL, MediaPrint: JPEG, MediaPrint: TIFF, PDF Direct
PDL:
Optional:
PCL6, PCL5C, PS3, RTIFF,R55, PictBridge, BMLinks

Emulation (Option): R55, RTIFF, R55/RTIFF/PS3, BMLinkS, PCL

Standard:
• USB2.0 Type A/Type B
• Ethernet (1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
Interface: Extend:
• Wireless LAN (IEEE802.11a/b/g/n)
• Bluetooth
• IEEE1284

Protocol: TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk

• Available Operating Systems:

Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7, Windows Server 2003/2003
R2/2008/2008 R2, Mac OS 10.3.3 or later.
USB Interface (Standard) • communication mode:
Corresponded to USB2.0 Standard
• Connecting mode:
Devices corresponded to USB2.0 Standard

Available Operating Systems: Windows /XP/Vista/7, Windows Server 2003/2008

(Standard)
136 of PS European alphabets, 2 Japanese fonts (Heisei myoh-
tyoh W3, Heisei kaku gothic W5)
Myoh-tyoh L, Gothic B
Built-in Fonts: Variations of RPDL European fonts.
OCR-B, Chinese characters stroke
45 of PCL European alphabets fonts + 13 International Fonts
(Optional)
Ryumin light KL, Gothic BBB

9
 1. Appendices:Specifications

Item Spec.

Scale: 20% to 400%

Scan Specifications

Item Spec.

Configuration: Full color scanner

Original Scanning Method: Flat scanning system

Image Sensor Type: CCD image sensor

Originals: Sheet, Book, Object

Available Original Size for

Vertical (10 to 297mm) x Horizontal (10 to 432mm)
Scanning:

Detectable Original Size for

A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 LEF, A4 SEF, B5LEF, B5SEF, A5LEF
Book Scanner:

A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 LEF, A4 SEF, B5 LEF, B5 SEF, A5 LEF, A5

Auto Detectable Size for
SEF, B6 LEF, B6 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 81/2” x 11” LEF, 81/2” x 11”
Originals Set to ADF:
SEF

A4 SEF Scan time (BOOK)

Standard Size Letters: 0.7 Sec.
Smaller Size Letters: 0.7 Sec.
Extra Smaller Size Letters: 0.7 Sec.
Continues Storing Speed (DF) (reference: From second sheet, A4
SEF)
Standard Size Letters: 47spm
Original Scanning Speed:
Smaller Size Letters: 47spm
Extra Smaller Size Letters: 47spm
Rotate continues Storing Speed (DF) (reference: From second
sheet, A4 LEF)
Standard Size Letters: 50spm
Smaller Size Letters: 46spm
Extra Smaller Size Letters: 30spm

10
 Specifications

Item Spec.

Tone: 256

Basic Scanning Resolution: 200dpi

Compress Format for Binary

MH, MR, MMR
B&W Image:

Compress Format for Gray

PDF
Scale / Full Color:

• Standard:
Ethernet (1000BASE-T/1100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
Interface:
• Optional:
Wireless LAN (IEEE802.11a/b/g/n), SD Card slot

Protocol for Network

TCP/IP
Connection:

Scanning Resolution for Sending

100dpi, 200dpi, 300dpi, 400dpi, 600dpi
email:

Available Protocol for Sending

SMTP
email.

Output Format for Sending

TIFF, JPEG, PDF, Clear light PDF, PDF/A
email*1:

Scanning Resolution for Scan to

100dpi, 200dpi, 300dpi, 400dpi, 600dpi
Folder:

Available Protocol for Send to

SMB, FTP, NCP
Folder:

Output Format for Send to

Multi Pages TIFF/PDF, PDF/A
Folder*1:

Available Protocol for WSD

Web Services on Devices for Scanning
Scanner Sending:

Scan Resolution for Network

100 to 1200dpi
TWAIN Scanner:

11
 1. Appendices:Specifications

Item Spec.

1) Available Protocol: TCP/IP

Available Protocol for Network 2) Other
TWAIN Scanner: • UZ-D1/UZ-S1/Plumeria/CS/Palm are available.
• SNMP Ricoh MIB is available.

Available Operating Systems

Windows XP / Vista / 7, Windows Server 2003 / 2008
for Network TWAIN Scanner:

Scanning Resolution for Scan to 100dpi (High Compressed PDF Not available), 150dpi (High
Network (Main Scan x Sub Compressed PDF Not available), 200dpi, 300dpi, 400dpi,
Scan): 600dpi

Scan Resolution for when Using

100 to 1200dpi
WIA Scanner:

Available Protocol for when

TCP/IP
Using WIA Scanner:

Available Operating Systems Windows Vista (SP1 or later) /7, Windows Server 2008/2008
for WIA Scanner: R2 (64bit OS are also available for WIA Scanner)

*1 Electric certificate can be attached when selecting [PDF], [Clear light PDF], or [PDF/A] as file format. For
[PDF] or [Clear light PDF], Security Settings are available.

Other Specifications

HDD Specifications

Item Spec.

Capacity: 250GB x 2

12
 Specifications

Item Spec.

• Download fonts
• Download forms
• Electric sort
• Managing coast/Keep job history data
Functions
• Spool print job
• LS Input
• Test Print/Privacy Print/Hold print/Save print
• Image overlay (as Form overlay)

Speed Specification

Book First Copy Time (A4/LT SEF)

Office Pro

D135 D136 D137 D138

BW: 5.5 Sec. or less BW: 4.8 Sec. or less BW: 10.3 Sec. or less BW: 9.2 Sec. or less
FC: 7.5 Sec. or less FC: 6.4 Sec. or less FC: 10.6 Sec. or less FC: 9.6 Sec. or less

Copy Speed: Simplex (CPM)

Office Pro
Mode
D135 D136 D137 D138

Standard Paper (66 to 80.9 g/

65 80 65 80
square meters)

Copy Speed: Duplex (CPM) (A4/LT SEF)

Office Pro
Mode
D135 D136 D137 D138

Standard Paper 65 80 65 80

13
 1. Appendices:Specifications

Electric Sort Copy Speed: Duplex Simplex to Duplex (CPM) (A4/LT SEF)
Office Pro
Mode
D135 D136 D137 D138

Standard Paper 65 80 65 80

OFF/Sleep mode Switching time

Item Spec.

OFF/Sleep Mode Switching Standard: 1 min., Can set form 1 to 240 min.(1 min. /step) or
time OFF with setup settings

OFF/Sleep mode Watts, Return time

Item Watts Return time

Office: 60.0 Sec. of less

OFF/Sleep mode 1.0W or less
Pro: 300.0 Sec. or less

• Due to operating environment, usage status, Watts for OFF/Sleep mode might change.
(Such cases as power change to control fuse temperature under low temperature environment, or
network environment obstructs to switch to STR mode)
• *Off mode is applied to Basic Models, Sleep mode is applied to LP and MFP models.

Noise

Item Office Pro

Main unit alone D135: 72.0dB D137: 72.0dB

(B&W/FC) D136:73.0dB D138: 73.0dB

D135: 52.5dB D137: 52.5dB

Stanby
D136: 57.0dB D138: 57.0dB

14
 Supported Paper Sizes

Supported Paper Sizes

Original Size Detection

NA EU/AP
Size (W x L) [mm]
Book ADF Book ADF

A3 SEF (297 x 420) - Y Y*4 Y

B4 SEF (257 x 364) - - Y*4 Y

A4 SEF (210 x 297) Y*5 Y Y*4*5 Y

A4 LEF (297 x 210) Y*5 Y Y*4*5 Y

B5 SEF (182 x 257) - - Y*4 Y

B5 LEF (257 x 182) - - Y*4 Y

A5 SEF (148 x 210) - - Y*2-4 Y

A5 LEF (210 x 148) - - Y*4 Y

B6 SEF (128 x 182) - - - Y

B6 LEF (182 x 128) - - - Y

DLT SEF (11" x 17") - Y - Y*Da

LG SEF (81/2" x 14") Y*5 Y - -

LT SEF (81/2" x 11") Y*5 Y*5 Y*5 Y*Db

LT LEF (11" x 81/2") Y*2 Y*5 Y*5 Y*Dc

HLT SEF (51/2" x 81/2") Y Y*2 - -

HLT LEF (81/2" x 51/2") - Y - -

F SEF (8" x 13") - - Y*Se*3 Y*Se*3

Foolscap SEF (81/2" x

- - Y*De*3 Y*De*3
13")

Folio SEF (81/4" x 13") - - Y*Se*3 Y*Se*3

Folio SEF (11" x 15") - - - -

15
 1. Appendices:Specifications

NA EU/AP
Size (W x L) [mm]
Book ADF Book ADF

Folio SEF (10" x 14") - - - -

Folio SEF (8" x 10") - - - -

US EXE SEF (71/4" x

- - - -
101/2")

US EXE LEF (101/2 x

- - - -
71/4")

8K SEF (267 x 390) - - Y*4 Y*Sa

16K SEF (195 x 267) - - Y*4 Y*Sb

16K LEF (267 x 195) - - Y*4 Y*Sc

Sizes with letters (a, b, c) means only either size with the corresponding letter can be selected for size
detect. “D” is for default set sizes, and when setting “S” sizes for size detection from SP mode, “D” sizes
can no longer be detected.
(*2)For detected originals smaller then A5 size, with SP mode either “detect as A5” or “Detect as
Unknown” can be selected.(Default is “Detect as unknown”)
(*3)F Sizes (8.5” x 13” SEF, 8.25” x 13” SEF, 8” x 13” SEF) will be available by SP mode settings.
(*4)Switch Book scanner original detection between “K” series and ”A/B” series from SP mode.
(Can not set both to detect, but 8K/16K detect can de set from SO mode)
8K SEF -> Switch between A3, B4 SEF
16K SEF -> Switch between A4, A5, B5 SEF
16K LEF -> Switch between A4, A5, B5 LEF *Can not switch only either size.
(*5)Can be selected with switching A4/LT from SP mode:
• Standard detect (default)
• When placing A4/LT size LEF, detect as A4 LEF. When placing SEF, detect as LT SEF.
• When placing A4/LT size LEF, detect as LT LEF. When placing SEF, detect as A4 SEF.
Remarks:

Y Yes; available

- Not available

16
 Supported Paper Sizes

Paper Feed

Tray, Bypass tray, LCT

LCT LCT Auto

Size (W x L) [mm] Tray 1 Tray 2/3 Bypass
(MAUI-D) (MALAY) duplex

A3 SEF (297 x 420) A*1 M M - A A

A4 SEF (210 x 297) A M M A*2 A A

A4 LEF (297 x 210) A*1 M M A A A

A5 SEF (148 x 210) A*1 M M A*3 A A

A5 LEF (210 x 148 ) A*1 M M A*3 A A

A6 SEF (105 x 148) - - - - A -

B4 SEF (257 x 364) A*1 M M A*2 A A

B5 SEF (182 x 257) A*1 M M - A A

B5 LEF (257 x 182 ) A*1 M M A A A

B6 SEF (128 x 182 ) - - M - A A

DLT SEF (11" x 17") A*1 A A - A A

Legal (81/2" x 14") A*1 A A A*2 A A

Foolscap (81/2" x 13") - A - - A A

LT SEF (81/2" x 11") A A A A*2 A A

LT LEF (11" x 81/2") A*1 A A A A A

Gov. LG SEF (81/4" x - A -

- A A
14")

Folio SEF (81/4" x 13") - A - - A A

F/GL (8" x 13") - - - - A A

F/F4 A*1 A - A

GLT SEF (8" x 101/2") - - - - A A

17
 1. Appendices:Specifications

LCT LCT Auto

Size (W x L) [mm] Tray 1 Tray 2/3 Bypass
(MAUI-D) (MALAY) duplex

GLT LEF (101/2" x 8") - - - - A A

Eng Quatro SEF (8" x

- A - - A A
10")

Eng Quatro LEF (10" x

- A - - A A
8")

Executive SEF (71/4" x

- A - - A A
101/2")

Executive LEF (101/2" x

- A - - A A
71/4")

HLT SEF (51/2" x 81/2") A*1 A A - A A

HLT LEF (81/2" x 51/2") A*1 A A - A A

SRA3 SEF(420 x 320) M M - A A

SRA4 SEF A A - A A

SRA4 LEF A A - A A

Line slider 1 SEF - - - - A A

Line slider 1 LEF - - - - A A

Line slider 2 SEF - - - - A A

Line slider 2 LEF - - - - A A

Com10(104.8 x 241.3) A - - A

Monarch(98.4 x 190.5) A - - -

C5(162 x 229) - - A - - A

DL(110 x 220) - - A - - A

8K SEF (267 x 390) - A - - A A

16K SEF (195 x 267 ) - A - - A A

16K LEF (267 x 195 ) - A - - A A

18
 Supported Paper Sizes

LCT LCT Auto

Size (W x L) [mm] Tray 1 Tray 2/3 Bypass
(MAUI-D) (MALAY) duplex

13” x 19.2” SEF - A A - A A

13” x 19” SEF - M M - A -

13” x 18” SEF - A A - A -

12.6” x 19.2 SEF - A A - A -

12.6” x 18.5” SEF - A A - A -

12" x 18" SEF A*1 A A - A -

12" x 18" LEF A*1 - A - - -

11" x 15" SEF - A - - A -

11” x 14” SEF - A - - A -

10" x 15" SEF - A - - A -

10" x 14" SEF - - - - A -

(*1) With A3/DLT optional kit

(*2) With B4/LG optional kit
(*3) With special order
Remarks:

A Available, Auto detectable

M Available, Paper size must be set from initial setting

- Not available

Paper Exit

Main unit: Main unit tray/1bin: inner 1bin tray

Size (W x L) [mm] Main unit paper exit

A3 SEF (297 x 420) Y

19
 1. Appendices:Specifications

Size (W x L) [mm] Main unit paper exit

A4 SEF (210 x 297) Y

A4 LEF (297 x 210) Y

A5 SEF (148 x 210) Y

A5 LEF (210 x 148) Y

A6 SEF (105 x 148) Y

B4 SEF (257 x 364) Y

B5 SEF (182 x 257) Y

B5 LEF (257 x 182) Y

B6 SEF (128 x 182) Y

DLT SEF (11" x 17") Y

Legal SEF (8.5" x 14") Y

Foolscap SEF (8.5" x

Y
13")

LT SEF (8.5" x 11") Y

LT LEF (11" x 8.5") Y

Government LG SEF
Y
(8.25" x 14")

Folio SEF (8.25" x 13") Y

F/GL SEF (8" x 13") Y

G LT SEF (8" x 10.5") Y

G LT LEF (10.5" x 8") Y

Eng Quatro SEF (8" x

Y
10")

Eng Quatro LEF (10" x

Y
8")

Executive SEF (7.25" x

Y
10.5")

20
 Supported Paper Sizes

Size (W x L) [mm] Main unit paper exit

Executive LEF (10.5" x

Y
7.25")

HLT SEF (5.5" x 8.5") Y

HLT LEF (8.5" x 5.5") Y

8K SEF (267 x 390) Y

16K SEF (195 x 267) Y

16K LEF (267 x 195) Y

12" x 18" SEF Y

11" x 15" SEF Y

11" x 14" SEF Y

10" x 15" SEF Y

10" x 14" SEF Y

Remarks:

Y Available

- Not available

21
 1. Appendices:Specifications

Software Accessories
The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run installer allows you to
select which components to install.

Printer Drivers

Windows Windows
Printer Language Windows 7*3*6 Windows 8*6*8
XP*1*6 Vista*2*6

RPCS Yes Yes Yes Yes

PCL 6 Yes Yes Yes Yes

PS3 Yes Yes Yes Yes

Windows Server Windows Server Windows Server

Printer Language Macintosh*7
2003*4*6 2008*5*6 2012*9

RPCS Yes Yes Yes No

PCL 6 Yes Yes Yes No

PS3 Yes Yes Yes Yes

*1 Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition / Home Edition / Media Center Edition / Tablet PC
Edition
*2 Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate / Enterprise / Business / Home Premium / Home Basic
*3 Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium / Professional / Ultimate / Enterprise
*4 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition / Enterprise Edition / Microsoft Windows Server
2003 R2 Standard Edition / Enterprise Edition
*5 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard / Enterprise / Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
Standard / Enterprise
*6 Supports both 32bit, 64bit
*7 Supports Mac OS X 10.4 or later
*8 Microsoft Windows 8 (Core Edition) / Pro / Enterprise
*9 Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Standard / Datacenter / Essentials

22
 Software Accessories

• All other Drivers except ones for Windows XP / 2003 / Vista / 7 / 8 are Adobe genuine
PostScript driver.
• PPD file for each operation systems is included in the driver.

Scanner and LAN fax drivers

Windows Windows
Driver Windows 7*3*6 Windows 8*6*7
XP*1*6 Vista*2*6

TWAIN Yes Yes Yes Yes

PC-FAX Yes Yes Yes Yes

Windows Server Windows Server Windows Server

Driver Macintosh
2003*4*6 2008*5*6 2012*8

TWAIN Yes Yes Yes No

PC-FAX Yes Yes Yes No

*1 Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition / Home Edition / Media Center Edition / Tablet PC
Edition
*2 Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate / Enterprise / Business / Home Premium / Home Basic
*3 Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium / Professional / Ultimate / Enterprise
*4 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition / Enterprise Edition / Microsoft Windows Server
2003 R2 Standard Edition / Enterprise Edition
*5 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard / Enterprise / Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
Standard / Enterprise
*6 Supports both 32bit, 64bit (Scanner driver works on 32bit compatible mode)
*7 Microsoft Windows 8 (Core Edition) / Pro / Enterprise
*8 Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Standard / Datacenter / Essentials

• With LAX Fax driver, sending documents directly from PC will be available.
• Also Address Book Editor and Cover Sheet Editor will installed along.
• Network TWAIN driver will be provided on the scanner driver CD-ROM.

23
 1. Appendices:Specifications

Optional Equipment RTB 175: Some modifications to paper size specs

Finisher SR4090 (D70300)

A3 LEF, A4, A5, A6 LEF, B4 LEF, B5, B6 LEF, 11 x 17 LEF,

81/2 x 14 LEF, 81/2 x 11, 8 x 13 LEF, 71/4 x 101/2, 51/2
Finisher / x 81/2, LEF, 8K LEF, 16K, 12 x 18 LEF, 11 x 15 LEF, 11 x 14
Upper Tray LEF, 10 x 15 LEF, 10 x 14 LEF, 13 x 19 1/5 LEF, 13 x 19 LEF,
12 3/5 x 19 1/5 LEF, 12 3/5 x 18 1/2 LEF, 13 x 18 LEF,
SRA3 LEF, SRA4, Custom size

A3 LEF, A4, A5, B4 LEF, B5, B6 LEF, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14

LEF, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 x 13 LEF, 71/4 x 101/2, 51/2 x 81/2,
Finisher / Shift LEF, 8K LEF, 16K, 12 x 18 LEF, 11 x 15 LEF, 11 x 14 LEF, 10 x
Tray 15 LEF, 10 x 14 LEF, 13 x 19 1/5 LEF, 13 x 19 LEF, 12 3/5 x
19 1/5 LEF, 12 3/5 x 18 1/2 LEF, 13 x 18 LEF, SRA3 LEF,
SRA4, Custom size
Paper Size:
A3 LEF, A4, A5, B4 LEF, B5, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF,
Finisher / Shift 81/2 x 11, 8 x 13 LEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 51 /2 x 8 1/2, 8K
Tray / Shifting LEF, 16K, 12 x 18 LEF, 11 x 15 LEF, 11 x 14 LEF, 10 x 15 LEF,
10 x 14 LEF, SRA4 LEF, Custom size

A3 LEF, A4, B4 LEF, B5, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF, 8 1/2 x

Staple 11, 8 x 13 LEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 8K LEF, 16K, 11 x 15 LEF, 11
x 14 LEF, 10 x 15 LEF, 10 x 14 LEF, Custom size

A3 LEF, A4, A5, B4 LEF, B5, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF, 8

1/2 x 11, 8 x 13 LEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 8K
Punch
LEF, 16K, 11 x 15 LEF, 11 x 14 LEF, 10 x 15 LEF, 10 x 14 LEF,
Custom size

Finisher /
52.3 to 220.0 g/m2
Upper Tray

Paper Finisher / Shift

52.3 to 300.0 g/m2
Thickness: Tray

Staple 52.3 to 105.0 g/m2

Punch 52.3 to 256.0 g/m2

24
 Optional Equipment

Finisher / • A4, 8 1/2 x 11 or less:250 sheets

Upper Tray • B4, 8 1/2 x 14 or more:50 sheets

• A4 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF: 3,000 sheets

•A3 LEF, B4 LEF, A4 LEF, B5, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF, 8
Finisher / Shift 1/2 x 11 LEF, 12 x 18 LEF, SRA3 LEF, 13 x 19 1/5 LEF: 1,500
Tray sheets
• A5 SEF: 500 sheets
• A5 LEF, B6 LEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 LEF: 100 sheets

• A3 LEF, A4, B4 LEF, B5, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF, 8 x 13

LEF, 8 1/2 x 11, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 8K LEF, 16K, 11 x 15 LEF,
Capacity: Staple 11 x 14 LEF, 10 x 15 LEF, 10 x 14 LEF: 65sheets
• Mixed Size: 50sheets (A3 LEF/A4 SEF, B4 LEF/B5 SEF, 11 x
17 LEF/8 1/2 x 11 SEF)

• A4 SEF, 81/2 x 11 SEF: Binding 20 to 65 sheets...150 to 46

Sets, Binding 2 to 19 sheets...150 Sets
• A4 LEF, B5, 81/2 x 11 LEF: Binding 15 to 65 sheets...100 to
23 Sets, Binding 2 to 14 sheets...100 Sets
Staple Output • Other Paper Size: Binding 15 to 65 sheets...100 to 23 Sets,
Binding 2 to 14 sheets...100 Sets
• Mixed Size: Binding 2 to 65 sheets...23 Sets (A3 LEF/A4 SEF,
B4 LEF/B5 SEF, 11 x 17 LEF/8 1/2 x 11 SEF)
(With My Paper Brand)

Power Source: Draw from main unit

Power Consumption: 55.7W or less

Weight: 38 kg

Dimensions (W x D x H): 657 x 613 x 960 mm

25
 1. Appendices:Specifications

Booklet Finisher SR4100 (D70400)

A3 LEF, A4, A5, A6 LEF, B4 LEF, B5, B6, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x

14 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 x 13 LEF, 71/4 x 10 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8
Finisher / Upper 1/2, LEF, 8K LEF, 16K, 12 x 18 LEF, 11 x 15 LEF, 11 x 14 LEF,
Tray 10 x 15 LEF, 10 x 14 LEF, 13 x 19 1/5 LEF, 13 x 19 LEF, 12
3/5 x 19 1/5 LEF, 12 3/5 x 18 1/2 LEF, 13 x 18 LEF, SRA3
LEF, SRA4, Custom size

A3 LEF, A4, A5, B4 LEF, B5, B6 LEF, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14

LEF, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 x 13 LEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2,
Paper Size:
Finisher / Shift LEF, 8K LEF, 16K, 12 x 18 LEF, 11 x 15 LEF, 11 x 14 LEF, 10 x
Tray 15 LEF, 10 x 14 LEF, 13 x 19 1/5 LEF, 13 x 19 LEF, 12 3/5 x
19 1/5 LEF, 12 3/5 x 18 1/2 LEF, 13 x 18 LEF, SRA3 LEF,
SRA4, Custom size

A3 LEF, A4, A5, B4 LEF, B5, 11 x 17 LEF, 81/2 x 14 LEF,

Finisher / Shift 81/2 x 11, 8 x 13 LEF, 71/4 x 101/2, 51/2 x 81/2, 8K LEF,
Tray / Shifting 16K, 12 x 18 LEF, 11 x 15 LEF, 11 x 14 LEF, 10 x 15 LEF, 10 x
14 LEF, SRA4 LEF, Custom size

A3 LEF, A4, B4 LEF, B5, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF, 8 1/2 x

Staple 11, 8 x 13 LEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 8K LEF, 16K, 11 x 15 LEF, 11
x 14 LEF, 10 x 15 LEF, 10 x 14 LEF, Custom size

RTB 174 A3 LEF, A4 LEF, B4 LEF, B5 LEF, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF, 8

Saddle stitch
New information 1/2 x 11 LEF, 12 x 18 LEF, 11 x 15 LEF, 11 x 14 LEF, 10 x 15
staple
LEF, 10 x 14 LEF, 13 x 18 LEF, SRA4 LEF

A3 LEF, A4, A5, B4 LEF, B5, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF, 8

1/2 x 11, 8 x 13 LEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 8K
Paper Size: Punch
LEF, 16K, 11 x 15 LEF, 11 x 14 LEF, 10 x 15 LEF, 10 x 14 LEF,
Custom size

A3 LEF, A4 LEF, B4 LEF, B5 LEF, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF, 8

Half fold 1/2 x 11 LEF, 12 x 18 LEF, 11 x 15 LEF, 11 x 14 LEF, 10 x 15
LEF, 10 x 14 LEF, 13 x 18 LEF, SRA4

A3 LEF, A4 LEF, B4 LEF, B5 LEF, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF, 8

Multiple sheets 1/2 x 11 LEF, 12 x 18 LEF, 11 x 15 LEF, 11 x 14 LEF, 10 x 15
LEF, 10 x 14 LEF, 13 x 18 LEF, SRA4 LEF

26
 Optional Equipment

Finisher / Upper
52.3 to 220.0 g/m2
Tray

Finisher / Shift
52.3 to 300.0 g/m2
Tray

Staple 52.3 to 105.0 g/m2

Paper
Thickness: Saddle stitch
64.0 to 105.0 g/m2
staple

Punch 52.3 to 256.0 g/m2

Half fold 64.0 to 216.0 g/m2

Multiple sheets 64.0 to 105.0 g/m2

27
 1. Appendices:Specifications

Finisher / Upper • A4, 81/2 x 11 or less: 250 sheets

Tray • B4, 81/2 x 14 or more: 50 sheets

• A4 SEF, 81/2 x 11 SEF: 2,000 sheets

• A3 LEF, B4 LEF, A4 LEF, B5, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF, 8
1/2 x 11 LEF, 12 x 18 LEF, SRA3 LEF, 13 x 19 1/5 LEF: 1,000
Finisher / Shift sheets
Tray
• A5 SEF: 500 sheets
• A5 LEF, B6 LEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 LEF: 100 sheets
(With My Paper Brand)

• A3 LEF, A4, B4 LEF, B5, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF, 8 x 13

LEF, 8 1/2 x 11, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 8K LEF, 16K, 11 x 15 LEF,
11 x 14 LEF, 10 x 15 LEF, 10 x 14 LEF: 65sheets
Staple
• Mixed Size: 50 sheets (A3 LEF/A4 SEF, B4 LEF/B5 SEF, 11 x
17 LEF/8 1/2 x 11 SEF)
(With My Paper Brand)
Capacity:
• A4 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF: Binding 13 to 65 sheets...150 to 30
Sets, Binding 2 to 12 sheets...150 Sets
• A4 LEF, B5, 81/2 x 11 LEF: Binding 10 to 65 sheets...100 to
15 Sets, Binding 2 to 9 sheets...100 Sets
• Other Paper Size: Binding 10 to 65 sheets...100 to 15 Sets,
Staple Output Binding 2 to 9 sheets...100 Sets
• Mixed Size
Binding 2 to 65 sheets...23 Sets (A3 LEF/A4 SEF, B4 LEF/B5
SEF, 11 x 17 LEF/8 1/2 x 11 SEF)
(With My Paper Brand)

Saddle stitch
20 sheets (With My Paper Brand)
staple

Binding 2 to 5 sheets: approx. 30 Sets, Binding 6 to 10sheets:

Saddle stitch approx. 15 Sets, Binding 11 to 15 sheets: approx. 10 Sets,
staple Output Binding 16 to 20sheets: approx. 6 Sets
(With My Paper Brand)

Power Source: Draw from main unit

Power Consumption: 55.7W or less

28
 Optional Equipment

Weight: approx. 57kg

Dimensions (W x D x H): 657 x 613 x 960mm

Finisher SR 4110 (D70700)

• Without Z-Folding
A3 LEF, A4, A5, A6 LEF, B4 LEF, B5, B6 LEF, 11 x 17 LEF,
81/2 x 14 LEF, 81/2 x 11, 8 x 13 LEF, 71/4 x 101/2, 51/2
x 81/2, LEF, 8K LEF, 16K, 12 x 18 LEF, 11 x 15 LEF, 11 x 14
Finisher / LEF, 10 x 15 LEF, 10 x 14 LEF, 13 x 19 1/5 LEF, 13 x 19 LEF,
Upper Tray 12 3/5 x 19 1/5 LEF, 12 3/5 x 18 1/2 LEF, 13 x 18 LEF,
SRA3 LEF, SRA4,Custom size
• With Z-Folding
A3 LEF, A4 LEF, B4 LEF, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF, 81/2 x
11 LEF
Paper Size:
• Without Z-Folding
A3 LEF, A4, A5, B4 LEF, B5, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF, 8
1/2 x 11, 8 x 13 LEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 8K
LEF, 16K, 12 x 18 LEF, 11 x 15 LEF, 11 x 14 LEF, 10 x 15 LEF,
Finisher / Shift 10 x 14 LEF, 13 x 19 1/5 LEF, 13 x 19 LEF, 12 3/5 x 19 1/5
Tray LEF, 12 3/5 x 18 1/2 LEF, 13 x 18 LEF, SRA3 LEF,
SRA4,Custom size
• With Z-Folding
A3 LEF, A4 LEF, B4 LEF, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF, 8 1/2 x
11 LEF

29
 1. Appendices:Specifications

A3 LEF, A4, A5, B4 LEF, B5, 11 x 17 LEF, 81/2 x 14 LEF,

Finisher / Shift 81/2 x 11, 8 x 13 LEF, 71/4 x 101/2, 51/2 x 81/2, 8K LEF,
Tray / Shifting 16K, 12 x 18 LEF, 11 x 15 LEF, 11 x 14 LEF, 10 x 15 LEF, 10 x
14 LEF, 13 x 191/5 LEF, 13 x 19 LEF, Custom size

• Without Z-Folding
A3 LEF, A4, B4 LEF, B5, 11 x 17 LEF, 81/2 x 14 LEF, 81/2 x
11, 8 x 13 LEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 8K LEF, 16K, 11 x 15 LEF, 11
Paper Size:
x 14 LEF, 10 x 15 LEF, 10 x 14 LEF
• With Z-Folding
Staple
A3 LEF, B4 LEF, 11 x 17 LEF
• With Z-Folding, Mixed Size
A3 LEF and A4 LEF
B4 LEF and B5 LEF
11 x 17 LEF and 8 1/2 x 11 LEF

• Without Z-Folding
Finisher / 52.3 to 216.0 g/m2
Upper Tray • With Z-Folding
64.0 to 80.0 g/m2

• Without Z-Folding
Finisher / Shift 52.3 to 300.0 g/m2

Paper Tray • With Z-Folding

Thickness: 64.0 to 80.0 g/m2

Finisher / Shift
52.3 to 300.0 g/m2
Tray / Shifting

• Without Z-Folding
64.0 to 90.0 g/m2
Staple
• With Z-Folding
64.0 to 80.0 g/m2

30
 Optional Equipment

• Without Z-Folding
A4, 8 1/2 x 11 or less: 500 sheets
Finisher / B4, 8 1/2 x 14 or more: 250 sheets
Upper Tray • With Z-Folding
30 sheets
(With My Paper Brand)

• Without Z-Folding
Capacity: A4, B5, 8 1/2 x 1: 3,000 sheets
A3, A4, B4, B5, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11: 1,500
sheets
Finisher / Shift 12 x 18, 13 x 19: 1,000 sheets
Tray A5, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2: 500 sheets
A5, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2: 100 sheets
• With Z-Folding
30 sheets
(With My Paper Brand)

• Without Z-Folding
A LEF, B4 LEF, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF, 8 x 13 LEF, 8K
LEF, 11 x 15 LEF, 11 x 14 LEF, 10 x 15 LEF, 10 x 14 LEF: 50
sheets
A4, B5, 8 1/2 x 11, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 16K: 100 sheets
• Mixed Size
50 sheets (A3 LEF /A4 SEF, B4 LEF/B5 SEF, 11 x 17 LEF/8
1/2 x 11 SEF)
• With Z-Folding
10 sheets

Staple • Combination of With and Without Z-Folding

10 sheets of Z-Folding and 0 sheets Without Z-Folding, 9 sheets
of Z-Folding and 0 to 10 sheets Without Z-Folding, 8 sheets of
Z-Folding and 0 to 20 sheets Without Z-Folding, 7 sheets of Z-
Folding and 0 to 30 sheets Without Z-Folding, 6 sheets of Z-
Folding and 0 to 40 sheets Without Z-Folding, 5 sheets of Z-
Folding and 0 to 50 sheets Without Z-Folding, 4 sheets of Z-
Folding and 0 to 60 sheets Without Z-Folding, 3 sheets of Z-
Folding and 0 to 70 sheets Without Z-Folding, 2 sheets of Z-
Folding and 0 to 80 sheets Without Z-Folding, 1 sheet of Z-
Folding and 1 to 90 sheets Without Z-Folding
(With My Paper Brand)

31
 1. Appendices:Specifications

• Without Z-Folding
A4 SEF, B5 SEF, 81/2 x 11 SEF: binding 10 to 100 sheets...
200 to 30 Sets
A4 LEF, B5 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF:
binding 2 to 9 sheets...150 Sets
A3, B4: binding 10 to 50 sheets...150 to 30 Sets
• With Z-Folding, Mixed Size
Staple Output Z-Folded A3 LEF and A4 SEF, Z-Folded B4 LEF and B5 SEF, Z-
Folded 11 x 17 LEF and 8 1/2 x 11 SEF: 1 to 10 sheets...30 to
3 Sets
• Mixed Size
2 to 50 sheets...30 Sets(A3 LEF/A4 SEF, B4 LEF/B5 SEF, 11 x
17 LEF/8 1/2 x 11 SEF)
(With My Paper Brand)

Power Source: Draw from main unit

Power Consumption: 120 W or less

Weight: approx. 75 kg

Dimensions (W x D x H): 806 x 730 x 980 mm

Copy Tray Type M2 (D74400)

Paper Size:

Paper Thickness:

Power Source:

Power Consumption:

Weight:

Dimensions (W x D x H):

32
 Optional Equipment

Decurl Unit DU5020 (D72700) Pro Models Only

A3 LEF, A4, A5, A6 LEF, B4 LEF, B5, B6 LEF, 11 x 17 LEF, 8

1/2 x 14 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 x 13 LEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 5
1/2 x 8 1/2, 8K LEF, 16K, 12 x 18 LEF, 11 x 15 LEF, 11 x 14
Paper Size:
LEF, 10 x 15 LEF, 10 x 14 LEF, 13 x 19 1/5 LEF, 13 x 19 LEF,
12 3/5 x 19 1/5 LEF, 12 3/5 x 18 1/2 LEF, 13 x 18 LEF,
SRA3 LEF, SRA4, Custom size

Paper Thickness: 52.3 to 300.0 g/m2

Power Source: Draw from main unit

Power Consumption: 30W or less

Weight: approx. 30kg

Dimensions (W x D x H): 170 x 730 x 990 mm

Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020 (D75100) Pro Models Only

A3 LEF, A4, A5, A6 LEF, B4 LEF, B5, B6 LEF, 11 x 17 LEF,

81/2 x 14 LEF, 81/2 x 11, 8 x 13 LEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 5
1/2 x 8 1/2, LEF, 8K LEF, 16K, 12 x 18 LEF, 11 x 15 LEF, 11
Paper Size:
x 14 LEF, 10 x 15 LEF, 10 x 14 LEF, 13 x 19 1/5 LEF, 13 x 19
LEF, 12 3/5 x 19 1/5 LEF, 12 3/5 x 18 1/2 LEF, 13 x 18 LEF,
SRA3 LEF, SRA4, Custom size

Paper Thickness: 52.3 to 300.0 g/m2

Power Source: 100V, 3A, 50/60Hz

Power Consumption: 200W or less

Weight: approx. 92kg

Dimensions (W x D x H): 330 x 725 x 980mm

Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 (D61500)

Half Fold, Letter Fold-out, Letter Fold-in, Double Parallel Fold,

Folding Methods:
Gate Fold, Z-Folding

33
 1. Appendices:Specifications

• Z-Folding
A3 LEF, A4 LEF, B4 LEF, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF, 8 1/2 x
11 LEF, 8K LEF, 12 x 18 LEF
• Half Fold
A3 LEF, A4 LEF, B4 LEF, B5 LEF, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF, 8
Fold 1/2 x 11 LEF, 8K LEF, 12 x 18 LEF, 13 x 19 1/5 LEF, 13 x 19
LEF, 12 3/5 x 19 1/5 LEF, 12 3/5 x 18 1/2 LEF, 13 x 18 LEF,
SRA3 LEF, SRA4 LEF
• Letter Fold-out, Letter Fold-in, Double Parallel Fold, Gate Fold
A3 LEF, A4 LEF, B4 LEF, B5 LEF, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF, 8
1/2 x 11 LEF, 8K LEF, 12 x 18 LEF
Paper Size:
• Half Fold
A3 LEF, A4 LEF, B4 LEF, B5 LEF, 11 x 17 LEF, 81/2 x 14 LEF,
81/2 x 11 LEF, 8K LEF, 12 x 18 LEF, 13 x 19 1/5 LEF, 13 x
19 LEF, 12 3/5 x 19 1/5 LEF, 12 3/5 x 18 1/2 LEF, 13 x 18
LEF, SRA3 LEF, SRA4 LEF
Multiple sheets • Letter Fold-in
A3 LEF, A4 LEF, B4 LEF, B5 LEF, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF, 8
1/2 x 11 LEF, 8K LEF, 12 x 18 LEF
• Letter Fold-out
A4 LEF, B4 LEF, B5 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF

Paper Fold 64.0 to 105.0 g/m2

Thickness: Multiple sheets 64.0 to 80.0 g/m2

Power Source: 100V, 2.4A, 50/60Hz

Power Consumption: 240W or less (Can not draw from main unit)

Weight: approx. 92kg

Dimensions (W x D x H): 470 x 730 x 980 mm

Mail Box CS4010 (D70800) Office Models Only

Bin 9 Bins

34
 Optional Equipment

A3 LEF, A4, A5, B4 LEF, B5, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF, 8

Paper Size: 1/2 x 11, 8 x 13 LEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 8K
LEF, 16K, 11 x 15 LEF, 11 x 14 LEF, 10 x 15 LEF, 10 x 14 LEF

Paper Thickness: 60.0 to 128.0 g/m2(52 to 110kg)

100 Sheets each bin, total 900 Sheets

Capacity:
(With My Paper Brand)

Power Source: Draw from main unit

Power Consumption: 30 W or less

Weight: approx. 15kg

Dimensions (W x D x H): 540 x 600 x 660 mm

Cover Interposer Tray CI4010 (D71100)

A3 LEF, A4, A5, B4 LEF, B5, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF, 8

Paper Size:
1/2 x 11, 12 x 18 LEF

Paper Thickness: 64.0 to 216.0 g/m2 (55 to 186kg)

Capacity: 230 sheets (With My Paper Brand)

Power Source: Draw from main unit

Power Consumption: 43 W or less

Weight: approx. 12kg

Dimensions (W x D x H): 500 x 600 x 600 mm

Cover Interposer Tray CI4020 (D71200)

A3 LEF, A4, A5, B4 LEF, B5, 11 x 17 LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 LEF, 8

1/2 x 11 SEF, 8 x 13 LEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2,
8K LEF, 16K, 12 x 18 LEF, 11 x 15 LEF, 11 x 14 LEF, 10 x 15
Paper Size:
LEF, 10 x 14 LEF, 13 x 19 1/5 LEF, 13 x 19 LEF, 12 3/5 x 19
1/5 LEF, 12 3/5 x 18 1/2 LEF, 13 x 18 LEF, SRA3 LEF, SRA4,
Custom size

35
 1. Appendices:Specifications

Paper Thickness: 64.0 to 216.0 g/m2 (55 to 186kg)

Capacity: 260 sheets x 2 drawers (With My Paper Brand)

Power Source: Draw from main unit

Power Consumption: 84 W or less

Weight: approx. 45kg

Dimensions (W x D x H): 540 x 730 x 1,270mm

LCIT RT4020 (D70900)

Paper Size: A4 SEF, B5 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF

Paper Thickness: 52.3 to 216.0 g/m2 (45 to 185kg)

Capacity: 4,780 sheets (With My Paper Brand)

Power Source: Draw from main unit

Power Consumption: 50W or less

Weight: approx. 20kg

Dimensions (W x D x H): 352 x 540 x 625 mm

LCIT RT4030 (D71000)

A3 LEF, A4, A5, A6 LEF, B4 LEF, B5, B6 LEF, 11 x 17 LEF, 8

1/2 x 14 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 x 13 LEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 8
1/2 x 5 1/2, LEF, 8K LEF, 16K, 12 x 18 LEF, 11 x 15 LEF, 11
Paper Size:
x 14 LEF, 10 x 15 LEF, 10 x 14 LEF, 13 x 19 1/5 LEF, 13 x 19
LEF, 12 3/5 x 19 1/5 LEF, 12 3/5 x 18 1/2 LEF, 13 x 18 LEF,
SRA3 LEF, SRA4, Custom size

Paper Thickness: 52.3 to 300.0 g/m2 (45 to 258kg)

Capacity: 2,390 sheets (With My Paper Brand)

Power Source: Draw from main unit

Power Consumption: 72W or less

36
 Optional Equipment

Weight: approx. 81.7kg

Dimensions (W x D x H): 869 x 730 x 658 mm

37
 1. Appendices:Specifications

38
 2. Appendices:Preventive Maintenance
Tables

Preventive Maintenance
Preventive Maintenance Items

Preventive Maintenance Items

PM Parts

The parts mentioned in these tables have a target yield. However, the total copy/print volume made by
the machine will not reach the target yield within the machine's targeted lifetime if the machine is used
under the target usage conditions (ACV, color ratio, P/J, and C/O). So, these parts are categorized not
as PM parts but as EM parts. The parts with “(R)” in this table are PM parts.
Chart: A4 (LT)/5%
Mode: 4 copies / original (prints/job)
Ratio 30%
Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.
Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricant, I: Inspect

Mainframe

1200
Item 300K 600K 900K EM Remarks
K

Scanner

Reflector C Optics cloth

1st mirror C Optics cloth

2nd mirror C Optics cloth

3rd mirror C Optics cloth

Exposure Glass C C Dry cloth

RTB 39
One item added to the PM table (Toner Shield Glass in the Laser Unit) 39
 2. Appendices:Preventive Maintenance Tables

1200
Item 300K 600K 900K EM Remarks
K

APS Sensors C Dry cloth

ADF Exposure Glass C C Dry cloth

Development

Collect with a plastic

Developer R
bag

Blower brush, Dry

Filter R
cloth

Blower brush, Dry

Gears C
cloth

Development Unit C

PCDU

Replace the Unit

Drum Cleaning Unit C
(TCRU)

(Cleaning Blade) C

Replace at the same

(Side seal: cleaning
C time as the cleaning
blade)
blade

Replace at the same

(Lubricant Brush) C time as the lubricant
bar

(Lubricant Bar) C

(Lubricant Blade) C

Replace at the same

(Side seal: Lubricant
C time as the lubricant
Blade)
blade

(Brush Drive Joint) C

(Gears) C

40
 Preventive Maintenance

1200
Item 300K 600K 900K EM Remarks
K

Replace the Unit

Charge Unit C
(TCRU)

(Charge Roller) C

(Charge Roller Gear) C

(Cleaning Roller) C

C
C
OPC Drum (Office
(Pro)
)

Potential Sensor C Dry cloth

Quenching Lamp C Dry cloth

Toner Supply

Blower brush, Dry

Toner Supply Unit C
cloth

Transfer

Image Transfer Belt R

Image Transfer Roller Unit

(Rollers) C Dry cloth

(ID Sensor) C Damp cloth

(Image Transfer Roller) R

(ITB Bias Roller) R

Replace the Unit

ITB Cleaning Unit R
(TCRU)

(Brush Roller) R

(Cleaning Blade) R

41
 2. Appendices:Preventive Maintenance Tables

1200
Item 300K 600K 900K EM Remarks
K

(Lubricant Brush) R

(Lube Application Blade) R Replace all together

(Lubricant Bar) R

Paper Transfer Roller R

Quenching R

Remove toner and

Paper Sensor C paper dust, Blower
brush

Fusing

Replace the Unit

Fusing Unit R
(TCRU)

(Fusing Belt: Office) R

(Fusing Belt: Pro) R

(Heating Roller: Office) R

(Heating Roller: Pro) R

(Pressure Roller) R

(Pressure Roller Bearings) R

(Separation plate: Fusing Remove toner and

C
Roller) paper dust, Dry cloth

(Separation Plate: Remove toner and

C
Pressure Roller) paper dust, Dry cloth

(Fusing entrance upper Remove toner and

C
guide plates) paper dust, Dry cloth

(Contact Thermistor fusing Remove toner and

C
belt) paper dust

(Contact thermistor fusing Remove toner and

C
roller) paper dust,

42
 Preventive Maintenance

1200
Item 300K 600K 900K EM Remarks
K

(Gears) L

(Bearing: Fusing Roller) I/R

(Thermopile) C Dry cloth

(Smoothing Roller: Pro) TBD

Replace the Unit

Cleaning Web Unit (Pro) R
(TCRU)

(Web Cleaning Roller) R

(Web Pressing Roller) R

(Web Roller Stopper) R

Miscellaneous

Replace when toner

Waste Toner Bottle
bottle is full

Ozone Filter Fixed

Dust glass cleaning

Dust Glass C
kit

Dust Filer: Dev.: exhaust:

R
Large

Dust Filers: Dev.: exhaust:

R
Small

Deodorization filter: Large R

Deodorization filter: Small R

Dust Filer: Dev.: absorb C

Dust Filers: Pressure Roller:

C
absorb

Paper Feed (Paper Trays)

Tray 1 Pick-up Roller C Damp cloth

43
 2. Appendices:Preventive Maintenance Tables

1200
Item 300K 600K 900K EM Remarks
K

Tray 2 Pick-up Roller C Damp cloth

Tray 3 Pick-up Roller C Damp cloth

Tray 1 Feed Roller C Damp cloth

Tray 2 Feed Roller C Damp cloth

Tray 3 Feed Roller C Damp cloth

Tray 4 Feed Roller C Damp cloth

Tray 1 Separation Roller C Damp cloth

Tray 2 Separation Roller C Damp cloth

Tray 3 Separation Roller C Damp cloth

Tray 4 Separation Roller C Damp cloth

Tray 1 Paper Transfer

C C Damp cloth
Roller (drive / following)

Tray 2 Paper Transfer

C C Damp cloth
Roller (drive / following)

Tray 3 Paper Transfer

C C Damp cloth
Roller (drive / following)

Tray 4 Paper Transfer

C C Damp cloth
Roller (drive / following)

Tray 1 Transfer Sensor C C C Blower brush

Tray 2 Transfer Sensor C C C Blower brush

Tray 3 Transfer Sensor C C C Blower brush

Tray 4 Transfer Sensor C C C Blower brush

Tray 1 Paper Feed Sensor C C C Blower brush

Tray 2 Paper Feed Sensor C C C Blower brush

Tray 3 Paper Feed Sensor C C C Blower brush

Tray 4 Paper Feed Sensor C C C Blower brush

44
 Preventive Maintenance

1200
Item 300K 600K 900K EM Remarks
K

Paper Feed (Mainframe)

Registration Rollers
C C C Damp cloth
(drive / following)

Relay Roller (drive /

C C C Damp cloth
following)

By-pass Relay Roller

C C C Damp cloth
(drive / following)

Registration Sensor C C C Blower brush

Main Unit Relay Sensor C C C Blower brush

Cleaning Unit (Paper Dust Paper dust out and

C C C
Container) dry cloth

Registration Guide Plates Blower brush, Dry

C C C
(upper / lower) cloth

By-pass Pick-up Roller C Damp cloth

By-pass Feed Roller C Damp cloth

By-pass Separation Roller C Damp cloth

By-pass Feed Sensor C C C Blower brush

Paper End Sensor (Pro) C C C Blower brush

Paper Exit / Duplex

Heat Pipe Roller C C C Damp cloth

Heat Pipe Roller (drive) C C C Damp cloth

Paper Exit Roller C C C Damp cloth

Inverter Exit Roller C C C Damp cloth

Paper Exit Inverter Roller C C C Damp cloth

Paper Exit Relay Roller C C C Damp cloth

Inverter Entrance Roller C C C Damp cloth

45
 2. Appendices:Preventive Maintenance Tables

1200
Item 300K 600K 900K EM Remarks
K

Paper Exit Relay Sensor C C C Blower brush

Paper Exit Sensor C C C Blower brush

Inverter Entrance Sensor C C C Blower brush

Inverter Exit Sensor C C C Blower brush

Paper Exit Inverter Sensor C C C Blower brush

Discharge Brush (Paper

C C C Clean and Dry cloth
Exit)

Discharge Brush (Inverter) C C C Clean and Dry cloth

Paper Sensor C C C Blower brush

Exit Transfer Roller Guide

Plates (Top / Center / C C C Clean and Dry cloth
Left)

Duplex Inverter Roller C C C Damp cloth

Duplex Transport Roller 1 C C C Damp cloth

Duplex Transport Roller 2 C C C Damp cloth

Duplex Transport Roller 3 C C C Damp cloth

Duplex Transport Roller 4 C C C Damp cloth

Duplex Exit Roller C C C Damp cloth

Duplex Inverter Sensor C C C Blower brush

Duplex Entrance Sensor C C C Blower brush

Duplex Transport Sensor 1 C C C Blower brush

Duplex Transport Sensor 2 C C C Blower brush

Duplex Transport Sensor 3 C C C Blower brush

Duplex Transport Sensor 4 C C C Blower brush

Duplex Exit Sensor C C C Blower brush

46
 Preventive Maintenance

1200
Item 300K 600K 900K EM Remarks
K

Edge Detection Sensor C C C Blower brush

Horizontal Transport
Guide Plates (upper / C C C Clean and Dry cloth
lower)

Purge Section Lower

C C C Clean and Dry cloth
Guide Board

47
 MEMO

48 EN